L  I  E)  I^AFLY 
OF  THE 
U  N  I  VER.S  ITY 
or  ILLINOIS 


Return  this  book  on  or  before  the 
Latest  Date  stamped  below. 


University  of  Illinois  Library 


APR  27  19^9 

APR  n9?5 

Mi  0  2  \M 

JUL  ^i  m 

AUG  1 5  i<)97 
JUL  1  1  2Q07 


L161  — H41 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2015 


https://archive.org/details/elementaryprinciOOhayn 


ELEMENTART  PEIITCIPLES 


OF 

ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS 


FOR  THE  USE  OF 


PHYSICIANS  AND  STUDENTS. 


WITH  135  ILLUSTKATIONS. 


PREPARED  BY 

C.  M.  HAY^^ES,   M  D. 


FOURTH  EDITION. 


CHICAGO: 
W.    T.  KEENER, 

96  -WASHINGTON  STREET. 

1887.  v. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1884,  by  the 
McINTOSH  GALVANIC  AND  FAKADIC  BATTERY  COMPANY, 
In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Introduction   19-33 


CHAPTER  I. 

Magnetism. —  Law  of  Magnetic  Attraction  and  Repulsion  —  Ani- 

mal  Magnetism  —  Therapeutical  Properties  of  the  Magnet   35-47 


CHAPTER  II. 


Franklinism. —  Insulation  —  Distribution  of  Electricity  —  History 
of  Static  Machines —  Method  by  which  Electricity  is  Generated 


by  the  Improved  Topler  Machine  —  Physiological  and  Thera- 


peutical  effects  of  Franklinic  Electricity  —  Method  of  Electri- 
fying a  Patient,  Illustrated   48-85 

CHAPTER  III. 

Galvanism. — Voltaic  Pile — Simple  and  Compound  Galvanic  Cells — 
Polarization — Local  Action — Potential  —  Electro-Motive  Force 

—  Materials  of  which  Elements  are  Composed,  and  Relative 
Value  of  A^arious  Combinations  —  Arrangement  of  Cells  for 
Giving  a  Current  of  Great  Quantity — Arrangement  for  Potential 

—  Resistance  —  Ohm's  Law  —  Cells,  Grenet,  Daniells,  Gravity, 
etc. —  Method  of  Detecting  the  Presence  of  a  Galvanic  Current 
and  its  Direction  —  Galvanic  Belt  —  Galvanic  Supporter  —  Phy- 
siological Effect  of  a  Galvanic  Current  —  Details  of  Treatment 

—  Central  Galvanization  Illustrated   86-145 


253978 


iv 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

Electrolysis  — Laws  of  Electrolysis  —  Needles  for  Electrolysis — 
Effect  of  Electrolysis  on  Animal  Tissue  —  Batteries  for  Elec- 


trolysis —  Diseases  in  which  Electrolysis  is  Employed,  and  its 

Exact  Value   146-160 

CHAPTER  V. 

Galvano-Cautery.  — Advantages  of  Gal vano-Cautery— Cases  to 
which  it  is  Applicable  —  Instruments  for  —  History  of  Galvano- 
Cautery    161-169 


CHAPTER  VI. 

Faradism. —  Electro-Magnet  —  Induced  Currents  —  Helix  —  Rheo- 
tome  —  Number  of  Currents  a  Faradic  Battery  should  furnish 
—  Physicians'  Faradic  Batteries — Method  of  Employing  Fara- 
dic Currents  —  Primary  and  Secondary  Currents  Compared  — 
Local  Faradization  —  General  Faradization  —  Method  of  Em- 
ploying, Illustrated   170-192 

CHAPTER  VII. 

The  McIntosh  Combined  Galvanic  and  Faradic  Batteries. — 
Method  of  Using  Them  —  Suggestions  in  Regard  to  the  Selec- 
tion of  a  Battery  —  To  Discover  the  Cause  when  a  Battery 
Fails  to  Work  —  Axioms  for  the  Employment  of  Dynamic  Elec- 


tricity—  Electrodes  and  the  Care  of  Them   193-219 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

Electro-Thermal  Baths  —  Kinds  and  Temperature  at  which  They 
Should  be  Given  —  Apparatus  and  Bath  Tub  —  Vapor  and  Hot 
Air  Baths  —  Cabinet  Bath  —  Electric  Chair   220-234 


CONTENTS. 


V 


CHAPTER  IX. 

PAGE 

Electro-Physiology. —  Comparison  df  Franklinism,  Galvanism  and 
Faradism  —  Indications  for  Selection  of  Current  —  Motor  Points 
of  Muscles  Illustrated  —  Influence  of  Electricity  on  the  Func- 
tions of  the  Nervous  System  —  The  Great  Sympathetic  and 
Method  of  Electrizing  the  Various  Organs  through  it,  Illustrated 

—  The  Landmarks  for  Locating  the  Organs  of  the  Body   235-257 

CHAPTER  X. 

Electro-Diagnosis. — To  Distinguish  between  Real  and  Apparent 
Death  —  To  Detect  Malingerers  —  To  Distinguish  between  Dif- 
ferent Forms  of  Paralysis  —  To  Detect  the  Presence  and  Loca- 
tion of  a  Bullet  or  other  Metal  in  a  Wound  —  Electrical  Reac- 
tions in  Health   258-274 

• 

CHAPTER  XI. 

Electro-Therapeutics. —  Diseases  of  the  Brain,  Eyes,  Ears,  Nose, 
Throat,  Heart,  Lungs,  Digestive,  Urinary  and  Sexual  Organs 

—  Miscellaneous  Diseases  —  Dangers  of  Electricity   275-417 


LIST  OF  AUTHORS  CONSULTED. 


1.  Allison  Dictionary  of  Electricity. 

2.  Althaus  A  Treatise  on  Medical  Electricity. 

3.  Angell  Electricity  and  Magnetism. 

4.  Arthius  Static  Electricity. 

5.  Bartholow  Medical  Electricity. 

6.  Beard  and  Rockwell  Medical  and  Surgical  Electricity. 

7.  Benedikt  Electro-Therapie. 

8.  Bennett  Electro-Diagnosis  in  Nervous  Diseases. 

9.  Butler   Electro-Therapeutics. 

10.  Channing  Medical  Electricity. 

11.  De  La  Rive  A  Treatise  on  Electricity. 

12.  De  Watteville  A  Practical  Introduction  to  Medical  Elec- 

tricity. 

13.  Duchenne  De  TElectrization  localise  Med. 

14.  Erb  Electro-Therapeutics. 

15.  Ferguson  Electricity. 

16.  Gordon  Electricity  and  Magnetism. 

17.  Hamilton  Clinical  Electro-Therapeutics. 

18.  Harris  Treatise  on  Galvanism. 

19.  Hayes  Therapeutic  Use  of  Faradic  and  Galvanic 

Currents  in  the  Electro-Thermal  Bath. 

20.  HospiTALiER  &  Maier  Modcm  Applications  of  Electricity. 

21.  Jenkin  Electricity  and  Magnetism. 

22.  Lardner.    Electricity,  Magnetism  and  Meteorology. 

23.  Lincoln  Electro-Therapeutics. 

24.  Maxwell  Electricity  and  Magnetism. 

25.  Meyer  Electricity  in  its  Relations  to  Practical 

Medicine. 

26.  Miller  Electricity  and  Magnetism. 

(5) 


6  LIST  OF  AUTHOES  CONSULTED. 

27.  Morgan  Electro-Physiology  and  Therapeutics. 

28.  Neftel  Galvano-Therapeutics. 

29.  No  AD  Manual  of  Electricity. 

30.  Onimus  et  Legros  Traite  D'Electricite  Med. 

31.  Poore   A  Text-Book  on  Electricity  in  Medicine 

and  Surgery. 

32.  Reynolds  Lectures  on  the  Clinical  Uses  of  Electricity. 

33.  Rockwell  Lectures  on  Electricity. 

34.  Rosenthal  Muscles  and  Nerves. 

35.  Ross  Diseases  of  the  Nervous  System. 

36.  Schweig  The  Electric  Bath  and  its  Medical  Uses. 

37.  Snell  The  Electro-Magnet. 

38.  Sturgeon  Electricity  and  Magnetism. 

39.  TiBBiTTs  A  Hand-Book  of  Medical  and  Surgical 

Electricity. 

40.  Thomson  Electro-Statics  and  Magnetism. 

41.  Thompson  Lessons  in  Electricity  and  Magnetism. 

42.  Tyndall  Lectures  on  Electricity. 

43.  Walker  Magnetism. 

44.  ZiEMssEN  Die  Electricitat  in  der  Med. 


WORKS  OF  REFERENCE. 

Cyclop^di^  American,  Rees,  Tomlinson's  Knight,  etc. 
Encyclopedia  of  Chemistry. 

Encyclopedia,  Edinburgh  Brittanica,  London,  etc. 
Franklin's  Works. 
Philosophical  Transactions. 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


PAGE 

1.  Magnetic  Attraction  and  Repulsion   38 

2.  Magnetic  Lines  of  Force  and  Neutral  Point   39 

3.  Mutual  Action  of  Like  and  Unlike  Poles   39 

4.  Arrangement  of  Molecules  in  a  Non-Magnetic  Bar   41 

5.  Arrangement  of  Molecules  in  a  Magnetic  Bar   41 

6.  Franklinic  Attraction  and  Repulsion   49 

7.  Electroscope   50 

8.  Leyden  Jar   57 

9.  Electric  Machine   61 

10.  Method  of  Applying  Franklinism   76 

11.  Electrodes  Used  in  Franklinism   79 

12.  Method  of  Applying  the  Franklinic  Induced  Current   83 

13.  Voltaic  Pile   87 

14.  Simple  Galvanic  Circle   88 

15.  Compound  Galvanic  Circle   89 

16.  Polarization   91 

17.  Potential   94 

18.  Electro-Motive  Force   96 

19.  Multiple  Arc   98 

20.  Potential  Arrangement   99 

21.  McIntosh  Grenet  Cell   107 

22.  Gravity  Cells   Ill 

23.  Tray  Cell   114 

24.  Voltameter   117 

25.  Galvanometer   118 

26.  Diagram  of  Galvanometer   119 

27.  Binding  Posts   121 

28.  Conducting  Cord  Tips   124 

29.  Connector   125 

1 


2 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


PAGE 


30.  Galvanic  Section   125 

31 .  Twenty-four-Cell  Galvanic  Batteey   127 

32.  Automatic  Eheotome   129 

33.  Pole  Changer     130 

34.  McIntosh  Galvanic  Belt   131 

35.  Section  of  Belt  Cells   131 

36.  McIntosh  Galvanic  Supporter     135 

37.  Central  Galvanization,  No.  1  ,   143 

38.  Central  Galvanization,  No.  2   144 

39.  Current  Branches  between  Near  Electrodes   148 

40.  Current  Branches  between  Distant  Electrodes   148 

41.  Needles  for  Electrolysis   151 

42.  Needle  Conductor   .  154 

43.  Electrolytic  Needle-Case   156 

44.  Twelve-Cell  Galvanic  Battery   157 

45.  Eighteen-Cell  Galvanic  Battery   158 

46.  Electro-Magnet   170 

47.  Eheotome   175 

48.  Helix  ,   176 

49.  Physicians'  Faradic  Battery,  No.  1   179 

50.  Physicians'  Faradic  Battery,  No.  3   181 

51.  Hydro-Rheostat   183 

52.  General  Faradization,  No.  1   190 

53.  General  Faradization,  No.  2   191 

54.  Twelve-Cell  Combined  Battery   194 

55.  Eighteen-Cell  Combined  Battery   195 

56.  Twenty-four-Cell  Combined  Battery   196 

57.  Twenty-four-Cell  Battery  Box   197 

58.  Faradic  Part  of  Combined  Battery    198 

59.  Faradic  Part  Ready  for  Use   199 

60.  Galvanic  Part  Ready  for  Use   201 

61.  To  Replace  Elements   203 

62.  McIntosh  Office  Battery   204 

63.  Diagram  of  Office  Battery   205 

64.  Small  Switch-Board   209 

65.  Standard  Bath  Apparatus,  No.  1    224 

66.  Bath-Tub   227 

67.  Bath  Apparatus,  No.  2   226 

68.  Bath  Apparatus,  No.  3   228 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS.  3 

PAGE 

69.  Cabinet  Bath   231 

70.  Electric  Chair   233 

71.  Diagram  of  Switch-Board  on  Chair     234 

72.  Motor  Points  _     242 

73.  Sympathetic  Nerve   253 

74.  "  Landmarks  "  for  Locating  the  Various  Organs   256 

75.  Universal  Sponge  Electrode   261 

76.  Folding  Foot-Plate   262 

77.  Duchenne's  Points  ■.   263 

78.  Metallic  Discs   264 

79.  Electrode  Cover   265 

80.  Comb  Electrode   266 

81.  Metallic  Points   267 

82.  Spinal  Electrode   268 

83.  Necklet  Electrode   269 

84.  Electric  Bullet  Probe   273 

85.  Electric  Exploring  Needle   274 

86.  Adjustable  Sponge-Holder   278 

87.  Ball  Electrode   279 

88.  Hand  Electrode   280 

89.  Carbon  Electrode   281 

90.  Double-Eye  Electrode   286 

91.  Eye-Cup  Electrode   287 

92.  Eye-Cup  in  Use   288 

93.  Small  Eye-Electrode   289 

94.  Electro-Magnet   294 

95.  Electro-Magnet  in  Use   295 

96.  Rheostat  Ear-Electrode   298 

97.  Rheostat  Ear-Electrode  in  Use   299 

98.  Double  Ear  Electrode    300 

99.  Aural  and  Nasal  Electrode   300 

100.  Insulated  Nasal  Electrode   303 

101.  Tongue  Plate  Electrode   305 

102.  Dental  Electrode   306 

103.  Dental  Electrode  in  Use   307 

104.  Dental  Connector                                           .'   308 

105.  Sponge-Tipped  Laryngeal  Electrode   309 

106.  Internal  Laryngeal  Electrode   310 

107.  Wire  Brush  Electrode   311 


4  LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

PAGE 

108.  External  Laryngeal  Electrode   312 

109.  Tonsil  Electrode  „ . . .  314 

110.  Insulated  Rectal  Electrode    338 

111.  Ball  Rectal  Electrode   339 

112.  New  Style  Rectal  Electrode   341 

113.  Inflexible  Urethral  Electrode   356 

114.  Flexible  Urethral  Electrode   357 

115.  Olives   358 

116.  Double  Elastic  Vesical  Electrode   359 

117.  New  Style  Electrode  for  Stricture   360 

118.  Catheter  Electrode   361 

119.  Sound  Electrode   362 

120.  Method  of  Electrizing  the  Uterus   367 

121.  Vaginal  Electrode   368 

122.  Vaginal  Electrode  Insulated  in  Lateral  Halves   369 

123.  Vaginal  Electrode  Insulated  in  Vertical  Halves   370 

124.  External  Cervical  Electrode   371 

125.  '  External  and  Internal  Cervical  Electrode  372 

126.  Double  Cervical  Electrode   373 

127.  Tinsel  Brush  Electrode   375 

128.  Duchenne's  Points  in  Use  377 

129.  Hair-Brush  Electrode    381 

130.  Method  of  Removing  Hair   382 

131.  Roller  Electrode   392 

132.  Electrode  Case   393 

133.  Disc  Insulated  in  Points  394 

134.  Electrolysis  of  Cancer  410 

135.  Electrolysis  of  N^vus  413 


YOCABULARY. 


ACCTJMULATOR.  An  apparatus  to  accumulate  or  store  electricity.  This  name  is 
applied  both  to  the  Leyden  jar  and  the  storage  battery. 

Action,  LocaL  Chemical  action  that  takes  place  in  battery  cells,  consuming  zinc  with- 
out producing  a  working  current. 

Active  Electricity.  Electricity  in  a  state  to  exert  attractive  and  repulsive  powers  or 
produce  heat,  light,  shocks  or  decomposition.   Free  electricity. 

Agronic  Liine.  Line  of  no  variation.  An  irregular  curved  line  drawn  so  as  to  connect  all 
the  points  on  the  earth's  surface  where  the  needle  points  due  north  and  south. 

Alternate  Ctirrents.  Those  currents  in  which  the  direction  is  changed  every  half  revo- 
lution. They  are  produced  by  revolving  an  armature  before  a  magnet,  or  a  magnet 
before  an  armature,  in  magneto-electric  machines. 

Am'algramation.   Covering  the  surface  of  zinc  with  mercury  to  prevent  waste. 

Ampere.  The  unit  of  current  strength  formerly  called  a  Weber.  It  is  the  current  car- 
ried in  one  second  by  an  electro-motive  force  of  one  volt  through  a  circuit  whose 
resistance  is  one  ohm. 

Anelectrotonos.  The  condition  of  lessened  irritability  which  exists  in  that  portion  of  a 
nerve  nearest  the  positive  pole  after  a  current  of  electricity  has  been  carried  through 
it  for  some  time. 

Animal  Electricity.  Free  electricity  existing  in  the  body.  It  may  exhibit  magnetic, 
static  or  dynamic  properties,  according  to  the  circumstances  attending  its  presence. 

Anions.  Those  atoms  which  collect  about  the  anode  or  positive  pole  when  a  chemical 
compound  is  decomposed  by  electricity. 

Anode.  The  "  way  "  by  which  electricity  enters.  This  name  is  used  alike  for  the  positive 
pole  of  the  battery  and  the  electrode  connected  with  it. 

Antozone.   Oxygen  in  a  positively  polar  condition. 

Appliances,  Electrical.  This  term  is  generally  understood  to  refer  to  various  belts,  scles, 
jackets,  etc.,  inclosing  magnets,  small  cells  or  coils,  to  be  worn  on  the  person  for  various 
complaints. 

Armature  or  Keeper.  Soft  iron  bar  attached  to  the  poles  of  magnets  to  preserve  their 
magnetism. 

Artificial  Magnet.   A  bar  of  metal,  originally  without  magnetic  properties,  to  which 

magnetism  has  been  imparted  by  another  magnet. 
Ascending  Currents.   The  current  applied  by  placing  the  positive  electrode  upon  the 

periphery  of  a  nerve,  and  the  negative  to  the  nerve  center. 
Axial  Line.   See  Magnetic  Axis. 

BASE.  The  part  of  a  battery  upon  which  is  fastened  the  coil  and  binding  posts,  switches, 
etc. 

Battery.  This  name  is  applied  to  (1)  The  apparatus  complete,  for  production  of  elec- 
tricity.  (2)  To  the  cells. 

Binding  Posts.   Clamps  for  connecting  conducting  wires  with  the  electrical  apparatus. 

Bound  Electricity.  Electricity  which  does  not  manifest  its  presence  by  any  of  the 
usual  phenomena.  This  term  is  also  applied  to  electricity  "accumulated"  or  "con- 
densed "  in  the  Leyden  jar. 

Break.   An  opening  in  the  circuit  preventing  the  passage  of  electricity. 

CALLATJD  BATTERY.   Another  name  for  the  Gravity  Battery. 

Capacity.  The  capacity  of  a  condenser  (accumulator)  is  measured  by  the  quantity  of 
electricity  of  unit  potential  which  it  can  contain. 

Carbon.  A  substance  which  collects  in  the  neck  of  retorts  in  gas  manufacture. 

(7) 


8 


VOCABULARY. 


Catalectrotonus.  The  condition  of  increased  irritability  in  that  portion  of  a  nerve  nearest 
the  negative  pole  resulting  from  carrying  a  current  of  electricity  through  it  for  some 
time. 

Cathode.   The  "  way "  by  which  electricity  leaves.   This  name  is  given  both  to  the 

negative  pole  of  the  battery  and  the  electrode  attached  to  it. 
Cations.   Those  products  of  chemical  decomposition  which  appear  at  the  negative  pole 

are  called  cations. 
Cautery.   See  Galvano- Cautery. 

Cell.   The  jar,  cup,  or  other  container,  which  holds  the  elements  and  agent  which  pro-  . 
duces  a  difference  of  potential  between  them. 

Centimetre.   The  unit  of  length.   For  its  value  see  units. 

C .  G.  S.  The  centimetre-gramme-second  system  of  measurements.   See  Units. 

Central  Galvanization.  The  method  of  applying  a  galvanic  current  to  the  nerve  cen- 
tres. Fully  described  in  text. 

Centrifugal  Current.   The  descending  current. 

Centripetal  Current.   The  ascending  current. 

Charg-e  of  Electricity.    The  quantity  of  electricity  in  a  body. 

Circle,  Galvanic.  This  includes  fluid,  elements,  and  connections  between  the  elements 
outside  the  fluid. 

Circuit.  The  path  traversed  by  the  current.  It  includes  the  elements,  battery  fluid, 
conducting  cords,  electrodes,  and  any  intervening  substance  or  body. 

Circuit  Breaker.  An  apparatus  for  interrupting  the  circuit,  also  called  a  rheotome  or 
current  breaker. 

Clamps.  Devices  for  completing  the  connection  between  electrodes  and  conducting 
cords. 

Closed  Circuit.   When  the  elements  are  united  outside  the  fluid,  either  by  direct  contact 

or  through  a  good  conductor. 
Closing-  Contractions.    Muscular  contractions  produced  at  the  instant  the  circuit  is 

closed. 

Coil  Induction.   Rolls  of  wire  in  which  a  current  is  induced  by  the  alternate  opening 

and  closing  of  a  circuit.   The  coil  is  also  called  the  helix. 
Collecting  Plate.   The  electro-negative  element  of  the  pair  from  which  the  positive 

current  comes.   Called  the  collecting  plate  because  the  hydrogen  and  other  products  of 

decomposition  collect  about  it. 
Commutator.   A  pole  changer  or  device  for  changing  the  direction  of  the  current. 
Compound  Magnet.   Several  single  magnets  united,  with  similar  poles  adjacent. 
Condenser.   An  apparatus  for  accumulating  or  storing  a  large  amount  of  electricity  on  a 

small  surface.  A  Leyden  jar  is  an  example.  See  Micro-Farad. 
Conductors.   All  materials  which  readily  permit  electricity  to  pass  over  them.  This 

term  is  also  applied  to  the  electrodes,  and  cords  by  which  they  are  joined  to  battery. 
Conjunctive  "Wire  or  Arch.   The  metal  wire  joining  the  two  elements  of  a  galvanic 

pair,  outside  the  fluid. 

Connections.   The  wires,  metallic  cords,  binding  posts,  and  all  metals  used  to  complete 

the  circuit  are  included  under  this  term. 
Constant  Battery.   A  galvanic  battery  with  two  fluid  or  gravity  cells. 
Constant  Current.   A  galvanic  current  from  a  Constant  Battery. 
Contact  Breaker.   See  Circuit  Breaker. 
Continued  Current.   The  uninterrupted  galvanic  current. 

Continuous  Electrization.  The  protracted  applications  made  by  belts,  chains,  etc., 
worn  on  the  body. 

Convection.   The  discharge  of  electricity  attended  by  alternate  attraction  and  repulsion 

of  particles  of  air,  and  the  materials  floating  in  it. 
Core.   A  bundle  of  soft  iron  wires  used  as  a  magnet  in  the  center  of  the  coil. 
Coulomb.    Tlie  unit  of  quantity  formerly  called  the  Weber. 

Current  Breaker.  A  device  for  alternately  opening  and  closing  the  circuit.  A 
rheotome. 

Current,  Electric.   The  transfer  of  electrical  energy  along  a  conductor.   It  is  commonly 

spoken  of  as  flowing  from  the  positive  to  the  negative  points  in  the  circuit. 
Current  Reverser.   A  pole  changer. 

\ 


VOCABULARY. 


9 


Current  Selector.  This  name  is  applied  to  two  separate  devices  for  altering  the  strength 
of  current,  (o)  Galvanic  Current  Selector  brings  any  number  of  cells  into  circuit.  (6) 
Faradic  Current  Selector  brings  the  primary  or  secondary  current  into  circuit. 

Cylinder  Machine.   A  form  of  static  machine. 

D  ANIELLS  CELL.  Invented  by  Prof.  Daniells,  of  London.  It  consists  of  a  porous  cup 
containing  dilute  sulphuric  acid  immersed  in  a  jar  containing  a  solution  of  sulphate  of 
copper.   The  elements  are  copper  and  zinc. 

Declination.   The  dip  of  the  needle.  The  angle  it  makes  with  a  horizontal  plane. 

Deflection.  The  turning  aside  of  the  marked  end  of  needle  from  O  or  N  of  the  scale  over 
which  it  is  suspended  when  the  scale  is  so  arranged  that  O  or  N  points  due  north. 

Demagnetize.   To  take  away  magnetic  properties. 

Density.  The  amount  of  electricitj^  accumulated  on  a  unit  of  surface  is  called  "  density." 
The  term  is  also  applied  to  a  large  quantity  passing  over  a  small  conductor.  Sometimes 
erroneously  used  as  equivalent  to  tension  or  intensity. 

Derivation  "Wire.  If  two  points  in  a  closed  circuit  be  connected  by  an  additional  con- 
ductor, this  conductor  is  called  a  derivation  wire. 

Derived  Current.  That  portion  of  the  current  drawn  off,  or  "  derived,"  by  a  derivation 
wire.   Its  potential  is  much  less  than  the  original  or  primitive  current. 

Descending:  Ctirrent.  The  negative  electrode  upon  the  periphery,  and  the  positive  on 
the  nerve  center,  gives  a  descending  current. 

Diamagnetic  Bodies.   Those  which  are  repelled  by  a  magnet. 

Dielectric.   Insulators  across  which  electric  action  takes  place  are  called  dielectrics.  The 

glass  of  the  Ley  den  jar  across  which  electricity  is  propagated  from  the  inner  to  the 

outer  coating  is  a  dielectric. 
Difference  of  Potential.   When  electricity  moves  or  tends  to  move  from  one  point  to 

another,  there  is  said  to  be  a  difference  of  potential  between  them. 
Diffusion  of  Current.   The  power  of  a  galvanic  current  to  extend  its  influence  in  all 

directions,  that  power  never  being  limited  to  the  two  electrodes. 
Dip.    See  Inclination. 

Dipping-  Needle.   A  magnetic  needle.   The  compass  needle. 

Direct  Current.   This  term  is  used  in  two  senses.  (1)  The  descending  current.   (2)  The 

galvanic  current. 
Discharg-e.   A  sudden  equalization  of  potentials. 

Dischargrer.  An  instrument  through  which  the  difference  of  potential  between  two 
surfaces  is  equalized.  This  name  is  also  given  to  the  instrument  which  directs  the 
charge  from  a  condenser  through  an  object. 

Disruptive  Discharg-e.  A  restoration  of  the  equilibrium  of  potentials  accompanied  by 
light  and  sound. 

Downward  Current.   The  term  applied  to  the  electric  current  from  the  center  to  the 

perix>hery.   See  Descending  Current. 
Dynamic  Electricity.   Electricity  in  motion,  i.  e.  propagated  as  a  current. 
Dynamo-Electric  Machine.   Also  called  magneto-electric,  are  machines  in  which  a 

powerful  electric  current  is  produced  by  revolving  coils  of  wire  between  the  poles  of  a 

horseshoe  magnet. 

Dyne.  The  unit  of  force  — i.  e.  the  force  which,  if  it  acted  for  one  second  on  a  mass  of 
one  gramme,  would,  if  the  mass  was  previously  at  rest,  give  it  a  velocity  of  one  centi- 
metre per  second  ;  or,  if  it  was  previously  in  motion  in  the  direction  of  the  force,  would 
in  that  time  alter  its  velocity  by  that  amount. 

EBONITE.   Black  rubber  rendered  hard  by  vulcanizing ;  also  known  as  vulcanite. 

Electric.   Any  substance,  such  as  glass,  amber,  etc.,  in  which  electricity  can  be  excited. 

Electrical  Machine.   See  Machine. 

Electric  Aixra.   A  current  of  electrified  air,  also  called  "  Electric  Wind." 

Electric  Bath.  This  term  is  applied  to  two  methods  of  electrization.  1.  Allowing  an  elec 
trie  charge  to  be  slowly  drawn  off  or  dissipated  from  an  insulated  patient  by  the  sur- 
rounding air.  2.  Electrizing  a  patient  while  In  a  water,  vapor  or  hot-air  bath. 

Electric  Brush.  A  wire  brush  used  as  an  electrode.  It  is  connected  with  one  pole  of 
the  battery. 

Electric  Disks.   See  Electrizers. 


10 


VOCABULARY. 


Electric  Endosmosis.  When  a  porous  diaphragm  is  placed  in  a  liquid  traversed  by  a 
continuous  current,  the  liquid  will  pass  through  tbe  diaphragm  in  the  direction  of  the 
positive  current.   This  process  is  electric  endosmosis. 

Electric  Fish.  Certain  fishes  that  give  electrical  shocks  when  touched.  The  best  known 
are  the  Torpedo  or  Electric  Ray  of  the  Mediterranean,  the  Gymnotus  or  electric  eel  found 
in  certain  ponds  in  Surinam,  and  the  Malapterurus  or  electric  shad  of  the  Nile. 

Electric  Elmd.  This  name  was  formerly  given  to  electricity,  in  accordance  with  the 
theory  that  it  is  a  subtle  and  imponderable  fluid  which  permeates  all  bodies. 

Electric  Force.   The  power  of  electricity  to  move  matter. 

Electric  Hand.   The  hand  of  the  operator  used  as  an  electrode. 

Electrician.  One  versed  in  the  science  of  electricity  in  its  relation  to  the  arts.  A  term  that 

is  often  incorrectly  used  instead  of  electro-thera})eutist. 
Electricity.   A  mode  of  motion  of  the  atoms  of  matter. 

Electric  Machine.   This  term  is  usually  applied  to  the  apparatus  for  producing  static 

electricity.   See  Machine. 
Electric  Moxa.    A  burn  made  by  the  galvanic  current  on  the  skin,  as  a  counter-irritant. 
Electric  Potential.   See  Potential. 
Electric  Residue.   See  Residual  Charge. 

Electric  Tension.  Free  electricity  struggles  to  escape  from  the  surface  upon  which  it  is 
accumulated,  and  this  effort  is  termed  electric  tension  ;  it  may  be  considered  a  kind 
of  pressure  or  strain  acting  from  the  center  of  a  body  outward. 

Electrify.  To  communicate  electricity  to  a  body  not  previously  exhibiting  its  presence. 
To  charge  with  electricity. 

Electrine.   Belonging  to  amber. 

Electrization.   The  act  of  applying  electricity. 

Electrizers.  Discs  of  different  metals,  as  copper  and  zinc  or  silver  and  zinc,  which  are 
sometimes  applied  to  the  surface  of  the  body  and  connected  with  copper  Avire ;  the  per- 
spiration excites  a  feeble  galvanic  current  that  may  be  kept  up  for  an  indefinite  time. 

Electro-Biology.  Electrical  currents  developed  in  living  animal  tissues,  by  friction, 
chemical  decomposition,  etc.  This  term  is  also  applied  to  the  phenomena  supposed  to 
be  developed  by  mesmerism. 

Electro-Bioscopy.   Testing  the  muscles  by  electricity  to  see  if  life  is  extinct. 

Electro-Cautery.   See  Galvano-Cautery. 

Electro-Chemical  Bath.   The  introduction  and  withdrawal  of  metals  from  the  living 

body  by  means  of  a  galvanic  current  applied  through  a  bath. 
Electro-Chemistry.   See  Electrolysis. 

Electrodes.  The  name  originally  given  to  the  points  at  which  electricity  enters  and 
leaves  a  substance.  The  name  is  now  generally  given  to  the  instruments  fastened  to 
the  conducting  cords  that  are  used  in  applying  electricity  to  the  human  body. 

Electro-Diagnosis.  The  discrimination  of  disease  by  means  of  electricity.  Electro- 
Pathology. 

Electro-Dynamics.   The  phenomena  of  electricity  in  motion. 
Electro-lithotrity.   The  disintegration  of  calculi  in  the  bladder  by  electricity. 
Electrologist.   One  who  makes  a  specialty  of  electro-therapeutics. 
Electrolysis.   Separation  of  a  chemical  substance  into  its  elements,  by  electricity. 
Electrolyte.   The  body  acted  upon  by  electrolysis. 

Electrolytic.   Relating  to  chemical  decomposition  produced  by  electricity. 

Electro-magnet.  A  mass  of  soft  iron  surrounded  by  a  coil  of  wire,  which  is  rendered 
temporarily  magnetic  by  passing  a  current  of  electricity  through  the  coil. 

Electro-magnetism.  1.  Magnetism  developed  by  electricity.  2.  A  current  from  a  mag- 
neto-electric machine. 

Electrometer.   Instrument  for  measuring  the  strength  of  the  attractions  and  repulsions 

between  electrified  bodies.   Also  see  Electroscope. 
Electro-Motive  Force.   The  force  which  tends  to  move  electricity  from  one  point  to 

another. 
Electron.  Amber. 

Electro-Negative  Bath.   Electrifying  a  patient  from  negative  jar  of  a  static  machine. 
Electro-Otiatria.   Electricity  applied  to  treatment  of  diseases  of  the  ear.  It  also  includes 
the  electro-physiology  of  the  ear. 


YOCABULAKY. 


11 


Electro-Patholog-y.   See  Electro-diagnosis. 

Electroph.orus.  This  consists  of  (a)  a  lower  disc  or  generating  plate  of  resin  or  hard', 
rubber;  (b)  an  upper  disc  or  collecting-plate  of  metal  two  inches  less  in  diameter  than 
the  lower  plate.  Its  use  is  to  generate  small  quantities  of  static  electricity. 

Electro-Physiolog-y.  The  effect  produced  on  the  healthy  tissues  of  the  living  body 
by  electricity. 

Electro-Positive  Bath.  Electrifying  a  patient  from  the  positive  jar  of  the  static 
machine. 

Electro-Puncture.  The  application  of  any  form  of  electricity  by  means  of  needles  thrust 
into  the  tissues. 

Electroscope.   Apparatus  for  detecting  the  presence  of  static  electricity,  and  determining. 

whether  it  is  positive  or  negative.   Also  see  Electrometer. 
Electro-Statics.   That  science  which  treats  of  static  or  franklinic  electricity. 
Electrostixis.  Electro-puncture. 

Electro -Surg-ery.  The  use  of  any  form  of  electricity  in  surgical  diseases.  Electrolysis 
and  galvano-cautery  are  the  principal  forms  in  which  it  is  employed. 

Electro-Therapeutics— Electro-Therapy.   Treatment  of  disease  Ijy  electricity. 

Electro-Therapeutist.  One  who  is  versed  in  the  use  of  electricity  in  disease  ;  incorrectly 
called  an  electrician. 

Electro-Tonic.   The  name  Faraday  gave  to  the  changing  state  of  the  conducting  wires 

while  the  current  is  forming  or  ceasing. 
Electrotonos.   The  peculiar  condition  of  a  motor-nerve  when  a  continuous  galvanic 

current  is  passed  along  it. 
Electrum.    Amber.   This  name  is  also  given  to  an  alloy  of  gold  and  silver. 
Elements.   The  metals,  or  carbon  and  metals,  immersed  in  battery  fluid  to  generate  a 

current  of  electricity.  ^ 
Endosmose.   See  Electric  Endosmosis. 
Equator.   See  Magnetic  Equator. 

Erg-.  The  unit  of  work ;  i.  e.,  it  is  equal  to  the  work  required  to  move  a  body  through  one 
centimetre  against  a  force  of  one  dyne. 

Essential  Resistance.   The  resistance  Avithin  a  battery  cell  (internal  resistance.) 

External  Resistance.  Resistance  in  the  circuit  outside  the  cell  (non-essential  resist- 
ance). 

Extra  Ciirrent.  This  name  refers  to  («)  the  appreciable  current  in  the  primary  coil 
which  is  due  entirely  to  induction,  and  is  partly  galvanic  and  partly  magnetic.  (6)  It 
is  also  given  to  currents  taken  from  different  layers  of  the  secondary  coil,  (c)  The 
transient  currents  in  a  coil,  produced  by  the  induction  of  each  portion  of  the  current 
on  the  neighboring  wires,  on  which  it  acts  as  if  they  were  portions  of  another  circuit. 

Extra  Polar.  Electricity  is  believed  to  be  propagated  within  the  tissues  in  every  direc- 
tion from  the  electrodes.  Its  effect  upon  those  not  between  tne  two  poles  is  called 
extra-polar. 

FARAD.  A  million  micro-farads.  1.  The  capacity  of  a  condenser  which  holds  one  cou- 
lomb at  a  potential  of  one  volt.  2.  A  coulomb  in  a  farad  condenser  is  capable  of 
causing  a  difference  of  potential  between  the  poles  of  a  circuit  that  it  will  require  an 
electro-motive  force  of  one  voli  to  overcome. 

Faradic  Current.  The  current  generated  in  a  coil  of  wire  by  induction.  Also  called 
induced,  interrupted  or  extra  current. 

Faradic  Induction.  A  current  of  electricity  passing  through  a  wire  excites  a  wave  of 
electricity  in  a  second  wire  placed  near  and  parallel  with  it  at  the  instant  of  opening 
and  closing  the  circuit.   This  is  faradic  induction. 

Faradism.   The  application  of  induction  currents  to  the  treatment  of  disease. 

Faradization.   Application  of  the  faradic  current. 

Ferro -Magnetic.   Iron  and  similar  bodies  that  are  attracted  by  iron.   Also  called  para- 
magnetic bodies. 
Field,  Magrnetic.   See  Magnetic  Field. 

Franklinism.  Static  electricity  employed  as  a  remedial  agent.  Named  from  Benjamin 
Franklin. 

Frictional  Electricity.  Electricity  set  free  by  friction.  Static  or  Franklinic  elec- 
tricity. 


12 


VOCABULAKY. 


Pree  Electricity.  Unbound  electricity.  That  state  in  which  it  exhibits  attraction  and 
repulsion. 

Pustig-ation,  Electric.   The  application  of  electricity  through  a  metallic  brush. 
GALVANIC  APPAErATTJS.   Apparatus  ior  generating  and  furnishing  the  galvanic 
current. 

Galvanic  Battery.   See  Batteries. 

Galvanic  Belt.  An  appliance  for  the  continuous  application  of  galvanism.  It  consists 
of  a  series  of  small  cells  containing  elements  which  are  fastened  to  a  belt  to  be  worn 
around  the  body. 

Galvanic  Chain.   A  series  of  links  usually  composed  alternately  of  zinc  and  copper,  to 

be  worn  around  the  body.  The  current  is  generated  by  dipping  them  in  vinegar  or 

water,  or  simply  by  the  moisture  supplied  by  the  perspiration. 
Galvanic  Circle.   This  usually  refers  to  a  pair  of  elements  immersed  in  battery  fluid 

and  connected  outside  the  fluid.   A  single  circle  is  one  galvanic  cell  in  action.  A 

compovind  circle  is  two  or  more  connected  together. 
Galvanic  Current.   The  current  direct  from  the  battery  cells.  It  is  frequently  called 

a  voltaic  current.  When  carried  through  a  coil  of  wire  it  becomes  a  faradic  current. 
Galvanic  Disks.   Disks  of  two  dissimilar  metals  arranged  alternately  on  a  band,  jacket, 

sole,  etc.,  between  which  a  communication  is  established  when  moistened  and  placed 

on  the  skin,  and  a  feeble  galvanic  current  is  set  up. 
Galvanic  Elements.   Two  dissimilar  metals,  or  two  pieces  of  the  same  metal,  which  are 

of  unequal  hardness,  that  are  used  in  generating  a  current  of  electricity. 
Galvanic  Pair.   See  Galvanic  Elements. 

Galvanic  Pessary.  An  instrument  for  retaining  the  uterus  in  position  and  at  the 
same  time  conducting  to  it  a  galvanic  current.  It  may  be  composed  of  alternate  pieces 
of  two  dissin^lar  metals  which  generate  the  current  when  moistened  with  the  secre- 
tions of  the  surface  to  which  the  instrument  is  applied,  or  it  may  be  connected  with  a 
belt  or  pocket  battery  which  generates  the  current. 

Galvanic  Poultice.  Minute  pieces  of  zinc  and  copper  wrapped  in  cotton  wool,  each 
pair  separated  by  flannel,  all  inclosed  in  a  bag,  one  side  of  which  is  made  of  rubber 
cloth,  the  other  of  cotton.  The  cotton  surface  is  applied  next  the  skin,  and  the  ac- 
cumulated perspiration  excites  galvanic  action. 

Galvanism.  The  science  which  treats  of  that  form  of  electricity  which  is  generated  by 
chemical  action.  • 

Galvanization.   The  medical  application  of  the  galvanic  current. 

Galvanization  Liocalized.   An  application  of  the  galvanic  current  limited  to  a  particu- 
lar muscle,  nerve  or  organ. 
Galvanize.   To  affect  by  the  galvanic  current. 

Galvano-Cautery.  Also  written  Galvano-Causty.  Burning  or  cauterization  of  the  tis- 
sues by  an  electric  current  sent  through  a  wire  or  plate  of  great  resistance  (usually 
platinum). 

Galvano-Cauterization.   To  burn  with  a  galvanic  current. 

Galvano-Contractility.  Usually  refers  to  muscular  contraction  produced  by  the  gal- 
vanic current. 

Calvano-Faradization.  Name  given  by  Beard  and  Rockwell  to  the  simiiltaneous  appli- 
cation of  the  galvanic  and  faradic  current. 

Galvanometer.  An  instrument  for  measuring  the  total  quantity  of  electricity  which 
passes  through  it  in  one  second. 

Galvano-Plasty.  (a)  The  art  of  separating  chemical  elements  from  their  compounds  by 
electricity,   (b)  The  art  of  depositing  metals  by  electricity,  as  in  electrotyping. 

Galvano-Puncture.   See  Electro- Puncture. 

Galvanoscope.  An  instrument  for  detecting  the  direction  and  presence  of  a  galvanic 
current. 

Galvano-Surg-ery.   The  application  of  the  galvanic  current  to  surgery.  It  includes  (a) 

Electrolysis,  {b)  Galvano-Cautery. 
Galvano-Therapeutics.   The  application  of  the  galvanic  current  to  the  treatment  of 

disease. 

O'eneral  Electrization.  The  application  of  electricity  to  all  parts  of  the  surface  of  the 
body  during  a  treatment. 


VOCABULARY. 


13 


General  Faradization.   General  Electrization  with  the  faradic  current. 
General  Galvanization.   General  Electrization  with  the  galvanic  current. 
Gramme.   Theoretically,  this  is  the  mass  of  one  cubic  centimetre  of  distilled  water  at  4°  C. 
Gravity  Batteries.   Galvanic  cells  in  which  the  elements  are  placed  horizontally,  and 

the  two  fluids  are  kept  separate  by  difference  in  density. 
HELIX.   See  Coil. 

Horseshoe  Mag-nets.   Magnets  in  the  form  of  the  letter  U. 

Horticulture,  Electrical.  The  process  of  exposing  fruit,  flowers,  etc.,  to  electric  light 
during  the  night  and  the  sun  during  the  day.  Dr.  Siemens  having  tested  this  during 
late  years,  announced  that  the  growth  is  twice  as  rapid  as  under  other  conditions. 

Hydro-Electrization.  A  term  coined  by  Beard  and  Rockwell  to  indicate  that  electricity 
is  applied  by  means  of  water  as  an  electrode. 

Hydrostat.  A  device  for  preventing  the  spilling  of  fluid  out  of  battery  cells.  Designed 
to  render  a  battery  portable  without  the  necessity  of  removing  the  fluid  from  the  cells. 

IONS.   Elements  into  which  a  substance  is  divided  by  electrolysis. 

Inclination  or  Dip.  The  angle  which  a  freely  suspended  magnetic  needle,  when 
parallel  with  the  magnetic  meridian,  makes  with  the  horizon. 

Induced  Charg-e.  When  a  charged  body  is  brought  near  another,  but  not  in  contact 
with  it,  the  latter  becomes  electrified  or  posesses  an  induced  charge. 

Induced  Currents.   See  Faradic  Current. 

Inducing"  Current.   See  Primary  Current. 

Induction.  The  process  of  exciting  electricity  In  any  object  by  bringing  it  near  to  but 
not  in  contact  with  a  circuit  through  which  a  current  of  electricity  is  passing,  or  an 
electrified  body. 

Induction  Coil.   This  refers  to  the  coarse  wire  coil  through  which  the  primary  current 

passes.   It  is  also  used  to  include  the  entire  coil  and  its  core  which  are  necessary  to  the 

production  of  a  faradic  current. 
Initial  Charg-e.   A  charge  excited  on  glass  or  rubber  and  conveyed  to  the  plates  of  a 

static  machine  by  contact. 
Insulators.   Substances  such  as  glass,  rubber,  shellac,  etc.,  which  hinder  the  passage  of 

electricity  over  or  through  them. 
Insulation.   Supporting  or  surrounding  a  body  by  an  insulator. 

Insulating-  Stool  or  Platform.   A  stool  or  platform  which  has  glass  or  rubber  legs. 

Any  stool,  platform,  or  chair,  may  be  insulated  by  glass  tumblers  or  saltcellars. 
Intensity.   The  energj'  or  effectiveness  with  which  electricity  acts,  as  estimated  by  the 

results  produced. 

Intensity,  Magnetic.  The  amount  of  force  with  which  a  magnetic  needle  is  brought 
back  to  its  natural  position  when  moved  out  of  it.  The  same  term  is  applied  to  the 
po^ver  with  which  a  magnet  retains  its  hold  upon  attracted  objects. 

Interrupted  Current.   A  current  from  a  circuit  that  is  alternately  opened  and  closed. 

Inverse  Current.   Ascending  or  centripetal  current. 

JARS,    ^ee  Leyden  Jar. 

KEEPER.    See  Armature. 

LABILE  CURRENT.  Moving  or  gliding  one  or  both  electrodes  over  the  surface  treated. 

Latent  Electricity.  Passive,  bound,  or  natural  electricity.  That  form  of  electricity 
which  does  not  manifest  any  of  the  properties  peculiar  to  it. 

Leyden  Jar.  The  ordinary  form  consists  of  (a)  a  glass  jar  or  bottle.  (6)  An  outside  and 
inside  coating  of  metal  reaching  within  two  to  four  inches  of  the  top.  (c)  An  insulating 
cap  fitting  into  the  neck  of  the  jar  which  supports  a  brass  rod  terminating  above  in  » 
knob,  and  below  in  a  strip  of  foil  or  chain,  that  lies  upon  the  inner  metallic  coating  on 
the  bottom  of  the  jar. 

Local  Action.  Decomposition  of  zinc  in  the  battery  fluid  when  the  elements  are  not 
connected. 

Local  Electrization.   The  application  of  electricity  to  a  single  organ,  muscle,  or  nerve, 

with  a  stationary  electrode. 
Lodestone.   An  ore  found  in  iron-mines  which  possesses  the  property  of  attracting  iron 

or  steel,  and  when  freely  suspended,  the  direction  of  the  magnetic  meridian. 
Line  of  Force  at  any  Point.   The  direction  in  which  a  charged  body  placed  at  that 

point  tends  to  move. 


14 


VOCABULAEY. 


Lines  of  Magnetic  Force.  The  curved  lines  through  which  the  force  emanating  from 
a  magnet  acts.  They  may  be  illustrated  by  holding  the  poles  of  a  magnet  against  a 
sheet  of  stiff  paper  upon  which  iron  filings  are  sprinkled. 

Lines  of  Flow.  The  direction  of  a  current  passing  through  a  conductor. have  been 
demonstrated  to  be  in  curves  similar  to  the  lines  of  magnetic  force. 

MACHINE,  ELECTRIC.  According  to  common  usage  this  term  refers  to  the  appa- 
ratus for  generating  static  or  franklinic  electricity,  and  also  the  magneto-electric 
or  dynamo-electric  apparatus.  Strictly  speaking,  this  term  applies  to  all  batteries  or 
devices  for  generating  electricity. 

Magrnet.  l.  The  lodestone.  2.  A  bar  of  steel  or  iron  to  which  the  peculiar  properties  of 
the  lodestone  have  been  imparted. 

Magnetic  Axis.    The  line  joining  the  poles  of  a  magnet. 

Magnetic  Equator.  The  line  of  no  dip.  An  imaginary  curved  line  connecting  those 
points  on  the  earth's  surface  where  the  dipping  needle  remains  parallel  with  the 
horizon. 

Magnetic  Field.  1.  Any  region  Avhere  magnetic  force  acts.  2.  Within  the  influence  of  a 
magnet. 

Magnetic  Induction.   The  influence  of  magnets  through  space  either  to  produce  other 

magnets,  or  to  induce  electric  currents  in  metallic  circuits. 
Magnetic  Meridian.   A  great  circle  parallel  with  the  direction  of  the  magnetic  needle, 

and  passing  through  its  poles. 
Magnetic  Poles.   Points  in  the  northern  and  southern  hemispheres  at  which  the  mag- 
netic needle  stands  exactly  vertical. 
Magnetic  Potential.   The  potential  of  a  magnetic  pole  is  of  precisely  the  same  nature 

as  that  due  to  an  electrified  body  at  that  place.   See  Potential. 
Magnetic  Substances.    Iron,  nickel,  cobalt  and  all  other  substances  to  which  the 

properties  of  the  lodestone  may  be  imparted. 
Magnetism.   That  force  which  causes  the  lodestone  and  other  magnetic  bodies  to 

exhibit  the  phenomena  of  attraction,  repulsion,  polarity,  etc. 
Magnetize.   To  communicate  magnetic  properties  to  substances  that  do  not  naturally 

exhibit  them. 

Magneto-Electricity.   Electricity  generated  or  set  free  by  the  action  of  a  magnet. 
Magneto-Electric  Machine.   See  Dynamo- Electric  Machine. 

Ifficro-Farad.  Practical  unit  of  capacity.  A  condenser  of  one  micro-farad  capacity 
would  contain  about  300  circular  sheets  of  tinfoil  separated  by  mica  plates,  and  would 
be  contained  in  a  box  ?>%  inches  deep  and      inches  in  diameter. 

Molecule.   The  minute  particles  of  which  matter  is  supposed  to  be  composed. 

Motor-Points.  The  points  on  the  surface  of  the  body  where  the  various  branches  of  the 
motor  nerves  supplying  the  muscles  may  be  affected  by  electricity. 

Multiplier.  A  coil  of  wire  through  which  a  galvanic  current  is  passed  to  increase  or 
multiply  its  effect  upon  a  magnetic  needle  placed  above  it. 

Mutual  Action  of  Two  Currents.  Two  currents  moving  in  the  same  direction  repel 
each  other ;  moving  in  opposite  directions  they  attract  each  other. 

NATUIIAL  ELECTRICITY.  When  electricity  exists  in  such  a  form  that  its  equi- 
librium must  be  disturbed  before  its  presence  is  manifest,  it  is  called  natural  electricity. 

Negative  Electricity.  Also  marked.  Originally  referred  to  that  form  of  electricity 
developed  by  rubbing  sealing-wax.  Electricity  from  any  plate,  condenser  or  element 
which  affects  the  electroscope  in  the  same  way  as  sealing-wax  is  called  negative. 

Negative  Element.  That  portion  of  the  carbon,  copper  or  platinum  element  immersed 
in  the  fluid  is  electro-negative.  The  zinc,  from  which  negative  electricity  is  obtained, 
is,  however,  usually  spoken  of  as  the  negative  element. 

Neutral  Point.  A  point  midway  between  the  poles  of  a  magnet  to  which  iron  filings  will 
not  adhere,  and  which  exerts  no  signs  of  magnetic  force. 

Non-Conductor.  Any  substance  that  does  not  freely  transmit  electricity,  such  as  glass, 
paraflinc,  rubber,  etc.   An  Insulator. 

Non-Electric.  Those  substances  which  permit  electricity  excited  on  them  by  friction  to 
escape  as  fast  as  formed,  in  consequence  of  which  it  was  formerly  supposed  that  they 
were  incai)able  of  being  electrified,  hence  the  name. 

Non-Essential.   External  resistance.  The  resistance  in  the  circuit  outside  the  cell. 


VOCABULAKY. 


15 


OHM.   The  unit  of  resistance.  It  is  very  nearly  equal  to  the  resistance  of  a  cylindrical 

wire  of  pure  copper  250  feet  in  length,  having  a  diameter  of  1-20  of  an  inch. 
Ohm's  Law.   The  law  devised  by  Ohm  for  determining  the  current  generated  and  the 
amount  of  work  it  can  do  under  given  conditions,  when  the  force  of  the  battery  and 
the  resistance  of  the  circuit  are  known.  His  formulae  (E  standing  for  electro-motive 
force  ;  R,  resistance ;  C,  current)  are  : 

E  E 
C=-         R=-  E-C+R 
R  R 

Olim  Meter.   An  instrument  for  measuring  ohms. 

Opening-  Contractions.  Muscular  contractions  produced  by  opening  or  breaking  the 
circuit. 

Oxidation.   This  term  here  relates  to  rust  collected  upon  the  metal  parts  of  a  battery. 

Rust  is  a  poor  conductor,  and  impedes  the  passage  of  electricity.  It  must  be  scraped  off". 
Ozone.   Oxygen  rendered  electro-negative  by  passing  through  it  a  positive  charge  of  static 

electricity. 

PARAFFINE.  carbo-hydrogen  obtained  from  petroleum  and 'other  sources.  It  is  a 
white,  waxy  solic.  not  acted  upon  by  acids  or  alkalies.  It  is  an  excellent  insulating  sub- 
stance, unequalled  for  its  resistance  to  moisture.  It  is  used  to  insulate  wires,  and  a 
thin  layer  of  it  on  the  upper  end  of  the  battery  elements  and  their  metal  connections, 
prevents  an  accumulation  of  salts  on  them.  Whenever  applied  for  insulating  purposes 
it  should  be  melted  and  the  objects  to  which  it  is  applied  should  be  hot. 

Para-Magnetic  Bodies.  Iron  and  similar  substances  which  are  attracted  by  the 
magnet. 

Passive  Electricity.   Electricity  in  a  state  of  equilibrium.   See  Natural  Electricity. 
Peripheral  Electrization.   Electricity  applied  to  the  periphery,  or  external  surface  of 
the  body. 

Permanent  Magnet.   Those  which  retain  magnetic  properties  when  removed  from  the 

source  from  whence  they  acquired  it. 
Phreno-Magnetism.   Excitement  of  the  organs  of  the  brain  by  mesmeric  passes  of 

magnetic  influence. 

Pile.  Originally  the  name  given  to  a  pile  composed  of  disks  of  zinc  and  copper  separated 
by  a  moist,  porous  material,  constructed  by  Prof.  Volta,  hence  called  the  Voltaic  pile. 
It  is  now  frequently  applied  to  the  combination  of  elements  in  battery  cells. 

Plantinode.   Name  given  by  Daniells  to  the  collecting  plate,  platinum,  carbon,  copper, etc. 

Platinum.  A  metal  first  discovered  in  the  mines  of  Choco,  Peru.  It  is  nearly  of  the 
color  of  silver  but  less  bright,  and  is  the  heaviest  of  metals.  It  is  much  used  for  the 
collecting  plate  in  battery  cells,  because  it  is  not  acted  upon  by  the  fluid. 

Polar.   Relating  to  the  poles. 

Polar  Force.  That  force  with  which  similar  ends  of  magnets  attract,  and  dissimilar 
repel  each  other. 

Polarity  of  Electricity.   That  property  of  electricity  which  causes  it  to  exhibit 

attraction  and  repulsion. 
Polarity  of  Magnets.   That  property  which  causes  them  when  freely  suspended  to 

assume  a  northerly  and  southerly  direction;  also  to  attract  dissimilar,  and  repel 

similar,  poles  of  other  magnets. 
Polarity  of  Nerves.   That  condition  of  a  nerve  in  which  the  part  nearest  the  negative 

pole  is  in  a  state  of  increased,  and  that  nearest  the  positive  is  in  a  state  of  diminished, 

irritability. 

Polarizable.   The  property  of  exhibiting  polarity  under  certain  conditions. 

Polarization.  The  act  of  arranging  the  substances  which  form  an  electric  circuit  in 
polar  order,  that  is  the  positive  atoms  collected  together  in  one  part  of  the  circuit,  and 
the  negative  in  another,  so  arranged  that  they  react  on  each  other. 

Polarization  of  Elements.  When  the  hydrogen  set  free  in  a  cell  is  permitted  to  collect 
about  the  carbon,  platinum  or  copper  plate  in  the  fluid,  there  is  a  counter-current  set 
up  between  the  gaseous  envelope  and  the  zinc  within  the  fluid,  which  tends  to  counter- 
act or  destroy  the  current  passing  through  the  external  circuit,  and  the  elements  are 
said  to  be  polarized. 

Polarizing.   Giving  polarity  to. 

Polarizing  Current.   A  current  which  produces  the  electrotonic  condition. 


16 


VOCABULARY. 


Polar  Method.  This  is  accomplished  by  placing  the  pole  whose  distinctive  effect  is 
wanted,  over  the  part  to  be  treated,  and  the  other  pole  over  some  indifferent  part. 

Pole  Changer.  A  rheotrope  or  current  reverser.  A  device  for  changing  the  direction  of 
the  current  without  removing  the  electrodes.  A  useful  instrument  for  employing  a 
galvanic  current  to  produce  contractions. 

Poles,  Electric.   Points  where  electricity  passes  in  and  out. 

Poles,  Mag-netic.   Points  where  magnetism  is  concentrated. 

Poles,  Consecutive  or  Consequent.  When  a  magnet  is  irregularly  magnetized,  it 
frequently  contains  three  or  more  poles,  and  the  term  consequent  is  applied  to  the 
extra  poles. 

Portative  Force.   The  power  of  a  magnet  to  sustain  weights  fastened  to  its  armature. 

Positive  Electricity.   That  which  is  set  free  by  rubbing  glass  with  silk. 

Positive  Pole.  The  binding  post,  conducting  cord  and  electrode  connected  with  the 
carbon,  copper  or  platinum  (electro-negative)  element  of  the  battery  are  respectively 
called  the  positive  pole. 

Potential.  This  term  holds  the  same  relation  to  electricity  that  the  term  level  does  to 
gravity.  Just  as  water  at  a  higher  level  tends  to  flow  to  a  lower  one,  so  electricity  at  a 
higher  potential  tends  to  move  to  a  point  of  lower  potential.  It  is  often  used  synony- 
mously with  tension  ;  but  since  the  latter  term  is  used  to  express  very  diverse  con- 
ditions, electricians  now  make  use  of  the  term  potential  in  referring  to  "  electric  level," 
whether  static,  dynamic  or  magnetic. 

Potential  (Dynamic).  Difference  of  "  electric  level "  between  two  elements,  when  both 
are  immersed  in  the  same  fluid,  Avhich  acts  chemically  upon  one  of  them.  The  same 
term  applies  to  difference  in  electric  level  produced  by  revolving  coils  of  wire  between 
the  poles  of  horseshoe  magnets. 

Potential  (Magnetic).  The  potential  or  "  electric  level "  due  to  a  given  magnetic  pole 
is  of  precisely  the  same  nature  as  that  of  an  electrified  body  at  that  place. 

Potential  (Static).  This  is  the  difference  in  "  electric  level "  between  an  electrified  body 
and  the  earth,  the  latter  being  the  standard  and  regarded  as  zero. 

Potential  at  a  Point.  An  abbreviation  for  difference  of  potential  between  the  point  and 
the  earth. 

Primary  Coil.   The  layers  of  coarse  wire  which  form  the  inner  coil  of  the  helix. 

Primary  Current.  The  inducing  current  from  the  primary  coil.  Sometimes  the  gal- 
vanic current  direct  from  the  cells  is  incorrectly  called  primary,  to  distinguish  it 
from  that  obtained  indirectly  by  induction. 

Primitive  Current.  When  two  points  in  a  closed  circuit  are  connected  by  an  additional 
conductor,  a  portion  of  the  current  is  drawn  off.  The  current,  as  it  existed  before  a 
part  is  drawn  off,  is  the  primitive  current. 

Protracted  Applications.  The  continued  application  of  electricity  by  means  of  belts 
disks,  etc.,  for  a  long  time. 

€ITJALITY  OF  A  CURRENT.  This  refers  to  its  strength  as  determined  by  its  electro- 
motive force  and  resistance,  and  also  to  the  rapidity  of  its  interruptions,  and  whether 
it  is  smooth  or  harsh. 

Quantity.  The  amount  of  electricity  generated  in  a  given  time.  For  purposes  of  calcu- 
lation, electricity  is  regarded  as  if  it  were  a  material,  incompressible  fluid  ;  e.  g.,  if  two 
bodies  contain  equal  quantities  of  one  kind  of  electricity,  and  it  all  be  transferred  to 
one,  the  latter  will  contain  twice  the  quantity  it  did  before ;  on  the  contrary,  if  the 
electricity  in  one  body  is  divided  with  another  not  previously  electrified,  the  former 
will  have  only  one-half  the  quantity  it  had  before. 

RADICALS.  The  io7is  or  elementary  atoms  into  which  a  chemical  compound  is  divided 
by  electrolysis. 

Reaction  Electrical.    The  phenomena  developed  in  any  part  of  the  body  under  the  in- 
^       fluence  of  electricity. 
Regulator  (Current).   See  Shield. 

Residual  charge.  A  feeble  charge  of  electricity  which  can  be  obtained  from  a  Leyden 
jar  a  few  minutes  after  it  has  been  thoroughly  discharged.  Literally  "  the  charge 
left  over." 

Residual  Magnetism.  Moderately  hard  iron  when  magnetized  retains  some  magnetic 
polarity,  this  is  residual  magnetism. 


VOCABULARY. 


17 


Resinous  Electricity.  Negative  electricity.  That  which  is  excited  by  rubbing  wax  or 
resin  with  flannel. 

Resistance.   Opposition  to  the  transfer  of  electricity,  or  to  its  development  as  a  current. 
Reverse  Current.   See  Ascending  Current. 
Reverser  (Current).   Pole  changer. 

Rheochord.  A  metallic  wire  introduced  into  a  circuit  to  measure  the  resistance  or  vary 
the  strength  of  the  current. 

Rheometer.  (Gr.  rheos,  a  current,  and  metron,  a  measure.)  An  instrument  for  measuringa 
galvanic  current.  Galvanometer. 

Rheomotor.  (L.  motor,  a  mover,  from  moveo,  I  move.)  An  apparatus  by  which  an  elec- 
trical current  is  originated. 

Rheophore.   (Gr.  phoreo,  I  bear  along.)   An  electrode. 

Rheoscope.  (Gr.  shope,  I  view.)  An  apparatus  for  ascertaining  the  existence  of  a  gal- 
vanic current.   A  galvanoscope. 

Rheostat.  (Gr.  statos,  that  stands.)  An  instrument  for  bringing  a  definite  amount  of 
resistance  into  the  circuit.  It  receives  its  name  from  its  power  to  keep  the  galva- 
nometer needle  standing  at  the  same  point  during  an  experiment.  Two  forms  are  com- 
monly used  for  medical  batteries,  the  hydro-rheostat  and  resistance  coil.  The  resistance 
coil  differs  from  the  rheochord  in  that  the  wire  composing  the  former  is  in  a  coil,  in 
the  latter  it  is  straight. 

Rheotome.   (Gr.  temno,  I  cut.)  A  current  breaker. 

Rheotrope.   (Gr.  trepo,  I  turn.)   A  pole  changer,  or  current  reverser. 

Rotary  Machine.  Magnetic- Electric  Machines  in  which  electricity  is  generated  by  turn- 
ing a  crank. 

Ruhmkoff  Coil.   A  very  powerful  induction  coil  invented  by  Ruhmkoff",  a  celebrated 

electrician  of  Paris. 
SECONDARY  ACTION.   See  Secondary  Electrolysis. 

Secondary  Battery.   A  storage  battery.  An  apparatus  for  accumulating  electric  energy. 

Secondary  CoiL  A  coil  of  fine  wire  wound  in  many  layers  around  the  primary  coil 
from  which  it  is  separated  by  insulation. 

Secondary  Current.  The  induced  or  "to  and  fro"  current  from  the  secondary  coil  of  the 
helix.  The  faradic  current. 

Secondary  Electrolysis.  Decomposition  supposed  to  be  accomplished  by  the  chemical 
action  of  the  elements  set  free  by  electricity.  It  is  secondary  action  that  causes  the 
hydrogen  to  be  used  up  by  the  chromic  acid  set  free  in  the  battery  fluid,  and  the  con- 
sequent formation  of  chrome  alum. 

Sensibility,  Electro-Muscular.  The  peculiar  sensation  produced  when  a  muscle  con- 
tracts under  the  stimulus  of  an  electric  current. 

Shield.  The  tube  or  sheath  which  answers  the  purpose  of  a  current  regulator.  When  it 
is  moved  entirely  within  the  coil,  the  strength  of  the  current  is  diminished ;  when 
withdrawn,  it  is  increased. 

Shock.  1.  A  sudden  discharge  of  electricity  from  a  Leyden  jar  or  the  conductor  of  a  static 
machine.  2.  The  unpleasant  or  painful  impression  made  on  the  nerves  by  opening  or 
closing  the  circuit  or  suddenly  increasing  the  strength  of  the  current. 

Short  Circxiit.  Name  given  to  the  circuit  when  it  is  completed  before  reaching  the  con- 
ductors or  electrodes.  Polarization  depends  upon  the  establishment  of  a  short  circuit 
within  the  cell. 

Stabile  Current.  A  current  applied  with  both  electrodes  in  a  fixed  position.  Labile 
and  stabile  were  terms  selected  by  Remak  to  describe  the  method  of  applying  a 
current. 

Statical  Electricity.   Electricity  at  rest.  It  is  set  free  by  friction,  pressure,  cleavage,  etc. 
Static  Machines.   Apparatus  for  generating  frictional  or  Franklinic  electricity. 
Storag-e  Batteries.    See  Secondary  Batteries.   They  have  been  used  for  supplying  a 

current  for  galvano-cautery  purposes,  and  also  for  illuminating  internal  cavities  of  the 

body. 

Switch.  Metallic  bars  revolving  on  a  pivot,  used  to  connect  sections  of  cells,  as  current 
reversers,  and  current  selectors.  They  form  a  part  of  the  battery  accessories  that  are 
attached  to  the  base. 


18 


VOCABULARY. 


TANGENT  GALVANOMETER.  An  instrument  for  the  accurate  measurement  of 
the  strength  of  the  galvanic  current. 

Tension.  Potential.  This  term  is  applied  by  various  authors  to  (1)  the  tendency  of 
electricity  to  overcome  resistance  ;  (2)  the  strain  put  upon  the  circuit  by  the  electro- 
motive force ;  (3)  the  difference  of  potential  of  any  two  points  joined  by  a  conductor. 

Tetanization.  The  production  of  a  tetanic  or  contracted  state  in  a  nerve  by  passing 
an  electric  current  through  it. 

Thermo-Electricity.  Electricity  that  is  generated  v^^hen  two  metals  are  soldered 
together  so  as  to  form  a  closed  circuit,  and  one  of  the  junctions  is  heated  more  than 
the  other. 

To  and  fro  Ciirrent.    Faradic  Current. 

Torpedo.   The  electric  ray,  a  species  of  fish  found  in  the  Mediterranean. 
Tray  Cell.   One  form  of  gravity  cell  which  is  named  from  its  shape. 
Trembler.   The  vibrator  or  rheotome. 

Two-Fluid  Cell.   A  cell  in  which  a  different  fluid  is  used  with  each  element. 
UNIFORM  CURRENT.   A  current  that  is  kept  at  the  same  strength  during  the  appli- 
cation.  (B  &  R.) 
Unipolar  Application.   See  Polar  Method. 
Uninterrupted  Current.   The  galvanic  current. 

Units,  Absolute.  They  are  based  upon  units  of  mass  (gramme),  length  (meter),  and 
time  (second). 

Unit  of  Current.   An  ampere.   It  is  the  current  through  a  circuit  with  electro-motive 

force  of  one  volt,  resistance  one  ohm. 
Unit  of  Electro-Motive  Force.    One  volt  represented  by  the  current  from  one 

Daniells  cell. 
Unit  of  Resistance.   The  ohm. 

Unpolarizable  Electrodes.  Those  made  of  pure  amalgamated  zinc  or  zinc  tljat  has 
been  immersed  in  a  syrupy  solution  of  sulphate  of  zinc.  Used  in  delicate  physiological 
experiments. 

Unpolarized.   Not  possessing  polarity. 

Upward  Current.  Term  applied  to  the  current  when  it  passes  from  the  branches 
toward  the  trunk  or  root  of  a  nerve.  The  negative  pole  is  placed  on  the  trunk,  the  posi- 
tive on  the  branches. 

VITREOUS  ELECTRICITY.   Electricity  excited  by  friction  of  glass. 

Volt.   The  unit  of  electro-motive  force. 

Voltameter.  An  apparatus  for  measuring  the  strength  of  a  galvanic  current  by  decom- 
posing water.. 

Voltaic  Alternatives.  Galvanism  acts  as  a  stimulus  to  nerves  and  muscles  most  ener- 
getically when  the  circuit  is  frequently  opened  and  closed.  When  a  pole  changer  is 
introduced  into  the  circuit  so  as  to  not  only  break  the  circuit,  but  change  the  direction 
of  the  current  at  every  break,  the  method  has  been  named  voltaic  alternatives.  This 
reversal  is  a  much  more  powerful  stimulant  than  simple  interruption  of  current. 

Voltaic  Pile.  The  compound  galvanic  circle  invented  by  Volta  in  1800.  Described  in 
text. 

"Weber.  The  name  formerly  given  to  the  standard  unit  of  electrical  current,  sometimes 
incorrectly  written  "  Veber."  See  Amptre. 


I]SrTRODUCTIOSr. 


There  is  no  branch  of  science  which  received  earlier  attention 
or  has  been  the  subject  of  more  persistent  research  than  Elec- 
tricity in  its  various  forms.  To  those  whose  attention  has  not 
been  called  to  the  subject  specially,  it  is  a  matter  of  surprise 
that  so  much  has  been  accomplished  in  the  various  departments 
of  this  science  without  its  having  sooner  obtained  a  recognized 
place  in  the  armentarium  of  the  medical  profession.  It  may  not 
be  out  of  place  to  give  a  brief  resume  of  its  history,  and  the 
various  practical  applications  made  of  it  in  the  past,  before 
undertaking  to  show  the  position  it  at  present  occupies  and  its 
promises  for  the  future. 

It  was  fully  six  centuries  before  the  Christian  era  that  Thales, 
one  of  the  seven  sages  of  Greece,  discovered  that  amber,  when 
rubbed  with  a  dry  cloth,  developed  a  peculiar  force  capable  of 
attracting  light  bodies  such  as  chaff,  bits  of  paper,  pith,  etc., 
and  in  consequence  he  believed  it  to  be  possessed  of  a  soul 
which  was  nourished  by  the  attracted  objects. 

The  luminous  appearance  attending  friction  of  certain  sub- 
stances was  noticed  by  Roman  historians.  They  also  record 
the  appearance  of  flame,  on  various  occasions,  at  the  points 
of  soldiers'  javelins,  and  on  the  top  of  ships'  masts.  One 
ancient  philosopher  relates  of  himself  that,  when  changing  his 
clothing,  sudden  sparks  were  emitted  from  his  person,  and  at  the 
same  time  his  servant  received  slight  shocks  on  touching  him. 

19 


20 


INTRODUCTION. 


The  electric  fish,  of  the  Mediterranean,  were  known  to  have 
the  power  of  sending  shocks  through  the  water  some  distance 
away,  of  sufficient  power  to  benumb  their  prey  and  to  disagree- 
ably affect  the  fishermen,  whose  spears  conveyed  the  shock  from 
the  water  to  their  hands. 

The  loadstone,  also  named  magnet,  from  Magnesia,  a  coun- 
try in  Thessaly,  where  it  was  first  noticed,  is  referred  to  in 
the  Talmud  imder  a  Hebrew  name,  meaning  ''the  stone  that 
attracts."  Lucretius,  in  a  poem  written  sixty  years  before  the 
Christian  era,  mentions  the  power  of  a  loadstone  to  suspend  a 
series  of  rings  hanging  in  a  chain,  one  to  another.  These 
references  show  that  the  power  of  attraction  possessed  by  the 
magnet,  and  its  capability  of  communicating  this  property  to 
pieces  of  iron,  were  known  at  the  very  dawn  of  our  history. 
It  is  equally  certain  that  the  peculiar  property  which  causes  a 
magnet,  when  freely  suspended,  to  point  toward  the  poles  of  the 
earth,  was  not  only  known,  but  made  of  practical  use.  More 
than  one  thousand  years  before  our  era,  at  the  obscurely 
known  Epoch  of  Codrus,  and  the  return  of  the  Heraclidse  to 
the  Peloponnesus,  these  people  employed  magnetic  cars  on 
which  was  the  figure  of  a  man  whose  movable  outstretched 
arm,  always  pointing  to  the  souths  guided  them  on  their  way 
across  the  vast  and  grassy  plains  of  Tartary.  During  the  third 
century  of  our  era,  at  least  seven  hundred  years  before  the 
introduction  of  the  compass  in  European  seas,  Chinese  vessels 
navigated  the  Indian  ocean  with  needles  pointing  to  the  south. 
The  magnetic  needle  was  brought  from  China  to  Italy  in 
1260,  and  one  traveler  asserts  that  he  saw  a  pilot  in  the  East 
Indies  direct  his  course  by  a  compass,  like  those  now  in  use, 
in  the  year  1500. 

With  the  exception  of  the  application  of  the  loadstone  to 
tlie  use  of  the  mariner,  the  various  phenomena  of  electricity 
and  magnetism  awakened  only  vacant  wonder,   and,  while 


INTRODUCTION. 


21 


many  centuries  rolled  away,  remained  but  barren  facts  on  the 
surface  of  human  knowledge. 

Gilbert,  physician  to  Queen  Elizabeth,  in  the  year  1600 
wrote  a  book  in  which  he  gave  a  classified  account  of  all  the 
electrical  phenomena  known  to  his  time,  and  added  the  results 
of  his  personal  investigations.  He  first  gave  the  name  poles 
to  the  ends  of  the  magnet,  because  they  point  toward  the 
poles  of  the  earth.  He  also  gave  the  name  electricit}^  (from 
elektron^  amber)  to  the  force  developed  from  amber  by  friction. 

The  needle  does  not,  however,  point  directly  to  the  north 
and  south  poles  of  the  earth,  except  in  certain  localities  (for 
the  magnetic  and  geographical  poles  do  not  coincide),  neither 
does  it  preserve  an  undeviating  direction.  .  Since  its  use  ren- 
dered possible  voyages  of  discovery  by  land  and  by  sea,  and 
it  early  became  a  commercial  necessity  to  the  merchant  who 
traded  with  distant  people,  whether  across  the  trackless  water 
or  the  equally  trackless  desert,  the  fluctuations  to  which  it  is 
subject  seriously  impaired  its  value. 

The  observation  of  this  variation  or  declination  is  usually 
credited  to  Columbus,  who  is  stated  to  have  discovered  it  in 
September,  1492,  during  his  first  memorable  voyage  of  discov- 
ery; yet  one  Peter  Adziger,  in  a  Latin  letter  to  a  friend, 
written  in  1269,  describes  the  process  by  which  he  has  reckoned 
the  amount  of  the  variation  of  the  needle,  showing  that  this  sub- 
ject had  commanded  attention  long  before  the  period  generally 
named. 

The  commercial  necessity  for  some  method  of  accurately  com- 
puting the  variations  of  the  needle,  whereby  its  deviations 
could  be  corrected,  has  led  to  the  construction  of  costly  appa- 
ratus for  recording  its  changes.  Observations  upon  its  behavior 
have  been  carried  on  over  the  entire  globe  during  every  season 
and  under  all  conditions  of  stormy  or  clear  weather,  and  the 
phenomena  of  magnetism  (which  gives  to  the  needle  its  value) 


22 


LNTBODUCTION. 


have  been  classified  under  their  appropriate  laws,  and  these 
laws  arranged  to  form  a  systematic  whole  until  the  science  of 
magnetism  is  as  well  established  as  any  of  the  physical  sciences. 

The  earth  is  now  regarded  as  a  magnetic  mass,  acting  on 
a  magnetic  needle,  as  one  needle  acts  upon  another.  To  the 
variations  of  this  magnetic  influence  of  the  earth  is  due  in 
part  the  variations  of  the  .needle.  The  result  of  various  ob- 
servations may  be  summed  up  as  follows : 

1.  There  is  a  daily  variation  which  consists  of  a  slight 
easterly  movement  of  the  north  end  of  the  needle  that  reaches 
its  maximum  about  7  a.m.  It  then  recedes  till  its  westerly 
maximum  is  reached,  about  1  p.m.  It  again  returns  easterly 
more  slowly,  reaching  its  maximum  about  10  p.m.  The  range 
of  variation  is  greater  during  the  day  than  during  the  night, 
which  is  believed  to  be  due  to  the  magnetic  influence  of  the  sun. 

2.  There  is  a  variation  of  the  eartWs  magnetism  accompany- 
ing the  change  of  seasons.  This  is  indicated  by  a  movement 
of  the  magnetic  pole  from  east  to  west.  During  the  months 
between  the  vernal  equinox  and  summer  solstice  the  needle  retro- 
grades to  the  east,  and  during  the  following  nine  months  its 
general  motion  is  to  the  west.  The  magnetic  influence  of  the 
earth  is  strongest  during  December,  January  and  February, 
when  it  is  nearest  the  sun,  and  least  during  May,  June  and 
July,  when  it  is  farthest  from  the  sun. 

3.  Irregular  or  fitful  agitations  of  the  needle  were  first  ob- 
served in  1750,  by  Worgenthin,  and  later,  in  1806,  by  Hum- 
boldt, who  gave  the  accompanying  phenomena  the  name  of 
"magnetic  storms.'* 

4.  There  is  still  another  variation  of  the  magnetic  pole  of 
the  earth  for  which  no  theory  has  fully  accounted.  The  pole 
of  the  magnetic  needle  now  points  more  than  "one  thousand  miles 
away  from  the  geographical  pole  of  the  earth.  The  needle 
pointed  due  north  in  1660  (in  London,  where  the  observation 


INTRODUCTION. 


23 


was  made).  It  then  moved  westward  until  1818,  when  it  was 
directed  to  a  point  2-1°  27'  from  the  pole,  then  it  began  to  move 
back  again,  and  will  point  due  north  again  in  1976,  making  a 
complete  cycle  in  three  hundred  and  twenty  years. 

Self-recording  apparatus,  now  used  in  magnetic  observato- 
ries, give  daily  and  hourly  reports  of  all  magnetic  variations, 
and  when  sufficient  time  has  elapsed  to  secure  enough  observa- 
tions from  different  parts  of  the  world,  much  light  will  un- 
doubtedly be  thrown  on  the  cause  of  the  earth's  magnetism 
and  its  changes. 

The  earth,  atmosphere  and  clouds  form  a  Leyden  jar  on  an 
extensive  scale,  the  earth  and  clouds  representing  the  coatings  of 
the  jar,  and  the  air  fulfilling  the  part  of  the  glass  through 
which  the  electricity  passes  by  induction  or  discharge. 

It  is  found  that  in  fine  weather  the  atmosphere  is  almost 
invariably  charged  positively  ;  before  rain  it  often  assumes  a 
negative  state.  The  rain  that  first  falls  is  usually  negative, 
although  the  atmosphere  before  and  after  the  fall  may  be  posi- 
tive. Fogs,  snow  and  hail,  if  unattended  by  rain,  are  nearly 
always  positively  charged.  Clouds  are  always  positive.  Elec- 
tricity, like  magnetism,  has  a  period  of  maximum  and  minimum 
intensity  during  the  day,  that  may  be  traced  to  the  influence  of 
the  sun,  and  another  during  the  night,  dependent  on  the  moon. 
There  is  also  a  yearly  variation,  dependent  upon  the  relative 
position  of  the  earth  and  sun,  atmospheric  electricity  having 
thirteen  times  as  great  intensity  when  the  earth  is  in  that  part  of 
its  orbit  nearest  the  sun,  as  when  it  has  receded  to  that  part  of 
its  orbit  most  remote  from  the  sun. 

There  are  also  irregular  or  fitful  disturbances  of  the  electrical 
conditions  of  the  atmosphere  accompanying  the  agitation  of  the 
needle  during  magnetic  storms.  These  perturbations  manifest 
themselves  often  simultaneously  over  land  and  sea,  over  hun- 
dreds and  thousands  of  miles,  or  propagating  themselves  gradu- 


24 


INTRODUCTION. 


ally,  in  a  short  space  of  time,  in  every  direction,  over  the  surface 
of  the  earth."  At  these  times  occur  brilliant  displays  of  the  au- 
rora borealis,  which  are  believed  to  be  neither  the  cause  nor  effect, 
but  simply  an  accompanying  phenomenon,  of  the  electrical  dis- 
turbances, and  due  to  the  same  cause. 

To  the  German  astronomer  Schwabe  is  due  the  honor  of 
recording  daily  observations  during  more  than  thirty  years,  by 
means  of  which  he  established  the  periodicity  of  these  phe- 
nomena. He  finds  they  increase  in  number  and  frequency  during 
a  little  more  than  five  years,  then  decrease  for  the  same  period, 
occupying,  to  complete  a  cycle,  about  eleven  years.  He  also  dis- 
covered that  they  coincide  with  the  appearance  of  dark  spots  on 
the  sun  ;  although,  from  any  evidence  yet  adduced,  no  one  can 
say  that  the  storms  are  caused  by  the  sun-spots,  or  that  the  sun- 
spots  are  caused  by  the  magnetic  storms.  Whether  the  sun  is 
the  source  of  electricity,  or  whether  the  magnetism  of  both  earth 
and  sun  is  derived  from  some  common  central  reservoir  of  this 
force,  still  remains  an  unsolved  problem. 

The  influence  of  terrestrial  magnetism  and  atmospheric  elec- 
tricity over  health  and  disease  is  a  subject  of  practical  interest  to 
every  physician.  That  electricity  is  at  all  times  present  in  the 
human  body,  and  that  under  certain  circumstances  it  becomes 
manifest  through  sparks  emitted  from  the  person,  as  well  as  by 
other  means,  has  long  been  known  to  all  who  have  given  any 
attention  to  the  natural  sciences.  Cecil  relates  an  instance  of  a 
gentleman  whose  sensitiveness  to  atmospheric  electrical  condi- 
tions was  so  great  that  he  was  advised  to  insulate  himself  by 
wearing  silk  underclothing.  So  successful  was  this  measure  that 
he  declared,  "it  made  life  another  thing." 

Dr.  Hosford,  of  New  Hampshire,  reported  in  1837  the 
following,  which  is  interesting  as  describing  a  condition  due 
to  disturbed  electrical  conditions  of  the  human  body.  On 
January  25  of  that  year,  during  a  brilliant  display  of  aurora 


INTRODUCTION. 


25 


borealis  (magnetic  storm),  a  cheerful,  intelligent  lady,  about 
thirty  years  of  age,  became  suddenly  and  u-nconsciously 
oharged  with  electricity,  which  she  first  discovered  on 
attempting  to  pass  her  hand  over  her  brother's  face, 
when  all  the  family  were  astonished  to  see  a  display  of 
sparks  pass  from  her  fingers  to  his  face.  This  peculiar  con- 
dition continued  without  diminution  until  the  last  of  February, 
when  it  began  to  decline,  and  disappeared  permanently  in  May. 
During  its  continuance,  being  greatly  annoyed  by  disagreeable 
shocks  on  touching  any  conducting  substances, —  such  as  kitchen 
utensils,  needles,  springs  of  chairs, —  every  effort  was  made 
to  relieve  her,  but  neither  the  change  of  clothing  from  flannel 
and  silk  to  cotton,  nor  any  other  device,  gave  her  relief.  She 
was  not  conscious,  from  any  internal  sensations,  of  her  peculiar 
power,  but  sparks  continued  to  pass  from  her  fingers  at  the 
rate  of  three  or  four  per  minute  when  brought  near  a  conduc- 
tor, and  she  could  charge  others  when  insulated.  She  had  never 
been  confined  to  her  bed  by  a  day's  illness,  but  had  sufiered 
for  some  months  during  the  previous  year  with  neuralgia, 
which  permanently  disappeared  with  the  return  of  her  normal 
electrical  condition  in  May. 

Dr.  C.  Woodman,  of  Paw  Paw,  Michigan,"^  reports  the 
following  curious  case :  A  patient,  aged  twenty-seven  years, 
can  generate  light  through  the  medium  of  his  breath, 
assisted  by  manipulations  with  his  hands.  He  will  take 
anybody's  handkerchief  and  hold  it  to  his  mouth,  rub  it 
vigorously  with  his  hands  while  breathing  on  it,  and  immedi- 
ately it  bursts  into  flames  and  burns  until  consumed.  He  will 
strip,  and  rinse  out  his  mouth  thoroughly,  wash  his  hands, 
and  submit  to  the  most  rigid  examination  to  preclude  the  pos- 
sibility of  any  humbug,  and  then  by  his  breath,  blown  upon 
any  paper  or  cloth,  envelop  it  in  flame.    He  will,  when  out 

*  Medical  News.  [We  do  not  vouch  for  this.— C.  M.  II.] 


26 


INTRODUCTION. 


gmmirig  and  without  matches,  desirous  of  a  fire,  lie  down 
after  collecting  dry  leaves,  and  by  breathing  on  them,  start 
the  fire,  and  then  coolly  take  oft'  his  wet  stockings  and  dry 
them.  It  is  impossible  to  persuade  him  to  do  it  more  than 
twice  a  day,  and  the  eftbrt  is  attended  with  the  most  extreme 
exhaustion.  He  will  sink  into  a  chair  after  doing  it,  and  on 
one  occasion,  after  he  had  a  newspaper  on  fire  as  narrated,  I 
placed  my  hand  on  his  head,  and  discovered  his  scalp  to  be 
violently  twitching,  as  if  under  intense  excitement.  He  will 
do  it  any  time,  no  matter  where  he  is,  under  any  circum- 
stances; and  Dr.  Woodman  has  repeatedly  known  of  his  sit- 
ting back  from  the  dinner-table,  taking  a  swallow  of  water, 
and  by  blowing  on  his  napkin  at  once  set  it  on  fire.  He  says 
that  he  first  discovered  his  strange  power  by  inhaling  and 
exhaling  on  a  perfumed  handkerchief,  that  suddenly  burned 
while  in  his  hands. 

The  following  case  has  been  reported  by  Dr.  C.  A.  Leale  :  * 
A  strong  man  was  able  to  light  the  gas  with  ease  after  a  few 
frictions  with  his  finger.  He  was  recommended  to  rub  his 
wife,  who  was  suflfering  from  neurasthenia.  She  recovered, 
but  he  became  morose,  restless,  and  complained  of  a  disagree- 
able feeling  when  his  wife  touched  him.  He  finally  recovered, 
but  was  not  able  to  engage  in  his  former  business. 

There  are  occasionally  reports  through  the  newspapers  of 
the  eftect  of  magnetic  storms  upon  invalids,  and  nervous 
people,  faintings,  spasms,  palpitations,  etc.,  having  occurred 
when  the  subjects  were  not  at  the  time  aware  that  there  were 
any  electrical  disturbances.  Many  invalids  are  enabled  to  foretell 
changes  in  the  weather  by  the  aggravation  or  amelioration  of 
their  disease,  and  their  change  of  symptoms  will  be  found  to 
correspond  to  the  change  in  atmospheric  electricity  from 
positive  to  negative,  or  vice  versa,  which  immediately  pre- 

*  Journal  oj  Nervous  and  Mental  Diseases,  Oct.  1876. 


INTEODUCTION. 


27 


cedes  or  follows  storms.  The  daily  and  nightly  rise  and  fall 
of  the  grave  symptoms  attendant  upon  many  acute  diseases 
correspond  very  nearly  with  the  variations  in  terrestrial  elec- 
tricity, and  are  recognized  as  occurring  with  such  regularity 
that  the  experienced  practitioner  can  often  readily  predict  the 
condition  of  the  patient  for  hours  in  advance. 

Certain  groups  of  diseases  are  influenced  by  the  seasons. 
The  greater  prevalence  of  lung  diseases  during  the  winter  months, 
and  of  bowel  complaints  during  the  summer,  cannot  be  fully 
explained  by  the  differences  in  temperature  and  diet ;  while  of 
the  epidemics,  small-pox  is  recognized  as  a  winter  disease,  and 
cholera  as  a  summer  disease,  although  no  feasible  theory  for 
this  has  hitherto  been  advanced,  so  far  as  known  to  the 
writer.  The  variation  in  atmospheric  pressure  undoubtedly 
exerts  considerable  influence  over  the  state  of  the  health  ;  but 
this  very  variation  of  pressure  would,  of  itself,  greatly  influence 
the  electrical  conditions  of  the  human  body. 

From  the  days  when  the  Greek  slave  of  Anthero  Was  sub- 
jected to  the  shocks  of  the  torpedo,  or  electric  flsh,  to  cure  him  of 
his  infirmity,  and  the  Grecian  women  and  children  wore  amber 
beads  under  the  belief  that  its  mysterious  soul  would  exert  a 
healing  influence  over  their  diseases,  mankind  has,  from  time 
to  time,  sought  in  electricity  a  ' '  panacea  for  all  human  ills. "  At 
times  its  champions  have  made  the  most  impossible  promises  for 
it,  which,  failing  to  be  fulfilled,  have  thrown  disfavor  upon  its 
power,  and  it  would  pass  into  obscurity,  forgotten  by  the  public, 
until  an  opportunity  presented  to  again  call  attention  to  it  as 
possessing  almost  miraculous  properties.  During  the  period  it 
has  been  undergoing  these  alternations  in  popular  favor,  a  few 
ardent  lovers  of  science  have  quietly  pursued  its  investigation 
with  such  a  wealth  of  reward  in  knowledge  of  its  properties  and 
its  possibilities,  that  it  has  been  recently  remarked  by  one  writer 
that  probably  "the  age  of  discovery^  so  far  as  electricity  is 


28 


•  INTRODUCTION. 


concerned,  is  past,  and  we  have  actively  entered  upon  the 
age  of  the  practical  application  of  principles  long  ago  demon- 
strated. " 

The  discovery  of  the  Leyden  jar,  in  1746,  was  followed  by 
important  results  to  science.  The  following  year  the  present  of  a 
pair  to  the  Literary  Society  at  Philadelphia,  awakened  Franklin's 
attention  to  physical  science,  to  which  he  does  not  appear  to  have 
previously  given  any  special  attention,  but  he  now  took  up 
experiments  with  avidity,  and  in  1749  made  the  discovery  of  the 
identity  of  lightning  and  electricity,  which,  although  long  sus- 
pected, had  never,  previously  to  his  celebrated  experiment  of 
drawing  lightning  from  a  cloud  with  a  kite  attached  to  a  hempen 
cord,  been  actually  demonstrated.  The  same  year  he  wrote  as 
follows  to  Mr.  Collinsen,  the  donor  of  the  jars  : 

"  We  are  not  a  little  chagrined  that  we  have  hitherto  been  able  to 
produce  nothing  in  the  way  of  use  to  mankind,  and  the  hot  weather 
coming  on,  when  electrical  experiments  are  not  so  agreeable,  it  is  proposed 
to  put  an  end  to  them  for  the  season  in  a  party  of  pleasure  on  the  banks  of 
the  Schuylkill.  Among  other  experiments  which  we  shall  exhibit  for  our 
diversion,  will  be  the  firing  of  spirits  by  means  of  a  spark  sent  from  side  to 
side  through  the  river  without  any  other  conductor  than  the  water  —  an 
experiment  which  we  have  some  time  since  performed  to  the  amazement 
of  many.  A  turkey  is  to  be  killed  for  dinner  by  an  electrical  shock,  and 
roasted  by  the  "  electrical  jack  "  (a  little  moving  power  he  had  invented) 
before  a  fire  kindled  by  the  electrified  bottle,  when  the  health  of  all 
the  famous  electricians  of  England,  Holland,  France  and  Germany  is 
to  be  drank  in  "  electrified  bumpers,"  under  the  discharge  of  guns  by  the 
electrical  battery." 

In  1730  Dufaye  transmitted  electricity  along  a  cord  of  moist 
packthread  for  1300  feet.  In  1774  Le  Sage,  a  Frenchman  at 
Geneva,  transmitted  a  message  over  wires.  He  used  twenty- 
four,  one  for  each  letter  of  the  French  alphabet,  insulating  them 
in  glass  tubes  buried  in  the  earth.  These  wires  were  connected 
with  an  electrical  machine  at  one  end,  and  electroscopes  at  the 
other,  their  divergence  marking  the  letters. 


INTRODUCTION. 


29 


Three  years  afterward,  near  London,  a  current  was  passed 
through  wires  for  a  distance  of  two  miles,  the  wires  being  insu- 
lated by  and  supported  upon  logs  of  baked  wood.  But  one  dis- 
covery must  wait  upon  another,  and  it  was  not  until  the  discovery 
of  the  electro-magnet  that  transmission  of  messages  over  wires 
could  be  rendered  practical.  In  1840  Prof  B.  Silliman  took 
daguerreotypes  by  an  electric  light  obtained  from  a  zinc  and 
copper  battery  in  the  laboratory  of  Yale  College,  and  in  1854  an 
electric  light  was  used  in  Paris  during  four  months  to  enable 
eight  hundred  men  to  continue  the  work  of  excavation  of  a  hill 
that  had  to  be  removed  for  some  public  purpose. 

Nearly  all  these  earlier  investigators  made  numerous  experi- 
ments in  treating  disease  both  with  electricity  and  the  magnet. 
Many  points  of  resemblance  between  the  nervous  force  and  elec- 
tricity were  noted,  which,  taken  together  with  the  evident  influence 
of  electrical  variations  over  disease  led  to  the  belief  that  nervous 
force  was  but  electricity  modified  to  adapt  it  to  the  animal  system. 
In  1848,  Matteuci,  who  had  devoted  much  time  to  this  subject, 
conclusively  proved  that  electricity  and  nervous  force  are  not 
identical,  but  bear  the  same  analogy  to  each  other  as  exists 
between  heat,  light  and  electricity.  In  addition  to  this,  it  has 
been  claimed  that  there  are  electrical  currents  generated  in  the 
muscles  and  secretory  organs,  the  result  of  the  chemical  changes 
going  on  within  the  tissues,  and  that  these  currents  may  be  modi- 
fled  by  artiflcial  currents  from  witho.ut  the  body.  For  many 
years  the  influence  of  electricity  in  all  its  forms  over  the  tissues 
of  the  body  has  been  diligently  investigated,  and  the  application 
of  electricity  to  treatment  of  disease  is  now  claiming  the  attention 
of  the  medical  world  more  universally  than  at  any  previous 
period  of  its  history. 

It  is  to  be  regretted  that  the  early  observers,  who,  with 
meager  materials  at  their  command  and  no  preceding  records 
to  guide  them,  made  those  brilliant  discoveries  which  now 


30 


INTRODUCTION. 


form  the  bases  of  all  the  practical  electrical  inventions  that  so 
delight  and  astonish  the  public  of  the  present  daj^,  have  left  us 
no  fuller  account  of  their  experience  with  disease.  Frequent 
mention  is  made  by  them  of  remarkable  cures  of  nervous 
disorders,  paralysis,  epilepsy,  neuralgia  and  rheumatism.  Those 
disorders,  well  known  to  be  influenced  by  changes  in  external 
cii'cumstances  of  weather,  season  and  climate,  seemed  to 
receive  the  most  benefit.  These  reports  of  marvelous  cures 
are  not  confined  to  a  single  observer,  nor  any  one  land. 
Records  from  almost  every  country  on  the  globe,  and  from 
many  experimenters,  are  found  throughout  our  literature  of  the 
past  two  hundred  years,  confirming  the  valuable  properties 
possessed  by  electricity  as  a  remedial  agent,  but  in  regard  to  the 
particular  condition  of  the  patient  with  which  successes  or  failures 
occurred,  the  strength  of  current  used,  and  frequently  the  kind 
of  electricity  employed,  we  are  left  in  the  dark.  Its  use,  until 
very  recent  j^ears,  has  been  entirely  empirical. 

The  large  class  of  neuroses,  including  hysteria,  epilepsy, 
paralytic,  neuralgic  and  spasmodic  affections  which  so  frequently 
baffie  us  when  other  therapeutic  agents  are  employed,  and  tax 
professional  skill  to  the  utmost,  should  invite  our  investigation 
to  this  field,  which,  the  experience  of  the  past  encourages  us  to 
believe,  offers  greater  inducements  to  the  original  investigator 
than  any  other  branch  of  our  art.  Since  the  specialist,  who  has 
used  galvanism  only,  reports  gratifying  success  in  the  same  class 
of  cases  as  those  who  employ  exclusively  either  franklinism  or 
faradism,  we  conclude  that  at  present  success  depends  more  upon 
the  care  with  which  the  details  of  treatment  are  carried  out  than 
upon  the  form  of  electricity  employed. 

There  is  reason  to  believe  that  the  time  is  not  far  distant 
when  the  differential  indications  for  selection  of  the  particular 
current  best  suited  to  various  diseased  conditions  shall  be 
clearly  defined,  and  to  Dr.  Rockwell  is  due  the  honor  of  first 


INTRODUCTION. 


31 


directing  the  profession  in  our  own  country  to  this  path  of 
investigation.  We  need  a  series  of  carefully  recorded  obser- 
vations, no  less  accurate  and  extensive  than  those  which  estab- 
lished the  cycle  of  magnetic  storms,  to  determine  how  much 
diseases  are  actually  influenced  by  electrical  disturbances,  and 
what  relation  the  cycles  of  magnetic  and  electric  phenomena 
bear  to  the  appearance  of  epidemics.  We  also  need  full  and 
complete  clinical  reports  from  conservative  and  observant  prac- 
titioners before  a  satisfactory  knowledge  can  be  acquired  of 
the  true  place  electricity  should  occupy  in  our  armentarium. 

Many  reports  of  cases  as  now  made  are  worthless,  in  not 
being  sufficiently  explicit.  In  reporting  cases  these  points 
should  be  distinctly  brought  out,  after  describing  the  diseased 
condition  in  the  usual  manner  : 

1.  The  method  of  applying  the  current;  whether  general 
or  local,  labile  or  stabile,  continuous  or  interrupted. 

2.  The  kind  of  current  used. 

3.  The  direction  of  the  current  and  location  of  electrodes. 
•1.  The  length  of  sitting. 

5.  The  number  of  sittings. 

6.  The  interval  between  sittings. 

7.  The  power  of  battery  current  employed.  Batteries  of 
different  makes,  and  of  the  same  make  under  varying  con- 
ditions, as  described  in  chapter  on  batteries,  differ  so  much  in 
the  force  of  current  sent  between  the  electrodes  that  it  is 
important  to  settle  upon  some  standard  of  comparison  for 
medical  batteries,  as  has  been  done  for  those  employed  in  the 
arts,  that  the  actual  current  strength  may  be  indicated  in 
reports  of  clinical  cases. 

Evaporation  and  condensation  of  vapor  are  constantly  set- 
ting free  vast  amounts  of  electricity,  which  cannot  but  exert 
an  influence  over  the  electrical  conditions  of  the  human  body. 
The  lightning  flashes  transform  oxygen  of  the  atmosphere  into 


32 


INTRODUCTION. 


ozone,  which  purifies  noxious  vapors  and  destroys  poisonous 
exhalations.  There  is  some  ground  for  believing  that  the 
prevalence  of  certain  epidemics  may  bear  some  relation  to 
electrical  conditions  of  the  earth  and  air.  When  cholera  pre- 
vailed in  1849  with  great  fatality,  it  was  observed  that  in 
localities  in  England  where  the  pestilence  raged  most 
severely  the  magnetic  attraction  was  diminished  one  half. 

Dr.  Henry  Stone  has  proposed  a  novel  theory,  which  he 
terms  the  Electro-Galvanic  Theory  of  Yellow  Fever,  in  which 
he  attributes  the  presence  of  the  disease  as  an  epidemic  to 
disturbed  electrical  conditions.  Among  other  indications  point- 
ing to  this  origin,  he  cites  what  he  terms  the  popular  belief, 
that  telegraph  operators,  other  things  being  equal,  are  especially 
liable  to  violence  of  attack.  Those  interested  in  learning  his 
views,  and  the  arguments  by  which  he  supports  them,  will 
find  the  article  referred  to  in  the  New  Orleans  Med,  and  Surg. 
Journal^  July,  1881. 

G.  A.  Sprechor^  also  advances  the  theory  that  malaria! 
diseases  depend  upon  the  same  cause.  He  cites  the  state- 
ment of  Audrand  that  during  the  great  cholera  epidemic  in 
Paris,  an  electrical  machine,  which  he  was  in  the  habit  of 
using,  gave,  during  April  and  May,  sparks  not  more  than  half 
as  long  as  those  which  it  usually  emitted.  During  June  4th, 
5th  and  6th,  only  a  slight  crackling  could  be  obtained,  and  on 
the  7th  of  that  month  no  electrical  phenomena  could  be 
excited.  The  days  of  the  greatest  mortality  corresponded  with 
the  absence  of  electrical  manifestations,  and  the  rapid  abate- 
ment of  the  epidemic  coincided  with  a  return  of  electrical 
phenomena  in  the  atmosphere. 

Dr.  Sprechor  suggests  that  the  extension  of  our  telegraph 
and  railroad  systems  through  the  country  may  have  some  in- 
fluence in  modifying  and  directing  malarial  troubles,  by  the 

*  Pacific  Med.  and  Surg.  Jour.,  Feb.  1883. 


INTRODUCTION. 


33 


formation  of  extensive  conductors  of  electricity,  and  notes  the 
effect  these  have  upon  the  manifestation  of  electrical  phenomena 
bj  the  fact,  which  he  asserts,  that  our  great  hurricanes  and 
tornadoes  follow  the  lines  of  railroads.  He  further  suggests 
that  an  explanation  of  the  fact  that  animals  and  negroes  are 
not  at  all,  or  very  little,  affected  by  malarial  disease  may  be 
found  in  the  fact  that  the  hairy  coat  of  the  one  and  the  dense 
oily  skin  of  the  other  are  a  more  or  less  perfect  means  of 
electrically  insulating  them. 

It  may  seem  chimerical  to  suggest  at  the  present  time  the 
possibility  that  at  some  future  time  the  relation  of  epidemics  to 
electrical  disturbances,  and  dependence  upon  them,  may  become 
established,  and  that  some  method  can  be  devised  by  which  the 
electrical  currents  of  the  human  system  can  be  modified  so  as 
to  render  it  less  susceptible  to  contagious  influence,  and  thereby 
prove  as  efficient  a  protector  against  certain  of  our  most  fatal 
epidemics  as  vaccination  is  against  smallpox  or  antisepsis 
against  zymotic  poisons.  This  certainly  offers  a  most  attrac- 
tive field  for  study  and  experiment. 


I 


i 


i 


CHAPTER  I. 


MAGNETISM. 

THE  THEORY  CONCERNING  THE  NATURE  OF  ELECTRICITY. 

Electricity  is  now  very  generally  regarded  as  a  form  of 
motion  akin  to  light,  heat  and  sound,  which  pervades  the 
earth  itself,  all  objects  upon  its  surface,  the  atmosphere  sur- 
rounding it,  and  the  heavenly  bodies.  We  know  that  from 
electricity  we  can  obtain  heat  and  light,  while  from,  heat,  and 
the  action  of  the  sun's  rays,  we  can  obtain  electricity,  but  al- 
though we  have  tolerably  correct  ideas  in  regard  to  the  char- 
acter of  motion  of  heat  and  light,  our  ideas  as  to  the  precise 
nature  of  the  change  which  motion  must  undergo  to  appear  as 
electricity,  are  still  very  defective. 

ACTIVE  AND  PASSIVE  ELECTRICITY. 

So  long  as  its  distribution  is  uniform  throughout  any  object, 
its  presence  cannot  be  detected  ;  it  is  then  said  to  exist  in  a 
passive  or  hound  state^  or  in  a  state  of  equilibrium.  When 
the  electric  equilibrium  between  any  two  points  of  an  object, 
or  between  two  objects,  is  disturbed,  electricity  is  said  to  be 
free  or  unbound.  It  is  with  electricity  in  a  free  state  that  we 
have  to  do  in  its  application  to  electro-therapeutics. 

OBSCURITY  OF  ELECTRICAL  LANGUAGE. 

Formerly  it  was  believed  to  consist  of  a  fluid  or  fluids, 
which  flowed  through  bodies  as  a  stream  of  water  flows  through 
its  channel,  and  many  of  the  terms  used  bj  the  earlier  writers 

(35) 


36 


MAGNETISM. 


on  the  subject  are  still  retained,  and  convey  an  incorrect  idea 
of  the  real  nature  of  electricity.  At  the  meeting  of  the  electri- 
cal congress  at  Paris,  in  1881,  a  revision  of  electrical  language 
was  suggested,  which  should  make  it  conform  to  the  present 
theories  concerning  this  force.  Some  important  changes  were 
made,  although  much  remains  to  be  done,  and  there  is  still 
some  confusion,  even  in  the  works  of  recent  writers,  in  the  use 
of  terms.  For  the  convenience  of  the  reader,  a  full  vocabulary 
of  electrical  terms  is  arranged  on  page  7,  to  which  reference 
should  be  made  when  the  meaning  of  the  text  is  not  clear. 

FORMS  or  ELECTRICITY. 

Tlie  manifestations  of  electricity  may  be  arranged  under 
three  heads :  1,  magnetic  ;  2,  static  ;  3,  dynamic.  Its  magnetic 
properties  as  existing  originally  in  the  loadstone  will  be  con- 
sidered under  the  head  of  Magnetism.  The  phenomena  attend- 
ing static  electricity  set  free  by  friction  belong  to  Franldinism. 
Free  electricity,  moving  as  a  current,  is  termed  Dynamic. 
Dynamic  electricity  includes  Galvanism  and  Faradism. 

MAGNETISM. 

The  fact  that  the  earth  is  a  vast  magnet,  exerting  magnetic 
influence  over  all  objects  upon  its  surface,  was  long  since 
proven. 

It  is  the  magnetic  power  of  the  earth  which  gives  to  the 
loadstone  its  peculiar  properties,  and  Sir  Wm.  Thomson  holds 
the  belief  that  man  possesses  a  setenth  sense,  which  he  terms 
the  "magnetic  sense,"  that  enables  its  possessor  to  detect,  by 
peculiar  sensations,  marked  variations  in  terrestrial  magnetism. 

The  notion  that  the  magnet  exerts  a  peculiar  influence  upon 
health  is  a  very  old  one.  In  ancient  times,  the  mineral  ore, 
or  natural  magnet,  either  alone  or  mixed  with  other  materials, 
was  used  as  medicine  externally  or  internally  for  the  cure  or 


MAGNETISM. 


37 


relief  of  certain  disorders  of  mind  or  body.  Before  reviewing 
the  experiments  tiiat  have  been  made  with  this  agent,  it  is 
necessary  to  define  the  properties  it  possesses  and  the  laws 
which  govern  its  manifestation. 

The  presence  of  magnetism  in  any  object  is  shown: 

1.  By  its  power  of  attracting  iron  filings,  needles,  etc. 

2.  By  attracting  or  repelling  other  magnets. 

3.  By  arranging  itself,  when  freely  suspended,  so  as  to 
point  toward  the  poles  of  the  earth. 

4.  By  its  power  to  impart  its  own  magnetic  properties  to 
iron  or  steel. 

NATURAL  AND  ARTIFICIAL  MAGNETS. 

A  natural  magnet  consists  of  a  reddish  brown  or  gray  ore 
found  in  iron  mines  throughout  the  world. 

Artificial  magnets  are  those  in  which  the  peculiar  proper- 
ties of  magnetism  are  induced  artificially. 

Artificial  magnets  are  of  two  kinds  :  1.  Temporally ^  made 
of  soft  iron,  which  acquires  magnetism  readily,  but  loses  it  as 
readily  as  acquired.  2.  Permanent^  made  of  hardened  cast 
steel,  which  cannot  be  so  highly  magnetized  as  soft  iron. 

MAGNETIC  POLARITY. 

When  a  small  magnetic  bar  or  needle  is  freely  suspended 
it  will  be  found  that  it  will  arrange  itself  so  that  one  end  will 
point  toward  the  north  pole  of  the  earth  ;  and  if  the  needle 
be  turned  in  any  other  direction,  as  soon  as  it  is  free  to 
move  it  will  return  to  its  onginal  position,  the  same  end 
always  pointing  in  a  northerly  direction. 

Manufacturers  mark  one  end  of  the  needle  in  various  ways 
to  distinguish  it ;  sometimes  by  a  notch,  paint,  or  letters  N  or 
S.    It  is  important  to  know  which  end  of  the  magnet  is  pointing 


38 


MAGNETISM. 


in  a  given  direction  when  it  is  used  as  a  compass-needle,  and 
also  when  it  is  used  in  making  or  testing  other  magnets. 

THE  MAGNETIC  POLES  OF  THE  EARTH. 

The  earth's  magnetic  poles  do  not  correspond  with  the 
geographical  poles.  Thej  are  located  at  points  in  the  northern 
and  southern  hemispheres,  where  the  magnetic  needle  becomes 
vertical  or  perpendicular  to  the  horizon  when  so  hung  that  it 
may  revolve  perpendicularly  to  the  earth's  surface.  Midway 
between  these  points  is  a  place  where  the  needle  stands  parallel 
with  the  horizon,  and  when  passing  northward  from  this,  the 
north  end  of  the  needle  begins  to  dip  more  and  more  until  its 
pole  is  reached.  Passing  southward,  the  south  end  of  the 
needle  dips  in  the  same  way. 

ATTRACTION  AND  REPULSION. 

When    a   magnet  is 
^   brought  near  a  magnetic 


N 


needle,  or  a  small  mag- 
net that  is  free  to  move, 
Fig.  1.  it  will  be  found  that  the 

north  pole  of  one  magnet  repels  the  north  pole  of  the  other, 
and  the  south  pole  of  the  one  repels  the  south  pole  of  the 
other.  When,  however,  the  north  pole  of  the  first  magnet  is 
brought  near  the  south  pole  of  the  movable  magnet,  the  latter 
'will  be  attracted  and  will  approach  nearer.  Fig.  1  represents 
a  large  magnet  with  two  small  movable  magnets  at  each 
end.  The  latter  were  at  first  parallel,  but  the  attractive  power 
of  the  large  magnet  has  been  exerted  at  the  north  end  to  draw 
toward  itself  the  soutli  ends  of  the  small  magnets,  the  repulsive 
force  of  its  south  end  has  driven  off  the  south  ends  of  the 
small  parallel  magnets  near  it. 


MAGNETISM. 


39 


THE  LAW  OF  MAGNETIC   ATTRACTION  AND  REPULSION. 


Like  poles  repels  imlihe  poles  attract  each  other. 

The  power  of  attraction  is  not  equal  throughout  the  entire 
length  of  the  magnet.  Dip  a  magnet  in  iron  filings,  and  it  will 
be  noticed  that  the  greatest  cluster  will  be  attracted  to  the  poles 
or  ends,  while  toward  the  middle  will  be  found  a  space  where 
none  adhere. 

LINES  OF  MAGNETIC  FORCE. 

If  iron  filings  be  spread  on  a  stiff  sheet  of  paper  with  a  strong 
magnet  held  near  to  the  paper,  and  underneath  it,  when  the 
paper  is  slightly  jarred  the  filings  will  arrange  themselves  in 
curved  lines,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2. 

>    j°  These  curved  lines  are  called  lines 

of  magnetic  force.,    and   the  space 
through  which  the  magnet  exercises 
^  its  force  (the  space  covered  by  the 
••v  curved    lines)   Faraday   named  the 
Magnetic  Field. 
Fig.  2. 

The  lines  of  force  diminish  in  number  and  length  the  further 
they  are  from  the  poles,  until  they  entirely  disappear,  as  repre- 
sented by  the  white  space  at  the  center  of  a.  The  line  across 
the  center  marks  the  neutral  point.,  or  point  of  no  attraction. 

5  .  ... 


Fig.  3. 


In  Fig.  3  we  have  two  equal  magnets  brought  near,  but  not  in 
contact  with,  each  other,  h  represents  what  takes  place  when 
their  north  poles  are  adjacent.    The  particles,  repelled  by  one, 


40 


MAGNETISM. 


after  a  little  distance  fall  within  the  lines  of  repulsion  of  the 
other,  and  are  repelled  alike  bj  both,  c  shows  the  same 
magnets  with  unlike  poles  adjacent.  Particles  repelled  by  N 
are  attracted  by  S,  and  vice  versa^  illustrating  why  like  poles 
repel  and  unlike  poles  attract  each  other. 

TRUE  POLARITY  OF  THE  COMPASS  NEEDLE. 

Since  like  poles  repel  and  unlike  attract  each  other,  it  fol- 
lows that  if  two  magnets  be  freely  suspended  within  the  sphere 
of  their  attraction  (their  magnetic  field),  the  marked  end  of  one 
will  arrange  itself  parallel  to  the  opposite  or  unmarked  end  of 
the  other  magnet ;  therefore,  that  end  of  the  compass-needle  that 
points  toward  the  north  magnetic  pole  of  the  earth  must  be  in 
an  opposite  or  unlike  magnetic  state;  or,  in  other  words,  that 
end  of  the  needle  pointing  north  possesses  south  magnetism,  and 
that  end  pointing  south  possesses  north  magnetism. 

Some  authors  call  the  magnetism  of  the  north  pole  of  the 
earth  horeal^  and  that  of  the  south  pole  austral;  while  the 
magnetism  of  the  end  of  the  needle  pointing  north  is  called 
austral^  and  its  opposite  end  boreal. 

Unfortunately  there  is  no  uniformity  in  the  marking  of 
magnets  among  manufacturers.  In  England  and  Germany  the 
end  of  the  needle  that,  when  freely  suspended,  points  toward 
the  north  is  marked  N,  while  in  France  this  same  end  of  the 
needle  is  marked  S.  In  determining  the  polarity  of  unmarked 
magnets,  this  discrepancy  should  not  be  lost  sight  of. 

EFFECT  OF  DIVIDING  A  MAGNET. 

If  a  magnet  is  divided,  since  there  is  in  the  bar  a  neutral 
point  where  no  magnetic  properties  are  exhibited,  it  might  be 
supposed  that  one  half  would  exhibit  only  boreal  and  the 
other  only  austral  magnetism,  but  such  is  not  the  fact ;  each 


MAGNETISM. 


41 


half  has  two  poles  exactly  like  the  original  magnet,  and  no 
division  can  be  made  so  small  but  that  the  resulting  portions 
will  exhibit  both  kinds  of  magnetism.  No  magnet  was  ever 
seen  that  had  hut  one  pole. 

MAGNETIC  INDUCTION. 

When  a  soft  piece  of  iron  is  brought  near  a  magnet  it 
immediately  assumes  the  magnetic  state.  This  influence  of  a 
magnet  operating  at  a  distance  is  called  magnetic  induction. 
It  is  through  induction  that  iron  filings,  tacks,  etc.,  are  at- 
tracted, and  that  magnetic  properties  are  transferred  from  one 
bar  to  another  when  charging  magnets. 


Arrangement  of  molecules  in  a  bar  Arrangement  of  molecules  in  a  magnet, 
that  exhibits  no  magnetic  attraction.       The  irregular  line  across  the  bar  marks  a  line 

of  fracture  which  always  occurs  at  a  point 
which  sets  free  a  north  and  south  atom. 


Magnetizing  a  bar  of  iron  or  steel  consists  in  breaking  up 
the  magnetic  affinity  of  the  atoms  and  rearranging  them  so 
that  the  layer  at  each  end  is  left  without  a  mate. 

This  explanation  of  the  process  has  been  suggested  : 

1.  Each  molecule  of  iron,  steel,  or  other  magnetic  sub- 
stance, is  a  separate  and  independent  magnet,  having  a  north 
and  a  south  pole  exactly  the  same  as  that  shown  by  a  steel 
bar  magnet. 

2.  The  inherent  polarity  or  magnetism  of  each  molecule  is 
a  constant  quantity,  like  gravity,  and  can  neither  be  increased 
nor  destroyed,  but  may  be  rotated  by  magnetism  or  electricity 
so  that  the  entire  magnet  may  have  its  poles  reversed. 

3.  When  a  magnet  seems  to  have  lost  its  magnetism  there 
is  no  actual  loss,  but  the  molecules  have  arranged  themselves 
so  as  to  satisfy  their  mutual  attraction  by  the  shortest  path, 
forming  a  complete  closed  circuit  of  attraction. 


42 


MAGNETISM. 


4.  When  magnetic  properties  are  evident,  the  molecules  or 
their  polar  atoms  have  all  rotated  in  a  given  direction,  and  we 
still  have  a  symmetrical  arrangement,  but  the  circuit  of  attrac- 
tion is  not  complete  except  through  an  external  armature 
connecting  both  poles. 

5.  Permanent  magnets  are  those  in  which  the  atoms 
are  bound  together  with  sucli  rigidity  (as  in  tempered  steel) 
that  they  cannot  rotate.  Temporary  magnets  are  those  in 
which  the  atoms  (as  in  soft  iron)  are  held  so  loosely  that 
they  can  readily  rotate. 

6.  The  neutral  line  of  the  magnet,  or  point  of  no  attraction, 
found  at  a  little  distance  from  each  extremity,  does  not  indicate 
that  there  is  no  magnetism  at  that  point,  but  that  the  attrac- 
tion of  the  molecules  is  satisfied  by  a  short  circuit  of  attraction 
within  the  magnet  itself. 

MAGNETIC  INDUCTION  OK  ATTEACTION  ACROSS  BODIES. 

If  a  sheet  of  glass,  wood  or  paper  be  placed  between  a 
magnet  and  iron  filings,  they  will  be  seen  to  be  influenced  by 
the  magnet,  and  will  arrange  themselves  in  lines  as  if  in 
actual  contact  with  it.  It  is  found  that  magnetic  force  acts 
across  a  vacuum,  water,  and  all  known  substances,  except  across 
a  network  of  iron,  or  other  magnetic  material. 

FORM  OF  MAGNETS. 

Artificial  magnets  are  generally  in  the  form  of  a  bar  or  U ; 
the  latter  are  called  horseshoe  magnets.  Both  forms  may  be 
simple  or  compound. 

A  simple  magnet  consists  of  a  single  piece  of  metal.  A 
compound  magnet  consists  of  several  simple  magnets  made 
of  thin  plates  of  steel,  placed  side  by  side  with  their  like 
poles  together.  If  one  plate  is  thinner  or  smaller  than  the 
rest,  it  weakens  the  entire  combination. 


MAGNETISM. 


43 


A  magnetic  battery  consists  of  several  compound  magnets 
of  the  same  shape  and  size  bound  together.  A  magnet  of  this 
kind  is  much  more  powerful  than  a  solid  one  of  the  same 
weight,  because  thin  plates  can  be  more  strongly  magnetized 
than  thick  ones. 

KEEPERS  OR  ARMATURES. 

When  a  magnet  is  not  in  use,  the  molecules  after  awhile 
will  commence  to  arrange  themselves,  as  in  Fig.  4,  and  it  will 
gradually  cease  to  exhibit  magnetic  properties.  To  preserve  a 
horseshoe  magnet,  its  two  poles  are  connected  by  a  piece  of 
soft  iron  called  an  armature  or  keeper.  Bar  magnets  must  be 
arranged  in  pairs,  with  unlike  poles  parallel,  and  connected  by 
a  keeper. 

TO  CHARGE  A  MAGNET. 

When  a  bar  of  slightly-tempered  steel  is  held  vertically  and 
struck  several  blows  with  a  wooden  mallet,  it  will  acquire 
magnetism,  and  will  attract  iron  filings,  or  deflect  a  magnetic 
needle,  the  same  as  a  natural  magnet.  Magnetism  may  be 
communicated  from  one  bar  to  another  in  the  following  manner  : 
lay  the  unmagnetized  bar  horizontally  north  and  south  ;  place 
one  end  of  the  magnet  on  its  center  and  carefully  draw  it  to  the 
end  of  the  horizontal  bar ;  raise  it,  always  carrying  it  back  to 
its  starting  point  in  a  curve  through  the  air ;  repeat  several 
times,  then  pursue  the  same  course  with  the  other  half  of  the 
bar,  first  reversing  the  magnet.  The  latter  loses  none  of  its 
own  magnetism  by  the  operation,  and  the  polarity  of  the  new 
magnet  is  opposite  to  that  of  the  inducing  magnet. 

TO  PRESERVE  THE  POWER  OF  A  MAGNET. 

1.  When  laying  it  aside,  place  it  as  nearly  as  possible  in 
the  position  which  it  would  assume  if  freely  suspended,  so  as 
to  be  acted  upon  by  the  earth's  magnetism.    When  the  poles 


44 


MAGNETISM. 


are  kept  for  a  long  time  in  any  other  position  than  this,  unless 
made  of  the  hardest  steel,  the  magnet  will  eventually^  lose 
the  whole  of  its  magnetic  power. 

2.  Two  magnets  rapidly  weaken  each  other,  if  placed  even  for 
a  short  time  with  similar  poles  opposite  to,  or  facing,  each  other. 

3.  All  rough  and  violent  treatment,  such  as  falls,  blows 
from  a  hammer,  scratching  the  surface  with  sandpaper,  or  great 
heat,  weaken  the  power  of  a  magnet. 

4.  Neither  horseshoe  nor  bar  magnets  should  be  laid  aside 
without  an  armature.  They  are  improved  by  keeping  dry  iron 
filings  around  the  poles. 

LIFTING  POWER  OF  MAGNETS. 

Natuml  magnets  do  not  increase  in  power  in  proportion  to 
their  increase  in  size.  Sir  Isaac  Newton  is  said  to  have  worn 
a  loadstone,  set  in  a  ring,  which  weighed  only  three  grains, 
yet  could  lift  seven  hundred  and  forty-six  grains,  or  nearly 
two  hundred  and  fifty  times  its  own  weight.  One  brought 
from  Moscow  to  London,  that  weighed  one  hundred  and 
twenty-five  pounds,  could  support  only  about  two  hundred 
pounds.  A  horseshoe  magnet  is  three  or  four  times  as  pow- 
erful as  a  bar  magnet.  A  horseshoe  magnet  weighing  one 
pound  ought  to  lift  a  weight  of  twenty  pounds. 

It  has  been  observed  that  when  a  magnet  attracts  iron  a 
reaction  takes  place,  the  iron  in  turn  attracting  the  magnet. 
The  lifting  power  of  a  magnet  can  be  greatly  increased  by  add- 
ing day  after  day  small  pieces  of  iron,  until  its  limit  is  reached. 
If  more  pieces  are  added  after  this  point  is  reached,  they  will 
tear  ofi"  the  armature  and  reduce  the  power  of  the  magnet  to 
its  original  value. 

ANIMAL  MAGNETISM. 

Although  the  peculiar  powers  manifested  by  the  torpedo  and 
gymnotus  were  known  to  the  ancients,  it  was  not  known  until 


MAGNETISM. 


45 


1772  that  these  powers  were  due  to  electricity.  The  most 
eminent  anatomists  and  physiologists  have  devoted  much  time 
to  the  investigation  of  animal  magnetism  since  the  discovery 
that  shocks  from  these  fish  can  magnetize  needles  and  produce 
sparks. 

A  German  philosopher,  named  Father  Helil,  appears  to 
have  been  the  first  to  write  on  the  subject  of  animal  magnet- 
ism. His  views  were  published  in  1774,  and  subsequently 
they  were  adopted  by  Frederick  Mesmer,  of  Suabia,  who  soon 
deviated  from  the  tenets  of  his  instructor,  and  in  1779  published 
what  he  termed  a  new  system  of  treating  disease,  to  which 
the  name  Mesmerism  has  been  given.  He  claimed  that  the 
magnet  was  not  directly  necessary  to  produce  the  effects  as- 
cribed to  it  by  Hehl,  but  that  one  human  being  acts  magneti- 
cally on  another,  on  concentrating  the  attention  and  making 
with  the  hands  certain  passes  over  the  body  of  the  person  to 
be  magnetized.  His  extravagant  pretensions  attracted  so  much 
attention,  that  the  King  of  France  appointed  a  committee, 
composed  of  members  of  the  Royal  Academy  of  Science,  with 
Benjamin  Franklin  at  its  head,  to  investigate  the  subject. 
After  numerous  experiments,  they  decided  that  mesmerism  had 
nothing  to  do  with  magnetism,  and  it  soon  lost  its  popularity. 

THERAPEUTICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  MAGNET. 

The  ancients  ascribed  various  medical  properties  to  the 
loadstone.  Galen  ascribed  a  purgative  property  to  it,  and 
recommended  it  in  dropsies.  Paracelsus,  in  the  year  1503, 
recommended  it  in  the  treatment  of  epilepsy,  and  for  the  suc- 
ceeding two  hundred  years  it  was  extensively  employed  in  dis- 
ease. In  1760  amulets  were  employed,  consisting  of  pieces  of 
magnetized  metal  so  united  as  to  form  collars,  garters,  brace- 
lets, or  plates  adapted  to  various  parts  of  the  body.  It  was  some- 
times pulverized  and  mixed  with  plasters,  which  acquired  the 


46 


MAGNETISM. 


reputation  of  extracting  iron  and  other  metallic  substances 
from  the  body.  The  chemists  of  those  early  times  were  not 
behind  their  brethren  of  the  present  day  in  extravagant  pre- 
tensions, for  they  claimed  to  extract  an  oil  of  wonderful  efficacy 
from  the  loadstone,  which  possessed  all  its  properties  in  a  con- 
centrated form. 

Recent  observations  in  Paris  hospitals,  to  determine  the 
effect  of  the  magnet  upon  patients,  showed  that  it  usually 
lessens  the  pulse,  although  sometimes  it  produces  no  effect 
upon  it.  Breathing  is  not  modified,  but  patients  sometimes 
complain  of  throbbing,  pricking  sensations  at  the  positive  pole. 

Metallo-therapy*  is  a  term  used  to  designate  the  employ- 
ment of  metals,  externally  and  internally,  in  the  healing  of 
certain  diseases  in  which  it  is  claimed  they  have  been  found 
serviceable.  It  includes  also  the  magnet  in  its  list  of  appliances. 
This  subject  has  been  thoroughly  discussed  in  the  French  journals 
during  the  last  five  or  six  years,  and  Charcot  and  Yigoureaux 
having  made  numerous  experiments,  both  pronounce  their  con- 
fidence in  it  as  a  valuable  acquisition  to  medical  science.  The 
popular  notion  that  sleeping  with  the  head  to  the  northward,  so 
that  the  body  will  be  j^arallel  with  the  terrestrial  magnetic  cur- 
rents, is  useful  in  certain  nervous  complaints,  has  long  been 
regarded  as  a  harmless  superstition;  but  the  subject,  in  this 
da}^  of  enthusiastic  investigation  of  all  questions  pertaining  to 
electrical  science,  is  again  attracting  attention,  and  we  quote 
from  The  Electrician\  the  latest  in  regard  to  the  subject : 

M.  G.  De  Tiocquigny  writes  as  follows  to  the  editor  of  Le8  Mondes: 
"  M.  C.  Vignier  wrote  in  the  Revue  Philosophique  for  1882,  No.  7, 
July,  p.  31 :  '  Is  there,  then,  an  agency  capable  of  exercising  a  con- 
tinuous action  on  the  apparata  of  the  nerves  (canaux),  varying  with 
the  position  of  the  head  ?   To  my  mind  this  agency  exists,  and  is  none 

♦Archives  of  Medicines,  October  1883  (Dr.  Peckham), 
t  November  1883. 


MAGNETISM. 


47 


other  than  terrestrial  magnetism.  That  an  all-pervading  force  should  be 
without  any  action  on  our  organism  when  we  see  it  influenced  by  the 
least  variation  of  light  and  heat,  is  surprising  enough  already.  But  it  is 
beyond  dispute  that  galvanic  currents  not  only  exercise  a  powerful  effect 
on  our  nervous  system,  but  that  electro-magnets  themselves  produce 
well  marked  eJBfects  in  certain  nervous  affections.  The  experiments 
undertaken  at  Salpetriere,  by  M.  Charcot,  leave  no  room  for  doubt  on 
this  ix)int;  and  there  must  be  some  foundation  for  the  practice  adopted 
by  the  Swedish  peasants,  who  cause  themselves  to  be  buried  for  several 
hours  so  as  to  lie  North  and  South  in  order  to  cure  neuralgia.' 

"  To  this  the  author  adds  the  note :  '  I  have  this  fact  from  M.  Nord- 
strom, Swedish  Consul  at  Alger.  It  is,  moreover,  sufficiently  proved  by 
physiological  experiments  that  a  very  close  relation  exists  between  the 
nervous  system  and  electricity,  of  which  magnetism  is  but  one  form.' 
In  another  note  the  author  quotes  the  following  experiment,  carried  out 
by  M.  Ziegler,  of  which  M.  Vogt  was  a  witness :  '  M.  Ziegler  takes  a 
lens  of  soft  iron,  he  exposes  it  in  a  place  where  it  will  receive  the  lines 
of  terrestrial  magnetism  and  redirect  them  on  to  the  organ  to  be  studied. 
By  thus  projecting  the  magnetic  lines  concentrated  in  this  manner  on 
the  heart  of  a  rabbit,  the  rhythm  of  the  heart  is  changed ;  if  the  lines 
are  concentrated  on  the  intestines,  violent  peristaltic  movements  {p/ris- 
taltiques)  are  caused  {Journal  Officiel,  May  18,  1881).  The  preceding  facts 
will,  perhaps,  appear  to  you,  Monsieur  I'Abbe,  to  add  some  degree  of 
probability  to  the  theory  put  forward  by  The  Electrician  of  London.' " 

Dr.  Hammond  has  reported  some  experiments  in  the  use 
of  the  magnet  that  will  be  refei-red  to  elsewhere.  In  the 
present  state  of  our  knowledge  of  this  subject  the  use  of  the 
magnet  in  the  treatment  of  disease  must  be  wholly  empirical, 
and  is  only  resorted  to  in  isolated  cases  by  way  of  experiment, 
when  other  forms  of  electricity  have  failed  to  produce  a  bene- 
ficial effect. 


CHAPTEE  11. 

FRANKLINISM. 

Frictional  or  static  electricity  when  applied  to  medical  pur- 
poses is  known  as  Franklinism^  in  honor  of  Benjamin  Frank- 
lin, whose  investigations  marked  an  era  in  electrical  science, 
and  who  was  the  first  in  this  country  to  apply  it  to  the  treat- 
ment of  disease.  The  presence  of  frictional  electricity  is  mani- 
fested by  the  following  effects  : 

1.  Luminous^  as  when  lightning  flashes  through  the  sky. 

2.  Mechanical^  as  when  lightning  strikes  an  object,  rending 
and  destroying  it. 

3.  Calorific^  when  the  object  struck  is  at  the  same  time 
set  on  fire. 

4.  Chemical^  as  shown  by  its  power  to  convert  oxygen 
into  ozone.  The  change  in  the  atmosphere  after  a  thunderstorm 
is  due  to  the  development  of  ozone  on  a  large  scale  by  the 
lightning.  Milk  is  soured  during  a  thunderstorm  by  the 
chemical  action  of  lightning. 

5.  Magnetic.  When  masses  of  metal  receive  a  lightning 
stroke  and  afterward  exhibit  magnetic  properties. 

6.  Physiological^  as  when  a  person  has  survived  a  stroke 
to  remain  paralyzed  from  the  tremendous  shock  to  the  nerves  ; 
or  as  in  those  rare  instances  where  sight  or  hearing  has  been 
suddenly  restored  by  the  same  means. 

ATTRACTION  AND  REPULSION. 

Previous  to  the  investigations  of  Gilbert,  in  1600,  jet  was 
the  only  substance  known  to  possess  the  same  peculiar  power 

(48) 


FRANKLINISM. 


49 


of  attraction  and  repulsion  first  discovered  in  amber.  Subse- 
quent observers  have  established  the  fact  that  under  certain 
conditions,  all  substances  exhibit,  to  a  greater  or  less  degree, 
the  same  properties. 

Fig.  6  illustrates  these  phenomena. 
A  glass  rod,  G,  having  been  excited 
by  rubbing  with  a  silk  handkerchief, 
is  brought  near  two  straws,  a  5, 
suspended  by  fibers  of  silk  thread. 
They  are  attracted  by  the  glass  for 
an  instant  and  then  repelled,  not 
only  by  the  glass,  but  by  each  other, 
in  the  direction  marked  by  the  dotted  lines  +  +.  Again,  rub 
a  stick  of  sealing-wax  or  shellac  with  flannel  and  bring  it 
near  the  straws  :  they  will  behave  as  before.  If,  however,  the 
wax  be  presented  to  them  while  repelled  by  glass,  they  will 
be  instantly  attracted  by  the  wax.  If  an  excited  rod  of  glass 
be  brought  near  one  straw  and  another  of  wax  near  the  sec- 
ond straw,  while  being  respectively  repelled  from  the  excited 
rods,  they  will  be  mutually  attracted  ;  hence  the  law  of  elec- 
trical attraction : 

Bodies  electrified  alike  repel^  those  electrified  unlike  attract 
each  other. 

The  phenomena  of  attraction  and  repulsion  are  exhibited 
by  all  forms  of  electricity,  but  franklinic  electricity  excels 
them  all  in  exerting  this  influence  at  a  distance.  Its  force  varies 
inversely  as  the  square  of  the  distance  between  the  bodies, 
through  which  this  influence  is  exerted. 

POSITIVE  AND  NEGATIVE  ELECTRICITY. 

The  form  of  electricity  developed  by  rubbing  glass  was  for- 
merly called  vitreous^  because  it  was  erroneously  supposed  that 
the  opposite  kind  could  not  be  produced  from  glass.    That  kind 


50 


FEANKLINISM. 


developed  from  resin  was  called  resinous  for  a  similar  reason. 
It  is  now  known  that  the  kind  of  electricity  depends  not  alone 
upon  the  substance  rubbed,  but  also  upon  the  substance  with 
which  it  is  rubbed.  Resinous  electricity  may  be  excited  in  glass 
by  friction  with  fur,  and  vitreous  from  resin,  when  rubbed  with 
amalgam  spread  on  leather.  Vitreous  electricity  is  now  called 
positive,  and  is  marked  with  the  sign  -}-,  while  resinous  electricity 
is  called  negative,  and  marked  with  the  sign  — .  Since  bodies 
in  a  like  electrical  state  repel,  and  those  unlike  attract,  it  is  easy 
to  determine  by  comparison  whether  an  electrified  body  is  posi- 
tive or  negative. 

THE  ELECTROSCOPE. 


This  is  an  instrument  for  detecting  minute 
quantities  of  static  electricity,  and  determining 
whether  a  given  charge  is  positive  or  negative. 
It  consists  of  two  strips  of  gold-leaf,  hung 
together  by  the  upper  ends  to  a  metal  rod. 
This  rod  passes  through  the  stopper  in  the  neck 
of  the  glass  bottle  within  which  the  gold-leaves 


Fig.  7.  hang.    The  upper  end  of  the  rod  terminates 

ELECTROSCOPE.     .  •  i    i     i   ^    i   i,  t 

Ht.i2in.  Diain.4i4in.      ^  nickel-plated  Drass  disc. 

PHENOMENA  OBSERVED  ON  ATTEMPTING  TO  TEST  AN  ELECTRIFIED 

OBJECT. 

1.  Rub  a  glass  rod  briskly  and  bring  it  near  the  disc,  the 
gold-leaves  will  become  charged  with  the  same  kind  of  electricity, 
and  repel  each  other. 

2.  While  they  are  mutually  repelled,  touch  the  disc  with  the 
finger,  they  will  instantly  collapse. 

3.  Remove  the  finger,  and  then  the  glass  rod,  the  leaves 
will  separate  again  owing  to  their  being  similarly  electrified. 

4.  Now  bring  the  glass  rod  near,  they  collapse. 

5.  When  brought  nearer  still,  they  separate  again. 


FRANKLINISM. 


51 


6.  Remove  the  rod  a  little,  they  collapse. 

7.  Remove  it  further,  they  separate  again  and  remain  apart, 
showing  that  there  is  now  a  charge  in  the  electroscoi)e. 

8.  Xow  bring  near  the  disc -a  rod  of  sealing-wax  or  hard  rub- 
ber, electrified  by  rubbing,  the  leaves  fly  still  further  apart. 

9.  Take  the  rod  away,  and  they  resume  their  former  diver- 
gence. 

TO  TEST  AN  ELECTRIFIED  OBJECT. 

To  discover  which  hind  of  electricity  it  is  charged  loith^ 
proceed  as  above  described,  except  8  and  9.  After  having 
secured  a  charge  in  the  electroscope  from  a  glass  rod,  bring 
the  object  to  be  examined  near  the  instrument.  If  it  is  charged 
with  negative  electricity,  the  gold-leaves  will  behave  as  when 
the  rod  of  sealing-wax  was  presented  to  the  disc ;  if  positive, 
it  will  not  disturb  the  gold-leaves. 

To  discover  if  an  object  is  electrified  at  all.  Bring  it  near 
the  disc  when  the  electroscope  contains  no  charge,  and  the  leaves 
are  not  divergent.  If  the  object  is  electrified,  the  leaves 
instantly  fly  apart ;  if  it  is  not  electrified,  they  are  not  disturbed. 

EXPLANATION  OF  THE  PHENOMENA  OBSERVED. 

1.  At  first  the  plate  and  leaves  are  not  electrified,  and  the 
glass  rod  (being  -y)  attracts  —  electricity  to  the  disc,  and  repels 
-f  electricity  to  the  leaves,  and  they  repel  each  other. 

2.  The  hand  and  body  become  a  part  of  the  electroscope  . 
when  the  disc  is  touched,  and  the  -f  electricity  repelled  by  the 
glass  passes  through  the  body  to  the  earth,  the  —  electricity  being 
retained  in  the  disc  chiefly  by  the  attraction  of  the  glass  rod. 

3.  Removal  of  finger  and  glass  rod  permits  the  —  electricity 
to  spread  over  disc  and  leaves,  and  the  latter  again  diverge. 

4.  The  glass  rod  brought  near  now  attracts  the  —  electricity 
to  the  disc ;  there  is  none  left  free  in  the  leaves,  and  they  collapse. 


52 


FRANKLINISM. 


5.  The  glass  rod,  on  approaching  nearer,  sets  more  electricity 
free  in  the  disc  and  leaves,  and  the  same  process  is  begun,  and 
continued  in  6th  and  7th,  as  took  place  at  first. 

8.  When  the  leaves  are  divergent  from  the  positive  charge 
produced  by  the  glass  rod,  if  a  rod  of  sealing-wax,  or  a  piece  of 
rubber  electrified  by  friction,  be  brought  near,  being  negative  it 
repels  the  —  electricity  from  the  disc  to  the  leaves,  and  they 
diverge  still  more. 

The  electrical  condition  of  a  patient  after  receiving  a  charge 
may  be  determined  in  the  same  way,  provided  the  electroscope 
is  not  brought  near  enough  the  machine  to  be  influenced  by  the 
charge  escaping  from  its  surface. 

CONDUCTORS  AND  NON-CONDUCTOES  OR  INSULATORS. 

Bodies  that  have  been  electrically  excited  return  to  a  neutral 
condition  after  a  time,  under  the  influence  of  the  surrounding  air, 
but  they  may  be  made  to  do  so  instantly  if  touched  by  the  hand, 
a  metal  wire,  etc.  A  rod  of  glass  or  sealing-wax  held  in  contact 
with  them  does  not  lessen  their  electrical  excitement.  Those 
objects,  such  as  the  hand,  metal  wire,  etc.,  which  readily  permit 
the  passage  of  electricity  over  them,  are  called  conductors.  Glass, 
resin,  and  other  substances  which  resist  the  passage  of  electricity, 
are  called  non-conductors  or  insulators.  Heat  lessens  the  con- 
ducting power  of  metals,  while  it  increases  that  of  most  other 
substances. 

These  terms  are  relative,  as  there  is  no  such  thing  as  perfect 
insulators,  or  perfect  conductors.  The  presence  of  moisture  de- 
posited by  the  air  upon  its  surface  converts  the  best  insulator 
into  a  conductor. 

DISCHARGE. 

When  an  object  is  restored  to  a  neutral  condition  by  the  touch 
of  a  conductor,  it  is  said  to  be  discharged.    Any  excited  or 


FRANKLINISM. 


53 


charged  body  may  be  discharged  by  connecting  it  with  the 
ground  by  a  good  conductor,  or  by  passing  it  through  a  flame. 

INSULATION. 

A  body  is  said  to  be  insulated  when  it  is  supported  or  sur- 
rounded by  some  badly  conducting  substance  which  prevents  free 
escape  of  electricity ;  when  it  is  important  to  keep  electricity 
from  escaping,  supports  of  glass,  shellac,  india-rubber  or  other 
non- conducting  substance,  are  used. 

ACCIDEXTAL  INSULATION  OF  A  DWELLING-HOUSE. 

.  An  instance"^  of  this  was  reported  some  years  ago  as  having 
occurred  in  New  York  city.  ''A  new  house  was  so  thoroughly 
insulated  in  its  construction,  that  the  electricity  set  free  by  fric- 
tion of  carpets  and  furniture  by  the  inmates,  having  no  way  to 
escape,  accumulated  to  such  an  extent,  that  shocks  were  felt,  and, 
in  the  dark,  sparks  were  seen  proceeding  from  the  fingers,  on 
touching  the  door-handles  and  other  metallic  objects  in  the  house, 
and  even  when  shaking  hands.  A  ground  connection  being 
made  from  the  interior  of  the  house,  the  annoying  phenomena 
ceased."  A  similar  instance  was  reported  in  the  local  papers  as 
having  occurred  in  Iowa  last  year,  and  in  this  city  as  least  one 
instance  of  the  kind  has  come  to  our  knowledge  recently. 

Many  bodies  formerly  supposed  to  be  incapable  of  being  elec- 
trified are  found  such  good  conductors,  that  electricity  flows  away 
as  fast" as  excited,  and  when  they  are  properly  insulated  are  easily 
electrified. 

Glass,  when  kept  dry  and  clean,  is  one  of  the  best  insulators 
for  practical  purposes ;  and  if  coated  while  hot  with  shellac 
varnish,  deposits  of  moisture  on  its  surface  will  interfere  but  little 
with  its  insulating  power. 


Prof.  Loomis,  1850. 


FRANKLINISM. 


INDUCTION. 

A  body  may  be  charged  with  electricity  without  touching  it, 
by  bringing  near,  but  not  in  contact  with  it,  an  electrified  body. 
This  is  electrifying  hy  induction^  and  the  charge  received  will  be 
opposite  to  that  possessed  by  the  inducing  body.  Newton  was 
the  first  to  discover  that  when  one  surface  of  a  plate  of  glass  is 
charged  with  positive  electricity  by  friction,  a  negative  charge 
appears  on  the  opposite  surface  without  friction. 

DIELECTRIC. 

The  plate  of  glass  or  other  substance  through  which  the 
charge  is  propagated  is  called  a  dielectric. 

CONDUCTION. 

When  a  body  is  charged  with  electricity  by  actual  contact 
with  an  electrified  body  it  is  called  charging  bj^  condueUon. 

INDUCTION  AND  CONDUCTION  COMPARED. 


BY  INDUCTION. 

1.  The  inducing  body  does  not  lose 
any  part  of  its  electricity. 

2.  The  opposite  kind  of  electricity 
is  given  to  the  induced  body. 

3.  The  object  to  be  electrified  must 
be  in  contact  with  the  earth,  either 
directly  or  by  means  of  a  good  con- 
ductor. 


BV  CONDUCTION. 

1.  The  conducing  body  loses  part 
of  its  electricity. 

2.  The  same  kind  of  electricity  is 
given  to  the  body  acted  upon. 

3.  The  object  to  be  electrified  must 
be  insulated  from  the  earth. 


RETURN  SHOCK. 

Sometimes  when  a  charged  conductor  is  suddenly  discharged 
a  shock  may  be  induced  in  persons  standing  near.  This  is 
called  a  "return  shock"  or  "back  stroke,"  and  is  sometimes 
felt  by  persons  standing  on  the  ground  at  some  distance  from 
an  object  struck  by  lightning. 


FRANKLIXISM. 


55 


DISTRIBUTION  OF  ELECTRICITY. 

Electricity  may  exist  on  a  surface  as  a  charge,  or  flow  over 
it  as  a  current. 

Tlie  charge  is  the  amount  of  electricity  produced,  excited  or 
set  free  in  any  body.  When  two  bodies  are  rubbed  together, 
the  one  whose  particles  are  most  easily  moved  by  friction 
becomes  negatively  electrified  ;  the  harder  body,  positively 
electrified.  Two  plates  of  the  same  material  may  become 
oppositely  electrified  when  they  difier  in  temperature,  the  warm 
one  becoming  positive,  the  cold  ,one  negative.  A  charge  is 
not  spread  uniformly  over  a  surface ;  there  is  more  on  the 
edges  and  corners  than  on  flat  surfaces.  Good  conductors  allow 
electricity  to  move  freely  over  or  through  them ;  and  if  a 
charge  be  given  to  one  part  it  instantly  spreads  over  the  whole 
surface.  A  charge  given  to  a  poor  conductor  takes  a  long 
time  to  distribute  itself,  and  in  many  instances  is  practically 
confined  to  the  part  that  received  it. 

When  a  charge  of  electricity  is  constantly  carried  oft*  and 
as  constantly  renewed,  it  constitutes  a  current. 

RESISTANCE. 

Resistance  is  the  converse  of  conduction.  It  may  be  defined 
as  that  quality  of  a  conductor  that  impedes  the  passage  of 
electricity. 

ELECTRO-MOTIVE  FORCE. 

Electro-motive  force  is  the  power  that  urges  electricity  for- 
ward, or  causes  it  to  move  from  one  point  to  another.  It  may 
be  called  the  propelling  force. 

POTENTIAL  OR  TENSION. 

Potential  or  tension  may  be  briefly  explained  as  the  electric 
levels  and  usually  refers  to  the  diffierence  between  the  electric 


56 


FRANKLINISM. 


distribution  or  condition  of  any  object  and  that  of  the  earth. 
When  the  potential  of  the  object  is  above  that  of  the  earth, 
electricity  tends  to  escape  from  it  to  the  earth.  When  it  is 
below  that  of  the  earth,  electricity  passes  from  the  earth  to  the 
object.  It  is  evident  that  the  greater  the  surface  over  which 
electricity  is  diffused  the  less  its  potential  at  any  given  point. 

DIFFERENCE  OF  POTENTIAL. 

When  any  two  objects  are  compared,  the  ditference  in 
electric  level  is  called  difference  of  potential ;  the  greater  this 
difference,  the  greater  the  electro-motive  force,  or  power  of  over- 
coming the  resistance,  between  them.  Whenever  a  difference 
of  potential  exists  between  two  objects  that  are  brought  within 
the  sphere  of  mutual  attraction  or  repulsion,  there  is  a  ten- 
dency for  electricity  to  seek  an  equilibrium.  An  example  of 
extreme  difference  in  potential  may  be  found  in  violent  thunder- 
storms, when  the  earth  and  clouds  have  so  great  a  difference 
of  electrical  level  that  electricity  can  no  longer  pass  silently 
between  them  on  the  trees,  spires,  and  other  natural  conduc- 
tors, but  darts  in  forked  streaks  or  enormous  flashes  over  miles 
of  surface  at  every  discharge. 

MUTUAL  POTENTIAL. 

The  mutual  potential  of  two  objects  is  measured  by  the 
amount  of  work  done  when  allowed  to  separate  under  the  influ- 
ence of  mutual  repulsion,  or  to  come  together  under  the  influence 
of  mutual  attraction.  Induction  can  only  take  place  between 
objects  of  different  potential. 

QUANTITY. 

Quantity  refers  to  the  amount  of  electricity  required  to  re- 
store the  equilibrium  between  two  unequally  electrified  bodies. 


FRANKLINISM. 


57 


DENSITY. 

Density  is  the  amount  of  electricity  on  a  given  surface  at  any 
moment  while  quantity  is  the  total  amount  generated  by  the 
machine.  Density  is  the  same  on  all  points  of  a  ball,  but  on  a 
plate  it  is  greatest  at  the  edges,  and  on  a  pointed  conductor,  at  the 
points. 

AN  ACCUMULATOR. 

An  accumulator  is  an  apparatus  for  receiving  and  retaining 
large  quantities  of  electricity. 

THE  LEYDEN  JAR  AND  DISCHARGER. 

The  Leyden  jar,  or  jar  of  Kleist,  used  with 
modern  electrical  machines  as  an  accumulator 
or  condenser,  was  invented  nearly  at  the  same 
date  both  at  Leyden  and  by  Kleist,  of  Cam- 
min.  As  usually  made,  it  consists  of  a  wide- 
mouthed,  glass  jar,  J,  with  a  coating  of  tinfoil 
pasted  inside  and  outside  to  within  three  or  four 
inches  of  the  top.  The  mouth  is  closed  with 
a  wooden  stopper  through  which  passes  a  brass  rod,  K,  terminating 
two  or  three  inches  above  the  jar  in  the  ball  B.  To  the  lower  end 
of  the  rod  is  fastened  a  strip  of  foil  or  chain  which  extends  to  the 
bottom  of  the  jar.  The  tinfoil  coatings  are  two  conductors,  which 
are  insulated  from  each  other  by  the  glass  jar  upon  which  they 
are  fastened. 

If  the  outer  coating  be  connected  with  the  earth,  either  by 
holding  it  in  the  hand  or  attaching  it  to  a  metal  chain,  and  the 
brass  knob  be  brought  near  to  the  conductor  of  an  electrical  ma- 
chine, bright  sparks  will  pass  between  the  knob  and  the  con- 
ductor. The  positive  electricity  conveyed  to  the  inside  of  the  jar 
acts  inductively,  through  the  glass^  upon  the  outer  coating,  pro- 
ducing a  negative  charge  in  it,  and  driving  off  its  positive  elec- 


58 


FRANKLINISM. 


tricity  through  the  hand  or  chain  to  the  ground.  It  is  more  cor- 
rect to  say  that  the  positive  and  negative  charges  are  on  the 
opposite  sides  of  the  glass  {dielectric)^  for  the  tinfoil  coatings  serve 
merely  as  conductors  to  distribute  and  carry  off  the  electricity. 

THE  DISCHARGER. 

The  one  shown  in  Fig.  8  consists  of  a  curved  brass  rod,  C, 
terminating  in  the  brass  balls  A  A.  The  handle  is  of  hard 
rubber.  To  use  it^  hold  the  lower  ball  near  the  outer  coating  of 
J  and  bring  the  uppei-  ball  near  B,  when  instantly  a  brilliant 
flash,  accompanied  by  a  sharp  report,  will  be  seen  to  pass  between 
the  knob  and  the  ball.  This  restores  the  electrical  equilibrium 
or  discharges  the  jar.  If  the  fingers  are  brought  in  contact  with 
the  knob  and  the  outer  coating  at  the  same  instant,  a  sudden 
painful  jarring  sensation,  termed  an  electric  shock,  is  the  result. 

It  has  been  found  that  the  charge  moves  in  curves  when  the 
jar  is  discharged,  similar  to  the  lines  of  magnetic  force  shown  in 
Figs.  2  and  3. 

RESIDUAL  CHARGE. 

If,  after  being  discharged,  the  jar  be  left  to  itself  a  few  minutes, 
it  will  be  found  to  have  again  acquired  a  small  charge.  This  is 
called  the  residual  charge.  The  flash  from  a  thunder-cloud  is 
exactly  analogous  to  the  discharge  from  a  Leyden  jar.  The  cloud 
and  surface  of  the  earth  form  two  coatings  of  the  insulating  layer 
of  air  between  them,  while  a  tree  or  a  steeple,  or  other  projecting 
object,  acts  the  part  of  the  discharging  rod. 

FRACTURE  OF  JARS. 

A  Leyden  jar  may  become  so  intensely  charged  that  the 
strain  occurring  at  the  instant  of  discharge  may  overcome  the 
cohesion  of  the  molecules  of  glass  and  a  fracture  occur.  This 
is  more  likely  to  take  place  if  the  jar  is  ver}^  clean  and  dry. 


FRANKLINISM. 


59 


Yarious  measures  have  been  recommended  to  avoid  destruction 
of  the  glass,  which  does  not  very  frequently  occur  when  the 
manufacturer  is  careful  to  select  well  annealed  jars.  Breathing 
into  them  through  a  glass  tube  occasionally  will  keep  the  inner 
surface  sufficiently  moist.  Instead  of  this,  a  slip  of  writing- 
paper,  about  one  inch  broad,  may  be  pasted  on  the  inner  sur- 
face of  the  jar,  so  as  to  cover  the  uncoated  space  to  the  height 
of  half  an  inch  above  the  upper  edge  of  the  inner  coating. 
This  is  believed  to  accomplish  the  purpose  by  extending  the 
charged  surface  through  the  medium  of  an  imperfect  conductor, 
and  thereby  diminishing  the  intensity  of  the  charge  at  that 
part  which  has  the  greatest  tendency  to  fracture. 

MODE  OF  DISCHARGE. 

Franklinic  electricity  has  immense  potential  or  power  of 
overcoming  resistance,  and  tends  to  escape  in  three  ways : 

1.  Conduction. 

2.  Disruptive  discharge. 

3.  Convection. 

When  electricity  is  drawn  silently  from  the  clouds  or 
machine  by  a  pointed  conductor,  it  is  an  example  of  a  dis- 
charge by  conduction.  When  lightning  produces  a  flash  of 
light  and  heat,  accompanied  by  sound,  or  a  jar  is  fractured  by 
an  electric  spark,  it  is  called  a  disruptive  discharge. 

The  glow  sometimes  seen  on  the  top  of  masts  and  light- 
ning conductors  during  a  thunderstorm  is  an  example  of  con- 
vection. The  same  thing  may  be  seen  about  the  points  of  an 
electrical  machine  in  motion  in  a  dark  room  ;  the  particles  of 
air  around  these  points  become  electrifled,  and,  being  repelled, 
others  take  their  place,  forming  currents.  When  electricity  is 
discharged  by  convection  (through  pointed  electrodes)  upon  any 
part  of  the  body,  it  produces  the  sensation  of  a  wind  blowing 
upon  the  part. 


60, 


FEAl^KLINISM. 


THE  CONDENSER. 

The  Leyden  jar  is  sometimes  called  a  condenser  because 
it  was  formerly  supposed  that  the  strong  electrical  effects  pro- 
duced by  it  were  due  to  the  condensation  of  an  electric  fluid 
or  fluids.  There  are  many  other  forms  of  condensers,  but  as 
they  have  not  been  employed  for  medical  apparatus,  no  descrip- 
tion is  needed  here. 

CAPACITY. 

The  capacity  of  a  condenser  is  measured  by  the  quantity 
of  electricity  of  unit  potential  which  it  can  contain,  or  it  is 
equal  to  the  charge  divided  by  the  potential. 

ELECTRIC  MACHINES. 

The  first  machine  constructed  for  producing  frictional  elec- 
tricity, of  which  we  have  any  record,  was  invented  by  Otto 
von  Guericke,  a  burgomaster  of  Magdeburg,  in  1672.  It  con- 
sisted of  a  globe  of  sulphur,  set  on  a  wooden  axle,  turned  by 
a  handle  and  rubbed  by  a  cloth  pressed  against  it  by  the  hand. 
In  1709  Hawksbee  invented  a  machine  in  which  a  glass  cylinder 
replaced  the  globe  of  sulphur. 

After  the  discovery  of  the  Leyden  jar  it  was  utilized  as  an 
accumulator.  The  machine  was  greatly  improved  from  time 
to  time,  but  owing  to  its  uncertainty  during  unfavorable  weather, 
and  the  great  care  required  to  keep  it  in  order  at  all  times,  it 
was  almost  universally  neglected  for  many  years  after  the  dis- 
coveries of  Galvani  and  Yolta  had  led  to  the  construction  of 
what  is  now  known  as  the  galvanic  battery.  Reynolds,  of 
England,  Arthius,  Charcot  and  his  pupil  Yigoureaux,  revived 
Franklinism,  to  which  Holtz  and  Topler  added  impetus  by  their 
valuable  improvements  in  the  electrical  machine.  Prof.  Atkin- 
son, of  this  city,  has  added  later  improvements;  so  that  now 


FEANKLINISM. 


61 


there  seems  nothing  more  to  be  desired  in  an  apparatus  for 
administering  franklinic  electricity  except  portability,  which 
has  not  yet  been  satisfactorily  accomplished. 


Fig.  9. 

THE  IMPROVED  TOPLER  ELECTRIC  MACHINE. 
Size  of  base,  12x26  inches. 

B.   Stationary  plate  supported  by  hard-rubber  insulators. 

N.   Cap  with  rubber  insulator  to  hold  upper  edge  of  B  firmly  in  place. 

A.  Revolving  plate  ]4:  inch  from  B. 

M.   Axis  on  which  A  revolves.   It  is  attached  to  the  upright  post  through  an  opening 

in  the  center  of  plate  B. 
E&  F.   Brushes  attached  to  plate  B  through  holes  near  its  edge. 


62 


FRANKLINISM. 


T&X.  Tinfoil  and  paper  inductors  on  the  surface  of  plate  B  next  the  upright  post  which 
supports  it.  The  tinfoil  inductors  are  represented  by  the  dark  shade,  and  the  paper 
inductors  by  the  light  shade. 

V  &  H.  Uninsulated  combs  with  brushes  in  front  of  A.  %  inch  from  its  surface.  They 
are  screwed  to  a  brass  core  at  the  center  of  the  hard-rubber  disc  M. 

D  &  C.   Ley  den  jars. 

P  &R.   Rods  sliding  through  the  knobs,  which  convey  electricity  to  the  internal  coating 

of  the  Leyden  jars. 
L  &  K.   Insulated  combs  connected  with  the  sliding  rods  P  and  R. 
W  &  Z.   Two  of  the  six  discs  or  carriers  attached  to  plate  A. 

S.  The  switch  for  obtaining  the  induced  current  from  the  outside  coatings  of  the 

Leyden  jars. 
O.   Adjusting  screw  to  tighten  or  loosen  the  belt. 
The  arrow  indicates  the  direction  the  drive-wheel  must  be  turned. 


CLAIMS  OF  THE  INVENTOR. 

Mr.  Atkinson*  has  clearly  and  concisely  stated  his  claims 
for  the  superiority  of  his  Improved  Topler  Electric  Machine 
over  any  static  machine  in  the  market  at  the  present  time, 
and  the  points  of  difference  covered  by  his  patents,  as  follows  : 

1.  The  outside  coatings  of  the  Leyden  jars  C  and  7>,  are 
of  sheet  brass,  nickel  plated,  and  are  screwed  firmly  to  the 
base,  forming  cups  into  which  the  jars  fit  closely,  and  are 
thus  held  in  a  fixed  position,  affording  a  firm  support  to  the 
parts  connected  with  them,  and  preventing  liability  to  accident 
or  injury  to  the  jars  or  plates. 

2.  The  induced  current  from  these  outside  coatings  is  con- 
veyed down  by  the  brass  screws  which  attach  them,  and  along 
copper  wires  underneath,  to  the  terminals  of  the  switch  S, 
through  which,  w^hen  closed,  it  passes  from  one  jar  to  the 
other  ;  but  when  open,  as  in  the  cut,  it  passes  by  the  brass 
sockets,  seen  on  the  edge,  which  are  also  connected  with  the 
terminals,  out  through  the  conducting  cords,  and  a  person,  or 
other  object,  connected  with  their  outer  extremities.  As  this 
induced  current  flows  simultaneously  with  the  direct  current 
from  the  inside  coatings,  the  switch  and  sliding  rods  place  it 
completely  under  control  of  the  operator,  either  for  medical 

*  The  Electrician,  October  1883. 


FKANKLINISM. 


63 


or  scientific  purposes.  With  the  switch  open,  a  slight  separa- 
tion of  the  electrodes,  P  and  produces  a  smooth,  gentle 
current ;  this  may  be  increased  to  any  desired  strength,  a  sepa- 
ration of  one-half  inch  producing  a  current  too  severe  for  the 
strongest  nerves.  Geissler  tubes,  attached  to  the  cords,  show 
the  beautiful  effects  of  the  interrupted  current.  Also  the 
induced  spark  below,  simultaneous  with  the  direct  spark 
above,  is  shown  when  the  switch  is  open  about  one-half  inch, 
as  in  cut. 

3.  The  brush-holders,  E  and  are  attached  to  the  plate 
B.  through  holes  near  its  edge  ;  thus  giving  a  direct  passage 
to  the  electricity  from  the  carriers  on  the  plate  where  it  is 
generated,  through  the  glass,  to  the  tinfoil  and  paper  induc- 
tors T  and  X.  By  passing  the  electric  charge  tlirougli  the 
glass  inside  its  edge^  an  insulating  margin  is  interposed  be- 
tween the  conductors  and  the  edge,  thus  preventing  loss  from 
leakage,  which  is  unavoidable  when  the  brush-holders  are 
attached  by  clamps  or  ears  on  the  edge. 

4.  The  carriers  on  the  plate  A  are  of  sheet  brass,  with 
raised  centers,  and  nickel  plated,  making  them  both  durable 
and  ornamental.  The  hard  nickel  surface  is  not  affected  by 
the  action  of  the  brushes,  or  the  electricity,  while  tinfoil  soon 
becomes  defaced;  and  the  carrier,  being  practically  one  piece, 
and  its  entire  surface  cemented  to  the  glass,  its  raised  center 
cannot  become  detached,  as  may  happen  when  the  center  is 
put  on  separately  over  a  tinfoil  base. 

5.  The  combs  V  and  also  II  and  Z,  radiate  at  an  angle 
of  45  degrees  from  the  central  disc  Jf,  to  which  the}^  are 
attached  ;  so  that  any  possibility  of  error  in  regard  to  their 
position,  or  of  displacement,  is  practically  impossible. 

The  following  improvements  may  also  be  noticed  : 
The  base  is  made  of  two-inch  strips,  glued  together  length- 
ways, and  heavy  cleats   screwed  on  underneath ;   giving  all 


64 


FEANKLINISM. 


the  advantages  of  iron  as  to  freedom  from  warping,  with  the 
insulation  and  elegant  finish  of  the  wood. 

The  iron  casting,  on  which  the  driving-wheel  is  mounted, 
slides  in  grooves  on  an  iron  plate,  and  is  moved  by  the  ad- 
justing screw       to  tighten  or  loosen  the  belt. 

The  hard-rubber  insulators,  which  support  the  plate  have 
soft-rubber  packing,  to  ease  the  pressure  on  the  glass. 

The  Leyden  jars,  C  and  Z>,  have  wooden  caps,  with  cork 
attached,  making  a  neat  ornamental  cap,  and  affording  a  firm 
support  to  the  brass  conducting  rods  which  support  the  sliding 
rods  P  and       and  the  combs  K  and  Z. 

The  machine  thus  described  has  only  two  plates,  but  four 
or  more  plates  may  be  used  if  desired.  Better  results  are 
obtained  by  increasing  the  size  rather  than  the  number  of  the 
plates.  Machines  with  plates  sixteen  and  eighteen  inches  in 
diameter  respectively  are  very  efficient ;  plates  twenty-five  and 
twenty-eight  inches  in  diameter  give  great  energy.  The  smooth- 
ness of  the  induced  current  increases  with  the  size  of  the  plates. 

The  energy  of  the  discharge  depends  chiefly  on  the  size  of 
the  Leyden  jars,  as  increased  size  gives  increased  storage,  and, 
consequently,  greater  energy  and  less  rapidity  of  discharge. 

THEORY  OF  ITS  ACTION. 

To  comprehend  the  action  of  any  electric  generator,  these 
essential  principles,  in  their  construction,  must  be  kept  dis- 
tinctly in  mind. 

1.  To  generate  electricity  is  to  create  a  difierence  in  electric 
potential  or  level. 

2.  The  efficiency  of  all  generators^  whether  batteries,  dy- 
namos or  glass-plate  machines,  depends  on  the  difference  of 
potential  which  each  is  able  to  create  and  maintain  within  the 
apparatus  itself. 


FEANKLINISM. 


65 


3.  The  worh  to  he  done  by  such  an  apparatus  is  the  restora- 
tion of  equilibrium  through  an  exterior  circuit,  and  may  consist 
in  producing  heat,  light,  chemical,  mechanical  or  physiological 
action. 

PRINCIPLES  APPLIED. 

As  the  plate  A  revolves,  the  raised  centers  of  the  six  discs 
or  carriers  are  brought  into  contact  with  the  wire  brushes 
attached  to  the  holders  E  and  each  opposite  pair  of  car- 
riers touching  opposite  brushes  successively  at  the  same  instant. 
The  friction  generates  electricity^  which  diffuses  itself  over  the 
carriers  on  A  and  the  inductors  on  with  which  they  are 
at  the  instant  of  contact  in  electric  connection.  The  potential 
of  carrier  and  inductor  during  contact  will  be  the  same  ;  at 
the  next  instant  the  carrier  passes  on  and  is  insulated  from  the 
inductor,  and  carrier  and  inductor  now  act  inductively  on  each 
other,  and  multiply  the  initial  charge  given  by  the  friction 
of  contact.  As  it  accumulates  it  spreads  over  the  paper  in- 
ductors ;  these  act  on  opposite  surfaces  of  the  glass  till  both 
surfaces  of  both  plates  become  charged,  the  initial  charge  being 
still  continued  by  the  constant  friction  of  carriers  and  brushes. 

The  question  now  arises  as  to  how  any  difference  of  poten- 
tial can  be  accounted  for,  since  both  sides  of  the  machine  are 
of  similar  construction,  and  the  mode  of  action  on  both  sides 
is  apparently  the  same. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  position  of  the  plates  being 
vertical,  their  lower  halves  are  nearer  to  the  earth,  by  their 
semi-diameter,  than  the  upper  halves,  and  consequently  more 
under  the  influence  of  its  inductive  action  by  the  square  of 
that  distance.  (A  horizontal  or  any  other  position  would  not 
prevent  this  result ;  it  could  only  be  done  by  placing  them 
between  two  worlds  of  equal  size,  and  equally  distant  from 
both).  The  lower  halves  are  also  in  close  proximity  to  the 
Leyden  jars,  the  driving-wheel  and  the  belt,  and  are  subject 


66 


FRANKLINISM. 


to  their  inductive  influence  :  the  plate  B  is  supported  on  two 
hard-rubber  insulators,  while  the  upper  half  has  but  one,  and 
hence  has  the  advantage  of  the  better  insulation  of  the  air. 

To  this  lower  half  of  and  subject  to  these  influences,  is 
attached  the  brush-holder  while  E  is  attached  to  the  upper 
half,  and  remote  from  them  :  hence  the  carriers  brushed  by 
and  descending  toward  Z,  must  acquire  a  higher  potential  than 
those  brushed  by  and  ascending  toward  K.  An  accumula- 
tion of  electricity  must  also  occur  at  the  lower  ends  of  the 
inductors  T  and  from  the  inductive  influence  of  the  earth ; 
and  as  the  brush-holder  F  is  placed  at  the  lower  end  of  X,  it 
furnishes  an  outlet  to  a  portion  of  this  charge,  as  seen  at  night 
by  the  brushes  of  light  from  this  holder  to  the  outside  of  the 
jar      and  other  parts  in  close  proximity. 

The  lower  end  of  T,  on  the  contrary,  is  well  insulated : 
hence  the  potential  of  T  from  the  heavier  charge  at  its  upper 
end,  and  the  better  insulation  at  its  lower  end,  must  be  much 
higher  than  that  of  where  the  influences  are  just  the 
reverse.  This  accumulation,  or  high  positive  potential,  at  the 
lower  end  of  Tmust  produce  a  high  negative  potential  at  that 
point  on  the  plate  A  and  its  carriers  as  it  revolves;  and  this 
is  shown  by  the  brush  of  light  marking  the  flow  of  electricity 
on  to  the  plate  from  the  uninsulated  comb  H ;  the  outflow  of 
the  current  received  through  Y  from  the  opposite  side  and 
upper  half  of  A.  This  brush  of  light  extends  upward,  as  the 
charge  increases  almost  to  the  comb  Z,  showing  the  high  nega- 
tive condition  of  the  plate  and  carriers  after  having  parted 
with  their  electricity  through  Z  to  the  jar  D.  And  here  let 
it  be  noted,  that  a  brush  of  light  between  comb  and  plate 
would  have  the  same  appearance  whether  the  flow  were  from 
comb  to  plate  or  from  plate  to  comb.  Hence  a  similar  brush 
extends  u])ward  from  the  comb  Z,  as  the  plate  and  carriers 
descend  charged  from  E^  and  gives  ofl*  their  electricity  to  Z. 


FKANKLINISM. 


67 


Following  any  opposite  pair  of  carriers,  as  W  and  Z,  we  find 
that  as  Z  passes  under  the  brush  i^,  W  passes  under  and 
as  Z  moves  on  to  the  insulated  comb  IT,  Wat  the  same  instant 
arrives  at  Z:  but  TFJ  as  already  shown,  has  a  higher  potential 
than  Z,  and  at  this  point  a  peculiar  adjustment  takes  place. 
IT  gives  up  its  charge  through  the  comb  Z,  to  the  inside  of 
the  Leyden  jar  D.  This  creates  a  positive  charge  on  the  inside 
of  which  induces  a  negative  charge  on  its  outside.  The 
electricity  thus  repelled  passes  to  the  outside  of  O,  making  it 
positive,  and  inducing  negative  on  its  inside ;  and  this  repelled 
electricity  flows  through  the  comb  ^to  the  carrier  Z.  Z  then 
passes  on  with  a  positive  charge  to  the  uninsulated  comb 
while  W,  having  become  negative,  as  previously  shown,  arrives 
at  IT.  Each  now  passes  under  the  wire  brush  attached  to  its 
respective  comb,  and  the  combs  being  attached  to  the  brass 
core  at  the  center  of  Jf,  the  carriers  are  put  in  electric  con- 
nection with  each  other,  and  their  potential  equalized  by  the 
flow  of  electricity  from  V  to  H;  so  that  each  arrives  at  the 
original  position  of  the  other  at  the  same  potential,  ready  to 
repeat  the  same  process. 

The  combs  IT  and  "PJ  Z  and  ZT,  have  also  performed  the 
same  oflice  for  the  several  sections  of  the  plate  Ay  as  it  has 
passed  them ;  so  that  the  section  from  V  to  Z"  is  now  at  the 
same  potential,  from  center  to  circumference,  as  the  section 
from  Hto  F\  each  section  having,  like  the  carriers,  performed 
its  work  on  the  Leyden  jars. 

The  section  from  E  to  II  having  given  up  electricity,  has 
become  negative,  while  that  from  Z^  to  1^  having  received  elec- 
tricity, has  become  positive. 

This  positive  potential  on  the  front  surface  of  J.,  at  this 
point,  induces  negative  potential  on  its  corresponding  back 
surface ;  positive  on  the  front  of      and  negative  on  the  back 


68 


FRAXKLINISM. 


and  on  the  inductor  X.  In  the  same  way,  but  in  reverse 
order,  similar  conditions  occur  on  the  opposite  side. 

It  will  thus  be  seen,  that  while  the  brushes  F  and  E  act 
as  generators,  the  brushes  Y  and  H  act  as  dischargers ;  and 
while  the  combs  K  and  L  create  a  difference  of  potential  in 
the  jars,  the  combs  Fand  like  their  brushes,  discharge,  and 
restore  equilibrium. 

When  the  difference  of  potential  between  the  inner  coatings 
of  the  jars  becomes  sufficient  to  overcome  the  resistance  of  the 
air,  a  discharge  from  the  inner  coating  of  D  to  that  of  C 
takes  place  through  the  sliding  electrodes  JR  and  P ;  and,  at 
the  same  instant,  a  discharge  from  the  outer  coatings  takes 
place  through  the  switch  and  connections,  from  C  to  to 
restore  equilibrium  between  them,  and  thus  complete  the  circuit. 

A  spark  and  snap,  from  the  resistance  of  the  air,  accom- 
panies the  discharge  between  the  inner  coatings  ;  and  the  same 
will  occur  between  the  outer  coatings  if  the  switch  is  open ; 
but,  if  closed,  the  discharge  takes  place  silently.  The  plates 
and  other  parts  being,  at  the  same  instant,  relieved  of  strain, 
there  is  a  restoration  of  equilibrium  in  the  whole  machine. 

The  above  explanation  applies  to  the  machine  when  it  is  put 
in  operation  from  a  state  of  absolute  rest ;  but  when  it  is  in  a 
high  state  of  activity,  there  frequently  occurs  a  reversal  of  poten- 
tial after  a  discharge,  as  shown  by  the  reversal  of  the  brushes 
of  light  from  the  combs.  To  account  for  this  it  must  be 
considered,  that  after  the  primary  discharge,  a  residual  still 
I'emains ;  this,  from  unequal  resistance,  may  be  greater  on  one 
side  than  the  other,  and  after  being  relieved  from  strain  by  the 
primary  discharge,  will  operate  to  give  a  slight  preponderance  of 
potential  to  that  side,  which  is  rapidly  multiplied  by  induction, 
as  the  rotation  of  the  plate  continues. 

A  reversal  can  also  be  produced  by  touching  the  inductors,  or 
parts  connected  with  them,  while  in  action,  which  would  reduce 


FKANKLINISM. 


69 


the  potential  at  that  point.  Special  conditions  may  also  exist  in 
certain  machines,  which  will  reverse  the  ordinary  mode  of  action  ; 
as,  for  instance,  a  difference  of  thickness  on  opposite  sides  of  a 
glass  plate  ;  or  in  opposite  jars. 

The  condition  of  the  air,  as  to  its  insulation,  influences  the 
whole  operation  of  this  machine.  An  air  space  insulates  the 
plates,  and  also  the  jars,  with  their  rods  and  balls,  from  each 
other ;  and  as  a  damp  atmosphere  lessens  this  insulation,  it  will 
decrease  the  energy  of  the  machine  in  like  proportion.  A  film 
of  moisture,  settling  on  the  plates,  will  often  so  reduce  the  insu- 
lation, that  the  slight  initial  charge  by  the  action  of  the  brushes  is 
conducted  over  the  damp  surface  as  fast  as  it  is  generated  ;  so  that 
no  difference  of  potential,  and  consequently  no  charge,  can  occur. 
And  as  the  machine  is  much  more  sensitive  to  such  influences 
than  the  operator,  the  latter  is  often  puzzled  to  know  why  it  will 
not  generate.  The  simple  and  effectual  remedy  in  all  such  cases 
is  to  dry  it. 

From  this  it  is  easy  to  see  why  a  Holtz  machine  is  so  much 
more  liable  to  stoppage  than  a  Topler ;  as  the  Holtz  receives 
only  a  small  initial  charge,  which  is  then  discontinued,  while 
that  of  thie  Topler  is  constant,  from  the  continuous  action  of  the 
carriers  and  brushes  ;  so  that  a  well-constructed  Topler  is  per- 
fectly reliable  in  any  kind  of  weather. 

The  views  here  given  are  not  mere  theory,  or  hasty  deduc- 
tions from  imperfect  data.  They  are  the  result  of  constant, 
daily  experiment  and  observation,  for  several  years,  with  both 
Holtz  and  Topler  machines,  of  almost  every  conceivable  style, 
size  and  variety,  including  a  large  number  of  the  very  best 
machines  in  use. 

CARE  OF  THIS  MACHINE. 

It  should  be  kept  free  not  only  from  damp,  but  dust  and  dirt 
of  every  description.  Since  the  attractive  influence  of  electricity 
affects  the  floating  materials  in  the  air  surrounding  the  machine, 


70 


FRANKLINISM. 


the  latter  should  be  inclosed  in  a  case.  When  dampness  inter- 
feres with  its  working,  wipe  the  glass-plates  dry,  and  set  a  lighted 
lamp  in  the  case  a  few  minutes,  removing  it  as  soon  as  sparks  can 
be  obtained.  An  alcohol  lamp  is  not  suitable,  since  the  com- 
bustion of  alcohol  produces  moisture,  which  will  increase 
instead  of  remove  the  difficulty.  A  small  lump  of  unslaked 
lime  kept  in  the  case  when  the  machine  is  not  in  use,  pre- 
vents any  deposit  of  moisture  on  the  plates.  If  it  becomes 
necessary  to  place  the  machine  before  an  open  fire  or  hot  stove 
to  dry  it,  always  turn  the  edge  of  the  plates  to  the  fire,  as  they 
are  less  liable  to  break  than  when  the  side  is  directly  exposed  to 
the  heat. 

ANIMAL  ELECTRICITY. 

J.  J.  Hemmer^  carried  out  with  great  perseverance  nearly 
five  hundred  experiments  on  men,  women  and  children,  from 
which  he  arrived  at  these  conclusions : 

1.  The  human  body  always  possesses  electricity — but  its 
strength  is  not  the  same  in  all ;  in  some  it  is  positive^  and  in 
some  negative. 

2.  The  intensity  and  nature  often  varies  in  one  and  the  same 
person. 

3.  The  natural  electricity  of  the  body  is  positive,  for  this  is 
always  its  character  when  there  has  been  no  violent  exertion. 

4.  This  normal  positive  electricity  is  changed  into  negative 
by  exposure  to  cold,  or  else  is  greatly  enfeebled. 

5.  The  same  change  occurs  from  over-exertion  or  lassitude. 

6.  The  natural  electricity  is  also  changed  into  negative  by 
sudden,  rapid  and  violent  motion. 

7.  Prolonged  mental  exertion  increases  positive  electricity. 
S.  Positive  electricity  is  increased  in  winter  and  diminished 

in  summer,  ceasing  entirely  during  perspiration. 

*  Green's  Journal  of  Physic,  1791,  iii,  p.  267. 


FRANKLINISM. 


71 


9.  This  electricity  is  not  clue  to  the  friction  of  the  clothing, 
since  it  was  still  observed  after  remaining  for  hours  on  an  insu- 
lating stool,  without  clothing. 

Ahrens,"^  in  1817,  also  experimented  extensively  in  the  same 
direction,  verifying  the  conclusions  of  Hemmer,  and  also  adding 
that  during  rheumatic  attacks  the  electricity  peculiar  to  the 
body  disappeared,  and  as  the  disease  gave  way,  gradually  re- 
turned. 

PHYSIOLOGICAL  AND  THERAPEUTICAL  EFFECTS  OF  FEANKLIXISM. 

This  form  of  electricity  very  early  in  its  history  acquired  the 
reputation  of  quickening  the  circulation,  promoting  the  glandular 
secretions  and  insensible  perspiration.  The  first  authentic  cure 
by  means  of  the  electrical  machine  occurred  in  1744  in  the  prac- 
tice of  M.  Kratzenstein,  at  Halle.  He  succeeded  in  curing  a 
contracted  finger  in  one-quarter  of  an  hour.  Experiments  in 
treating  the  sick  were  carried  on  in  nearly  all  countries  simulta- 
neously. M.  Jallabert,  of  Geneva,  in  1747  had  acquired  a  repu- 
tation for  curing  a  great  variety  of  paralytics,  and  the  following 
year  published  a  treatise  on  the  ' '  Eifects  of  electricity  upon  the 
living  body,"  in  which  he  stated  that  it  increases  the  circulation 
and  heat.  Mauduyt  four  years  later  published  a  complete  work, 
from  which  is  borrowed  the  bulk  of  the  literature  of  the  present 
day,  on  the  subject  of  the  therapeutical  applications  of  frank- 
linic  electricity.  • 

In  the  Philosophical  Transactions  f  we  find  the  first  record  of 
an  accident  happening  during  treatment.  A  young  person  being 
electrified  for  paralysis  of  the  right  arm  was  seized  with  general 
paralysis,  which  was  removed  by  subsequent  medication,  but  the 
arm  remained  incurable. 


*  Deutches  Archiv.  fur  die  Physiologie,  von  Meckel,  Bd.  iii,  p.  161  (1817). 
fVol.  48,  partii,  p.  785. 


72 


FEANKLINISM. 


Dr.  Franklin  describes  an  accident  which  occurred  to  himself 
while  treating  paralysis.  A  number  of  persons  joining  hands 
with  the  patient  and  each  other,  he  sent  shocks  from  a  battery, 
composed  of  several  Leyden  jars,  through  the  circle. 

At  one  time,  inadvertently  stepping  backward  under  an  iron 
hook  which  hung  down  from  the  ceiling  to  within  two  inches 
of  his  head  and  communicating  by  a  wire  with  the  outside  of 
the  jars,  on  attempting  to  discharge  them,  he  was  knocked 
senseless,  while  the  company  received  no  shock. 

Mr.  Singer  had  a  charge  passed  through  his  head  which 
gave  him  the  sensation  of  a  violent  blow,  followed  by  transient 
loss  of  memory  and  indistinctness  of  vision.  Mr.  Morgan  says 
that  if  a  strong  shock  be  passed  through  the  diaphragm,  sudden 
contraction  of  muscles  acts  so  violently  on  air  in  lungs  as  to  pro- 
duce a  shout ;  a  small  charge  produces  a  violent  fit  of  laughter. 
Persons  of  great  nervous  sensibility  are  aifected  more  readily 
than  others.  A  small  charge  through  the  spine  instantly  de- 
prives the  person,  for  a  moment,  of  muscular  power,  and  he 
generally  falls  to  the  ground.  If  the  charge  is  very  powerful 
instant  death  occurs.  Bodies  of  animals  killed  by  lightning 
undergo  rapid  putrefaction.    The  blood  does  not  coagulate. 

Dr.  Watson"^  described  the  case  of  a  child  seven  years  old, 
who  had  suffered  from  universal  rigidity  of  the  muscles  since 
infancy,  so  that  her  entire  body  felt  more  like  that  of  a  corpse 
than  a  living  person.  He  electrified  her  at  frequent  intervals 
from  the  middle  of  November,  1762,  to  the  end  of  January, 
1763,  when  every  muscle  had  become  flexible  and  she  could 
stand  and  walk  like  other  children  of  her  age.  Another  casef 
of  very  great  contraction  and  rigidity  of  the  sterno-mastoid 
muscle,  was  cured  by  sparks  and  shocks  directed  to  the  afiected 
muscle.    Dr.  Wilson  gave  electricity  a  trial  in  deafness  ;  he 

*  Phil.  Trans.,  vol.  53,  p.  10. 

t  Phil.  Trans.,  vol.  48,  part  i,  p.  97. 


FRANKLINISM. 


73 


cured  one  case  of  seventeen  years  standing,  but  failed  in  all 
other  trials.  Mr.  Wesley  employed  electricity  extensively  for 
the  benefit  of  his  followers  and  wrote  an  excellent  book  on 
this  subject.  He  regarded  it  as  almost  a  specific  for  obstinate 
headaches,  toothache,  sciatica,  cramp,  rigidities  and  wasting  of 
muscles,  although  he  acknowledges  that  he  failed  to  give  relief 
in  any  case  of  paralysis  of  over  one  year's  standing.  It  proved 
useful  in  infiammations  ;  dispersed  extra vasated  blood  ;  hastened 
suppuration  in  obstinate  swellings,  or  dispersed  them  without 
suppuration.  His  method  of  application  was  simple  electrifi- 
cation, or  charging  the  patient  while  insulated  at  first  one-half 
hour  morning  and  night,  especially  in  hysterical  or  nervous 
disorders ;  this  was  followed  after  a  few  treatments  by  drawing 
sparks,  and  afterward  moderate  shocks.  Tertian  and  quartan 
ague  were  usually  completely  cured  by  giving  shocks  to  all 
parts  of  the  body. 

Dr.  Antonius  de  Haen*  states  that  trembling  of  the  limbs, 
chorea,  and  some  cases  of  deafness,  are  cured  by  electricity. 
Mr.  Hey,  surgeon  of  Leeds,  successfully  used  it  in  several 
cases  of  amaurosis.  He  applied  it  twice  daily ;  the  patient 
being  insulated,  sparks  were  drawn  from  the  eyes  and  around 
the  orbit,  and  especially  at  the  points  where  the  superciliary 
and  infra-orbital  branches  of  the  fifth  pair  of  nerves  divide. 
After  this  operation  had  continued  half  an  hour,  slight  shocks 
were  directed  to  the  affected  parts,  sometimes  across  the  head 
from  one  tem])le  to  the  other,  but  chiefiy  from  the  superciliary 
and  infra-orbital  foramina  to  the  occiput.  Mr.  Ferguson  had 
excellent  success  in  rheumatism  by  drawing  sparks  from  the 
painful  parts  until  the  skin  was  red  and  pimpled  ;  glowing 
warmth  succeeded  the  application.  Old  sprains  were  cured  the 
same  way.    In  1744  it  was  recommended,  as  an  aid  in  restor- 


*Dr.  Priestley,  History  of  Electricity,  vol.  1,  p.  485 


74 


FKANKLINISM. 


ing  the  drowned,  to  pass  vigorous  shocks  through  the  body, 
especially  through  the  heart  and  lungs.  This  procedure  formed 
one  of  the  measures  recommended  by  the  humane  society  of 
England.  The  method  recommended  for  curing  toothache  was 
to  connect  one  wire  with  the  inner  coating  of  the  Leyden  jar, 
another  with  the  outer  coating,  and  include  the  tootli  be- 
tween the  ends  of  these  wires. 

In  recounting  the  experiments,  successes  and  failures  in  the 
use  of  static  electricity,  we  must  not  omit  the  occurrences  in  our 
own  country. 

In  1758  Benj.  Franklin  relates  his  experience  as  follows: 
*  ''Some  years  since,  when  the  newspapers  mentioned  great  cures 
performed  in  Italy  and  Germany  by  electricity,  a  number  of 
paralytics  were  brought  from  different  parts  of  Pennsylvania 
and  the  neighboring  provinces  to  be  electrified.  My  method  was 
to  place  the  patient  in  a  chair  on  an  insulated  stool  and  draw  a 
number  of  strong  sparks  from  all  parts  of  the  aifected  limb  or 
side,  repeating  the  treatment  three  times  a  day.  The  first  thing 
noticed  was  an  immediate  increase  of  warmth  in  the  parts 
treated,  and  the  next  morning  the  patients  usually  stated  that 
they  had  felt,  during  the  night,  a  pricking  sensation  in  the  flesh 
of  the  paralytic  limbs.  Sometimes  a  number  of  small  red 
spots  were  observed,  apparently  caused  by  the  shocks.  The 
limbs  seemed  to  have  more  strength  ;  for  instance,  a  man  that 
could  not  on  the  first  day  lift  his  lame  hand  from  his  knee 
could  the  next  day  lift  it  four  or  five  inches,  the  next  day  a 
little  more,  and  so  on,  until  the  fifth  day  he  could  usually, 
with  a  feeble,  languid  motion,  take  ofi*  his  hat.  Franklin  never 
observed  any  change  after  this,  and  suggests  that  the  journey, 
excitement,  etc.,  might  have  done  as  much.  The  cases  usually 
relapsed  after  a  short  time,  although  he  adds,  it  is  possible  that 


*  Phil.  Trans.,  vol.  1,  part  2,  p.  481. 


FRANKLINISM. 


75 


if  they  had  been  in  charge  of  a  medical  man,  who  would  have 
directed  proper  medicines  and  diet,  much  more  would  have 
been  accomplished." 

Brvdone,*  in  a  letter  to  Dr.  Whytt,  a  professor  in  Edin- 
burgh University,  relates,  among  other  cases,  that  of  a  woman 
deaf  six  months  in  consequence  of  a  cold,  whose  hearing  was 
entirely  restored  by  the  following  measures :  She  was  uninsulated 
while  the  operator  was  insulated  ;  he  held  a  wire  within  her  ear 
and  drew  sparks.  This  brought  on  profuse  perspiration  about 
the  head,  which  was  promoted  by  wTapping  the  head  in  flannel. 
At  the  end  of  five  days  the  cure  was  complete. 

FORMS  OF  FRAJNKLINIC  ELECTEICITY. 

•   Franklinism  may  be  administered  in  two  ways. 

1.  The  j^atient,  seated  on  an  insulated  stool,  receives  elec- 
tricity direct  from  the  accumulator  of  the  machine,  and  is  said  to 
be  positively  or  negatively  electrified  or  charged  according  as 
he  is  connected  with  the  positive  or  negative  jar. 

2.  Induced  franklinism,  or  the  franklinic  current,  consists 
in  placing  the  patient  in  the  circuit  whicli  electricity  must  tra- 
verse in  passing  from  one  jar  to  the  other.  The  physiological 
eff'ects  already  referred  to  belong  to  franklinism  administered  as 
a  charge.  The  franklinic  induced  current  produces  effects  very 
similar  to  tliose  of  the  secondary  faradic  current,  to  be  hereafter 
described.  It  excites  vigorous  muscular  contractions  with  a 
minimum  amount  of  pain,  and  on  some  persons  produces  an 
exhilarating  eft'ect  wholly  wanting  to  any  other  form  of  electricity - 


*  Phil.  Trans. 


76 


FKANKLINISM. 


Fig.  10, 


METHOD  OF  ELECTEIFYING  A  PATIENT.  POSITIVELY  OR  NEGATIVELY. 

Attention  is  called  both  to  the  arrangement  of  the  machine 
and  the  relative  position  of  patient  in  the  above  illustration. 

The  Machine.  Draw  the  horizontal  rods  apart  as  far  as 
possible,  and  connect  the  jar  that  is  not  to  be  used  with  the 
ground.  This  is  done  by  inserting  the  tip  of  one  conducting 
cord  in  the  ball  at  the  end  of  the  rod  which  passes  into  the  jar, 
while  its  free  end  lies  on  the  floor ;  or,  better  still,  is  connected 
with  a  gas  or  water  pipe,  which  will  allow  the  ready  escape  of 


FRANKLINTSM. 


77 


electricity  to  the  earth.  This  is  sometimes  called  a  ground 
connection.  It  is  not  essential ;  but  since  it  is  possible  for  the 
potential  of  the  charge  to  become  so  great  as  to  cause  it  to 
leap  across  from  one  rod  to  the  other,  thereby  at  the  same 
time  causing  a  severe  shock  to  the  patient,  it  is  advisable  to 
do  so.    The  switch  should  he  closed. 

The  Platform.  The  one  represented  above  has  hard-rubber 
legs,  but  glass  may  be  used  for  the  same  purpose.  Wooden 
legs  encased  in  glass  insulators,  such  as  are  used  in  telegraphy, 
answer  a  good  purpose.  If  a  film  of  moisture  or  dust  is  allowed 
to  collect  on  these  insulators,  electricity  will  escape,  and  the 
operator  will  fail  to  electrify  the  patient.  They  may  be  var- 
nished with  shellac  or  coated  with  parafiine  while  warm,  and 
the  deposit  of  moisture  will  be  prevented.  The  conducting 
portions  of  the  platform  must  not  touch  table,  chair,  or  clothing 
of  the  operator,  during  treatment. 

The  platform  may  be  made  large  enough  to  contain  several 
patients,  and  all  can  be  treated  at  once. 

The  Patient.  The  patient,  without  removal  or  disarrange- 
ment of  clothing,  is  seated  on  the  platform.  No  conductor 
should  be  in  contact  with  or  near  the  dress.  If  tables,  chairs, 
etc.,  are  accidentally  brought  near,  electricity  wjll  escape,  either 
in  the  form  of  sparks  or  silently,  and  the  result  of  treatment 
will  be  a  failure.  The  conducting  cord  or  chain,  which  must  be 
well  insulated,  is  attached  to  the  ball  surmounting  the  positive 
or  negative  jar,  according  as  the  patient  is  to  be  electrified 
positively  or  negatively.  The  cord  may  be  attached  directly 
to  the  patient  outside  the  clothing,  unless  that  be  of  silk  (in 
the  illustration  it  is  fastened  to  the  dress  at  the  nape  of  the 
neck) ;  it  may  terminate  in  an  ordinary  battery  handle,  which 
can  be  held  by  the  patient  without  inconvenience  ;  or  the  con- 
ductor may  be  fastened  to  the  platform  on  which  the  patient  is 
seated.    After  the  patient  is  in  readiness,  the  drive-wheel  of  the 


78' 


FRANKLTNISM. 


machine  is  turned  in  the  direction  of  the  arrow  ;  an  assistant 
is  necessary  unless  the  machine  is  run  by  a  small  motor.  The 
potential,  or  intensity,  of  the  charge  depends  upon  the  number 
and  rapidity  of  the  revolutions  of  the  revolving  glass  plate. 
It  is  customary  to  note  the  number^  of  turns  of  the  driving-wheel 
in  a  first  treatment,  and  on  subsequent  occasions  it  serves  as  a 
guide  in  regulating  the  charge. 

The  machine  may  he  completely  discharged  after  the  patient 
is  disconnected  from  it  hy  moving  the  horizontal  rods  together 
so  that  their  halls  touch.  Remembering  this  point,  the  operator 
will  be  saved  many  a  severe  shock  in  readjusting  the  machine. 

CONDUCTORS. 

Conducting  cords  and  chains  are  both  used  to  convey  frank- 
linic  electricity,  but  the  ease  with  which  it  leaps  off  from  its 
conductor  to  surrounding  objects  makes  it  essential  that  the 
insulation  be  very  perfect.  Conducting  cords  must  have  a 
double-woven  silk  cover ;  yet  this  does  not  wholly  restrain 
electricity  from  escaping ;  therefore  in  treating  patients  it  is 
important  that  the  cords  be  prevented  from  touching  them,  or 
other  conductors.  Some  operators  prefer  chains,  varnished  and 
inclosed  in  rubber  tubing,  which  may  be  still  further  insulated 
by  a  coating  of  paraffine. 

ELECTRODES. 

When  electricity  is  to  be  localized,  an  instrument  of  some 
form  is  required  unless  the  operator  chooses  to  employ  his 
fingers  as  a  conductor. 

The  electrodes  employed  for  franklinism.  differ  but  little 
from  those  used  in  the  early  days  of  its  application  to  medical 
treatment.  They  are  usually  made  of  metal,  attached  to,  or 
held  by,  a  long  handle  of  insulating  material,  covered  with 


FRANKLINISM. 


79 


cloth  or  sponge.  The  handle  should  be  made  of  glass  or 
rubber,  to  which  metal  points,  balls  or  rollers  may  be  attached. 
These  may  be  covered  with  cloth  or  sponge  ;  if  the  latter  is 
used  it  must  be  moist.  It  should  be  remembered  that  elec- 
tricity is  seeking  to  escape  from  the  patient  to  the  ground  to 
equalize  potential,  and  it  may  be  concenti-ated  at  any  point 
on  the  body  to  which  a  good  conductor  is  presented,  provided 
that  conductor  has  (/round  coniwction.  By  reference  to  Fig. 
10  the  electrode  is  seen  to  be  connected  with  the  floor  by 
a  chain,  which  latter  must  not  be  allowed  to  touch  either 
patient  or  platform,  lest  electricity  escape  direct  to  it  and 
prevent  a  portion  of  the  charge  from  being  localized  at  the 
part  to  be  treated. 


Length,  15  inches ;  width,  7^^  inches.       also    USed  tO   detacll   the  COrd 

from  the  machine,  or  to  replace  it,  if  accidentally  detached, 
since  any  approach  of  the  operator's  hand  to  the  machine, 
while  in  motion,  would  draw  off  the  charge  and  occasion  an 
unpleasant  shock.  This  electrode  should  not  have  ground  con- 
nection. The  second  terminates  in  a  metal  roller,  with  which 
the  muscles  may  be  rapidly  and  uniformly  compressed  or 
kneaded.  The  third  terminates  in  a  metal  ball  for  drawing 
sparks.  The  fourth  has  a  slender,  pointed  metal  tip  ;  its  use 
will  be  described  on  the  next  page.  The  last  three  have  a 
socket  in  the  metallic  portion  to  receive  a  cord  for  ground 


Fig.  11.  Electrode  Case. 


Fig.  11  illustrates  a  conve- 
nient case  of  electrodes,  which 
are  sufficient  to  meet  all  the 
requirements  of  franklin  ism  as 
at  present  administered.  The 
first  in  the  case  terminates  in 
a  hook  ;  its  use  is  shown  in 
Fig.  10,  to  hold  the  conductors 
away  from  the  patient.    It  is 


80 


FRANKLINISM. 


connection.  The  depression  in  the  back  part  of  the  case  holds 
conducting  cords,  and  at  each  end  is  a  space  for  the  metal 
handles  which  accompany  the  machine. 

THE  ELECTRO-POSmVE   OR  ELECTRO-NEGATIVE  BATH. 

When  the  patient  is  charged  with  electricity  as  described, 
and  no  conductor  is  brought  near,  the  air  will  gradually  carry 
off  the  charge  from  all  parts  of  the  surface,  and  in  a  few 
minutes,  the  time  varying  according  to  the  potential  of  the 
charge,  it  will  be  found  to  have  entirely  disappeared.  This  con- 
stitutes the  bath  which  may  be  continued  as  long  as  desired 
by  recharging  the  patient  .at  frequent  intervals  while  on  the 
platform.  It  will  be  positive  or  negative,  according  to  the  jar 
with  which  the  patient  is  connected.  The  time  occupied  in 
treatment  should  not  exceed  half  an  hour. 

The  charge  escapes  from  every  part  of  the  surface,  more  or 
less,  but  more  particularly  from  angles  or  projections — as  the 
elbows,  knuckles,  knees,  face  and  hair — creating  a  sensation  as 
though  air  were  smartly  blowing  upon  the  skin. 

The  bath  is  employed  to  improve  the  circulation,  promote 
perspiration,  to  relieve  nervousness,  pain  of  neuralgia,  rheuma- 
tism, spasms,  and  various  hysterical  affections.  This  was  one 
of  the  earliest  methods  of  treating  paralysis.  Mauduyt  re- 
ported excellent  success  by  the  employment  of  it  in  this 
disease. 

Effects  of  the  Electric  Bath. — They  are  claimed  to  be 
these  :  Acceleration  of  pulse,  ease  of  respiration,  increase  of 
temperature,  increased  urinary  secretion,  tranquillity  of  the 
nerves,  improved  innervation,  stimulation  of  the  absorbents, 
stimulation  of  all  the  functions. 

Some  authorities  advise  that  the  conductor  from  the  machine 
should  be  always  located  at  the  nape  of  the  neck,  from  the 


FRANKLINISM. 


81 


belief  that  by  this  plan  electricity  will  pass  directly  to  the 
nerve  centers,  and  from  them  along  the  nerves  from  their 
origin  to  the  periphery. 

ELECTRIC  WIND. 

When  a  patient  seated  on  an  insulated  platform  is  fully 
charged  with  electricity,  and  a  pointed  electrode,  like  the  one 
shown  in  the  electrode  case,  is  passed  over  the  surface  near 
to  it,  but  not  in  contact  with  it,  a  sensation  like  a  current  of 
-air  blowing  on  the  parts  over  which  the  electrode  is  moved 
will  be  felt.  This  is  called  ''electric  wind."  The  clothing 
being  an  imperfect  conductor,  small  sparks  will  be  seen,  and  a 
slight  stinging  or  prickling  sensation  be  felt. 

The  electric  wind  is  a  suitable  treatment  for  the  eyes,  ears, 
and  highly  sensitive  parts.  It  improves  the  nutrition  when 
frequently  applied,  ahd  is  valuable  in  some  hysterical  com- 
plaints, where  the  patient  is  unusually  sensitive  to  the  slightest 
shock. 

ELECTRIC  FRICTION. 

An  electrode  terminating  in  a  ball  instead  of  a  point  brought 
near  the  surfaces,  produces  sparks  with  more  or  less  shock, 
according  to  the  intensity  of  the  charge  and  the  nature  of  the 
clothing.  When  the  skin  is  covered  only  with  flannel  and  the 
ball  is  held  near,  as  it  passes  over  the  surface  a  multitude  of 
minute  sparks  are  produced,  accompanied  by  gentle  prickling 
or  stinging  and  contraction  of  muscles,  this  is  called  electric 
friction.  The  electrode  instead  of  the  skin  may  be  covered 
with  flannel,  and  the  result  will  be  the  same.  This  is  a  valu- 
able stimulant.  It  also  produces  a  reflex  action  through  its 
influence  upon  the  cutaneous  nerves.  It  is  specially  useful  in 
spasm ;  if  this  arises  from  irritation  within  the  brain,  electric 
friction  of  the  head  and  back  of  the  neck  is  indicated  ;  if  of  local 
origin,  friction  of  the  aftected  part  ;  if  due  to  sympathy  with 


82 


FRANKLINISM. 


some  distant  organ,  the  friction  must  be  applied,  as  before,  to 
the  diseased  part. 

ELECTRIC  MASSAGE. 

This  consists  in  kneading  and  rolling  the  muscles  with  the 
roller  electrode,  as  shown  in  Fig.  10.  When  applied  over  the 
clothing,  it  produces  a  succession  of  prickling  or  tingling  sensa- 
tions ;  applied  directly  to  the  skin,  it  produces  no  distinct 
sensation  apart  from  that  due  to  the  mechanical  effect  of  the 
roller. 

Electric  massage  excites  the  functions  of  organs  and  special 
senses,  stimulates  the  skin,  strengthens  muscles  and  improves 
the  nutrition  of  all  parts  to  which  it  is  applied. 

ELECTRIC  SHOCKS. 

An  insulated  patient,  thoroughly  electrified,  experiences  a 
severe  shock  when  an  electrode  is  brought  within  a  few  inclies. 
The  greater  the  distance  at  which  the  electrode  is  held,  pro- 
vided it  is  not  removed  beyond  the  influence  of  the  charge,  the 
stronger  will  be  the  shock.  In  the  earliest  applications  of 
electricity  to  invalids,  this  was  the  only  method  employed. 
The  powerful  shocks  which  first  experimenters  did  not  hesitate 
to  apply  to  the  eyes  and  head,  seem  to  us  now  but  little  else 
than  barbarous.  Shocks  of  reasonable  degree  of  severity  are 
useful  in  some  forms  of  paralysis  to  arouse  sensation,  but  should 
be  employed  with  caution  at  all  times,  as  profuse  perspiration, 
trembling  of  the  knees,  or  mental  confusion,  may  follow. 

Caution. — When  charging  a  patient  positively,  the  person 
turning  the  drive-wheel  is  liable  to  receive  a  disagreeable 
shock  from  jar       unless  it  be  connected  with  the  ground. 

If  the  cord  connecting  patient  with  machine  is  allowed 
to  touch  the  table,  clothing  of  operator  or  any  conductor, 
the  electricity  may  be  all  drawn  ofi*  and  the  patient  will  receive 
none  ;  and  since  the  patient  perceives  no  sensation  from  a  metal 


FRAi^KLINISM. 


83 


electrode  in  direct  contact  with  the  sldn,  this  "leak"  may  not 
be  noticed,  and  the  operator  may  be  at  a  loss  to  account  for 
his  failure  to  obtain  sparks  on  presenting  his  electrode.  If 
ground  connection  with  the  electrode  is  not  made,  no  sparks 
will  be  obtained.  Patients  should  not  expose  themselves  to 
the  open  air  immediately  after  this  form  of  electrization,  but 
delay  at  least  ten  minutes.     Violent  shocks  must  be  avoided. 


Fk;.  12. 

METHOD  OF  APPLYING  INDUCED  FRANKLINISM. 

The  arrangement  of  the  machine  and  position  of  patient, 
both  differ  from  that  shown  in  the  previous  illustration. 


84 


FRANKLINISM. 


The  Machine. — This  is  shown  in  a  glass  case.  The  switch 
must  he  open^  and  the  balls  terminating  the  horizontal  rods 
be  brought  very  near  together,  not  more  than  one-eighth  of 
an  inch  intervening  between  the  balls  for  a  first  treatment  in  a 
very  sensitive  patient.  Neither  jars  nor  electrodes  require 
''ground  connection."  To  obtain  a  current  from  the  outside  of 
the  jars^  the  cord  tips  are  inserted  in  the  metal  sockets  in  the 
base  of  the  machine, — as  shown  above.  To  obtain  a  current 
from  the  inside  of  the  jars^  the  cords  are  inserted  in  the  balls 
surmounting  the  jars. 

The  Patient. — The  patient  does  not  require  insulating,  but 
the  cords  should  be  held  away  from  the  clothing;  electricity 
readily  leaps  off  the  conducting  cord  in  a  shower  of  fine  sparks. 
All  forms  of  franklinic  electricity  pass  readily  through  ordinary 
clothing,  with  the  exception  of  silk.  The  patient  above  is  shown 
with  his  stockings  on.  Boots  or  shoes,  unless  very  thick  or 
containing  nails  in  the  soles,  need  not  be  removed.  Any  ordi- 
nary foot-plate  may  be  used,  although  the  one  shown  in  figure 
76,  with  insulating  soft-rubber  cover  between  the  metal  and 
tlie  floor,  is  preferable.  The  electrodes  handle  used  for  gal- 
vanism and  faradism  are  not  suitable  to  use  for  franklinism, 
as  they  are  not  sufiiciently  insulated. 

Franklinic  electricity  produces  a  'sharp  cutting  or  stinging 
sensation  in  the  skin,  when  given  with  the  horizontal  rods  very 
near  together  ;  when  drawn  some  distance  apart,  violent  shocks 
are  produced,  which  if  directed  to  the  head  or  neck  are  capable 
of  destroying  consciousness  altogether. 

The  strength  of  the  current  is  increased  by  separating  the 
horizontal  rods,  which  should  be  done  with  a  screw-like  motion, 
and  very  slowly,  to  avoid  unpleasant  shocks. 

Any  well  moistened  sponge  electrodes  may  be  used  when  the 
current  is  applied  directly  to  the  skin,  but  they  must  be  attached 
to  long  insulating  handles. 


FRANKLINISM. 


85 


DIRECTION  OF  THE  CURRENT. 

It  is  doubtful  if  the  franklinic  current  has  a  definite  direction, 
being  probably  propagated  in  waves  in  both  directions  at  the 
same  time.  According  to  the  indications  of  the  electroscope  the 
ball  surmounting  jar  C  (Fig.  9)  is  negative,  and  the  one  at  D  is 
positive,  or  the  current  from  the  inner  coatings  of  the  jars  may 
be  regarded  as  passing  from  D  to  C,  while  that  from  the  outer 
coatings  passes  from  C  to  D.  Muscular  contractions  may  be 
greatly  increased  without  pain  or  unpleasant  shock  by  placing  a 
hydro-rheostat  (Fig.  51)  in  the  circuit. 

Caution. — When  treating  a  lady  with  either  direct  or  in- 
duced franklinism  the  operator  should  avoid  presenting  the 
electrodes  over  the  metal  portions  of  crinoline  or  corset,  as  a 
series  of  unpleasant  shocks  to  all  j^arts  beneath  will  be  the  result. 

"When  applying  an  induced  current  through  thick  clothing  the 
horizontal  rods  should  not  be  drawn  further  apart  with  the  idea 
of  increasing  the  power  of  electricity  to  overcome  the  resistance 
of  the  clothing.  Such  a  proceeding  greatly  increases  the  pain 
and  the  disagreeable  effects  of  the  shocks  produced  and  will 
-detract  from  the  beneficial  effects  of  the  treatment.  A  current 
that  is  not  disagreeable  when  applied  direct  to  the  skin  some- 
times becomes  very  unpleasant  when  compelled  to  pass  through 
a  poor  conducting  material  before  reaching  the  skin. 

Dr.  Birch,  an  eminent  surgeon  of  the  latter  part  of  the  last 
century,  considered  franklinic  electricity,  in  the  form  of  a  cur- 
rent, a  sedative  ;  sparks  or  friction,  a  stimulant,  and  a  shock  a 
deobstruent.  Dr.  Cull  en  considered  it,  when  properly  applied, 
one  of  the  most  powerful  stimulants  of  the  nervous  system. 

The  following  precepts  will  be  found  useful: 

1.  Give  electricity  at  first  in  its  mildest  form,  and  increase  it 
gradually  as  the  patient  can  bear.  2.  Use  electrodes  attached 
to  long  insulating  handles.  3.  Do  not  neglect  the  employment 
of  other  means  while  electricity  is  being  tried. 


CHAPTEE  III. 

GALVANISM. 

Galvanism  is  that  form  of  electricity  generated  by  chemical 
action.  It  is  referred  to  by  different  authors  under  various 
names,  such  as  voltaism  or  voltaic  electricity  (after  Prof.  Yolta, 
of  Pavia),  chemic  (produced  by  chemical  action),  primary  (direct 
from  the  elements),  and  continued  or  constant  (because  the 
current  flows  without  interruption).  When  it  is  artificially 
interrupted,  it  is  then  known  as  the  interrivpted  galvanic 
current. 

The  first  recorded  observation  of  this  form  of  electricity  that 
we  find  was  made  by  Swammerdam,  the  Dutch  naturalist,  in 
1687.  During  a  visit  to  Tuscany,  he  showed  the  grand  duke 
that  when  a  portion  of  the  muscle  of  a  frog's  leg,  hanging  by  a 
thread  of  nerve  from  a  wire,  was  held  over  a  copper  support  so 
that  both  nerve  and  wire  touched  the  copper,  the  muscle  imme- 
diately contracted.  About  sixty  years  afterward,  Sultzer  noticed 
the  following  fact:  If  a  piece  of  lead  and  a  similar  piece  of 
silver  be  laid  together,  and  the  edges  of  both  be  brought  into 
contact  with  the  tongue,  a  taste  of  copperas  is  perceived,  when 
these  metals  separately  have  no  such  taste.  He  concluded  that 
some  peculiar  vibrations  took  place  from  the  contact  of  metals 
that  induced  this  sensation,  and  his  explanation  was  accepted  as 
correct  during  many  years. 

In  1786  Galvani  published  the  results  of  twenty  years'* 

Although  it  has  been  repeatedly  stated  that  Galvani's  discovery  was  accidental,  and 
due  to  a  physician's  prescribing  frog  broth  for  his  sick  wife,  we  find  that,  like  most  other 
important  discoveries  attributed  to  accident,  it  was  the  result  of  laborious  research. 
There  is  no  more  "  royal  road  "  to  the  discovery  of  scientific  facts  than  to  other  branches  of 
knowledge. 


GALVANISM. 


87 


experiments  which  had  led  him  to  the  conclusion  that  the  con- 
traction of  the  frog's  leg  when  brought  into  contact  with  two  dis- 
similar metals  was  due  to  electricity  generated  in  the  leg  itself. 
Yolta  pursued  the  investigation  of  these  phenomena  with  ardor, 
and  after  ten  years  of  experimenting  was  able  to  prove  that 
the  electricity  arose  not  from  the  muscle  or  nerve,  but  from 
the  contact  of  two  dissimilar  pieces  of  metal,  and  the  only  part 
the  muscle  of  the  frog  had  in  the  work  was  to  supply  moisture. 
He  showed  that  opposite  kinds  of  electricity  were  produced  on 
the  two  surfaces,  one  becoming  positively  and  one  negative^ 
electrified.  This  discovery  enabled  him  shortly  afterward  to 
construct  the  voltaic  pile,  from  which  all  the  galvanic  batteries  of 
the  present  day  have  been  developed. 

Many  authors,  regarding  the  researches  of  Yolta  of  more 
inportance  than  those  of  Galvani,  continue  to  give  the  name  of 
Yolta  to  this  form  of  electricity,  although  in  this  country  it  is 
generally  called  galvanism. 

THE  VOLTAIC  PILE. 

The  pile,  as  origitially  constructed,  consists  of 
pairs  of  zinc  and  copper  plates,  with  pieces  of 
flannel  or  blotting-paper,  moistened  with  an  acid 
or  saline  solution,  between  each  pair,  and  when 
the  pile  is  complete,  zinc  will  form  one  end  and 
copper  the  other ;  attach  a  copper  wire  to  each  end 
of  the  pile,  bring  the  free  ends  together,  and  a  current  will  be 
set  up  proportional  to  the  number  of  pairs.  If  the  free  ends  of 
the  wires  are  brought  near  each  other,  not  in  contact,  and  are 
immersed  in  water,  they  will  decompose  a  portion  of  it. 


88 


GALVANISM. 


THE  GALVANIC  CELL  OR  BATTERY. 

The  simplest  form  of  cell  consists  of  two 
pieces  of  dissimilar  metals,  partially  imm.ersed 
in  dilute  sulphuric  acid.*  The  metals  shown 
in  Fig.  14  are  zinc  and  copper.  If  the  zinc 
is  perfectly  pure,  no  action  takes  place  so 
long  as  the  metals  are  not  connected.  If  they 
are  made  to  touch  by  a  single  point,  either 
within  or  without  the  fluid,  or  if  they  be  connected  by  a  wire, 
chemical  action  at  once  begins  at  the  surface  of  the  zinc, 
electricity  is  generated,  which  passes  across  the  liquid  to  (or 
appears  at)  the  copper. 

THE  GENERATING  PLATE. 

This  is  the  name  given  to  the  zinc  or  other  substance  sub- 
stituted for  it  in  the  cell,  because  by  the  chemical  action  occur- 
ring between  it  and  the  fluid,  electricity  is  generated  or  set  free. 
It  will  be  found,  after  the  action  has  continued  for  some  time, 
that  the  zinc  or  its  substitute  has  lost  weight.  In  every  combi- 
nation that  plate  most  easily  acted  upon  by  the  fluid  becomes  the 
generating  plate. 

THE  CONDUCTING  OR  COLLECTING  PLATE. 

This  name  is  given  to  copper,  carbon,  platinum,  or  other 
substances  substituted  for  them  in  the  cell.  It  is  essential  that 
the  collecting  plate  shall  be  acted  upon  by  the  fluid  very 
slightly,  if  at  all.  After  chemical  action  has  continued  some 
time,  the  weight  of  a  carbon  collecting  plate  will  show  no  loss, 
copper  or  platinum  a  very  slight  loss. 


*  Unless  otherwise  stated,  dilute  sulphuric  acid  means  a  mixture  of  seven  parts  (by- 
measure)  of  water  with  one  part  of  commercial  acid. 


GALVANISM. 


89 


THE  ELEMENTS. 


One  generating  and  one  collecting  plate  form  a  pair  of 
elements.  It  is  essential  that  one  shall  be  acted  on  by  the 
fluid  more  readily  than  the  other. 


Fig.  15. 


COMPOUND  BATTERY. 

Several  cells  may  be 
united  to  form  a  com- 
pound battery,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  15.  This  illustra- 
tion represents  the  copper 
of  one  cell  united  to  the 
zinc  of  the  next  by  a  short 
wire,  and  the  current  pass- 
ing in  the  direction  of  the  arrows.  The  current  from  the  first 
C  and  last  Z  will  represent  the  total  strength  of  current  ob- 
tained from  such  a  combination. 

THE  CIRCUIT. 

This  includes  the  fluid  within  the  battery,  the  elements 
the  connecting  wires  and  any  intervening  body  with  which 
the  free  ends  of  the  wires  may  be  in  contact. 

A  SHORT  CIRCUIT. 

When  the  first  C  and  last  Z  are  united  by  a  short  wire, 
as  in  Fig.  15,  so  that  the  current  outside  the  cell  passes  di- 
rectly from  the  copper  to  the  zinc,  it  constitutes  a  short  circuit. 
When  the  current  passes  to  and  fro  between  the  copper  and 
zinc  within  the  fluid  it  is  also  called  a  short  circuit. 


CLOSED  CIRCUIT. 


The  circuit  is  said  to  be  closed  or  complete  when  the  ele- 
ments are  connected  outside  the  fluid.     This  may  be  done 


90 


GALVANISM. 


directly^  as  when  a  wire  joined  to  the  first  copper  element  is 
brought  into  contact  with  a  wire  joined  to  the  last  zinc  ele- 
ment ;  or  indirectly^  as  when  any  substance  or  body  (which 
permits  the  passage  of  a  current  through  it)  is  placed  in  con- 
tact with  the  ends  of  the  wires. 

OPEN  CIRCUIT. 

The  circuit  is  opeyi  or  hroken  when  the  current  is  arrested 
bv  disconnecting  the  wires  attached  to  the  elements. 

DIRECTION  OF  CURRENT. 

For  all  practical  purposes,  the  current  may  be  regarded  as 
starting  at  the  zinc,  passing  through  the  fluid  to  the  copper 
or  its  substitute,  from  thence  through  the  connecting  wires  and 
any  substance  intervening,  back  to  the  zinc.  It  may  be  briefly 
stated  thus  : 

"The  direction  of  the  current  in  the  fluid  is  from  zinc 
to  copper;  outside  the  fluid,  from  copper  to  zinc."  The  rela- 
tive size  of  the  elements  has  nothing  to  do  with  the  direction 
of  current,  which  will  be  the  same  if  the  zinc  has  a  surface  of 
a  square  inch,  and  the  copper  a  square  foot.  The  kind  of  ma- 
terial  used  for  elements  determines  the  direction  of  current, 
which  always  passes  within  the  fluid,  from  the  element  where 
chemical  action  takes  place  'most  freely,  to  the  element  where 
chemical  action  is  slight. 

THE  POLES. 

The  ends  of  the  elements  where  the  current  leaves  and  re- 
enters the  cell  are  called  poles. 

POLARITY  OF  THE  CURRENT. 

It  is  possible  to  show  by  the  electroscope  (Fig.  7)  that  the 
current  from  the  collecting  plate  is  positive ;  it  is  com- 
monly marked  P  or  +.     By  the  same  test  the  current  from 


GALVANISM. 


91 


the  zinc  is  negative ;  it  is  marked  N  or  — .  These  letters 
P  and  N  refer  only  to  the  poles,  and  not  to  the  elements 
within  the  fluid. 

POLARITY  OF  ELEMENTS. 

Since  like  electricities  repel  each  other,  and  unlike  attract, 
it  follows  that  the  portion  of  copper  within  the  fluid  at  which 
positive  electricity  collects  is  electro-negative,  and  that  part  of 
the  zinc  within  the  fluid  from  which  it  was  repelled  is  electro- 
positive. 

A  CUKRENT  IN  BOTH  DIRECTIONS. 

There  is  really  a  current  passing  through  the  circuit  in  both 
directions  at  the  same  time,  but  on  account  of  the  physiologi- 
cal and  chemical  effects  as  well  as  for  convenience,  electro- 
therapeutists  unanimously  agree  in  ignoring  the  fact  that  the 
negative  current  is  coming  from^  instead  of  going  to  the  zinc, 
and  the  current  direct  from  the  battery  cells  is  always  spoken 
of  as  passing  from  the  positive  to  the  negative  poles  outside 
the  fluid,  and  from  the  positive  to  the  negative  elements  inside 
the  fluid. 

POLARIZATION. 


At  the  moment  the  elements  within  the 
cell  are  connected,  the  acid  in  the  fluid  at- 
tacks the  zinc  and  dissolves  a  portion  of  it. 
This  chemical  action  generates  a  current  of 
electricity  which  decomposes  a  portion  of  the 
water  in  the  fluid,  and  separates  the  oxygen 
from  the  hydrogen.  Gases,  as  well  as  metals 
and  all  other  substances,  exhibit  polarity  when 
AtomVof  hydrogen  Compared  with  each  other.     Oxygen  is  always 

marked  +  collected  .        ,     .         i  i     i  •  - •       /  ,  a  mi 

upon— copper, atoms  negative  ( — )  and  hydrogen  positive  (+).  Ihe 

of  oxygen  marked  -       ^  ^     ^  J       b       i  \  ^  J 

^4r^ow9  ehow^dtre?-  electro-ncgativc  O  therefore  appears  or  is  set 
poiariiSnoccuS!^^  fi'ee  at  the  electro-positive  zinc  with  which  it 


Fig.  16. 


92 


GALVANISM. 


lunites  to  form  oxide  of  zinc  (the  latter  again  unites  with  the 
sulphuric  acid  and  forms  sulphate  of  zinc).  The  electro-positive 
H  is  set  free  at  the  electro-negative  collecting  plate,  and  collects 
in  bubbles  on  its  surface,  forming  a  film  over  it  in  a  short 
time  if  not  prevented. 

Hydrogen  being  more  easily  acted  upon  than  zinc,  by  the 
fluid  of  the  battery,  will  now  form  the  generating  plate,  and 
zinc  will  become  the  collecting  plate;  the  result  will  be  that 
the  current  will  pass  back  and  forth  entirely  within  the  fluid, 
and  cease  to  flow  through  the  wires  or  any  part  of  the  exter- 
nal circuit.  The  battery  is  now  said  to  be  polarized.  Since 
the  working  power  of  a  battery  is  destroyed  by  polarization, 
it  is  very  important  that  it  be  prevented,  and  various  methods 
of  doing  this  have  been  devised,  varying  according  to  the  kind 
of  battery  used  ;  among  them  may  be  named  the  following : 

1.  Shaking  the  elements  or  fluid  occasionally  when  in  use 
to  disengage  the  gas  bubbles,  and  cause  them  to  escape  from 
the  fluid. 

2.  Blowing  air  over  the  surface  of  the  conducting  plate  for 
the  same  purpose. 

3.  Adding  some  ingredient  to  the  fluid  which  will  unite 
with  the  hydrogen  as  fast  as  formed,  such  as  bichromate  of 
potash,  sulphate  of  copper  or  nitric  acid. 

4.  By  employing  two  fluids  instead  of  one,  as  in  the  gravity 
cell. 

5.  Making  the  collecting  plate  with  an  irregular  surface. 
The  platinum  element  is  an  example  of  this  kind.  It  consists 
of  a  silver  plate  corrugated,  and  covered  with  a  layer  of  granu- 
lar platinum,  so  that  a  multitude  of  points  will  prevent  ad- 
hesion of  the  gas  to  its  surface  and  facilitate  its  escape  from 
the  fluid. 


GALVANISM. 


93 


6.  Allowing  the  battery  to  rest  by  opening  the  circuit  a 
few  minutes,  permits  the  hydrogen  gas  to  escape,  and  restores 
the  current  through  the  external  circuit. 

7.  This  will  be  hastened  if  a  current  can  be  passed  through 
the  cell  in  an  opposite  direction  for  a  moment. 

LOCAL  ACTION. 

A  piece  of  pure  zinc  dipped  into  dilute  sulphuric  acid  is 
not  attacked  by  the  acid,  but  the  ordinary  commercial  zinc  is 
not  pure,  and  dissolves  when  placed  in  dilute  acid.  The  par- 
ticles of  impurities,  usually  iron  or  arsenic,  lying  in  contact 
with  atoms  of  pure  zinc,  form  a  closed  circuit  when  immersed 
in  fluid,  and  chemical  action  is  set  up,  which  generates  minute 
currents  of  electricity,  precisely  like  the  current  between  the 
elements.  These  minute  currents  use  up  the  fluid,  destroy  the 
zinc,  and  interfere  with  the  main  current.  When  local  action 
is  violent,  a  buzzing  or. hissing  sound  will  be  heard  within  the 
cell. 

AMALGAMATION. 

Since  chemically  pure  zinc  is  too  expensive  for  battery  pur- 
poses, a  substitute  for  it  is  found  in  common  commercial  zinc 
coated  with  a  thin  film  of  mercury.  The  zinc  is  then  said  to 
be  amalgamated.  Although  the  presence  of  the  mercury  hin- 
ders local  action  when  the  circuit  is  open,  it  does  not  interfere 
with  the  chemical  action  of  tlie  fluid  upon  the  zinc  when  the 
circuit  is  closed.    Amalgamation  is  accomplished  in  two  ways: 

1.  The  zinc  being  moistened  in  acidulated  water,  quick- 
silver is  brushed  over  it. 

2.  Bisulphate  of  mercury  may  form  one  ingredient  of  the 
battery-fluid,  its  purpose  being  to  keep  the  surface  of  the  zinc 
coated  with  mercury.  (This  must  not  be  used  with  platinum 
elements.) 


94 


GALVANISM. 


Whichever  method  is  chosen,  the  result  should  be  the 
same  ;  that  is,  the  surface  of  the  zinc  should  be  bright  as  silver. 

In  single-fluid  cells,  it  is  found  that  not  even  amalgama- 
tion entirely  stops  local  action,  when  the  circuit  is  open ; 
therefore,  to  prevent  waste  of  zinc,  some  device  is  necessary 
for  removing  the  elements  from  the  fluid  when  the  battery  is 
not  in  use. 

POTENTIAL. 

A  B  This  term  has  the  same 

significance  when  applied  to 
dynamic  as  to  static  electricity ; 
in  both  cases  referring  to  the 
Fig.  17.     '  "  clectric  level. "    The  method 

of  comparing  difterence  of  potential  with  difl'erence  of  water- 
level,  as  illustrated  in  Fig.  17,  gives  a  tolerably  clear  idea  of 
the  subject.  Two  reservoirs,  A  and  B,  containing  an  un- 
equal amount  of  water,  are  joined  by  a  small  pipe  C ;  water 
will  flow  from  B  to  A  until  it  stands  at  the  same  height  in 
both,  when  the  flow  through  C  will  cease.  The  diflerence  in 
the  original  height  of  the  two  columns  of  water  may  repre- 
sent the  difference  in  the  potential  of  two  elements  immersed 
in  battery  fluid.  This  diflerence  of  potential  is  developed  by 
the  chemical  action  within  the  cell,  and  a  current  of  electricity 
is  set  up  throughout  the  circuit  in  the  effort  to  equalize  the 
potential,  or,  in  other  words,  to  restore  'the  electric  level.' 

The  difference  of  potential  grows  gradually  less  and  less 
from  the  moment  the  circuit  is  completed,  and  when  the  fluid 
is  used  up  (exhausted)  or  the  battery  polarized,  the  potentials 
are  at  an  equilibrium  and  the  current  ceases.  As  the  length 
of  time  required  to  bring  the  water  to  the  same  level  in  both 
reservoirs  depends  upon  the  length  of  pipe  C,  the  diameter  of 
pipe  C,  the  freedom  of  C  from  dirt  or  debris,  the  difference 


GALVANISM. 


95 


in  level  to  start  with,  so  the  electric  current  is  similarly  modi- 
iiecl  by  the  length  of  the  circuit,  the  diameter  of  the  conduc- 
tors, the  freedom  from  debris,  such  as  rust,  dirt,  deposits  of 
crystals,  and  other  resistance  throughout  the  circuit,  and  the 
difference  of  potential  between  the  elements  when  the  battery 
is  freshly  started. 

Difference  of  potential  does  not  depend  upon  the  size  ;  it 
may  be  just  as  great  between  small  as  large  elements. 

JklATERIALS  OF  WHICH  THE  ELEMENTS  ARE  MADE. 

Many  different  metals,  and  even  two  fluids  of  different 
densities,  have  been  used  for  battery  elements.  Zinc  is  com- 
monly preferred  for  the  positive  plate  in  ordinary  batteries, 
while  either  copper,  platinum  or  carbon  is  selected  for  the 
negative  plate.  That  metal  which  is  most  easily  acted  upon 
by  the  battery  fluid  becomes  the  positive  plate  in  any  combi- 
nation. It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  terms  positive  and 
negative  here  refer  only  to  that  part  of  the  plate  immersed 
in  fluid.  Yolta  made  the  following  ingenious  table,  showing 
the  relation  of  the  metals  to  each  other.  A  few,  discovered 
since  his  day,  have  been  added  by  recent  investigators.  He 
called  it  the 

CONTACT  SERIES, 

because  each  metal  in  the  list  becomes  positive  when  placed 
in  contact  with  each  one  named  below  it,  and  the  further  tliey 
are  separated  on  the  list  the  greater  tlieir  difference  of  potential. 

-f  Zinc,  Silver, 

Lead,  Gold, 

Tin,  Platinum, 

Iron,  —  Carbon. 
Copper, 


96 


GALVANISM. 


For  example,  if  zinc  and  lead  are  used  as  the  two  elements 
of  a  battery,  zinc  is  +  and  lead  is  — .  When  lead  and  till 
are  used  together  lead  becomes  +  and  tin  — . 

The  difference  of  potential  between  zinc  and  lead  is  less 
than  between  zinc  and  tin.  It  keeps  on  increasing  between 
zinc  and  the  others  named  in  their  order  until  carbon  is 
reached.  Between  zinc  and  carbon  the  difference  of  potential 
is  so  great  that  it  equals  the  sum  of  all  the  differences  of 
potential  between  the  other  combinations  on  the  list. 

For  this  reason  tlie  zinc  and  carbon  combination  is  pre- 
ferred for  batteries  which  are  required  to  furnish  a  current 
possessing  great  power  of  overcoming  resistance. 

* 

ELECTRO-MOTIVE  FORCE. 

A  .        ;  B  . 


This  is  the  same  force  referred  to  under  static  electricity 
as  the  "propelling  power."  It  is  that  force  which  tends  to 
move  electricity  through  its  circuit.  Electricity  is  not  propelled 
as  a  ballet  on  its  course,  but  rather  propagated  in  waves  from 
point  to  point  in  its  circuit. 

Referring  to  Fig.  18,  it  will  be  noticed  that  reservoir  B, 
having  the  higher  level,  propels  the  current  with  greater  force 
than  A.  B  not  only  drives  the  current  branches  further  on  a 
straight  line,  but  causes  them  to  separate  more  widely  and 
cover  a  greater  surface.    The  greater  the  difference  of  "electric 


GALVANISM. 


97 


level"  between  the  elements,  the  greater  will  be  the  electro- 
motive force  with  which  the  current  will  be  driven  forward ; 
and  it  is  supposed  that  in  sending  a  current  through  so  great 
a  resistance  as  the  human  body,  it  is  broken  np  into  branches 
or  lines  of  force,  which  pass  by  dilferent  routes  between  the 
points  of  entrance  and  exit ;  the  stronger  the  electro-motive 
force,  the  greater  the  number  of  these  branches  that  will  be 
able  to  overcome  the  resistance  in  their  path,  and  come  together 
to  complete  the  circuit.  The  total  availahle  strength  of  current 
for  therapeutical  purposes  depends  largely  upon  its  electro- 
motive force. 

THE  ELECTRO-MOTIVE  FORCE  IS  MODIFIED  I 

1.  By  the  nature  of  the  elements.  By  reference  to  the  "con- 
tact series,"  it  will  be  seen  that  zinc  and  carbon  furnish  the 
greatest  difference  of  potential,  and  consequently  the  strongest 
electro-motive  force. 

2.  By  the  quality  of  the  lattery  fluid.  Strong  fluid,  which 
causes  violent  chemical  action,  produces  the  greatest  electro- 
motive force.  If,  however,  the  elements  are  encrusted  with 
salts,  or  partially  worn  out,  only  a  small  portion  of  their  surface 
can  be  brought  into  actual  contact  with  the  fluid,  and  the  electro- 
motive force  will  be  lessened.  If  the  zinc  is  not  properly  amal- 
gamated, thus  permitting  local  action,  or  if  the  carbon,  from  long 
use,  has  its  pores  filled  with  impurities,  the  same  result  occurs. 

3.  By  the  number  of  cells  in  the  circuit.  The  number  of 
cells,  not  their  size.,  determine  the  amount  of  electro-motive  force 
developed.  "The  electro-motive  force  of  forty  elements  the  size 
of  a  tumbler  is  no  greater  than  from  the  same  number  the  size  of 
a  thimble."* 


*M.  Cyon,  "  Principles  d'Electrotli6rapie," 
7 


98 


GALVANISM. 


4.  By  the  length  of  time  the  hattery  has  heen  in  use.  In  all 
single-fluid  cells  the  electro-motive  force  is  the  greatest  when 
the  circuit  is  first  closed.  The  electro-motive  force  is  greatly 
increased  when  strong  fluid  is  used,  but  the  zinc  is  consumed 
I'aster,  and  the  fluid  being  used  up  in  the  same  proportion  as  the 
zinc,  the  current  will  lose  strength  sooner,  or  the  battery  may  be 
said  to  run  down  more  rapidly  than  one  which  possesses  less 
electro-motive  force,  and  consequently  less  power  of  overcoming 
resistance. 

QUANTITY. 

The  total  amount  of  electricity  passing  through  a  circuit  in  a 
given  time  is  called  the  quantity.    It  can  be  increased : 

1.  By  increasing  the  size  of  the  elements. 

2.  By  bringing  them  closer  together. 

3.  By  exposing  a  larger  portion  of  their  surface  to  the  action 
of  the  battery  fluid. 

CELLS  ARRANGED  IN  MULTIPLE  ARC  (QUANTITY  ARRANGEMENT). 

When  electricity  is  required 
for  producing  cautery,  and  certain 
chemical  effects,  a  current  pos- 
sessing large  quantity  must  be 
selected.  The  cells  for  producing 
such  a  current  are  arranged  in  a 
special  manner.  For  example :  If  we  have  one  large  cell  contain- 
ing elements,  each  four  inches  square,  immersed  in  fluid,  an  inch 
apart,  and  connected  outside  the  cell  by  a  wire,  a  current  is 
excited  ;  in  five  minutes  a  certain  amount  of  zinc  will  be  dis- 
solved, and  a  certain  amount  of  hydrogen  gas  will  be  collected 
at  the  copper  element.  Let  these  same  elements  be  cut  into 
four  parts,  each  four  inches  long  and  one  inch  wide,  and  arranged 
in  pairs  in  separate  cells,  the  elements  in  each  cell  being  one 


GALVANISM. 


99 


inch  apart,  and  immersed  to  tlie  same  depth  in  the  fluid  as  in  the 
lirst  instance.  Connect  the  elements  of  the  separate  cells  as  in 
Fig.  19,  all  the  zinc-plates  being  joined  together,  and  all  the 
copper-plates  joined  together.  When  the  wires  from  the  first 
zinc  and  last  copper  are  connected,  the  same  current  will 
traverse  the  circuit  as  before.  The  same  amount  of  zinc  will  be 
dissolved,  and  the  same  amount  of  hydrogen  be  collected  as 
from  the  single  surface.  The  quantity  obtained  is  large,  the 
heating  and  magnetic  properties  are  increased,  but  the  power  to 
decompose  chemical  compounds  and  affect  the  animal  system  is 
very  slightly,  if  at  all,  increased. 

POTENTIAL  AKRANGEMENT. 

The  same  cells  arranged  as 
in  Fig.  20,  that  is,  with  the 
elements  joined  in  alterna- 
tion, the  zinc  of  one  cell 
with  the  copper  of  the  next, 
give  a  greater  difference  of  potential  than  the  one  previously 
described.  When  the  terminal  wires  from  the  ends  of  the 
series  are  connected,  the  amount  of  zinc  dissolved  and  of  hy- 
drogen set  free  will  be  the  same  as  before.  The  current  must 
now  cross  each  cell  in  succession,  and  therefore  encounters 
greater  resistance  than  in  the  arrangement  shown  in  Fig.  19. 
The  power  now  starts  from  four  separate  points,  and  each  one 
adds  energy  or  exerts  an  impulse  in  driving  the  current  on- 
ward ;  hence  the  propelling  power,  or  electro-motive  force,  is 
increased  fourfold.  Difference  of  potential  does  not  depend 
upon  the  size  of  elements,  but  it  does  depend  upon  the  num- 
ber of  them,  provided  they  are  united  alternately.  The  total 
difference  of  potential  is  as  many  times  that  of  a  single  cell 
as  there  are  cells  in  the  series.    For  instance,  if  the  difference 


100 


GALVANISM. 


of  potential  in  one  cell  be  represented  by  10,  the  difference  in 
potential  of  four  similar  cells,  joined  as  in  Fig.  20,  will  be  40. 

In  uniting  cells  in  series  they  should  be  exactly  alike ; 
otherwise,  instead  of  the  force  bearing  relation  to  the  area  of 
]3late  in  each  section,  it  will  only  be  proportional  to  the 
smallest  effective  area, —  that  is,  to  that  element  which  has  the 
least  surface  immersed  in  fluid. 

In  illustration  may  be  cited  the  well-known  result  of  forc- 
ing water'  through  a  series  of  pipes  of  different  calibre  ;  the 
force  of  flow  from  the  last  pipe  will  only  equal  the  force  with 
which  it  flows  through  the  smallest  pipe  in  the  series. 

The  potential  arrangement  is  the  one  used  for  all  ordinary 
applications  of  the  galvanic  current,  and  for  electrolysis.  It 
requires  great  electro-motive  force  to  send  the  current  to  all 
parts  of  the  human  body,  the  resistance  of  which  ' '  is  more 
than  twice  as  great  as  that  of  the  Atlantic  cable."* 

RESISTANCE. 

Whatever  impedes  the  passage  of  a  current  through  its 
circuit,  constitutes  resistance. 
Resistance  is  of  two  kinds  : 

1.  Internal  or  Essential^  due  to 

{a)  The  composition  and  condition  of  the  battery  fluid. 

(b)  The  condition  of  the  elements. 

{c)  The  size  and  arrangement  of  the  elements. 

2.  External  or  non-essential^  due  to 
{d)  The  conducting  cords  or  wires. 
{e)  The  connections. 

{f)  The  substance  or  body  introduced  into  the  external 
circuit. 

{a)  Fluids  which  contain  a  large  amount  of  acid  conduct 
better  than  more  dilute  solutions.  Deposit  of  salts  in  the  cell 


*  Text-Book  of  Electricity  in  Medicine  and  Surgery.  [Poore.] 


GALVANISM. 


101 


as  well  as  dirt  or  grease  in  the  fluid  interfere  with  the 
passage  of  the  current. 

(b)  The  elements,  when  incrusted  with  salts,  do  not  permit 
the  passage  of  electricity  freely.  Carbon,  being  very  porous, 
may,  after  long  usage,  become  filled  up  with  impurities,  and 
this  may  escape  notice. 

(c)  Large  elements  offer  more  paths  for  the  current  than 
small  ones,  hence  afford  less  resistance.  When  placed  near 
together,  the  resistance  is  still  further  diminished,  just  as  water 
flows  more  easily  through  a  large  pipe  than  through  a  small 
one,  or  through  a  short  pipe  than  a  long  one. 

{d)  The  resistance  of  the  conducting  cords,  or  wires,  de- 
pends upon 

(1)  The  length.  If  a  current  of  the  same  strength  be  made 
to  pass  over  wires  of  the  same  metal  and  diameter,  but  of 
different  lengths,  it  will  be  found  that  the  current  loses  power 
in  proportion  to  the  length  of  wire  over  which  it  is  made  to 
pass. 

(2)  The  diameter.  If  a  current  be  sent  over  wires  of  the 
same  material  and  length,  but  of  different  diameters,  since 
electricity  is  supposed  to  pass  over  the  surface  of  the  conduc- 
tor, it  is  evident  that  the  greater  the  surface  the  less  will  be 
the  resistance ;  therefore  the  power  of  the  current  will  be 
greatest  in  the  wire  of  largest  diameter.  For  instance,  a  copper 
wire  one  hundred  feet  long  and  one-twelfth  of  an  inch  in 
diameter  offers  the  same  resistance  as  a  copper  wire  two  hun- 
dred feet  long  and  one-sixth  of  an  inch  in  diameter.  For  this 
reason  the  arm  of  a  man  ofters  nearly  the  same  resistance  as  a 
leg,  since  the  length  and  diameter  of  the  latter  are  nearly  double 
that  of  the  arm. 

(3)  The  material.  Silver  conducts  best,  but  copper  so 
nearly  equals  it  that  for  practical  purposes  it  is  preferred. 
Platinum  offers  more  than  five  times  the  resistance  of  copper. 


102 


GALVANISM. 


(4)  The  temperature.  As  the  metals  conduct  best  when 
cold,  the  warmer  the  temperature  the  greater  the  resistance 
of  the  wire.  The  resistance  of  copper  increases  almost  30  per 
cent  between  freezing  and  boiling  points. 

{e)  The  elements  should  be  securely  fastened  to  the  metal 
connections,  and  the  conducting  wires  should  be  in  even  and 
firm  contact  with  the  same  connections,  otherwise  the  path  for 
the  current  will  be  lessened,  and  also  minute  independent 
currents  will  be  set  up  by  the  difference  of  pressure  of  the 
contact  points,  all  of  which  increase  resistance  to  the  main 
current.  Dirt,  grease  or  rust  between  contact  points  increases 
resistance,  which  may  thereby  become  so  great  as  to  stop  the 
current. 

(/*)  The  resistance  of  bodies  interposed  in  the  circuit  out- 
side the  battery  varies  according  to  their  composition.  They 
may  be  divided  into  three  classes : 

1.  Those  that  offer  least  resistance,  which  include  the  metals 
and  carbon.    Heat  increases  their  resistance. 

2.  Those  which  are  decomposed  by  the  passage  of  the  cur- 
rent, which  are  principally  the  liquids.  The  resistance  of  these 
is  diminished  by  heat.  It  is  extremely  difficult  to  discover  the 
actual  resistance  of  liquids,  but  Cavendish  found  that  the  elec- 
tric fluid  meets  with  as  much  resistance  in  passing  through  a 
column  of  water  one  inch  long  as  through  an  iron  wire  of  the 
same  diameter  400,000,000  inches  long,  and  that  water  con- 
taining in  solution  one  part  of  salt  conducts  a  hundred  times 
better  than  fresh  water,  and  that  a  saturated  solution  of  salt 
conducts  seven  hundred  and  twenty  times  better  than  fresh 
w\ater.  It  has  been  estimated  that  the  human  body,  owing  to 
the  salts  which  it  contains,  conducts  nearly  twenty  times  better 
than  water,  when  the  skin  is  well  moistened. 

8.  Those  whose  resistance  is  so  enormous  that  the  strongest 
electro-motive  force  can  hardly  send  the  feeblest  current  through 


GALVANISM. 


them.  They  include  the  gases,  air,  glass,  paraffine,  shellac, 
india-rubber,  and  some  oils.  The  resistance  of  these  is  les- 
sened by  heat. 

(4.)  Resistance  in  the  circuit. 

(a)  If  many  cells,  exactly  alike,  are  joined  in  series  with 
a  large  wire,  and  with  no  other  resistance  in  the  external 
circuit,  no  greater  quantity  of  electricity  will  pass  through  it 
than  if  a  few  such  cells  are  joined.  Although  each  additional 
cell  adds  its  share  of  electro-motive  force,  it  also  adds  resistance, 
which  tends  to  counterbalance  the  gain  in  electro-motive  force. 

(6)  Large  cells  joined  together  in  series  with  great  resist- 
ance, as  the  human  body  in  the  external  circuit,  send  no 
greater  quantity  of  electricity  through  it  than  the  same  num- 
ber of  small  cells  do. 

The  electro-motive  force  of  large  cells  does  not  exceed 
that  of  small  ones,  as  already  explained,  while  the  resistance 
is  less  ;  but  the  internal  resistance  in  cells  of  either  size  is  so 
small  as  compared  with  the  human  body,  that  practically  the 
gain  by  increase  of  size  need  not  be  taken  into  account. 

((?)  For  decomposing  chemical  substances,  for  performing 
surgical  operations,  and  for  electrolysis,  many  cells  of  medium 
size  in  which  chemical  action  is  powerful  are  required.  The  re- 
sistance of  the  skin  is  very  great,  but  in  these  operations  the 
current  is  carried  beneath  the  skin  by  means  of  needles  or 
wires  placed  near  each  other. 

(cZ)  When  a  short  platinum  wire  in  a  short  circuit  is  to  be 
heated,  as  in  galvano-cautery  operations,  a  few  large  cells 
joined  in  multiple  arc  or  a  single  very  large  cell  is  preferable 
to  a  large  number  of  small  cells. 

ELECTRIC  MEASUREMENTS. 

We  cannot  conceive  of  a  force  that  does  not  possess  qualities 
that  can  be  detected  and  measured,  and  for  the  other  modes  of 


104 


GALVANISM. 


motion,  as  heat,  light,  etc.,  we  have  terms  by  use  of  which 
ideas  may  be  conveyed  that  are  readily  understood.  Electricity 
has  not  been  so  fortunate  until  within  a  very  recent  period. 
Although  electricians  have  long  made  use  of  special  language 
in  writing  of  this  science,  there  has  been  a  lack  of  uniformity 
in  choice  of  terms  and  an  obscurity  of  definition  which  pre- 
vented its  general  use. 

ohm's  law  for  determining  the  strength  of  current. 

Prof.  Ohm,  of  Nuremberg,  in  1827,  discovered  the  law  which 
bears  his  name,  and  which  is  now  made  the  foundation  of  all 
electrical  measurement.  It  is  this :  ' '  The  strength  of  the 
current  passing  through  any  part  of  a  circuit  varies  directly  as 
the  difference  of  potential  between  its  elements,  and  inversely  as 
the  resistance  in  the  circuit  itself."  If  there  w^ere  no  resist- 
ance, the  quantity  of  electricity  passing  as  a  current  would  be 
exactly  proportional  to  its  electro-motive  or  propelling  force. 
Since  there  is  always  resistance,  both  within  the  battery  cell, 
and  in  that  portion  of  the  circuit  outside  the  cell,  it  must  be 
taken  into  account  in  estimating  strength  of  current.  If  the 
resistance  be  doubled,  only  one-half  the  quantity  (other  con- 
ditions being  equal)  will  pass  through  the  circuit ;  if  the  resist- 
ance be  trebled,  there  will  be  only  one-third  the  quantity  ;  that 
is,  the  quantity  is  inversely  proportional  to  the  resistance. 

Beard  and  Rockwell  ^'  have  clearly  illustrated  this  point  in 
the  following  manner:  ''Suppose  a  current  of  water  is  passed 
through  an  ordinary  syringe.  The  quantity  of  water  that  flows 
through  the  tube  will  be  directly  proportioned  to  the  force 
with  which  it  is  urged  forward  by  the  piston  ;  this  force  would 
correspond  with  electro-motive  force.  The  friction  will  corre- 
spond to  the  internal  and  external  resistance  of  the  battery. 


*  Medical  and  Surgical  Electricity. 


GALVANISM. 


105 


Now,  if  we  divide  the  one  bj  the  other,  we  have  a  quantity 
of  water  which  in  a  given  time  flows  through  the  tube,  or  the 
strength  of  the  current.  In  this  way  we  can  find  the  number 
of  cubic  inches  of  water  that  flow  through  the  tube  in  a  sec- 
ond of  time,  just  as  we  can  find  the  number  of  coulombs  (or 
units  of  quantity)  of  electricity,  that  flow  through  the  circuit. 
It  follows,  of  course,  that  if  the  electro-motive  force  be  very 
greatly  increased,  the  resistance  being  the  same,  the  total 
strength  of  current  must  be  increased  ;  but  if  the  resistance  be 
increased  in  proportion  to  the  increase  of  electro-motive  force, 
the  current  strength  will  not  be  any  greater." 

Another  mode  of  expressing  the  law  of  Ohm  is  by  the 
following  formula,  in  which  C  represents  the  strength  of  the 
current,  E  the  electro-motive  force,  and  K  the  resistance  both 
within  and  without  the  battery. 

Before  resistance,  the  difference  of  potential  is  not  easily 
restored. 

UNITS  OF  MEASUREMENT. 

Writers  are  now  adopting  the  terms  agreed  upon  at  the 
International  Electrical  Congress,  and  it  is  necessary  to  be 
acquainted  with  those  which  represent  qualities  of  currents 
employed  in  medical  practice  in  order  to  understand  the  elec- 
trical literature  of  the  day. 

The  units  of  measurement  are  based  on  the  French  unit  of 
length  (centimetre),  unit  of  mass  (gramme),  unit  of  time 
(second).  These  are  usually  referred  to  as  the  Centimetre- 
Gramme-Second  or  C.G.S.  system  of  units. 

The  Volt  (dynamic)  is  the  unit  of  electro-motive  force.  It 
represents  a  force  capable  of  generating  a  velocity  of  one  metre 
per  second  through  a  mass  of  one  gramme.  The  Daniells  cell 
is  selected  as  the  standard  for  one  volt.    This  is  an  approximate 


106 


GALVANISM. 


measure  only  ;  the  Daniells  cell  varies  in  electro-motive  force 
from  .097  to  1.079  volts.  The  Grenet  cell  fm-nishes  a  current 
of  about  two  volts. 

The  Ohm  (dynamic)  is  the  unit  of  resistance  ;  it  is  very 
nearly  equal  to  the  resistance  of  a  cylindrical  wire  of  pure 
copper  two  hundred  and  fifty  feet  in  length  and  one-twentieth 
of  an  inch  in  diam^eter. 

The  Coulomb  (dynamic),  formerly  called  the  Weber,  is  the 
unit  of  quantity.  It  is  equal  to  the  quantity  of  electricity 
transmitted  in  one  second  through  one  ohm  by  one  volt. 

An  Ampere  (dynamic),  also  formerly  called  the  Weber,  is 
the  unit  of  current.  It  is  a  current  of  one  Coulomb  per  second, 
and  is  due  to  the  electro-motive  force  of  one  volt  working 
through  a  resistance  of  one  ohm. 

Milli-ampere^  the  thousandth  part  of  an  ampere. 

The  Farad  (static)  is  the  unit  of  capacity.  The  standard 
is  the  amount  of  electricity  accumulated  in  a  unit  Leyden  jar 
which  holds  one  Coulomb  at  a  potential  of  one  volt. 

The  Coidomh  (static)  is  equal  to  the  charge  produced  in  a 
jar  of  one  Farad  capacity  by  an  electro-motive  force  of  one 

VOit. 

RELATION    OF    CELLS    TO    STRENGTH    OF  CURRENT. 

This  depends,  as  we  have  seen,  upon  size  of  cells,  number 
of  cells,  method  by  which  they  are  joined  in  circuit,  kind  of 
elements,  and  resistance  in  the  circuit. 

Single-fluid  and  two-fluid  cells  in  great  variety  are  em- 
ployed for  medical  purposes.  In  this  country  the  single-fluid 
cells  in  common  use  are  represented  by  the  Smee  and  the 
Grenet ;  the  two-fluid,  by  the  Daniells  and  the  Gravity. 

THE    SMEE  CELL. 

The  elements  of  this  cell  consist  of  two  plates  of  zinc  and 
one  of  platinized  silver.     A  thin  silver  plate  is  corrugated 


GALVANISM. 


107 


and  coated  with  platinum  in  coarse  powder  ;  this  furnishes  a 
multitude  of  points  from  which  hydrogen  is  more  readily  dis- 
engaged than  from  a  smooth  surface.  The  exciting  fluid  is 
dilute  solution  of  sulphuric  acid.  The  zinc  plates  are  arranged 
parallel,  with  the  platinized  plate  suspended  between  them. 
By  this  method  both  surfaces  of  the  platinum  serve  as  a  col- 
lecting plate ;  but  this  arrangement  does  not  furnish  so  power- 
fnl  a  current  as  tlie  cell  next  described,  in  which  the  zinc  is 
placed  between  two  collecting  plates  so  that  both  surfaces  of 
the  zinc  are  rendered  effective  in  generating  electricity. 

BICHROMATE  OF  POTASH  CELL. 

The  elements  consist  of  a  single  pair  of  zinc  and  carbon 
plates  and  the  fluid  of  a  solution  of  bichromate  of  potash  in 
water,  acidulated  with  sulphuric  acid.  Chromic  acid,  which 
has  great  affmity  for  hydrogen,  is  set  free  by  decomposition 
of  the  bichromate  of  potash,  and  prevents  polarization.  A 
useful  form  of  single  cell  for  experimental 
purposes  or  for  brief  applications  of  a  power- 
ful current  is  represented  in  Fig.  21. 


THE  MC-INTOSH  GRENET  CELL. 

a,  is  a  globular  glass  bottle  with  cylindrical  neck  par- 
tially filled  with  fluid. 

C  C,  pieces  of  carbon  forming  the  collecting  plates. 

Z,  zinc  generating  plate  attached  to  a  sliding  rod;  it  can 
be  lifted  out  of  the  fluid,  or  lowered  to  any  depth. 

S,  binding  screw  for  retaining  the  rod  at  any  point. 

e  e,  hard  rubber  cover  to  which  the  elements  are  fastened. 

A,  binding  post  with  which  both  carbons  are  connected  by 
a  strip  of  metal. 

B,  binding  post  with  which  the  zinc  has  metallic  connec- 
tion. 

f  f,  soft  rubber  lining  of  e  e,  which  covers  and  protects  the 
metallic  connections. 

R  R  R,  hard  rubber  insulators. 


Fig.  21. 

Size  No.  1,  5  ozs.,  53^ 
inches  high. 

Size  No.  4,  2  qts.,  10)4 
inches  high. 

Nos.  2  and  3  are  inter- 
mediate. 


108 


GALVANISM. 


The  special  feature  which  distinguishes  this  from  the  ordi- 
nary Grenet  cell,  is  the  insulation  of  the  metallic  connections 
of  the  elements.  The  difficulty  hitherto  experienced  in  keeping 
this  cell  in  good  working  order  owing  to  the  rapid  oxidation  of 
the  connections,  is  completely  overcome.  The  rubber  is  put 
on  the  elements  in  a  soft  state  and  vulcanized,  which  causes 
it  to  adhere  so  firmly  that  neither  fluid  nor  its  fumes  can  pen- 
etrate between  the  insulator  and  the  metallic  connections  which 
it  incloses. 

The  Mcintosh  Grenet  cell  is  suitable  for  dental  purposes, 
such  as  treating  diseased  teeth  and  obtunding  the  pain  of  ex- 
tracting them ;  producing  an  electrolytic  effect  upon  ulcers, 
etc. ;  supplying  a  current  for  an  electro-magnet  to  extract  par- 
ticles of  metal  from  the  eye,  and  for  testing  battery  connec- 
tions. The  zinc  is  but  one-half  the  length  of  the  carbons  and 
can  be  drawn  up  above  the  fluid  ;  it  can  be  lowered  in  an 
instant,  and  on  completing  the  circuit  the  current  at  once 
starts.  As  soon  as  its  work  is  done,  the  zinc  should  be 
immediately  raised  out  of  the  fluid  and  fastened  there  ;  with 
that  precaution  it  will  always  be  ready  for  use,  until  the  fluid 
is  exhausted. 

BATTERY  FLUID. 

The  composition  of  battery  fluid  is  of  great  importance  in 
securing  the  best  working  condition  of  any  battery,  and  it 
must  be  adapted  both  to  the  special  combination  of  elements 
employed  and  to  the  work  to  be  done.    It  should  be  capable: 

1.  Of  producing  the  greatest  possible  difference  of  potential. 

2.  Retarding  polarization  or  preventing  it  entirely. 

3.  Offering  little  resistance  to  the  passage  of  the  current. 

4.  Giving  forth  no  corrosive  fumes. 

All  manufacturers  determine  by  repeated  experiments  the 
kind  of  fluid  best  adapted  to  their  own  batteries,  and  the  best 


GALVANISM. 


109 


results  will  be  obtained  by  following  their  formula.  Operators 
frequently  are  disappointed  in  consequence  of  using  a  fluid 
unsuited  to  the  special  combination  of  elements  with  which 
their  instruments  are  supplied. 

The  fluid  for  the  Mcintosh  Grenet  cell  should  be  made  as 
follows  : 

Sulphuric  acid,  three  fluid  ounces. 
Bichromate  of  potash,  two  ounces  (avoirdupois). 
Bisulphate  of  mercury,  two  drachms  (avoirdupois). 
Water,  sixteen  fluid  ounces. 

Dissolve  the  bichromate  of  potash  in  hot  water ;  when  it  is 
cold,  add  the  bisulphate  of  mercury,  and  lastly,  very  slowly, 
the  sulphuric  acid.  It  is  dangerous  to  pour  water  into  sul- 
phuric acid. 

This  fluid  should  be  prepared  in  an  earthen  or  stoneware 
vessel,  because  the  heat  developed  by  the  mingling  of  acid 
and  water  is  so  great  as  to  damage  glass  or  rubber  cells. 
The  fluid  may  be  preserved  indefinitely  if  kept  in  well  stop- 
pered bottles.  It  shoidd  he  labeled  Poison.  It  has  a  deep-red 
color,  or  an  orange-red  when  looked  at  across  its  surface, 
which  turns  brown,  dark-green,  or  black,  when  it  is  exhausted. 

TWO-FLUID  CELLS. 

Although  the  galvanic  current  is  commonly  called  a  con- 
stant current,  yet  that  obtained  from  a  single-fluid  cell  varies 
constantly,  owing  to  variable  resistance,  polarization,  and  rapid 
destruction  of  both  fluid  and  zinc. 

The  great  merit  of  having  constructed  the  first  cell  from 
which  a  really  constant  current  could  be  obtained,  belongs  to 
Becquerel,  who  proposed  to  immerse  copper  and  zinc  in  sep- 
arate fluids  with  a  porous  diaphragm  between  them  which 
would  permit  communication  between  the  two  fluids,  although 
keeping  them  apart.    He  used  a  bladder  for  the  diaphragm. 


HQ 


GALVANISM. 


THE    DANIELLS  CELL. 

Daniells  modified  the  cell  invented  by  Becquerel.  He 
replaced  the  bladder  with  a  porous  cup,  and  made  other 
minor  changes.  Since  a  Daniells  cell  has  been  adopted  as  a 
comparative  standard  in  estimating  the  electro-motive  force  of 
a  galvanic  current,  a  brief  description  of  it  may  be  of  interest. 
A  glass  jar  of  about  one  gallon  capacity  is  two-thirds  filled 
with  a  concentrated  solution  of  sulphate  of  copper.  A  thin 
cylindrical  sheet  of  copper  is  immersed  in  this  solution  within 
the  jar  which  it  completely  lines.  A  porous  cup,  of  the  same 
height  as  the  jar,  nearly  filled  with  a  mixture  of  one  part 
sulphuric  acid  to  eight  parts  water,  is  placed  in  the  center  of 
the  jar  and  a  rod  of  amalgamated  zinc  is  immersed  in  the  cup. 

When  the  poles  of  this  pair  are  connected,  the  following 
reaction  occurs  :  Both  water  and  solution  of  sulphate  of  copper 
are  decomposed.  One  part  of  the  liberated  oxygen  combines 
with  the  zinc  to  form  oxide  of  zinc,  which  combines  again 
with  sulphuric  acid  to  form  sulphate  of  zinc ;  another  part  of 
the  oxygen  combines  with  hydrogen  to  form  water,  and  finally 
a  thin  film  of  copper  is  deposited  upon  the  surface  of  the 
co])per  cylinder,  which,  therefore,  remains  unchanged.  The 
zinc  being  well  amalgamated,  resists  local  action,  and  the 
elements  can  be  left  in  the  fluid  if  their  poles  be  disconnected 
when  not  in  use. 

GRAVITY  CELLS. 

The  gravity  cell  is  a  modification  of  the  Daniells,  and  is 
constructed  on  the  principle  that  two  fluids  of  different  density 
can  be  arranged  so  that  the  heavier  shall  form  a  stratum  at 
the  bottom  of  the  ceil  with  the  lighter  floating  upon  it.  This 
separation  is  never  perfect,  since  the  heavier  fluid  slowly 
diffuses  upward.  The  elements  are  placed  horizontally.  When 
once  charged  and  connected,  these  cells  will  run  for  months, 


GALV^ANISM. 


Ill 


the  only  attention  required  being  to  supply  water  as  it  evap- 
orates, and  occasionally  a  little  sulphate  of  copper.  They  are 
employed  for  stationary  apparatus  of  every  kind,  for  which  a 


Fig.  22. 

GRAVITY  CELLS. 
Capacity,  Yi  Gallon. 


galvanic  current  is  desired,  such  as  office,  table  or  cabinet 
batteries,  electric  chair,  electric  bath,  vapor  bath,  etc. 

TO  PREPARE  THE  GRAVITY  BATTERY  FOR  USE. 

Fill  each  jar  three-fourths  full  of  clean  soft  water  (three 
pints),  add  six  ounces  sulj^hate  of  zinc,  stir  to  dissolve  it, 
and  remove  the  scum  that  rises.  Unfold  the  copper  element 
and  place  in  the  bottom  of  the  jar.  Suspend  the  zinc  by 
means  of  the  tripod,  so  that  its  upper  surface  is  just  below 
the  surface  of  the  water  and  parallel  with  it.  Add  six  ounces 
sulphate  of  copper  crystals  to  the  fluid,  taking  care  not  to  drop 
any  upon  the  zinc.  A  convenient,  though  not  essential,  mode 
of  accomplisliing  this  is  as  follows : 

A  glass  tube  of  sufficient  size  to  permit  the  passage  of  the 
copper  crystals  is  inserted  vertically  in  the  cell  to  a  level  w4th 
the  upper  surface  of  the  copper  element  and  the  sulphate  of 


112 


GALVANISM. 


copper  dropped  through.  This  gives  a  deep  blue  color  and 
greater  density  to  the  lower  stratum  of  the  fluid.  It  can 
reach  the  zinc  only  by  diffusion  upward,  provided  the  cell  is 
kept  stationary,  and  free  from  jarring  or  shaking.  The  blue 
tint  of  the  lower  stratum  should  extend  just  over  the  copper 
element,  but  should  not  be  permitted  to  reach  the  zinc.  The 
fluid  around  the  zinc  has  a  very  slow  downward  motion  and 
helps  to  retard  upward  motion  of  the  copper  solution.  The 
mixing  of  the  two  layers  of  fluid  may  be  still  further  hindered 
by  inserting  a  syphon  consisting  of  a  glass  tube  filled  with  a 
cotton  wick,  one  extremity  being  midway  between  the  zinc 
and  copper  elements  and  the  other  in  a  vessel  outside  the 
cell,  so  that  the  liquid  is  very  slowly  drawn  off  near  the 
middle  of  its  depth.    This,  however,  is  seldom  employed. 

TO  CONNECT   GRAVITY  CELLS. 

Tlie  cells  are  ■  connected  in  series  by  fastening  the  wire 
attached  to  the  copper  element  of  the  second  cell  in  the 
socket  on  one  arm  of  the  tripod  of  the  first  cell,  where  a 
thumbscrew  may  be  seen  in  Fig.  22  ;  the  copper  element  of 
the  third  cell  is  connected  in  the  same  way  with  the  tripod 
of  the  second  cell,  and  so  on  ;  each  copper  element  except 
the  first  being  joined  to  the  tripod'^of  the  preceding  cell  in  the 
series. 

Tlie  cells  are  connected  with  the  apparatus  thus  :  The  wire 
from  the  copper  element  in  the  first  cell  is  joined  to  a  post  or 
button  which  represents  the  positive  pole.  A  wire  from  the 
zinc  of  the  first  cell  (fastened  in  the  same  socket  of  the  tripod 
arm  as  the  wire  from  the  second  copper  element)  is  connected 
with  a  post  or  button  representing  one  negative  pole,  a  wire 
similarly  attached  to  the  second  zinc  element  is  connected 
with  a  second  button,  and  so  on  until  the  entire  series  are 
connected  with  corresponding  buttons  on  the  apparatus. 


GALVANISM. 


113 


THE  REACTION  IN  THE  GRAVITY  CELL. 

When  the  elements  are  connected  by  closing  the  circuit, 
the  sulphate  of  copper  is  decomposed  into  copper  and  sulphuric 
acid.  The  copper  is  deposited  upon  the  copper  plate,  and 
the  sulphuric  acid  travels  slowly  through  the  liquid  to  the 
zinc,  with  which  it  combines,  forming  sulphate  of  zinc.  In 
this  way  the  liquid  at  the  bottom  becomes  less  dense  by  the 
deposition  of  the  copper,  and  the  liquid  at  the  top  becomes 
more  dense  by  the  addition  of  the  sulphate  of  zinc.  To 
prevent  this  action  from  changing  the  order  of  density  of 
the  strata,  and  so  producing  instability  and  visible  currents 
within  the  cell,  it  should  be  kept  well  supplied  with  crystals  of 
sulphate  of  copper,  and  water  must  be  supplied  to  replace 
loss  by  evaporation.  The  water  must  be  added  gently  to  the 
top  of  the  liquid,  so  as  to  prevent  jarring  or  stirring,  which 
may  set  up  currents  that  will  mix  the  two  liquids.  The  need 
of  more  blue  vitriol  may  be  known  by  fading  of  the  blue 
color. 

A  hydrometer  is  convenient  for  testing  the  strength  of  the 
solution.  When  the  specific  gravity  is  less  than  15°,  there  is 
too  little  sulphate  of  zinc ;  when  it  is  30°  or  over,  there  is 
too  much  in  solution,  and  it  must  be  diluted.  These  cells 
require  no  attention,  except  to  supply  water  as  it  evaporates, 
for  months  at  a  time;  but  once  or  twice  a  year  it  will  be 
necessary. 

To  recharge  the  grmity  cells.  When  the  elements  become 
coated  so  as  to  interfere  with  the  action  of  the  battery,  they 
must  be  removed,  scraped,  and  rinsed  clean ;  the  jars  also 
should  be  washed  out  and  refilled.  The  clear  portion  of  the 
fluid  may  be  drawn  off  and  used  to  recharge  the  cells  ;  this 
solution  contains  so  much  sulphate  of  zinc,  that  after  filling 
each  jar  one-half  full,  clear  water  can  be  used  to  fill  up  with. 


114 


GALVANISM. 


TO  KEEP  GRAVITY  CELLS  IN  ORDER. 

Since  the  final  result  is  that  the  sulphate  of  copper  finds 
its  way  to  the  zinc  and  spoils  the  battery,  to  retard  this  as 
long  as  possible  it  is  necessary  to  use  certain  precautions  : 

1.  They  must  be  placed  so  that  their  contents  cannot  be 
shaken  up,  as  the  action  ceases  when  the  two  fluids  become 
well  mixed  together. 

2.  If  it  is  not  convenient  to  keep  a  siphon  in  place  to 
draw  oiF  the  copper  solution  gradually,  when  it  rises  too  high, 
a  syringe  may  be  used  to  draw  a  portion  from  the  bottom  of 
the  jar. 

3.  Fresh  water  may  be  added  to  the  top  by  a  syringe, 
taking  care  to  use  little  force. 

4.  The  collection  of  salts  about  the  top  of  the  jar  may  be 
prevented  by  painting  the  inner  surface  foi  about  one  inch 
below  the  top  either  with  paint  or  melted  parafiine. 

5.  The  tripod  connections  may  also  be  kept  free  from 
deposits  by  coating  them  with  parafiine.  They  should  be  warm 
when  it  is  applied. 

6.  When  the  cells  are  used  but  little,  say  an  hour  a  day^ 
the  current  direct  from  the  cells  should  be  run  through  a 
rheostat,  or  resistance  coil,  for  a  few  hours  occasionally,  to  keep 

The  tray  cell  con- 
sists of  a  square 
wooden  box,  lined 
with  sheet  lead,  upon 
which  copper  is  de- 
posited by  the  elec- 
tro-plate process. 
The  zinc  element  is 
made  in  the  form  of  a 
grating,  to  allow  the  gas  to  escape  and  give  more  surface.  It 


them  in  perfect  working  condition. 


Fig.  23.  Tray  Cell. 
Size  inside,  18X18X8  inches. 


GALVANISM. 


115 


is  supported  by  wooden  blocks  placed  at  the  four  corners  of 
the  cell. 

To  prepare  this  cell  for  use. — Make  a  solution  of  sulphate 
of  zinc  in  the  proportion  of  six  ounces  (by  weight)  to  each 
gallon  of  water  (Epsom  salts  may  be  used  instead  of  sulphate 
of  zinc,  it  answers  the  same  purpose  and  is  much  cheaper),  and 
fill  the  cell  so  that  the  zinc  grating  is  submerged  an  inch  or 
two.  Lift  out  the  zinc  element,  add  sulphate  of  copper  crys- 
tals in  the  proportion  of  six  ounces  to  each  gallon  of  solution, 
and  remove  any  scum  that  rises.  Do  not  stir  the  fluid  after 
the  sulphate  of  copper  is  added^  since  this  is  a  form  of  the  gravity 
cell,  and  its  action  depends  upon  the  ditference  of  gravity 
between  the  upper  and  lower  strata  of  the  fluid.  The  connec- 
tion between  this  cell  and  the  apparatus  is  made  with  two 
large  insulated  copper  wires,  one  of  which  is  fastened  to  the 
binding  post  attached  to  the  copper  lining,  and  the  other  to 
the  binding  post  attached  to  the  zinc  grating.  The  resistance 
within  this  cell  is  very  small,  being  only  .2  ohm.  Sometimes 
several  of  these  trays  are  placed  one  above  another,  the  copper 
of  one  being  connected  with  the  zinc  of  the  next,  and  the  appa- 
ratus being  connected  with  the  first  and  last  in  the  series,  in  the 
same  way  as  with  the  ordinary  gravity  jars.  A  single  tray  cell  is 
used  only  for  the  faradic  current.  The  only  attention  it  requires 
is  to  empty  the  cell  once  or  twice  a  year,  and  scrape  off  any 
salts  that  may  have  accumulated  on  the  elements.  A  part  of 
the  fluid  poured  out  of  the  cell  may  be  used  to  recharge  it. 
If  the  copper  at  any  time  reaches  the  zinc,  take  out  the  zinc, 
rinse  it  off,  add  more  water  to  the  cell  and  replace. 

SINGLE-FLUID  AND  TWO-FLUID  CELLS  COMPARED. 

Since  large  cells  do  not  necessarily  give  a  more  powerful 
remedial  current  than  very  small  ones;  the  size  to  be  selected 


116 


GALVANISM, 


must  be  determined  by  other  considerations  than  the  strength 
of  current  required.  A  comparison  of  their  relative  excellencies 
and  defects  is  the  best  guide  to  selection : 


SINGLE-FLUID  CELLS. 

( a )  They  become  polarized  rapidly. 
(6)  The    electro-motive    force  is 
great. 

(c)  The  electro-motive  force  is 
greatest  when  freshly  charged. 

{d)  The  electro-motive  force  stead- 
ily declines  from  the  first. 

{e)  The  cells  may  be  small  and 
portable. 

(/)  Best  adapted  to  frequent  short 
applications  and  general  practice. 
The  great  E.  M.  F.,  of  the  zinc  and 
carbon  cells,  makes  them  best  suited 
for  electrolysis. 


TWO-FLUID  CELLS. 

(a)  They  polarize  very  slowly. 
(6)  The   electro-motive   force  is 
small. 

(c)  The  electro-motive  force  in- 
creases for  several  days  before  its 
maximum  is  reached. 

{d)  The  electro-motive  force  con- 
tinues for  months  with  little  varia- 
tion. 

{e)  The  cells  must  be  comparatively 
large  and  heavy.  It  is  essential  that 
they  be  stationary. 

(/)  Best  suited  to  office  practice 
where  many  treatments  must  be 
given  daily,  and  it  is  important  to 
have  the  battery  always  ready. 


TO  DETECT  THE  PRESENCE  OF  THE  GALVANIC  CURRENT. 


Since  the  galvanic  current,  when  uninterrupted,  passes 
silently  through  its  circuit  without  producing  shocks,  flashes  of 
light,  or  other  phenomena  that  mark  the  presence  of  static 
electricity,  it  is  frequently  important  to  be  able  to  determine 
whether  a  current  is  present.  This  must  be  determined  from 
the  effects  produced  when  subjected  to  certain  tests,  among 
which  are  the  following : 

1.  Heat^  which  is  produced  when  tlie  current  is  carried 
through  very  fine  wire. 

2.  Light.  If  pieces  of  carbon  are  used  for  the  poles,  on 
bringing  them  together  sparks  are  visible ;  these  may  usually 


GALVANISM 


117 


be  obtained  on  touching  the  electrodes,  or  even  the  tips  of  the 
cords  together,  to  complete  the  circuit.  The  sparks  will  be 
seen  onlj  when  the  current  is  interrupted. 

3.  Sensation  produced.  If  the  electrodes  are  held  against 
opposite  sides  of  the  face  or  tongue,  strong  burning,  stinging, 
or  pricking  sensation,  will  be  felt  on  interrupting  the  current 
or  moving  the  electrodes. 

4.  The  cheraical  effect.  A  simple  apparatus  for  determin- 
ing this  can  be  improvised  from  materials  found  in  any  medical 
office,  on  the  principle  of  the  voltameter. 

An  ordinary  test  tube  has  a  cork  fitted  into  its  neck, 
through  which  are  passed  two  needles,  or  wires,  connected 
with  the  poles  of  the  battery  by  conducting  cords.  When 
the  circuit  is  complete,  the  water  will  be  decomposed, 
provided  the  current  has  an  electro-motive  force  equal 
to  nearly  two  volts  (it  requires  that  amount  of  force 
to  overcome  the  affinity  of  oxygen  and  hydrogen),  and 
the  amount  of  gases  set  free  will  be  a  measure  of  the 
working  power  of  the  current.  fig.24. 

,  ,  THE  VOLTAMETER. 

5.  Deflection  of  the  magnetic  needle. 

Sir  H.  Davy  discovered  that  every  conducting  wire  is  a 
magnet  while  the  current  is  passing,  whether  the  latter  comes 
from  a  static  or  galvanic  machine.  The  effect  is  proportioned 
to  the  quantity  of  electricity  that  is  passing  through  a  given 
space,  and  the  finer  the  conducting  wire  the  stronger  the 
magnetic  force.  This  was  the  long-sought  link  connecting 
magnetism  and  electricity,  and  proving  that  they  are  but 
different  properties  of  the  same  force,  or  different  manifesta- 
tions of  the  same  power. 

The  conducting  wire  is  capable  of  exerting  magnetic  attrac- 
tion and  repulsion  so  long  as  the  current  is  passing,  whicli 
properties  have  been  utilized  in  the  construction  of  the  gal- 
vanometer. 


/ 

118  GALVANISM. 

THE  GALVANOMETER. 

A  galvanometer  is  an  instru- 
ment for  measuring  a  galvanic 
current  and  showing  its  direc- 
tion. 

A  galvanoscope  is  an  instru- 
ment which  indicates  the  pres- 
size  from  point  to  point  z]4xi  inches,  ence  of  a  galvauic  Current. 
These  instruments  are  constructed  on  the  principle  (first 
discovered  by  Prof.  Oersted,  of  Copenhagen)  that  if  a  wire 
conducting  an  electric  current  be  placed  in  the  magnetic 
meridian,  it  will  cause  a  magnetic  needle  freely  suspended 
above  it  to  deflect  from  the  magnetic  north  and  south  poles. 
The  amount  of  deflection  bears  a  relation  to  the  quantity  of 
electricity  traversing  the  circuit,  and  the  direction  of  the  de- 
flection depends  upon  the  direction  of  the  current. 

Elaborate  instruments  are  required  for  accurate  current 
measurement,  which  are  altogether  too  delicate,  bulky  or 
expensive  for  medical  use.  The  instrument  shown  in  Fig. 
25  affords  an  approximate  measurement,  which  is  sufficiently 
accurate  for  all  practical  purposes. 

It  consists  of  a  magnetic  needle,  freely  movable  over  a 
graduated  circle,  fastened  to  a  hard-rubber  base,  beneath 
which  is  a  large  coil  of  extremely  fine  wire.  Each  end  (;f 
the  coil  is  connected  with  one  of  the  binding  posts  on  the 
rubber  base. 

It  is  an  important  adjunct  to  the  galvanic  battery,  for  in 
many  therapeutical  applications  it  is  of  the  greatest  impor- 
tance to  know  the  working  condition  of  the  cells  and  the 
direction  of  the  current.  The  purchaser  will  be  saved  some 
disappointment  if  it  is  borne  in  mind  that  the  instrument 
above  referred  to  does  not  measure  the  actual  strength  of 
the  current.    It  is  designed  only  to  indicate : 


GALVANISM. 


119 


1.  The  direction  of  the  current. 

2.  Its  polarity. 

3.  The  relative  strength  of  cells  tested  separately. 

4.  The  variation  in  strength  of  any  one  cell  at  different 
periods,  to  determine  when  it  has  run  down  or  needs  replenish- 
ing. 

The  first  cell  connected  with  this  galvanometer  deflects 
the  needle  a  certain  number  of  degrees,  hut  joining  a  second 
cell  to  the  first  does  not  give  twice  the  deflection^  or  a  thirds 
three  times  as  much  as  one  alone.  The  reason  of  this  may 
be  found  given  under  the  head  of  arrangement  of  cells, 
where  it  was  shown  that'  joining  cells,  with  elements  in  alter- 
nation, increases  the  electro-motive  force  greatly^  hut  increases 
the  quantity  slightly.  The  electro-motive  force  of  a  current 
bears  no  direct  relation  to  its  magnetic  force,  but  quantity 
of  a  current  does  bear  a  direct  relation  to  its  magnetic  force; 
therefore,  increasing  electro-motive  force  does  not  increase  the 
deflection  of  the  needle,  but  increasing  the  quantity  does  in- 
crease the  deflection  up  to  a  certain  limit,  beyond  which  it  is 
impossible  to  increase  the  deflection  by  any  number  or 
arrangement  of  cells. 

TO  DETERMINE  THE  PRESENCE  AND  DIRECTION  OF  A  GALVANIC 


CURRENT. 


Place  the  galvanometer  in  such  a 
position  that  O  (or  N)  is  toward  the 
north,  and  the  needle  is  pointing  directly 
to  N  and  S.  Connect  that  pole  of  the 
battery  supposed  to  be  positive  with 
binding  post  next  O,  and  the  negative 
with  the  other.     The  instant   this  is 


Fig.  26. 


done,  if  there  is  a  current,  it  passes 
through  the  coil  beneath  the  base  and 
deflects  the  north  (loaded)  end  of  the 
needle  to  the  east.    If  the  negative  bat- 


120 


GALVANISM. 


tery  pole  be  connected  with  the  binding  post  next  O,  and  the 
circuit  be  completed  with  the  positive  at  S,  the  north  end  of 
the  needle  will  be  deflected  to  the  west. 

Wo  Deflection  indicates  either  that  the  fluid  is  exhausted 
or  the  connections  are  defective. 


THE    COMPARATIVE    STRENGTH    OF    THE  CURRENT. 


When  the  circuit  is  first  completed,  the  needle  moves  rap- 
idly to  and  fro,  but  soon  becomes  quiet  at  an  angle  with  its 
former  position.  This  angle  is  a  measure  of  the  deflection  and 
a  comparative  measure  of  the  strength  of  the  current.  The 
deflection  will  difler  in  two  similar  cells,  provided,  {a)  The 
elements  in  one  are  immersed  deeper  in  fluid  than  the  other. 
(b)  If  the  elements  in  one  have  been  used  longer  than  those 
in  the  other,  {c)  If  the  fluid  of  one  has  been  used  more  than 
the  other. 

The  following  table  is  given  as  an  example  of  the  varia- 
tions of  this  galvanometer  when  testing  a  series  of  cells  which 
separately  gave  the  same  deflection,  namely,  60°: 


2  cells  gave 

3  " 

4  «  u 

5  " 


68^ 
74c 

78^ 
80' 


6  to  13  inc.  gave 
14  and  15,  " 
16  to   24,  " 


82= 
83= 
84= 


A  subsequent  test  of  this  same  series  by  electrolysis  proved 
that  the  deflections  of  the  needle  were  not  an  accurate  meas- 
ure of  the  working  power  of  the  current.  Since  the  addition 
of  cells  one  by  one,  from  6  to  13,  did  not  increase  the  de- 
flection, it  might  be  supposed  that  there  was  a  defect  in  the 
connections,  but  the  amount  of  electrolysis  performed  each  time 
a  cell  was  added  showed  a  regular  increase. 

The  amount  of  deflection  caused  by  a  freshly  charged  cell 
is  a  guide  to  its  subsequent  condition.     When  it  commences 


GALVANISM. 


121 


''to  run  down,"  the  deflection  grows  less  and  less,  and  it 
ceases  altogether  when  the  fluid  is  exhausted  or  the  elements 
destroyed. 

THE    DEFLECTION  OF    THE  COMPASS-NEEDLE. 

Minute  quantities  of  electricity  are  suflicient  to  disturb  the 
position  of  a  compass-needle ;  and  this  fact  is  frequently  taken 
advantage  of  by  dealers  in  various  so-called  electrical  appli- 
ances to  convince  the  ignorant  of  the  enormous  amount  of 
electricity  furnished  by  them.  A  magnetized  penknife  will 
disturb  the  needle  equally  as  much,  and  possesses  fully  as 
much  therapeutical  power,  as  many  of  the  electrical  devices  put 
on  the  market  in  the  guise  of  belts,  jackets,  discs,  etc.  etc. 

BINDING  POSTS. 


Fig.  27. 


A,  B  and  C  represent  binding  posts,  which  are  usually 
made  of  solid  brass,  and  in  the  better  class  of  batteries  are 
nickel-plated  to  preserve  them  from  rust,  corrosion,  etc.  They 
terminate  below  in  a  screw,  by  which  they  are  fastened  upon 
the  battery  base  and  connected  directly  or  indirectly  with  the 
elements.  They  serve  frequently  to  fasten  the  elements  to  tlie 
lower  surface  of  the  base.  Their  upper  part  contains  a  hole 
or  socket  to  receive  the  tips  of  conducting  cords.  A  repre- 
sents the  style  preferred  for  measuring  apparatus,  and  other 
purposes  where  a  very  perfect  connection  is  important.  The 


122 


GALVANISM. 


cord  tip  is  inserted  in  the  side  and  the  thumbscrew  is  turned 
firmly  down  upon  it,  giving  firm  and  perfect  contact  over 
proportionately  a  considerable  surface.  B  represents  a  com- 
mon form  of  binding  post,  which  receives  the  cord  tip  in  the 
socket  indicated  by  the  dotted  lines.  This  makes  good  connec- 
tion, provided  the  tip  fits  tight  and  the  socket  is  clean.  Fluid 
dropped  upon  the  post  may  cause  rust  in  the  socket,  and  as 
the  current  does  not  pass  readily  through  rust,  it  is  evident 
that  its  strength  may  easily  be  impaired  by  carelessness  in  this 
particular.  Binding  post  C  is  similar  to  the  others,  except  that 
it  has  a  slot  in  addition  to  the  socket.  It  is  used  on  the  end 
of  battery  bases  to  receive  a  movable  bar  which  forms  the 
connection  between  them  as  hereafter  described. 

CONDUCTING  CORDS. 

Every  part  of  a  battery  circuit  must  be  of  metal,  with 
the  exception  of  the  substance  or  body  included  between  two 
points  of  the  circuit  upon  which  the  current  is  expected  to  act. 
The  connection  between  the  binding  posts  and  electrodes  may 
be  composed  of  a  single  wire,  or  a  bundle  of  wires. 
In  either  case  it  is  essential  that  they  be  well  insulated, 
otherwise  a  portion  of  the  electricity  may  escape,  if  acci- 
dentally brought  in  contact  with  a  good  conductor,  and  the 
operator  will  fail  in  securing  the  full  strength  of  the  cur- 
rent at  the  point  where  it  is  needed.  When  a  single  wire  is 
employed,  it  is  usually  coated  with  gutta-percha  or  a  woven 
covering  saturated  in  parafiine.  It  should  be  of  sufficient  size, 
pure  and  well  annealed.  All  conducting  wires  lose  a  portion 
of  their  conducting  power  by  being  frequently  bent. 

For  medical  application  outside  the  bath,  the  conducting 
cords  were  formerly  composed  of  a  bundle  of  very  fine  wires, 
inclosed  for  insulation  in  a  double  woven  covering  of  cotton, 


GALVANISM. 


123 


worsted  or  silk.  Silver  wire  ranks  as  the  best  conductor,  per- 
fectly pure  copper  the  second,  and  alloy  the  third  on  the  list. 

When  great  heat  is  required  for  any  purpose,  as  in  galvano- 
cautery,  that  part  of  the  circuit  between  the  conducting  cords 
must  be  composed  of  a  wire  which  offers  great  resistance  to 
the  passage  of  the  current.  Platinum,  being  a  very  poor  con- 
ductor, is  usually  selected.  At  present,  the  best  conducting  cords 
for  medical  purposes  are  composed  of  alloy  in  the  form  of  ex- 
ceedingly fine  flattened  wire  resembling  foil,  wound  around  a 
stout  thread  to  give  it  strength,  several  of  these  threads  being 
twisted  in  a  strand,  and  several  strands  being  twisted  together 
after  the  manner  of  a  cable,  all  being  inclosed  in  a 
double  woven  covering.  By  this  means  a  very  large  metallic 
surface  is  obtained  in  a  very  small  space,  which  is  perfectly 
flexible  and  less  liable  to  breakage  than  conductors  composed 
of  a  bundle  of  fine  copper  wires. 

Bifurcated  cords.  A  short  cord  is  joined  to  a  long  one 
at  such  a  distance  from  the  end  as  to  make  two  equal 
branches.    It  is  used  for  two  distinct  purposes. 

1.  A  current  selector,  to  bring  any  number  of  cells  in  a 
given  series  into  the  circuit. 

2.  To  divide  the  current.  The  single  end  of  the  cord  is 
inserted  in  one  binding  post  as  usual,  and  the  double  end  is 
attached  to  two  electrodes,  which  are  located  on  the  points 
between  which  the  current  is  to  be  divided.  The  single  cord 
from  the  alternate  pole  is  attached  to  an  electrode  that  is 
usually  located  at  some  indifferent  point. 

Since  every  conducting  cord,  or  wire,  becomes  a  magnet 
while  the  current  is  passing,  and  ceases  to  be  a  magnet  the 
instant  the  current  stops,  these  changes  in  magnetic  polarity 
after  a  time  partially  overcome  the  cohesion  of  the  atoms, 
especially  near  the  ends  of  the  cords  where  the  magnetic 
force  is  greatest;  consequently  they  become  brittle  and  easily 


124 


GALVANISM. 


break.  This  source  of  current  interruption  is  frequently  over- 
looked. When  a  battery  is  in  good  working  order,  and  a 
current  can  be  detected  by  the  fingers  placed  on  the  binding 
posts,  while  a  current  cannot  be  obtained  from  the  electrodes, 
it  is  almost  certain  that  the  metallic  connection  within  the 
cord  is  severed. 

Cord  tips.  It  is  necessary  that  there  be  close  contact  be- 
tween the  metal  tips  of  the  conducting  cords  and  the  sockets 
of  the  binding  posts  over  their  entire  surface,  or  as  much  of 
it  as  possible.  The  tips  should  be  adjustable,  so  that  the 
operator  can  repair  the  cords  when  broken  without  the  delay 
of  sending  them  to  the  shop.  There  are  two  styles  of  ad- 
justable tips.  One  is  merely  a  thick  wire  turned  up  at  one 
end  to  form  a  ring,  to  which  the  metallic  portion  of  the  cord 
is  fastened  by  fine  copper  wire,  the  insulating  cover  being 
drawn  back  to  expose  it,  and  afterward  drawn  up  close  to 
the  tip  and  fastened  there. 

A  C  B 

Fig.  28. 

THE  MCINTOSH  TIP  FOR  CONDUCTING  CORDS. 

The  style  of  tip  shown  in  Fig.  28  is  a  convenient  one, 
and  gives  very  complete  contact  with  the  binding  post.  A 
shows  it  adjusted  for  use  ;  B  and  C,  the  separate  parts  when 
unscrewed  to  mend  the  cord.  After  locating  the  break,  C  is 
moved  past  the  point  an  inch  or  two  and  the  cord  cut  off  at 
the  broken  point ;  the  metallic  cable  is  exposed  by  drawing 
back  its  insulating  cover  and  is  tied  in  a  knot  to  prevent 
its  slipping  through  C.  The  cover  is  drawn  up  to  the  knot 
and  fastened  down  with  a  thread,  just  behind  the  knot  and 
trimmed  off.  C  is  now  moved  up  to  the  knot,  but  not 
over  it.    B  is  screwed  in  place  and  the  cord  is  as  good  as 


GALVANISM. 


125 


ever,  except  that  it  is  shortened.  It  is  important  that  the 
metallic  threads  of  the  cord  should  be  in  contact  with  the 
socket  of  B ;  if  bv  any  oversight  the  insulating  cover  be 
included  in  the  knot  so  as  to  cover  it  in  the  socket,  the 
passage  of  the  current  will  be  partially  or  wholly  prevented. 
A  The  Connector  is  a  convenient  device  for  connecting- 

conducting  cords  having  tips  of  different  size  with 
various  styles  of  instruments  used  in  applying  an  elec- 
trical current. 

A  is  a  small  socket  in  which  the  cord  tip  is  firmly 
fastened  by  the  thumbscrew. 
B  B  is  a  large  socket  cut  in  threads  to  receive  the 

Connector,  screw  which  terminates  the  instrument.    Several  styles 

Length  l^^  .  . 

inches,    g^^^^j  ^\z^^  of  this  useful  little  connector  are  made. 


A  Fig.  30. 


SECTION  OF  THE  McINTOSH  GALVANIC  BATTERY. 

A,  base  and  elements.   Base  3^X7  inches.  Elements  Vy<.^%. 

B  cell  section.   Length,  m  in.;  width,  3%  in.;  height,  4  in. 

P  &  N,  positive  and  negative  poles. 

1,  2,  3,  etc.,  binding  posts. 

c,  z,  c,  etc.,  carbon  and  zinc  elements. 

D,  drip-cup. 

C,  C,  cells. 

Element  section  A  is  composed  of  a  polished  hard-rubber 
base,  lined  with  soft  rubber,  which  serves  the  purpose  of  a 
hydrostat.    The  elements  are  fastened  direct  to  metal  bridges, 


126 


GALVANISM. 


and  these  are  attached  to  the  base  by  the  screws,  which  ter- 
minate the  binding  posts.  They  are  arranged  so  that  post  P 
is  connected  with  a  single  carbon,  and  post  N  with  a  single 
zinc ;  the  remaining  posts  are  each  connected  with  a  pair  of 
elements. 

The  cell  section  B  is  composed  of  vulcanized  rubber.  It  is 
divided  in  halves  by  a  partition  of  the  same  material;  one-half 
is  subdivided  into  six  equal  parts  called  cells,  which  receive 
the  fluid.  The  undivided  half  forms  the  drip-cup,  in  which  the 
elements  are  placed  when  they  are  not  in  use. 

Arrangement  of  Elements  in  the  Fluid.  When  the  ele- 
ments are  immersed  in  the  fluid,  their  arrangement  is  as  fol- 
lows :  The  first  cell  contains  the  single  carbon  attached  to 
post  P  1,  and  the  zinc  attached  to  post  1.  The  second  cell  con- 
tains the  carbon  attached  to  post  1,  and  the  zinc  attached  to 
post  2,  and  so  on,  the  last  cell  containing  the  carbon  attached 
to  post  5  and  the  zinc  attached  to  post  6. 

Direction  of  current  when  one  cell  is  in  circuit.  The  cur- 
rent generated  by  the  zinc  in  the  first  cell  passes  across  the 
fluid  to  the  carbon ;  from  thence  up  through  post  P  1  and 
the  circuit  back  to  post  1  and  down  to  the  zinc.  Binding 
post  P  1  is  the  positive  pole,  and  binding  post  1  the  negative. 

When  any  number  of  cells  are  in  circuity  the  post  to 
which  the  last  zinc  in  the  series  (the  one  farthest  from  P  1) 
is  attached  forms  the  negative  pole,  while  P  1  remains,  as 
before,  the  positive  pole.  Suppose  three  cells  are  included. 
The  current  generated  by  the  zinc  in  the  third  cell  passes 
through  the  liquid  to  the  carbon,  up  this  to  the  metal  bridge 
fastened  to  post  2,  over  the  bridge  to  the  zinc  in  cell  2  ;  the 
zinc  in  cell  2  generates  a  current  to  which  impetus  is  added 
by  that  received  from  cell  3.  This  augmented  current  passes 
across  the  fluid  to  the  carbon,  up  to  the  metal  bridge  attached 
to  post  1,  and  over  to  the  zinc  in  cell  1,  adding  to  it  the 


GALVANISM. 


127 


additional  impetus  gained  from  the  two  preceding  cells  ;  this 
passes  across  to  carbon  connected  with  PI,  up  through  this 
post  and  the  conducting  cord  attached  to  it,  through  the  circuit 
to  post  3,  and  thence  to  the  zinc  element  where  the  current 
originated. 


Fig.  31. 

THE  Mcintosh  galvanic  battery. 

TWENTY-FOUR  CELLS. 
Length,  18  in. ;  width,  8%  in. ;  height,  114  in. ;  weight,  18]4  lbs. 


The  physician  who  uses  electricity  in  general  practice  has  oc- 
casion frequently  to  apply  the  galvanic  current  at  a  distance  from 
his  office.  For  this  purpose,  a  compact  instrument  capable  of 
giving  a  current  strong  enough,  not  only  for  general  application, 
but  for  any  case  of  electrolysis  that  may  be  presented,  is  essen- 
tial, and  it  is  also  essential  that  such  an  instrument  be  not  too 
heavy  to  be  conveniently  portable.  The  galvanic  batteries  in- 
vented by  Dr.  Mcintosh  meet  these  requirements  fully.  They 
are  not  only  compact,  perfectly  portable,  and  easily  kept  in 
order,  but  they  are  the  most  powerful  galvanic  batteries  made, 
with  the  exception  of  those  intended  solely  for  galvano-cautery. 


128 


GALVANISM. 


Each  cell,  when  freshly  charged,  has  an  electro-motive  force 
of  two  volts.  These  cells  are  arranged  in  sections  of  six,  so 
that  only  six  pairs  of  elements  are  exposed  to  the  action  of 
the  fluid  at  once,  and  of  these,  any  single  pair  may  be  used 
separately.  By  this  ingenious  arrangement,  the  fluid  and  ele- 
ments throughout  the  entire  battery  may  be  used  up  uniformly, 
instead  of  having  the  bulk  of.  the  work  fall  upon  the  first  cells 
in  the  series,  as  is  usually  the  case.  As  the  full  number  of 
twenty-four  cells  are  rarely  required  for  any  operation,  all  sec- 
tions not  actually  needed  should  be  omitted  from  the  circuit, 
to  serve  as  a  reserve  force^  ready  to  be  brought  into  service 
when  more  power  is  required,  or  when  the  current  from  those 
in  use  falls  below  that  necessary  to  accomplish  the  work  in 
hand,  either  from  polarization,  exhaustion  of  fluid,  or  destruc- 
tion of  elements.  As  all  single  fluid  cells,  without  exception, 
fall  constantly  from  the  power  they  possess,  when  the  circuit 
is  first  closed,  fresh  cells  may  be  added,  one  by  one,  to  keep 
the  strength  of  the  current  uniform.  The  foUowing  features  of 
these  admirable  instruments  need  only  to  be  referred  to,  as 
their  value  will  be  at  once  apparent : 

1.  When  fhe  battery  is  closed,  each  cell  section  is  tightly 
covered,  so  that  no  liquid  can  escape  from  the  cells. 

2.  When  the  battery  is  not  in  use,  the  elements  are  con- 
tained in  empty  drip-cups,  thus  preserving  them  from  all 
possibility  of  waste  from  local  action. 

3.  The  electrode  box  is  so  placed  that  the  battery  cannot 
be  closed  so  long  as  any  section  of  elements  remains  in  the 
fluid. 

4.  The  current  is  started  by  simply  lifting  a  section  of 
elements  to  the  right  so  as  to  immerse  them  in  the  fluid.  The 
handles  on  the  bases  serve  to  lift  the  sections,  and  also  as 
springs  to  press  them  down  firmly  on  the  cells  when  the 
battery  is  closed. 


GALVANISM. 


129 


5.  If  at  any  time  during  treatment  the  current  fails,  new 
sections  may  be  made  read}^  in  an  instant,  and  those  already 
used  may  be  omitted  from  the  circuit.  This  is  an  inestimable 
advantage  in  certain  electrolytic  operations.  New  cells  may 
be  added  during  the  operation  without  shock  to  the  patient, 
and  without  breaking  the  circuit,  by  using  the  bifurcated 
cord  as  a  current  selector. 

7.  The  cells,  being  of  hard  rubber,  are  not  injured  by 
leaving  the  fluid  in  them  constantly. 

8.  Since  the  available  strength  of  current  depends,  among 
other  conditions,  upon  uniformity  of  element  surface  immersed 
in  fluid,  a  glass  measure  is  sent  out  with  these  batteries, 
graduated  to  show  the  amount  of  fluid  required  for  one  cell, 
so  that  all  may  be  filled  alike. 

9.  When  it  is  necessary  to  clean  the  cells,  they  can  be 
lifted  out,  emptied,  and  washed  like  an  ordinary  cup.  Since 
the  connections  between  elements  are  not  disturbed  in  the 
process,  the  work  of  cleaning  the  battery  may  be  intrusted 
to  any  one  who  is  sufficiently  careful  not  to  spill  the  fluid 
upon  the  metal  work. 

AUTOMATIC  KHEOTOME. 
K 

R.  The  cylinder  containing  clockwork. 
A  P.  Vibrating  Pendulum. 
P.  Movable  ball  to  regulate  length  of 
vibration. 

B  B.  Binding  posts  for  connecting  Avith 
battery. 

K.  Key  for  winding  clockwork, 
-f^^r>  W.  Winding  post. 

S.  Starting  and  stopping  post. 

Length  of  base,  li  in. ;  width,  4i  in. 

The  automatic  rheotome  is  designed  to  produce  regular 
interruptions  of  the  galvanic  current. 

To  introduce  it  into  the  circuit.  Connect  one  binding 
post  B  with  the  positive  pole  of  the  battery,  and  the  other 

9 


130 


GALVANISM. 


post  B  with  an  electrode  that  is  applied  to  the  patient.  The 
negative  pole  of  the  battery  is  connected  with  the  patient  in 
the  usual  manner. 

To  start  the  rheotome.  Turn  post  "W  with  the  key  in  the 
same  direction  as  when  winding  a  clock.  Remove  the  key  to 
post  S,  turn  it  slightly  to  the  right,  and  A  P  will  immediately 
begin  to  vibrate. 

To  regulate  the  interruptions.  Moving  P  nearer  A  shortens 
the  vibrator  and  increases  the  rapidity  of  the  interruptions ; 
moving  P  farther  from  A  causes  slower  interruptions.  They 
may  be  stopped  instantly  by  turning  post  S  to  the  left. 


Fig.  33. 
POLE  CHANGER. 
Length,  6%  in.;  diameter,  1  in. 


The  pole  changer  not  only  changes  the  direction  of  the 
current,  but  also  produces  the  effect  of  a  current  interrupter 
while  the  change  in  polarity  is  being  made.  This  instrument 
consists  of  a  hollow  polished-rubber  cylinder,  containing  within 
it  a  long  movable  arm  which  carries  a  pair  of  parallel  metal 
springs.  At  each  end  of  the  cylinder  are  two  binding  posts,  which 
have  metallic  connection,  with  two  brass  buttons  just  within  the 
cylinder,  with  which  the  springs  make  contact.  The  thumb- 
screw M  is  attached  to  the  movable  arm,  and  when  moved 
the  length  of  the  slot,  in  the  cylinder,  carries  the  arm  with 
it.  When  M  is  at  one  end  of  its  slot,  the  metallic  connec- 
tions through  the  instrument  are  parallel ;  that  is,  the  cur- 
rent which  enters  at  A  comes  out  at  B,  passes  through  the 
circuit  and  back  to  D,  emerging  at  C.  When  M  is  moved 
to  the  other  end  of  its  slot,  the  current  entering  at  A  passes 
out  at  D,  and,  returning  through  the  circuit  at  B,  emerges  at  C. 


GALVANISM. 


131 


To  use  the  pole  changer.  Connect  A  and  C  with  the  two 
poles  of  the  battery,  B  and  D  with  two  electrodes,  and  com- 
plete the  circuit  as  usual.  Move  M  to  and  fro  to  change  the 
polarity  at  suitable  intervals. 


THE  MCINTOSH  GALVANIC  BELT. 


Fig.  34. 
Weight  of  belt,  lOJ^  oz. 

The  Mcintosh  galvanic  belt  is  constructed  on  the  prin- 
ciple of  the  voltaic  pile.  It  consists  of  a  series  of  cells  placed 
in  pockets  on  a  belt. 

The  cells  are  com- 
posed of  vulcanized 
rubber,  lined  with  cop- 
per. The  rubber  serves 
two  purposes  ;  it  pre- 
vents leakage  and  in- 
sulates the  cells  so  that 
the  electricity  genera- 
ted within  cannot  es- 

Section  of  Belt  Cells. 

Actual  size.  capc  except  through  the 

conducting  wires.  The  copper  lining  forms  the  collecting  plate. 
The  generating  plate  is  zinc,  wrapped  in  a  porous  material  which 
absorbs  the  exciting  fluid  and  prevents  any  accidental  escape 
from  the  cells.     The  zinc  element  in  one  cell  is  joined  to  the 


132 


GALVANISM. 


copper  of  the  next  by  a  short  copper  wire,  so  fastened  as  to 
permit  a  hinge-like  motion  between  the  cells,  making  the  belt 
perfectly  pliable. 

The  helt  is  charged  by  dropping  a  little  diluted  vinegar 
or  acetic  acid  *  in  each  cell.  A  drop-tube  is  furnished 
with  the  belt  to  facilitate  this  process.  The  porous  material 
of  each  cell  (that  is  to  be  included  in  the  circuit)  must  be 
thoroughly  wet  with  fluid. 

Caution.  It  is  not  unusual  for  those  unfamiliar  with  the 
principle  of  the  voltaic  pile,  to  endeavor  to  increase  the 
strength  of  the  current  by  using  a  larger  proportion  of  acid, 
or  pure  acid ;  the  result  is  a  sharp  current  and  chemical 
action  of  such  intensity  as  to  produce  rapid  polarization,  in 
consequence  of  which  the  current  ceases  to  pass  through  the 
conducting  cords. 

2'he  strength  of  the  current.  This  varies  constantly  from 
the  time  the  circuit  is  closed  until  the  fluid  becomes  exhausted. 
When  all  the  cells  are  in  circuit  and  freshly  charged,  the  current 
has  a  strength  of  about  four  volts,  and,  if  kept  working  through 
a  resistance  equal  to  that  of  the  human  body,  will  retain  this 
strength  for  nearly  twelve  hours ;  it  then  perceptibly  decreases, 
but  is  capable  of  producing  a  therapeutical  effect  for  about  twenty- 
four  hours  after  it  is  charged,  or  until  the  porous  filling  of  the 
cells  becomes  dry.  This  belt  furnishes  a  current  of  sufficient 
potential  to  decompose  water,  and  this  experiment  is  the  best 
mode  of  testing  the  relative  strength  of  the  belt. 

The  Electrodes  are  thin  plates  of  metal,  covered  with  flannel, 
sponge,  or  chamois  skin,  connected  with  the  cells  by  means 
of  conducting  cords,  and  are  fastened  on  the  parts  to  which 
the  current  is  to  be  conveyed.  Elastic  bands,  which  fasten 
with  a  convenient  clasp,  are  used  to  retain  the  electrodes  in 
place.    The  cover  of  the  electrodes  must  be  moistened  with 


*  Dilute  acetic  acid  here  referred  to  contains  one  part  acid  to  ten  parts  water. 


GALVANISM. 


133 


water  (in  rare  cases  with  salt  and  water  or  acidulated  water), 
and  placed  in  contact  with  the  skin.  The  current  loill  not 
pass  through  dry  cloth^  sponge  or  chamois.  Tlie  metal  elec- 
trodes applied  without  a  cover  directly  to  the  skin  produce 
considerable  irritation,  and  if  left  long  in  direct  contact  will 
blister,  especially  under  the  negative.  Metallic  instruments  of 
any  form,  such  as  needles,  metallic  discs,  etc.,  may  be  connected 
with  the  cords,  and  the  current  conveyed  through  them  the 
same  as  through  ordinary  electrodes. 

Conducting  Cords. — These  are  similar  to  the  conducting 
cords  used  with  batteries.  Two  conducting  cords  can  be  attached 
to  either  pole  when  the  current  is  to  be  divided  between  two 
parts,  as  the  feet  or  arms,  etc. 

To  increase  or  decrease  the  number  of  cells  in  the  circuit. 
Always  remove  the  cord  in  connection  with  the  zinc  to  make 
any  change  in  the  number  of  cells  in  circuit,  and  replace  it 
between  the  zinc  and  its  cover  in  the  last  cell  of  the  series  to 
be  used.  For  example,  if  live  cells  are  wanted  in  circuit, 
leaving  the  cord  attached  to  the  copper  undisturbed,  connect 
the  negative  cord  with  the  zinc  in  the  fifth  cell. 

The  practical  advantages  of  the  helt.  The  belt  is  especially 
adapted  to  those  cases  that  require  either  a  general  or  local 
application  of  an  uninterrupted  galvanic  current  of  small  quan- 
tity for  a  long  time,  either  to  improve  nutrition  (innervation) 
to  excite  absorption^  or  to  produce  a  chemical  change  in 
secretion. 

For  the  first  purpose  named,  one  electrode  (to  which  a 
large  sponge  should  be  attached)  is  placed  over  that  portion 
of  the  nerve-centers  to  be  influenced,  and  the  other  over  the 
special  organ  most  implicated  in  the  constitutional  derangement. 

When  applied  to  single  organs,  to  reduce  irritation  the 
positive  electrode  should  be  placed  over  the  nerve-roots,  as 
shown  in  Fig.  73,  and  the  negative  over  the  organ  to  be 


134 


GALVANISM. 


influenced ;  the  best  locality  for  this  can  be  determined  by- 
consulting  the  ''landmarks"  on  Fig.  74.  If  the  male  sexual 
organs  are  to  be  treated,  a  suspensory  bandage  specially  made 
to  accompany  the  belt  can  be  used  for  one  electrode,  while  the 
other  pole  is  placed  over  the  pelvic  ganglia.  To  stimulate  or 
to  excite  absorption,  the  current  must  be  carried  through  the 
nerves  in  the  opposite  direction,  that  is,  the  negative  over  the 
brain,  spine,  or  nerve-roots,  and  the  positive  over  the  periphery 
of  the  nerves. 

In  the  treatment  of  ulcers,  to  change  the  nature  of  the 
secretions  it  must  be  remembered  that  those  in  contact  with 
the  positive  pole  are  changed  to  an  acid  state,  and  those  in 
contact  with  the  negative  to  an  alkaline,  as  a  piece  of  litmus 
paper  will  readily  show. 

If  it  is  thought  desirable  to  apply  this  current  to  a  single 
muscle,  or  group  of  muscles,  the  electrodes  should  be  very 
small,  and  should  be  located  according  to  the  motor  points 
of  the  special  muscles  to  be  treated. 

Duchenne  discovered  that  certain  forms  of  paralysis  re- 
ceived most  benefit  from  electricity  when  its  application  was 
accompanied  by  what  he  termed  "mental  gymnastics,"  that 
is,  when  the  patient  exerted  his  will  to  produce  contraction 
of  the  paralyzed  muscles  at  the  same  time  that  a  current 
was  passing  through  them.  The  belt  furnishes  a  current  that 
may  be  conveniently  applied  for  this  purpose. 

Dr.  Poore*  claims  priority  for  the  "combination  of  a  con- 
tinuous galvanic  current  with  voluntary  muscular  exercise." 
His  clinical  observations  lead  him  to  believe  that  during  the 
passage  of  the  polarizing  current  the  voluntary  mental  stim- 
ulus acts  with  greater  effect  on  the  muscles,  or,  in  other  words, 
the  contracting  power  of  the  muscles  is  increased.  Other  uses 
of  the  belt  will  be  suggested  under  electrolysis. 

*  A  Text-Book  on  Electricity  in  Medicine  and  Surgery.  G.  V.  Poore,  M.D.,  M.R.C.P., 
etc.  . 


GALVANISM. 


135 


THE    MCINTOSH    GALVANIC  SUPPORTER. 

This  consists  of  a  metallic  attachment  to  the  Mcintosh 
Uterine  Supporter  Cup,  for  the  purpose  of  conveying  a  galvanic 

CC.  Cells  similar  to  the  belt 
cells,  fastened  directly  to  the  sup- 
porter belt.  A  morocco  flap,  which 
covers  them,  is  shown  partly  lifted 
up. 

E.  Electrode  (a  little  too  high 
on  the  cut),  located  over  the  ova- 
rian region. 

M.  The  metal  lined  uterine 
cup  which  conveys  the  current  to 
the  cervix. 

N.  The  end  of  the  metal  rod 
which  extends  through  the  rubber 
stem  to  M.  It  is  enlarged  in  the 
cut  to  make  it  visible. 

W  W.   Conducting  cords. 
SS.   Soft-rubber  cords  which 
retain  the  cup  in  position. 

Two  conducting  cords  may  be  connected  with  O,  to  divide 
the  current  between  two  electrodes,  so  that  one  may  be  applied 
over  each  ovary,  or  one  over  the  median  line  in  front  and 
the  other  over  the  sacrum.  The  cup,  being  of  hard  rubber, 
is  a  perfect  insulator;  the  current  passes  only  to  that  part 
of  the  cervix  in  contact  with  the  metal  lining  the  cup.  The 
cervix  should  be  examined  from  time  to  time  to  guard  against 
too  much  action  on  the  tissues.  There  exists  great  difference 
of  opinion  as  to  the  value  of  an  electrical  current  thus  applied  ; 
the  evidence  for  and  against  it  is  so  incomplete  that  it  is  not 
deemed  advisable  to  enter  into  a  discussion  of  the  subject  here. 
This  method  is  sometimes  adopted  in  the  treatment  of  atony, 
ulceration,  prolapsus,  etc.,  with  alleged  success. 

THE    PHYSIOLOGICAL    EFFECT    OF    THE    GALVANIC  CURRENT. 

The  first  definite  knowledge  of  the  effect  of  galvanism  on 
muscular  and  nervous  fiber,  which  we  have,  is  derived  from 


current  directly  to  the  cervix. 


Fig.  36. 


136 


GALVANISM. 


the  experiments  instituted  by  Humboldt.  Aldini,  pupil  of 
Galvani,  was  the  first  to  api^ly  galvanism  to  the  treatment  of 
disease,  and  in  1804  he  published  a  book  at  Bologna  entitled 
Theoretical  and  Experimental  Essay  on  Galvanism." 
Prof.  C.  Matteuci,  of  Pisa,  made  a  long  and  thorough 
series  of  experiments  to  determine  the  influence  of  the  galvanic 
current  upon  the  animal  tissues,  and  his  conclusions  are  regarded 
as  authoritative,  having  been  repeatedly  confirmed  by  others 
from  time  to  time  since  he  originally  announced  them.  Tliey 
may  be  brieflj^  summed  up  as  follows  : 

1.  It  excites  sensation  at  one  time  and  contraction  at  an- 
other, according  to  the  direction  in  which  it  traverses  a  nerve. 

2.  It  does  not  excite  a  nerve  when  passing  through  it 
transversely. 

3.  Neither  contraction  nor  sensation  is  produced  when  its 
influence  upon  a  nerve  is  prolonged. 

4.  It  alone  has  the  property  of  increasing  or  diminishing 
the  excitability  of  a  nerve,  according  to  the  direction  in  which 
it  is  made  to  flow. 

5.  It  has  the  power  of  awakening  the  excitability  of  a  nerve 
after  all  other  stinmlants  have  ceased  to  act. 

6.  When  a  galvanic  current  is  sent  through  a  limb  in  the 
opposite  direction  to  the  nerve  current,  a  muscular  contraction 
takes  place. 

7.  When  the  electrical  current  passes  in  the  same  direction 
as  the  ramifications  of  the  nerves,  a  stronger  contraction  takes 
place. 

Posenthal  states  that  there  is  a  great  similarity  between 
muscles  and  glands  in  this  respect.  If  a  nerve  which  is  con- 
nected with  a  muscle  is  irritated,  the  muscle  becomes  active  ; 
that  is,  it  contracts  ;  and  if  a  nerve  that  is  connected  with  a 
gland  is  irritated,  the  gland  becomes  active  ;  that  is,  it  secretes. 


GALVANISM. 


137 


ELECTROTONOS. 

It  was  claimed  by  Matteuci  that  the  galvanic  current  exerts 
an  inlliience  over  the  nerves  it  traverses  only  at  the  time  when 
the  circuit  is  closed  or  opened,  since  at  those  instants  only 
can  a  muscular  contraction  be  produced.  Subsequent  observers, 
among  them  Du  Bois-Keymond,  confirmed  this  opinion,  and 
it  was  accepted  as  a  fact  until  Ritter  reported  the  following 
observation  :  During  a  long  and  persistent  closure  of  a  strong 
galvanic  circuit,  if  the  current  be  carried  through  both  arms, 
the  band  and  arm  in  contact  with  the  negative  pole  become 
less  and  less  mobile  until,  finally,  complete  rigidity  sets  in  ; 
whereas,  on  the  contrary,  the  hand  and  arm  in  contact  with  the 
positive  become  more  and  more  mobile  and  easy  to  move.  To 
this  changed  state  of  the  nerve-current,  during  the  continued 
passage  of  a  galvanic  current,  has  been  given  the  name 
electrotonos. 

Pfliiger  explains  the  fact,  viz  :  The  arm  on  the  positive  side  is 
traversed  by  an  upward,  and  on  the  negative  side  by  a  down- 
ward, current ;  no  perceptible  error  occurs  in  considering  it  the 
same  as  if  the  positive  pole  be  set  on  the  shoulder  of  the  down- 
wardly traversed  arm,  and  the  negative  in  the  hand  of  same  ; 
while  in  .the  upwardly  traversed  arm  the  position  of  electrodes 
is  reversed.  When  the  will  acts  out  from  the  brain  on  both 
arms  simultaneously,  it  acts  ctbove  the  anode  in  the  downwardly 
traversed  arm,  or  in  the  same  direction  as  the  current  and 
behind  it,  while  in  the  upwardly  traversed  arm,  above  the 
cathode^  or  opposite  to  the  electric  current.  This  experiment 
was  the  first  discovery  of,  electric  law  in  the  living  human 
being. 

ANELECTEOTONOS  AND  CATELECTEOTONOS. 

Pfiiiger  has  also  shown  that  when  a  galvanic  current 
traverses  a  certain  length  of  ney've  it  divides  the  latter  into 


138 


GALVANISM. 


two  sections  or  zones  which  physiologically  differ,  the  portion 
nearer  the  negative  pole  having  its  irritability  increased,  and. 
the  portion  nearer  the  positive  having  its  irritability  decreased. 
That  condition  of  the  nerve  next  the  negative  pole  has  been 
named  catelectrotonos  /  that  next  the  positive,  anelectrotonos. 
These  conditions  pass  into  each  other  at  a  point  between  the 
poles  called  jpoint  of  indifference. 

LOCATION  OF  THE  POINT  OF  INDIFFERENCE. 

This  depends  upon 

1.  The  size  of  the  electrodes, 

2.  The  distance  they  are  apart, 

3.  The  electro-motive  force  of  the  current, 

4.  The  length  of  time  the  application  is  continued. 

The  altered  or  polar  condition  of  the  nerve  extends  only  to 
a  certain  distance  from  the  electrodes,  and  when  they  are  very 
small  or  far  apart  a  considerable  extent  of  the  circuit  between 
them  may  constitute  the  ''point  of  indifference,"  since  the  current 
traverses  the  fluids  rather  than  the  solids  of  the  body.  When 
the  current  is  feeble  (has  small  electro-motive  force),  the  point 
of  indifference  is  moved  toward  the  positive  pole,  and  almost 
the  whole  extent  of  nerve  between  the  two  electrodes  may  be 
in  a  state  of  increased  excitability  (catelectrotonos) ;  with  a 
strong  current  the  reverse  is  true.  When  the  current  passes 
for  a  long  time  without  interruption,  the  "point  of  indifference" 
is  moved  toward  the  negative  pole,  or  the  section  of  diminished 
irritability  (anelectrotonos)  is  increased ;  and  if  the  electro-motive 
force  of  the  current  be  at  the  same  time  increased,  the  zone 
of  increased  irritability  may  be  reduced  to  the  small  space  in 
the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  negative  pole,  and  after  this 
maximum  condition  is  reached  it  is  useless  to  continue  the 
current  longer. 


GALVANISM. 


139 


Reaction.  Immediately  after  breaking  the  connection  reac- 
tion takes  place  in  both  sections  of  the  nerve,  the  one  which 
during  the  passage  of  the  current  was  in  a  state  of  diminished 
irritability  (anelectrotonos)  assuming  the  catelectrotonos  state, 
and  vice  versa.  This  gradually  subsides  and  the  nerve  resumes 
its  natural  condition. 

Alteration  in  conducting  power  of  nerve.  The  galvanic 
current  also  changes  the  faculty  of  the  nerve  to  transmit  stimu- 
lation ;  that  portion  of  the  nerve  which  has  its  excitability 
diminished  offers  greater  resistance  to  the  transmission  of  the 
stimulation,  and  this  resistance  increases  with  the  duration  and 
electro-motive  force  of  the  polarizing  current. 

Effect  of  a  strong  current.  Repeated  and  strong  electrical 
shocks  weaken  and  invert  the  nerve-current.  It  should  be 
remembered  that  galvanic  stimulation  is  the  first  step  in  the 
electrolysis  of  the  nerve. 

LAW  OF  GALVANIC  STIMULATION. 

The  law  of  galvanic  stimulation  has  been  investigated  by 
Du  Bois-Reymond,  and  his  conclusions  are  briefly  these : 

1.  The  motor  nerve  is  stimulated  not  so  much  by  the 
density  or  quantity  of  any  given  current  as  by  its  variations 
from  one  instant  to  another. 

2.  The  more  rapid  and  sudden  the  fluctuations  of  the  cur- 
rent, the  greater  the  effect  produced  by  a  minimum  quantity 
of  electricity. 

3.  Frequent  change  in  direction  is  required  in  galvanic 
stimulation  of  a  nerve,  because  the  conductivity  of  a  current 
flowing  long  in  the  same  direction  is  decreased,  while  a  change 
increases  it. 

4.  There  is  no  doubt  that  the  brain  and  spinal  marrow 
may  be  affected  by  the  galvanic  current,  even  through  their 


140 


GALVANISM. 


boii}^  covering.  The  latter  point  has  been  confirmed  by 
Ziemssen. 

METHOD  OF  APPLYINO  GALVANISM. 

Certain  terms  are  applied  to  the  galvanic  current  to  dis- 
tinguish the  method  of  its  application. 

1.  Stabile  current  is  the  name  given  it  by  Eemak  when 
the  electrodes  are  kept  stationary  during  a  sitting. 

2.  Labile  current,  when  the  negative  is  made  to  glide 
over  the  surface  in  the  direction  of  the  nerves  and  muscles 
to  be  acted  upon. 

3.  Descending  current  is  the  name  given  it  when  the  posi- 
tive electrode  is  placed  over  the  plexus  or  roots  of  the  nerve, 
and  the  negative  at  the  extremities. 

4.  Ascending  current^  when  the  negative  is  placed  over  the 
roots  of  the  nerves  and  the  positive  at  their  extremity  or 
periphery. 

5.  An  increasing  current.  A  current  from  a  circuit  that 
is  being  increased  by  joining  more  cells  in  the  series  from 
time  to  time  during  a  sitting. 

6.  A  decreasing  current.  The  current  from  a  circuit  from 
which  cells  are  being  disconnected  from  time  to  time  during 
a  sitting. 

5.  General  galvanization  is  a  term  indicating  that  the  cur- 
rent is  applied  to  the  whole  surface  during  a  sitting.  It  is  some- 
times called  the  percutaneous  method.  Beard  and  Rockwell 
have  given  the  name  central  galvanization  to  that  particular 
method  of  employing  general  galvanization  which  is  original 
with  them.  Its  object  is  to  bring  the  brain,  spinal  cord, 
sympathetic  and  pneumogastric  nerves  under  the  influence  of 
the  galvanic  current.  The  negative  electrode  is  placed  over 
the  epigastrium  while  the  positive  is  passed  over  the  fore- 
head, top  of  head,  along  the  inner  border  of  the  sterno-cleido 


GALVANISM. 


141 


mastoid  muscle,  from  the  mastoid  fossa  to  the  sternum,  and 
at  the  nape  of  the  neck  and  down  the  entire  length  of  tlie 
spine. 

6.  Localized  galvanization.  This  includes  cutaneous  galvan- 
ization, galvanization  of  nerves  and  muscles,  and  galvanization 
of  special  organs  and  senses.  This  is  usually  accomplished 
by  placing  one  metal  or  sponge  electrode  over  the  part  to  be 
treated  and  the  other  over  the  root  or  trunk  of  the  nerve 
supplying  it.  Another  method,  called  by  its  inventor  galvano- 
pimcture^  is  supposed  to  have  been  first  used  by  Fabre-Pala- 
prat,  in  1828.  Its  first  scientific  use,  however,  was  made 
by  Magendie.  It  is  a  combination  of  electricity  with  acupunc- 
ture, which  is  little  used  at  present. 

DETAILS  OF  TREATMENT. 

To  prepare  the  patient  for  general  galvanization.  Dynamic 
electricity  does  not  possess  sufficient  potential  to  overcome  the 
resistance  of  the  clothing,  therefore  the  conductors  or  electrodes 
used  to  convey  the  current  to  the  body  must  be  in  direct  contact 
with  the  shin.  Since  the  current  flows  only  when  the  circuit  is 
complete,  two  separate  parts  of  the  body  or  tissues  treated  must 
be  connected  with  the  battery,  one  connection  being  made  with 
the  positive  and  the  other  with  the  negative  pole  of  the  battery. 
The  clothing  should  be  loosened,  so  that  the  current  may  be 
carried  by  suitable  conductors  down  the  whole  length  of  the 
spine  and  over  the  principal  organs  of  the  body ;  and  if  the  legs 
are  to  be  included  in  the  treatment,  the  feet  should  be  bare  and 
in  contact  with  one  of  the  conductors. 

The  room  in  which  the  treatment  is  given  should  be  sufii- 
ciently  warm,  so  that  there  can  be  no  danger  of  the  patient's 
becoming  chilled  ;  for  the  same  reason  the  conductors  or  elec- 
trodes should  be  warm.    AW  exposure  of  the  person  should  be 


142 


GALVANISM. 


avoided  so  far  as  possible.  It  is  convenient  and  customary  to 
provide  a  sliawl  or  blanket  to  be  thrown  over  the  patient  if  the 
sitting  is  to  be  long  and  the  application  very  general. 

The  battery  should  be  tested  before  commencing  to  ascertain 
whether  it  is  in  good  working  order  or  not.  A  galvanometer 
introduced  into  the  circuit  will  be  deflected  if  a  current  is  passing, 
as  already  described.  An  excellent  test  that  has  several  advan- 
tages over  all  others  is  to  apply  the  current  from  the  smallest 
number  of  cells  to  be  used  to  the  operator's  tongue,  and  the 
current  from  the  largest  number  to  the  back  of  his  hand. 

Strength  of  current.  It  is  best  to  commence  with  a  current 
from  a  very  few  cells,  adding  others,  one  by  one,  to  the  series, 
if  necessary,  to  increase  the  strength. 

The  galvanic  current,  unless  ver}^  powerful,  produces  no 
marked  sensations  when  uninterrupted  ;  frequently  the  patient 
does  not  feel  it  at  all  except  at  the  instant  the  circuit  is  closed  or 
opened  ;  therefore,  when  it  is  desirable  to  prevent  all  shock,  the 
electrodes  should  be  placed  in  position  before  the  circuit  is  closed, 
and  at  first  include  not  more  than  two  or  three  cells  in  circuit ; 
as  soon  as  the  current  is  started  cells  may  be  added,  one  by  one, 
without  causing  shock,  and  the  electrodes  may  be  moved  over 
the  surface  without  producing  disagreeable  sensations,  provided 
their  contact  with  the  surface  is  not  broken  during  the  applica- 
tion. Before  removing  them  or  breaking  the  circuit  the  current 
should  be  decreased,  cell  by  cell,  until  reduced  to  its  original 
strength. 

This  mode  of  regulating  the  strength  of  the  current  (except 
for  very  sensitive  patients)  should  be  reserved  for  special  cases, 
because  the  therapeutical  effect  of  the  increasing  and  decreasing 
currents  differ  from  those  which  are  maintained  at  a  uniform 
strength  during  an  entire  sitting. 

It  may  he  laid  down  as  a  general  principle  that  a  feeble 
current  used  for  a  short  time  produces  the  greatest  therapeutical 


GALVANISM. 


143 


effect.  A  very  powerful  current  almost  always  does  harm  instead 
of  good.,  and  more  especially  so  when  it  is  applied  for  a  conslder- 
ahle  length  of  time. 


Fig.  37. 


ONE  STEP  IN  CENTRAL  GALVANIZATION. 

A  Mcintosh  eighteen-cell  combined  galvanic  and  faradic 
battery  is  shown  in  this  illustration.  The  positive  pole  is  con- 
nected with  the  electrode  on  the  head  of  the  patient.  Three 
cells  are  in  circuit,  and  the  operator  is  taking  the  fourth  cell 
into  circuit,  showing  the  method  of  using  the  bifurcated  cord  as 
a  current  selector,  and  of  producing  an  increasing  current. 

The  long-handled  electrode  beside  the  battery  is  used  in  Fig. 
38  for  applying  the  current  to  the  skin  under  the  clothing. 
A  hydro-rheostat  is  in  the  circuit  (see  Fig.  51)  to  prevent  the 
current  from  producing  an  unpleasant  effect  upon  the  brain. 
It  is  not  used  with  the  galvanic  current,  except  when  the  latter 
is  interrupted. 

The  electrode  on  the  head  is  faced  with  sponge,  which  should 
be  moist,  and  the  hair  also,  dry  hair  being  a  non-conductor.  It 
should  be  pressed  evenly  and  firmly  over  as  large  a  space  as 


144 


GALVANISM. 


possible.  It  should  be  located  before  the  circuit  is  completed. 
The  negative  electrode  is  placed  over  the  stomach  ;  the  vest 
should  be  unbuttoned  and  the  underclothing  drawn  aside  to 
permit  the  electrode  to  rest  on  the  skin. 

The  application  to  the  brain  should  not  exceed  one  or  two 
minutes,  if  a  stabile  current  is  used  ;  with  a  labile  current  it 
may  be  four  minutes. 


Caution.  All  applications  of  electricity  about  the  head 
should  be  made  with  every  precaution,  if  made  at  all,  in  cases 
where  the  symptoms  indicate  that  apoplexy  or  paralysis  may 
be  impending.  Dizziness  should  be  a  warning  that  the  current 
is  too  strong,  applied  too  long,  or  is  unsuitable  to  the  case. 

Galvanization  of  the  neck  must  be  practiced  with  caution, 
since  giddiness  and  faintness  are  occasionally  produced.  While 
applying  currents  about  the  sides  or  front  of  the  neck,  the 
sensations  excited  in  the  patient  must  be  carefully  observed. 
Acts  of  swallowing  and  coughing  are  frequently  produced, 
especially  when  the  negative  electrode  is  on  the  neck,  being 
caused,  probably,  by  the  irritation  of  the  superior  laryngeal 
nerve. 


Fig.  38. 


ANOTHER  STEP  IN  CENTRAL  GALVANIZATION. 


GALVANISM. 


145 


A  twelve-cell  combined  battery  is  shown  in  Fig.  38,  with  twelve 
cells  in  circuit.  The  sections  are  united  by  a  bar,  which  may 
be  seen  between  them,  next  the  battery  top.  An  automatic 
rheotome  is  in  circuit  to  produce  an  interrupted  galvanic 
current.  It  is  not  an  essential  feature  in  this  treatment,  but, 
being  sometimes  used,  it  is  introduced  in  the  illustration  to 
show  the  method  of  employing  it.  A  lady  patient  should 
loosen  her  clothing  at  the  neck  sufficiently  to  permit  the  free 
passage  of  the  long-handled  electrode  down  the  entire  length  of 
the  spine,  and  also  over  the  stomach  to  permit  locating  the  sta- 
tionary electrode.  When  the  liver,  spleen,  etc.,  need  a  special 
application  of  the  current,  the  dress-waist  and  corset  may  be 
removed,  and  a  shawl  be  thrown  over  the  shoulders  to  avoid 
exposure.  As  a  rule,  that  operator  will  be  most  successful  in 
pleasing  lady  patients  who  manages  to  give  the  necessary  treat- 
ment with  least  disarrangement  of  clothing. 

Localized  galvanization.  This  method  of  employing  the 
galvanic  current  will  be  described  in  the  chapter  treating  of 
the  physiological  and  therapeutical  efiect  of  electricity  upon 
the  various  nerves,  muscles,  and  organs  of  special  sense. 


CHAPTEE  lY. 


ELECTROLYSIS. 

This  is  the  process  of  decomposing  a  compound  substancG 
by  passing  electricity  through  it.  One  portion  appears  at  the 
point  where  the  current  enters,  and  the  other  at  the  point 
where  the  current  leaves  the  compound.  Faraday  gave  it  the 
name  electrolysis,  which  is  understood  to  refer  only  to  the 
changes  effected  in  a  substance  subjected  to^  but  not  giving  rise 
to,  the  current. 

The  points  at  which  the  electricity  passes  in  and  out  are 
called  electrodes  (from  a  Greek  term  signifying  "way").  The 
point  of  entrance,  connected  with  the  collecting  plate  of  the 
battery,  is  the  anode  (upward  way) ;  the  point  of  exit,  con- 
nected with  the  zinc,  is  the  cathode  (downward  way).  The 
substances  acted  upon,  or  decomposed,  are  called  the  electrolytes. 
The  elements  into  which  electrolytes  are  separated  are  called 
ions.  Those  which  appear  at  the  positive  electrode  are  called 
anions ;  those  at  the  negative  electrodes  the  cations. 

"Since  like  electricities  repel,  and  unlike  attract  each  other," 
the  anions  which  appear  at  the  positive  electrode  must  be 
electro-negative,  and  the  cations  that  appear  at  the  negative 
electrode  must  be  electro-positive. 

LAWS  OF  ELECTROLYSIS. 

The  amount  of  decomposition  that  takes  place  in  any  givea 
case  and  the  products  of  it  depend  upon  : 
{ci)  The  strength  of  the  current. 
(J)  The  nature  of  the  substances  acted  upon, 
(c)  The  material  of  which  the  electrodes  are  composed. 

(146) 


GALVANISM. 


U7 


The  amount  of  chemical  effect  produced  on  water,  saline 
solutions,  etc.,  will  be  in  proportion  to  the  strength  of  the 
current.  It  has  been  estimated  that  for  every  32.7  grs.  of 
zinc  dissolved  in  any  cell,  provided  local  action  is  prevented, 
9  grs.  of  water  are  decomposed.  If  the  current  developed  by 
the  decomposition  going  on  within  the  cell  could  all  be  applied 
without  loss,  it  would  effect  an  equal  amount  of  decomposition 
in  the  electrolyte. 

Electrolysis  can  only  occur  when  the  substance  is  in  a 
liquid  or  semi-liquid  state,  so  that  the  particles  can  move 
freely.  Gordon  *  gives  this  explanation  of  the  electrolytic  pro- 
cess. The  molecule  next  one  electrode  is  broken  up,  one  atom 
going  to  the  near  electrode  ;  the  other  either  travels  across  to 
the  opposite  electrode  or  else  changes  partners  with  its  adjacent 
molecule,  setting  free  a  portion  similar  to,  and  equal  to,  itself, 
which  in  turn  combines  with  the  next  in  the  same  manner, 
until  the  last  molecule  is  reached  ;  the  last  atom  set  free,  finds 
nothing  to  combine  with,  and  appears  alone  at  the  negative 
electrode.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  mobility  of  the  particles 
is  a  necessary  condition. 

All  substances  are  decomposed  by  electricity  in  exactly 
the  same  proportions  as  they  are  chemically  united,  or  in 
proportion  to  their  atomic  weight.  Water  is  composed  oi 
8  parts  (by  weight)  of  oxygen  chemically  united  to  1  part 
(by  weight)  of  hydrogen.  When  decomposed  by  electricity 
there  appears  at  the  negative  electrode  1  part  of  hydro- 
gen, and  at  the  positive  8  parts  of  oxygen.  Common  salt 
consists  of  sodium  23.3  parts  by  weight,  and  chlorine  35.5 
parts.  When  electrolyzed,  the  23.3  parts  of  sodium  appear 
at  the  negative  electrode,  and  35.5  of  chlorine  at  the  positive. 
It  must  be  remembered  that  the  human  body  is  a  mass 
of  cells,  and  that  these  cells  contain  and  are  bathed  in  a 

*  Electricity  and  Magnetism. 


148 


GALVANISM. 


saline  solution,  and  it  is  not  unlikely  that,  when  a  galvanic 
current  is  passed  for  some  time  in  the  same  direction  through 
the  body,  some  of  the  resulting  phenomena  may  be  due  to 
electrolytic  changes  in  the  tissues  acted  upon. 

The  material  of  which  the  electrodes  are  composed,  their 
size,  and  distance  apart,  are  of  practical  importance  in  certain 


therapeutical  applications.  Fig.  39 
is  designed  to  represent  the  branches 
into  which  a  current  is  supposed  to 
split  up  on  passing  through  a  sub- 


FiG.  39.  stance.    When  a  large  electrode  is 

used,  these  branches  have  a  larger  surface  for  entrance  or 
exit,  and  are  consequently  not  so  dense  or  crowded  together 
as  in  the  case  of  the  small  electrode.  As  each  branch  is 
believed  to  do  its  part  in  the  work  to  be  accomplished,  it 
is  evident  that  the  greatest  decomposition  must  occur  at  the 
small  electrode  where  the  greatest  number  of  current  branches 
act  together  upon  a  comparatively  limited  space. 

Fig.  40  represents  what  occurs  when  one  of  the  electrodes 
is  very  small,   and  the   distance  between  them   is  great. 


Fig.  40. 

Many  of  the  current  branches  starting  from  the  flat  electrode, 
being  unable  to  overcome  the  resistance,  are  lost,  and  the 
decomposition  will  be  much  less  at  the  needle  than  when 
they  are  placed  nearer  together.  It  is  a  question  whether 
those  currents  possessing  sufficient  power  to  dissolve  or  break 
up  tissue,  and  destroy  tumors,  may  not  be  capable  of  pro- 
ducing serious  injury  to  other  and   healthy  tissues  through 


GALVANISM. 


149 


which  they  must  be  carried  when  the  electrodes  are  widely 
separated.  It  is,  therefore,  recommended,  in  all  electrolytic 
operations,  to  place  the  two  electrodes  near  together. 

The  materials  of  which  electrodes  are  composed  may  be 
adapted,  in  certain  cases,  to  the  work  to  be  done,  since  a 
substance  which  in  combination  with  oxygen  is  capable  of 
producing  some  special  effect,  can  be  selected  for  an  electrode. 
This  is  done  occasionally  in  treating  stone  in  the  bladder, 
tumors,  etc.  It  must  be  recollected,  in  this  connection,  that 
during  electrolysis  the  acids  set  free  appear  at  the  positive 
pole,  and  the  alkalies  at  the  negative.  The  immediate  effect 
of  decomposing  the  fluid  of  the  body  is  that  the  oxygen  and 
chlorine  set  free  (acids)  attack  the  needle,  or  positive  elec- 
trode, inserted  in  the  tissues^  changing  a  portion  of  it  into 
metallic  salts.  Since  metals  are  not  acted  upon  by  hydrogen, 
or  free  alkali,  the  negative  electrode  remains  bright,  whatever 
may  be  the  strength  of  the  current,  or  the  length  of  its  appli- 
cation. When  it  is  desirable  to  introduce  salts  of  iron,  copper, 
silver,  gold,  or  any  other  metal,  into  a  morbid  growth,  insert 
into  it  needles,  or  pointed  electrodes,  of  the  metal  selected, 
and  connect  them  with  the  carbon  or  copper  element  of  the 
battery.  When  it  is  desirable  to  preserve  the  needle  from  cor- 
rosion, or  to  avoid  introducing  any  foreign  substance,  insert  the 
negative  needle  attached  to  the  zinc  battery  element.  Since 
the  art  of  electro-plating  proves  that  materials  resulting  from 
decom]30sition  of  the  anode  are  carried  to  and  deposited  upon 
the  cathode,  this  fact  should  be  borne  in  mind  when  attempt- 
ing to  remove  stricture,  otherwise  the  trouble  may  be  increased 
by  the  very  means  used  to  remove  it. 

TO  DETECT  THE  DIRECTION  OF  THE  CURRENT  BY  ELECTROLYSIS. 

When  a  solution  of  common  salt  is  exposed  to  the  action 
of  the  current,  as  we  have  seen,  both  water  and  salt  are 


150 


GALVANISM. 


decomposed,  oxygen  and  chlorine  appearing  at  the  positive, 
hydrogen  and  sodium  at  the  negative,  electrode.  A  piece  of 
blue  litmus  paper  immersed  at  the  negative  electrode,  where 
the  alkaline  atoms  collect,  will  be  rendered  more  intensely 
blue  ;  but  immersed  at  the  positive  electrode,  where  the  acids 
go,  will  be  reddened.  A  solution  of  iodide  of  potash  and 
starch,  when  brought  under  the  influence  of  the  current,  will 
give  a  blue  color  at  the  positive  electrode,  where  the  iodine 
is  set  -free,  while  at  the  negative  pole  the  solution  remains 
colorless. 


When  a  substance  is  electrolyzed,  those  atoms  which  travel 
toward  the  positive  electrode  are  electro-negative,  and  are 
known  in  chemistry  as  metals.  Those  going  to  the  negative 
electrode  are  electro-positive,  and  are  known  as  non-^netals. 
They  gradually  shade  into  each  other. 

TABLE    SHOWING    THE    RESULT    OF   ELECTROLYZING  A   FEW  COMMON 

SOLUTIONS. 

ELECTROLYTES.  CATIONS.  ANIONS. 

Water   +  Hydrogen   —  Oxygen. 

Salt   +  Sodium   --Chlorine. 

Iodide  potash   +  Hydrogen   —  Iodine. 


POLARITY  OF  IONS  OR  ATOMS  OF  ELECTROLYTES. 


Nitric  acid 


—  Oxygen. 


Sulphurous  acid 


—  Oxygen. 


Muriatic  acid  

Chloride  of  lead. . . 
Sulphate  of  copper 


+  Hydrogen 

+  Lead  

+  Copper  . . . 


—  Chlorine. 

—  Chlorine. 

—  Sulphuric  acid» 


GALVANISM. 


151 


When  electrolysis  of  tissues  lying  beneath  the  skin  is  to 
be  performed,  the  galvanic  current  is  conveyed  to  them  through 
needles  of  suitable  size  and  shape.  Those  shown  in  Fig.  41 
are  made  of  steel,  gold-plated ;  they  are  called  respectively 
straight,  half-curved  and  curved.  They  are  triangular  like  a 
surgical  needle,  and  may  be  fastened  directly  to  the  cord  by  a 
needle-holder  (see  No.  4),  or  to  a  needle  conductor  (Fig.  42). 
The  length  varies  from  one  inch  upward,  according  to  the 
mass  to  be  acted  upon,  and  the  depth  at  which  it  is  located. 
Eound  needles  are  also  used  for  electrolysis,  and  the  material 
may  be  any  metal  that  can  be  made  into  a  needle.  Very  fine 
platinum  or  steel  needles  are  nsed  to  remove  hairs. 


Fig.  41. 

NEEDLES  FOR  ELECTROLYSIS. 

To  iise  electrolysis  needles.  1.  Connect  with  one  pole  of 
the  battery,  and  insert  them  in  the  tissue  to  be  acted  upon. 
Complete  the  circuit  by  placing  a  large  moistened  sponge  (con- 
nected with  the  alternate  battery  pole)  outside,  on  the  skin 
near  by.  2.  Instead  of  having  the  alternate  pole  represented 
b}"  a  sponge  it  may  be  connected  with  a  needle,  which  is  also 
carried  into  the  tissues  near,  but  not  in  contact  with,  the  first. 


152 


GALVANISM. 


To  insulate  an  electrolysis  needle.  When  it  is  desirable 
to  prevent  any  action  of  the  current  upon  the  skin,  the  needle 
should  be  insulated,  except  at  the  point  that  is  entirely  within 
the  tissues  to  be  operated  upon.  It  may  be  coated  with  rubber 
dissolved  in  collodion,  or  shellac.  The  last  named  forms  an 
excellent  insulator ;  it  is  prepared  and  applied  as  follows  : 
Pulverized  white  shellac  is  covered  with  alcohol  and  allowed 
to  stand  over  night,  when  it  is  ready  to  use  ;  that  part  of 
the  needle  to  be  insulated  is  coated  w^ith  a  thin  layer  and 
held  in  a  flame  to  evaporate  the  alcohol ;  the  process  is  com- 
plete when  bubbles  cease  to  form.  If  any  bubble  does  not 
immediately  burst,  it  must  be  brushed  off  with  the  finger, 
the  spot  smoothed  down,  and  again  held  in  the  flame, 
otherwise  the  coating  will  be  rough  when  finished,  and  the 
needle  unfit  to  use.  If  the  surface  is  not  smooth  when 
finished,  the  shellac  must  be  dissolved  in  alcohol,  the 
needle  cleaned  and  a  new  coating  applied.  A  little  practice 
will  enable  the  operator  to  apply  this  insulator  quickly  and 
successfully.  It  may  also  be  used  for  metallic  sounds, 
catheters,  or  any  other  instrument  to  be  inserted  in  the 
cavities  of  the  body,  when  the  current  conveyed  through 
them  is  to  be  localized  at  any  particular  part  of  the  cavity. 

EFFECT  OF  ELECTROLYSIS  UPON  ANIMAL  TISSUES. 

Althaus,  during  1866  and  1867,  made  a  series  of  microscopical 
observations  on  the  changes  which  animal  structures  undergo, 
under  the  influence  of  the  electrolytic  action  of  the  galvanic  cur- 
rent. He  studied  its  eflect  upon  the  intimate  structure  of  the  skin 
and  cellular  tissue,  muscular  fibers  and  tendons,  cartilages  and 
bones,  liver  and  pancreas,  spleen  and  thyroid  body,  kidneys 
and  suprarenal  capsules,  testicles,  breasts  and  ovaries.  The 
general  result  of  these  investigations  has  proved  that  no  anwuil 
tissue  whatever  ca/)i  witJistand  the  disintegrating  effect  of  the 


GALVANISM. 


153 


negative  pole^  and  that  the  force  and  rapidity  with  which  this 
disintegration  is  hrought  about  are  directly  proportional  to  the 
electrcHnwtive  force  which  is  employed^  and  to  the  softness  and 
vascularity  of  the  structures  acted  upon.  Thus  ten  cells  of  a 
battery  have  a  more  thorough  and  rapid  effect  than  five,  fifteen 
more  than  ten,  and  so  on  ;  as  regards  the  tissues,  those  contain- 
ing most  water,  such*  as  the  muscles,  the  cellular  tissue,  the 
spleen,  etc.,  are  more  rapidly  disintegrated  than  those  which 
contain  less  fluid.  Bones  and  teeth  withstand  the  action  of  the 
current  for  a  considerable  time. 

The  effect  at  the  negative  pole.  Experiments  on  animals 
showed  that  needles  attached  to  the  negative  pole  of  a  battery 
could  be  inserted  into  and  removed  from  the  body  without 
causing  any  loss  of  blood  ;  the  current  used  did  not  appear  to 
cause  much  pain  beyond  what  was  due  to  the  introduction  of  the 
needles  through  the  skin  ,  the  parts  operated  upon  shrank 
sensibly  after  the  operation,  but  there  was  neither  inflammation, 
suppuration,  nor  sloughing.  If  the  current  was  made  to  act 
upon  the  bloodvessels  it  was  found  that  they  were  filled  w^ith  a 
foreign  body,  due  to  disintegration  of  the  blood,  and  round  which 
afterward  a  slow  deposition  of  lamellated  fibrine  took  place ;  they 
were  thus  changed  into  solid  strings  wherever  the  current  had 
been  made  to  act.  It  appears  fair  to  conclude  from  these  obser- 
vations that  the  current  can  be  safely  and  successfully  applied  to 
those  parts  of  the  body  where  shrinking  and  disintegration  of 
tissue  and  obliteration  of  the  bloodvessels  may  be  required  for 
surgical  purposes.  The  sores  produced  on  the  skin  by  the  nega- 
tive pole  resemble  those  ])roduced  by  caustic  potash,  and  the 
same  may  be  said  of  the  scars,  for  these  latter  are  soft,  and 
after  some  time  wholly  disappear^ 

A  tivofold  effect  is  produced.  1.  Under  the  microscope  it 
may  be  seen  that  the  mechanical  action  of  the  hydrogen  forms 
no  inconsiderable  part  of  the  eflect  produced  at  the  negative  pole. 


154 


GALVANISM. 


Innumerable  bubbles  arise  as  soon  as  the  circuit  is  closed,  which 
force  apart  the  structural  elements  of  the  tissues.  2.  Alkalies^ 
soda,  potash  and  lime  are  also  developed  at  the  negative  pole  of 
the  batterj^ 

The  effect  produced  at  the  positive  jyole.  There  is  no  collec- 
tion of  oxygen  at  the  positive  pole,  because  it  unites  with  the 
metal  of  which  the  needle  is  composed.  To  the  chlorine  and 
acids  which  are  developed  at  the  positive  pole,  together  with 
the  metallic  salts  resulting  from  oxidizing  of  the  needle,  is  due 
whatever  changes  are  effected  there. 


Fig.  42. 

/ 

NEEDLE  CONDUCTOR. 


The  needle  conductor  is  composed  of  from  one  to  six  slender 
conducting  cords,  about  four  inches  in  length,  attached  at  one 
end  to  a  single  metal  holder  for  the  conducting  cord  which 
connects  it  with  the  battery.  Each  one  terminates  at  the  free 
end  in  a  metal  needle  holder. 

To  use  the  conductor.  Introduce  the  needles  one  by  one 
into  the  tissues  to  be  operated  upon,  then  fasten  the  needle 
holders  upon  them  and  connect  the  conductor  with  the  bat- 
tery. Complete  the  circuit  with  a  single  large  moist  sponge 
electrode  placed  on  the  skin  at  some  indifferent  point  near  by. 

The  introduction  of  needles  through  the  skin.  This  is  usu- 
ally painful,  and  some  means  of  lessening  the  pain  must  be 
adopted.  When  a  large  amount  of  work  is  to  be  done 
rapidly,  which  requires  a  powerful  current,  it  is  advisable  to 
use  ether  by  inhalation,  or  apply  it  in  spray  to  render  the 
skin  insensible  to  pain,  before  introducing  the  needles.  Beard 
and  Rockwell  state  that  a  mixture  of  ether  and  carbolic  acid 


GALVANISM. 


155 


in  equal  parts  has  a  positively  benumbing  effect  upon  the 
skin  where  applied.  The  mixture  can  be  localized  upon  a 
very  small  spot ;  the  benumbing  effect  begins  to  be  felt  in 
less  than  five  minutes.  It  is  frequently  quite  difficult  to  in- 
troduce the  needles,  when  the  tissues  to  be  acted  upon  are 
firm,  or  where  the  skin  is  thick,  in  which  case  it  is  best  to 
introduce  them  only  a  little  way  before  completing  the  cir- 
cuit. As  soon  as  electrolysis  begins  they  can  be  pushed  in 
more  easily,  provided  they  are  connected  with  the  negative 
pole  of  the  battery. 

Effect  of  electrolysis  upon  the  needles.  When  decomposi- 
tion of  blood  or  animal  tissues  is  effected  by  electrolysis,  the 
positive  needle  (anode)  is  changed  into  a  metallic  salt,  by  the 
oxygen  and  chlorine  set  free.  On  the  other  hand,  the  necja- 
tim  needle  (cathode)  retains  its  brightness,  because  hydrogen 
and  free  alkali  do  not  attack  metal.  It  is  desirable,  when 
but  one  needle  is  introduced,  that  it  be  the  negative,  except 
when  the  secondary  effects,  resulting  from  the  presence  of 
acids  and  metallic  salts,  are  required,  because  the  positive 
becomes  roughened  and  firmly  imbedded,  so  that  its  removal 
is  frequently  attended  with  considerable  difficulty.  When 
both  a  positive  and  negative  needle  are  inserted,  the  positive 
should  be  first  introduced  where  it  is  to  remain  during  the 
operation,  and  whenever  it  is  necessary  to  change  the  relative 
position  of  the  needles  the  negative  should  be  moved. 

Prof.  Groh,*  of  Olmtitz,  employs  zinc  needles  for  the 
positive  pole,  when  the  parts  to  be  destroyed  are  highly  vas- 
cular, so  as  to  secure  the  secondary  effect  of  the  chloride  of 
zinc,  resulting  from  the  action  of  chlorine  upon  the  needle. 
The  eschar  under  these  circumstances  resembles  that  produced 
by  chloride  of  zinc  paste,  being  greyish  white,  firm  and  dry. 

*Die  Electrolyse  in  der  Chirurgie. 


156 


GALVANISM. 


He  employs  electrolysis  in  two  ways,  either  a  powerful  cur- 
rent for  a  short  time  under  an  anaesthetic,  or  a  gentle  current 
applied  for  days  and  nights  consecutively. 

THE  MCINTOSH  NEEDLE-CASE  FOR  ELECTROLYSIS. 

A  convenient  case  for  electrolysis 
needles  is  shown  in  Fig.  43.  It  con- 
tains needles  of  various  shapes  and 
sizes,  from  the  exceedingly  fine  plati- 
num or  steel  needle,  for  removing  hairs, 
to  the  long  and  large  needle  suitable 
for  operating  upon  uterine  fibroids. 
A  three-strand  needle  conductor  is  shown  in  the  back  part  of 
the  case  ;  also  a  connector  by  means  of  which  a  single  needle 
may  be  attached  to  any  electrode  that  terminates  in  a  screw. 
Many  styles  of  needle-cases  are  made,  so  that  the  physician 
who  wishes  to  be  prepared  for  electrolytic  operations  will  have 
no  trouble  in  securing  one  which  contains  an  assortment  adapted 
to  the  demands  of  his  practice. 

BATTERIES  FOR  ELECTROLYSIS. 

Galvanic  batteries  in  which  the  elements  are  arranged  in 
series  (the  zinc  of  one  pair  connected  with  the  carbon  of 
the  next)  are  suitable  for  electrolysis.  The  zinc  and  carbon 
combination  give  a  much  more  powerful  electrolytic  current 
than  any  other,  for  reasons  already  given.  It  is  essential, 
when  large  masses  are  to  be  operated  upon,  that  the  bat- 
tery have  a  sufiicient  number  of  cells  to  enable  the  operator 
to  add  more  cells  from  time  to  time,  to  keep  the  current  at 
an  approximately  uniform  strength.  For  short  operations,  four 
to  six  zinc-carbon  cells  will  be  sufiicient.  A  considerably 
greater  number  of  zinc-copper  or  zinc-platinum  cells  will  be 
required  to  accomplish  the  same  work. 


GALVANISM. 


157 


The  pain  produced  within  the  tissues  by  the  electrolytic 
current  is  not  severe,  but  at  the  alternate  electrode  applied  to 
the  skin,  the  burning  or  stinging  sensation  may  be  very  un- 
pleasant. When  an  anaesthetic  is  not  employed,  the  current 
at  first  should  not  be  very  strong  ;  it  may  be  gradually  in- 
creased  without  inconvenience. 


Fig.  44. 

Mcintosh  twelve-cell  galvanic  battery. 

Length,  10%  in. ;  width,  8%  in. ;  height,  T^^  in. ;  weight,  12  lbs. 


The  battery  represented  in  Fig.  44  is  adapted  to  all  the 
smaller  electrolytic  operations,  for  which  a  few  cells  only  are 
needed.  An  apparatus  supplied  with  a  less  number  of  cells 
is  not  to  be  recommended,  because  it  is  important  that  in 
any  operation  there  should  be  a  few  reserve  cells  to  add,  as 
needed,  to  the  circuit. 

The  battery  shown  in  Fig.  45  is  preferable  for  the  general 
practitioner  who  wislies  to  apply  electrolysis  to  a  large  variety 
of  cases.  It  furnishes  a  current  sufficiently  powerful  for  any 
operation  to  which   electrolysis   is   adapted,    except  certain 


158 


GALVANISM. 


malignant  growths,  for  whicli  the  twenty-four-cell  galvanic  in- 
strument (see  Fig.  31)  will  be  required. 

DISEASES  IN  WHICH  ELECTROLYSIS  IS  OF  VALUE. 


The  diseases  in  whicli  electrolysis  has  been  successfully  em- 
ployed are  chiefly  tumors,  serous  efl'usions,  strictures,  wounds 


Fig.  45. 

Mcintosh  eighteen-cell  galvanic  battery. 

Length,  143^  in. ;  width,  S%  in. ;  height,  1}4  in. ;  weigbt,  15J^  lbs. 


and  ulcers.  It  is  also  useful  in  the  permanent  removal  of 
hairs. 

Disadvantages  of  electrolysis.  It  is  not  always  easy  to 
introduce  the  needles  so  as  to  destroy  as  much  as  possible 
in  the  shortest  time  ;  and  where  extensive  growths  are  to  be 
destroyed,  the  applications  must  be  frequently  repeated  or 
continued  for  a  considerable  time.  The  accumulation  of  hy- 
drogen at  the  negative  pole  causes  a  swelling  of  the  tissues, 
and,  if  the  operation  is  carried  too  far,  the  separation  of 


GALVANISM. 


159 


Structural  fibre  by  the  hydrogen  may  cause  too  great  destruc- 
tion, so  that  the  tissues  do  not  recover  themselves  after  the 
operation,  and  disfiguring  scars  result. 

Advantages  of  electrolysis.  According  to  Prof.  Groh,  tiiey 
are  as  follows  : 

Very  extensive  tumors  may  be  destroyed  without  the  loss  of  a  drop  of 
blood,  which  is  important  in  cases  where  there  is  prostration  of  strength. 
In  three  of  his  patients,  the  use  of  electrolysis  enabled  him  to  do  with- 
out resection  of  the  lower  jaw,  which  otherwise  would  have  been  neces- 
sary, and  would  have  caused  great  disfigurement.  In  a  case  of  cancer  of 
the  rectum,  where  subcutaneous  injections  of  morphine  produced  only 
slight  and  temporary  relief  of  the  intense  pain,  and  where  there  was  a 
most  offensive  smell  from  the  ulceration,  both  fetor  and  pain  disappeared 
after  the  first  electrolytic  operation.  In  a  case  of  epithelioma  of  the  lip, 
where  the  right  submaxillary  gland  was  considerably  swollen,  this 
swelling  was  dispersed  a  few  days  after  one  electrolysis.  Finally,  all 
cases  progressed  favorably  without  accident.  The  pain  never  continued 
beyond  the  application  itself;  there  was  only  slight  local  and  general 
reaction;  the  eschars  which  had  been  formed  were  rapidly  thrown  off: 
there  was  copious  granulation,  and  such  an  amount  of  cicatricial  con- 
traction as  to  cover  the  loss  of  substance  caused  by  the  removal  of  the 
growth. 

THE  EXACT  VALUE  OF  THE  ELECTROLYTIC  METHOD. 

Dr.  A.  D.  Eockwell'^  offers  the  following  summary  of  the 
exact  value  of  the  electrolytic  method  in  surgical  diseases, 
-according  to  his  own  experience  : 

1.  The  success  to  be  met  with  in  the  treatment  of  malignant  growths 
in  general  is  but  trifling.  The  size  is  sometimes  reduced,  and  the  pain 
is  abnost  always  greatly  alleviated.  In  the  class  of  cases,  however, 
termed  epithelioma,  when  the  disease  does  not  extensively  involve  the 
subjacent  tissues,  and  where  it  is  easily  reached,  it  is  probable  that  in 
the  majority  of  cases  the  very  best  results  will  follow  thorough  and 
persistent  treatment. 

2.  Fibroids,  being  dense  and  comparatively  dry,  do  not  readily  shrink 
under  electrolysis,  and  it  is  seldom  that  we  can  accomplish  more  than 


*New  England  Medical  Monthly,  December,  1883. 


160 


GALVANISM. 


some  slight  diminution  in  bulk.  The  results  following  this  limited  in- 
fluence, however,  are  especially  valuable  in  the  case  of  uterine  fibroids 
of  an  intramural  character  where  the  knife  cannot  be  used.  The  press- 
ure upon  the  bladder  and  rectum  is  in  these  cases  greatly  lessened,  or 
entirely  dissipated,  and  the  relief  that  follows  is  immense. 

3.  It  is  in  erectile  and  small  cystic  tumors  that  electrolysis  is  most 
effective.  In  these  conditions  it  is  indeed  a  specific.  The  cure  that 
follows  is  complete,  and  with  proper  care  scars  can  be  avoided. 

4.  The  ordinary  form  of  goitre  acts  somewhat  capriciously  under 
electrolytic  treatment.  Goitres  that  are  small  and  soft  may  not  only  be 
treated  effectually  by  the  introduction  of  needles,  but  external  applica- 
tions alone  will  sometimes  cause  them  to  entirely  disappear.  Even  when 
they  are  quite  large,  if  their  density  is  not  too  great,  a  perfect  cure  may 
follow.  Where  they  do  not  entirely  disappear,  they  may  almost  in- 
variably be  reduced  in  size,  affording  in  many  cases  marked  relief  from 
the  pressure  that  is  so  distressing. 

5.  By  this  method  hairs  may  be  permanently  removed.  The  nega- 
tive pole  and  a  weak  current  are  to  be  used. 

6.  In  many  cases  of  urethral  stricture  permanent  relief  is  afforded. 
A  more  extended  experience,  however,  is  necessary  to  establish  its  exact 
value. 


CHAPTEK  V. 


GALVANO-CAUTERY. 

GALVANOCArTEKY,  also  Written  galvano-causty,  electric  cau- 
tery, etc.,  consists  in  substituting  a  platinum  wire  or  plate  heated 
by  electricity,  for  the  ordinary  actual  cautery.  This  process 
is  frequently  confounded  with  electrolysis,  from  which  it  dif- 
fers in  important  particulars.  It  requires  special  apparatus 
that  is  not  adapted  to  any  other  application  of  electricity. 

Electrolysis  is  the  decomposition  of  com])ound  substances 
by  the  chemical  action  of  the  galvanic  current.  During  this 
process  the  needles  or  wires  which  convey  the  current  to  the 
tissues  are  not  heated. 

Galvano-cautery  is  the  burning  of  tissues  by  the  heat  de- 
veloped in  a  suitable  instrument  by  the  passage  of  a  galvanic 
current  through  it.  The  effect  produced  is  in  no  respect  due 
to  the  action  of  the  current  on  the  tissues,  and  does  not  dif- 
fer from  that  produced  by  a  cautery  instrument  heated  in  the 
usual  manner. 

When  the  poles  of  a  galvanic  battery  are  connected  by  a 
conductor  incapable  of  transmitting  the  current  as  fast  as  gen- 
erated, the  conductor  becomes  heated,  the  degree  of  heat  being 
proportional  to  the  quantity  of  electricity  and  the  resistance  of 
the  conductor.  Platinum  is  a  poor  conductor,  both  of  heat 
and  electricity,  and  when  introduced  into  a  metallic  circuit 
between  the  two  poles  of  a  suitable  battery  may  be  raised  to 
a  white  heat. 

Advantages  of  galvano-cautery.  1.  The  great  advantage  ot 
galvano-cautery  is  that  we  can  manage  the  currents  with  pre- 
cision and  deliberation;  very  different  from  the  haste  required 

(161) 


GALVANISM. 


in  using  a  red-hot  iron.  If  the  bottom  of  a  cavity  is  to  be 
cauterized,  the  instrument,  while  cold,  is  introduced  slowly 
and  gently;  then,  when  located  exactly  where  it  is  needed, 
the  circuit  is  completed  and  cauterization  begins.  Breaking 
the  circuit  instantly  arrests  it. 

2.  This  method  of  cauterizing  occludes  the  vessels  by  clots, 
and  thus  not  only  guards  against  primary  hemorrhage,  but  it 
also  appears  to  lessen  the  liability  to  secondary  hemorrhage. 

3.  It  is  infinitely  less  alarming  to  patients  than  the  appa- 
ratus employed  in  ordinary  cauterization,  and  protects  them 
from  any  injury  in  the  introduction  or  withdrawal  of  the 
cautery  instrument. 

4.  It  can  be  used  in  places  where  the  employment  of  the 
knife  would  be  inconvenient,  if  not  impossible ;  as  in  the 
neighborhood  of  delicate  organs  or  in  the  depth  of  some 
natural  cavities. 

5.  The  operation  is  comparatively  painless ;  there  is  no 
shock  to  speak  of,  and  the  danger  is  reduced  to  a  minimum. 
When  the  radiant  heat  is  allowed  to  act,  or  the  instrument  is 
moved  slowly,  the  pain  may  be  quite  severe  ;  but  during  the 
operation  the  extremities  of  the  nerves  are  destroyed,  there- 
fore there  is  no  pain  after  it  is  completed. 

6.  It  frequently  preserves  parts  that  would  have  to  be  re- 
moved in  operating  by  the  knife. 

7.  It  is  especially  valuable  in  those  cases  where  cauteri- 
zation of  the  wound  is  indicated  after  the  operation.  The 
eschar  is  very  firm  and  renders  the  wound  less  liable  than  a 
moist  granulating  surface  to  miasmatic,  putrid  or  purulent 
infection. 

CASES  TO  WHICH  GALVANO-CAUTERY  IS  APPLICABLE. 

1.  Hemorrhages,  which  can  be  arrested  in  localities  where 
i\  red-hot  iron  cannot  penetrate  and  where  vessels  cannot  be 
conveniently  ligated. 


GALVANISM. 


163 


2.  Neuralgia,  in  which  it  is  desirable  either  to  destroy  a 
nerv^e  (as  a  dental  nerve)  or  to  cauterize  certain  parts  of  the 
surface  of  the  body  (as  in  sciatica). 

3.  Certain  paralyses. 

4.  Gangrene  of  ulcerations. 

5.  Cancers  and  other  malignant  growths. 

6.  Fistulse,  sinuses,  etc. 

7.  Kemoval  of  vascular  tumors,  such  as  nsevi,  external 
hemorrhoids,  etc. 

8.  Removal  of  polypi  and  other  tumors  from  situations 
where  ordinary  instruments  cannot  penetrate. 

9.  Small  amputations,  as  of  the  tongue,  cervix  uteri, 
penis,  etc. 

10.  Strictures,  especially  when  very  firm,  and  un  dilatable. 
Disachantages  of  galvano-ccaitery.     There  is  considerable 

difterence  of  opinion  in  regard  to  the  range  of  cases  in  which 
galvano-cautery  is  to  be  preferred.  Some  restrict  it  to  a 
limited  field,  while  others  are  disposed  to  extend  it,  on  account 
of  its  simplicity  and  convenience,  to  a  large  variety  of  opera- 
tions. Certain  disadvantages  have  prevented  a  more  extensive 
employment  of  it  by  the  surgeon,  which  are  partially  due  to 
defects  in  the  batteries  designed  for  the  purpose  of  furnishing 
a  cautery  current. 

1.  The  galvano-cautery  frequently  cauterizes  tissues  very 
superficially,  and  consequently  sometimes  gives  rise  to  hemor- 
rhages. 

2.  The  small  mass  of  platinum  that  can  be  heated  by  the 
galvanic  current,  except  by  employing  batteries  out  of  propor- 
tion to  the  work  to  be  accomplished,  renders  it  unsuited  to 
cases  where  voluminous  tissues  are  to  be  destroyed.  It  is 
not  impossible,  however,  to  perform  all  amputations  by  it. 
Dr.  Burns,  of  England,  records  twelve  amputations,  eight  of 
the  thigh,  two  of  the  leg,   one  of  the  fore-arm,  and  one  of 


164 


GALVANISM. 


the  finger,  performed  by  galvano-cautery.  Bourdon,  of  Paris, 
has  used  it  in  eight  cases  of  tracheotomy.  With  properly  con- 
structed batteries,  the  current  keeps  the  cautery  heated  suffi- 
ciently, so  as  to  compensate  by  the  continuity  of  its  action 
for  what  is  wanting  in  regard  to  the  mass  that  can  be  heated. 

3.  The  great  difficulty  in  the  way  of  maintaining  a  uni- 
form heat  is  due  to  contact  of  the  tissues,  bathed  with  liquid 
which  prevents  the  wire  arriving  at  the  high  temperature  that 
it  would  possess  in  the  air,  not  only  by  withdrawing  heat 
from  it,  but  by  rendering  it,  in  consequence  of  this  cooling, 
a  better  conductor  and  less  susceptible  of  becoming  heated 
under  the  action  of  the  current. 

4.  It  is  not  impossible  to  raise  a  platinum  wire  to  a  white 
heat  in  the  substance  of  the  tissues  gorged  with  moisture, 
but  we  are  between  two  rocks,  either  not  to  heat  the  wire 
sufficiently,  or  to  run  the  risk  of  melting  it.  This  fusion  is 
brought  about  in  the  small  part  of  the  wire  which  comes  out 
close  to  the  skin  and  which  is  more  heated  in  proportion  as 
the  portion  that  is  plunged  into  the  tissues  is  more  cooled 
by  contact  with  the  liquids. 

5.  Even  when  the  wire,  while  still  becoming  greatly 
heated,  does  not  melt  in  its  entering  and  exit  points  it  may 
only  cauterize  these  points  and  not  the  interior,  as  we  should 
expect. 

GALVANO-CAUTEEY  EATTEKIES. 

The  first  requirement  of  a  battery  for  galvano-cautery  is  that 
it  furnish  a  current  of  large  quantity^  in  order  to  develop  the 
necessary  heat.  Consequently  a  large  element  surface  must  be 
exposed  to  the  action  of  the  fluid.  The  elements  are  united  in 
multiple  arc  and  are  brought  very  near  together.  The  hat- 
teries  constructed  for  galvano-cautery  are  unsidtahle  for  elec- 
trolysis or  any  other  purpose  than  tJie  one  for  which  they  are 
designed. 


GALVANISM. 


165 


Since  it  is  important  to  be  able  to  use  conductors  of  variable 
volume,  the  current  provided  must  be  capable  of  raising  dif- 
ferent sizes  of  platinum  wire  to  a  white  heat,  and  of  maintain- 
ing it  there  as  long  as  is  necessary  to  complete  an  operation  of 
ordinary  length.  A  galvano-cautery  battery  must  therefore  be 
provided  with  more  than  one  cell,  and  a  convenient  current- 
selector  for  introducing  additional  power  into  the  circuit  as  the 
current  declines  in  strength,  to  maintain  an  even  temperature 
in  the  platinum  wire.  When  it  is  necessary  to  avoid  the  flow 
of  blood,  the  wire  must  not  be  heated  above  a  dull  red,  and 
the  battery  should  be  easily  controlled  in  this  respect.  In 
brief,  the  essential  requirements  of  a  galvano-cautery  instrument 
are  portability,  constancy,  reliability,  and  simplicity  of  construc- 
tion. 

The  storage  battery,  when  it  was  first  announced,  was 
expected  by  continental  authors  to  fulfill  all  requirements  of  a 
cautery  battery  ;  but  for  some  reason  it  has  failed  to  meet  their 
expectations,  in  its  present  state  of  development.  Numerous 
instruments  have  been  contrived  for  this  purpose,  but  the 
difficulties  to  be  overcome  in  constructing  one  that  shall  pro- 
vide a  current  just  powerful  enough  to  do  the  work  required, 
without  occasionally  becoming  uncontrollable,  and  either  sud- 
denly fail  in  the  midst  of  an  operation,  or  fuse  the  platinum, 
have  seemed  almost  un surmountable.  Dr.  Mcintosh  has  been 
experimenting  for  several  years  with  a  view  to  constructing  an 
instrument  that  shall  be  satisfactory  in  every  respect,  and  has 
been  rewarded  with  a  degree  of  success  that  promises  well. 
He  has  now  completed  a  Cautery  Battery  that  is  being  tested 
by  several  well-known  surgeons  to  determine  how  it  meets  the 
demands  of  practice  ;  and  if  future  tests  shall  confirm  those 
already  made,  it  will  prove  to  be  the  most  desirable  instrument 
yet  constructed,  and  will  add  a  new  impetus  to  the  practice  of 
galvano-surgery. 


166 


GALVANISM. 


The  instruments  necessary  for  galmno-cautery.  That  por- 
tion of  the  circuit  which  is  brought  into  contact  with  the  tissues 
is  made  of  platinum,  and  is  usually  in  the  form  of  a  loop^ 
pointy  Tcnife  or  dome.  The  handle  is  made  to  thoroughly  insu- 
late the  current,  and  at  the  same  time  to  resist  the  heat.  The 
connection  of  the  platinum  with  the  conducting  cords  is  made 
with  pure  copper  wire,  of  large  size,  which  passes  through  the 
handle.  The  conducting  cords  are  composed  of  a  large  bundle 
of  fine  copper  wire,  or  a  single  copper  wire  of  sufficient  size  to 
convey  a  large  quantity  of  electricity. 

The  loop  is  managed  like  the  ecraseur,  to  which  it 

is  superior  in  that  it  sears  as  well  as  divides  the  tissues.  It 
is  used  for  pediculated  tumors  principally  ;  it  may  be  used  for 
tumors  without  a  pedicle,  by  introducing  needles  through  the 
base,  and  adjusting  the  loop  between  the  needles  and  the  sur- 
face to  which  the  tumor  is  attached. 

Platinum  points  may  be  introduced  into  vascular  tumors 
and  afterward  rendered  incandescent.  The  tissue  should  be 
thoroughly  cauterized  before  withdrawing  the  points,  to  avoid 
the  possibility  of  hemorrhage.  They  may  also  be  used  to 
destroy  dental  nerves,  granulations,  to  open  abscesses  and  fistu- 
Ise,  to  cauterize  the  prolapsed  recti  of  children  (using  a  director 
if  necessary). 

The  platinum  knife  is  simply  a  very  small  thin  plate ;  the 
best  method  of  using  it  consists  in  successively  repeating  the 
contact  of  the  incandescent  metal  with  the  parts  operated  upon. 
It  is  an  error  to  suppose  that  this  instrument  will  cut  directly 
through  a  mass  of  tissue,  like  a  surgical  knife.  It  is  extremely 
difficult  to  regulate  the  heat  in  a  piece  of  platinum  of  this 
shape,  so  that  it  shall  be  just  hot  enough  to  do  the  work 
required,  and  at  the  same  time  not  do  injury  to  surrounding 
tissue  by  radiating  heat,  or  even  setting  it  on  fire. 

The  plati7iiC7)i  dome  consists  of  wire  wound  spirally  in  the  form 


GALVANISM. 


167 


of  a  dome,  as  its  name  would  imply.  It  is  used  as  a  eauterizer^ 
where  a  larger  surface  is  to  be  acted  upon  than  the  points 
are  adapted  to,  and  as  a  moxa  for  counter-irritation. 

HISTORY  OF  GALYANO-CAUTERY. 

Dr.  Fabre-Palaprat  was  the  first  to  employ  a  platinum  wire 
heated  by  a  galvanic  battery  to  produce  moxas.  A  long  time 
after,  in  1845,  M.  Heider  employed  the  same  method  to  cauterize 
the  dental  nerves  when  painfully  affected.  In  1846,  M.  Crusell, 
of  St.  Petersburg,  conceived  the  idea  of  cutting  and  cauterizing 
the  tissues  by  means  of  a  wire,  or  a  thin  plate  of  platinum, 
rendered  incandescent  by  a  powerful  electric  current,  making 
it  act  after  the  fashion  of  a  saw,  by  means  of  a  backward  and 
forward  motion. 

Mr.  Marshall,  of  England,  soon  after  made  numerous  experi- 
ments in  cauterizing  the  tissues  of  animals,  corpses,  and  then  of 
patients.  He  succeeded  in  curing  a  fistula  of  the  cheek  by 
means  of  a  platinum  wire  of  an  inch  in  diameter  ;  he 
afterward  used  it  for  small  tumors,  cauterizing  wounds,  etc. 
M.  Nelaton,  from  the  year  1850,  used  it  in  the  cure  of  erectile 
subcutaneous  tumors,  while  preserving  the  skin.  Dr.  Amusat, 
Jr.,  by  means  of  a  platinum  wire  of  an  inch  in  diameter 
and  5  or  6  inches  in  length,  removed  cancerous  tumors  ;  he 
also  used  thin  plates,  or  ribbons  of  platinum,  heated  in  the 
same  way,  and  to  which  he  imparted  a  backward  and  forward 
sawing  motion  to  separate  the  tissues.  Prof.  Middeldorpfi",  of 
Breslau,  published  the  first  important  work  on  this  subject  in 
1855. 

Dr.  Maas*  has  collected  130  cases  of  noevus^  treated  by 
galvano-cautery,  most  of  which  were  operated  upon  by  Dr. 
Middeldorpfi",  in  which  the  loop  was  used  39  times,  the  dome 

*  Langenbeck's  Archiv.  fiir  Chirurgie,  1871,  p.  520. 


168 


GALVANISM. 


IT,  and  other  forms  in  the  remainder.  In  112  cases  there  was 
a  complete  cure,  11  improved,  three  died,  and  in  4  the  result 
was  not  known  ;  4  cases  relapsed  ;  death  resulted  once  from 
hemorrhage,  twice  from  lockjaw  (once  trismus  and  once  tetanus). 
Duration  of  treatment  was  short ;  in  many  cases  the  eschar 
separated  between  the  fifth  and  tenth  day,  and  a  good  cicatrix 
was  formed  without  perceptible  suppuration. 

M.  Zielewicz'^  has  collected  fifty  cases  of  amputation  of 
the  penis  by  the  galvano-cautery  loop.  The  operations  were 
performed  for  cancer,  gangrene,  and  once  for  an  enormous 
papilloma  ;  8  of  the  patients  died  ofblood  poisoning  in  hospital ; 
none  died  in  private  practice.  No  hemorrhage  ever  occurred, 
in  spite  of  numerous  introductions  of  the  catheter  or  bougies ; 
no  surgical  fever  followed  the  operation.  Contraction  of  urethra 
took  place  only  in  one  case,  which  easily  yielded  to  the  use  of 
bougies. 

Dr.  Yoltolini,  of  Breslau,  f  was  the  first  to  use  the  galvano- 
cautery  loop  for  the  removal  of  a  tumor  from  within  the  larynx. 
This  operation  has  since  been  successfully  repeated  by  others. 
Tracheotomy  has  been  performed  with  the  galvano-cautery  knife. 
Mr.  ErichsenJ  has  employed  it  in  a  considerable  number  of  cases 
of  cancer  of  the  tongue  with  success.  He  considers  the  galvano- 
cautery  loop  one  of  the  most  valuable  of  modern  applications 
of  physical  science  to  medicine.  He  emphasizes  this  point  — 
amid  undue  haste^  and  screw  up  the  instrument  slowly  in 
'proportion  to  the  mscularity  of  the  part  operated  on, 

Mr.  Bryant,  of  Guy's  Hospital,  successfully  removed  an 
epithelial  cancer  of  the  perineum,  and  also  a  spreading  lupus 
of  the  face^  by  galvano-cautery.  The  former  was  accomplished 
after  this  manner  without  the  loss  of  a  drop  of  blood  :  It 
occupied  the  perineum,  involving  the  anus  and  a  portion  of  the 

*  Langenbeck's  Archiv.  fiir  Chirurgie,  1871,  p.  589. 
tibid,  1865,  p.  693. 

IBritish  Medical  Journal,  February  15. 1873. 


GALVANISM. 


169 


recto-vaginal  septum.  He  isolated  the  base  by  passing  three 
large  pins  beneath  it  into  the  healthy  tissues,  the  patient  be- 
ing under  the  influence  of  chloroform.  A  strong  platinum 
wire  was  next  passed  around  the  base  of  the  tumor  beneath 
the  pins,  and  fixed  to  the  ecraseur,  was  screwed  home  ;  junc- 
tion was  then  made  with  a  cautery  battery,  and  with  a  few 
careful  turns  of  the  screw  the  growth  was  removed,  leaving 
an  ash-colored  surface.    Rapid  recovery  followed. 

Galvano-cautery  has  been  used  by  oculists  for  cauterizing 
granular  lids,  and  in  diseases  of  the  lachrymal  ducts.  Aurists 
have  employed  it  for  removal  of  polypi  and  other  tumors 
from  the  auditory  canal.  It  is  so  well  adapted  to  nearly  all 
the  minor  operations  in  surgery,  and  the  advantages  in  its 
favor  are  so  many,  that  only  the  want  of  reliable  and  con- 
venient battery  has  hitherto  prevented  it  from  coming  into 
universal  use. 


CHAPTER  YI. 

FARADISM. 

When  a  current  of  electricity  from  one  or  more  galvanic 
cells  is  passed  through  a  coil  of  wire,  the  galvanic  properties 
are  modified  and  practically  a  new  current  is  obtained,  which 
is  known  under  the  various  names  of  induced^  interrupted 
or  faradic  current. 


Among  those  who 
sought  to  explain  the 
N  principle  discovered  by 


Fig.  46.  Ocrsted  (see  p.  118  gal- 

vanometer) was  Arago,  who  found  that  the  electric  current  im- 
parted a  strong  magnetic  force  to  pieces  of  soft  iron,  steel, 
etc.  He  showed  that  if  copper  wire  covered  with  silk  or 
gutta-percha  be  coiled  around  a  bar  of  soft  iron,  and  a  current 
be  passed  through  the  wire,  the  soft  iron,  although  it  does 
not  form  a  part  of  the  circuit,  becomes  powerfully  excited. 
Each  winding  of  wire  increases  the  magnetism  of  the  iron, 
and  by  employing  a  large  number  of  windings  a  magnet  of 
enormous  power  may  be  produced. 

Tills  magnetism  is  not  permanent;  it  ceases  at  once  when 
the  circuit  is  broken.  In  an  instant  the  electric  current  may 
magnetize  a  bar  by  its  passage  and  demagnetize  it  by  its  ces- 
sation. The  same  result  follows  if  the  coiled  wire  is  separated 
from  the  bar  by  an  insulating  cylinder,  as  shown  in  Fig.  46. 
A  bar  magnetized  in  this  way  is  called  an  electro-magnet. 
Electro-magnets  possess  much  greater  lifting  power  than  natural 

(170) 


FARADISM. 


171 


magnets  of  the  same  weight.  Prof.  Henry  describes  one  that 
oonld  lift  thirty-five  times  its  own  weight,  while  the  most 
powerM  natural  magnet  known  at  the  present  day  sustains 
but  six  times  its  own  weight. 

Nearly  all  the  practical  applications  of  electricity  have  been 
made  by  combining  electricity  and  magnetism.  No  telegraph 
sends  a  message  from  one  place  to  another,  no  telephone 
acts,  no  electric  motor  or  electric  light  can  be  operated,  with- 
out a  magnet  of  this  kind.  Its  great  usefulness  lies  in  the 
fact  that  its  magnetization  is  wholly  under  the  control  of  the 
current. 

In  1831  Faraday  discovered  that  a  galvanic  current  pass- 
ing through  a  wire  induces  a  current  in  another  wire  near 
to  and  parallel  with  it.  The  wire  through  which  the  galvanic 
current  passes  is  called  the  primary  wire,  and  the  current 
primary  or  direct.  The  parallel  wire  is  called  the  secondary 
or  induced  circuit,  and  the  current  passing  through  it  an 
induction^  secondary  or  faradlc^  in  honor  of  its  discoverer. 

These  wires  are  usually  arranged  in  coils  composed  of 
many,  layers  of  wire,  the  primary  coil  lying  within  the 
secondary,  from  which  it  is  separated  by  insulation.  A  steady 
flow  of  electricity  through  the  primary  coil  will  produce  no 
effect  over  the  secondary  so  long  as  it  flows  without  inter- 
ruption ;  yet  if  it  be  suddenly  broken,  a  momentary  wave  or 
current  will  instantly  flow  through  the  other  in  the  same 
direction  as  the  original  current.  If  now  the  current  be  re- 
established through  the  first  coil,  another  momentary  wave 
will  pass  through  the  second  coil,  but  in  an  o])posite  direc- 
tion to  the  one  passing  through  the  first  coil.  Increasing  or 
decreasing  the  current  affects  the  direction  of  the  momentary 
current  in  the  same  way  as  starting  or  stopping  tlie  primary 
current. 


172 


FARADISM. 


INDUCED  CUERENTS. 

Induced  currents  include  primary^  secondary^  tertiary  and 
extra  currents.  They  are  distinguished  from  galvanic  or  direct 
currents  by  certain  properties,  that  will,  be  considered  in  the 
following  order :  1.  Direction.  2.  Magnetic  induction.  3. 
Self-induction.    4.  Potential. 

The  direction  of  the  primary  current.  The  moment  the 
circuit,  including  one  or  more  galvanic  cells,  is  completed,  a 
current  passes  through  it  from  the  positive  to  the  negative 
pole,  as  already  explained,  and  indnices  a  current  in  a  wire 
near  and  parallel  to  some  portion  of  the  wire  of  the  circuit. 

The  direction  of  the  secondary  ciirrent.  This  induced  cur- 
rent is  in  an  opposite  direction  to  that  passing  through  the 
circuit,  as  may  be  shown  by  a  delicate  galvanometer,  but  it  is 
momentary  only,  and  the  needle,  at  first  deflected,  quickly 
resumes  its  natural  position.  As  soon  as  the  needle  is  at  rest, 
break  the  circuit  to  arrest  the  current  from  the  cells  :  the  needle 
will  be  again  deflected,  but  in  a  direction  opposite  to  its  first 
deflection,  showing  that,  at  the  instant  the  circuit  is  broken,  a 
current  is  induced  in  the  parallel  wire  in  the  same  direction  as 
that  passing  through  the  circuit.  The  direction  of  the  second- 
ary or  induced  current  varies  continually,  as  follows : 

{a)  At  the  instant  the  galvanic  circuit  is  closed  the  induced 
current  moves  from  negative  to  positive,  or  opposite  to  the 
"primary  current. 

(5)  At  the  instant  the  galvanic  circuit  is  opened  the  induced 
current  moves  from  positive  to  negative,  or  in  the  same  direc- 
tion as  the  primary  current. 

(<?)  If  the  original  current  be  increased  in  strength  it  has 
the  same  efl^ect  on  the  induced  as  closing  the  circuit. 

(d )  If  the  original  current  is  decreased  in  strength  it  affects 
the  secondary  the  same  as  opening  the  circuit. 


FAKADISM. 


Faraday  termed  that  passive  state  of  tlie  secondary  wire 
which  exists  when  the  primary  current  is  iminterrupted  electro- 
tonic^  and  the  w^ave  that  passes  at  the  instant  of  making  or 
breaking  the  circuit  the  electric  tkrob. 

Magnetic  Induction. — If  the  primary  wire  be  replaced  by 
a  magnet  it  will  be  found  that  induced  currents  will  be  pro- 
duced in  parallel  wires,  either  by  motion  of  the  magnet  or  by 
altering  its  strength.  If  the  secondary  or  parallel  wire  be 
wound  in  an  open  coil  and  a  magnet  be  passed  through  its  axis^ 
as  in  Fig.  46,  when  the  strength  of  the  magnet  is  altered  by 
bringing  to  the  N  pole,  first  the  S  and  then  the  pole  of  another 
magnet,  induced  currents  will  pass  through  the  coil  precisely 
equal  to  those  produced  by  the  passage  of  an  electric  current 
through  the  primary  wire  ;  magnetic  induction,  like  electric 
induction,  occurs  only  at  the  instant  the  magnetism  is  disturbed. 

Self-induction, — Since  a  circuit  carrying  a  current  acts  in- 
ductively upon  every  neighboring  circuit,  it  naturally  follows 
that  it  must  also  have  a  similar  action  upon  the  ditferent  parts 
of  itself ;  since  these  parts  may  be  regarded  as  cases  of  very 
near  neighboring  circuits,  this  is  called  self-induction.  Jenkin 
discovered  that  when  the  circuit  from  a  single  galvanic  cell 
is  hroTcen^  a  sharp  shock  can  be  felt  if  an  electro-magnet  is 
included  in  the  circuit  (none  is  felt  when  the  circuit  is  closed). 
Faraday,  having  been  informed  of  this,  soon  traced  it  to  its 
cause,  ''the  induction  of  the  current  on  itself."  Self-induction 
reveals  the  fact  that  when  a  circuit  is  closed,  the  current  does 
not  all  at  once  reach  its  full  strength,  but  takes  some  very 
short  time  to  do  so,  and  that  during  that  time  the  current  is 
retarded  by  the  opposite  current.,  due  to  self-induction.  In  the 
same  way,  when  the  circuit  is  broken,  the  current  strength  does 
not  fall  to  zero  all  at  once,  its  gradual  fall  being  prolonged  by 
the  current  due  to  self-induction,  which  in  this  case  is  in  the 


174 


FARADISM. 


same  direction  as  the  main  current.  Extra  currents  are  those 
due  to  self-induction. 

We  have  thus  far  supposed  the  two  wires  to  be  parallel; 
if  now  we  arrange  them  at  right  angles,  the  extra  currents 
disappear  almost  entirely,  showing  that  for  two  wires  to  act 
inductively  on  each  other,  it  is  necessary  for  them  to  be  near 
together  and  not  at  right  angles. 

Tertiary  currents. — As  the  current  induced  in  a  wire  by  the 
direct  battery  circuit  is  called  secondary^  so  the  name  tertiary 
is  given  to  the  current  induced  by  the  secondary  in  a  third 
wire  or  coil ;  this  third  may  induce  a  current  in  a  fourth,  and 
so  on  for  a  series.  In  each  additional  wire  or  coil  the  current 
moves  in  a  direction  opposite  to  the  preceding ;  for  example, 
the  secondary  moves  opposite  to  the  primary  at  the  instant  of 
closing  the  circuit,  and  in  the  same  direction  at  the  instant  of 
breaking  the  circuit.  The  tertiary  moves  opposite  the  second- 
ary at  the  instant  of  closing,  and  in  the  same  direction  at 
breaking  the  circuit,  each  current  becoming  weaker  as  its  dis- 
tance from  the  primary  is  increased. 

The  2>otential  of  the  galvanic  current  from  a  single  cell  is 
enormously  increased  by  induction,  and  the  potential  of  induc- 
tion currents  is  still  fuiiher  increased  by  introducing  into  the 
cavity  of  the  coil  a  center-piece  of  soft  iron  which  is  called  the 
core. 

RHEOTOME    OR    CURRENT  INTERRUPTER. 

It  is  necessary  that  the  primary  current  be  constantly  in- 
terrupted in  order  to  secure  a  secondary  current ;  therefore 
some  mechanical  device  must  be  employed  which  shall  auto- 
matically keep  u])  a  regular  succession  of  interruptions. 

Mode  of  Action.  When  the  elements  are  immersed  in 
Huid  and  the  external  circuit  is  closed,  the  current  from  the 
conducting  plate  jDasses  directly  to  and  through  the  primary 
coil  of  wire,  w4ueh  renders  M  a  magnet.     M  then  attracts 


FARxVDISM. 


175 


H  and  draws  the  spring  away  from  X',  against  which  it  nat- 
urally rests.  This  breaks  the  current,  for  the  circuit  is  com- 
plete only  when  X'  touches  X. 


Fig.  47. 


Fig.  47  represents  a  current  interrupter  or  rheo- 
tome,  also  called  a  "make  and  break,"  a  "vibra- 
tor," etc. 

M,  the  end  of  the  core  within  the  coil,  com- 
posed of  a  bundle  of  soft  iron  wires. 

H,  the  hammer  on  a  moderately  stiflf  spring, 
fastened  to  post  R,  which  has  direct  connection 
with  the  primary  circuit,  as  may  be  seen  in  Fig.  48. 

X,  a  platinum  point  on  the  spring.  Platinum  is 
used  because  it  does  not  easily  corrode. 

X',  the  platinum  tip  of  screw,  Avhich  merely 
touches  X. 

T,  the  thumbscrew,  which  may  be  turned  to 
regulate  the  contact  of  X'  with  X. 


When  the  current  is  broken,  M  loses  its  magnetism  and 
no  longer  attracts  H,  therefore  the  spring  is  free  to  rest 
against  X'.  The  instant  the  spring  flies  back  to  permit 
X  to  touch  X'  the  circuit  is  complete  again.  M  becomes 
a  magnet,  attracts  H  and  the  current  is  interrupted  ;  thus  II 
is  kept  rapidly  vibrating  back  and  forth  between  M  and  X' 
and  gives  rise  to  a  buzzing  sound.  These  constant  interrup- 
tions keep  up  an  induced  current  in  the  secondary  coil,  through 
which,  as  we  have  already  seen,  the  current  passes  in  one 
direction  at  the  instant  the  circuit  is  complete,  and  in  the  op- 
posite direction  when  the  circuit  is  opened,  hence  the  induced 
current  must  move  equally  "to  and  fro,"  instead  of  princiiDally 
from  positive  to  negative  points,  like  tlie  primary  current.  If 
the  vibrating  spring  is  too  weak,  the  current  will  be  broken 
at  a  time  when  the  core  has  but  small  magnetic  strength,  and 
a  feeble  induction  current  is  produced.  If  the  spring  is  suffi- 
ciently stiff  it  may  be  so  arranged,  by  increasing  or  decreasing 
the  pressure  of  the  screw  T,  that  the  current  is  not  broken  till 
the  core  has  received  nearly  its  full  amount  ot  magnetism,  and 


176 


FARADISM. 


consequently  a  much  stronger  induction  current  is  generated. 
When  a  current,  with  an  electro-motive  force  too  great  for 
the  capacity  of  the  coil,  is  sent  through  it,  the  platinum  points, 
X'  X,  may  be  fused  by  the  heat  of  the  sparks  produced,  and 
the  coil  itself  be  damaged,  since  wires  become  heated  when 
a  current  of  greater  quantity  than  they  are  capable  of  readily 
conducting  is  carried  over  them.  For  this  reason  but  one  or 
two  cells  are  employed  for  producing  a  faradic  current. 

THE    HELIX    OR    FAKADIC  COIL. 


Fig.  48  represents  the  arrangement  of  the  coils  of  wire 
forming  a  helix.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  inner  coil  alone 
is  connected  with  the  elements.  The  outer  coil  is  connected 
only  with  the  binding  posts,  from  which  the  secondary  current 
is  obtained.  The  vibrator  attached  to  R  magnetizes  and  de- 
magnetizes the  core  with  great  rapidity. 


Fig.  48. 

a  a,  several  layers  of  coarse  insulated  copper  wire  wound  around  an  insulating 
spool.   This  is  the  primary  coil. 

b  b,  many  layers  very  fine  insuated  copper  wire  wound  over  a  a,  from  which  it  is 
separated  by  an  insulating  material.   This  forms  the  secondary  coil. 

M,  the  core  or  magnet,  composed  of  soft  iron  wires  inclosed  within  the  insulating 
spool. 

S,  the  shield  covering  the  core,  which  can  be  drawn  out  when  necessary. 
C,  the  conducting  plate  of  the  battery,  connected  with  one  end  of  the  coarse  wire 
forming  the  inner  coil. 

Z,  the  generating  plate  connected  with  the  post  R. 
R,  the  post  of  the  current  interrupter  or  rheotome. 

H,  hammer  at  end  of  rheotome  spring.  The  wire  above  H  is  the  outer  end  of  the 
coarse  wire  coil  connecting  R  with  the  post  holding  screw  T,  and  also  with  P,  the  posi- 
tive pole  of  the  primary  current. 

N,  the  negative  pole  of  the  primary  current,  is  connected  with  R. 

X  X,  platinum  points  on  tip  of  screw  and  on  spring. 

P  2,  positive  pole  of  secondary  current. 

N  2,  negative  pole  of  secondary  current. 


FARADISM. 


177 


The  primary  or  inner  coil  is  composed  of  comparatively 
coarse  wire,  in  order  that  it  may  offer  little  resistance  to  the  pas- 
sage of  the  current  from  the  cell,  and  at  the  same  time  exert  a 
powerful  magnetic  effect  upon  the  core  and  layers  of  the  outer 
coil. 

The  secondary  or  outer  coil  is  composed  of  a  great  length 
of  fine  wire  (the  length  and  size  of  which  must  be  proportioned 
to  that  of  the  primary),  because  the  potential  of  the  induced 
current  is  proportional  to  the  length  and  fineness  of  the  wire 
over  which  it  passes.  This  coil  is  completely  insulated  from  the 
primary  coil,  and  receives  its  electricity  purely  by  induction. 
The  quality  of  the  faradic  currents  depends  not  only  upon  the 
length  of  wire  composing  the  two  coils,  but  also  upon  the  relative 
size^  perfect  insulation^  the  care  with  which  the  windings  are 
made^  and  the  connections.  The  value  of  a  faradic  battery 
depends  very  much  upon  the  skill  of  the  mechanic  who  makes 
the  helix  and  connects  it  with  the  base.  The  strength  of  the 
faradic  current  depends  almost  entirely  upon  the  construction 
of  the  helix  ;  the  strength  of  the  galvanic  current^  upon  the  kind 
and  number  of  cells  in  the  circuit.  There  is  seldom  any  advan- 
tage to  be  gained  by  using  more  than  one  or  two  cells  for  the 
faradic  current,  since,  as  before  explained,  a  current  possessing 
greater  quantity  than  a  wire  can  easily  conduct,  heats  it  in 
passing,  and,  in  consequence,  is  liable  to  damage  the  insulating 
covering  of  the  wire  ;  or  the  current  may  overcome  the  resist- 
ance of  the  insulation,  and  pass  across  from  one  layer  of  wire 
to  another,  completing  the  circuit  within  the  helix  itself,  in 
which  case  it  will  cease  to  pass  through  the  external  circuit. 

T/ie  primary  current.  The  current  passing  through  the  pri- 
mary coil  is  called  the  primary  current.  It  is  direct  from  the 
cell,  and  passes  in  the  same  direction  as  the  galvanic  current, 
from  positive  to  negative  ;  it  deflects  the  galvanometer  needle, 
and  possesses  feeble  electrolytic  power. 

12 


178 


FARADISM. 


The  secondary  current  is  that  which  is  obtained  from  the 
secondary  coil.  Its  direction  at  the  instant  of  closing  the  circuit 
is  opposite  to  the  primary  current,  at  the  instant  of  opening  the 
circuit  in  the  same  direction  ;  therefore  it  is  appropriately  called 
a  "to  and  fro"  current. 

The  core  or  magnet.  The  primary  current  has  its  inductive 
power  greatly  increased  by  putting  a  bar  of  soft  iron  or  a  bundle 
of  iron  wires  through  the  center.  At  the  instant  the  primary 
current  starts,  it  renders  the  central  bar  a  magnet,  but  the 
magnetic  power  is  lost  instantly  on  arresting  the  current.  At 
the  instant  of  acquiring  and  losing  its  magnetism,  it  induces  a 
current  in  the  primary  coil  in  the  same  direction  as  the  jprimary 
current.,  and  therefore  strenghtens  it.  A  bundle  of  wires  is 
superior  to  a  solid  bar  of  iron  for  the  central  core,  because  the 
former  acquires  and  loses  its  magnetism  more  readily  than  the 
latter. 

The  shield.  Prof.  Dove,  of  Berlin,  has  shown  that  the 
potential  of  an  induced  current  is  much  diminished  by  covering 
the  core  with  a  closed  tube  of  non-magnetic  material,  such  as 
brass  or  copper.  Induced  currents  are  developed  in  the  shield, 
whereby  the  magnetism  of  the  soft  iron  core  is  counterbalanced ; 
as  the  shield  is  withdrawn  to  permit  the  inductive  influence  of 
the  core  to  act  upon  the  primary  coil,  the  strength  of  the  current 
is  increased. 

NUMBER  OF  CURRENTS  A  BATTERY  SHOULD  FURNISH. 

Since  attention  is  frequently  called  to  batteries  which  are 
said  to  furnish  ten  or  more  distinct  currents,  it  may  be  well 
to  explain  how  these  numerous  currents  are  obtained.  The 
secondary  coil  being  composed  of  many  layers  of  wire  is 
tapped  at  intervals  throughout  its  length,  and  each  branch 
wire  is  connected  with  a  binding  post.  The  post,  to  which  the 
inner  extremity  of  the  secondary  coil  is  attached,   is  always 


FARADISM. 


179 


used  as  one  pole,  while  each  of  the  other  posts  in  turn  may 
serve  as  the  alternate  pole.  By  this  method  it  is  possible  to 
obtain  as  many  currents  as  there  are  layers  of  wire  in  the 
coil  ;  these  only  differ  in  having  passed  through  different  lengths 
of  wire;  they  are  all  "to  and  fro"  currents,  and  do  not  differ 
therapeutically  from  the  various  modifications  of  the  secondary 
current  from  the  entire  coil  produced  by  withdrawing  the  shield 
from  or  replacing  it  over  the  core. 


aAKEn-cn 


Fig.  49. 

Mcintosh  physicians'  faradic  battery  no.  i. 

Length,  8  in. ;  width,  6^  in. ;  height,  7  in  ;  weight,  7  lbs. 

A  simple  and  convenient  form  of  a  physicians'  faradic  bat- 
tery is  shown  in  Fig.  49. 

The  hase^  upon  which  is  fastened  the  helix,  rheotome  and 
binding  posts,  is  made  of  polished  black  rubber.  It  is  covered 
on  its  lower  surface  with  a  sheet  of  soft  rubber,  which  insulates 
and  protects  the  connections  lying  beneath  the  hard-rubber 
base. 

The  connections  consist  of  copper  wires  that  join  the  pri- 
mary coil  with  the  elements,  and  both  primary  and  secondary 
coils  with  the  binding  posts. 


180 


FAKADISM. 


The  hinding  posts,  rheotome,  and  metal  parts  on  the  base, 
are  heavily  nickel-plated,  which  enables  them  with  reasonable 
care  to  resist  corrosion  or  tarnishing  for  years. 

The  helix  is  skillfully  constructed  of  a  great  length  of  well 
insulated  pure  copper  wire  ;  the  two  coils  are  perfectly  insu- 
lated from  each  other  ;  their  relative  size  and  length  is  such 
that  the  currents  furnished  are  exceedingly  smooth  and  yet 
possess  great  potential ;  they  can  be  graded  perfectly,  so  that 
currents  suitable  for  the  most  delicate  applications  to  the  eye, 
ear  or  brain,  or  too  powerful  to  be  endured  by  a  healthy  per- 
son, are  alike  at  the  command  of  the  operator. 

The  primary  current  is  obtained  by  inserting  the  conduct- 
ing cords  in  binding  posts  P  (positive)  and  N  (negative),  at 
each  end  of  the  word  ''primary." 

The  secondary  current.  The  electrodes  in  Fig.  49  are  shown 
connected  with  the  binding  posts  from  which  the  secondary 
current  is  obtained. 

Both  currents  are  increased  hy  withdrawing  the  shield  from 
the  helix. 

1  he  elements  are  a  single  pair  of  zinc-carbon  plates  fastened 
beneath  the  base  to  the  screws  seen  in  the  illustration  beneath 
the  rheotome  hammer. 

The  cell.  This  is  a  hard-rubber  section  comprising  a  cell 
and  drip-cup,  which  is  illustrated  and  described  on  page  198. 

The  hattery  fluid  is  made  after  the  formula  given  under 
the  Grenet  cell.  The  battery  in  Fig.  49  is  ready  for  use,  the 
elements  being  immersed  in  the  fluid  of  the  cell.  When  the 
battery  is  not  in  use,  the  base  should  be  reversed,  which 
places  the  elements  in  the  empty  drip-cup. 

The  spring  on  the  top  of  the  helix  serves  as  a  handle, 
by  which  to  lift  the  base,  when  the  battery  is  open  ;  when 
it  is  closed,  the  top  of  the  cover  presses  on  this  spring  and 
holds  the  base  firmly  over  the  cell;  the  soft  rubber  lining  the 


FAKADISM. 


181 


base  acts  as  a  hydrostat  and  prevents  any  spilling  of  fluid 
when  the  battery  is  carried  about. 

A  space  each  side  of  the  cell  section  affords  room  for  the 
conducting  cords  and  a  pair  of  electrodes  like  those  in  the 
illustration. 


Fig.  50. 

Mcintosh  physicians'  faradic  battery  No.  3. 

Length,  8  in.;  width,  8  in.;  height,  1%in.;  weight,  1^  lbs. 


B  B,  bars  connecting  the  elements  with  posts  on  large  base. 
E  E,  posts  having  direct  connection  with  the  primary  coil. 
1,  2,  binding  posts. 

D,  indicator  which  points  out  the  polarity  of  the  current. 
C,  pole  changer. 

L,  switch  which  connects  the  primary  and  secondary  coils  with  the  binding  posts. 

The  lock  and  hooks  which  fasten  the  cover  upon  the  bat- 
tery are  heavily  nickel-plated,  of  special  design  and  extra 
strength.  They  are  manufactured  by  the  Mcintosh  Galvanic 
&  Faradic  Battery  Company  expressly  for  this  purpose,  and 
are  much  superior  to  similar  fastenings  usually  found  on  bat- 


182 


FARADISM. 


teries.  The  instrument  illustrated  in  Fig.  49  is  a  type  of  the 
simplest  form  of  medical  battery.  It  is  sufficient  for  most 
general  applications  of  faradism,  but  certain  other  accessories 
are  convenient,  and  for  localized  faradization  sometimes  essential. 

The  helix,  rheotome,  elements  and  cell  section  of  No.  3 
battery  are  the  same  as  in  the  battery  last  described. 

The  hase  in  this  instrument  is  divided,  the  narrow  portion 
serving  as  the  hydrostat,  and  the  wide  as  a  cover  for  the  elec- 
trode space,  which  is  considerably  larger  than  in  battery  No.  1, 
and  affords  room  for  several  additional  instruments. 

The  elements  are  attached  to  the  narrow  base,  and  connected 
with  the  helix  through  the  bars  B  B ;  they  are  removed  from 
the  cell  to  the  drip-cup  by  reversing  this  narrow  base  only. 
They  are  insulated  over  the  upper  fourth  of  their  surface  after 
the  same  manner  as  the  elements  in  the  Mcintosh  Grenet  cell, 
so  as  to  perfectly  protect  their  connections  from  corrosion  or 
deposits  of  salts,  and  insure  perfect  connection  until  the  zinc  is 
worn  out.    (The  fluid  has  little  effect  upon  the  carbon.) 

The  switch  L  turned  upon  the  button  next  the  coil,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  50,  sends  a  secondary  current  through  the  binding  ]>osts  ; 
turned  upon  the  button  next  the  front  edge  of  the  base,  it 
sends  a  primary  current  through  the  binding  posts  ;  turned 
on  the  central  button,  no  current  passes  through  the  binding 
posts.  When  it  is  desirable  to  locate  the  electrodes  before 
sending  a  current  through  the  circuit,  as  is  sometimes  the 
case,  the  battery  may  be  made  ready,  and  everything  adjusted, 
while  the  switch  is  on  the  central  button,  and  either  current 
may  then  be  sent  through  the  patient  by  moving  the  switch 
forward  or  backward.  Switch  L  may  be  used  as  a  current 
interrupter  when  it  is  desirable  to  artificially  regulate  the 
rapidity  of  the  faradic  interruptions  ;  it  is  moved  back  and 
forth  between  the  central  button  and  the  one  from  which  the 
current  is  taken,  at  suitable  intervals. 


FARADISM. 


183 


The  pole  changer  6^  is  a  double  switch,  which  in  the  cut  is 
represented  moved  toward  binding  post  2,  so  as  to  uncover 
button  D,  upon  whicli  is  a  hand  pointing  toward  binding  post  1, 
indicating  that  the  latter  is  positive,  and  consequently  post  2  is 
negative.  Moving  C  toward  post  1  uncovers  a  button,  upon 
which  is  a  hand  pointing  toward  binding  post  2  as  positive, 
when  post  1  becomes  negative  ;  by  this  means  it  is  possible 
to  change  the  polarity  of  the  current  in  an  instant  without 
removing  the  electrodes  from  the  patient. 

The  binding  posts  are  of  the  style  represented  by  A  in 
Fig.  27,  which  give  the  most  perfect  and  durable  connection 
between  conducting  cords  and  battery.  The  nickel-plated 
metallic  parts  of  this  battery,  contrasted  with  the  polished  black 
rubber  base,  make  a  beautiful  appearance,  while  its  light  weight 
and  perfect  construction  render  it  a  most  desirable  instrument 
for  those  who  employ  faradism  only. 

R  The  hydro-rheostat  is  used  to  interpose  resist- 

ance in  the  circuit,  so  as  to  delicately  modify  or 
soften  the  current  for  applications  to  the  eye,  ear, 
brain,  or  in  the  treatment  of  patients  who  are 
excessively  sensitive  to  electricity. 

Fig.  51  consists  of  a  glass  tube,  0^2  inches  long,  for  holding  water, 
securely  fastened  to  a  hard-rubber  base  below,  and  a  metal  cap  above. 

M  is  a  metal  plate  that  closes  the  lower  end  to  prevent  the  escape 
of  water,  and  affords  a  metallic  connection  with  one  binding  post. 

R,  a  metal  rod  passing  through  the  center  of  the  glass  tube ;  it  may 
be  raised  any  distance  above  M. 

S,  a  setscrew  to  fasten  R  at  any  height  required. 
a  a  a,  nuts  terminating  metal  rods  that  hold  the  rubber  base  and 
metal  cap  firmly  against  the  glass  tube. 

B  B,  binding  posts,  one  of  which  is  connected  with  the  metal  cap 
through  the  rods,  and  the  other  with  M  as  before  stated. 

To  use  the  hydro-rheostat.    Connect  one  pole 

HYDRO-RHEOSTAT. 

Height,  914  inches,  of  the  battery  with  a  binding  post  B ;  connect 
the  other  binding  post  with  any  suitable  electrode.  The  alter- 
nate pole  of  the  battery  is  connected  directly  with  another  elec- 


184 


FAKADISM. 


trode.  Locate  the  electrodes  precisely  the  same  as  when  no 
rheostat  is  used.  The  method  of  introducing  it  into  the  circuit 
is  illustrated  in  Fig.  37.  The  rod  R  is  raised  to  interpose  two, 
three  or  more  inches  of  water  between  its  lower  end  and  M. 
Raising  R  increases  the  interposed  resistance ;  lowering  R 
lessens  it.  The  operator  can  test  the  effect  it  produces  by 
holding  the  electrodes  while  a  current  is  passing  through  the 
circuit  and  R  is  being  moved. 

METHODS  OF  EMPLOYING  FAKADIC  CURRENTS. 

The  application  of  faradic  currents  to  the  treatment  of 
disease  began  in  1832,  within  a  year  after  their  discovery,  and 
has  continued  in  use  ever  since,  having  been  probably  more 
extensively  employed  both  by  the  profession  and  public  than 
any  other  form  of  electricity.  This  is  owing,  in  a  measure 
at  least,  to  the  simplicity  of  the  apparatus  for  its  production, 
as  compared  with  those  for  franklinism  or  galvanism. 

The  decline  in  professional  favor  of  franklinism  has  been 
attributed  by  some  authors  to  the  circumstance  that  electrical 
machines  used  to  be  hauled  about  the  streets  on  carts  and 
exhibited  at  fairs  for  the  purpose  of  "  shocking  the  curious 
by  scores,"  as  a  cure  for  all  imaginable  ailments.  The  same 
objection  may  be  urged  against  faradism,  with  equal  justice. 
The  "peripatetic  electrician"  now  uses  an  elaborate  street 
battery,  ornamented  with  the  legend  "Electricity  is  Life,"  by 
which  the  faradic  current  is  administered  to  the  public  pro- 
miscuously. While  it  is  natural  that  the  professional  man, 
conscious  of  superficial  attainments,  and  correspondingly  jealous 
of  any  assumption  of  his  peculiar  privileges,  should,  in  self- 
defense,  ignore  or  condemn  everything  that  smacks  of  what 
he  may  deem  charlatanry ;  yet  it  is  nevertheless  true  that 
those  who  possess  the  qualification  for  deciding  upon  the  com- 
parative merits  of  remedial  measures  do  not  reject  an  agent 


FARADISM. 


185 


that  is  of  value  from  fear  that  they  may  be  styled  a  specialist 
in  the  use  of  that  agent,  or  be  classed  with  charlatans  in  con- 
sequence of  using  it.  There  is  scarcely  an  article  of  value 
in  the  materia  medica  that,  between  the  patent  medicine  vender 
and  the  ignorant  self-prescribing  of  the  laity,  has  not  perhaps 
accomplished  more  harm  than  good,  and  yet  this  is  not  offered 
as  a  pretext  for  rejecting  all  drug  medication ;  neither  should 
an  agent  that  is  capable,  in  skillful  hands,  of  accomplishing 
such  excellent  results  as  electricity  be  discarded  by  the  pro- 
fession for  any  other  reason  than  its  failure  to  accomplish  the 
purpose  intended. 

To  Duchenne  is  due  the  honor  of  reducing  faradism  to  a 
system.  In  the  year  1855  he  published  a  work^  describing  his 
method  of  localized  far  adization^^^  ^hich.  he  had  been  engaged 
nearly  ten  years  in  developing.  He  carefully  studied  the  func- 
tions of  the  muscles  in  the  living  body,  and  succeeded  in 
producing  contractions  of  all  the  muscles  separately  and  in 
groups ;  mapped  out  those  which  give  expression  to  the  face, 
and  made  some  remarkable  discoveries  in  regard  to  the  con- 
dition of  the  muscles  in  certain  forms  of  paralysis.  He 
pointed  out  that  there  is  a  difference  both  in  the  physiological 
and  therapeutical  effect  of  the  primary  and  secondary  cur- 
rents. 

PRIMARY  AND  SECONDARY  FARADIC  CURRENTS  COMPARED. 

(a)  The  primary  current  is  com-  (a)  The  secondary  current  is  com- 
posed of  a  single  induced  current,  posed  of  two  currents  going  alter- 
always  going  in  the  same  direction,  nately  in  contrary  directions. 

(6)  The  primary  exhibits  galvanic  (6)  The  secondary  does  not  de- 
properties,  in  that  it  deflects  the  gal-  fleet  the  galvanometer,  although  it 
vanometer,  and  possesses  feeble  elec-  may  cause  a  very  delicate  magnetic 
trolytic  power.  needle  to  oscillate  slightly. 


*  "  De  r  Electrisation  Localis^e,  et  de  son  Application  £i  la  Physiologic,  a  la  Pathologic, 
et    1  a  Th6rapeutique." 


186 


FARADISM. 


(c)  The  primary  has  more  power      (c)   The  secondary  excites  more 
to  excite  the  sensory  and  motor    acutely  the  cutaneous  nerves,  and 
nerves  of  the  muscles.  penetrates  more  deeply  into  the  tis- 
sues. 

(d)  The  primary  is  relatively  less  (d)  The  secondary  possesses  dis- 
rapidly  interrupted.  tinct  properties  in  virtue  of  its  rapid 

interruptions,  and  far  surpasses  any  , 
other  form  as  a  stimulant  to  the 
nerves  of  sensation. 

LOCAL  FARADIZATION. 

This  term  should  not  be  understood  to  mean  that  the  cur- 
rent can  be  confined  to  the  electrodes  and  the  limited  place 
between  them.  Every  form'  of  electricity  is  propagated  in 
waves  from  the  electrodes  in  every  direction  through  the  tis- 
sues ;  and  although  it  may  follow  the  course  of  nerv(i  or  muscle 
a  little  way  from  the  electrodes,  the  fluids  of  the  body  are  so 
much  better  conductors,  that  electricity  traverses  them  in  pref- 
erence to  the  solids.  Duchenne  claimed  that  the  faradic  cur- 
rent could  be  made  to  influence  the  skin  only,  without  pene- 
trating to  the  organs  beneath,  or  it  could  be  made  to  pass 
through  the  skin  without  irritating  it,  and  act  on  the  nerves 
or  muscles  \>eneatli.  He  employed  induction  currents  accord- 
ing to  four  methods  : 

1.  Faradization  of  the  skin. 

2.  Direct  muscular  faradization. 

3.  Indirect  muscular  faradization. 

4.  Faradization  of  the  internal  organs  and  special  senses. 

1.  According  to  the  first  method,  the  skin  and  elec- 
trodes should  be  dry  ;  if  the  former  is  naturally  moist,  starch 
or  lycopodium  powder  must  be  dusted  over  it  to  absorb  the 
moisture.  'Various  names  have  been  given  to  the  different 
methods  of  faradizing  the  skin,  among  which  are  the  follow- 
ing : 

The  elecl/ric  nail^  a  small  metal  disc,  held  at  one  point  for 
some  time,  while  a  faradic  current  ])asses  through  it,  produces 


FARADISM. 


187 


a  sensation  like  a  red-hot  nail  pressing  into  the  flesh,  hence 
the  name. 

Electric  cauterization^  a  wire  brush  moved  over  the  skin 
produces  a  sharp,  burning  sensation,  that  has  been  compared  to 
that  caused  by  cautery. 

Electric  furtigation^  a  tinsel  brush  struck  lightly  against  the 
flesh;  it  is  exceedingly  painful,  and  has  been  compared  to  the 
sensation  produced  by  beating  with  sticks. 

ElectHc  nwxa^  the  same  brush  held  steadily  against  the 
skin  produces  a  burning  sensation,  which  increases  as  long  as 
the  brush  is  held  there,  hence  the  name  moxa.  It  is  very 
painful. 

2.  Direct  muscular  faradization  ma}^  be  performed  in  either 
of  two  ways  : 

{a)  The  percutaneous  method^  in  which  the  electrode  is 
placed  on  the  skin. 

{b)  Electric  acupuncture^  in  which  needles  are  passed  di- 
rectly into  the  muscle. 

The  first  is  the  usual  method.  The  skin  and  electrodes 
should  both  be  well  moistened  with  warm  water,  and  the  con- 
tact be  firm  and  even,  so  as  to  lessen,  as  much  as  possible, 
the  resistance  of  the  skin.  Electric  acupuncture  was 
introduced  into  practice  by  Salandiere  more  than  fifty  years 
ago.  He  employed  static  electricity  through  needles.  Fabre- 
Palaprat  was  probably  the  first  to  apply  the  galvanic  current 
in  this  way  ;  it  is  not  certain  who  first  employed  the  faradic 
current  in  electric  acupuncture.  It  was  revived  some  years 
ago  in  England  by  Dr.  Morgan,  with  such  remarkable  success 
in  certain  cases  as  to  prove  that  it  is  worthy  a  place  as  an 
accepted  mode  of  applying  electricity.  The  needles  used  were 
the  finest  manufactured,  about  two  to  four  inches  in  length, 
terminating  in  a  knob  at  one  end.  They  are  7iot  insulated, 
and  are  inserted  in  the  muscle  to  be  contracted.    One  elec- 


188 


FABADISM. 


trode,  usually  the  positive,  is  placed  at  some  indifferent  spot, 
and  the  negative  metallic  electrode  is  touched  to  each  needle 
separately,  and  in  succession.  The  instantaneous  upward  and 
downward  movement  of  the  needle  shows  contraction  of  the 
muscle. 

3.  Indirect  muscular  faradization  consists  in  localizing  the 
current  in  the  nerve  plexuses  or  branches  which  supply  the 
muscles.  Duchenne  discovered  that  at  certain  points  on  the 
skin,  muscular  contractions  could  be  produced  more  readily 
than  at  others.  Eemak  pointed  out  that  these  spots  were 
located  wherever  a  motor  nerve  enters  a  muscle. 

Ziemssen*  demonstrated  the  precise  location  of  these 
points,  first  by  marking  the  points  on  the  living  body  where 
the  current  produced  muscular  contraction,  and  afterward  by 
dissecting  the  motor  branches  of  the  nerves  in  dead  bodies, 
marking  their  points  of  entrance  into  the  muscles,  these  mark- 
ings were  found  to  exactly  agree  ;  therefore  a  knowledge  of 
these  motor  points  is  now  regarded  as  essential  to  the  scien- 
tific faradization  of  the  muscles. 

4.  The  last  method,  treatment  of  special  organs  and  senses, 
requires  suitable  instruments  adapted  to  the  parts,  so  that  the 
current  may  be  carried  direct  to  their  tissues,  or  to  the  origin  of 
their  nerve  supply,  and  will  be  described  in  connection  with 
the  diseases  of  those  parts. 

GENERAL  FARADIZATION. 

M.  Dropsy,  of  Cracow,  published  in  1857  what  he  termed 
^'a  new  method  of  applying  electricity,"  which  consisted  in 
dividing  the  current  from  one  pole,  by  means  of  a  bifurcated 
conductor,  placing  one  electrode  over  the  head,  the  other  over 
the  stomach ;  while  the  current  from  the  alternate  pole  is 
divided  in  the  same  manner  between  the  hands  and  the  feet. 


*  Die  Elektricetat  in  der  Medecin,  1857,  Berlin. 


FARADISM. 


189 


M.  Gubler,  in  1863,  proposed  a  better  method  of  general  fara- 
dization, which  was  to  place  both  hands  and  feet  in  four  sepa- 
rate basins  of  salt  water,  with  which  the  four  conductors  were 
<ionnected,  so  that  water  became  the  electrodes  through  which 
the  current  was  conveyed  to  the  body.  Beard  and  Rockwell 
recommend  a  different  mode  of  general  faradization,  in  which 
one  electrode  is  used  for  a  stabile  and  the  other  for  a  labile 
current.  The  application  is  made  in  either  of  these  ways : 
{a)  One  electrode  is  placed  at  the  feet  (usually  the  negative)  to 
furnish  a  stabile  current,  while  the  other  is  moved  over  the 
whole  body  (labile  current).  (5)  One  electrode  is  placed  at 
the  coccyx  (stabile),  the  other  as  before  is  moved  over  the 
body  (labile).  They  claim  that  general  faradization  is  a  tonic 
indicated  in  a  large  class  of  cases  suffering  from  general 
debility.  By  means  of  it  all  the  muscles  of  the  body  may  be 
vigorously  and  regularly  exercised,  and  in  consequence  will  in- 
crease in  firmness,  possibly  also  in  size,  and  the  tonic  effects 
will  influence  the  entire  system.  There  will  be  improvement  in 
sleep,  appetite,  digestive  capacity  and  regularity  of  the  bowels. 
If  faradization  is  carried  to  excess,  the  efiect  is  similar  to  that 
produced  by  over-exercise,  that  is,  soreness  of  muscles,  a  sense 
of  exhaustion,  and  sometimes  an  aggravation  of  unpleasant 
symptoms.  The  tonic  effects  of  general  faradization  frequently 
can  be  detected  long  after  treatment  ceases,  proving  that  it 
profoundly  influences  the  general  system. 

FIRST  STEP  IN  GENERAL  FARADIZATION. 

Fig.  52.  The  jpatient.  The  bare  feet  are  placed  on  a  moist 
foot-plate  (which  must  be  warm)  connected  with  one  pole  of  the 
battery.  An  electrode  holding  a  large  moist  sponge  is  placed 
on  the  upper  part  of  the  forehead.  The  operator  is  shown 
changing  the  polarity  of  the  current.  The  positive  pole  is 
usually  applied  to  the  head  ;  the  direction  of  the  current  should 


190 


FAEADISM. 


be  changed  while  passing  through  the  head  only  in  exceptional 
cases.  Dizziness,  flashes  of  light,  or  other  unpleasant  phenomena, 
should  be .  a  warning  not  to  proceed  without  at  least  modifying 
the  current.  A  hydro-rheostat  in  the  circuit  makes  a  stronger 
current  endurable,  and  helps  to  avert  disagreeable  after-effects. 

All  applications  of  electricity  to  the  head  should  he  hrief 
and  made  with  a  current  of  moderate  strength.    It  is  a  prudent 


Fig.  52. 

Instruments  shown  in  the  illustration : 

The  Physicians'  Faradic  Battery  No.  3,  arranged  to  give  a  primary  current. 
Adjustable  sponge-holder,  which  should  have  a  large  sponge  attached. 
An  electrode  case  closed,  hand  and  neck  electrodes  beside  it. 
Folding  foot-plate. 


FARADISM. 


191 


measure  for  the  operator  to  test  the  current  to  be  used  upon 
his  own  head  before  applying  it  to  the  patient.  After  holding 
the  sponge  upon  the  forehead  one  or  two  minutes,  it  is  moved 
down  the  side  of  the  head  in  front  of  the  ear,  first  on  one 
side,  then  on  the  other,  and  then  held  stationary  upon  the 
back  of  the  neck  about  two  minutes. 

ANOTHER    STEP   IN    GENERAL  FARADIZATION. 


Fig.  53. 


Instruments  shown  in  the  Illustration : 

12-cell  combined  battery,  the  faradic  part  only,  ready  for  use. 

Pole  changer,  held  by  the  operator,  who  is  changing  the  polarity  of  the  current. 

Bowl  for  warm  water. 

A  neck  electrode,  which  consists  of  a  rubber  spring  that  holds  a  moist  sponge 
against  the  back  of  the  neck. 


192 


FARADISM. 


It  is  unnecessary  to  change  electrodes  during  a  sittings 
when  a  general  treatment  is  given.  The  change  in  the  illus* 
tration  is  made  merely  to  show  the  use  of  the  neck  electrode. 
The  operator  is  shown  applying  an  increasing  secondary  cur- 
rent. In  general  faradization  it  is  not  usual  to  introduce  the 
pole  changer  into  the  circuit  or  to  change  the  polarity  of  the 
current  during  the  sitting.  A  current  administered  according 
to  the  method  shown  in  Fig.  53  is  an  energetic  stimulant, 
and  should  not  he  used  in  cases  threatened  with  pa/ralysis  or 
apoplexy.,  or  those  in  which  a  recent  attach  has  occurred. 

To  prepare  the  patient  for  general  faradization.  The 
clothing  should  be  loosened  to  permit  the  long-handled  spinal 
electrode  to  be  passed  to  every  part  of  the  trunk.  It  is  first 
carried  slowly  down  the  spine  and  then  around  over  the 
stomach  and  abdomen.  The  sponge  may  be  held  two  or  three 
minutes  over  any  organ  that  specially  needs  stimulating. 
Lastly,  the  labile  electrode  is  grasped,  first  in  one  hand  and 
then  the  other,  for  one  or  two  minutes,  to  treat  the  arms.  . 

Caution.  Avoid  passing  the  electrode  over  the  bones  at 
the  projections  of  the  joints,  or  where  they  lie  near  the  sur- 
face, as  the  current  acting  on  the  nerves  of  the  periosteum 
produces  severe  pain. 

In  all  applications  of  electricity,  avoid  exposing  the  patient 
to  cold  during  the  sitting.  A  shawl  or  blanket  should  be 
thrown  around  the  shoulders  when  the  clothing  is  opened,  if 
the  air  is  at  all  chilly,  and  the  hare  feet  must  have  something 
thrown  over  them  for  warmth. 

It  is  sometimes  necessary  to  apply  general  faradization  to  a 
patient  who  is  unable  to  sit  up.  In  this  case,  the  electrodes 
should  be  passed  under  the  bed-clothing  and  the  treatment  car- 
ried on  without  uncovering  the  patient. 


CHAPTER  Vn. 

THE  Mcintosh  combined  galvanic  and  faradic 

BATTERIES. 

Formerly  the  physician  who  employed  electricity  in  general 
practice  was  obliged  to  carry  two  batteries,  if  he  wished  to 
avail  himself  of  the  advantages  of  both  galvanism  and  faradism. 
Galvanic  instruments  were  apt  to  be  cumbersome  and  compli- 
cated, requiring  too  much  attention  to  commend  them  to  the  busy 
practitioner.  To  Dr.  Mcintosh  is  due  the  credit  of  first  con- 
structing an  apparatus  in  a  convenient,  portable  form,  that 
furnishes  both  a  galvanic  and  faradic  current. 

The  Mcintosh  combined  batteries  are  composed  of  two  dis- 
tinct batteries,  one  galvanic  and  one  faradic,  in  the  same  case. 
Although  it  is  possible  to  attach  all  the  galvanic  cells  to  the 
faradic  coil,  and  thus  obtain  a  so-called  combined  current, 
reference  to  preceding  pages  will  show  why  this  is  neither 
essential  nor  desirable.  The  large  faradic  cell  contains  fluid 
sufficient  for  at  least  thirty  treatments  before  it  will  need  re- 
newal, and  as  this  cell  alone  is  capable  of  producing  a  current 
too  strong  for  any  ordinary  case,  it  is  unnecessary  to  add 
more  cells.  The  advantages  claimed  for  the  combination  are 
these  : 

1.  Both  forms  of  electricity  are  provided  in  one  case,  which 
is  as  portable  as  a  single  battery. 

2.  This  renders  both  faradism  and  galvanism  available,  not 
only  for  office,  but  for  general  practice. 

(193) 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


That  portion  which  furnishes  the  faradic  currents  is  alike  in 
all  the  Mcintosh  combined  portable  batteries.  The  portion 
which  furnishes  the  galvanic  current  is  arranged  in  sections  of 
six  cells  each,  and  the  number  of  cells  in  any  instrument  is 
indicated  by  its  name  ;  thus  one  which  has  one  faradic  and 
two  galvanic  sections  is  called  a  twelve-cell  combined  battery ; 
one  faradic  and  three  galvanic  sections  form  an  eighteen-cell 
combined  ;  one  faradic  and  four  galvanic  sections,  a  twenty- 
four-cell  combined.  It  is  not  usual  to  make  these  batteries 
with  more  than  twenty-four  cells,  as  beyond  that  number  they 
become  too  heavy  to  be  comfortably  carried  by  hand. 


Fig.  54. 

Mcintosh  twelve-cell  combined  galvanic  and  faradic  battery. 

Length,  13^  in. ;  width,  S]/^  in. ;  height,  7  in. ;  weight,  15  lbs. 

This  illustration  represents  a  twelve-cell  combined  battery 
as  it  appears  when  not  in  use.  The  faradic  portion  occupies 
the  right  hand  end  of  the  battery-box,  the  galvanic  portion  the 
left  hand;  the  space  between  them  receives  the  electrode  case 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


195 


fastened  in  the  top  of  the  battery.  Arranged  in  this  manner, 
when  the  cover  is  closed,  the  posts  in  the  top  press  upon  the 
spring  handle  of  each  base  and  hold  it  firmly  over  the  cells, 
while  narrow  partitions  prevent  the  cell  sections  from  moving 
out  of  place.  When  the  cover  is  raised,  the  space  occupied  by 
the  electrode  case  affords  room  to  move  the  galvanic  bases  to 
the  right  to  immerse  their  elements  in  the  fluid  within  the 
cells. 


Fig.  55. 

Mcintosh  eighteen-cell  combined  galvanic  and  faradic  battery. 

Length,  17  in. ;  width,  8^  in. ;  height,  7  in. ;  weight,  19  lbs. 

The  apparatus  shown  in  Fig.  55  differs  from  the  one  shown 
in  Fig.  54,  in  having  one  more  galvanic  section.  It  is  the  one 
best  adapted  to  the  wants  of  the  general  practitioner.  When 
freshly  charged  it  gives  a  galvanic  current  of  thirty-six  volts. 

The  apparatus  represented  in  Fig.  56  meets  the  requirements 
of  the  general  practitioner,  who  is  called  upon  to  do  considerable 


196  COMBINED  BATTERIES. 

surgical  work.  It  can  furnish  a  current  sufficiently  powerful  for 
any  purpose  to  which  electricity  is  therapeutically  applied,  with 
the  exception  of  galvano-cautery,  which,  as  already  explained,, 
requires  a  special  apparatus. 


Fig.  56. 

Mcintosh  twenty-four-cell  combined  galvanic  and  faradic  battery 

Length,  20%  in. ;  width,  S}4  in. ;  height,'?  in. ;  weight,  24  lbs. 

The  illustration,  Fig.  57,  represents  the  relative  position  of 
the  faradic  and  galvanic  cell  sections.  They  should  always  be 
replaced  in  the  box  in  the  same  order,  after  being  removed  for 
any  purpose. 

The  fluid  for  charging  these  cells  is  made  after  the  formula 
given  under  the  Grenet  cell. 

The  cells  should  be  filled  to  a  uniform  height.  The  glass 
measure  provided  with  these  batteries  is  marked  to  indicate  the 
quantity  for  one  galvanic  cell.  THiis  is  an  important  item, 
because  the  current  obtained  from  any  series  of  cells  is  pro- 
portioned to  that  cell  which  has  the  smallest  area  of  zinc 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


197 


immersed  in  fluid.  The  cell  sections  for  the  galvanic  part  of 
this  battery  are  like  the  one  shown  in  Fig.  30,  and  the  descrip- 
tion given  of  it  applies  equally  to  those  in  Fig.  57.  The 
hard  rubber  forming  the  cells  is  not  acted  upon  by  the  fluid, 
and  the  method  of  fastening  the  bases  over  them  prevents 
spilling  when  the  battery  is  carried  upright ;  therefore  the  fluid 
is  left  in  the  cells  until  exhausted. 


Fig.  57. 


MCINTOSH  TWENTY-FOUR-CELL  COMBINED  GALVANIC  AND  FARADIC 
BATTERY  WITH  BASES  REMOVED. 

When  the -fluid  is  renewed,  all  sediment,  crystals,  etc., 
should  be  first  removed  from  the  cells  and  drip-cup;  warm 
water  will  dissolve  the  chrome  alum  deposited  as  a  result  of 
the  chemical  action  within  the  fluid,  and  if  necessary  the  cells 
should  be  allowed  to  soak  for  several  hours,  as  these  deposits 


198 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


interfere  with  the  perfect  working  of  the  instrument.  There 
is  danger  of  breaking  the  cells  if  force  is  used  to  break  up  and 
remove  the  debris. 

If  the  drainage  into  the  drip-cups  is  sufficient  to  envelop 
the  ends  of  the  elements  in  fluid  before  the  fluid  in  the  cells  is 
exhausted,  it  may  be  drawn  out  with  a  syringe,  or  the  entire 
section  emptied  and  the  cells  refilled. 

The  electrode  case  is  made  of  hard  rubber,  impervious  to 
moisture  or  acid  fumes,  and  fastened  by  a  reliable  spring.  When 
the  cover  of  the  battery-box  is  closed,  this  electrode  case  fills 
the  space  between  the  galvanic  and  faradic  portions.  When  the 
batter}^  top  is  raised,  this  space  permits  the  galvanic  bases  to  be 
removed  to  the  right  to  immerse  their  elements  in  fluid. 


A  Fig.  58.  B 

Size  of  A  :   Length,  6%  in. ;  width,  2%  Size  of  B :  Length  of  base,  7  in, ;  width, 

in. ;  height,  4  in.  Sin. ;  elements,  3i  by  li  in. 


No.  58  represents  the  faradic  portion  of  the  Mcintosh 
combined  batteries.  A  is  the  cell  section,  made  of  hard  rub- 
ber, which  resists  the  action  of  acids  as  well  as  glass,  and  is 
less  brittle.  It  is  divided  into  two  compartments  by  a  partition, 
the  larger  portion,  C,  being  the  cell  to  contain  the  fluid,  and 
the  smaller,  D,  the  drip-cup,  to  receive  the  elements  when 
the  battery  is  not  in  use. 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


199 


B  is  a  black,  hard-rabber  base,  upon  which  the  coil,  the 
binding  posts  and  vibrator  are  fastened. 

The  elements  are  carbon  and  zinc,  which  are  fastened  to 
metal  bridges  by  screws,  the  bridges  being  fastened  to  the 
base  by  screws  E  E.  The  wire  connections  between  the  ele- 
ments and  coil,  as  well  as  those  between  the  coil  and  binding 
posts,  lie  underneath  and  next  to  the  hard-rubber  base.  They 
are  thoroughly  insulated,  coated  with  impervious  cement,  and 
still  further  protected  by  a  sheet  of  soft  rubber  immovably 
fastened  to  the  under  surface  of  the  base.  This  soft  rubber 
serves  a  double  purpose.  It  not  only  covers  the  connecting 
wires  but  serves  as  a  hydrostat^  as  it  overreaches  the  edges  of 
the  cell  section,  and  when  the  battery  is  closed  a  post  in  the 
top  of  cover  rests  on  the  spring  O,  and  firmly  presses  tlie  soft 
rubber  down  upon  the  cell  so  that  the  fluid  cannot  escape. 

THE    FARADIC    PORTION    OF    THE    COMBINED  BATTERIES. 

To  prepare  for  use.  Lift 
the  base  by  the  handle  P 
and  reverse  it.  This  im- 
merses the  elements  in  the 
battery  fluid.  The  cut 
shows  the  base  reversed 
and  cords  attached  for  ap- 
plying the  secondary  far- 
adic  current.  The  rheotome 
spring  should  commence  to  vibrate  (known  by  its  buzzing  sound) 
as  soon  as  the  elements  touch  the  fluid.  If  it  does  not,  lightly 
tap  the  hammer  to  start  the  vibration. 

To  obtain  the  primary  current.  Insert  the  tips  of  conducting 
cords  in  posts  N  and  P,  on  either  side  of  "Prim." 

To  obtain  the  secondary  current.  Insert  the  cord  tips  in 
posts  N  and  P,  on  either  side  of  "Sec."  Both  currents  are 
made  stronger  by  drawing  out  the  shield  S  from  the  coil. 


200 


COMBINED  BAITERIES. 


To  apply  the  current.  Wet  the  sponge  discs  D  D  in  warm 
water  and  apply  directly  to  the  uncovered  skin,  locating  them 
according  to  directions  in  following  pages,  remembering  that 
caution  must  be  exercised  in  applying  the  current  to  the  finger 
tips,  edges  of  bones,  over  nerves,  etc.,  to  avoid  an  unpleasant 
shock  to  the  patient.  The  operator  can  handle  any  sponge  or 
metal  electrode  freely  without  receiving  the  current,  if  all  contact 
of  the  hand  with  the  patient  or  other  electrode  is  avoided.  Be- 
ginners are  reminded  that  the  current  cannot  pass  through  either 
the  patient  or  operator  unless  included  in  the  circuity  and  to  he 
included  in  the  circuit  it  is  essential  that  there  he  two  points 
(entrance  and  exit)  connected  directly  with  the  hattery.  Always 

REVERSE  THE  BASE  BETWEEN  TREATMENTS,  AND  AS  SOON  AS  THE 
BATTERY  IS  NO  LONGER  NEEDED. 

(a)  To  connect  galvanic  cells  with  thefaradic  coil.  The  long 
coiled  wire  springs  sent  out  with  the  battery  are  used  for  this 
purpose.  One  spring  connects  A  with  post  P  1  of  the  galvanic 
base  (after  inserting  the  elements  in  fluid),  the  other  connects 
B  with  post  2,  3,  4,  etc.,  according  as  two,  three,  four  or  more 
cells  are  to  be  included  in  the  circuit. 

The  addition  of  galvanic  cells  to  the  faradic  circuit  is 
required  seldom,  if  at  all,  when  the  faradic  elements  and 
fluid  are  in  good  order.  The  only  instance  where  it  might 
possibly  be  demanded  would  be  in  restoring  animation  in  des- 
perate cases,  such  as  drowning,  chloroform  or  narcotic  poisoning. 
If,  however,  the  faradic  fluid  becomes  unexpectedly  exhausted, 
and  it  becomes  necessary  to  use  this  current  before  the  fluid 
can  be  renewed,  three  or  four  galvanic  cells  may  be  substi- 
tuted for  the  faradic  by  proceeding  as  described.  The  destruc- 
tion of  the  faradic  elements  may  necessitate  the  same  procedure. 

(b)  To  connect  the  last  cells  of  any  galvanic  section  with 
the  faradic.  If  it  desired  ta  use  up  the  elements  uniformly, 
those  galvanic  cells  which  are  not  required  for  galvanic  pur- 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


201 


poses  may  be  utilized  by  placing  the  section  of  which  they 
form  a  part  adjacent  to  the  faradic  section,  and  connecting  the 
cells  to  be  used  as  already  described.  A  must  always  be 
joined  to  that  post  nearest  P  (on  the  galvanic  base)  ;  it  forms 
the  positive  element  of  the  circuit.  For  example,  suppose  the 
last  three  cells  on  base  1,  Fig.  60,  are  to  be  joined  in  faradic 
circuit ;  the  coiled  wire  spring  from  A  is  inserted  in  post  3, 
and  3  is  regarded  as  positive  ;  the  spring  from  B  is  inserted 
in  6,  which  is  now  negative. 

To  iise  other  forms  of  electrodes.  All  electrodes  manufac- 
tured by  the  Mcintosh  Galvanic  and  Faradic  Battery  Co.  that 
are  not  attached  directly  to  the  conducting  cords  will  tit  the 
wooden  handles  shown  above  after  unscrewing  and  removing  the 
sponge  discs  D  D. 


Fig.  60. 

McINTOSH  TWENTY-FOUR-CELL  COMBINED  GALVANIC  AND  FARADIC  BAT- 
TERY.—THE  GALVANIC  PORTION  READY  FOR  USE. 
0  represents  the  faradic  base  with  elements  in  drip-cup.  1,  the  first  galvanic  section 
of  six  cells.  2,  the  second.  3,  the  third.   4,  the  fourth.  N  marks  the  negative  poles.  P, 
the  positive  poles. 

To  v^se  one  section.  Lift  the  first  base  by  its  handle,  1  ; 
remove  to  the  right  and  immerse  the  elements  in  the  cells  ; 
the  base  overlaps  the  space  for  the  electrode  case  and  leaves 


202 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


space  on  its  left  for  the  overlapping  portion  of  base  2  when 
moved  forward.  The  instant  the  elements  enter  the  fluid  the 
current  starts. 

The  galvanic  current  is  silent  and  can  he  detected  only  hy 
its  effects. 

(a)  To  use  one  cell,  insert  one  cord-tip  in  post  1  P,  and 
another  in  post  1'.    P  1  is  the  positive  pole,  1'  the  negative. 

(b)  To  use  three  cells,  remove  the  tip  from  1'  to  3  ;  the 
latter  is  now  negative. 

(c)  To  use  six  cells,  remove  the  tip  from  3  to  6  ;  the  latter 
is  now  negative. 

To  add  cells  without  interrupting  the  current.  Use  the  bifur- 
cated cord  for  the  negative,  leaving  one  end  next  the  battery 
free.  When  more  cells  are  wanted  insert  the  free  tip  in  the 
required  number,  and  then  remove  the  tip  of  the  other  branch  of 
the  bifurcation. 

To  iise  two  sections.  Immerse  the  elements  on  base  2  in 
fluid  by  moying  to  the  right,  and  slide  its  movable  bar  into  the 
slot  in  6  N  on  base  1. 

(d)  To  use  seven  cells.  Leaving  the  first  cord  attached  to 
post  1  P,  as  before,  insert  the  tip  of  the  other  in  T  on  base  2  ; 
7'  is  now  the  negative  pole. 

(e)  To  use  twelve  cells,  remove  the  cord-tip  from  T  to  12  N. 
To  use  three  sections.    Move  base  3  forward  and  press  its 

movable  bar  into  the  slot  in  post  N  on  base  2. 

(f)  To  use  13  cells.  Leaving  the  first  cord  attached  to 
post  1  P,  insert  the  second  in  13'. 

To  v^e  four  sections.  Move  base  4  forward,  and  connect 
with  base  3  by  means  of  the  movable  bar. 

(g)  To  use  19  cells.  Connect  the  last  cord  with  19',  which 
becomes  the  negative  pole  of  the  circuit. 

(h)  To  use  24  cells.  Remove  cord  from  19  to  24,  and 
the  latter  becomes  negative. 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


203 


Polarity  ofhase  1.  Post  P  1  is  always  positive,  and  each  of 
the  other  posts  becomes  negative  in  relation  to  it  when  joined  in 
circuit.  If,  however,  one  cord  is  at  2  or  3,  etc.,  and  the  other  at 
4,  5  or  6,  the  one  nearest  P  1  is  positive,  the  one  nearest  N 
negative. 

Polarity  of  hase  2.  The  same  as  base  1,  w^hen  it  is  used 
singly,  7  P  being  the  positive  end  and  12  the  negative  in  relation 
to  it. 

Polarity  of  hase  3.  Similar  to  bases  1  and  2,  13  being 
positive  and  18  negative. 

Polarity  of  hase  ^.    Positive  pole   19  and  negative  24. 
When  the  bases  are  joined  together,  the  polarity  of  each ' 
separate  base  varies  as  follows  :  / 

Polarity  of  hases  1  and  2  united.  When  the  first  cord  is  at 
Pi,  or  any  other  post  on  base  1,  each  post  of  base  2  becomes 
negative  when  it  terminates  the  circuit. 

Polarity  of  hases  i,  '2  and  3  united.  With  first  cord  as  in 
last,  each  post  of  both  2  and  3  will  become  negative  when 
attached  to  the  second  cord. 

Polarity  of  all  united.  When  any  number  of  cells  are  united 
in  circuit,  that  cord  on  P  1,  base  1,  or  the  one  nearest  it,  marks 
the  positive  battery  pole,  and  all  the  rest  are  negative  in  rela- 
tion to  it. 

TO  REPLACE  THE  ELEMENTS. 

Loosen  the  binding  post  by  the  fingers, 
the  same  as  an  ordinary  thumbscrew,  and 
detach  the  metal  bridge  holding  the  ele- 
ments to  be  replaced.  They  are  removed 
from  the  bridge  by  a  screwdriver,  and  the 
new  ones  are  fastened  in  their  places  as 
before.  Zincs  need  to  be  replaced  as  soon 
as  they  become  consumed,  so  that  their 
length  in  the  fluid  is  considerably  less  than 
the  carbon.  Carbons,  if  cleansed  with  warm 


204 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


water  each  time  the  cells  are  replenished,  may  be  used  for 
years,  unless  accidentally  broken. 

An  apparatus  designed  to  be  stationary  should  have  numerous 
accessories  which  cannot  be  attached  to  an  instrument  whose 
first  requisite  is  portability. 


Fig.  62. 

THE  McINTOSH  OFFICE  BATTERY. 


The  Table  Plate  shown  in  Fig.  62  is  put  up  in  a  large 
variety  of  cases,  presenting  more  or  less  elaborate  cabinet-work, 
according  to  the  taste  and  means  of  the  purchaser.  It  is 
suitable  for  a  cabinet,  office  table,  book-case,  desk,  or  may  be 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


205 


Fig.  63. 


DIAGRAM  OF  OFFICE  TabLE-PLATE. 

Size,  12X'16  inches. 


206 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


simply  furnished  as  a  stand  in  a  case  like  that  shown  in  the 
cut.  The  metal  work  is  nickel-plated,  and  the  contrast  between 
the  highly-polished  rubber  base  and  the  nickel  makes  an  orna- 
mental piece  of  work  worthy  of  a  place  in  the  most  elegantly 
furnished  office. 

Gravity  cells  are  commonly  used  with  this  apparatus,  since 
they  require  very  little  attention,  and  do  not  need  new  fluid 
oftener  than  once  or  twice  a  year.  These  cells  may  be  placed  in 
a  cellar,  closet  or  cupboard  when  there  is  no  place  for  them  in 
the  office.  An  enlarged  diagram  of  this  table-plate  is  shown  in 
flgure  63. 

To  connect  the  gravity  cells  with  the  plate.  Buttons  1  to  36  terminate 
below  the  base  in  a  screw  upon  which  plays  a  nut,  to  which  the  wires  from 
the  zinc  elements  of  the  gravity  cells  are  fastened.  The  galvanic  switch 
revolves  on  the  post  marked  1,  in  the  center  of  the  circle.  The  wire  from 
the  copper  element  in  the  first  cell  is  connected  with  post  inside  circle. 
(As  will  be  seen  by  reference  to  Fig.  22,  the  copper  element  of  the  first  cell 
only  is  connected  with  the  switch-board  ;  each  of  the  other  copper  elements 
is  connected  with  the  zinc  element  of  the  adjacent  cell,  while  each  zinc 
element  is  connected  directly  with  a  corresponding  button  on  the  switch- 
board). The  wire  from  the  zinc  element  of  the  first  cell  is  fastened  to  but- 
ton 1  in  the  galvanic  circle.  The  wire  from  the  zinc  element  of  the  second 
cell  is  fastened  to  button  No.  2,  and  so  on,  until  the  entire  thirty-six  cells 
are  joined  in  series. 

Direction  for  operating.  To  obtain  a  galvanic  current.  Turn  all  the 
switches  upon  the  buttons  marked  off. 

Turn  the  galvanic  switch  on  the  button  marked  with  the  number  of 
cells  wanted  in  circuit.  Turn  the  current-indicator  on  button  G.  Insert 
the  conducting  cords  in  binding  posts  1  and' 2,  and  apply  the  current  as 
from  an  ordinary  battery. 

The  direction  of  the  current.  When  the  pointer  of  the  pole-changer 
points  to  button  1,  binding  post  No.  1  is  positive  and  No.  2  negative;  when 
it  is  turned  upon  button  2,  binding  post  No.  2  becomes  positive,  and  No.  1 
negative.   This  applies  alike  to  both  currents. 

To  increase  the  strength  of  the  current.  Suppose  the  galvanic  switch  is  at 
first  moved  upon  button  4,  then  four  cells  are  included  in  circuit;  moving 


COMBINED  BATTERIES, 


207 


the  switch  forward  upon  buttons  5,  6,  7,  etc.,  includes  5,  6,  7  cells  respec- 
tively in  the  circuit ;  therefore,  to  increase  the  strength  of  the  current,  move 
the  switch  forward  over  the  button  marked  with  the  number  of  cells 
required. 

To  use  the  galvanometer.  Turn  the  galvanic  switch  on  the  button  marked 
with  the  number  of  cells  to  be  tested.  Turn  galvanometer  switch  on. 
Place  the  plug  in  the  socket  H  to  complete  the  circuit  through  the  galvano- 
meter. Let  all  the  switches  be  in  the  same  position  as  described  for 
obtaining  the  galvanic  current.  The  needle  will  be  deflected  if  any  current 
is  passing  through  the  circuit.  The  deflection  of  the  needle  will  be 
increased  up  to  a  certain  angle  (see  page  120)  by  each  additional  cell 
included  in  the  circuit ;  beyond  that  no  increase  is  possible,  but  each  cell 
added  after  the  maximum  deflection  is  reached  should  keep  the  needle  at 
this  point ;  if  the  deflection  is  decreased  at  any  button  in  the  remainder  of 
the  circle,  it  will  be  found  that  the  connection  between  that  button  and  its 
cell  is  imperfect  or  broken,  or  that  the  cell  is  out  of  order.  For  example^ 
suppose  that  the  maximum  deflection  is  reached  when  ten  cells  are  brought 
into  circuit ;  moving  the  switch  on  buttons  11,  12,  13  retains  the  needle  at 
this  point,  but  button  14  lessens  the  deflection ;  it  will  be  found  that  either 
the  connection  of  the  fourteenth  cell  with  the  table-plate  is  at  fault,  or  from 
leakage,  evaporation  of  water,  mixing  of  the  fluids,  or  corrosion  of  ele- 
ments, no  current  is  generated  in  the  cell. 

The  galvanometer  should  be  set  in  the  table-plate  so  that  the  needle 
may  point  to  the  north  and  0,  when  at  rest. 

Turn  off  the  galvanometer  switch  and  remove  plug  from  H  as  soon  as  the 
current  is  tested,  otherwise  the  current  will  pass  directly  through  the  metal 
circuit  completed  by  the  plug,  and  none  can  be  obtained  from  the  binding 
posts. 

To  use  the  current-breaker.  Arrange  the  switch  and  indicator  as  described 
for  the  galvanic  current,  and  in  addition  turn  the  current-breaker  switch 
on.   This  is  operated  the  same  as  the  automatic  rheotome.  Fig.  32. 

The  rheostat.  This  is  composed  of  twenty-flve  small  coils,  each  of 
which  offer  a  resistance  of  100  ohms.  The  buttons  attached  to  these  coils 
are  numbered  from  1  to  25,  the  ciphers  being  omitted  for  want  of  room. 

The  rheostat  is  introduced  into  the  circuit  by  simply  moving  its  switch 
upon  the  button  corresponding  with  the  number  of  ohms  resistance  wanted. 
If  the  switch  is  upon  button  4,  and  the  rheostat  is  included  in  the  circuit 
traversed  by  the  current,  the  latter  must  overcome  400  ohms  resistance  in 


208 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


addition  to  the  ordinary  resistance  of  the  circuit.  If  the  switch  is  placed 
on  button  25,  the  resistance  is  2,500  ohms. 

The  use  of  this  rheostat.  It  is  useful  in  central  galvanization,  in  treat- 
ment of  the  eyes  and  ears,  and  in  very  nervous  subjects.  It  may  also  be 
used  in  faradization.  A  mild  current,  such  as  is  suitable  for  many  purposes, 
does  not  possess  sufficient  energy  to  overcome  the  resistance  of  the  body, 
but  a  current  of  sufficiently  great  electro-motive  force  to  overcome  the 
2,500  ohms  resistance  in  the  circuit,  can  easily  penetrate  the  body,  while 
in  penetrating  through  such  a  resistance  it  loses  that  quality  which  causes 
a  shock,  or  painful  sensation,  when  the  circuit  is  opened  or  closed. 

The  rheostat  is  also  essential  in  keeping  the  cells  in  good  working  order 
when  used  but  little. 

To  keep  the  cells  in  order  when  little  used.  To  preserve  the  difference  in 
density  between  the  strata  of  fluid  in  the  cells,  they  should  be  run  an  hour 
or  two  daily,  and  since  a  short  circuit  with  little  resistance  permits  a  speedy 
restoration  of  electric  level  (potential),  it  is  essential  to  interpose  resistance 
in  the  circuit  to  preserve  the  difierence  in  potential,  upon  which  the  work- 
ing power  of  the  cells  depends ;  therefore,  turn  the  galvanic  switch  upon 
button  36,  the  current  indicator  upon  G,  and  the  rheostat  switch  on  button 
25.    Let  all  the  other  switches  be  turned  off. 

To  use  the  faradic  current.  Turn  all  the  switches  off,  then  turn  the  gal- 
vanic switch  upon  button  3  or  4  (not  more  than  four  cells  are  needed  to  run 
the  coil).  Turn  the  faradic  switch  on;  also  turn  the  current  indicator  upon 
P  for  the  primary  or  S  for  the  secondary  current.  If  the  rheotome  spring 
does  not  at  once  begin  to  vibrate,  tap  it  lightly  against  the  coil.  The  cur- 
rents are  regulated  by  the  shield. 

The  polarity  of  the  current  is  indicated  by  the  pole  changer. 

To  preserve  this  apparatus  in  good  working  order,  it  is  important  that 
all  the  switches  be  turned  off*  when  it  is  not  in  actual  use,  except  when  run 
through  the  resistance  coil,  as  already  described. 

The  switch-board  shown  in  illustration  64  is  designed  for  those  who 
employ  stationary  cells,  but  do  not  want  so  elaborate  or  expensive  an  office 
apparatus  as  the  one  shown  in  Fig.  62.  The  base  and  cover  of  the  coil  are 
made  of  polished  black  rubber,  and  the  metal  parts  are  nickel-plated. 

The  galvanic  circle  may  be  made  to  include  any  number  of  cells. 

The  faradic  coil  is  constructed  like  those  on  the  portable  batteries. 

The  polarity  of  current  is  changed  by  the  double  switch  on  the  front  of 
the  base ,  uncovering  button  P  makes  the  binding  post  to  the  right  positive ; 
covering  button  P  makes  binding  post  to  the  left  positive. 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


209 


Thefaradic  current  is  sent  through  the  binding  posts  when  the  switch 
t)eside  the  coil  is  moved  on;  the  primary  or  secondary  current  may  be 
selected  by  moving  the  switch  to  the  left  on  P  or  S. 


Fig.  64. 

MCINTOSH  COMBINED  SWITCH-BOARD. 
Size,  10  X  12  inches. 


SUGGESTIONS  IN  REGARD  TO  SELECTING  A  BATTERY. 

The  physician  who  is  about  to  begin  the  use  of  electricity 
in  his  practice  is  frequently  at  a  loss  to  know  what  kind  of 
an  instrument  to  select ;  therefore  it  may  not  be  out  of  place 
to  offer  some  suggestions  dictated  by  experience,  as  an  aid  in 
making  a  selection. 

The  first  thing  to  be  considered  is  the  purpose  for  which 
an  electrical  apparatus  is  required.  If  it  is  designed  merely 
to  meet  the  popular  demand  for  electrical  treatment,  and  the 
purchaser  has  neither  the  time  nor  inclination  to  master  the 
principles  underlying  electro-therapeutics,  a  good  faradic  bat- 
tery should  be  selected.  The  sound  and  sensation  it  produces 
impresses  the  patient  with  the  idea  that  something  is  being 
done,  while  there  is  little  danger  of  doing  harm  with  it  in  any 
reasonable  application,  as  painful  muscular  contractions  speedily 
warn  the  operator  when  the  current  is  too  severe. 

Those  practitioners  who  are  convinced  that  we  have  in  elec- 
tricity a  valuable  remedial  agent,  and  desire  to  apply  it 


210 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


scientifically,  either  generally  or  specially,  should  take  into 
consideration  the  class  of  disease  to  be  treated  and  the  kind 
of  electricity  they  wish  to  employ.  Any  extended  use  of  this 
agent  will  call  for  apparatus  to  produce  at  least  the  galvanic 
and  faradic  currents ;  while  those  who  wish  to  use  electricity 
according  to  every  effective  method  will  find  it  necessary  to 
be  provided  with  the  static  as  well  as  the  above-mentioned 
apparatus.  The  magneto-electric  battery  for  generating  the 
magnetic  current  is  but  little  used  at  present,  owing  to  the  uneven 
quality  of  the  current,  which  produces  pain  greatly  out  of  pro- 
portion to  the  muscular  contraction. 

The  surgeon  will  need  a  galvanic  battery  for  electrolysis, 
and  a  galvano-cautery  battery  for  operations  in  which  cauteri- 
zation is  essential. 

Those  who  are  unacquainted  with  the  distinctive  character- 
istics of  the  instruments  required  for  the  production  of  different 
forms  of  electricity  may  be  saved  from  some  disappointment 
by  observing  that : 

1.  All  faradic  batteries  produce  a  buzzing  noise,  and  mus- 
cular contractions,  which  in  very  sensitive  subjects  are  always 
accompanied  by  pain  or  unpleasant  sensations.  In  ordinary 
patients  the  sensation  is  not  considered  painful  unless  the  cur- 
rent is  very  strong. 

2.  All  galvanic  batteries  are  silent,  and  produce  no  muscu- 
lar contractions,  except  at  the  instant  the  current  is  closed  or 
opened. 

The  current  from  a  large  number  of  cells  produces  a  distinctly 
burning  or  smarting  sensation,  or  in  some  cases  a  tremor,  while 
flowing  uninterruptedly  through  the  circuit.  The  current  from 
a  few  cells  may  produce  no  sensation  whatever,  under  the  same 
circumstances ;  therefore  the  sensations  of  the  patient  cannot  he 
relied  upon  to  determine  whether  a  current  is  actually  passing 
through  the  circuit. 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


211 


3.  No  single  battery  can  give  both  a  galvanic  and  faradic 
current  that  is  efficient.  A  faradic  current,  it  will  be  noticed 
by  reference  to  preceding  pages,  is  produced  by  passing  a 
current  from  one  or  more  galvanic  cells  through  a  faradic  coil. 
A  very  few  cells  will  produce  as  strong  induced  currents  as 
the  wire  in  a  given  coil  is  capable  of  carrying,  and  adding 
more  cells  does  not  increase  the  current  proportionately ;  while 
so  much  force  may  be  applied  as  to  fuse  the  platinum  points 
of  the  vibrator,  or  to  compel  the  currents  to  overcome  the 
resistance  interposed  by  the  insulating  covering  between  the 
layers  of  wire,  and  make  short  circuits  within  the  coil,  thereby 
lessening  or  destroying  the  currents  that  should  pass  through 
the  connecting  wires  and  electrodes.  A  galvanic  current,  on  the 
contrary,  has  its  electro-motive  force  (propelling  force)  greatly 
increased  by  increasing  the  number  of  cells  in  circuit,  provided 
they  are  united  in  series  (the  zinc  of  one  cell  with  the  carbon 
of  the  adjacent  one).  As  the  power  of  overcoming  resistance 
depends  upon  the  electro-motive  force,  it  is  evident  that  the 
number  of  cells  in  the  circuit  must  be  in  proportion  to  the 
resistance  to  be  overcome.  As  we  have  already  stated,  the 
size  of  cells  is  of  little  importance  as  regards  the  strength  of 
current  from  a  freshly-charged  series.  If,  however,  chemical 
or  heating  effects  are  required  as  for  galvano-cautery,  the  size 
of  the  elements  is  an  important  factor,  and  the  larger  the 
amount  of  element  surface  (within  a  certain  limit)  immersed  in 
fluid,  provided  they  are  connected  in  multiple  arc,  the  greater 
the  cautery  power. 

4.  The  term,  combined  galvanic  and  faradic,  as  applied  to 
certain  apparatus  herein  described,  is  not  intended  to  imply  that 
there  is  any  combination  of  the  two  currents.  It  simply  means 
that  each  battery  contains  the  necessary  combinations  for  produc- 
ing two  distinct  forms  of  electricity.  When  the  faradic  current 
is  in  use,  that  portion  of  the  instrument  which  generates  the 


212 


COMBINED  BATTEEIES. 


galvanic  current  is  not  in  action,  and  vice  versa.  The  only 
exception  to  this  is  in  case  it  is  necessary  to  apply  a  galvanic 
current  to  one  patient  and  a  faradic  current  to  another  at  the 
same  time,  when  the  two  portions  of  the  battery  may  be 
employed  precisely  the  same  as  if  they  were  two  separate 
batteries.  The  only  object  in  combining  two  instruments  in  one 
case  is  merely  for  convenience.  The  combined  instruments 
weigh  less  than  two  separate  batteries  that  furnish  currents  of 
equal  power. 

5.  The  static  machine  should  not  be  relied  upon  to  furnish 
all  the  electricity  required  in  practice,  because  it  is  too  fragile 
to  be  portable.  It  is,  however,  an  excellent  adjunct  to  an  office 
outfit  and  is  especially  valuable  in  nervous  diseases.  One  excel- 
lent point  in  its  favor  is  that  there  is  no  necessity  of  disrobing 
the  patient  or  even  disarranging  the  clothing.  It  furnishes 
electricity  of  immense  potential  (power  of  overcoming  resist- 
ance). 

6.  Galvano-cautery  instruments,  as  before  stated,  are  suitable 
for  no  other  purpose  than  for  cauterization. 

7.  The  qualities  required  in  both  galvanic  and  faradic  instru- 
ments are :  high  and  constant  electro-motive  force ;  small 
internal  resistance  ;  a  constant  current  free  from  polarization, 
not  liable  to  rapid  exhaustion,  and  consequently  requiring 
frequent  renewal  of  battery  fluid.  There  should  be  no  local 
action  when  the  circuit  is  open,  and  no  corrosive  fumes  at  any 
time  ;  they  should  be  easily  managed ;  they  should  be  durable 
and  not  too  expensive. 

No  battery  has  yet  been  invented  that  possesses  all  these 
qualities  in  the  highest  attainable  degree ;  therefore  it  becomes 
necessary  to  choose  an  instrument  which  combines  those  most 
essential  for  the  purposes  for  which  it  is  to  be  employed. 

For  office  practice^  where  a  battery  is  needed  frequently  and 
portability  is  no  object,  a  constant  current  from  cells  that  reauire 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


213 


little  attention  is  to  be  preferred.  There  is  gain  in  steadiness  of 
current  at  the  expense  of  loss  of  electro-motive  force,  which  may 
he  compensated  for  by  using  a  larger  number  of  cells.  Those 
which  require  little  attention  are  necessarily  bulky.  For  general 
practice  small  cells  are  essential  to  portability,  although  they 
require  frequent  renewal  of  fluid,  for  the  number  of  cells  must  be 
limited  and  the  small  number  that  can  be  carried,  to  be  effective, 
must  have  great  electro-motive  force.  Since  the  latter  is  in  direct 
proportion  to  the  amount  of  zinc  used  up,  batteries  of  great 
electro-motive  force  and  working  capacity  need  new  zincs  much 
oftener  than  those  in  which  chemical  action  is  slight  and  the 
xesulting  currents  comparatively  feeble. 

TO  DISCOVER  THE  CAUSE  WHEN  A  BATTERY  FAILS  TO  WORK. 

The  passage  of  a  current  through  the  circuit  from  a  faradic 
battery  is  made  known  by  sound  made  by  the  vibrator,  but 
the  galvanic  hattery^  being  noiseless,  requires  other  tests,  which 
are  given  on  page  116.  The  cause  of  failure  in  either  battery 
may  be  (1)  that  no  current  is  generated-;  (2)  that  the  connec- 
tions are  imperfect.  The  former  may  be  due  to  the  fact  that 
the  fluid  is  exhausted  or  the  zinc  element  destroyed,  so  that 
it  does  not  extend  below  the  surface  of  the  fluid,  and  fresh 
:fluid  or  a  new  zinc  must  be  supplied.  Deposits  of  chrome 
alum  crystals  in  the  cell  may  interfere  with  the  passage  of  the 
current ;  they  should  be  dissolved  in  warm  water,  and  never 
broken  up  forcibly,  as  the  cells  are  liable  to  be  cracked  or 
broken  in  the  process.  TJte  elements  may  become  incrusted 
with  salts,  and  thereby  interfere  with  the  generation  or  con- 
duction of  the  current ;  they  may  also  be  cleaned  by  soaking 
in  warm  water.  Copper  and  zinc  may  be  scraped,  but  carbon  is 
brittle  and  must  be  handled  with  care.  In  case  there  is  a 
current  generated,  while  none  passes  through  the  circuit,  the 
fault  may  be  in  the  hinding  posts^  the  cords^  the  electrodes^  or 


214 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


in  the  faradic  battery,  the  adjustment  of  the  rheotmne.  The 
sockets  in  the  hinding  posts  may  have  become  corroded  (this 
can  only  occur  through  carelessness  in  spilling  acid  upon  them) 
or  partially  filled  with  dirt,  so  as  to  prevent  close  contact  with 
the  conducting  cord ;  in  either  case  they  must  be  cleaned. 
The  conducting  cords  may  be  broken.  To  determine  if  this 
has  occurred,  a  galvanometer  may  be  included  in  the  circuit,  when 
a  galvanic  or  primary  faradic  current  is  being  tested.  Two 
iron  or  copper  wires  may  be  used  to  connect  the  galvanometer 
with  the  battery  ;  if  the  needle  is  deflected,  it  shows  that  a 
current  is  present ;  substitute  first  one  cord  and  then  the  other 
for  one  wire  ;  the  broken  cord  will  prevent  any  deflection  of 
the  needle.  The  secondary  faradic  current  does,  not  affect  the 
galvanometer,  therefore  it  must  be  tested  by  its  effect  on  sen- 
sation. A  faradic  current  can  be  distinctly  felt  by  placing  one 
finger  on  the  positive  and  another  on  the  negative  binding 
post ;  or  connect  one  cord  with  either  post,  hold  its  free  tip, 
and  at  the  same  time  touch  the  other  post.  If  the  cord  is 
broken,  no  current  will  be  felt. 

The  electrodes  are  at  fault  when  a  current  passes  through 
the  cords  but  none  through  the  circuit.  There  may  be  imper- 
fect junction  of  conducting-cord  tips  with  electrode,  or  the 
surface  of  the  electrode  in  contact  with  the  patient  may  be 
covered  with  non-conducting  material,  such  as  dry  sponge  or 
cloth,  in  which  case  the  covering  must  be  moistened.  The 
rheotome  of  the  faradic  battery  may  need  attention.  The  direc- 
tions for  adjusting  the  spring  will  be  found  under  Fig.  47. 
The  platinum  points  may  be  covered  with  rust,  which  must  be 
scraped  off  with  a  knife  or  emery  paper ;  the  presence  of  rust, 
when  it  does  not  arrest  the  current  altogether,  makes  it  uneven 
and  harsh.  In  addition  to  the  causes  already  given,  the  rheo- 
tome spring  may  become  too  weak  and  need  replacing  ;  the 
coil  or  platinum  points  may  be  damaged  by  connecting  too 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


215 


many  cells  in  circuit,  or  the  battery  connections  be  broken. 
The  latter  can  only  occur  as  a  result  of  violent  usage,  such 
as  falls,  etc.  If  the  spring,  coil  or  connections  need  repairs, 
the  instrument  must  be  sent  to  the  maker ;  when  this  becomes 
necessary,  always  see  tftat  the  cells  are  empty  hefore  shipping. 

APHORISMS  FOR  THE  APPLICATION  OF  DYNAMIC  ELECTRICITY. 

1.  Both  galvanism  and  faradism  require  that  there  should 
"be  two  separate  points  of  the  body  connected  with  the  battery, 
one  with  the  negative  and  one  with  the  positive  pole. 

2.  The  conductors  must  be  in  direct  contact  with  the  skin 
or  other  tissues  to  be  treated  ;  dynamic  currents  cannot  pass 
through  the  clothing. 

3.  Electricity  given  in  such  a  way  as  to  frighten,  excite  or 
hurt  a  patient  does  more  harm  than  good. 

4.  A  current  so  strong,  or  applied  so  long,  as  to  produce 
soreness  of  muscles,  cramps,  or  great  fatigue,  does  more  harm 
than  good. 

5.  The  operator  should  try  the  various  currents  by  finger 
tips,  face  or  tongue,  until  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  sensa- 
tions normally  produced,  and  then  make  great  allowance  for  the 
nervous  fears  of  the  patient^  especially  if  the  latter  is  not 
familiar  with  electrical  treatment. 

6.  Too  weak  a  current  can  never  do  harm,  but  too  strong 
a  current  is  capable  of  producing  irreparable  mischief  A  little 
experience  will  soon  enable  the  operator  to  strike  the  golden 
mean. 

7.  Every  precaution  should  be  taken  against  exposing  a 
patient  to  drafts  or  chills  during  a  sitting.  If  any  part  of  the 
clothing  must  be  removed,  an  extra  wrap  should  be  thrown 
over,  and  the  treatment  be  carried  on  under  cover.  The  operator 
should  scrupulously  avoid  using  sponges  moistened  in  cold 


216 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


water,  or  applying  a  cold  metal  conductor  to  the  bare  feet  or 
other  part  of  the  body. 

8.  Galvanic  and  primary  faradic  currents  have  a  definite 
direction,  that  is  from  positive  to  negative  points  in  the  circuit, 
and  the  location  of  electrodes  must  be  determined  by  the  effect 
to  be  produced.  The  secondary  faradic  current  moves  in  both 
directions. 

ELECTRODES. 

Faraday  named  the  points  at  which  electricity  enters  and 
leaves  a  substance,  electrodes  ^'  the  same  term  is  now  applied 
to  the  conductors  through  which  electricity  is  conveyed  to  and 
from  the  body  in  medical  treatment.  The  effect  produced  by 
the  current  depends,  to  some  extent,  upon  the  electrodes,  and 
may  be  modified  by  the  material  of  which  they  are  made, 
their  shape^  their  size^  and  their  location.  Electrodes  are 
usually  made  of  brass,  carbon,  sponge ;  steel,  silver,  gold, 
platinum,  and  some  other  materials,  are  occasionally  employed. 
The  size  and  shape  must  be  adapted  to  the  purpose  for  which 
they  are  to  be  used.  To  treat  single  nerves,  or  muscles,  and 
to  localize  a  current,  requires  at  least  one  small  electrode, 
shaped  so  that  it  may  be  accurately  applied.  Large  electrodes 
give  a  greater  surface  of  contact,  therefore  there  are  more 
paths  for  electricity  to  traverse  ;  consequently  the  current 
branches  are  less  crowded  together  (less  dense),  and  produce 
less  effect  on  the  cutaneous  nerves  of  sensation  ;  for  this  reason 
a  much  stronger  current  can  be  borne  when  applied  through 
large  electrodes  evenly  pressed  on  the  surface.  When  a  very 
sensitive  patient  is  to  receive  treatment  for  the  first  time,  or 
one  in  whom  an  ill  effect  is  feared,  it  may  be  advisable  for 
the  operator  to  apply  a  very  mild  current,  using  the  hand  as 
one  electrode.  To  do  this  it  is  necessary  to  connect  one  large 
electrode  with  some  part  of  the  patient  which  has  little  sensitive- 
ness, while  the  operator  holds  the  other  electrode  in  one  hand, 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


217 


and  applies  the  free  hand  to  the  surface  of  the  patient.  There 
are  certain  advantages  arising  from  this  procedure  ;  the  hand  can 
be  better  adapted  to  all  the  inequalities  of  the  surface  than 
any  instrument ;  the  arms  and  hands  of  the  operator  thus 
interposed  in  the  circuit  act  the  part  of  a  rheostat  in 
modifying  the  current,  and  it  is  possible  to  judge  of  the  strength 
of  the  current  passing  through  the  circuit.  The  disadvantages 
which  will  readily  occur  to  any  physician  are  so  many,  that  it 
is  advisable  to  reserve  this  method  for  exceptional  cases.  It 
is  highly  recommended  by  some  authors,  who  state  that  it 
produces  no  injurious  effect  upon  the  operator,  even  when 
practiced  for  many  hours  daily.  Patients  are  quite  apt  to  be 
curious  in  regard  to  this  point,  and  it  is  not  easy  to  explain 
why  electricity  is  expected  to  materially  benefit  them,  and  at 
the  same  time  produce  absolutely  no  effect  on  the  operator, 
through  whom  it  is  first  carried.  It  may  be  true  that  with  a 
battery  of  feeble  power  no  marked  effect  is  produced,  but  it 
is  a  different  affair  when  the  energetic  zinc  and  carbon  bat- 
tery is  in  question.  Electrodes  in  such  variety  are  now  pro- 
vided, that  it  is  no  longer  necessary  to  use  the  hand  at  all. 
The  location  of  electrodes  exerts  an  important  influence  upon 
the  effect  of  the  current ;  placed  very  near  together,  elec- 
tricity is  concentrated,  and  produces  a  much  greater  effect 
upon  the  tissues  between  the  electrodes  than  when  the  latter 
are  far  apart,  since  in  this  case  the  current  branches  diverge, 
taking  the  paths  of  least  resistance.  As  a  rule,  the  electrodes 
are  placed  far  apart  in  general,  and  near  together  in  localized 
electrization. 

Electrode  covers.  Large  sponges  are  extensively  employed 
for  general  electrodes  ;  when  moist,  they  are  excellent  conduc- 
tors, can  be  readily  adapted  to  different  parts  of  the  surface, 
and  produce  the  effect  of  a  rheostat  in  modifying  the  current. 

It  is  surprising  to  note  how  extremely  regardless  of  cleanli- 


218 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


ness  even  fastidious  practitioners  become  when  electrodes  are 
in  question.  It  is  exceedingly  rare  to  find  one  who  provides 
a  fresh  sponge  or  a  clean  cover  for  each  patient,  and  yet  its 
importance  will  be  readily  admitted.  Sponge  very  quickly  be- 
comes foul,  it  is  capable  of  conveying  contagious  material,  it 
is  difficult  to  dry,  and  soon  corrodes  the  surface  to  which  it 
is  fastened,  impairs  conduction  of  current,  and  when  packed 
with  other  instruments  causes  them  to  rust.  Manufacturers 
supply  sponge-covered  electrodes  because  such  are  demanded 
by  the  profession  ;  but  the  latter  would  never  consent  to  have 
applied  to  their  own  persons  the  filthy  sponges  reeking  in  the 
accumulations  of  perspiration  and  other  excretions  derived  from 
the  mucous  and  cutaneous  surfaces  of  many  individuals,  the 
clean  and  dirty  alike,  which  some^  at  least,  do  not  scruple  to 
apply  to  their  patients.  For  a  universal  electrode,  the  one 
provided  with  a  carbon  disc  is  incomparably  superior  to  those 
of  ordinary  metal,  sponge-covered. 

If  metal  is  preferred,  one  like  Fig.  86  is  convenient,  as  the 
sponge,  or  cover,  can  be  fastened  on  or  removed  in  an  instant, 
and  each  patient  be  provided  with  a  separate  one. 

To  purify  sponge  Electrodes.  It  is  said  that  sponges 
that  liave  been  soaked  in  pus  and  infectious  materials  may 
be  not  only  perfectly  purified,  but  even  the  marine  odor 
may  be  restored,  by  the  following  process  :  Soak  them  in  a 
four  per  cent  solution  permanganate  of  potash,  then  in  twenty- 
five  per  cent  solution  sulphurous  acid,  finally  wash  in  abun- 
dance of  water.* 

A  bag  made  of  waterproof  material  is  useful  for  carrying 
sponge,  and  with  an  adjustable  handle,  and  due  attention  to 
cleansing  and  disinfection,  most  of  the  objections  to  sponge 
may  be  overcome.  Its  numerous  excellent  qualities  for  electrical 
purposes  make  it  almost  indispensable.    When  it  is  impossible 

*  Anerican  Journal  of  Pharmacy,  Vol.  xliv,  p.  335. 


COMBINED  BATTERIES. 


219 


to  provide  a  siiflBcient  supply  of  sponges,  or  to  keep  them  in 
good  order,  thin  flannel  covers  should  be  substituted  for  them. 
They  may  be  bound  with  elastic  tape  or  rubber  bands,  can 
then  be  slipped  over  a  sponge  or  metal  electrode,  and  are  self- 
retaining. 

The  flannel  should  be  wet  when  used.  The  current  does 
not  pass  quite  so  readily  through  this  as  through  sponge  alone, 
but  if  the  battery  supplies  a  current  of  suflicient  electro-motive 
force  to  penetrate  deeply  into  the  tissues,  it  can  overcome  the 
resistance  of  the  covers  sufficiently  for  all  practical  purposes. 
The  covers  are  inexpensive,  may  be  laundried,  and  serve 
repeatedly. 

The  various  styles  of  electrodes  will  be  described  in  con- 
nection with  the  diseases  in  which  they  are  employed. 


CHAPTER  YIII. 


ELECTRO-THERMAL  BATHS. 

The  application  of  franklinism  as  an  electric  bath  has  been 
described  on  page  76.  Dynamic  electricity  is  applied  in  con- 
junction with  water,  vapor  or  hot  air,  under  the  general  name  of 
electro-thermal  baths. 

Galvanism  has  been  applied  through  the  bath  with  the  idea 
of  extracting  certain  metals  from  the  body,  and  also  to  introduce 
medicinal  substances  into  it,  but  there  is  no  well-established 
proof  that  either  can  be  done.  The  bath  is  advantageously 
employed  when  general  applications  of  either  the  galvanic 
or  faradic  current  are  to  be  made. 

Yolta,  Humboldt,  Kitter,  Weber,  Lentz,  etc.,  experimented 
to  determine  the  comparative  resistance  offered  by  the  skin. 
Weber  asserts  that  a  thin,  moist  and  cold  epidermis  opposes  a 
greater  resistance  than  the  rest  of  the  body,  but  a  dry  epidermis 
offers  fifty  times  greater.  Owing  to  this,  when  conductors  are 
in  contact  with  the  skin,  the  galvanic  current  does  not  spread  over 
its  surface,  but,  penetrating  it,  flows  inside  the  body  to  some 
other  part  of  the  epidermis.  Eesistance  is  greatly  diminished 
by  long  soaking  in  water,  or  when  the  capillaries  are  filled  with 
blood.  Lenz  and  Da  Bois-Reymond  found  that  resistance  of  the 
body  is  nearly  inversely  to  the  extent  of  wet  skin  in  contact 
with  the  electrodes.  The  eftect  depends  to  some  extent  upon  the 
temperature  of  the  water  ;  to  the  effect  produced  by  an  ordinary 
bath  at  a  given  temperature  is  added  that  which  result::  irom  the 
electric  current.  It  is  believed  that  there  is  less  liability  to  take 
cold  than  when  an  electric  current  is  not  employed^  and  greater 

(220) 


ELEOTKO-THERMAL  BATHS. 


221 


tolerance  of  electricity  when  given  through  the  bath  than  when 
a  general  application  is  made  without  the  bath. 

Tepid  laths  are  those  from  85°  to  95°  F.  Their  effect, 
independent  of  the  current,  is  confined  to  the  peripheral 
extremities  of  the  nerves  ;  they  produce  a  sensation  of  either 
heat  or  cold,  according  to  the  temperature  of  the  body  at 
the  time  of  immersion.  They  are  not  followed  by  reaction, 
and  may  be  continued  longer  than  any  other  variety  of 
bath.  They  cleanse  the  skin,  promote  perspiration,  and  allay 
thirst.  If  there  is  a  tendency  to  apoplexy,  cold  water  should  be 
applied  to  the  head  while  the  patient  is  in  the  bath.  The  effect 
of  electricity  will  vary  according  to  the  kind  of  current  that  is 
employed,  the  direction  of  the  current,  and  its  strength.  These 
should  be  determined  by  the  same  rules  that  guide  us  in  ordinary 
electrizations.  It  is  important  that  caution  should  be  exercised 
in  applying  the  galvanic  current  in  the  bath,  since  it  produces 
very  slight  sensation,  and  there  is  a  temptation  to  join  too  many 
cells  in  circuit.  Six  to  twelve  zinc-carbon,  or  possibly  eighteen 
gravity  cells  may  be  well  borne,  but  the  effect  of  galvanism  upon 
the  patient  should  be  observed  before  employing  the  largest 
number  of  cells  named. 

The  vMrm  hath  has  a  temperature  of  96  °  to  104  °  ;  this  causes 
a  sensation  of  warmth,  or  coolness,  according  to  the  condition  of 
the  skin  on  entering  the  bath.  It  increases  the  circulation  and 
perspiration,  and  quickens  the  respiration.  It  produces  relaxa- 
tion of  muscles,  languor  and  a  tendency  to  sleep.  It  is  emjDloyed 
to  assist  in  the  reduction  of  dislocations  of  the  larger  joints,  and 
hernige.  It  is  used  with  the  greatest  advantage  in  the  passage  of 
calculi,  whether  urinary  or  biliary :  it  relaxes  the  ducts,  and 
thereby  alleviates  the  pain,  and  facilitates  the  passage  of  the 
concretion.  In  inflammations  of  the  stomach,  kidneys,  bowels, 
bladder,  it  has  proven  a  valuable  and  powerful  agent  ;  eruptive 
diseases,  such  as  scarlet  fever,  measles,  etc.,  when  the  eruption 


222 


ELECTRO-THERMAL  BATHS. 


lias  receded  from  the  surface ;  in  chronic  skin  diseases,  rheuma- 
tism, amenorrhea  and  dysmenorrhea,  it  is  highly  serviceable. 

Ths  hot  hath  has  a  temperature  of  102°  to  110  °.  This  causes 
a  sensation  of  heat,  renders  the  pulse  stronger  and  fuller, 
quickens  respiration,  produces  at  first  intense  redness  of  the 
skin,  resulting  later  in  profuse  perspiration  ;  it  occasions  violent 
throbbing  and  fullness  of  the  head,  with  frequently  a  feeling  of 
suffocation  and  anxiety  ;  being  a  powerful  excitant,  it  must  be 
used  with  caution.  It  is  employed  principally  in  paralysis, 
rheumatism,  and  some  other  chronic  diseases  ;  it  is  also  em- 
ployed in  collapse,  and  has  proven  valuable  in  this  stage  of 
cholera. 

Very  hot  laths  comprise  everything  above  110  °  ;  over  120  ° 
they  are  scalding.  A  bath  from  119  °  to  126  °  causes  a  rise  of 
2  °  to  4|-  °  in  the  temperature  of  the  blood,  and  can  be  borne  but 
a  few  minutes.  It  produces  violent  reflex  action  on  the  heart 
and  arterial  system,  great  congestion  of  the  skin,  followed  by 
excessive  perspiration. 

Objections  to  the  electric  hath.  Numerous  objections  have 
been  made  to  this  method  of  applying  electricity,  on  the  ground 
that  it  is  depressing  in  its  effect,  produces  chilliness,  has  been 
known  to  precipitate  attacks  of  apoplexy,  heart  affections,  faint- 
ing, and  even  death.  There  are  persons  who  cannot  take  an 
ordinary  bath  without  great  depression  or  chilliness  following  it. 
Electric  baths  are  contra-indicated  in  these  cases. 

In  regard  to  the  accidents  referred  to,  electric  baths  can  never 
cause  them  if  administered  with  ordinary  prudence  unless  the 
patient  is  in  such  a  condition  that  the  attack  is  inevitable.  It  is 
scarcely  necessary  to  add  that  such  patients  should  never  be  per- 
mitted to  take  an  electric  bath. 

These  baths  should  not  be  taken  immediately  after  eating ; 
they  may  be  repeated  from  one  to  three  times  weekly.  They 
should  not  be  given  when  strictly  local  treatment  is  required. 


ELECTROTHERMAL  BATHS. 


223 


When  a  feeling  of  languor  or  debility  follows  for  some  hours, 
it  is  an  indicatior  that  too  powerful  a  current  was  employed,  that 
it  was  continued  too  long,  or  that  it  is  not  adapted  to  the  case. 
Electric  baths  of  suitable  strength,  and  administered  with  judg- 
ment, will  not  disagree  except  with  patients  who  cannot  tolerate 
immersioii  in  a  simple  water  bath. 

METHOD  OF  EMPLOYING  THE  ELECTRIC  BATH. 

The  tub  shown  in  Fig.  66  should  be  filled  a  few  inches  above 
the  stationary  electrodes  with  water  of  the  temperature  required. 
This  should  always  be  determined  by  the  thermometer.  The 
patient,  after  removing  the  clothing,  wraps  up  in  a  dry  sheet  and 
steps  into  the  tub  hefore  the  circuit  is  closed.  (The  sheet  is 
retained  around  the  patient  until  the  bath  is  over.)  An  oil  silk 
or  rubber  cap,  made  in  the  form  of  a  "  sweeping  cap,"  should  be 
snugly  drawn  over  the  hair  to  protect  it  from  moisture,  and  the 
rack  raised  high  enough  to  keep  the  head  out  of  the  water.  The 
galvanic  or  faradic  circuit  is  completed  and  the  switches  on  the 
apparatus  are  arranged  to  send  the  current  through  the  parts  to 
be  treated. 

The  bath,  as  a  rule,  should  not  continue  longer  than  fifteen  to 
twenty  minutes,  unless  tepid  water  is  employed,  and  even  in 
that  case  electricity  should  not  be  applied  longer  than  the  time 
named,  with  rare  exceptions.  The  patient  may  step  out  of  the 
bath  upon  a  rug  or  carpet  (never  upon  oilcloth  or  the  bare  floor) 
and  be  quickly  dried.  The  towels  should  be  dry  and  warm  when 
used;  and  usually  after  the  bath,  if  its  temperature  has  been  above 
that  of  tepid  water,  it  is  advisable  to  cool  the  surface  by  shower- 
ing with  water  that  is  at  first  warm  and  gradually  cooled  down 
to  about  90°,  or  a  little  lower  in  cold  weather,  for  two  or  three 
minutes,  after  which  the  patient  exercises  the  muscles  in  drying 
the  surface,  so  as  to  cause  a  reaction  and  prevent  chilliness. 
This  measure  is  not  of  so  much  importance  after  a  faradic  as 


224: 


ELECTRO-THEEMAL  BATHS. 


after  a  galvanic  bath.  A  delay  of  twenty  to  thirty  minutes 
before  going  into  the  open  air  is  desirable.  The  therapeutical 
effects  of  these  two  baths  differ ;  one  should  not  be  substituted 
for  the  other.  The  reader  is  referred  to  the  article  on  differential 
diagnosis  for  suggestions  in  regard  to  selection  of  current. 


Fig.  65. 

Mcintosh  office  and  bath  apparatus  no.  i. 

Horizontal  base,  15  X  lOK  inches.  Upright  base,  18}^  X 15  inches. 


Fig.  65  represents  an  attractive  and  valuable  apparatus  de- 
signed for  office  practice,  and  also  including  the  necessary 
attachments  for  the  electric  bath.    The  switches,  binding  posts 


ELECTRO-THERMAL  BATHS. 


225 


and  all  metal  parts  are  heavily  nickel-plated,  and  mounted  on 
highly-polished  black  rubber,  which  not  only  affords  an  effective 
contrast,  but  enhances  the  durability  of  the  apparatus.  It  fur- 
nishes a  galvanic  current  from  any  number  of  cells  required. 
The  faradic  coil  is  constructed  on  an  original  plan,  by  means 
of  which  currents  are  produced  possessing  much  greater  quan- 
tity than  ordinary  induction  currents;  they  are  consequently 
smoother  and  at  the  same  time  more  efficient.  They  can  be 
graduated  so  as  to  be  suitable  for  the  most  delicate  organ  and 
sensitive  patient,  or  increased  to  a  strength  which  enables  them 
to  overcome  an  enormous  resistance  in  the  external  circuit. 
Faradic  coils  of  usual  size  are  not  sufficiently  powerful  for  all 
the  requirements  of  the  bath. 

DESCRIPTION  OF  FlG.  65. 

The  horizontal  base  has  arranged  upon  it  the  large  faradic  coil,  rheo- 
tome  and  two  pairs  of  binding  posts.  The  faradic  coil  is  operated  by  the 
tray  cell,  Fig.  23. 

The  upright  hose.  The  circle  of  buttons  in  the  center,  numbered  from 
1  to  60,  are  connected  with  sixty  gravity  cells,  and  are  used  only  to 
supply  a  galvanic  current.  (These  may  be  arranged  for  a  greater  or  less 
number  of  cells.) 

The  switch  in  the  center  is  represented  turned  on  button  O,  between  60 
and  1,  which  has  no  connection  with  the  cells.  It  is  called  the  galvanic 
switch. 

The  switch  above,  marked  B,  is  called  the  battery  switch ;  it  is  turned 
"on"  when  the  faradic  current  is  used,  and  at  no  other  time. 

The  switches  marked  H,  S,  C,  B,  H,  K,  on  the  left,  are  connected  with 
the  stationary  electrodes  in  the  left  side  of  the  bath-tub  (see  Fig.  66)  by 
insulated  copper  wires ;  these  wires  may  be  of  any  length,  so  that  the  tub 
can  be  placed  in  a  room  distant  from  the  apparatus. 

Switches  F,  S,  C,  etc.,  on  the  right  are  connected  with  the  stationary 
electrodes  in  the  right  side  of  the  tub. 

Switch  H,  at  the  upper  left-hand  corner,  when  turned  on  button  Q, 
sends  a  galvanic  current  through  the  binding  posts  on  the  horizontal  base ; 
when  turned  on  P,  a  primary  faradic  current,  and  on  S  a  secondary  faradic 
current  is  sent  through  the  binding  posts. 

Switch  T,  at  the  upper  right-hand  corner,  when  turned  on  G,  sends  a 
galvanic  current  through  the  tub;  when  turned  on  P,  a  primary  and  on 
S  a  secondary  faradic  current  through  the  tub. 


226 


ELECTROTHERMAL  BATHS. 


Fig  67. 

COMBINED  OFFICE  AND  BATH  APPARATUS  NO.  2. 
Base,  11 X 14K  inches.  Front,  16  X 143^  inches. 


This  apparatus  is  constructed  on  the  same  principle  as  No.  1,  but  on  a 
less  expensive  plan.  The  coil  is  inclosed  in  a  triangular  wooden  case,  the 
front  of  which  is  composed  of  polished  black  rubber.  The  switches,  bind- 
ing posts  and  rheotome  are  nickel-plated  and  arranged  on  the  sloping 
front.  Any  number  of  galvanic  cells  may  be  used  with  it ;  the  tray  cell  is 
connected  with  the  coil.  The  apparatus  is  manipulated  in  the  manner 
described  under  Fig.  65. 

THE  BATH-TUB. 


The  bath-tub  for  electrical  purposes  must  be  made  of  some 
non-conducting  material,  such  as  wood,  soapstone,  porcelain, 
vulcanized  rubber  or  glass.    When  economy  must  be  consulted, 


ELECTRO-THERMAL  BATHS. 


227 


wood  or  rubber-cloth  tubs  may  be  selected.  The  latter  are 
neither  very  durable  or  convenient  (since  no  permanent  connec- 
tion with  water  or  drain  pipes  can  be  made),  therefore  wooden 
tubs  are  to  be  preferred.  The  inside  must  be  kept  well  painted, 
otherwise  the  wood  will  become  water-soaked,  and  in  consequence 
a  good  conductor  of  electricity.  The  size  of  the  tub  shown  in 
the  illustration  is  sufficient  for  almost  any  patient.  The  rack  is 
fastened  to  the  tub,  at  its  lower  edge,  by  hinges,  which  permit  it 
to  be  raised  to  accommodate  a  patient  of  short  stature  ;  hooks 
attached  to  it  (not  shown  in  cut)  fasten  it  to  the  sides  of  the  tub 
at  any  angle  required.  The  electrodes  at  the  head  and  foot 
cannot  be  seen  ;  they  are  of  the  same  material  as  those  in  the 
sides  of  the  tub,  which  are  of  carbon  or  nickel-plated  brass. 


Fig.  66. 


Inside  measurements : 

Length,  6  feet  2  inches  at  the  top;  4  feet  2  inches  at  the  bottom. 
Width,  22  inches  at  the  top;  19  inches  at  the  bottom. 
Depth,  17  inches, 

R,  rack ;  H,  electrode  fastened  to  head  of  the  tub;  F  F,  electrode  fastened  to  foot  of  the 
tub ;  S  S,  shoulder  electrode,  so  called  because  when  one  is  connected  with  the  positive  and 
the  other  with  the  negative  pole  of  the  apparatus,  a  current  passes  through  the  shoulders ; 
C  C,  chest  electrodes;  B  B,  back  electrodes ;  H  H,  hip  electrodes;  K  K,  knee  electrodes. 

These  are  connected  by  insulated  copper  wires  with  buttons  on  the 
table  plate  or  switch-board,  marked  with  the  same  letters,  so  that,  with  the 
tub  in  one  room  and  the  switch-board  in  another,  the  operator  can  manipu- 
late the  switches  and  send  a  current  through  any  part  of  the  patient  in  the 
tub. 


228 


ELECTEOTHEEMAL  BATHS. 


This  beautiful  and  elaborate  apparatus  is  especially  designed 
for  hospitals,  health  institutions  and  medical-bath  establishments, 
where  many  patients  are  treated.  It  may  be  connected  with  one 
bath-tub  and  one  cabinet-bath,  in  separate  rooms,  and  while  sup- 


FlG.68 

McINTOSH  COMBINED  OFFICE  AND  BATH  APPARATUS. 
Size  of  horizontal  base,  18X  20  in.  Size  of  upright  base,  18X  20  in. 


plying  a  current  to  them,  can  at  the  same  time  be  employed  in 
treating  two  patients  in  the  operating  room.  The  metal  work 
is  all  heavily  nickel-plated,  and  mounted  on  polished  black 
rubber,  which  presents  a  pleasing  'contrast,  in  addition  to  the 


ELECTRO-THERMAL  BATHS. 


229 


perfect  insulation  secured  by  the  use  of  the  rubber,  and  the 
durability  of  the  metal  parts,  protected  as  they  are  by  the 
nickel-plate,  which  is  not  easily  tarnished  or  corroded. 

It  is  constructed  on  a  plan  similar  to  No.  1,  but  has  sev- 
eral accessories  not  found  on  any  other  electrical  apparatus. 

The  galvanic  current  is  supplied  from  any  number  of  gravity 
cells  that  may  be  required.  The  faradic  current  for  the  bath  is 
supplied  by  the  large  coil  connected  with  a  tray  cell.  The 
small  coil  to  be  used  either  for  office  electrization  or  the  cabi- 
net bath,  is  connected  either  with  the  tray  cell  or  the  requisite 
number  of  gravity  cells,  according  to  the  arrangement  of  the 
switches  J  J. 

The  greatest  number  of  currents  that  possess  distinct  thera- 
peutical effects  ever  obtained  from  any  single  apparatus  is  sup- 
plied by  the  one  illustrated  in  Fig.  68.  Those  interested  in 
learning  further  particulars  in  regard  to  it  ai'e  referred  to 
the  manufacturers. 

VAPOR  AND  HOT-AIR  ELECTRIC  BATHS. 

The  application  of  electricity  in  conjunction  with  vapor  of 
water  or  dry  air  possesses  certain  therapeutical  advantages 
over  other  forms  of  electrization  that  are  not  at  present  fully 
appreciated  by  the  profession  at  large.  Patients  in  whom  im- 
mersion in  water  produces  great  depression  or  alarming  symp- 
toms can  be  submitted  to  the  vapor  or  hot-air  electric  bath, 
when  the  head  is  not  exposed  to  heat,  not  only  without  any 
disagreeable  effects,  but  with  positive  benefit  in  diseases  which 
it  would  be  exceedingly  rash  to  treat  with  the  electric  water 
bath.  Hot  air,  at  a  temperature  of  90°  to  100°  F.  produces 
perspiration,  and  is  adapted  to  chronic  rheumatism,  stiffness  of 
joints  and  chronic  skin  diseases  ;  at  a  temperature  of  from  100° 
to  130°  it  is  stimulating,  and  promotes  perspiration  ;  it  is  a 
powerful  remedial  agent  in  all  acute  cases  where,  from  any 


230 


ELECTROTHERMAL  BATHS. 


cause,  the  blood  has  receded  from  the  superficial  parts  of  the 
body  and  the  internal  organs  are  in  a,  state  of  congestion. 
Patients  suffering  from  the  preliminary  symptoms  of  delirium 
tremens  have  been  preserved  from  an  attack  by  several  of 
these  hot-air  electric  baths  given  in  quick  succession.  The  vapor 
of  water  cannot  be  borne  so  long  as  hot  air,  or  at  so  high  a 
degree  of  temperature,  because  vapor,  being  a  bad  conductor  of 
heat,  prevents  radiation  from  the  body  ;  106°  to  110°  is  usually 
the  limit.  Yapor  electric  baths  are  more  relaxing  and  soothing 
than  hot  air.  They  soften  the  cutaneous  tissues,  fill  the  capil- 
laries, and  bring  about  that  very  condition  which  favors 
conduction  of  electricity.  They  are  adapted  to  dry,  scaly 
skin  eruptions,  old  paralytic  cases  without  signs  of  vas- 
cular excitement  of  the  brain  ;  chlorosis,  amenorrhea,  irritable 
uterus ;  dropsy  of  aged,  debilitated  subjects ;  old  liver 
complaints,  and  some  scrofulous  affections.  The  advantages 
to  be  derived  from  the  vapor  and  hot-air  electric  baths 
were  formerly  out  of  the  reach  of  the  ordinary  practitioner, 
because  they  were  supposed  to  require  an  establishment  fitted 
up  especially  for  the  purpose,  which  involved  too  great  an  out- 
lay to  be  feasible,  except  in  the  larger  cities. 

THE  CABINET  BATH. 

The  Cabinet  Bath,  constructed  for  the  purpose  of  combining 
the  application  of  hot  vapor  or  air  with  any  form  of  electrization 
enables  the  practitioner,  in  the  most  sparsely  settled  localities, 
to  avail  himself,  at  a  trifling  expense,  of  all  the  remedial  advan- 
tages to  be  obtained  in  the  most  expensive  bath  establishments. 

The  apparatus,  described  below,  is  simple,  convenient,  occu- 
pies but  a  limited  space,  and  can  be  used  in  offices  where  it  is 
not  possible  to  furnish  the  conveniences  for  the  water  bath.  It 
is  not  even  essential  that  a  dressing-room  be  provided,  and  the 
supply  of  water  may  be  very  limited  ;  with  the  hot-air  bath 


ELECTROTHERMAL  BATHS. 


231 


two  quarts  of  water  per  patient  will  suffice  for  all  necessary 
cleansing  ;  vapor  will  require  in  all  nearly  a  gallon.  Any  style 
of  portable  or  stationary  electrical  apparatus  may  be  employed 
to  supply  electricity. 


Fig.  69. 
CABINET  BATH. 
Length,  3^  feet.    Width,  2%  feet.  ^^^^ 
Height,  4  feet. 


The  apparatus  in  Fig.  69  is  shown  with  the  cover 
raised  and  the  front  removed. 

BB.  Folding  and  sliding  cover. 

S.  Depression  for  holding  switch-board  and 
electrodes. 

E.  Revolving  stool. 

Z.  Zinc,  lining  the  bottom  of  the  cabinet. 

00.  Openings  through  which  the  operator  can 
manipulate  the  electrodes. 

LL.  Flexible  electrode  connections,  to  which 
spring  electrodes  are  attached. 

G.  Wire  which  connects  the  switch-board  with 
the  zinc  when  the  latter  is  used  for  a  foot-plate. 

F.  Wire  connecting  switch-board  with  stool. 

C.  Steam  coil. 

N.  The  pipe  where  steam  enters  the  coil. 
V.  Valve  to  admit  steam  or  vapor  into  the  cabi- 
net. 

D.  Drain  pipe. 

T.  Marks  the  location  of  the  thermometer, 
which  fits  in  a  groove  in  the  box,  permitting  the 
temperature  to  be  observed  without  opening  the 


A.  The  opening  for  the  patient's  neck. 

The  heat  is  supplied  by  steam  from  a  tin  or  copper  vessel 
heated  by  a  coal-oil  or  gasoline  stove  which  sets  outside  the 
bath.  A  tin  pipe  or  rubber  hose  connects  the  vessel  with  the 
coil  within  the  cabinet.  There  is  no  possibility  of  explosion 
or  accident  within  the  bath,  because  the  steam  coil  opens  out- 
side at  the  lower  end  to  permit  escape  of  the'  condensed 
steam,  and  the  heater  is  also  outside.  Steam  is  admitted  from 
valve  Y  in  a  downward  direction  to  prevent  its  striking  the 
patient  seated  on  the  stool.  After  the  water  begins  to  boil, 
it  requires  from  fifteen  to  twenty  minutes  to  raise  the  tem- 
perature to  130°  with  a  small  coal-oil  heater. 


232 


ELECTRO-THERMAL  BATHS. 


To  give  a  hot-air  electric  hath.  If  there  is  no  dressing- 
room,  let  the  patient  disrobe  in  the  cabinet,  first  folding  and 
sliding  B  B  out  of  the  way,  closing  the  door  and  spreading  a 
sheet  or  blanket  from  the  raised  top,  over  the  cabinet  to  con- 
ceal the  patient ;  remove  the  clothing  from  the  bath ;  let  the 
patient  be  seated  on  the  stool  adjusted  at  such  a  height  as  to 
permit  the  patient's  neck  to  come  within  the  space  A ;  unfold 
B  B  and  slide  it  along  its  groove  to  close  the  bath ;  the  space 
around  the  neck  must  be  covered  with  a  towel  loosely  laid 
about  it.  General  electrization  is  accomplished  by  making 
Z  a  foot-plate,  while  the  operator  reaching  through  O  O  at 
the  back  of  the  patient,  or  a  similar  opening  in  the  door  at 
the  side,  carries  the  electrode  over  the  surface  in  the  same 
manner  as  when  treating  the  patient  without  the  bath.  If 
electricity  is  to  be  localized,  electrodes  L  L  are  adjusted  to  the 
parts  to  be  treated  (the  springs  hold  them  in  place),  and  the 
current  is  sent  through  them  from  switch-board  S,  to  which 
the  apparatus  supplying  electricity  is  joined  by  conducting 
cords.  If  perspiration  is  not  started  within  ten  minutes  (the 
temperature  should  be  from  90°  to  100°  when  the  patient 
enters  the  bath),  turn  Y  and  let  in  a  little  steam  to  moisten 
the  patient  slightly,  then  close  it ;  this  usually  causes  profuse 
perspiration  immediately.  Should  the  patient  appear  faint,  or 
complain  of  headache,  moisten  the  forehead  with  cold  water 
from  time  to  time,  and  permit  cold  water  to  be  drank  freely  ; 
at  the  end  of  twenty  or  thirty  minutes,  shut  olf  the  heat  and 
rinse  off  the  patient,  still  within  the  cabinet,  with  warm  or  cool 
water,  as  the  judgment  of  the  operator  may  dictate.  A  com- 
mon sprinkling-pot  may  be  employed  for  this  purpose,  if 
nothing  better  is  at  hand.  The  room  in  which  the  bath  is 
given  should  be  well  ventilated.  Steam  electric  baths  are  given  in 
the  same  manner.  After  the  patient  is  thoroughly  dried,  the 
clothing  may  be  replaced  before  leaving  the  cabinet  in  case 


ELECTRO-THERMAL  BATHS. 


233 


the  air  in  the  room  is  not  sufficiently  warm  to  prevent  a  chill 
in  passing  from  the  bath  to  dressing-room. 

ELECTRIC  CHAIRS. 

Electric  chairs  are  intended  to  be  used  in  applying  elec- 
tricity in  office  practice.  The  one  illustrated  in  Fig.  70  is  manu- 
factured by  the  Mcintosh  Galvanic  and  Faradic  Battery  Co.,  and 
is  an  ornamental  piece  of  apparatus  worthy  of  a  place  in  the 
most  elegantly-appointed  office.  Any  form  of  current  electricity 
may  be  applied  through  it.  The  physician  who  is  provided  with 
a  good  portable  battery  can  attach  it  to  the  chair,  and  thus  pro- 
vide himself,  at  a  comparatively  small  outlay,  with  an  office 
outfit  that  will  compare  favorably  in  convenience  and  attractive- 
ness with  the  most  elaborate  and  expensive  apparatus  in  the 
market.  As  represented  here,  this  chair  is  designed  for  office 
purposes.  The  same  company  also  manufacture  a  cabinet  bath 
after  a  much  more  elaborate  design  than  shown  in  Fig.  69,  of 
which  the  chair  forms  a  part ;  the  connections  are  so  arranged 
that  the  chair  may  be  taken  out  of  the  cabinet  to  be  employed  in 
the  office,  and  replaced  in  the  cabinet  in  a  few  moments,  ready 
for  the  bath. 

R.  Two  rods  extending  the  length  of  the  chair- 
back,  upon  which  moves  a  sliding  bar. 

E  E.  Sponge-covered  electrodes  fastened  upon  a 
metal  crosspiece  upon  which  they  may  be  moved  near 
together  or  apart.  The  crosspiece  is  fastened  to  the 
sliding  bar  by  a  pivot,  about  which  it  revolves  so 
that  the  electrodes  may  be  horizontal,  as  shown  in 
cut,  perpendicular,  or  at  any  angle ;  one  electrode 
may  be  removed  and  the  other  turned  in  any  posi- 
tion required. 

P  P.  Pulleys  which  carry  a  chain  C. 

C.  The  chain  which  raises  or  lowers  the  sliding 
bar  on  the  rods  R. 

D.  The  switch-board  on  the  ,back  of  the  chair, 
also  shown  in  Fig.  71. 

N.  Neck  electrode  adjusted  on  a  metal  rod  by 
means  of  a  thumbscrew.  It  may  be  turned  in  any 
direction,  raised,  lowered,  or  removed  altogether. 

F  F.  Flexible  insulated  metallic  conductors  at- 
tached to  the  arms  of  the  chair.  They  terminate 
in  sponge-covered  electrodes  in  the  illustration,  but  Fig.  70. 

any  .style  of  electrode  may  be  attached.  These  conductors  are  of  sufficient  length  to  reach 
any  part  of  the  patient  sitting  in  the  chair.  They  may  be  removed  entirely. 


234 


ELECTRO-THERMAL  BATHS. 


A  A.  Binding  posts  to  which  the  conductors  are  fastened. 

H  H.  Metallic  plates  fastened  on  the  end  of  the  chair-arms,  upon  which  the  patient's 
hands  rest  when  a  current  is  to  be  sent  through  them. 
S.  Metal  plate,  or  seat  electrode. 

K  K.  Binding  posts  to  which  are  fastened  the  cords  connecting  the  footstool  T  with 
the  chair. 

B  B,  Binding  posts  on  the  footstool  T. 
M.  Metal  foot  plates  attached  to  T. 

The  circular  switch-board  in  the  center  is  made  of  pol- 
ished rubber,  and  all  the  metallic  attachments  to  the  chair 
are  nickel  plated. 

The  two  binding  posts  on  the  lower  part  of  the  switch- 
board are  connected  with  the  cells  or  battery,  which  furnish 
the  current.  The  polarity  of  the  buttons  depends  upon  the 
method  of  connecting  the  battery ;  if  the  positive  pole  be 
joined  to  the  binding  post  on  the  right,  the  semi-circle  of 
buttons  on  the  right  will  be  positive;  if  the  negative  be 
joined  to  this  binding  post,  the  buttons  on  the  right  will  be 
negative.  In  either  case  the  buttons  on  the  left  will  have 
opposite  polarity. 

D  K,  switches  or  current  directors.  They  also  serve  as 
pole  changers. 

Off,  the  buttons  upon  which  the  switches  are  turned  to 
open  the  circuit. 

N,  neck  ;  B,  back  •  A,  arm  ;  H,  hand ;  S,  seat ;  F,  foot. 
L  and  R,  prefixed,  respectively  indicate  the  left  and 
right  side. 

The  direction  of  the  current  passing  through  the  patient  will  depend  upon  the 
position  of  the  switches. 

The  row  of  binding  posts  across  the  top  are  lettered  to  correspond  with  the  buttons 
on  the  switch-board.  They  are  only  used  when  the  chair  is  employed  in  the  cabinet. 
Connecting  wires  from  a  switch-board  outside  the  cabinet,  similar  to  the  one  here  shown, 
are  joined  to  this  row  of  binding  posts  on  the  chair  so  that  the  operator  can,  from  the  out- 
side, apply  the  current  accurately  to  the  different  parts  of  the  patient  inside  the  cabinet. 

C,  the  thumbscrew  which  fastens  the  rod  carrying  the  neck  electrode  at  any  height. 

D,  wheel  which  turns  the  chain  that  moves  electrodes  E  E  in  Fig.  70.  It  prevents  the 
jhain  from  rolling  over  the  pulleys  except  when  necessary. 

The  wires  which  extend  from  the  switch-board  to  the  sides  of  the  chair-back  form  the 
connections  through  which  electricity  is  conveyed  to  the  electrodes. 

The  therapeutical  effect  of  a  current  carried  to  a  patient  through  an  apparatus  of  this 
kind  produces  no  other  effect  than  that  direct  from  the  cells  or  battery  which  furnish  the 
current,  except  that  which  may  be  produced  through  the  imagination;  but  the  con- 
venience with  which  the  electrodes  may  be  manipulated  and  the  current  directed, 
together  with  the  ornamental  character  of  the  apparatus,  commend  it  to  many  practi- 
tioners. 


Fig.  71. 

BACK  OP  CHAIR. 


CHAPTER  TX. 


ELECTEO-PHYSIOLOGY. 

It  is  an  extremely  difficult  matter  for  the  beginner  in 
electro-therapeutics  to  decide  in  a  given  case  which  form  of 
electricity  to  select.  Authors,  who  in  other  respects  are  very 
explicit,  have  ignored  this  subject  to  such  an  extent  that  com- 
paratively little  is  to  be  gleaned  which  can  be  regarded  of  prac- 
tical value.  There  is  no  reason  to  believe  that  franklinic 
electricity  is  adapted  only  to  one  class  of  diseases,  galvanism 
to  another,  and  faradism  to  still  another.  There  are  certain 
diseased  conditions,  however,  in  which  one  form  of  electricity 
is  to  be  preferred  to  another.  The  following  pages  contain  the 
substance  of  what  has  been  written  on  the  subject  of  the  differ- 
ent physiological  and  therapeutical  effects  of  the  various  forms 
of  electricity. 

Effect  on  the  shin.  Franklinic  electricity,  in  the  form  of 
sparks  from  the  machine,  produces,  when  applied  to  the  skin,  a 
sensation  of  pricking  and  pain.  If  the  sparks  are  long,  red- 
ness, is  produced,  and  frequentl}^  a  papular  eruption  resembling 
lichen  urticatus.  It  relieves  cutaneous  ansesthesia  more  quickly 
than  either  galvanism  or  faradism. 

Galvanism  excites  a  sensation  ot  pricking  and  heat,  redness, 
and  when  a  powerful  current  is  applied  a  long  time,  inflam* 
mation  and  sloughing  of  the  skin  and  adjacent  structures. 

Faradism  produces  sensations  which  vary  with  its  electro- 
motive force,  from  a  slight  pricking  to  an  acute  burning  or 
cutting  pain,  but  never,  even  ,  when  a  very  powerful  current  is 
applied,  produces  nutritive  disturbances. 

(235)- 


236 


ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY. 


Effect  on  the  face.  Franklin ic  electricity  applied  to  the 
face  produces  a  faint  sensation  of  light. 

Galvanism,  a  more  or  less  brilliant  flash  according  to  its 
electro-motive  force. 

Faradism  produces  no  sensation  of  light,  but  it  does  pro- 
duce contraction  of  the  facial  muscles,  and  more  or  less  severe 
pricking  sensations. 

Effect  on  muscles.  Franklinic  electricity  produces  muscular 
contractions  with  less  pain  than  faradism. 

Faradism  has  very  little  effect  on  healthy  muscle  deprived 
of  its  nerve  influence  (some  observers  say  none),  whatever  be 
the  number  of  interruptions. 

Galvanism,  on  the  contrary,  in  this  case  produces  increased 
response,  and  this  in  proportion  to  the  strength  of  current  and 
slowness  of  interruptions. 

Effect  on  nerves.  Franklinic  electricity  is  capable  of  pro- 
ducing reflex  action  from  irritation  of  peripheral  distribution 
of  nerves.  Dr.  Wilks,  a  physician  of  long  experience  at  Guy's 
hospital,  London,  where  static  electricity  was  formerly  largely 
used,  believes  that  "patients  suffering  from  paraplegia,  who 
are  now  henefited  by  the  constant  current,  were  previously 
cured  by  static  electricity."  It  is  more  powerful  than  faradism 
in  rousing  the  dormant  nerve  centers. 

Faradism  is  the  most  powerful  stimulant  of  healthy  nerve 
we  possess,  and  this  increases  in  proportion  to  the  strength  of 
current  and  rapidity  of  interruption.  Dr.  A.  Hughes  Bennet* 
believes  that  practically  the  faradic  current  acts  on  nerve  alone. 

Galvanism  excites  both  nerve  and  muscular  fiber,  but  each 
in  a  different  manner. 

ErcmMinic  electricity  cures  certain  diseases  by  changing  the 
electrical  condition  of  the  patient,  which  may  be  rendered  posi- 
tive or  negative  at  will. 


*  Electro-diagnosis  in  nervous  diseases. 


ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY. 


237 


Ordinary  faradic  and  galvanic  electricity,  on  the  other  hand, 
do  not  charge  the  patient  with  electricity,  neither  do  they 
leave  any  more  electricity  in  the  body  than  they  find  there, 
except  as  they  improve  nutrition. 

Franklinic  electricity  has  this  advantage  over  galvanism 
and  faradism  :  it  is  easily  manipulated,  agreeable  to  the  patient, 
safe  in  its  application  to  points  demanding  great  caution  with 
galvanism,  and  especially  in  brow  neuralgias,  in  which  the 
faradic  current  is  obnoxious  to  many  people. 

GALVANISM  AND  FARADISM  COMPARED. 

Galvanism  possesses  great  chemical,  heating  and  magnetic 
properties,  with  comparatively  small  difference  of  potential 
between  its  poles. 

Faradism  has  much  less  chemical  and  magnetic  power  but 
an'  enormous  difference  of  potential.  An  idea  of  this  difference 
may  be  obtained  from  the  experiments  of  Messrs.  De  La  Rue, 
Miiller  and  Spottiswoode.  They  found  that  1080  galvanic  cells 
gave  a  spark  only  2^3  to  2^0  inch  long,  while  even  a  small 
faradic  coil  connected  with  one  or  two  of  the  same  cells  gave 
a  spark  one  inch  long. 

Galvanism  is  indicated  in  those  cases  in  which  we  wish 

{a)  To  excite  the  nerves  of  the  skin  ; 

(b)  To  destroy  the  outer  skin  or  mucous  membrane ; 

(c)  To  produce  an  increase  of  warmth; 

{d)  To  produce  a  chemical  process  and  also  blood  coagula- 
tion. 

{e)  In  certain  peripheric  paralyses  in  which  faradism  fails, 
galvanism,  probably  in  consequence  of  its  uninterrupted  duration, 
produces  effects  which  cannot  be  brought  about  by  the  neces- 
sarily rapidly  interrupted  faradic  current. 

{/)  When  a  muscle  has  lost  all  power  of  responding  to 
the  stimulus  of  a  faradic  current,  in  many  cases  its  sensitive- 


238 


ELECTRO-PHY  SIOLOGY, 


ness  may  be  restored  by  tlie  application  of  a  tolerably  strong 

galvanic  current. 

Faradism  is  indicated  where  we  wish 

(p)  To  excite  either  the  motor  or  sensory  nerves  ; 

(J)  To  produce  contractions  of  the  blood  or  lymphatic 

vessels  ; 

(c)  To  affect  certain  organs  supplied  by  the  sympathetic 
nerve  ; 

{d)  To  increase  the  volume  of  a  muscle.  This  it  accom- 
plishes through  exciting  muscular  contraction,  which  increases 
the  temperature  and  at  the  same  time  improves  its  nutrition. 

(e)  To  relax  a  tense  muscle,  or  to  loosen  a  peripheric  con- 
tractor, single  shocks  from  a  strong  faradic  current  are  gen- 
erally more  useful  than  the  galvanic. 

Galvanism  not  only  acts  as  a  powerful  stimulant  to  nerves 
and  muscles  when  interrupted,  but  during  the  time  it  is  passing 
without  interruption  it  produces  a  marked  alteration  in  nutrition. 
To  this  effect  Remak  gave  the  name  catcdytic  action. 

When  paralyzed  muscles  exhibit,  the  reaction  of  degeneration 
they  are  more  sensitive  to  galvanism  than  faradism,  therefore 
the  former  should  be  selected  to  improve  their  nutrition. 

With  this  exception  faradism  is  a  more  powerful  agent  in 
the  direct  treatment  of  paralyzed  muscles  than  galvanism. 

COMPARISON    OF    THE    THERAPEUTICAL    EFFECT    OF    GALVANIC  AND 
FARADIC  CURRENTS. 

According  to  Dr.  Rockwell,^  in  paralysis  of  one  side  of 
the  body,  when  the  muscles  contract  more  readily  under  the 
influence  of  electricity  than  in  health,  electricity  if  used 
at  all  should  be  in  the  form  of  a  very  mild  faradic  current ; 
even  though  the  muscular  contractions  are  not  excited  quite  so 
readily  as  in  a  normal  condition,  the  faradic  is  still  to  be 

*Dr.  A.  D.  Rockwell,  M.  M.D.,  Electro-Therapeutist  to  the  New  York  State  Woman's 
Hospital ;  Author  of  Medical  and  Surgical  Electricity. 


ELECTKO-PH  Y  SIOLOG  Y. 


239 


preferred.  On  the  contrary,  wlien  the  contractility  of  the 
muscles  is  very  greatly  diminished,  the  galvanic  current  is 
indicated,  the  faradic  being  only  employed  after  the  muscles 
begin  to  contract  under  its  influence.  In  most  cases  of  paraly- 
sis of  the  lower  half  of  the  body  there  will  be  found,  after 
a  short  time,  more  or  less  complete  loss  of  farado-muscular 
contractility ;  the  galvanic  current  alone  is  useful  in  these 
cases  to  restore  nerve  excitability,  although  the  faradic  may  be 
usefully  employed  to  improve  the  impaired  nutrition  of  the 
paralyzed  members. 

Facial  paralysis  resulting  from  cold  illustrates  the  difierence 
in  reaction  of  the  two  cui-rents.  In  these  cases  the  faradic 
current  does  not  cause  contractions,  while  a  much  weaker 
galvanic  current  than  is  required  in  health,  excites  muscular 
contractions.  As  the  patient  improves  a  stronger  galvanic 
current  must  be  used,  until  finally  the  muscles  will  again 
respond  to  faradism.  Neuralgia,  when  pressure  over  the 
affected  nerves  aggravates  pain,  is  generally  relieved  by  a 
galvanic  current,  while  the  faradic  current  has  greater  power 
to  relieve  when  firm  pressure  does  not  increase  the  pain. 
Cases  of  hysterical  hyperaesthesia,  when  slight  pressure  in- 
creases distress  while  firm  and  prolonged  pressure  lessens  it, 
are  relieved  by  faradism^  the  galvanic  current  having  very 
little  efifect  over  them.  General  debility  is  benefited  by  the 
faradic  current,  which  seems  to  exert  a  constitutional  tonic 
effect  in  these  cases.  The  tonic  effect  undoubtedly,  to  some 
extent,  is  due  to  the  mechanical  agitations  of  the  superficial 
and  even  deeper  seated  nerve  and  muscular  fiber. 

Dr,  Jacobi  *  mentions  one  class  of  cases  that  will  terminate 
fatally  unless  treated  energetically  and  promptly  —  namely,  that 
in  which  the  patient  suffers  from  paralysis  of  the  respiratory 
muscles  in  diphtheria.     Sometimes  this  occurs  in  other  par- 


^Xedical  Eeeord,  January  1883. 


240 


ELECTKO-PHY  SIOLOGY. 


aljses,  and  unless  quickly  relieved  the  patient  dies  of  apnoea. 
A  strong  faradic  current  should  be  applied  and  frequently- 
repeated. 

MOTOR  POINTS. 

Electro-therapeutics  requires  a  knowledge  of  those  points  of 
the  body  where  the  nerves,  muscles,  and  organs  beneath,  may 
be  most  directly  reached.  Duchenne*  carefully  investigated 
the  action  of  the  faradic  current'  upon  separate  muscles,  and 
found  that,  contrary  to  the  teachings  of  many  anatomical  text- 
books, most  movements  are  caused  by  a  single  muscle,  and 
not  by  the  simultaneous  action  of  different  muscles.  He  found 
that,  when  the  faradic  current  was  directed  to  some  particular 
points  on  the  skin,  muscular  contraction  was  more  readily 
produced  than  at  other  points,  and  these  he  called  ''points  ^f 
election."  Remak,f  who  tried  similar  experiments  with  the 
galvanic  current,  discovered  that  these  points  were  where  the 
motor  nerves  enter  the  muscle.  Ziemssen;]:  still  further  developed 
the  theory  of  Duchenne,  and  first  clinically  determined  the  prec'se 
location  of  the  motor  points,  and  marked  them  on  the  skin  with 
nitrate  of  silver.  He  afterward  dissected  the  motor  branches  of 
the  nerves  in  dead  bodies,  and  marked  their  points  of  entran  3e 
into  the  muscles,  when  it  was  discovered  that  the  two  series  of 
experiments  completely  agreed  with  one  another.  A  third  ser  es 
of  experiments  was  undertaken  on  bodies  immediately  af  er 
death,  before  the  excitability  of  nerves  and  muscles  had 
disappeared.  The  motor  points  were  first  determined  by  fara- 
dization, marked  with  nitrate  of  silver,  and  afterward  dissected 
to  see  whether  they  really  corresponded  to  the  points  of  entrrnce 
of  the  motor  nerves  into  the  muscular  substance,  which  was 
found  to  be  the  case.  These  points  are  illustrated  in  Fig.  72, 
and  fully  described  in  tlie  following  pages. 

*  Physiologie  des  Mouvements.   Pari?,  1867. 

fDe  L' Application,  etc.,  p.  27. 

X  Die  Elektricitiit  in  der  Medicin,  1872. 


(After  Meyer.) 
(242) 


ELECTEO-PHY  SIOLOGY. 


243 


MOTOR  POINTS  CONCERNED  IN  VARIOUS  MOVEMENTS  OF  THE  BODY. 


The  Face  — 

Drawn  to  either  side,  1, 18. 

"     upward,  18. 
Wrinkled,  1,  3,  4,  6,  9. 
Rotated,  18. 

Eyes  — 

Closed,  1, 8. 
Opened,  8,  3. 

Ears  — 

Drawn  backward,  2. 
"  upward,  2,  5. 
"     forward,  5= 

Mouth  — 

Drawn  obliquely  downward,  1, 15,  26,  33, 
35. 

Contracted,  14. 

Outward,  9, 10, 15, 19,  26,  33. 

Upward,  9  10, 11, 13. 

Tongue  — 

Shortened,  27. 
Curved  sidewise,  27. 

Nose  — 

Obliquely  downward,  1. 

"       upward,  11. 
Wrinkled,  12. 

Forehead  — 

Wrinkled  horizontally,  3,  6. 
"       vertically,  7. 

Eyebrow  — 

Drawn  downward,  7, 12. 
"     inward,  7, 12. 

Lower  Jaw  — 

Depressed,  15, 19. 
Protruded,  18. 

Head  — 

Turned  to  shoulder,  15, 16, 17, 18, 19. 
"      down,  18. 
"      backward,  17, 18. 
forward,  15, 18, 19. 


30. 


Neck  — 

Bent  forward,  15, 17, 18, 

"    backward,  17, 18,  22. 

"    to  either  side,  16. 
Wrinkled,  19, 15. 

Shoulder— 

Raised,  17, 18. 
Backward,  18. 
Inward,  18. 
Depressed,  60. 

Scapula  — 

Drawn  toward  spine,  17, 18,  20,  22. 
"     upward,  20, 18,  22. 
"      forward.  23,  20. 
"     outward,  23. 
Ribs  — 

Lifted  up,  21,  22. 
Depressed,  95, 96,  97,  98, 100. 
Backward,  95,  96,  97,  98, 100. 
Inward,  97,  99. 


Clavicle  — 

Up  from  thorax,  23. 

Humerus  — 

Outward,  24,  62. 
Forward,  31,  32,  60,  61,  64. 
Backward,  24,  60. 
Inward,  24,  32,  63,  73. 

Forearm  — 

Forward,  31,  41,  42,  43,  61, 62,  63,  64, 67,  71 
Backward,  40,  41,  45,  67. 
Inward,  62,  64,  67,  69,  73,  72. 
Outward,  31,  41. 

Hand- 

Flexion,  65,  66,  69,  71,  73,  62,  68,  72. 
Extension,  41,  44,  46,  47,  49,  48,  50,  52. 
Outward,  41. 

Inward,  62, 69,  62,  48,  49,  72. 

Thumb  — 

Extended,  41,  49,  53. 

Backward,  51,  54,  55. 

Forward  across  palm,  53,  71,  76,  79,  80. 

Drawn  away  from  fingers,  49,  51,  75. 

Fingers  — 

Extended,  41,  47,  48,  50,  52,  57. 
Inward,  48,  56,72. 

Flexed,  41,  57,  02,  65,  66,  70,  73,  .7,  78,  81, 
82,  83. 

Trunk  — 

Bent  forward,  90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95,  96,  97, 98 

"   backward,  18,  22,  90,  91,  92,  93,  '.. 
Rotated,  95,  96,  97,  98,  100. 

Abdomen  — 


Contracted,  95,  96,  97,  ■ 
Bulging  outward,  21. 


99, 100. 


Pelvis  ■ 


Bent  forward,  106, 107, 102. 
"  backward,  106. 

Thigh  — 

Forward,  101, 102, 107, 108, 109,  110,  liO, 
Backward,  140. 
Inward,  106, 140. 
Outward,  107, 140. 

Leg  — 

Forward,  102, 103,  111,  105, 118, 120, 140. 
Backward,  102, 103, 106, 110,  111,  114. 
Extended,  102, 103, 104, 105,  111. 

Foot- 

Forward,  or  flexed,  115, 117, 118. 12'),  112. 
Backward,  or  extended,  104,  112, 113, 117. 
Inward,  104, 118. 
Outward,  115, 116, 117, 120. 

Toes  — 

Forward,  or  extended,  117, 119, 121, 124, 

125, 126, 127. 
Backward,  or  flexed,  113, 114, 122, 123, 124, 

125,  126,  127, 117. 
Outward,  115, 116, 117, 120, 122. 
Inward,  124, 125,  126, 127. 

The  muscles  contributing  to  these  movements,  which  cannot  be  stimulated  by  the 
motor  points  shown  on  Fig.  72,  must  be  reached  by  direct  application  of  the  electrode  to 
the  muscles  themselves. 


244 


ELECTRO-PHY  SIOLOGY. 


MOTOR  POINTS  OF  THE  HUMAN  BODY. 
The  Head. 

1.  Facial  nerve  at  its  exit  from  the  stylo-mastoid  foramen.  This  is  the  motor  nerve  of 
all  the  facial  muscles  of  expression.  If  the  one  electrode  be  placed  upon  this  point  the 
muscles  of  the  whole  face  will  be  stimulated;  half  is  drawn  toward  that  side,  the  skin  is 
thrown  into  countless  wrinkles,  the  eye  shut  and  the  nose  and  mouth  are  drawn  obliquely 
downward. 

2.  The  auriculo-posterior  branch  of  the  facial  nerve ;  when  an  electrode  is  placed  at 
this  point  the  attrahens  and  retrahens  auricular  muscles  are  contracted,  drawing  the 
scalp  downward  and  the  ear  backward  and  upward. 

3.  The  branch  of  the  facial  supplied  to  the  occipito-frontalis  muscle.  It  wrinkles  the 
skin  of  the  forehead  transversely,  and  by  its  interlacing  with  fibres  of  the  orbicularis  pal- 
pebrarum contributes  to  opening  the  eyes. 

4.  Branch  of  facial  nerve  passing  to  the  tragi cus  and  antitragicus  muscles.  Stimulat- 
ing it  causes  wrinkling  of  the  skin  about  the  ear. 

5.  The  auriculo-anterior  branch  of  the  facial  nerve  through  which  the  attrahens  and 
attolens  auricular  muscles  may  be  stimulated.   They  raise  the  ears  upward  and  forward. 

6.  Branch  of  facial  passing  to  the  frontalis  muscle.  Its  stimulation  causes  the  muscle 
to  contract  and  throw  the  brow  in  horizontal  wrinkles,  curved  slightly  downward  on  the 
median  line. 

7.  Facial  branch  to  the  corrugator  supercilii  muscle.  When  stimulated  it  flattens  and 
depresses  the  eyebrow  and  draws  its  base  downward  and  inward.  Its  maximum  contrac- 
tion causes  the  brow  to  cover  the  upper  eyelid  and  vertically  wrinkles  the  forehead. 

8.  Branch  of  facial  to  the  orbicularis  palpebrarum  muscle  which  closes  the  eye  and 
wrinkles  up  the  eyelids. 

9.  Branch  of  nerve  to  the  zygomaticus  major  which  draws  the  angle  of  the  mouth 
outward  and  upward  and  produces  on  the  cheek  deep  wrinkles,  radiating  outward  from 
this  angle. 

10.  Branch  of  facial  to  the  zygomaticus  minor.  Stimulation  of  this  point  is  painful 
and  draws  the  upper  lip  upward  and  somewhat  outward. 

11.  Branch  of  facial  to  levator  labii  superioris  et  alae  nasi.  Stimulation  of  this  point 
also  produces  pain  and  lifts  the  upper  lip  and  wing  of  the  nose. 

12.  Facial  branch  to  the  compressor  nasi  which  wrinkles  the  nose  and  draws  the  eye- 
brow downward  and  inward. 

13.  Branch  of  facial  to  the  levator  labii  superioris  proprius.  Stimulating  it  produces 
pain  and  lifts  the  upper  lip  almost  vertically  so  as  to  uncover  the  teeth. 

14.  The  buccal  branches  which  supply  the  buccinator  and  orbicularis  oris  muscles. 
Stimulating  the  buccinator  draws  the  cbeek  against  the  teeth  and  contracts  or  compresses 
the  lips.  The  orbicularis  receives  four  branches  from  the  facial  nerve,  one  for  each  side  of 
each  lip,  and  can  be  uniformly  stimulated  by  using  four  electrodes  at  once. 

15.  Infra  maxillary  cutaneous  branches  that  supply  the  platysma.  This  muscle 
depresses  the  commissure  of  the  lips  and  carries  it  outward.  It  helps  depress  the  lower 
jaw,  and  wrinkles  the  skin  of  the  neck  transversely. 

16.  Subcutaneous  branches  of  the  superficialis  colli  supplying  the  anteiior  and 
lateral  muscles  of  the  neck. 

17.  18.  Branches  of  the  spinal  accessory  nerve. 

17.  Accessory  branch  supposed  to  be  the  nerve  of  voice. 

18.  Spinal  part  which  gives  off  branches  to  the  sterno-mastoid,  and  terminates  in 
the  deep  surface  of  the  trapezius.  Let  the  positive  electrode  cover  17  and  18  and  both 
muscles  will  be  contracted  simultaneously*.  The  neck  will  bend,  the  lower  jaw  pro- 
trudes, and  the  head  is  twisted  toward  the  shoulder,  which  is  strongly  raised  and  drawn 
backward  and  inward. 

The  sterno-cleido  mastoid  muscle  may  be  stimulated  separately  by  placing  the  elec- 
trode a  little  lower  down ;  it  draws  the  head  down  so  that  the  ear  faces  the  shoulder, 
while  the  face  looks  somewhat  upward,  backward  and  to  the  opposite  side. 

The  trapezius  may  be  acted  on  separately  by  placing  the  positive  electrode  on  the 
nerve,  entering  the  muscle  about  one-half  inch  below  motor  point  17,  and  there  results 


ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY. 


245 


either  a  raising  of  the  shoulder  backward  with  drawing  of  scapula  toward  the  spine, 
or  a  pulling  of  the  head  backward  and  outward,  or  both  motions,  according  to  the  ac- 
tion of  antagonist,  of  trapezius  muscle  on  the  head  or  shoulder. 

19.  The  motor  point  of  the  superficialis  colli  branches  lying  beneath  the  platysma 
myoides  and  distributed  to  anterior  and  lateral  parts  of  the  neck.  To  stimulate  the 
platysma,  place  the  negative  electrode  on  19,  and  the  positive  near  the  middle  of  the 
inner  margin  of  the  sterno-cleido-mastoid  muscle. 

20.  Nerve  branch  from  the  cervical  plexus  to  the  levator  anguli  scapula.  Stimula- 
tion of  this  point  draws  the  internal  angle  of  the  scapula  upAvard,  inward  and  forward, 
while  the  acromion,  fixed  by  the  weight  of  the  arm  and  the  action  of  the  antagonists, 
moves  very  little. 

21.  Phrenic  nerve.  This  is  the  important  motor  point  for  the  production  of  artificial 
respiration.  The  positive  electrode  should  be  large,  and  must  be  pressed  gently  against 
the  outer  margin  of  the  sterno  cleido-mastoid  muscle,  near  the  omo-hyoid  muscle.  The 
result  is  rapid  contraction  of  the  diaphragm,  bulging  out  of  the  abdomen,  and  the 
forcible  entry  of  air  into  the  trachea,  giving  rise  to  a  sobbing  sound.  By  faradization  of 
this  nerve  it  is  possible  to  maintain  respiration  some  time  after  death. 

22.  Motor  point  of  the  dorsalis  scapulae  nerves  supplying  the  rhomboid  and  serratus 
posticus  superior.  When  stimulated  it  causes  the  scapula  to  be  drawn  upward  toward 
the  spinal  column  and  feebly  lifts  the  upper  ribs. 

23.  Motor  point  of  the  posterior  thoracic  nerve  supplying  the  serratus  magnus. 
Stimulating  this  causes  the  muscles  to  contract,  thereby  raising  the  acromial  angle  of 
the  scapula,  pushing  this  bone  very  far  outward  and  forward,  and  lifting  the  clavicle 
some  distance  from  the  thorax. 

24.  Supra-scapular  nerve  supplying  the  supra  and  infra-spinatus  muscles.  Raisee 
the  arm,  turns  it  outward  and  backward. 

25. 

26.  Branch  of  facial  nerve  to  the  triangularis  menti  muscle.  When  stimulated  this 
muscle  draws  the  angle  of  the  mouth  downward  and  strongly  outward,  lengthening  the 
opening  between  the  lips,  but  not  causing  the  lips  to  separate  from  each  other. 

27.  The  hypoglossus  nerve,  the  motor  nerve  of  the  tongue  which  shortens  and 
curves  toward  the  side  stimulated. 


Branches  of 
the  decendens 


28.  Motor  point  of  omo-hyoid  muscle.  Depresses  os  hyoides. 

29.  Motor  point  of  sterno-thyroid.  Depresses  thyroid  cartilage  and  os 
hyoides. 

30.  Motor  point  of  sterno-hyoid.  Depresses  os  hyoides. 

31.  Motor  point  of  the  outer  cord  of  the  brachial  plexus,  from  which  arises  the 
musculo-cutaneous  nerve  and  one  root  of  the  median  nerve.  Stimulation  of  this  point 
is  painful,  but  it  causes  the  simultaneous  contraction  of  the  biceps  and  brachialis  in- 
ternus  muscles,  which  powerfully  flexes  forearm. 

32.  Anterior  thoracic  nerve  supplying  the  pectoralis  major.  Its  stimulation  draws 
the  arm  far  toward  the  median  line,  or  adducts  it  to  the  chest,  so  that  the  elbow  is  on 
the  mammillary  line. 

33.  Branch  of  facial  supplying  the  depressor  labii  inferioris,  which  draws  the  lip 
downward  and  outward. 

34. 

35.  Also  a  motor  point  of  the  depressor  labii  inferioris. 

40.  Branch  of  radial  nerve  supplying  the  outer  head  of  the  triceps. 

41.  Radial  nerve.  Stimulation  causes  supination  of  forearm  with  extension  of  hand 
and  thumb,  and  extension  of  first  phalanges  of  the  other  fingers. 

42.  Branch  of  radial  nerve  supplying  t|je  brachialis  anticus  muscle.  To  stimulate 
this  muscle  the  positive  electrode  must  be  placed  where  the  lower  half  or  third  of  the 
biceps  begins,  pushing  the  median  nerve  aside,  while  the  negative  electrode  rests  on 
the  outer  edge  of  the  other  muscle.  It  bends  the  forearm  on  the  arm. 

43.  Branch  of  radial  nerve  (covered  over  by  muscle)  distributed  to  the  supinator 
longus.  When  the  latter  contracts  it  flexes  the  forearm  on  the  arm  in  a  position  be- 
tween pronation  and  supination. 

44.  Branch  of  radial  nerve  (covered  with  muscle)  distributed  to  the  extensor  carpi 
radialis  longior.  When  stimulated  it  extends  the  hand  on  the  forearm. 


240 


ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY. 


45.  Branch  of  radical  nerve  to  the  anconeus  quartus.  When  directly  stimulated 
it  extends  the  forearm  feebly. 

46.  Nerve  distributed  to  the  extensor  carpi  radialis  brevior.  Like  44,  it  extends 
hand  on  forearm  when  stimulated. 

47.  Branches  of  radial  nerve  supplying  the  extensor  communis  digitorum.  Both 
branches  should  be  excited  simultaneously  to  produce  contraction  of  this  muscle.  This 
extends  the  phalanges  of  the  last  four  fingers  on  each  other,  and  on  the  metacarpal 
bone.   It  can  also  extend  hand  on  forearm. 

48.  Nerve  supplying  the  extensor  car{)i  ulnaris.  Stimulating  it  extends  the  hand, 
inclining  it  a  little  inward. 

49.  Common  motor  point  for  the  abductor  pollicis  longus,  extensor  digiti  and 
indicis  proprius  muscles. 

50.  Motor  point  for  the  extensor  minimi  digiti  proprius.  Stimulating  the  last  two 
points  extends  the  fingers  and  even  the  hand. 

51.  Motor  point  of  the  abductor  pollicis  longus. 

52.  Motor  point  of  the  extensor  indicis  proprius. 

53.  Motor  point  of  the  common  to  the  extensor  pollicis  longus  and  brevis. 

54.  Motor  point  of  the  extensor  pollicis  brevis. 

55.  Motor  point  of  the  extensor  pollicis  longus. 

56.  Motor  point  of  the  abductor  digiti  minimi. 

57.  Motor  point  of  the  four  interossei  externi.  When  stimulated  the  fingers  are 
abducted,  adducted  and  extended. 

58.  59. 

60.  Branch  of  the  anterior-thoracic  nerve  supplying  the  deltoid.  It  raises  the  arm 
directly  up,  and,  if  the  shoulder  is  fixed,  carries  it  forward  or  backward  according  to 
the  direction  of  the  fibres  thrown  into  action.  When  the  arm  is  rendered  immovable 
the  deltoid  acts  inversely  and  depresses  the  shoulder. 

61.  Musculo-cutaneous  nerve.  Its  stimulation  is  painful,  and  causes  the  simultaneous 
contraction  of  the  biceps  and  brachialis  internus,  which  flexes  the  forearm  powerfully. 

62.  Median  nerve.  This  can  be  easily  reached  along  the  sulcus  bicipitalis,  but  can 
be  most  readily  stimulated  at  the  lower  third  of  the  humerus,  where  it  can  be  fixed 
against  the  bone.  The  stimulation  of  this  nerve  excites  peculiar  pain  in  the  hand  and 
fingers,  and  causes  strong  pronation  of  the  forearm,  flexion  of  the  hand  toward  the 
radial  side,  flexion  of  the  fingers  with  opposition  of  the  thumb. 

63.  Motor  point  of  that  branch  of  the  musculo-cutaneous  nerve  distributed  to  the 
brachialis  internus.   Its  stimulation  bends  the  forearm. 

64.  Branch  of  the  median  nerve  sent  to  the  pronator  teres  muscle.  The  stimulation 
of  this  muscle  is  quite  painful,  in  consequence  of  the  great  number  of  sensitive  nerves 
on  the  flexion  side  of  the  arm.  It  causes  the  radius  to  turn  on  the  ulna  to  produce  pro- 
nation.   It  also  bends  forearm  on  aria. 

65.  66.  Motor  points  of  flexor  digitor.  sublimis.  This  muscle  bends  the  second  pha- 
langes on  the  first. 

67.  Internal  branch  of  median  nerve  sent  the  pronator  teres.  This  turns  the  radius 
on  the  ulna  to  produce  pronation.  It  also  bends  forearm  on  the  arm,  and  extends  fore- 
arm. 

68.  Branch  of  median  nerve  to  the  radialis  internus  muscle. 

69.  Branch  of  median  nerve  to  the  palmaris  longus. 

70.  Branch  of  median  nerve  to  the  flexor  digitor  sublimis.  This  bends  the  second 
phalanges  on  the  first,  these  on  the  carpal  bones,  and  the  hand  on  the  forearm. 

71.  Branch  of  median  nerve  to  the  pollicis  longus.  This  bends  the  second  phalanx 
of  thumb  on  first,  the  first  on  the  corresponding  metacarpal  bone,  and  this  on  the  radius. 

72.  Branch  of  the  ulnar  nerve  distributed  to  the  inner  part  of  the  palm  and  last 
two  or  three  fingers. 

73.  The  median  nerve.   (See  62.) 

74.  Motor  point  of  volaris  profundus  ulnar  nerve  distributed  to  the  muscles  of  fore- 
arm and  hand. 

75.  Motor  point  of  abductor  pollicis  brevis. 

76.  Motor  point  of  opponens  pollicis. 


I  These  bend  the  hand. 


ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY. 


247 


77.  Motor  point  of  abductor  digiti  minimi. 

78.  Motor  point  of  flexor  digiti  minimi. 

79.  Motor  point  of  flexor  pollicis  brevis. 

80.  Motor*  point  of  ulnar  branch  supplying  the  adductor  pollicis. 

81.  Motor  point  of  median  branch  supplying  the  lumbricalis  1 1. 

82.  Motor  point  of  median  branch  supplying  the  lumbricalis  I. 

83.  Motor  point  of  flexor  digitor.  communis  profundis. 

90  to  94.  Motor  point  of  rectus  abdominis  externus.  It  bends  the  chest  on  the 
pelvis  and  conversely. 

95  to  98.  Motor  points  of  obliquus  abdominis  externus,  which  depresses  the  ribs 
and  carries  them  backward  during  a  strong  expiration,  excites  rotation  of  chest,  bends 
thorax  on  pelvis  and  back  again,  and  contracts  the  abdominal  cavity. 

99.  Motor  point  of  transversus  abdominis.  This  constricts  abdomen,  diminishes 
base  of  chest  by  drawing  ribs  inward. 

100.  Motor  point  of  obliquus  abdominis  internus.  Its  stimulation  produces  about 
the  same  effect  as  abdominis  externus. 

101.  Branch  of  crural  nerve  supplying  the  tensor  fascise  latse  which  helps  move  the 
thigh  forward. 

102.  Branch  of  crural  nerve  supplying  the  rectus  femoris.  This  muscle  has  another 
motor  point  four  or  five  inches  from  the  anterior  superior  spinous  process  of  the  ilium. 
It  extends  the  leg  on  the  thigh  and  conversely;  also  bends  thigh  on  pelvis  or 
carries  pelvis  forward. 

103.  Upper  motor  point  of  the  vastus  externus,  the  other  motor  point  is  two  or 
three  inches  lower.  This  muscle  acts  best  if  one  electrode  is  placed  on  each  motor 
point.  To  lessen  the  pain,  turn  the  electrode  handle  so  that  the  nerve  of  this  muscle 
may  be  pressed  outward.  It  helps  extend  the  leg  on  the  thigh  and  conversely. 

104.  Motor  point  of  the  crural  muscle  which  assists  vastus  (103)  and  rectus  (102)  in 
extension  of  leg. 

105.  Crural  nerve.  The  stimulation  of  this  nerve  occasions  severe  pain  along  the 
front  and  inner  side  of  the  thigh,  the  knee  and  the  leg  down  to  the  big  toe,  accom- 
panied by  powerful  contraction  of  the  muscles  of  the  leg.  In  thin  persons  it  is  possible 
to  stimulate  the  chief  branch  of  crural  nerve  going  to  the  quadriceps  extensor  cruris, 
and  this  excites  not  only  that  muscle,  but  also  the  extensors  on  the  front  of  the  thigh. 
It  causes  extension  of  leg. 

106.  Branch  of  crural  distributed  to  the  sartorius  muscle  ;  bends  pelvis  on  thigh 
and  conversely. 

107.  Motor  point  of  the  pectineus  muscle  bends  the  thigh  on  the  pelvis  and  carries 
it  outward  in  adduction  and  rotation.   It  may  also  bend  the  pelvis  on  the  thigh. 

108.  Motor  point  of  the  adductor  brevis.    )    These  draw  the  thigh  toward  the  axis 


110.  Motor  point  of  the  gracillis  muscle  bends  leg,  adducts  thigh. 

111.  Lower  motor  point  of  vastus  internus  (see  103). 

112.  Motor  point  of  the  soleus  muscle  extends  foot  on  leg  conversely. 

113.  Branch  of  tibialis  nerve  to  the  flexor  digitor,  communis  longus. 

114.  Tibial  nerve.  It  causes  contraction  of  all  muscles  at  the  back  of  the  leg  and 
sole  of  foot. 

115.  Peroneal  nerve.  It  is  distributed  to  the  posterior  muscles  of  the  leg  and  sole  of 
the  foot. 

116.  Superficial  peroneal  nerve  (popliteal). 

117.  Motor  point  of  the  extensor  digitor  communis  longus.  It  causes  the  three 
phalanges  to  bend  on  each  other,  the  toes  on  the  metatarsus,  and  extends  the  foot  on  the 
leg. 

118.  Motor  point  of  the  tibialis  anticus  muscle.  It  bends  the  foot  on  the  leg,  directs 
its  point  inward,  and  at  the  same  time  raises  its  inner  edge.  It  also  bends  the  leg  on 
the  foot  and  prevents  its  falling  backward  in  standing. 

119.  Motor  point  of  extensor  hallucis  longus.  This  extends  the  last  phalanx  of  the 
great  toe  upon  the  first,  and  the  first  upon  the  first  metacarpal  bone. 

120.  Motor  point  of  the  perona;us  tertius.  This  bends  the  foot  on  the  leg  by  raising  its 
outer  edge.  It  can  also  bend  the  leg  on  the  foot. 


of  the  body. 


248 


ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY. 


121.  Branch  of  the  peronseus  profundus,  distributed  to  the  extensor  digitor.  communis 
brevis.  It  extends  three  phalanges  of  last  four  toes. 

122.  Motor  point  of  the  abductor  digiti  minimi,  which  draws  the  little  toe  outward. 

123.  Motor  point  of  the  hallucis  muscle  which  pulls  the  great  toe  from  the  rest. 
124-127.  Motor  points  of  the  interossei  externi  which  abducts  and  adduets  the  toes. 
140.  Obturator  nerve.  Stimulating  it,  rotates  the  thigh  outward,  draws  the  thigh  to 

the  pelvis,  and  bends  the  leg. 

The  motor  point  of  the  sciatic  nerve  (not  shown  on  cut)  lies  between  the  trochanter 
major  and  tuber,  ischii ;  stimulating  it,  causes  flexion  of  the  leg  and  contraction  of  all  the 
muscles  of  the  leg  and  foot. 

THE  RELATION  OF  ELECTRICITY  TO  THE  FUNCTIONS  OF  THE  NERVOUS 

SYSTEM. 

Our  present  knowledge  of  the  pathology  of  the  nervous 
system  owes  its  origin  to  the  experiments  of  Galvani  in  his 
laboratory  at  Bologna  in  1759.*  Step  by  step  the  functions  of 
the  different  parts  have  been  discovered.  All  the  variations 
in  the  effect  produced  by  electric  stimulus  of  different  kinds, 
the  comparative  influence  of  upward  and  downward  currents, 
the  exhaustion  of  nerves  by  continued  stimulation  and  their 
recovery  by  repose,  have  all  been  thoroughly  studied. 

Motor  and  sensory  nerves.  The  distinction  of  motor  and 
sensitive  properties  in  the  two  roots  of  the  spinal  nerves  was 
discovered  in  1822,  by  Charles  Bell.  Magendie,  following  the 
line  of  investigation  begun  by  Bell,  showed  that  galvanization 
of  the  anterior  roots  caused  muscular  contraction,  and  that  of 
the  posterior  roots  sensation.  It  was  believed  at  this  time 
that  the  motor  and  sensitive  properties  of  the  nervous  system 
were  under  the  control  of  the  brain,  and  that  the  spinal  cord 
was  a  portion  of  the  apparatus  for  transmission  ;  through  it 
and  the  motor  nerves  the  commands  of  the  will  were  con- 
veyed to  the  muscles,  and  impressions  received  at  the  peri- 
phery of  the  sensitive  nerves  were  conveyed  through  them  to 
the  brain. 

Reflex  action  of  the  spinal  cord.  Marshall  Hall  made  the 
discovery  that  while  the  spinal  cord  acts  independently  of  the 

*John  C.  Dalton,  M.D.,  professor  of  physiology ;  in  the  College  of  Physicians  and 
Surgeons,  New  York,  1882. 


ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY. 


249 


brain,  it  is  a  medium  of  communication  between  the  skin  and 
muscles.  The  stimulus  conveyed  inward  through  the  sensitive 
nerves  to  the  cord  is  reflected  outward  through  the  motor 
nerves  to  the  muscles.  From  this  circumstance  is  derived  the 
name  reflex  action."  It  was  afterward  found  that  this  same 
form  of  activity  is  not  confined  to  the  spinal  cord.  Wherever 
there  is  a  ganglionic  mass  of  nervous  matter  with  motor  and 
sensitive  fibers  originating  from  it,  there  is  a  similar  focus  of 
nervous  power  often  quite  disconnected  with  consciousness  and 
volition.  For  example,  in  a  state  of  absolute  insensibility,  a 
touch  on  the  cornea  will  cause  closure  of  the  eyelids,  the  con- 
tact of  a  solid  body  with  the  fauces  will  excite  the  movement 
of  deglutition.  In  these  instances  the  reaction  disappears  when 
its  special  nervous  center  is  destroyed. 

Vaso-motor  nerves.  Claude  Bernard  marked  a  new  epoch  in 
the  history  of  the  circulation  by  the  discovery  that  division  of 
the  sympathetic  nerve  in  the  neck  is  followed  by  enlargement 
of  the  bloodvessels  of  the  head.  Brown-Sequard  and  Bernard 
almost  simultaneously  discovered  that  the  circulation,  after  the 
sympathetic  is  divided,  may  be  controlled  and  regulated  by 
galvanization  of  the  divided  nerve  above  the  point  of  section. 
It  thus  appeared  that  the  arteries  were  supplied  by  nerve 
fibers  from  the  sympathetic,  and  the  circulation  is  influenced 
by  them  nearly  in  the  same  way  as  the  voluntary  muscles 
are  controlled  by  the  cerebro-spinal  nerves.  Those  nerve 
fibers  which  produce,  under  stimulation,  contraction  of  the 
bloodvessels  are  called  the  vaso-motor  nerves. 

Dilator  nerves.  Bernard  discovered  still  another  kind  of 
nerve  fiber,  which  under  the  stimulus  of  galvanism  produced 
enlargement  of  bloodvessels,  and  more  active  circulation  while 
the  stimulus  lasts,  and  these  are  called  dilator  nerves.  This 
discovery  explained  another  curious  phenomenon  previously 
observed.    As  a  general  rule,  if  a  nerve  going  to  a  muscular 


250 


ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY. 


organ  be  divided,  the  muscle  is  paralyzed  ;  if  the  nerve  be 
stimulated,  there  is  a  muscular  contraction.  The  heart  is  an 
exception  to  this  rule. 

Action  of  arrest.  Since  the  heart  is  supplied  with  filaments 
from  the  pneumogastric,  we  should  naturally  expect  that  its 
action  would  be  diminished  by  the  section  of  this  nerve,  and 
increased  when  it  is  stimulated.  The  effect  is  exactly  con- 
trary. When  the  poles  of  a  galvanic  current  are  applied  to 
the  pneumogastric  in  the  neck,  the  cardiac  pulsations  are 
reduced  in  frequency,  and  when  the  strength  of  a  current  is 
increased,  they  are  stopped  altogether.  The  heart  lies  still,  in 
a  relaxed  state,  while  galvanization  is  going  on  ;  when  the  cur- 
rent ceases,  pulsations  commence  again.  This  is  not  due  to 
reflex  but  to  direct  action,  as  may  be  proved  in  animals  by 
dividing  the  sympathetic.  If  it  be  galvanized  above  the  sec- 
tion, the  heart  remains  unaffected,  but  if  the  stimulus  be  ap- 
plied below  the  section  the  effect  upon  the  heart-beats  is 
immediately  observed.  The  power  of  this  nerve  to  restrain 
the  heart  movements,  like  the  motor  power  of  the  spinal 
nerves,  is  limited  in  duration.  If  the  galvanization  be  con- 
tinued a  suflicient  time  the  heart  will  begin  to  beat  again,  at 
first  slowly,  afterward  naturally,  notwithstanding  the  continu- 
ance of  the  galvanic  current.  The  nerve  has  lose  its  controlling 
power,  and  cannot  be  again  excited  to  manifest  it,  unless  allowed 
a  period  of  rest. 

The  heart  still  retains  its  sensitiveness  to  the  same  influ- 
ence, and  if  the  electrodes  be  shifted  to  the  pneumogastric  of 
the  opposite  side,  it  stops  as  quickly  as  before.  This  is  the 
so-called  "action  of  arrest,"  an  influence  which  passes  through 
a  nerve  from  its  center  to  a  muscle  and  suspends  the  contrac- 
tion of  that  muscle.  Besides  the  hearty  all  the  sphincter  muscles., 
the  secretory  glands.,  the  %derus  and  alimentary  canal  are  afiected 
in  the  same  way.     The  Uood/vessels  are  affected  both  by  the 


ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY. 


251 


motor  nerves  and  the  dilator  nerves  and  by  the  varying  pre- 
ponderance of  the  one  or  the  other  they  are  made  to  alter- 
nately contract  and  dilate. 

Special  centers  for  motion  and  sensation  in  the  cerebral 
convolutions.  It  was  not  until  1870  that  the  first  discovery* 
was  made,  by  experiments  on  dog's  brain,  that  there  are  certain 
parts  of  the  cerebral  convolutions  where  stimulus  always 
produces  definite  and  unmistakable  movements  on  the  opposite 
side  of  the  body.  The  contraction  of  certain  groups  of  mus- 
cles, and  consequently  particular  movements  in  the  trunk  or 
limbs,  are  connected  with  the  stimulation  of  particular  points 
in  the  brain.  By  comparing  these  points  in  different  animals, 
aided  by  observations  in  human  pathology,  it  appears  that  in 
man  the  motor  centers  for  the  body  and  limbs  of  the  opposite 
side  are  mainly  located  in  the  anterior  and  posterior  central 
convolutions,  immediately  bordering  on  the  fissure  of  Rolando. 
The  location  of  the  centers  of  sensation  is  still  a  subject  of 
investigation.  In  one  instance  only  can  it  be  said  to  be 
determined  beyond  a  doubt  . the  location  of  one  of  these  points. 
If  the  ''angular  convolution"  on  the  posterior  and  lateral  part 
of  the  cerebral  hemisphere  be  removed,  the  operation  is  fol- 
lowed by  blindness  of  the  opposite  eye  without  any  other  per- 
ceptible disturbance  of  either  motion  or  sensibility.  The  effect 
of  electricity  upon  the  vaso-motor  system  is  a  subject  of  the 
greatest  importance,  for  upon  this  system  of  nerves  depends 
the  connection  between  secretion  and  blood  supply,  the  mechan- 
ism of  congestions,  the  dependence  of  external  disturbance  of 
the  circulation  on  disease  of  the  internal  parts,  the  red  cheeks 
of  pneumonia,  and  the  hectic  of  consumption. 

The  method  of  reaching  the  spinal  ganglia,  through  which 
these  various  kinds  of  nerves  may  be  brought  under  the  influ- 


*  Fritsch  Hitzig,  Archive  fiir  Anatomie,  Pbysiologie  und  Wissenschaftliche  Medicin, 
Leipzig,  1870,  p.  300. 


252 


ELECTEO-PHYSIOLOGY. 


ence  of  electricity,  may  be  determined  from  the  illustration, 
Fig.  73. 

THE  GREAT  SYMPATHETIC  NERVE. 

This  nerve,  which  owes  its  name  to  the  belief  that  "through 
it  is  produced  a  symjyathy  between  the  affections  of  distant 
organs,"  is  of  great  practical  interest  to  the  electro -therapeutist, 
consisting  as  it  does  of  a  series  of  ganglia  forming  a  double 
chain,  extending  from  its  origin  within  the  skull  the  entire 
length  of  the  spine,  on  each  side,  and  sending  branches  either 
directly  or  indirectly  to  all  the  large  bloodvessels,  and  to 
every  important  organ  in  the  body. 

Prof.  Weber  was  the  first  to  describe  the  method  of  stim- 
ulating various  groups  of  muscles  and  organs  through  their 
ganglia  or  nerve  centers. 

By  using  a  broad  electrode,  with  the  skin  well  moistened, 
and  the  electrode  also  (unless  it  be  made  of  carbon  or  metal), 
it  is  possible  to  send  a  current  from  the  nerve  roots  or  centers 
(which  these  ganglia  are)  to  any  organ  or  bloodvessel  with 
which  they  are  in  communication. 

Applications  to  the  head  are  made  through  the  forehead 
vertex  and  occiput.  The  forehead  is  very  sensitive,  and  it  is 
best  to  include  a  rheostat  in  the  circuit  when  the  current  is 
to  be  passed  through  the  head. 


ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY. 


253 


Fig.  73.   (After  Gray). 


S  includes  the  seven  cervical  vertebrae. 

V  includes  the  twelve  dorsal  vertebrae. 
X  includes  the  five  lumbar  vertebrae. 

Y  includes  the  five  sacral  and  four  coccygeal  vertebrae. 

Cervical  Ganglia. 

A,  superior  cervical  ganglion  lying  in  front  of  the  second  and  third  cervical  vertebrae. 
It  sends  branches  to  (1)  the  carotid  artery,  (2)  carotid  plexus,  (3)  cavernous  plexus,  (4)  the 
heart.  These  send  nerve  twigs  to  the  eyes,  nose  and  various  parts  of  the  head. 


254 


ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY. 


B,  middle  cervical  ganglion,  located  opposite  the  fifth  cervical  vertebra.  It  sends 
Ibranches  to  (1)  fifth  and  sixth  spinal  nerves,  (2)  thyroid  gland,  (3)  heart.  These  form  a  part 
of  the  brachial  plexus  which  furnishes  the  nerve  supply  to  the  upper  extremities.  They 
also  communicate  with  the  phrenic  nerve. 

C,  inferior  cervical  ganglion.  Located  in  front  of  the  last  cervical  vertebra  and  the 
neck  of  the  first  rib  (at  the  nape  of  the  neck).  It  sends  branches  to  (1)  the  heart,  (2)  verte- 
bral artery,  (3)  cervical  spinal  nerves.  Nerves  from  this  ganglia  preside  over  the  contraction 
of  the  radiated  fibers  of  the  iris. 

To  send  a  current  through  these  ganglia  place  one  electrode  over  the  sixth  or  seventh 
cervical  vertebra  and  the  other  directly  below  the  ear  and  behind  the  angle  of  the  jaw 
(auriculo-maxillary  fossa).  They  may  also  be  reached  by  placing  the  first  electrode  at  the 
point  indicated  by  electrode  A,  Fig.  74,  and  the  second  as  before. 

D  includes  the  twelve  dorsal  ganglia  or  the  thoracic  portion  of  the  great  sympathetic. 
They  are  located  against  the  heads  of  the  ribs,  on  each  side  of  the  spine,  and  send 
"branches  to  (1)  the  aorta,  (2)  the  dorsal  spinal  nerves  which  are  distributed  to  the  muscles 
and  skin  of  the  trunk,  (3)  the  six  upper  ganglia  send  branches  to  the  vertebrse  and  liga- 
ments ;  the  third  and  foiaih  send  branches  to  the  pulmonary  plexus,  and  through  it  com- 
municate with  the  lungs  ;  the  six  lower  send  branches  to  form  the  splanchnic  nerves. 

F  includes  the  four  lumber  ganglia,  located  in  front  of  the  vertebral  column,  along  the 
inner  margin  of  the  psoas  muscle.  It  supplies  branches  to  (1)  the  lumbar  spinal  nerves 
and  through  these  communicate  with  the  organs  of  the  pelvis  and  the  muscles  and  skin  of 
the  thighs,  (2)  the  lumbar  aortic  plexus,  (3)  the  hypogastric  plexus,  (4)  the  lumbar  vertebrse 
and  their  ligaments.  An  electrode  placed  over  the  fourth  lumbar  vertebra  can  be  made  to 
produce  contraction  of  the  bowels,  bladder,  uterus,  etc. 

G  includes  the  five  sacral  ganglia ;  they  are  located  in  front  of  the  sacrum,  along  the 
inner  side  of  the  anterior  sacral  foramina.  They  send  branches  to  (1)  the  sacral  nerves, 

(2)  middle  sacral  artery,  (3)  pelvic  plexus. 

H,  a  single  ganglion  in  which  the  great  sympathetic  terminates.  It  is  located  in  front 
of  and  at  the  end  of  the  coccyx. 

Plexuses  with  which  the  Sympathetic  Communicates. 

I,  carotid  plexus  which  sends  nerve  filaments  to  (1)  carotid  artery,  (2)  dura  mater, 

(3)  eyes,  (4)  teeth.  It  may  be  reached  indirectly  through  the  superior  and  middle  cervical 
ganglia. 

J,  branches  from  the  superior  cervical  ganglia  distributed  to  the  pharynx.  These 
pharyngeal  branches  form  the  motor  nerve  of  the  pharynx  and  soft  palate,  and  also  give 
sensation  to  the  palate.  When  treating  disease  of  these  parts  one  electrode  should  be 
placed  over  the  second  and  third  cervical  vertebrse,  where  the  nerve  center  may  be 
reached. 

K,  branches  from  the  cervical  ganglia  to  the  heart. 

L,  deep  cardiac  plexus.  It  lies  behind  the  arch  of  the  arota  and  can  be  reached 
only  indirectly  through  the  cervical  ganglia  and  the  pneumogastric.  ^See  motor  point 
Fig.  72.) 

M,  superficial  cardiac  plexus  lies  beneath  the  arch  of  the  aorta  in  front  of  the  right 
pulmonary  artery.  It  may  be  stimulated  through  the  cervical  ganglia  and  the  pneu- 
mogastric. 

N,  solar  plexus,  located  behind  the  stomach  and  in  front  of  the  aorta  and  crura  of 
the  diaphragm.  It  supplies  all  the  viscera  of  the  abdominal  cavity.  To  thoroughly  stimu- 
late this  plexus  and  the  organs  which  it  supplies,  the  spinal  electrode  should  be  moved 
over  both  the  dorsal  and  lumbar  ganglia,  and  the  other  electrode  over  the  pit  of  the 
stomach  and  extending  to  within  two  finger-breadths  of  the  umbilicus.  Any  local  irrita- 
tion of  this  important  plexus  may  affect  (1)  the  diaphragm,  (2)  the  stomach,  (3)  the  liver,  (4) 
the  spleen,  (5)  the  kidneys,  (6)  the  intestines  (both  large  and  small),  (7)  the  sexual  organs,  (8) 
the  circulation,  especially  below  the  diaphragm,  which,  of  course,  exerts  an  influence 
upon  the  total  circulation. 

O,  aortic  plexus  is  derived  from  the  solar.  The  electrode  should  be  placed  over  the 
lower  lumbar  vertebra  to  influence  this  plexus.  It  supplies  the  inferior  vena  cava,  the 
descending  and  sigmoid  flexure  of  the  colon,  the  upper  part  of  the  rectum. 


ELECTEO-PHYSIOLOGY. 


255 


P,  hypogastric  plexus  supplies  all  the  organs  of  the  pelvis.  It  lies  in  front  of  the 
promontory  of  the  sacrum  and  between  the  two  common  iliac  veins.  It  receives  filaments 
from  the  lumbar  and  first  two  sacral  ganglia,  over  which  the  electrodes  may  be  placed 
when  a  current  is  to  be  sent  to  the  bladder,  rectum  or  sexual  organs.  It  is  also  connected 
with  the  aortic  plexus,  and  hence  may  be  reached  by  the  same  treatment  which  influences 
either  the  aortic  plexus  or  the  solar  from  whence  the  aortic  is  derived. 

G.  S.  The  Great  Splanchnic  f  These,  together  with  the  renal  splanchnic,  not  shown 
Nerve.  J  on  cut,  all  arise  from  the  thoracic  ganglia  and  supply 

L.  S.  The  Lesser  Splanchnic  |  filaments  to  all  the  important  organs  of  the  abdominal 
Nerve.  (.cavity. 


The  Splanchnic  Nerves. 

strong  faradization  of  these  nerves  arrests  the  peristaltic  movements  of  the  small  in- 
testines.* 

E,  the  ensiform  cartilage  terminating  the  sternum  (breast  bone),  to  which  the  dia- 
phragm is  attached  ;  (u)  the  umbilicus,  (a)  nasal  duct,  (b)  orifice  of  Eustachian  tube,  (c) 
Eustachian  Electrode. 

Figures  1  to  12  mark  the  location  of  the  ribs.  It  will  be  observed  by  comparison  with 
Fig.  74  that  they  are  joined  to  the  spine  at  points  considerably  higher  than  the  terminal 
ends  in  front. 

The  Scapula,  not  shown  on  the  cut,  lies  on  the  ribs  from  the  2d  to  the  7th  inclusive. 

The  Vertebrss  may  be  easily  counted  by  drawing  the  fingers  two  or  three  times  down 
the  entire  length  of  the  spine,  with  firm  pressure  ;  red  spots  will  mark  the  projections  on 
the  vertebrae. 

The  Kidney  is  most  accessible  below  the  last  rib  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  erector  spinae 
muscles.  A  portion  of  the  ascending  and  descending  colon  may  be  reached  by  an  elec- 
trode placed  on  either  side  of  the  spine  between  the  kidney  and  the  upper  edge  of  the 
hip  bone  outlined  on  above  cut. 


*  Pfluger,  1856. 


ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY. 


Fig.  74.   (After  Gray.) 


This  illustration  shows  the  principal  landmarks  for  locating  the  internal  organs  with 
sufficient  accuracy  for  the  purposes  of  electro-therapeutics. 
C  C  marks  the  clavicle. 

The  ribs  are  numbered  to  correspond  with  the  numbers  at  their  spinal  termini  given 
in  Fig.  73.  It  is  useful  to  remember  that  the  sternal  end  of  each  rib  lies  on  a  lower  level 
than  its  corresponding  vertebra,  A  line  drawn  horizontally  backward  from  the  middle  of 
the  third  costal  cartilage  at  its  junction  with  the  sternum  would  touch  the  body,  not  of  the 
third  dorsal  but  of  the  sixth  dorsal.  This  varies  a  little  according  to  the  length  of  the 
sternum. 

The  eleventh  and  twelfth  ribs  can  be  felt  even  in  corpulent  persons,  sloping  down- 
ward.  The  head  of  the  last  rib  is  on  a  level  with  the  spine  of  the  last  dorsal  vertebra. 

The  nipples  (of  males)  usually  lie  between  the  fourth  and  fifth  ribs,  about  three- 
fourths  of  an  inch  external  to  their  cartilages. 

The  right  lung,  directly  in  front,  is  shown  terminating  on  a  level  with  the  sixth  rib, 
and  the  left  lung,  between  the  sixth  and  seventh  ribs. 

The  heart  is  marked  by  a  dark  outline.  The  usual  place  to  locate  the  electrodes  for 
reaching  it  is  over  the  sternum  (breast  bone)  j  ust  above  E,  while  the  other  is  placed  over 


ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY. 


257 


the  cervical  ganglia  (see  Fig.  73),  or  at  the  right  side  of  the  neck  at  the  point  where  the 
electrode  A  is  placed  in  the  cut.  An  electrode  at  the  same  spot  on  the  left  side  of  the 
neck  modifies  the  respiratory  movements.  * 

The  lobes  of  the  lungs  are  outlined  by  the  wavy  dark  line  just  above  the  fourth  rib  on 
the  right,  and  between  the  fifth  and  sixth  on  the  left. 

The  diaphragm  is  marked  by  the  irregular  dark  line  extending  across  the  cut.  This 
shows  its  attachment  in  front  to  the  ribs  and  sternum. 

E  marks  the  cartilage  ending  the  sternum  (ensiform  cartilage). 

The  stomach  may  be  electrized  by  placing  a  large,  broad  electrode  between  the  false 
ribs  below  E  and  two  fingers'  breadth  above  U. 

The  liver  may  be  reached  by  pressing  one  electrode  inward  and  upward  just  below  the 
tenth  rib.  When  the  stomach  is  empty  the  liver  may  also  be  reached  by  pressing  the 
electrode  located  below  the  sternum  a  little  inward  to  the  right,  and  upward. 

G  indicates  the  location  of  the  gall  bladder. 

The  colon,  when  treated  for  torpidity,  should  have  the  negative  electrode  carried  over 
it  from  R  J  to  L  J,  in  the  direction  indicated  by  the  arrows. 

U  is  the  umbilicus.  It  is  located  as  a  rule  above  the  level  of  the  body  of  the  third 
lumbar  vertebra. 

The  spleen.   Place  a  broad  electrode  over  the  tenth  and  eleventh  ribs  on  the  left. 

The  bladder  may  be  reached  by  placing  one  electrode  above  the  pubic  bone  and  the 
other  over  the  ganglia  F  and  G,  Fig.  73. 

Electrode  B  marks  the  location  from  which  a  current  may  be  made  to  reach  the 
brachial  plexus  of  the  corresponding  side. 

Electrode  A  marks  the  point  at  which  the  current  may  be  made  to  stimulate  the 
pneumogastrics  and  cervical  sympathetics. 


*  Arloing  and  Tripier,  Brown-Sequard's  Arch.  Phys.,  1873. 


CHAPTER  X. 


ELECTRO-DIAGNOSIS. 

Electricity  is  employed  as  an  aid  in  diagnosis  in  the  fol- 
lowing cases : 

1.  To  distinguish  between  apparent  and  real  death  (elec- 
tro-bioseopy) ; 

2.  Between  feigned  and  real  disease  (to  detect  malingerers)  ^ 

3.  To  distinguish  between  different  forms  of  paralysis  (cen- 
tral and  peripheral) ; 

4.  To  detect  the  presence  and  location  of  the  bullet  in  gun- 
shot wounds. 

The  horrible  fate  of  being  buried  alive  is  so  much  to  be 
dreaded,  that  any  means  which  will  aid  in  determining  whether 
life  is  extinct  in  doubtful  cases  should  be  regarded  worthy 
of  a  trial.  The  signs  of  death  which  are  most  generally  relied 
upon  are  cessation  of  respiration  and  the  heart's  action,  a  con- 
siderable fall  in  temperature,  stiffening  of  the  muscles  (rigor 
mortis),  the  dull  cornea,  the  dilated  pupil,  non-transparency  of 
the  fingers  to  lamplight,  and,  finally,  decomposition.  These 
signs,  however,  are  occasionally  of  doubtful  value,  since  all 
except  the  last  have  been  present  in  cases  of  trance.  Decom- 
position, when  it  occurs,  is  an  unquestionable  sign  of  death ; 
but  occasionally  it  is  very  much  delayed,  especially  in  cases  ot 
poisoning,  habitual  drunkards,  and  those  who  die  from  wasting 
disease.  Althaus  claims  that  ' '  none  of  these  signs  are  as  ready 
and  decisive  as  faradization^  which  indicates' death  with  absolute 
certainty  within  two  or  three  hours  after  its  occurrence. "  Authors 
are  not  agreed  as  to  the  length  of  time  after  death  at  which 

(258) 


ELECTRO-DIAGNOSIS. 


259 


the  power  of  the  faradic  current  to  excite  muscular  contractions 
ceases.  Onimus  experimented  on  the  body  of  a  criminal  soon 
after  decapitation,  to  determine  the  effect  of  the  faradic  current 
on  muscular  contractility  after  death.  He  found  that  it  is  lost 
in  the  diaphragm  and  tongue  first,  and  within  two  hours  and  a 
half  in  all  the  facial  muscles.  In  the  limbs  the  extensor  muscles 
are  the  first  to  die,  while  the  flexors  retain  their  excitability 
about  one  hour  longer.  Five  or  six  hours  after  death  the 
muscles  of  the  trunk  still  answer  to  faradization,  and  the 
abdominal  muscles  are  particularly  tenacious  in  this  respect. 
Long  after  the  muscles  of  the  extremities  have  become  insen- 
sible to  the  faradic  stimulus,  the  abdominal  muscles,  when 
exposed  to  the  air  and  cut  up,  may  be  seen  to  contract. 

Prof.  Rosenthal*  states  that  muscular  death  does  not  cor- 
respond with  general  death  of  the  body,  but  follows  the  latter 
at  a  period  varying  from  thirty  minutes  to  several  hours.  He 
followed  the  gradual  extinction  of  both  faradic  and  galvanic 
excitability  of  the  nerves  and  muscles  after  death  in  twenty 
cases,  the  patients  having  died  from  various  diseases,  such  as 
pneumonia,  apoplexy,  fever,  etc.  He  found  that  post-mortem 
electric  excitability  disappears  more  rapidly  after  death  from 
chronic  than  acute  disease ;  that  it  remains  longer  in  well- 
nourished  than  in  wasted  bodies,  and  that  it  is  generally  extin- 
guished in  from  ninety  minutes  to  three  hours.  In  a  case  of 
drowning,  a  feeble  faradic  current  produced  good  contractions 
within  the  first  hour ;  after  that  it  was  necessary  to  increase 
the  power  of  the  current  in  order  to  cause  contractions  of  the 
same  strength  as  before.  In  three  and  one-quarter  hours  electric 
excitability  had  everywhere  vanished.  Stiffening  of  the  muscles 
(rigor  mortis)  appeared  only  after  five  hours  in  the  hand  and 
six  in  the  elbow.    He  reports  attending  a  case  of  trance,  a 

*  Professor  of  Physiology  in  the  University  of  Erlangen.  Physiology  of  Muscles  and 
Nerves,  1881. 


260 


ELECTRO-DIAGNOSIS. 


hysterical  woman,  who  had  been  apparently  dead  for  thirty-two 
hours.  All  the  muscles  of  the  face  and  extremities  contracted 
under  the  faradic  current,  therefore  he  recommended  measures 
for  resuscitation  ;  twelve  hours  afterward  she  spontaneously 
awoke,  recovered,  and  was  alive  two  years  after. 

M.  Crimotel,  of  Paris,  having  experimented  in  a  number  of 
cases  of  apparent  death,  and  also  upon  persons  who  had  died 
from  the  most  varied  complaints,  arrived  at  these  conclusions  : 

1.  Death  is  certain  when  all  the  muscles  have  entirely  lost 
their  faradic  contractility.  No  disease,  poisoning  or  asphyxia 
will,  during  life,  abolish  electric  contractility  in  all  the  muscles 
of  the  body. 

2.  Faradic  electricity  is  an  indispensable  test  whether  life 
is  extinct,  in  all  cases  of  apparent  death  occurring  sud- 
denly. When  there  are  several  victims,  as  after  accidents,  it 
enables  the  attendants  to  distinguish  the  dead  from  the  living, 
and  also  the  order  in  which  the  dead  ceased  to  live. 

3.  In  newly-born  infants,  muscular  contractility,  under  the 
influence  of  the  faradic  current,  continues  fifty  to  sixty  minutes 
after  the  heart  has  ceased  to  beat.  When  they  have  never 
exhibited  signs  of  life,  the  faradic  test  shows  whether  life  is 
really  extinct. 

4.  In  some  cases  of  cholera,  electro-muscular  contractions 
cease  within  half  an  hour  after  death. 

FEIGNED  DISEASE  (m  A  LINGERING). 

Diseases  are  frequently  feigned  for  the  purpose  of  exciting  sym- 
pathy, extorting  charity,  evading  work,  and  in  some  instances  with 
a  view  to  obtaining  damages  after  accidents.  Faradization  of  the 
skin  with  the  wire  brush  (electric  fustigation),  especially  over 
bony  projections,  is  an  excellent  means  of  settling  the  question 
in  most  cases.  It  is  exceedingly  painful,  and  yet  never  does 
harm,  except  where  there  is  disease  of  the  brain,  when  it 


ELECTRO-DIAGNOSIS. 


261 


should  be  avoided.  Paralysis,  ankylosis  and  epilepsy  are  the 
favorite  diseases  with  malingerers.  In  the  former  disease  the 
symptoms  complained  of  are  such  as  are  due  to  peripheral 
(formerly  called  functional)  paralysis,  as  the  class  of  persons 
who  would  lend  themselves  to  such  imposture  seldom  are 
sufficiently  acquainted  with  the  symptoms  due  to  diseases  of 
the  nerve  or  brain  substance  to  successfully  imitate  them ; 
therefore,  if  the  muscles  respond  to  stimulation  by  electricity 
after  the  patient  has  complained  two  weeks,  we  may  conclude 
that  it  is  a  case  of  imposition.  In  cases  that  are  obscure, 
and  where  a  correct  diagnosis  is  of  importance  in  settling  the 
question  of  damages,  the  examination  should  be  conducted  as 
directed  for  diagnosing  obscure  cases  of  paralysis. 


UNIVERSAL  HANDLE  WITH  SPONGE-COVERED  DISC. 
Length  of  handle,  43^  in. 
Diam.  of  disc,  2  in. 

This  electrode  handle  is  made  of  wood,  well  seasoned,  and  varnished  to  insulate  it. 
A  metal  rod  passes  through  the  center,  having  at  one  end  a  smooth  socket  to  receive  the 
conducting  cord,  and  at  the  other  end  a  socket  cut  in  threads  to  receive  any  style  of  elec- 
trode that  terminates  in  a  screw,  in  the  place  of  the  disc  shown  in  the  cut. 

Method  of  electro-diagnosis  in  pa/rcdysis.  It  is  necessary 
that  the  physician  be  provided  with  both  the  galvanic  and 
faradic  currents,  since  one  is  frequently  capable  of  exciting  con- 
tractions when  the  other  fails.  The  difficulties  formerly  attend- 
ing the  employment  of  electricity  in  diagnosis  have  been 
almost  entirely  done  away  witli  since  the  introduction  of  the 
Mcintosh  Combined  Batteries,  which  render  it  as  easy  to  use 
one  current  as  the  other.  There  are  three  methods  of  apply- 
ing the  currents,  indirect^  direct  and  jjolar. 


262 


ELECTRO-DIAGNOSIS. 


Indirect  method.  This  consists  in  placing  one  electrode 
over  the  ganglia  (see  Fig.  73)  or  nerve  trunk  that  supplies 
the  muscle,  and  the  other  over  some  indifferent  point. 

Direct  method.  In  this,  one  electrode  is  placed  {a)  over 
the  motor  point  (Fig.  72)  of  the  muscle,  or  (5)  direct  to  the 
muscle  itself,  and  in  either  case  the  alternate  electrode  is 
placed  at  some  indifferent  point. 

Polar  method.  This  is  accomplished  {ci)  by  placing  both 
poles  of  the  battery  on  the  nerve  or  muscle  to  be  acted  upon, 
or  (^)  placing  first  one  pole  and  then  the  other  on  the  nerve 
or  muscle,  while  the  alternate  pole  in  each  case  is  on  some 
distant  part  of  the  body.  In  this  way  the  action  of  the  two 
poles  is  not  confused,  and  the  results  can  be  observed  sepa- 
rately. 


Fig.  76. 
FOLDING  FOOT-PLATE. 
Each  half  is  83^X4  in. 


This  electrode  is  composed  of  two  equal  nickel-plated  pieces  of  metal,  hinged  in  the 
middle,  so  that  they  may  be  folded  together  to  occupy  less  space  when  not  in  use.  A  bind- 
ing post  at  one  corner  receives  the  conducting  cord.  A  flannel  cover  is  placed  over  the 
metal  when  used,  and  fastened  on  two  buttons  attached  to  the  under  surface  of  the  metal 
plates.  (It  must  be  wet  in  warm  water  when  applied  to  the  feet.)  Beneath  these  plates  is 
a  piece  of  rubber-cloth,  also  held  in  place  by  the  buttons,  which  insulates  the  foot-plate 
and  prevents  moistening  the  carpet. 

Instruments  required  for  electro-diagnosis.  The  operator,, 
while  sitting  or  standing  near  the  patient,  must  have  all  his 
apparatus  around  him  within  easy  reach,  and  a  variety  of 
electrodes  suited  to  the  parts  to  be  examined.  He  will  find 
it  convenient  to  be  provided  with  (in  addition  to  the  sponge- 
covered  electrodes  (Fig.  75)  that  accompany  the  combined 
batteries),  a  foot-plate  (Fig.  76),  a  pair  of  Duchenne's  points 


ELECTRO-DIAGNOSIS. 


263 


(Fig.  77),  a  pole  changer  (Fig.  33),  if  the  battery  is  not  pro- 
vided with  one,  one  or  more  metallic  discs  (Fig.  78)  with 
suitable  covers  (Fig.  79),  a  comb  electrode  (Fig.  80),  a 
seven-toothed  metallic  electrode  (Fig.  81),  and  to  these  might 
be  added  others,  provided  special  organs  are  to  be  examined. 
If  a  lady  patient  is  to  be  submitted  to  this  method  of  diag- 
nosis, a  long-handled  sponge  electrode  (Fig.  82)  is  almost 
essential,  and  if  the  operator  is  without  an  assistant,  a  self- 
retaining  neck  electrode  (Fig.  83)  will  also  be  required. 


Fig.  77. 

DUCHENNE'S  POINTS. 
Length  of  Horizontal  part,  3^  in. 
Length  of  Oblique  part,  1  in. 

These  consist  of  nickel-plated  rods  terminating  in  gold  points,  and  are  especially- 
adapted  to  localizing  a  current  at  motor  points. 

To  prepare  the  patient  for  examination.  The  patient  must 
be  placed  in  a  good  light,  perfectly  at  rest,  with  all  the  mus- 
cles relaxed  and  both  sides  of  the  body  in  the  same  position. 
The  upper  extremities  are  best  examined  with  the  patient  sit- 
ting on  one  chair  with  the  forearms  resting  on  the  back  of 
another.  To  test  the  condition  of  the  lower  half  of  the  trunk 
and  the  lower  extremities,  the  recumbent  position  is  best. 
Throughout  the  examination  the  electrodes  and  skin  must  be 
well  moistened  to  enable  the  current  to  penetrate  to  the  nerve 
or  muscle.  Warm  water  is  the  best  fluid  to  use,  and  it  is 
scarcely  necessary  to  add  that  towels  should  be  placed  so  as 
to  prevent  the  bedclothes  or  dress  of  the  patient  from  becom- 
ing damp.  When  the  upper  part  of  the  hody  is  to  be  exam- 
ined, the  necklet  adjusted  to  hold  the  sponge  over  the  nape 
of  the  neck  is  a  suitable  arrangement.  If  the  lower  part  of 
the  hody  is  to  be  examined,  the  foot-plate  may  be  laid  under 
the  sacrum,  and  the  patient  can  lie  upon  it  to  keep  it  in  position, 


264 


ELECTKODIAGNOSIS. 


or  the  universal  electrode  may  be  held  over  the  sternum  or 
in  front  of  the  abdomen  by  the  hand.  The  most  suitable 
method  to  pursue  in  most  cases  of  extended  examination  is  to 
bind  a  broad,  flat,  moist  electrode  over  the  front  of  the  abdo- 
men with  elastic  tapes,  and  proceed  in  the  following  order : 

1.  Test  the  effect  of  the  faradic  current  upon  the  nerve  trunks. 

2.  Upon  the  motor  points.  3.  On  the  muscular  tissue.  4.  Apply 
the  galvanic  current  in  the  same  order.  It  is  customary  to 
apply  the  negative  electrode  of  the  secondary  current,  when 
faradism  is  used,  to  the  part  to  be  tested.  The  galvanic  cur- 
rent necessitates  observing  the  effect  of  first  one  pole  and  then 
the  other.  Commence  with  a  weak  current  and  press  the 
electrode  firmly  in  place.  The  patella  is  recommended  as  an 
''indifferent"  point  upon  which  to  place  one  electrode. 

Fig.  78. 
METALLIC  DISCS. 
Diam.  1%,  lYs,  %  in. 

These  are  nickel-plated  metallic  disc  electrodes,  adapted  to  the  purpose  of  localizing 
the  current  on  a  comparatively  small  space,  as  over  a  nerve  trunk,  ganglion,  or  upon  a 
muscle.  They  are  also  employed  to  apply  a  current  to  an  ulcer,  indolent  swellings,  and  in 
all  localities  to  which  their  size  is  adapted.  For  lengthy  applications  they  may  be  retained 
in  place  by  an  elastic  band  or  simple  bandage.  They  should  be  covered,  when  used,  with 
moist  flannel  or  cloth,  which  may  be  tied  over  them. 

ELECTRICAL   REACTIONS    IN  HEALTH. 

In  health,  the  muscles  supplied  by  the  symmetrical  nerves 
of  the  two  sides  of  the  body  are  excited  to  contraction  by  the 
same  strength  of  current.  On  irritating  a  motor  nerve  with 
electricity,  the  only  visible  phenomenon  which  follows  is  con- 
traction of  all  the  muscles  which  it  supplies.  Contraction  does 
not  depend  simply  upon  the  power  of  the  nerve  to  conduct 


ELECTRO-DIAGNOSIS. 


265 


electricity.  The  latter  excites  the  nerve  cells  to  exercise  their 
functions.  This  is  proven  by  the  fact  that  if  a  nerve  be  in- 
jured or  diseased,  no  electric  stimulation  and  no  contractions 
are  produced,  although  its  power  of  conducting  the  current  is 
in  no  way  interfered  with.  It  is  also  shown  by  this  additional 
fact,  that  the  further  from  the  muscle  a  healthy  nerve  is  irri- 
tated, the  greater  is  the  effect  produced^  and  this  is  increased 
if  a  portion  of  the  nerve  center  be  included  in  the  circuit. 


Fig.  79. 
ELECTRODE  COVER. 

This  is  suitable  for  discs,  universal  sponge  or  other  electrodes,  either  to  protect  sponge 
or  to  lessen  the  pain  produced  by  direct  metallic  contact  with  skin.  Thin  flannel  or  muslin, 
cut  in  circular  form  large  enough  to  slip  over  the  electrode  for  which  it  is  made,  is  gathered 
upon  a  rubber  band.  It  may  be  laundried  repeatedly. 

Effect  of  faradism.  Each  shock  of  the  current  produces  a 
muscular  contraction,  immediately  followed  by  relaxation ;  but 
as  in  the  ordinary  apparatus  these  interruptions  rapidly  suc- 
ceed one  another,  there  are  no  apparent  intermissions,  one 
contraction  not  having  ceased  before  another  takes  place  ;  hence 
there  is  tetanus  of  the  muscle  so  long  as  the  current  is  pass- 
ing. Rapidly  interrupted  faradism  is  the  most  powerful  elec- 
trical stimulant  to  healthy  nerve. 

Effect  of  galvcmism.  The  muscular  contraction  produced 
by  a  galvanic  current  occurs  at  the  moments  when  the  circuit 
is  opened  and  closed,  no  contraction  occurring  while  the  cur- 
rent passes  without  interruption.  The  negative  pole  always 
produces  a  stronger  contraction  than  the  positive.  These  prac- 
tical facts  should  not  be  lost  sight  of  in  electro-diagnosis : 


266 


ELECTRO-DIAGNOSIS. 


1.  In  healthy  persons,  the  contraction  produced  by  closing 
the  circuit  at  the  negative  pole  exceeds  that  produced  by  closing 
the  circuit  at  the  positive  pole. 

2.  Also  the  opening  of  the  circuit  at  the  positive  pole  pro- 
duces stronger  contractions  than  when  the  circuit  is  opemd  at 
the  negative  pole. 

3.  In  health,  the  galvanic  current  applied  to  a  nerve  does 
not  produce  as  strong  contractions  as  the  faradic  current. 

4.  When  a  muscle  is  deprived  of  its  nerve  influence  by 
poison  or  otherwise,  leaving  its  fibers  healthy,  the  reactions 
are  very  different. 


r 


Fig.  80. 

COMB  ELECTRODE. 
Length,  4  in. 

This  is  a  nickel-plated  comb,  with  a  single  row  of  stiff  wire  teeth,  used  to  localize  a 
current  along  the  course  of  a  nerve  or  slender  muscle. 

[a)  The  faradic  will  then  produce  no  contraction  of  the 
muscle  whatever,  no  matter  how  slowly  the  interruptions  may 
be  made. 

(b)  The  influence  of  the  galvanic  current  is  increased  so 
that  a  weaker  power  is  required  to  produce  contractions  than 
in  the  normal  state. 

In  this  condition  there  is  not  only  contraction  at  the  instant 
of  opening  and  closing  the  galvanic  current,  but,  if  the  current 
be  strong,  there  is  often  a  tetanic  spasm  during  its  continued 
passage. 

5.  With  a  normal  nerve  supply,  the  more  rapidly  the 
galvanic  current  is  interrupted,  the  more  vigorous  is  the  mus- 


ELECTRO-DIAGNOSIS. 


267 


cnlar  contraction.  When  the  nerve  supply  is  cut  off,  the 
reverse  is  true. 

6.  The  relative  excitability  of  different  nerves  and  muscles 
depends  upon  the  tissues  lying  between  the  electrode  and  the 
nerve  or  muscle  to  be  examined.  When  one  side  only  is 
diseased,  it  can  be  readily  compared  with  the  healthy  side; 
but  if  both  sides  are  attacked  it  is  more  difficult  to  determine 
the  amount  of  change  that  has  resulted. 

The  comparative  irritahility  of  the  different  nerves  and 
muscles  throughout  the  hody.  This  is  an  important  point,  since 
we  cannot  compare  one  leg  with  the  other  when  both  are 
diseased ;  but,  knowing  the  relative  irritability  of  certain  points, 
the  lower  extremities  may  be  compared  with  healthy  regions, 
and  theii'  condition  be  thus  indirectly  determined. 


Fig.  81. 

METALLIC  POINTS. 
Length,  2  in. 

This  electrode  resembles  the  comb  electrode,  but  is  better  adapted  to  the  examination 
of  short  muscles  of  the  face,  hands  and  feet. 

Dr.  Hughes  Bennett  *  has  made  a  series  of  observations  on 
the  normal  subject,  with  the  view  of  attempting  to  deduce 
some  definite  facts  concerning  the  electric  excitability  of  the 
nerve  trunks,  the  motor  points,  and  the  muscles,  from  which 
he  has  derived  these  conclusions  :  When  a  very  weak  faradic 
current  is  in  turn  applied  to  all  the  nerve-trunks  of  the  body, 
and  very  gradually  increased  in  strength,  the  first  to  show  any 

*  Member  of  Royal  College  of  Physicians,  London;  physician  to  the  Hospital  for 
Epilepsy  and  Paralysis,  etc.  etc.;  author  of  "  Electro-Diagnosis  in  Nervous  Disease." 


268 


ELECTRO-DIAGNOSIS. 


signs  of  response  is  the  spinal  accessory.  (See  Fig.  72.)  This 
seems  to  be  the  most  sensitive  to  electric  irritation  in  the  body. 
As  the  current  is  slowly  increased,  the  next  nerve  to  respond 
is  the  branch  from  the  cervical  plexus  to  the  levator  anguli 
scapulse  muscle.  A  further  but  very  slight  increase  brings  the 
ulnar  into  action.  Increased  a  little  more  the  median  facial, 
remainder  of  cervical  plexus,  anterior  crural  and  external  pop- 
liteal, react,  all,  as  nearly  as  possible,  being  of  equal  excita- 
bility, varying  a  little  in  different  individuals.  A  further 
increase  brings  into  action  the  musculo-spiral  and  the  internal 
popliteal.  The  following  table  gives  the  order  of  excitability 
in  the  various  superficial  nerve-trunks : 

1.  Spinal  accessory.  6.  Cervical  plexus. 

2.  Branch  to  levator  anguli  scapulae.  7.  Anterior  crural. 

3.  Ulnar.  8.  External  popliteal. 

4.  Median.  9.  Musculo-spiral. 

5.  Facial.  10.  Internal  popliteal. 


Fig.  82. 
SPINAL  ELECTRODE. 
Length  of  stem,  12  in.  Diameter  of  disc,  4  in. 


The  disc  of  this  electrode  consists  of  a  metallic  plate,  covered  with  sponge  upon  the- 
anterior  and  soft  rubber  on  the  posterior  surface.  The  long  metallic  stem  is  insulated  with 
hard  rubber  and  is  made  to  fit  the  universal  handle,  which  adds  43^  inches  to  its  length. 
It  is  designed  to  be  used  beneath  the  clothing. 

Suppose  a  case  to  be  examined  has  both  legs  paralyzed,  we 
cannot  compare  one  with  the  other,  but  we  may  arrive  at  an 
approximate  idea  of  the  truth  by  comparison  with  healthy  parts 
of  the  body.  Thus  the  cmterior  crural  and  external  popliteal 
nerves  in  health  are  about  equal  to  the  median  and  facial  in 


ELECTRO-DIAGNOSIS. 


269 


excitability.  The  internal  popliteal  is  about  the  same  as  the 
mimulo-spiral^  or  somewhat  less  excitable  than  the  median. 

The  motor  points  diminish  somewhat  in  irritability  at  the 
peripheral  as  compared  with  the  central  portions  of  the  body. 
The  best  general  guide  is  the  nearest  healthy  nerve-trunk^  the 
excitability  of  which  is  a  little  greater  than  the  motor  points 
near  it.  For  example,  a  current  which  produces  vigorous  con- 
tractions when  applied  to  the  ulnar  nerve  will  cause  well- 
marked  action  of  all  motor  points  in  front  of  the  forearm,  but 
not  to  the  same  extent  as  when  the  trunk  is  stimulated. 

The  muscle  substance  requires  a  stronger  current  to  produce 
contraction  than  is  necessary  when  the  latter  is  applied  directly 
to  the  nerve  supplying  the  muscle.  Muscular  irritability  varies 
thus  : 


Fig.  83. 

NECK  ELECTRODE  OR  NECKLET. 

This  consists  of  a  sponge-covered  disc  fastened  to  a  black  hard-rubber  spring  to  retain 
the  disc  in  place.  A  binding  post  receives  the  conducting  cord.  A  similar  device  is  made 
to  retain  one  electrode  on  the  arm  or  about  the  body,  which  is  much  used  in  the  electro- 
thermal bath.  It  is  very  convenient  for  the  operator  since  it  leaves  both  hands  free. 

{o)  Those  best  supplied  with  nerve  branches  are  most 
readily  stimulated  by  the  faradic  current. 

ih)  The  larger  and  coarser  the  fiber  of  the  muscle  the  more 
powerful  a  galvanic  current  must  be  used  to  produce  con- 
traction. 

((?)  The  conducting  media  (skin,  fat,  connective  tissue)  and 


270 


ELECTRO-DIAGNOSIS. 


state  of  skin  (moist  or  dry)  vary  in  different  localities,  and 
modify  the  action  of  both  currents. 

{d)  The  muscles  of  the  upper  extremities  are  more  easily 
stimulated  than  those  of  the  lower ;  the  flexors  of  the  arms 
more  than  the  extensors,  and  the  inner  and  anterior  aspects  of 
the  legs  more  than  the  outer  and  posterior.  Those  of  the 
trunk,  and  especially  the  large  muscles  of  the  back  and  abdomen, 
are  less  irritable,  as  a  rule,  than  those  of  the  limbs,  and  the 
back  less  than  the  front  of  the  body. 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  IN  ELECTRO-DIAGNOSIS  OF  PARALYSIS. 

Cases  of  paralysis  giving  normal  electrical  reaction  usually 
indicate  that  the  disease  originates  in  the  hrain  or  white  col- 
umns of  the  cord. 

Cases  of  paralysis  giving  abnormal  electrical  reaction  usually 
indicate  disease  of  either  the  grey  matter  of  the  cord^  or  the 
^peripheral  nerves.  The  evidence  is  stronger  if  the  electrical 
responses  are  changed  in  quality  and  character  in  addition  to 
quantity  and  degree. 

Paralysis  of  one  side  of  the  body  (hemiplegia)  is  usually 
due  to  hrain  disease. 

Paralysis  of  the  lower  half  of  the  body,  including  the 
bladder  and  rectum  (paraplegia),  is  generally  due  to  spinal 
disease. 

Cross  paralysis,  where  the  loss  of  power  is  irregular,  as 
when  it  affects  the  face  on  one  side  and  a  limb  on  the  other 
(hemiplegia  alternate),  may  be  dependent  on  disease  of  the 
hrain  or  the  white  columns  of  the  cord. 

The  reaction  in  hemiplegia  alternate  is  normal^  therefore 
the  disease  cannot  be  exactly  located  by  electricity,  but  must 
be  determined  by  general  symptoms,  often  a  matter  of  great 
difficulty.    Fortunately  the  latter  form  is  extremely  rare. 


ELECTRO-DIAGNOSIS. 


271 


When  electrical  reaction  is  greatly  increased.,  it  indicates 
hjper-excitabilitj  of  the  nervous  system  ;  and  when,  in  addition, 
reflex  muscular  contractions  are  produced  in  various  parts  of 
the  body  by  stimulation  of  a  nerve  in  the  paralyzed  parts,  it 
is  further  evidence  of  great  irritability  of  the  spinal  cord 
almost,  if  not  quite,  amounting  to  organic  disease.  When 
paralysis  is  confined  to  the  branches,  and  muscles  supplied  by 
a  single  nerve-trunk,  the  probability  is  that  the  lesion  is  of 
peripheral  origin. 

When  a  limb  has  lost  its  power  of  motion  as  a  result  of 
disease  of  the  cord.,  the  ahnormal  electrical  responses  may 
exist  in  one  of  three  ways. 

{a)  They  may  be  uniformly  distributed  throughout  the 
entire  paralyzed  member,  all  the  muscles  being  equally  affected. 
This  takes  place  in  gross  lesions.^  involving  a  mass  of  the  struc- 
ture of  the  cord. 

ijj)  They  may  be  distributed  only  to  certain  muscles  form- 
ing physiological  groups.,  irrespective  of  their  nerve  supply. 
For  example,  all  the  flexors  of  a  limb,  or  its  extensors,  may 
present  abnormal  reactions,  although  they  receive  their  nutritive 
supply  from  diflerent  sources.  This  occurs  in  chronic  affec- 
tions of  the  anterior  roots  of  tlie  spinal  nerves. 

((?)  They  may  be  irregularly  distributed,  affecting  muscles 
neither  in  anatomical  nor  physiological  groups.  This  often 
follows  acute  inflammation  of  the  grey  matter. 

id)  They  are  always  distributed  according  to  anatomical 
relations  in  peripheral  paralysis ;  in  other  words,  the  abnor- 
mal reactions  occur  only  in  those  structures  w^hich  receive 
their  nerve  supply  from  a  special  nerve-trunk  totally  irre- 
spective of  their  function. 

Hence  limited  paralysis.,  originating  in  the  cord^  may  be  dis- 
tinguished from  that  originating  in  a  ^^(j^^^A^m^  nerve  lesion, 
since  in  the  former  the  limb  is  uniformly  affected,  or  its  mus- 


272 


ELECTRO-DIAGXOSIS. 


cles  are  attacked  in  physiological  or  irregular  groups,  while  in 
the  latter  they  are  affected  according  to  their  anatomical  dis- 
tribution. 

Paralysis  arising  from  disease  of  the  grey  matter  of  the 
cord. 

{a)  When  the  abnormal  reactions  are  uniform,  extending 
over  an  entire  limb,  the  disease  occupies  a  mass  of  its  sub- 
stance, as  in  inflammation  of  the  substance  of  the  brain 
(myelitis). 

(h)  If  they  are  confined  to  certain  physiological  groups  of 
muscles,  the  disease  has  generally  been  chronic,  and  implicates 
the  anterior  roots  of  the  spinal  nerves,  as  in  progressive  mus- 
cular atrophy. 

(c)  If  the  degenerate  muscles  react  in  an  irregular  manner, 
neither  according  to  distribution  or  function,  the  disease  has 
usually  been  the  result  of  an  acute  inflammation  of  the 
anterior  cornua  which  has  destroyed  some  of  the  nutritive 
centers,  and  left  others  intact. 

When  a  nerve  is  found  deficient  in  response,  and  muscle 
normal,  it  shows  alteration  in  the  former,  the  latter  remaining 
intact,  as  is  sometimes  seen  in  the  early  stage  of  infantile 
paralysis. 

The  electrical  reactions  in  peripheral  paralysis  indicate 
with  exactitude  the  extent  and  distribution  of  the  disease. 

[a)  When  electrical  reactions  are  normal,  it  indicates  a 
paralysis  of  slight  and  temporary  form  ;  prognosis  is  favorable. 

{l))  Loss  of  response  when  either  current  is  applied  to 
nerve-trmiks  points  to  nerve-alteration,  and  this  in  proportion 
to  diminution  of  action. 

(<?)  Loss  of  response  to  faradism  applied  direct  to  a  mus- 
cle, indicates  changes  in  the  intra-muscular  nerves,  without 
necessary  alteration  of  the  fibers  themselves. 

id)  Loss  of  response  with  galvanism  Si^^liQdi  to  the  muscles. 


ELECTRO-DIAGNOSIS. 


273 


shows  a  modification  or  destruction  of  the  muscular  tissue,  and 
this  in  proportion  to  the  physical  changes  induced. 

Reaction  of  degeneration.  Immediately  after  a  muscle  has 
been  injured  severely  enough  to  destroy  a  portion  of  a  motor,  or 
mixed  nerve,  it  has  been  found  by  Erb  that  atrophy  of  the  muscu- 
lar fibers  sets  in,  which  may  be  seen  during  the  second  week,  and 
reaches  its  limit  about  the  fifth  or  sixth  week.  At  first  it  ceases 
to  respond  to  the  faradic  current,  then  follows  a  period  when 
it  will  act  only  to  a  slowly  interrupted  galvanic  current,  and 
finally  ceases  to  react  to  any  form  of  electrical  stimulation  ; 
he  termed  this  the  reaction  of  degeneration.  It  is  present  in 
paralyses  arising  from  rheumatism,  lead  palsy,  the  paralysis 
peculiar  to  writers,  telegraph  operators,  etc.  In  those  difiicult 
cases  after  railway  and  other  accidents,  when  persons  demand 
compensation  for  damages,  the  existence  of  the  reaction  of 
degeneration  would  be  a  fact  of  vital  importance  in  favor  of 
the  applicant,  as  it  would  indicate  that  he  was  sufiering  from 
a  serious  injury  of  the  nerves.  Such  a  demonstration  in  a 
court  of  justice  is  more  conclusive  than  any  amount  of 
authoritative  opinion. 

Fig.  84. 

Mcintosh  electric  probe. 

Prognosis  in  peripheral  paralysis.  Provided  the  cause  can 
be  removed,  as  a  rule,  if  there  be  but  little  wasting  of  the 
muscles  and  they  respond  somewhat  to  the  faradic  current,  a 
cure  may  be  expected  in  a  comparatively  short  time.  If  the 
muscles  are  much  wasted,  the  disease  has  existed  a  long  time, 
and  the  muscles  refuse  to  respond  to  the  application  of  either 
kind  of  a  current,  the  case,  though  possibly  curable,  requires 


274 


ELECTRO-DIAGNOSIS. 


a  guarded  prognosis.  In  case  of  complete  wasting  of  muscles 
following  paralysis,  it  is  useless  to  expect  improvement. 

TO  DETECT  THE  PRESENCE   AND  LOCATION  OF   A  BULLET,   OK  PIECES 
OF  METAL  IN  WOUNDS. 

The  electric  probe.  Fig.  84,  is  used  principally  to  ascertain  the 
location  of  the  bullet  in  gunshot  wounds,  but  it  may  be  used 
for  other  metals.  It  consists  of  a  pair  of  spiral  wires  insulated 
from  each  other  and  connected  through  the  sockets  A  and  B 
with  the  poles  of  a  single  galvanic  cell.  A  galvanometer  is  in- 
cluded in  the  circuit ;  when  the  probe  touches  a  piece  of 
metal,  either  at  the  end  or  at  any  part  of  its  length,  both 
wires  are  in  contact  with  it,  the  circuit  is  completed,  and  the 
galvanometer  needle  will  be  deflected.  If  a  powerful  cell  is 
attached  to  the  probe  the  circuit  may  be  completed  through 
electrolytic  action  in  the  tissues,  and  the  needle  will  be  de- 
flected when  no  metal  is  present.  To  prevent  this,  use  very 
weak  fluid  to  excite  the  elements. 


Fig.  85. 

McINTOSH  ELECTRIC  EXPLORING  NEEDLE. 


The  instrument  shown  in  Fig.  85  is  constructed  on  the 
plan  of  an  aspirating  needle.  N  is  a  canula  ;  a,  holder  for 
conducting  cord  ;  P,  an  insulated  needle.  It  is  designed  to 
be  used  when  the  course  of  the  missile  has  become  obliterated. 
One  pole  of  a  single  galvanic  cell  is  attached  to  P,  the  other 
to  a.  N  is  introduced  until  it  strikes  the  suspected  foreign 
body,  then  P  is  inserted  through  N.  A  galvanometer  is 
included  in  the  circuit,  and  the  deflection  of  the  needle  shows 
when  both  points  strike  a  piece  of  any  metallic  substance. 


ELECTEO-THEKAPEDTICS. 


275 


CHAPTER  XI. 

ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 

The  Beain.  It  is  believed  that  the  galvanic  current  pene- 
trates the  substance  of  the  brain,  while  the  faradic  current 
is  distributed  chiefly  to  the  membranes.  Erb  claims  that  elec- 
tricity enters  the  brain  only  at  the  openings  in  the  skull  through 
which  the  bloodvessels  pass,  but  it  is  probable  that  a  current 
can  also  be  guided  to  the  brain  through  the  reflex  function  of 
the  fifth  pair  of  cerebral  nerves. 

Althaus  reports  a  case  where  he  had  an  exceptional  opportu- 
nity to  observe  the  influence  of  these  nerves  upon  the  brain. 
There  was  complete  anaesthesia  of  the  entire  fifth  pair,  and  no 
cerebral  symptoms  were  produced  even  when  a  current  powerful 
enough  to  cause  intolerable  sensations  to  a  healthy  person  was 
sent  straight  through  the  head.  As  the  reflex  function  of  the 
nerves  was  restored,  the  patient  could  no  longer  bear  a  current 
without  decided  cerebral  symptoms. 

Lowenfeld  discovered  that  a  descending  galvanic  current 
(positive  at  nape  of  neck,  and  negative  at  forehead)  contracts 
the  vessels  of  the  brain  and  its  membranes  ;  an  ascending  galvanic 
current  dilates  them;  a  cross  galvanic  current,  i.e.  the  positive 
pole  applied  to  one  side  of  the  head  and  the  negative  to  the 
other,  dilates  the  vessels  on  the  side  of  the  positive  and  contracts 
them  on  the  side  of  the  negative  pole.  Faradic  currents  in  any 
direction  through  the  brain  produce  the  same  effect  upon  the  blood- 
vessels as  when  applied  elsewhere.  According  to  Weber,  they 
produce  at  first  anaemia  through  contraction,  followed  by  hyperse- 
mia  through  paralytic  affection  of  the  vessels.  Kolliker  and 
Remak  also  verified  these  observations. 

Some  persons  suffer,  after  galvanization  of  the  head,  from 
a  feeling  of  dullness    and   confusion   or  faintness,  and,  in 


276 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


certain  cases,  nausea  or  vomiting.  These  symptoms  are  usually 
caused  by  an  injudicious  selection  of  current,  or  too  long 
an  application  of  a  suitable  one.  Formerly  it  was  common  to 
employ  much  more  powerful  and  long-continued  treatments  than 
are  at  present  deemed  justifiable,  and  in  a  few  instances  attacks 
of  cerebral  hemorrhage,  followed  by  general  convulsions, 
paralysis,  etc.,  have  resulted. 

Diseases  in  which  the  application  of  electricity  to  the  hrain 
has  proven  beneficial : 

Cerebral  anemia,  Headache,  Opium  habit,  etc., 

Cerebral  hyper^emia,        Incipient  insanity.  Sleeplessness, 
Cerebral  exhaustion,        Morbid  depositions        Spasmodic  diseases  origi- 
Cerebral  paralysis,  in  the  brain,  nating  in  the  brain. 

Dipsomania,  Neuralgia, 

Method  of  applying  electricity  to  the  hrain.  There  are 
certain  general  rules  which  govern  the  application  of  elec- 
tricity to  all  parts  of  the  body,  but  it  is  impossible  to  formulate 
specific  rules  for  its  application  to  any  single  organ  or  disease. 
The  dose  of  electricity,  like  that  of  a  drug,  must  be  regulated 
by  the  age,  race  and  habits  of  life  of  the  patient  under 
treatment. 

The  skin  of  the  aged  is  firm,  frequently  dry,  and  is  less 
easily  penetrated  ;  therefore  it  will  require  not  only  larger  elec- 
trodes, but  that  they  be  placed  as  near  as  possible  to  the 
organ  or  muscle  through  which  the  current  is  sent.  The  skin 
of  dark  races  does  not  permit  a  current  to  pass  as  readily  as 
lighter  ones ;  therefore  they  need  to  have  the  electrodes  large 
and  near  together.  Those  accustomed  to  laborious  pursuits, 
involving  severe  muscular  exercise,  offer  great  resistance  to 
the  passage  of  the  current,  on  account  of  the  firmness  of  the 
muscular  tissue,  and  will  require  the  same  arrangement  of 
electrodes  as  the  preceding. 

There  are  several  ways  in  which  electrization  of  the  brain 
may  be  performed :   1.  Place  one  pole  on  the  forehead,  the 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


277 


otlier  on  the  back  of  the  head  (occiput).  2.  Place  one  pole 
over  each  temple,  3.  Place  one  pole  behind  each  ear  (on 
mastoid  process).  4.  One  very  large  electrode  on  the  top  of 
the  head  and  another  at  the  feet,  in  the  hands,  along  the 
spine  or  under  the  chin.  5.  To  electrize  one-half  the  brain, 
place  one  pole  on  the  eyebrow  and  the  other  on  the  mastoid 
process,  or  in  the  hand  of  the  same  side.  Less  dizziness  is 
caused  when  the  current  passes  through  one  side  of  the  head 
only,  or  from  forehead  to  occiput,  than  when  sent  from  one 
side  to  the  other  through  the  temples  or  mastcid  processes. 
To  avoid  shock  or  unpleasant  symptoms,  locate  the  electrodes 
hefore  completing  the  circuity  and  always  open  t/ie  circuit  he- 
fore  removing  them.  They  may  be  moved  over  the  surface 
when  necessary,  without  causing  irritation  while  the  circuit  is 
complete,  provided  that  they  are  not  raised  so  as  to  hreak  con- 
tact loith  the  patient.  One  or  two  zinc-carbon  cells  are  suffi- 
cient to  begin  with.  Others  may  be  joined  in  circuit  one  by 
one  with  a  current  selector.  When  cells  have  been  added  in 
this  way  they  must  be  removed  one  by  one  before  breaking 
the  circuit.  A  much  more  convenient  method  of  regulating 
the  current  and  avoiding  shock  is  to  introduce  a  rheostat  in 
the  circuit,  interpose  such  a  resistance  that  a  current  can 
scarcel}^  be  detected  on  closing  the  circuit,  and  then  increase 
the  strength  by  lowering  the  rod  if  a  water  rheostat  is  employed, 
or  lessening  the  number  of  buttons  included  in  the  rheostat 
circuit  when  the  one  shown  on  Fig.  63  is  employed.  The 
resistance  must  be  again  increased  before  the  circuit  is  opened. 
The  reason  for  this  will  be  apparent  if  the  operator  will  test  a 
galvanic  current  upon  his  own  head.  The  best  authorities  now 
recommend,  for  applications  of  galvanism  to  the  brain,  a  few 
cells  only  in  circuit,  three  to  six  freshly  charged  zinc-carbon  or 
twice  that  number  of  gravity  cells.  Faradism,  in  the  form  of 
a  primary  current,  may  be  employed  direct  from  the  battery. 


278 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


If  the  therapeutic  effect  of  the  secondary  is  required,  it  should 
be  carried  through  a  rheostat,  or  some  substitute  for  it,  as  the 
arm  of  the  patient  or  operator,  or  a  very  large  moist  sponge 
electrode  covered  with  moist  flannel.  The  length  of  sitting, 
depends  largely  upon  the  condition  of  the  case  ;  it  varies  from 
thirty  seconds  to  half  an  hour. 


B 

Fig.  86. 

ADJUSTABLE  SPONGE  HOLDER. 


A,  metallic  holder ;  diam.  1}^  in. 

c,  sponge  cup. 

d,  plate  upon  which  the  sponge  is  fastened,  the  edge  being  held  between  d  and  c. 
b,  the  nut  which  holds  c  and  d  together. 

a,  screw  which  fits  the  universal  handle. 
B  shows  the  sponge  adjusted  and  fastened. 

This  sponge  holder  cannot  be  too  highly  commended ;  a  sponge  of  any  size  may  be 
attached  or  removed  in  a  moment,  making  it  possible  to  employ  a  clean  sponge  in  every 
case.  The  metal  holder  is  nickel  plated  and  does  not  corrode  easily ;  a  little  care  in 
removing  the  wet  sponge  after  using  will  keep  it  in  good  order  for  years. 

Electrodes  suitable  to  use  in  electrization  of  the  hrain.  The 
universal  electrodes  may  be  employed  for  this  purpose,  or 
any  other  style  which  offers  a  sufliciently  large  surface  of 
contact.  When  they  are  placed  on  the  hair,  the  latter  must  be 
moist,  as  it  is  a  non-conductor  when  dry.  Sponge  electrodes 
are  preferable  for  the  top  of  the  head,  forehead  or  temples. 
Those  illustrated  in  Figs.  86,  87,  88  and  89  will  be  found 
very  satisfactory  for  all  purposes  where  a  comparatively  large 
electrode  is  required. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


279 


Anemia  and  Hyper^emia. —  All  diseases  accompanied  by 
anaemia  or  deficiency  of  blood  in  the  brain,  should  be  treated 
with  an  ascending  current ;  those  which  are  accompanied  by 
too  much  blood  in  the  brain  (congestion  or  hypersemia)  require 
a  descending  current.  It  should  be  understood  that  electricity 
is  not  employed  to  regulate  the  blood  supply  of  the  brain 
when  the  circulation  is  obstructed  by  tumors,  aneurism,  heart 
or  lung  disease. 

Fig.  87. 
BALL  ELECTRODE. 
Diam.  Vyi  in. 

This  nickel  plated  ball  is  placed  in  the  center  of  a  large  sponge  and  attached  directly 
to  a  conducting-cord. 

Cerebral  Exhaustion.^ — Wherever  sleeplessness  is  a  pro- 
minent symptom,  the  production  of  anelectrotonos  should  be 
the  rule.  Catelectrotonos,  on  the  other  hand,  is  an  excellent 
remedy  where  there  is  drowsiness  in  the  daytime." — [Althaus]. 
To  produce  anelectrotonos,  the  galvanic  current  is  employed,  a 
large  sponge  upon  the  head  forming  the  positive  pole,  and  an 
ordinary  electrode  in  the  patient's  hands  the  negative.  Cate- 
lectrotonos is  produced  in  a  similar  manner,  the  electrode  on 
the  head  in  this  case  being  negative,  the  one  in  the  hands 
positive.  One  to  five  minutes  is  the  usual  length  of  the 
application.  The  treatment  of  paralytic  affections  due  to  dis- 
ease of  the  brain  will  be  described  under  paralysis. 

Dipsomania. —  Habitual  drunkards  frequently  present  dis- 
ordered conditions  of  the  brain,  in  which  electricity  doubtless 
would  prove  beneficial.  Althaus  states  that  he  has  seen  many 
instances  where  mental  depression  and  nervousness  had  led 


280 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


the  sufferers  to  indulge  in  intoxicating  drinks  in  order  to 
overcome  their  wretched  sensations,  where  catelectrotonos  of 
the  brain,  spine  and  cervical  sympathetic  had  resulted  in 
recovery.  He  treated  one  case  successfully  that  presented  a 
state  of  complete  nervous  derangement  from  this  cause.  Forty- 
five  sittings  were  required.  Electro-thermal  baths  are  a  valuable 
aid  in  restoring  the  constitutional  vigor  after  it  has  become 
impaired  by  excesses  of  any  kind. 

Opium  Eating,  Excessive  Smoking,  etc. —  The  mental  and 
nervous  symptoms  that  accompany  the  effort  to  break  up 
these  habits  may  be  very  greatly  allayed  by  galvanization. 
Sleeplessness  is  usually  a  symptom  demanding  an  application 
of  the  positive  pole  to  the  brain  to  produce  anelectrotonos. 


Fig.  88. 

SPONGE-COVERED  HAND  ELECTRODE. 
Size,  43/2  X  4  inches. 


This  consists  of  a  thin  plate  of  metal,  covered  on  its  anterior  surface  with  sponge,  ou 
the  posterior  with  soft  rubber,  to  which  a  loop  of  soft  rubber  is  attached,  through  which 
the  operator's  hand  is  passed  when  the  electrode  is  used.  The  rubber  insulates  it  and  pro- 
tects the  patient's  clothing  from  moisture  when  employed  for  general  electrization.  A 
binding  post  beneath  the  rubber  receives  the  conducting  cord. 

Spasmodic  Diseases  resulting  from  disease  of  the  brain  will 
be  considered  in  connection  with  those  arising  from  other 
causes. 

Headache. —  Galvanism.  Headache  confined  to  one-half 
the  head  (hemicrania)  was  first  treated  systematically  by  Hoist, 
who  applied  the  galvanic  current.  One  small  electrode  is 
located  at  the  inner  edge  of  the  sterno-cleido-mastoid  muscle^ 


ELECTEO-THERAPEUTICS. 


281 


at  the  point  indicated  bj  motor  point  21,  Fig.  72,  and  the  other 
in  the  palm  of  the  hand.  Hemicrania,  attended  by  contracted 
condition  of  the  bloodvessels,  sunken  eye  and  features,  should 
have  the  7;>6>5zY/t'6  current  applied  through  the  electrode  at  the 
neck.  The  electrodes  are  located,  and  then  the  circuit,  in- 
cluding from  six  to  ten  zinc-carbon  cells,  is  closed  ;  after  two 
to  three  minutes  the  current  is  gradually  reduced  in  strength 
by  disconnecting  cells  one  by  one  from  the  circuit.  On  the 
contrary,  when  there  is  a  paralytic  condition  of  the  vaso-motor 
nerves,  shown  by  fullness  of  the  bloodvessels  and  injected  eye, 
the  electrode  at  the  neck  should  be  negative^  and  the  current 
should  be  interrupted,  or  in  some  cases  repeatedly  reversed,  by 
means  of  a  pole-changer.  This  treatment  usually  brings  a 
sense  of  comfort  and  relief  in  a  very  short  time,  and  in  some 
cases  it  appears  to  produce  a  lengthening  of  the  interval  between 
attacks. 


Fig.  89. 

CARBON  ELECTRODE. 
Diana,  of  disc,  1%  in. 


The  handle  of  this  electrode  is  made  of  polished  black  rubber,  in  the  same  style  as 
the  universal  handle,  to  which  it  is  superior  in  that  it  is  not  affected  by  moisture.  A  is  a 
disc  of  carbon,  insulated,  except  on  its  anterior  face,  with  hard  rubber.  B  represents  the 
carbon  face  of  the  disc.  A  sponge  may  be  attached  to  it  in  the  same  manner  as  described 
under  Fig.  86,  or  it  may  be  used  with  the  cover  shown  in  Fig.  79.  When  located  over  a 
point  that  has  little  sensitiveness,  it  may  be  used  without  a  cover.  Carbon  is  superior  to 
all  other  substances  employed  for  electrodes  in  cleanliness  and  freedom  from  corrosion. 

Faradism.  Frommhold  and  Fieber  recommend  the  induced 
current.  The  former  ])refers  the  primary  faradic,  with  one  pole 
high  up  the  back  of  the  neck  in  the  median  line,  and  the 
other  over  the  forehead  or  over  the  eyebrows.    Fieber  prefers 


282 


ELECTEO-THERAPEUTICS. 


the  electric  hand.  The  patient  holds  one  electrode  and  the 
operator  the  uninsulated  portion  of  the  other,  while  his  free  hand 
is  passed  over  the  patient's  head.  Forms  of  headache,  de- 
pendent upon  disease  of  some  other  organ,  require  treatment 
applied  at  the  seat  of  the  disease,  instead  of  to  the  brain 
exclusively.  General  faradization  and  central  galvanization  are 
both  beneficial  in  many  cases  where  headache  is  a  frequently 
recurring  symptom. 

Inctpiekt  Insanity. — Galvanism  possesses  great  value  as  an 
adjuvant,  when  properly  applied,  in  antagonizing  various  con- 
gestive states  of  the  brain,  which,  if  unchecked,  would  undoubt- 
edly result  in  organic  disease. 

Typical  cases  of  nerve  exhaustion,  accompanied  by  congestion  of  the 
brain,  impaired  nutrition,  dullness  of  perception,  melancholia,  inability  to 
bear  stimulants,  with  restlessness,  sleeplessness,  perspirations,  and  loss  of 
elasticity  of  the  skin,  are  relieved  by  applying  the  galvanic  current  to 
the  head  daily  for  a  period  of  not  more  than  five  minutes  at  each  sitting, 
as  a  rule,  but  repeating  the  application  twice  daily  if  necessary.  Ame- 
lioration follows,  which  lasts  longer  each  time,  and  results  finally  in  a 
cure.  The  most  severe  forms  of  cerebral  congestion  are  amenable  to  this 
treatment,  even  when  accompanied  by  a  loss  of  consciousness.  A  proper 
tonic  contraction  of  the  cerebral  bloodvessels  is  secured,  thus  heading  off, 
perhaps,  mental  disease.  In  the  application  of  the  constant  current  to 
the  brain  to  antagonize  various  congestive  states,  the  positive  pole  is  to 
be  placed  at  the  level  of  the  first  cervical  vertebra,  and  the  negative  at 
the  level  of  the  superior  ganglia  of  one  of  the  cervical  sympathetic  nerves. 
The  current  should  be  interrupted,  since  vascular  contraction  occurs  most 
markedly  at  the  opening  and  closing  of  the  circuit. — Dr.  Mann. 

Dr.  Arndt,  of  Greifswald,  has  thoroughly  tested  electricity 
in  many  forms  of  insanity,  and  has  arrived  at  these  conclusions : 

Faradism  is  a  powerful  stimulant  upon  diseased  nervous 
centers,  and  should  therefore  not  be  employed  where  the  symp- 
toms point  to  increased  excitability,  i.e.^  in  all  so-called  primary 
cases.  It  also  does  not  answer  in  secondary  cases,  if  they  are 
marked  by  a  high  degree  of  irritable  weakness  and  a  tendency 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


283 


to  reflex  actions.  It  is  an  excellent  remedy  in  cases  of  simple 
atony  of  the  brain,  depression,  or  paralysis  of  function.  It 
must  not  be  forgotten  that  some  conditions  of  excitability  are 
not  owing  to  irritation,  but  to  paralysis;  and  some  forms, of 
stupor  may  be  caused  by  spasm  and  not  by  depression.  The 
latter  may  be  looked  for  when  there  are  symptoms  of  irritation 
in  other  organs  ;  for  instance,  where  respiration  is  sighing  or 
jerky,  where  there  is  much  hiccough  or  gaping,  irregularity  of 
the  heart's  action,  dilatation  of  the  pupils  or  difference  in  their 
size,  spasms  of  voluntary  musics,  etc.  When  no  such  symptoms 
are  present,  the  condition  may  be  looked  upon  as  one  of 
depression,  which  faradism  will  relieve. 

Faradization  of  the  dry  skin,  and  especially  electric  Instiga- 
tion of  the  upper  half  of  the  body,  sometimes  proves  an  excel- 
lent measure  in  disease  of  the  brain,  through  its  reflex  action. 

Arndt  recommends  faradization  of  the  phrenic  nerves  at  the 
neck  (see  Fig.  72)  in  depression  of  the  nerve  centers.  This 
rule  has  been  given  for  the  use  of  galvanism  in  insanity: 
Recent  cases  and  functional  diseases  are  benefited  hy  it^  while 
old  cases  and  structural  diseases  resist  its  influence. 

Melancholia. — Franklinism.  Dr.  Blackwood^  reports  a 
case  illustrating  the  beneficial  effects  of  franklinic  electricity 
in  suitable  cases. 

A  B,  a  case  of  melanchoha  persistent  for  four  years,  in  all  except  the 
mental  state,  healthy,  and  not  at  any  time  hysterical  or  excitable.  Drugs 
failing,  she  was  referred  to  me  for  electrical  treatment,  her  physician  being 
glad  to  drop  the  case.  I  put  her  on  general  faradization  four  times  a  week, 
with  some  benefit  after  a  month's  trial,  but,  not  being  satisfied  myself,  I 
substituted  static  electricity,  and  her  improvement  in  another  month  was 
decidedly  greater,  and  then  she  was  at  times  not  only  cheerful,  but  her 
interest  in  surrounding  affairs  was  noticeable  to  her  associates.  This 
method  of  treatment,  without  any  auxiliary,  in  four  months  did  more 
toward  recovery  than  all  former  plans  combined,  and  so  far  the  improve- 


*  Medical  Times,  October  22, 1881. 


284 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


ment  is  permanent.  She  was  treated  by  simple  charging  when  insulated, 
triweekly,  the  condition  being  maintained  for  half  an  hour  at  each  time ; 
and  although  to  my  mind  she  is  yet  abnormally  depressed  at  times,  she  is 
in  every  way  better,  and  her  friends  consider  her  recovery  perfect. 

Neuralgia  of  the  brain  will  be  considered  in  connection 
witli  neuralgia  of  other  organs. 

Morbid  Depositions  in  the  Brain.  Gal/oanism  has  been 
used  by  Althaus  to  remove  morbid  depositions  from  the  brain. 
Hughes'^  states  that  he  has  seen  paralysis  of  one  side  of  the 
body,  loss  of  voice,  and  difficulty  in  swallowing,  from  disease 
of  the  brain,  disappear  under  its  use  combined  with  internal 
medication. 

Dr.  Barraquer  has  employed  magnetism  in  a  case  of  paral- 
ysis from  cerebral  hemorrhage  occurring  three  years  previously. 
A  powerful  electro-magnet,  weighing  250  to  300  pounds,  was 
held  within  an  inch  of  the  crown  of  the  head  for  a  few  min- 
utes. There  was  visible  improvement  after  the  first  sitting,  and 
after  four  the  patient  could  fully  extend  his  forearto  and 
fingers. 

Sleeplessness  (Insomnia). — Cases  of  sleeplessness  frequently 
prove  very  difficult  to  relieve,  and  it  sometimes  occurs  that 
after  drugs  have  failed  to  overcome  it,  electricity  proves  suc- 
cessful. It  is  a  desirable  substitute  for  hypnotics,  where  it  can 
be  made  to  answer  the  purpose,  and  precludes  all  danger  of 
rendering  the  patient  a  victim  of  opium  or  chloral. 

Franklinism,  galvanism  and  faradism  have  each  proved  suc- 
cessful, and  no  general  rule  can  be  given  for  selection,  unless 
this  may  be  regarded  as  one.  That  form  of  electricity  best 
adapted  to  the  disease  which  gives  rise  to  insomnia  should  be 
given  the  first  trial :  frequently  an  application  to  the  diseased 
organs  will  be  followed  by  sleep.    "When  insomnia  is  produced 


*G.  H.  Hughes,  M.D.,  St.  Louis,  in  a  paper  read  before  the  Association  of  American 
Institutions  for  the  Insane,  at  Toronto,  Canada,  June  14, 1881. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


285 


by  mental  anxiety  or  exhaustion,  electricity  may  temporarily 
produce  sleep,  but  in  all  cases  the  removal  of  the  cause  is  an 
essential  factor  in  treatment.  A  prolonged  application  of  a  very 
mild  current  is  advisable  when  the  trouble  is  due  to  an  ex- 
cited or  irritated  condition  of  the  brain  or  nerves;  no  muscular 
contractions  should  be  produced  when  the  faradic  current  is 
used,  and  no  burning  or  stinging  sensations  with  the  galvanic. 

Faradism.  Apply  a  mild  faradic  current,  one  electrode  over  the  solar 
plexus,  the  uninsulated  portion  of  the  other  in  the  left  hand  of  the 
operator.  The  whole  person  of  the  patient  is  then  gently  stroked  with 
the  dry  right  hand  of  the  operator;  the  sponges  or  electrode  covers  must 
be  well  moistened.  The  most  grateful  effects  are  obtained  v/hile  brush- 
ing over  the  back  and  limbs.  A  very  mild  current  may  be  applied  half 
an  hour;  a  current  that  will  produce  the  crackling  of  dry  cuticle  is 
enough. 

Galvanism.  When  the  above  measure  fails,  galvanism  may  succeed. 
Two  to  four  zinc-carbon  cells  are  sufficient.  The  negative  pole  is  placed 
over  the  solar  plexus,  and  the  positive  is  applied  through  the  hand  of 
the  operator  to  the  top  of  the  head  (avoiding  the  forehead),  down  the 
neck  on  each  side  as  in  central  galvanization.  [Blackwood.] 

THE  EYES. 

Effect  of  the  galvanic  current.  The  eyes,  owing  to  the 
large  amount  of  water  they  contain,  are  excellent  conduc- 
tors. Volta,  so  long  ago  as  1800,  discovered  that  the 
galvanic  current  has  a  special  effect  upon  the  optic  nerve. 
The  current  from  a  single  pair  of  elements,  when  an  elec- 
trode is  placed  on  each  eye,  produces  a  faint  flash  of  light 
at  the  commencement  of  the  current ;  while  the  current  is 
passing,  a  luminous  appearance  is  present  to  a  person  with 
sensitive  retina,  and  there  is  again  a  distinct  flash  when  the 
circuit  is  broken. 

Heimholtz  made  a  real  advance  in  electro-physiology.  He 
observed  that  the  descending  current  (the  positive  electrode  on  the 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


forehead  and  the  negative  held  in  the  hand)  produces  not  only 
irritation,  but  alteration  of  excitability,  external  objects  becom- 
ing less  distinct.  The  eifect  of  the  ascending  current  (the  positive 
electrode  in  the  hand  and  the  negative  to  the  forehead)  is  to 
render  objects  more  distinct.  To  carry  the  current  directly  to 
the  optic  nerve,  according  to  Brenner,  the  most  favorable 
arrangement  is  to  place  one  electrode  over  the  eye  and  the 
other  at  the  nape  of  the  neck. 


Fig.  90. 

SPONGE-COVERED  EYE  ELECTRODE. 

This  electrode  is  to  be  used  when  the  current  is  to  be  applied  equally  to  both  eyes  at 
once.  The  fiat  sponge-covered  plates  are  moistened  in  warm  water  and  placed  on  the 
closed  eyelids,  and  connected  through  the  binding  post  with  one  pole  of  the  battery.  The 
bow  is  insulated  with  hard  rubber.  This  electrode  is  retained  in  place  by  means  of  an 
elastic  cord  passing  around  the  head  and  tied  in  the  small  loops  projecting  from  each 
eye-piece. 

Effect  of  the  faradic  current.  The  primary  current  pro- 
duces no  appreciable  elfect,  but  the  secondary  gives  a  more  or 
less  rapid  succession  of  slight  blue  flashes,  or  glimmer,  similar 
to  that  observed  in  hyper^esthesia  of  the  retina. 

Caution.  The  fact  thai  the  physiological  effects  of  galvanism 
differ  from  those  of  faradism  cannot  be  made  too  emphatic. 
Duchenne,  being  unaware  of  this  important  fact,  after  treating 
a  patient  suffering  from  paralysis  of  the  facial  nerve  with 
faradism  without  accident,  afterward  applied  a  galvanic  current. 
Immediately  after  the  circuit  had  been  completed,  the  patient 
cried  out  that  the  whole  room  was  in  a  blaze,  and  found  his 
sight  on   the  side  ^vhere  the  electrodes    had  been  applied 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  287 

was  lost,  and  he   never  regained  it.     Faradism  has  much 

less  effect  on  the  retina  than  galvanism,  and  is  not  so  likely 
to  do  harm. 


Fig.  91. 

EYE-CUP  ELECTRODE. 

This  is  a  glass  eye-cup  with  a  metal  binding  post  attached  and  projecting  a  little 
into  it.  When  used,  the  cup  is  filled  with  water  and  connected  with  one  pole  of  the 
battery.  It  is  very  useful  in  treating  paralysis  of  the  muscles  of  the  eye.  The  water 
serves  as  a  rheostat  to  modify  the  current. 


DISEASES  TO  WHICH  ELECTRICITY  HAS  BEEN  SUCCESSFULLY'  APPLIED. 


Amaurosis, 

Amblyopia, 

Atony  of  optic  nerve. 

Blindness  following  fevers,  etc., 

Double  vision  (diplopia), 

Granular  lids. 

Strabismus  (cross-eyes), 


Hallucinations  of  sight. 
Nsevus  of  eyelid, 

Opacities  of  cornea  and  vitreous  humor. 
Paralysis  of  the  muscles, 
Removing  fragments  of  metal, 
Spasm  of  eyelids, 
Trichiasis  (inverted  eyelashes). 


Electricity  may  he  applied, 

1.  Directly,  one  pole  being  applied  to  one  or  both  eyes,  and  the 
other  at  some  distant  point. 

2.  Indirectly  through  the  sympathetic  nerve. 

3.  Indirectly  by  reflex  action  of  the  fifth  nerve. 

Amaurosis. —  Gaha/nism.  A  mild  current  may  be  passed 
through  the  eyeball  so  as  to  traverse  the  retina,  or  confined 
to  those  twigs  of  the  fifth  pair  of  nerves  that  ramify  on  the 
forehead.  When  these  nerves  are  to  be  stimulated,  interrupt 
the  current  with  a  rheotome  introduced  into  the  circuit. 
Grapengresser  introduced  a  nasal  electrode,  connected  with  the 
positive  pole,  into  the  nose,  and  placed  the  negative  upon  the 


288 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


forehead.  It  is  rare,  when  sight  is  completely  gone,  that  it 
can  be  restored  by  any  means;  yet  Magendie  cured  one  case 
of  complete  amaurosis  by  galvanism  and  electro-puncture.  M. 
Ptirjinke  believed  that  the  direction  of  the  current  is  impor- 
tant. When  the  amaurosis  is  at  its  commencement,  and  is 
accompanied  by  subjective  pains,  he  placed  the  negative  as 
near  as  possible  to  the  eye  upon  which  he  desires  to  act, 
while  it  is  the  positive  electrode  which  he  thus  places  when 
the  amaurosis  commences  by  a  weakening  of  the  sensibility  of 
the  retina.  The  opposite  pole  is  placed  near,  as,  for  instance, 
in  contact  with  the  buccal  gland.  Amaurosis,  accompanied 
by  congestion  of  the  brain,  should  not  be  treated  by  electricity. 

FranMinism.  De  Saussure  cured  a  case  by  shocks  direct- 
ed from  eyeball  to  the  neck. 


After  filling  the  cup  full  of  water,  let  the  patient  bow  the  head,  close  the  eye, 
and  press  the  cup  up  firmly  around  the  eyeball,  so  that  when  the  head  is  raised 
water  will  cover  the  eyelid.  If  the  patient  remembers  to  bow  the  head  before  the 
electrode  is  removed,  not  a  drop  of  water  need  be  spilled.  Warm  water  conducts 
better  than  cold,  and  should  be  used  when  not  contra-indicated. 

Amblyopia. — Fa/radism.  Weakness  of  sight,  with  aching 
of  the  eyes  when  used  before  breakfast,  or  at  twilight  or  in 
reading  fine  print,  is  frequently  accompanied  by  general  fee- 
bleness, dyspepsia  or  hysteria.    Beard  and  Eockwell  recom- 


FlG.  92. 


METHOD  OF  USING  THE  EYE-CUP. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


289 


mend,  for  this  condition,  to  place  the  negative  pole  at  the  back 
of  tlie  neck  and  move  the  positive  electrode  over  the  closed 
eve,  using  a  mild  faradic  current  (labile  faradization)  for  five 
to  ten  minutes. 

Galvanism.  If  faradization,  both  local  and  general,  fails, 
try  a  galvanic  current  from  a  few  cells  only  ;  in  this  case  the 
positive  electrode  must  be  kept  stationary.  Dr.  Mitten  dorf 
has  found  that  galvanism  is  best  adapted  to  amblyopia  caused 
by  tobacco  or  loss  of  blood,  probably  from  the  beneficial  efiect 
produced  upon  the  bloodvessels,  and  consequently  upon 
nutrition. 


Fig.  93. 

SMALL  EYE  ELECTRODE. 
Length,  2,%  inches. 


The  stem  of  this  electrode  is  insulated  and  fits  the  universal  handle.  It  termi- 
nates in  a  small,  thin  spatula-shaped  plate.  It  may  be  used  in  treating  the  muscles, 
or  margins,  of  the  eyelids. 

Atony  of  the  Optic  Nerve. — Galvanism.  Benedict,  Erb 
and  Driver  recommend  placing  the  positive  pole  to  the  nape 
of  the  neck  and  the  negative  over  the  closed  eyelids,  and 
moving  it  gently  over  and  around  them,  for  one  or  two  min- 
utes, not  to  exceed  three  minutes.  The  number  of  cells  at 
first  should  not  be  more  than  two  or  three  ;  in  subsequent 
sittings  they  may  be  increased  to  twelve.  If  dizziness  occurs 
during  treatment  or  headache  after,  this  treatment  w^ill  do 
harm.  Better  a  very  short  application  every  day  than  a  longer 
one  at  longer  intervals. 

Blindness^  originating  in  a  protracted  attack  of  chills  and 
fever,  cerebro-spinal  meningitis,  and  other  acute  diseases,  have 
been  reported  cured,  in  a  few  cases,  by  the  downward  gal- 
vanic current,  the  negative  pole  being  held  in  the  hand  or 


290 


ELECTKO-THERAPEUTICS. 


against  the  spine,  while  the  positive  was  placed  on  the  top  of 
the  head,  the  hair  being  moistened. 

Granular  Lids. — Electrolysis.  Dr.  Areola,  of  Palermo,  has 
employed  electrolysis  with  success  in  removing  granulations 
of  the  conjunctiva.  Dr.  Kohn,  of  Berlin,  has  also  reported 
many  successful  cases.  The  negative  current  is  applied  by 
means  of  a  suitable  electrode  (Fig.  93)  to  the  inverted  surface 
of  the  upper  lid.  The  positive  is  applied  over  the  nape  of  the 
neck.  The  first  operation  continues  about  ten  minutes.  Dr. 
Schivardi  publishes  three  cases  of  old  granulations,  lasting, 
respectively,  two,  three  and  eight  years.  The  first  was  cured 
in  five  sittings,  the  second  was  greatly  improved  after  two 
sittings,  the  third  was  cured  in  nine  sittings,  and  the  sight, 
previously  obscured,  was  regained.  It  requires  three  persons 
to  perform  this  operation  —  one  to  hold  the  head  steady  and 
lid  reversed,  one  to  hold  the  negative  pole,  one  to  hold  the 
positive  and  manipulate  the  battery. 

Cystic  Tumors  of  the  eyelid  are  effectually  destroyed  either 
by  electrolysis  or  galvano-cautery. 

Hallucinations  of  Sight. —  Galvanism.  Flashes  of  light 
before  the  eyes,  dimness  of  sight,  hallucinations  of  sight, 
etc.,  not  dependent  upon  organic  disease,  have  been  relieved 
by  a  downwojrd  galvanic  current,  beginning  with  a  current 
from  two  cells  and  increasing  from  day  to  day  as  it  can  be 
borne,  to  twelve  cells.    The  sittings  may  be  repeated  daily. 

N^vus  OF  THE  Eyelid. — Electrolysis.  This  has  been  success- 
fully removed  after  the  following  method  :  Introduce  the  negative 
pole  into  the  tumor  and  close  the  circuit  with  a  large  sponge  for 
the  positive,  located  on  the  neck:  use  a  current  from  six  to  ten 
zinc-carbon  cells  (this  to  be  decided  by  the  size  of  tumor  and 
condition  of  cells).  Let  the  current  operate  for  two  minutes  and 
withdraw  the  needle  ;  unless  the  patient  is  very  sensitive  an 
anaesthetic  is  unnecessary. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


291 


Opacities  of  the  Vitreous  Hu^vior. — Galvanism.  M.  Teulon, 
in  writing  upon  opacities  of  the  vitreous  body,  gives  the  results 
in  twenty-four  cases  observed  by  him  and  treated  by  the  con- 
tinued current ;  he  reckoned  twenty-two  as  radically  cured.  He 
employs  a  very  small  number  of  elements,  and  applies  the 
positive  pole  upon  the  closed  eyelids,  and  the  negative  upon  the 
mastoid  process,  or  upon  the  superior  cervical  ganglion.  The 
application  lasts  only  two  or  three  minutes.  M.  Teulon  con- 
siders that  in  every  opacity  of  the  vitreous  body,  no  matter 
what  be  its  degree  or  extent,  provided  that  its  development  has 
not  assumed  the  confirmed  form  of  hypertrophy,  the  constant 
continued  current  is  the  most  efiicacious  treatment. 

Le  Fort  and  Onimus  have  also  advised  the  use  of  the  galvanic 
current  as  an  aid  to  clearing  up  vitreous  opacities.  Galvanism 
has  also  been  employed  to  remove  opacities  of  the  cornea  and 
produce  absorption  of  iritic  membranes.  Yon  Graefe  claimed 
quick  absorption  of  cataract^  but  others  have  not  been  so 
fortunate.  Four  freshly  charged  zinc-carbon  cells  are  sufficient, 
as  a  rule.  There  is  danger  of  increasing  the  opacity  by  a  too 
careless  use  of  the  current. 

Paralysis  of  ocular  muscles.  Electricity,  both  faradization 
and  galvanization,  is  often  of  great  service  in  the  treatment  of 
paralysis  of  the  muscles  of  the  eye,  especially  if  the  cause  is 
peripheral.  The  negative  pole  is  placed  on  the  closed  eyelid,  in 
a  situation  corresponding  to  the  affected  muscle,  the  positive 
being  located  on  the  temple  or  back  of  the  neck,  the  sitting  not 
to  last  beyond  two  or  three  minutes. 

Gal/canism.  Benedict  applies  a  feeble  current  from  a  few 
cells  (three  to  seven  zinc-carbon  are  sufficient)  as  follows :  Paraly- 
sis of  the  muscle  that  draws  the  eyeball  outward  ;  place  the 
positive  on  the  forehead  and  stroke  the  cheek  bones  for  several 
minutes  with  the  negative. 

*Medical  Press  and  Circular,  November  9, 1881 . 


292 


ELECTRO-THERAPE  [JTICS. 


Paralysis  of  the  muscles  that  turn  the  eyeball  in  toward  the 
nose  and  obliquely  downward ;  apply  the  negative  to  the  skin  on 
the  side  of  the  nose  near  the  inner  angle  of  the  eye. 

Paralysis  of  the  muscle  that  raises  the  eyelid  (ptosis) ;  apply 
the  negative  to  the  upper  eyelid,  over  which  it  may  be  moved 
while  the  current  is  passing. 

Paralysis  of  the  muscle  that  moves  the  eyeball  downward ; 
apply  the  negative  to  the  lower  border  of  the  orbit. 

Paralysis  of  the  muscle  that  raises  the  eyeball  upward  and 
inward  ;  apply  the  negative  to  the  inside  of  the  nose  in  the 
neighborhood  of  the  inner  angle  of  the  eye.  The  alternative 
electrode  in  each  case  being  located  on  the  forehead. 

Faradism  is  recommended  by  Althaus,  M.  Meyer  and  Soel- 
berg  Wells.  The  positive  pole  is  placed  below  the  ear  and  a 
small  moistened  sponge  electrode  connected  with  the  negative  is 
placed  on  the  closed  eyelid,  as  near  as  possible  to  the  paralyzed 
muscle,  sending  the  current  through  it  for  two  or  three  minutes. 
In  some  cases  improvement  follows  in  one  or  two  sittings,  and  in 
others  it  may  not  appear  until  fifteen  or  twenty.  Persistent 
treatment  will  sometimes  be  rewarded  with  success  in  very 
obstinate  cases.  Dr.  Mittendorf  has  observed  that  pain  which 
frequently  accompanies  weakness  of  the  internal  recti  muscles 
has  been  greatly  relieved  by  faradism. 

Diplopia. — Gcdvanism.  The  field  in  which  double  vision  is 
present,  according  to  Benedict,  is  lessened  immediately  by  the 
treatment  above  described.  When  this  is  not  the  case,  a  longer 
continuance  and  increased  strength  of  the  current  is  not  indi- 
cated, but  rather  a  change  in  the  kind  of  electricity  employed. 
In  one  case  Duchenne  applied  a  moist  electrode  over  each  eye, 
closed,  and  opened  the  circuit  twice  at  intervals  of  a  second  ;  the 
patient  saw  a  dazzling  flame,  and  on  opening  the  eyes  discovered 
that  he  was  cured. 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


293 


Strabismus. — Faradism.  Cross-eyes,  dependent  merely  upon 
debility  oi  the  muscles,  may  be  relieved  by  faradizing  the 
muscles  that  are  at  fault.  Dr.  Poore  reports  a  case  of  paralytic 
strabismus  in  which  localized  faradization  aided  in  the  cure. 
After  tenotomy  had  been  performed  and  the  wound  healed,  the 
eye  was  found  in  the  old  position  of  extreme  inversion.  The 
external  rectus  was  faradized  for  some  weeks  by  an  electrode 
placed  on  the  muscle.    The  patient  steadily  improved. 

Spasm  OF  THE  Eyelids. — Galvanism,  Apply  the  positive  to 
the  eye  through  the  eye-cup,  and  the  negative  to  the  palm  of 
the  patient's  hand. 

Trichiasis. — Electrolysis.  Dr.  J.  Elliott  Colburn,*in  a  paper 
read  before  the  Chicago  Medical  Society,  describes  the  usual 
method  of  removing  inverted  eyelashes  by  electrolysis,  which 
he  had  used  in  fifty  cases  at  the  State  Eye  and  Ear  Infirmary 
and  at  the  Central  Free  Dispensary,  twenty-two  of  which  had 
been  under  observations  through  periods  of  from  six  months  to 
three  and  a  half  years. 

The  instruments  necessary  for  this  operation  are  a  battery  which 
furnishes  six  or  more  zinc-carbon  cells,  a  light  needle-holder  and  a  suit- 
able needle.  The  patient  being  placed  in  a  strong  light,  the  surgeon 
fixes  the  lid  in  a  Desmarc's  or  Knapp's  clamps.  The  patient  holds  the 
handle  of  a  positive  electrode  in  the  right  hand,  and  places  the  moist 
sponge  on  the  palm  of  the  left,  after  the  needle  is  introduced  into  the 
hair  gland.  The  needle  may  be  withdrawn  after  about  ten  seconds.  The 
patient  should  remove  the  sponge  from  the  left  hand  simultaneously 
with  the  withdrawal  of  the  needle.  The  number  of  cells  to  be  used 
should  be  decided  by  the  surgeon's  knowledge  of  the  condition  of  his 
battery.  I  use  from  six  to  ten  cells  of  a  zinc-carbon  battery.  Where 
the  hairs  are  very  fine  and  obscure,  the  use  of  three-inch  lens  will  be 
found  quite  serviceable.  After  electrolysis,  the  hairs  should  be  removed 
with  epilation  forceps.  The  only  objection  to  the  operation,  in  my  expe- 
rience, is,  that  when  there  is  a  large  number  of  hairs  to  be  removed  the 
pain  becomes  somewhat  tedious ;  though  with  the  clamp  I  find  the  pain 


*  The  Weekly  Medical  Review,  November  1883. 


^94 


ELECTKO-THERAPEUTICS. 


is  not  so  great.  Only  about  fifteen  per  cent  of  the  hairs  return.  The 
irritation  following  the  operation  is  slight.  The  lids  will  be  swollen  for  a 
day  or  two.  In  one  case  from  which  I  removed  but  two  or  three  hairs,  the 
operation  was  followed  by  the  growth  of  fifteen  or  twenty  minute  hairs, 
which  were  promptly  removed.  The  results  in  all  cases  were  good  and 
permanent. 

The  method  of  performing  this  operation  will  be  more  fully 
described  under  Hirsuties. 


Fig.  94. 

Mcintosh  eye  magnet. 

Weight,  2%  oz. 


The  core  of  this  instrument  is  made  of  soft  iron,  and  is  surrounded  by  many  convolu- 
tions of  insulated  copper  wire,  all  inclosed  in  and  insulated  by  a  black  hard-rubber  cover. 
It  may  be  connected  with  a  single  Grenet  cell,  or  with  any  number  of  the  zinc-carbon  cells- 
of  the  Mcintosh  galvanic  battery.  The  size  of  a  magnet  should  be  in  proportion  to  the 
body  acted  upon.  Large  magnet^  capable  of  lifting  many  pounds  weight  offer  no  advan- 
tage over  small  ones  magnetized  to  saturation,  where  small  fragments  of  metal  are  to  be 
removed. 

To  Eemove  Fragments  of  Iron  or  Steel  from  the  Eye. — 
The  electro-magnet  is  extensively  used  at  present  for  this  pur- 
pose.   The  method  of  applying  it  is  as  follows  : 

The  point  of  the  magnet  is  brought  in  direct  contact  with  the  foreign 
body,  and  then  moved  away  to  the  distance  of  a  fourth  of  an  inch ;  this 
maneuver  is  repeated  several  times,  and  if  the  case  is  seen  before  the 
corneal  wound  has  had  a  chance  to  heal,  the  foreign  body  will  finally  be 
found  adhering  to  the  point  of  the  instrument.  If,  however,  the  wound 
has  healed,  a  change  in  the  procedure  is  necessary.  While  keeping  the 
magnet  in  close  proximity  to  the  foreign  body,  an  incision  through  the 
wound  is  to  be  made  for  the  purpose  of  allowing  a  free  exit,  the  maneuver 
of  touching  and  withdrawing  the  instrument  must  be  gone  through  with 
again  and  again,  and  ultimately  the  foreign  body  will  be  easily  removed. 
These  two  methods  are  entirely  sufficient  for  the  extraction  of  all  frag- 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


295 


ments  in  this  tissue,  as  long  as  any  part  of  them  is  in  the  cornea,  even 
though  the  greater  portion  of  their  bulk  projects  into  the  anterior  chamber. 

The  anterior  chamber  may  be  the  resting-place  of  a  fragment,  and  if 
so,  it  should  be  drawn  to  the  margin  of  the  cornea,  and  extracted  through 
an  incision  in  that  region,  either  by  the  forceps  or  magnet,  at  the  option  of 
the  operator,  who  should  bear  in  mind  the  importance  of  keeping  the 
magnet  in  close  proximity  to  the  metal  to  be  extracted  if  forceps  are 
used,  in  order  that  the  fragments  may  not  be  lost  by  means  of  the  forceps 
slipping. 


Fig.  95. 

METHOD  OF  USING  THE  McINTOSH  EYE  MAGNET. 


The  patient  should  be  seated  in  a  good  light,  and,  as  a  rule,  the  eyelids  should  be  kept 
far  apart,  and  the  eyeball  fixed.  Fine  particles  of  metal  lying  on  the  conjunctiva  can 
usually  be  picked  off  by  the  magnet  with  the  greatest  facility  by  the  method  shown  above. 

One  important  point  in  regard  to  all  incisions  made  for  the  entrance 
of  the  magnet  and  the  removal  of  a  foreign  body  from  the  eye,  is  that 
the  cut  should  he  not  one  with  parallel  edges,  but  T-shaped ;  as,  in  the  former 
case,  when  the  extraction  of  the  foreign  body  takes  place,  it  is  invari- 
ably stripped  off  the  end  of  the  magnet,  and  is  retained  at  the  site 
of  the  wound,  or  drops  into  the  interior  of  the  eye.  This  is  a  foregone 
conclusion  unless  the  lips  of  the  wound  be  held  apart,  and  no  amount 


296 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


of  skill  or  carefulness  upon  the  part  of  the  operator  can  guard  against  it 
unless  the  incision  is  of  the  above-mentioned  shape. — [Dr.  Bradford.]  * 


The  difference  of  opinion  among  writers  in  regard  to  the 
relative  value  of  the  different  forms  of  electricity  in  the  treat- 
ment of  diseases  of  the  ear  is  greater  than  in  regard  to  any- 
other  part  of  the  body.  The  difficulty  of  localizing  a  current 
in  the  ear  is  the  probable  cause  of  the  difference  in  results 
obtained. 

Galvanism.  Brenner  claims  that  the  faradic  current,  while 
it  is  capable  of  producing  unpleasant  effects  upon  the  nerves 
of  sensation,  does  not  produce  any  effect  upon  the  nerves  of 
special  sense ;  therefore  the  galvanic  current  only  is  of  value  in 
restoring  sensitiveness  to  the  nerve  of  hearing. 

Faradism.  The  application  of  a  faradic  current  within  the 
ear  gives  rise  to  an  unpleasant  metallic  taste  on  the  corre- 
sponding side  of  the  tongue,  and  an  increased  flow  of  saliva, 
and  according  to  some  observers,  a  roaring  or  rushing  sound 
in  the  ear,  with  a  tickling  or  prickling  that  may  become 
unendurable  by  increasing  the  current.  In  cases  of  congestion 
of  the  middle  ear,  electricity  is  liable  to  aggravate  the  con-  , 


THE  DISEASES  IN  WHICH  ELECTRICITY  HAS  BEEN  EMPLOYED. 

Chronic  suppuration  of  the  ear.   Relaxation  of  the  auricle. 


Methods  of  Applying  Electricity  to  the  Ear. — Purjinkef 
observed  that  a  current  sent  through  both  ears  at  once  causes 
fullness  of  the  head  and  general  dizziness.    Benedict  recom- 


the  ear. 


gestion. 


Inflammation  of  the  drum. 
Nervous  deafness. 


Stricture  of  the  Eustachian  canal. 
Tinnitus  aurium. 


*  Mass.  Eye  and  Ear  Hospital. 
fiJMS^'s  Magazin  fur  Chirurgie. 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


297 


mends  one  electrode  applied  in  or  over  the  ear,  and  the  other 
held  in  the  patient's  hand  to  interpose  the  resistance  of  the 
arm. 

Beard  and  Rockwell  describe  two  methods  which  they  term  — 
1.  The  internal.    2.  The  external. 

By  the  internal  method,  the  current  from  either  pole  may 
be  directed  to  one  ear,  or  divided  between  both,  the  alternate 
electrode  being  placed  at  the  nape  of  the  neck,  on  the  mastoid 
process,  in  the  hand,  or  applied  to  the  oriiice  of  the  Eustachian 
tube.    (See  Fig.  73,  location  of  electrode  c.) 

The  external  method.  Press  one  electrode  firmly  on  the 
tragus,  the  other  electrode  being  held  in  the  hand  of  the 
opposite  side.  The  ear  may  be  filled  with  warm  water, 
although  it  is  not  necessary.  In  regard  to  this  method  Beard 
and  Rockwell  say:  "We  have  used  it  for  several  years 
with  both  the  galvanic  and  faradic  currents,  and  prefer  it  for 
all  cases,  except  when  it  is  desired  to  act  directly  on  the 
inflamed  surfaces  of  the  drum.,  or  middle  ear.  It  is  far  less 
painful,  and  more  satisfactory  than  the  internal  method.  It 
may  be  used  on  the  most  sensitive  children  who  would  rebel 
against  the  internal  method,  however  skillfully  employed.  The 
sitting  should  not  usually  be  more  than  five  or  ten  minutes, 
and  in  some  cases  even  less,  especially  if  the  galvanic  current 
be  employed." 

Chronic  Suppuration  of  the  Ear. — Galvanism.  A  very 
mild  galvanic  current  may  be  used  to  change  the  nature  of  the 
secretion.  If  the  reaction  is  acid,  introduce  the  negative  pole  ;■ 
if  alkaline,  the  positive,  the  alternate  electrode  being  held  in 
the  hand  of  the  patient. 

Inflammation  of  the  Drum.  A  rheostat  should  be  in  the 
circuit  when  a  galvanic  current  is  employed  in  a  case  of  this 
kind.    The  positive  may  be  applied  to  the  ear,  and  the  nega- 


298 


ELIJCTRO-THERAPEUTIOS. 


tive  to  the  hand-  Only  two  or  three  cells  should  be  included 
in  the  circuit. 

Nervous  Deafness. — Fmadism.  M.  Duchenne  succeeded 
in  curing,  almost  entirely,  one  child  born  deaf  and  dumb.  The 
current  within  the  external  ear  was  sent  through  warm  water, 
and  a  sponge  electrode  placed  at  the  nape  of  the  neck.  He 
used  a  very  mild  faradic  current  for  a  few  minutes  at  a  time. 
He  repeated  this  treatment  in  a  large  number  of  cases,  with 
almost  as  many  failures  as  successes,  but  his  experience  in 
ameliorating  cases  of  nervous  deafness,  which  had  previously 
been  regarded  as  incurable,  were  such  as  to  show  that  elec- 
tricity is  of  considerable  value,  and  its  application  should  be 
tried  in  these  cases. 


This  electrode  consists  of  a  rubber  speculum  fastened  in  a  wire  frame,  into  which 
the  wire-spring  fastened  to  the  same  frame  may  be  pressed  to  close  the  capillary  opening 
in  the  speculum.  The  latter  is  filled  with  warm  water  when  used ;  the  spring  prevents 
its  escape  while  being  placed  in  the  ear.   This  electrode  fits  the  universal  handle. 


Dr.  Edward  C.  Mann  *  reports  an  interesting  case  of  blind- 
ness and  deafness  resulting  from  cerebro-spinal  nleningitis, 
successfully  treated  by  him  with  the  galvanic  current. 

Deafness  caused  by  Muscular  Paralysis. — Faradism,  Dr. 
Woakes  f  believes  that  muscular  paralysis  is  an  important 

*  London  Jour.  Physiol.  Med.  and  Ment.  Pathology,  Vol.  VII,  Part  2. 
t  British  Medical  Journal. 


ELECTKO-THERAPEUTICS. 


299 


factor  in  causing  deafness  in  adult  life.  Such  cases  will  be 
benefited  by  a  mild  faradic  current  applied  to  the  paralyzed 
muscles,  the  positive  electrode  being  placed  at  the  insertion 
and  the  negative  at  the  origin  of  the  muscles.  Ducheime's 
Points  are  convenient  electrodes  for  this  purpose. 


After  the  ?ar  electrode  is  introduced  the  spring  is  released,  flies  back  and  leaves  a 
column  of  water  interposed  between  it  and  the  drum  of  the  ear.  The  current  from  the 
battery  passes  through  the  spring  and  column  of  water  to  the  ear.  In  the  illustration 
the  alternate  pole  is  held  on  the  nape  of  the  neck  by  the  neck  electrode  already 
described. 


Dilatation  of  the  Eustachian  Canal. — Electrolysis.  Mons. 
J.  Mercie*  has  been  applying  with  success  electrolysis  in  dilatation 
of  tlie  Eustachian  tube.  He  first  introduces  an  ordinary  Eusta- 
chian catheter,  and  passes  through  it  a  fine  bougie  while  the 
patient  pronounces  the  syllable  mi^  and  allows  it  to  remain 
in  position  five  or  ten  minutes.  This  process  is  repeated  from 
day  to  day  until  it  has  been  found  that  the  sound  has  reached 
the  middle  ear.  When  the  tube  has  been  dilated  to  this  extent, 
the  elastic  sound  is  replaced  by  a  flexible  metal  one  connected 
with  the  negative  pole  of  a  galvanic  battery,  while  a  tuft  of 
wet  sponge,  connected  with  the  positive  pole,  is  placed  in  the 


Fig.  97. 


EAR  ELECTRODE  IN  SITU. 


*Rev.  de  Therap. 


300 


ELECTROTHEKAPEUTICS. 


external  auditory  canal.  This  procedure  is  unaccompanied  by 
any  danger  if  the  current  is  weak  and  great  care  is  exercised 
in  inserting  the  metal  sound.  Although  it  has  not  been  very 
frequently  employed,  the  success  was  such  in  those  instances 
as  to  encourage  its  subsequent  use. 


Fig.  98. 

DOUBLE  EAR  ELECTRODE. 


This  electrode  is  formed  of  two  curved  insulated  metallic  rods,  terminating  in  small 
sponge  cups.  One  of  the  curved  rods  is  fastened  to  a  binding  post,  and  the  other  slides 
through  it,  so  as  to  adjust  the  electrode  to  heads  of  different  size,  and  can  be  fastened  at 
any  point  by  a  thumbscrew ;  the  sponge  cups  may  be  separated  8}/^  inches.  The  sponge 
is  securely  fastened  to  prevent  its  being  left  in  the  ear;  but  it  can  be  removed  and 
replaced  in  a  moment,  so  that  there  is  no  necessity  for  using  the  same  sponge  on  different 
patients.  This  electrode  conveys  the  current  from  one  pole  of  the  battery  equally  to  both 
ears:  the  other  pole  may  be  located  on  the  neck  or  in  the  hand. 

Deafness  from  Aural  Catarrh.  Dr.  H.  Campbell  *  recom- 
mends a  galvanic  current  for  the  cure  of  accumulations  of 
mucus  in  the  middle  ear,  which  are  caused  by  aural  catarrh 
and  followed  by  deafness.  He  introduces  a  catheter,  as  already 
described,  injects  a  little  warm  water,  then  inserts  a  metal  wire 
through  it,  and  applies  a  gentle  current  to  decompose  the  water. 
He  claims  that  the  condition  of  the  mucous  membrane  is  so 
altered  that  there  is  no  tendency  to  a  relapse. 


mm 


Fig.  99. 

small  aural  and  nasal  electrode. 

Length,  4%  in. 

This  is  simply  a  nickel-plated  rod,  terminating  at  one  end  in  a  screw  that  fits  the 
universal  handle,  and  at  the  other  in  a  roughened  point,  to  which  bits  of  sponge  or  lint 
may  be  securely  fastened.  It  is  useful  in  localizing  the  current  either  within  the  ear  or 
nose,  since  it  may  be  introduced  through  a  rubber  tube,  and  the  extent  of  contact  with 
the  tissues  be  limited  to  a  single  point  if  desired. 

Tinnitus  Aurium. —  Galvanism,  l^oises  in  the  ear  may  fre- 
quently be  relieved,  even  when  dependent  upon  disease  of  the 

*  Electro-Surgery,  London. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


301 


brain,  by  a  very  mild  galvanic  current.  A  rheostat  should  be 
included  in  the  circuit ;  the  direction  of  the  current  cannot  be 
definitely  stated,  for  in  some  cases  the  positive,  and  in  others 
the  negative,  gives  most  relief.  As  a  rule,  the  positive  is  found 
to  be  more  quieting  and  the  negative  more  stimulating  in 
diseases  of  the  ear. 

THE  NOSE. 

Galmnism  produces  an  impression  upon  the  olfactory  nerve 
which  is  followed  by  giddiness  and  a  peculiar  acid  odor. 
During  and  immediately  after  the  passage  of  the  current,  it 
is  impossible  to  sneeze.  Meyer  noticed  that  when  the  nega- 
tive pole  is  applied  within  the  nose  and  the  positive  to  the  hand 
or  back  of  the  neck,  there  is  an  increased  mucous  secretion  as 
well  as  a  prickling,  stinging  sensation  in  the  nose,  and  an 
alkaline  taste  on  the  tongue.  By  reversing  the  current  there 
was  a  sour  taste,  on  the  tongue. 

Faradism  and  Fmnklinlsm  produce  a  stimulating  effect 
when  carried  directly  to  the  mucous  lining  of  the  nose,  and 
frequently  are  accompanied  by  sneezing. 

Diseases  in  which  electricity  has  heen  employed : 

Loss  of  smell  (anosmia),  Coryza, 
Catarrh,  Polypi. 
Obliteration  of  nasal  duct, 

The  manner  in  which  electricity  produces  a  favorable  effect 
upon  mucous  membranes,  whether  of  the  eye,  ear,  throat,  or 
other  passages,  is  explained  by  the  language  which  Stellwag 
used  in  describing  the  effect  of  irritants  upon  mucous  inflamma- 
tions : 

The  irritation  which  they  set  up  in  the  sensory  nerves  being  carried 
over  to  the  vaso-motor  nerves  may  cause  a  contraction  of  the  calibre  of 
the  vessels,  when  they  are  in  a  condition  of  relaxation.  This  is  done 
by  the  excitation  and  invigoration  of  the  atomic  muscular  fibers.  The 
resolution  of  inflammation  is  favored  by  the  lessening  or  removal  of  the 
congestion,  which  is  one  of  the  causes  of  the  unfavorable  course. 


302 


ELECTRO-THEEAPEUTICS. 


Loss  OF  Smell. — Faradism.  A  moist  sponge  electrode  is 
placed  over  the  nape  of  the  neck,  and  a  nasal  electrode  (Fig.  100) 
carries  the  current  to  all  parts  of  the  nasal  passages.  A  gentle 
current  should  be  employed,  and  shocks  should  be  avoided  ; 
therefore  it  is  advisable  to  locate  the  electrodes  before  completing 
the  circuit.  Another  method  is  to  apply  a  poAverful  current  on 
each  side  of  the  bridge  of  the  nose,  near  the  eyes.  Kepeat 
daily. 

Galvanism.  The  nasal  electrode  is  employed  to  carry  the 
negative  current  into  the  nose  to  the  branches  of  the  cerebral 
nerves,  while  the  positive  is  placed  on  the  clieek  and  the  cur- 
rent continued  for  five  minutes.  It  must  not  be  strong  enough 
to  produce  flashes  or  other  unpleasant  effect  upon  the  optic 
nerve. 

Catakrh. — Faradism.  A  mild  faradic  current  applied 
through  electrodes  located  respectively  on  the  nape  of  the 
neck  and  bridge  of  the  nose,  for  about  five  minutes,  re- 
peated daily,  or  twice  daily,  relieves  the  disagreeable  sensa- 
tion attending  both  catarrh  and  coryza. 

Galvanism.  The  same  rule  applies  in  this  case  as  in  other 
applications  of  galvanism.  When  an  irritable  condition  of  the 
mucous  lining  exists,  apply  the  positive  through  a  moist  sponge 
(see  Fig.  99),  and  the  negative  at  a  distant  point,  as  the  palm 
of  the  hand.  When  a  debilitated  condition  exists,  which  needs 
stimulating,  apply  the  negative  current  through  the  metal- 
tipped  nasal  electrode  directly  to  the  membrane,  and  the  posi- 
tive through  a  large  sponge,  located  on  the  clieek.  When  the 
nature  of  the  secretions  need  changing,  it  should  be  remem- 
bered that  acids  are  set  free  at  the  positive  and  alkalies  at  the 
negative  pole. 

Galvano- Cautery,  In  cases  which  have  undergone  great 
structural  change,  Dr.  Pipino*  recommends  galvano-cautery 

*Dr.  W.  C.  Pipino,  of  St.  Louis  (St.  Louis  Medical  and  Surgical  Journal,  1881). 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


303 


lor  the  removal  of  hypertropliied  tissues.  The  cicatricial  con- 
traction of  the  tissues  from  the  heated  wires  deprives  it  of  its 
erectile  nature,  removes  the  obstruction,  allowing  the  free  pas- 
sage of  air  through  the  nose. 

He  cautions  against  mistaking  deflection  of  the  septum  to 
the  right  or  left  for  hypertrophy  of  membrane  covering  it. 

Since  Dr.  Wm.  Meyer's  effort  to  direct  the  attention  of  the 
profession  to  the  frequency  of  the  hypertropliied  glandular 
tissue  in  the  posterior  nasal  region,  and  its  influence  in  the 
production  of  organic  and  functional  changes  in  the  conditions 
and  uses  of  the  upper  air  passages,  galvano-cautery  has  fre- 
quently been  employed  to  remedy  the  condition.  Dr.  R.  P. 
Lincoln,  of  New^  York,  has  reported,  through  the  Medical 
Record^  a  number  of  cases  in  which  this  operation,  aided  by 
therapeutical  measures,  has  relieved  hoarseness,  cough,  defective 
enunciation,  and  in  a  few  instances,  a  "growing  stupidity,'* 
evidently  due  to  long  obstruction  of  the  nasal  passages. 


Length,  G  inches. 

The  nasal  electrode  is  an  insulated  metal  rod,  terminating  in  an  uninsulated  nickel- 
plated  tip.  Its  size  and  shape  adapt  it  to  conducting  the  current  either  to  the  anterior  or 
posterior  nasal  passage,  when  electricity  is  to  be  localized.  The  one  shown  in  Fig.  99  is  to 
be  preferred  when  the  current  is  to  be  diffused  over  a  larger  space. 

Naso-Pharyngeal  Polypi. — Electrolysis.  Dr.  Bruns*  has 
successfully  employed  the  galvanic  current  to  destroy  these 
tumors.  He  considers  that  this  operation  should  be  tried 
before  proceeding  to  a  more  serious  operation.  There  is  no 
risk  of  bleeding,  no  danger,  and  very  little  liability  to  a  relapse 
after  electrolysis. 

*  Berliner  Klinische  Wochenschrift. 


304 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


Fungoid  Growths  are  also  removed  by  electrolysis  when 
accessible.  Galvano-cautery  is,  however,  the  most  radical  meas- 
ure for  the  removal  of  polypi,  granulations,  and  all  foreign 
•growths  from  the  nose. 

Closure  of  the  Nasal  Duct. — Electrolysis.    Dr.  Tripier 
has  successfully  operated  for  obliteration  of  the  nasal  duct. 
The  probe  should  be  insulated,  except  at  the  point,  and  con-  • 
nected  with  the  negative  pole  of  the  battery.     Only  a  few 
cells  will  be  required. 

the  mouth. 

Galvanism.  The  sensation  of  taste  can  be  excited  only  by 
the  galvanic  current.  One  electrode  placed  against  each  cheek 
produces  a  strong  metallic  taste,  when  the  galvanic  circuit  is 
complete.  The  positive  at  the  sacrum  and  the  negative  at  the 
nape  of  the  neck  will  frequently  cause  a  metallic  taste  in  the 
mouth ;  applied  directly  to  the  tongue,  the  galvanic  current  not 
only  excites  the  sense  of  taste,  but  the  optic  nerve  also,  pro- 
ducing flashes  of  light.  Whatever  has  a  tendency  to  blunt  the 
sensibility  of  the  tongue,  such  as  acids,  pepper,  liquor,  etc., 
diminishes  the  eflect  of  galvanism. 

Franklinism  produces  effects  similar  to  galvanism. 

Faradism  produces  pain  and  muscular  contractions,  but  no 
taste. 

Electricity  has  been  employed  for 

Paralysis  of  the  tongue,  Toothache, 

Loss  of  taste,  Extraction  of  teeth, 

Tumors  in  the  mouth,         Eemoval  of  the  tongue. 

Paralysis  of  the  Tongue  usuall}^  accompanies  paralysis  of 
other  parts,  and  may  depend  upon  disease  of  the  brain,  in  which 
case  caution  should  be  exercised  in  applying  electricity,  that 
reflex  action  be  not  set  up  with  unfortunate  results.  After 
paralysis  has  existed  some  time,  or  when  not  of  central  origin, 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


305 


electricity  may  be  applied  as  follows :  A  tongue  plate  (Fig.  101) 
connected  with  the  negative  pole  is  placed  on  the  tongue,  and 
a  sponge  electrode  (Fig.  108)  pressed  firmly  upward,  beneath 
the  lower  jaw  on  one  side  of  the  oesophagus,  when  the  paralysis 
is  confined  to  one  half  of  the  tongue ;  if  both  halves  are 
affected,  divide  the  positive  current  by  a  bifurcated  cord  between 
two  electrodes,  and  locate  them  on  each  side  of  the  oesophagus. 
Another  method  is  to  locate  one  electrode  on  the  tongue  and 
the  other  at  the  nape  of  the  neck.  If  the  faradic  current 
does  not  produce  contractions  of  the  tongue,  employ  the  inter- 
rupted gal/vanic  current,  taking  care  not  to  use  it  of  such  a 
strength  as  to  unpleasantly  affect  the  optic  nerve. 


Fig.  101. 

TONGUE  PLATE. 
Length,  5  inches. 


The  stem  of  this  electrode  is  insulated,  and  the  uninsulated  portion  is  nickel-plated. 

Loss  OF  Taste  is  usually  due  to  an  affection  of  the  third 
branch  of  the  fifth  nerve,  or  the  glosso-pharyngeal  nerve,  or 
the  chorda  tympani.  Galvanism.  Locate  the  negative  elec- 
trode on  the  tongue,  and  the  positive  at  the  nape  of  the  neck, 
beneath  the  jaw  or  below  the  ear.  Fhradism.  When  loss  of 
taste  is  due  to  an  affection  of  the  chorda  tympani,  one  electrode 
may  be  placed  on  the  tongue  and  the  other  within  the  ear 
against  the  drum  ;  this  not  only  excites  a  sensation  of  taste, 
but  produces  an  abundant  flow  of  saliva.  A  very  mild  current 
should  be  employed  with  a  rheostat  in  the  circuit,  not  to  exceed 
two  or  three  minutes. 

Toothache.  Franktinism  was  formerly  much  used  to  relieve 
toothache.    The  patient  was  insulated,  charged  with  electricity, 


306 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


and  sparks  drawn  from  around  the  affected  tooth.  Sometimes 
the  operator  was  insulated  and  charged,  then  directed  the  charge 
to  the  tooth  of  the  patient  through  the  finger. 

Galvanism^  applied  through  a  suitable  dental  electrode 
(Fig.  102),  will  frequently  relieve  pain  by  putting  the  nerve  in 
a  state  of  anelectrotonus,  the  positive  current  being  directed  to 
the  tooth  and  the  negative  electi'ode  being  held  in  the  hand. 
Five  to  ten  minutes  are  usually  sufiicient  for  one  application, 
and  a  mild  current  should  be  used  ;  it  may  be  repeated  two 
or  three  times  daily.  When  there  is  swelling  and  threatened 
suppuration,  the  negative  pole  applied  to  it  and  the  positive 
on  some  distant  part  is  said  to  be  a  preventive.  The  current 
should  be  continued  from  ten  to  fifteen  minutes,  as  strong  as 
can  be  borne  without  exciting  the  optic  nerve. 


M  Fig.  102. 

Y  DENTAL  ELECTRODE. 

Length,  horizontal,  5  inches.   Vertical  length,  1  inch. 

This  consists  of  an  insulated  metal  rod  terminating  in  a  nickel-plated  point,  by 
means  of  which  a  current  may  be  localized  upon  a  nerve  or  motor  point. 

Faradism.  A  faradic  current  will  sometimes  relieve  the 
pain  instantly.  The  current  is  conducted  to  the  tooth  through 
the  dental  electrode,  and  the  alternate  pole  applied  at  the 
nape  of  the  neck.  If  a  mild  current  for  a  few  minutes  does 
not  relieve,  it  is  useless  to  repeat  it.  The  faradic  current  ap- 
plied through  a  sponge  which  covers  the  tooth  and  gum  is 
also  credited  with  preventing  suppuration,  and  reducing  swelling 
about  a  diseased  tooth. 

Extraction  of  Teeth.  The  faradic  current  has  been  em- 
ployed to  lessen  the  pain  attending  extraction  of  teeth.  It 
seems  to  benumb  the  nerve,  in  a  measure.  The  patient  holds 
the  uninsulated  portion  of  one  electrode  in  the  hand  while 


ELECTRO-THEKAPEUTICS. 


307 


the  forceps  are  made  the  other  electrode,  being  joined  to  the 
conducting  cord  by  a  suitable  connector.  When  the  forceps 
grasp  the  tooth  the  circuit  is  completed. 


Fig.  103. 

METHOD  OF  EMPLOYING  ELECTRICITY  IN  EXTRACTING  TEETH. 

The  dental  battery  here  shown  is  operated  by  a  Grenet  cell.  It  can  be  used  with 
any  other  form  of  cell.  A  strong  secondary  current  is  required.  The  method  of  com- 
pleting the  circuit  is  sufficiently  obvious  without  further  explanation. 


Tumors  in  the  Mouth.  —  Electrolysis.  Small  vascular 
growths  may  be  eifectually  destroyed  by  electrolysis.  The 
dispersion  of  tumors  is  sometimes  brought  about  by  passing  a 
mild  galvanic  current  through  them  from  ten  to  fifteen  minutes 
at  a  time,  the  positive  being  applied  direct  and  the  negative 
at  some  indifferent  point.  Faradism,  It  has  been  claimed 
that  the  faradic  current  is  capable  of  exciting  absorption  of 
growths  within  the  mouth,  even  when  of  a  bony  nature  (osteo- 
sarcoma). Gcdvano-caiitery  furnishes  the  most  satisfactory 
method  of  removing  these  foreign  growths. 

Removal  of  the  Tongue.  —  Galvano-cautery.  By  this 
method  all  hemorrhage  may  be  avoided.  It  is  considered  the 
most  effectual  method  of  eradicating  cancer  of  the  tongue. 


308 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


Mr.  Bryant*  recommends  this  procedure :  Isolate  the 
growth  by  introduction  of  curved  needles  beneath  the  base,  fix 
the  mouth  open  with  a  gag,  draw  the  tongue  forward  by  a 
tongue  forceps  or  a  ligature  passed  through  the  tip  of  the 
tongue.  The  cautery  loop  is  passed  around  the  base  of  the 
disease,  behind  the  pins,  and  gradually  tightened,  the  circuit 
being  complete  as  soon  as  the  loop  has  been  adjusted,  but  not 
sooner.  The  wire  must  not  be  heated  beyond  a  dull  red,  and 
the  drawing  up  of  the  loop  should  be  done  very  slowly. 
Hemorrhage  never  occurs  unless  the  wire  has  been  used  at 
too  high  a  temperature,  or  has  been  tightened  too  rapidly. 


D 

Fig.  104. 

DENTAL  CONNECTOR. 
Length,       in.   Slot,  3-16  by  %  in. 

This  is  a  nickel-plated  clamp.  C  receives  one  handle  of  the  forceps,  which  is  fas- 
tened by  the  thumbscrew.   D  is  a  socket  to  receive  the  conducting  cord. 

THE  PHARYNX  AND  LARYNX. 

Electricity  may  be  applied  to  the  treatment  of  diseases  of  the 
throat  in  three  ways  :  1.  Internally,  by  placing  one  or  both  elec- 
trodes directly  on  the  diseased  tissues.  2.  Externally,  by  placing 
one  electrode  on  the  neck  in  front  of  the  larynx,  and  closing 
the  circuit  by  placing  the  other  on  the  nape  of  the  neck,  or  on 
the  sides  along  the  inner  margin  of  the  sterno-cleido-mastoid 
muscle.  3.  Through  the  nerves,  distributed  to  the  pharynx  and 
larynx. 

*0f  Guy's  Hospital. 


ELECTRO-THEEAPEUTICS. 


30^ 


Caution.  In  all  applications  of  electricity  about  the  neck, 
the  operator  should  be  very  careful,  when  the  electrodes  are  lo- 
cated over  the  pneumogastric  nerve,  to  use  a  very  mild  current 
A  rheostat  in  the  circuit  is  advisable.  Prolonged  syncope  is 
sometimes  produced,  and  other  exceedingly  alarming  symptoms. 
Several  observers  have  reported  accidents  of  this  kind,  which 
may  also  result  from  the  accidental  displacement  of  electrodes 
applied  within  the  throat ;  with  care,  however,  the  current  may 
be  safely  applied  to  this  nerve,  and  with  advantage  in  disorders 
of  parts  to  which  its  branches  are  distribntedo 

Diseases  in  which  electricity  has  proven  useful: 

Anaemia,  Spasm  of  glottis, 

Enlarged  tonsils,  Loss  of  voice  (aphonia), 

Clergyman's  sore  throat,  Paralysis, 

Hyperaesthesia  Nervous  cough. 


Fig.  105. 

SPONGE-TIPPED  LARYNGEAL  ELECTRODE. 
Length,  inches. 


This  consists  of  an  insulated  stem,  to  which,  by  a  simple  device,  a  piece  of  sponge, 
or  absorbent  cotton,  may  be  fastened  securely.  It  is  removable,  and  can  be  exchanged 
in  an  instant.  By  using  a  very  small  piece  of  wet  sponge,  a  current  may  be  localized 
almost  as  closely  as  Avith  electrode  in  Fig.  106,  and  with  less  pain  or  irritation  If  a 
comparatively  large  piece  of  sponge  is  used,  the  current  may  be  distributed  over  a 
larger  surface,  which  is  sometimes  advantageous.  By  warming  the  insulated  covering 
of  the  stem  over  a  lamp,  it  may  be  bent  in  suitable  shape  to  carry  a  current  to  the 
posterior  nares. 

Anemia  of  the  throat  usually  accompanies  general  debility, 
and  is  improved  by  general  electrizations,  and  such  other  thera- 
peutical measures  as  improve  the  strength  of  the  patient.  Faror 
dism  may  be  applied  directly  within  the  throat  through  the  moist 
sponge-tipped  electrode  (Fig.  105)  connected  with  the  negative 
pole,  the  positive  being  placed  on  the  nape  of  the  neck,  or  on 


310  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 

the  sides  along  the  inner  margin  of  the  sterno-cleido-mastoid 
muscle.  The  interrupted  galvanic  current  sometimes  proves 
serviceable,  the  poles  being  located  as  before. 

Inflammation  and  irritation  of  the  throat,  on  the  contrary, 
are  benefited  by  applying  the  positive  directly  to  the  tissues 
and  the  negative  outside.  This  is  not,  however,  an  invariable 
rule  ;  very  much  depends  upon  the  other  conditions  present  in  a 
given  case.  According  to  Ziemssen,  hypersemia  of  tissues  is 
more  lasting  after  a  long  application  of  the  negative  pole, 
while  anemia  follows  a  similar  application  of  the  positive  pole  ; 
but  in  either  instance  there  occurs  sooner  or  later  a  reaction, 
followed,  in  favorable  cases,  by  a  normal  condition. 


Length,  7%  inches. 

This  consists  of  a  curved  insulated  stem,  terminating  in  a  nickel-plated  knob,  for 
localizing  electricity  upon  single  muscles. 

Paralysis  of  the  muscles  of  the  throat  may  give  rise  to 
difficulty  in  swallowing,  and,  if  the  muscles  of  the  larynx  are 
involved,  loss  of  voice.  The  method  of  applying  electricity  direct 
to  the  affected  muscles  requires  considerable  skill.  The  fauces, 
root  of  the  tongue,  uvula,  etc.,  must  be  avoided,  as  the  slightest 
touch  will  render  them  intolerant  of  treatment.  The  electrode 
shown  in  Fig.  106  conveys  the  current  direct  to  the  muscle,  while 
the  alternate  one  is  applied  on  the  nape  or  sides  of  the  neck. 
McKenzie  and  Ziemssen  recommend  a  double  electrode,  attached 
to  an  interrupting  handle,  by  means  of  which  both  the  posi- 
tive and  negative  poles  are  applied  directly  to  the  paralyzed 
muscles. 

The  reader  who  wishes  to  employ  this  treatment  is  referred  to 
standard  works  on  laryngoscopy,  etc.,  for  information  in  regard 


fiL£CTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  311 

to  the  delicate  manipulations  necessary  to  localize  the  current. 
A  method  which  has  the  merit  of  being  simple,  and  often  quite  as 
efficacious,  is  to  locate  both  electrodes  outside  the  neck,  employ- 
ing a  wire  brush  (Fig.  107)  for  the  one  applied  to  the  sides  of 
the  neck.  The  prognosis  in  these  cases  is  favorable  when  the 
disease  is  ot  a  purely  functional  character.  If  the  muscles  re- 
spond to  stimulation  by  the  faradic  current,  that  is  the  form  of 
electricity  to  employ  ;  if  they  fail  to  respond  to  it,  galvanism 
alone  can  produce  a  curative  effect.  Sometimes  electrization  of 
the  laryngeal  nerves  is  indicated.  A  reference  to  Figs,  72  and 
73  will  indicate  where  the  electrodes  must  be  located. 


Fig.  107. 

METALLIC  BRUSH. 
Length,  4  inches. 


This  is  composed  of  a  bundle  of  stiff  metal  wires.  It  divides  the  current  into  rays 
each  of  which  produces  a  separate  impression  on  the  sentient  nerves  of  the  skin.  To  pro- 
duce reflex  influence,  merely  touch  the  end  of  the  brush  to  the  skin ;  to  transmit  this 
divided  current  to  the  deeper  tissues  press  the  brush  firmly  on  the  skin.  The  wires  may  be 
separated  considerably  to  cover  a  larger  surface,  but  in  that  case  the  impression  produced 
will  be  proportionately  less  intense. 

Aphonia. — Faradism.  Robert  Torrance,  L.Tl-CP.,"^  reports 
a  ease  of  five  years'  standing,  the  result  of  an  ulcerated  sore 
throat.  All  the  usual  remedial  measures  had  been  exhausted, 
including  galvanism.  The  cords  were  then  faradized  by  a  double 
electrode  through  which  the  current  from  both  poles  was 
localized  at  different  points  on  the  vocal  cords,  and  the  voice  was 
permanently  restored  after  a  number  of  sittings  at  varying  inter- 
vals.   Loss  of  voice  due  to  paralysis  of  the  recurrent  laryngeal 

'  *  Surgeon  to  the  Newcastle-on-Tyne  Throat  and  Ear  Infirmary. 


312 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


nerve  requires  galvanism.  The  motor  points  to  which  the 
current  should  be  applied  are  shown  on  Figs.  72  and  73. 
Meyer  recommends  the  electric  moxa  applied  to  the  larynx  in 
these  cases.  Aphonia,  due  to  spasm  of  the  muscles  of  the  throat, 
will  require  a  current  in  an  opposite  direction  to  that  which  is 
indicated  in  paralysis.  Hysterical  aphonia  has  been  cured  by 
every  form  of  electricity. 

Aphasia.  Loss  of  speech  from  disease  of  the  brain  has  never 
been  cured  by  electricity,  according  to  Althaus.  On  the  contrary, 
Arthius  claims  to  have  relieved  it  in  a  measure  by  franklinism, 
administered  daily  in  the  form  of  electric  bath,  for  two  or  three 
months. 


Fig.  108. 

EXTERNAL  LARYNGEAL  ELECTRODE. 
Length,  4}/^  inches.  Diameter  of  Disc,  1%  inches. 


This  is  a  curved  insulated  stem,  terminating  in  a  sponge-covered  disc,  designed  for 
application  about  the  neck. 

Stammering.  The  galvanic  current  applied  two  or  three 
times  a  week  through  the  laryngeal  nerves,  accompanied  by  daily 
gymnastic  education  of  the  vocal  and  respiratory  organs,  has 
proved  of  benefit. 

The  Tensor  Palati  may  be  electrized  by  a  laryngeal  elec- 
trode applied  over  the  soft  palate  in  the  course  of  the  muscle  on 
each  side  of  the  uvula,  the  circuit  being  completed  by  placing  the 
other  pole  over  the  mastoid  process  of  that  side  corresponding  to 
the  side  of  the  palate  to  which  the  laryngeal  electrode  is  being 
applied. 

Nervous  Cough  and  HYPERiESTHEsiA  must  be  treated  accord- 
ing to  general  principles,  as  already  described.  Central  galvani- 
zation is  usually  indicated.    Franklinism  is  also  recommended. 


ELECTRO-THEKAPEUTICS. 


313 


Whooping-Cough.  Dr.  Beard  made  a  series  of  experiments 
in  the  Sheltering  Arms  Institution  in  Brooklyn,  and  Dr.  Rockwell 
in  private  practice,  in  the  treatment  of  this  disease  by  electricity. 
The  method  which  proved  most  successful  was  central  galvaniza- 
tion. The  paroxysms  were  diminished  in  frequency  and  violence, 
and  in  some  instances  the  duration  of  the  disease  was  shortened. 

Hay  Fever.  The  method  of  arresting  this  disease  is  by  gal- 
vanization of  the  pneumogastric  nerve.  The  location  of  the 
electrode  is  shown  in  Fig.  74.  Keftel,  Hutchinson  and  Beard 
and  Rockwell  recommend  this  method.  The  latter  recommend 
as  a  prophylatic  a  prolonged  course  of  central  galvanization  or 
general  faradization.  Caution  should  be  observed,  however,  in 
applying  a  current  to  the  pneumogastric  nerve. 

Spasm  of  the  Glottis.  Central  galvanization  and  faradiza- 
tion of  the  larynx  have  both  been  successfully  employed. 

Dr.  Strassman*  reports  the  case  of  a  boy  eight  years  old  who 
had  with  each  expiration  a  sound  like  that  of  a  dying  animal, 
with  some  tickling  in  the  throat  and  pains  in  the  abdomen.  It 
was  a  constant  crying  about  every  five  minutes.  During  the 
night  there  was  perfect  rest.  The  galvanic  current  cured  him 
completely  after  the  second  sitting. 

Clergyivian's  Sore  Throat. —  Galvcmo- Cautery.  When  the 
follicles  of  the  throat  are  enlarged  for  any  length  of  time,  medi- 
cines have  no  effect  upon  them.  The  only  means  of  relief  is  to 
destroy  them,  and  galvano-cautery  is  to  be  preferred  for  this 
purpose,  as  it  is  effectual  and  causes  little  pain. 

The  platinum  point  is  suited  to  this  purpose.  The  operator 
stands  by  the  side  of  the  patient,  whose  head  is  thrown  backward; 
the  tongue  is  depressed  and  each  follicle  cauterized.  It  produces 
a  slight  prickling  only.  The  inflammation  set  up  produces 
cicatrix  and  contraction  of  the  follicle. 


*  Berlin  Klin.  Woch. 


314 


>  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


Tonsillitis  has  been  reported  relieved  by  the  application 
of  an  electric  current,  but  as  the  articles  describing  the  method 
of  its  application  failed  to  state  what  kind  of  electricity  or  the 
strength  of  current  used,  we  give  but  a  passing  mention. 

Enlarged  tonsils  have  been  reduced  in  some  instances  by 
means  of  a  very  mild  galvanic  current,  the  positive  applied 
direct,  the  negative  externally  to  the  side  of  the  neck.  The 
current  is  better  borne  if  carried  through  a  rheostat.  Fig.  109 
is  an  electrode  of  suitable  shape  to  localize  the  current. 

Fig.  109. 

TONSIL  ELECTRODE. 
Length,  5  inches.   Diameter  of  cup,  1  inch. 

The  peculiar  curve  of  the  insulated  stem  of  this  electrode  makes  it  possible  to  apply 
the  nickel-plated  cup  closely  over  the  tonsil,  without  producing  irritation  of  any  other  part 
of  the  pharynx. 

Diphtheria.  The  galvanic  current  has  been  applied  to  change 
the  nature  of  the  secretions,  and  reduce  the  swelling  of  the 
tissues.  Dr.  G.  K.  Smith*  claims  remarkable  success  in  its 
use.  Diphtheritic  paralysis  affecting  the  muscles  of  the  throat 
has  been  relieved  by  faradism. 

Stricture  of  (Esophagus. — Electrolysis.  Some  cases  of  im- 
passable stricture  of  the  oesophagus  have  been  relieved  by 
electrolysis.  The  electrode  required  is  a  flexible  insulated 
instrument,  terminating  in  a  blunt  olive.  It  is  connected  with 
the  negative  pole  of  the  battery  while  the  positive  electrode  of 
large  size  is  placed  to  the  left  side  of  the  spine,  at  a  level 
with  the  eighth  or  ninth  rib.  A  mild  current  is  passed  through 
the  circuit  for  two  or  three  minutes.    A  sound  is  then  passed 


*  Proceed.  Med.  Soc.  King's  Co.,.  Aug.  1881. 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


315 


through  the  stricture,  if  possible.  This  can  be  done  after  a 
few  sittings,  if  not  at  first,  and  the  remainder  of  the  treatment 
may  be  by  dilatation,  as  usual.  Dr.  Boeckel  operated  after 
this  plan  on  an  impassable  cicatricial  stricture,  and  after  the 
second  sitting  passed  a  IN'o.  13  sound  through  it ;  after  the 
tenth,  a  No.  16,  and  one  month  later,  No.  19.  Dilatation  was 
kept  up  for  some  time  regularly,  and  afterward  once  a  month. 
Seven  years  later  the  patient  could  himself  pass  a  No.  23. 
He  also  successfully  treated  a  child  for  the  same  difficulty. 
After  the  first  sitting  he  could  pass  a  urethral  bougie  No.  6, 
and  after  the  second,  a  No.  10.  After  five  more  sittings,  at 
varying  intervals.  No.  IT  passed  the  stricture.  He  recom- 
mends a  weak  current  in  order  to  guard  against  exciting 
inflammation  in  neighboring  parts. 

Tumors,  etc.  Galvano-cautery  is  especially  adapted  to  the 
removal  of  foreign  growths,  both  benign  and  malignant,  from 
within  the  fauces. 

THE  HEART  AND  LUNGS. 

Electricity  is  believed  to  influence  the  heart  through  the 
nerves,  and  the  lungs  directly  through  the  nerves  and  indirectly 
through  its  action  upon  the  muscles  of  the  chest.  The  pneumo- 
gastric  nerve,  when  stimulated  by  electricity  at  the  right  side 
of  the  neck,  acts  more  energetically  upon  the  heart ;  at  the  left 
side  upon  the  respiratory  movements.  The  cervical  ganglia  and 
the  pneumogastric  nerve  are  the  points  to  which  electricity  should 
be  applied  to  reach  the  heart;  the  twelve  dorsal  ganglia,  the 
phrenic  and  pneumogastric  for  the  lungs.  Faradization  of  the 
pneumogastric  by  a  strong  current,  as  we  have  seen,  arrests  the 
heart's  action.  Prof.  Rosenthal  states  that  faradization  of  the 
superior  laryngeal  nerve  arrests  respiration.  Prof.  Yon  Ziemssen 
lately  had  a  patient,  a  woman,  aged  forty-six,  who  had  lost  the 
greater  part  of  the  precordial  structures,  exposing  the  heart ;  and 


316 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


he  commenced  a  series  of  experiments  to  determine  the  effects 
of  the  galvanic  and  faradic  currents  respectively  on  that  organ. 
He  distinctly  discovered  that  the  faradic  current  had  no  effect 
whatever,  while  the  galvanic  current  acted  as  a  powerful 
stimulant.  He  therefore  believes  it  is  useless  in  cases  of  chloro- 
form syncope  to  waste  time  in  applications  of  the  faradic  current, 
as  is  commonly  done. 

Diseases  of  the  chest  in  which  electricity  has  heen  employed  : 


Angina  Pectoris. — Galvanism.  Dr.  Lowenfeld^  relates  a 
case  of  angina  pectoris  in  which  galvanization  proved  bene- 
ficial. The  patient,  a  man  aged  forty-seven,  was  subject  to 
attacks  of  the  disease  occurring  every  month  or  two.  These 
were  characterized  by  excited  respiration,  oppression,  small, 
frequent  pulse,  sternal  pain  radiating  to  the  left  arm,  and  con- 
vulsive tremors  of  the  limbs,  which  lasted  about  one  l^our.  The 
heart  was  normal.  The  constant  current  was  applied  for  one 
minute  to  each  side  of  the  neck,  along  the  course  of  the  pneu- 
mogastric.  The  sense  of  oppression  was  immediately  relieved. 
Ten  such  applications  in  the  course  of  three  weeks  were  fol- 
lowed by  complete  freedom  from  the  attacks  for  more  than 
two  years. 

Faradism.  M.  Duchenne  removed  the  pain  during  an  attack 
of  angina  pectoris  in  two  cases  by  applying  one  electrode  over 
each  nipple,  using  a  strong  faradic  current.  Cutaneous  fara- 
dization at  intervals  completely  removed  the  angina. 

Asthma. — Faradism.  Dr.  Max  Schaeffer,  of  Bremen,  ad- 
vocates the  treatment  of  asthma  according  to  the  following 
method:  The  morbid  state  upon  which  asthma  depends  may 


Angina  pectoris, 

Asthma, 

Consumption, 


Asphyxia, 
Cardiac  pain, 
Pleuritic  effusion. 


*  Aerztl.  Intelligenzhl.,  No.  39,  1881. 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


317 


affect — 1.  The  nerve  itself.  2.  The  coverings  of  the  nerve. 
3.  The  tissue  adjacent  to  the  nerve.  He  lays  great  stress  on 
the  last  condition.  Tumors,  such  as  nasal  polypi,  hypertrophied 
tonsils,  swollen  cervical  or  bronchial  glands  (temporary  hyper- 
aemia  of  these  glands),  can,  according  to  their  position,  cause 
irritative  pressure  on  nerve-filaments  connected  with  tlie  respi- 
piratory  centers.  He  found  that  many  of  liis  asthmatic  patients 
were  the  subjects  of  nasal  catari'h,  or  pharyngeal  catarrh,  or 
laryngo-tracheal  catarrh.  He  noticed  that  swellings  of  the 
mucous  membranes  of  these  parts  were  attended  with  asthmatic 
paroxysms,  and  patients  would  constantly  refer  the  seat  of 
their  discomfort  lower  or  higher  in  the  throat,  according  to 
the  seat  of  the  swelling,  and  he  concludes  that  all  the  symp- 
toms of  asthma  are  symptoms  of  irritation  brought  on  by 
pressure  on  nerves  which  are  in  connection  with  the  pulmonary 
portion  of  the  vagus,  and  especially  in  the  upper  part  of  the 
respiratory  tract — the  pharynx,  larynx  and  trachea. 

He  examines  carefully  the  nose  and  throat,  and  applies  the 
electrodes  according  to  the  seat  of  the  disease.  Usually  the 
two  electrodes  are  placed  on  each  side  of  the  neck  about  f 
of  an  inch  below  the  angle  of  the  jaw,  and  sometimes  a 
little  lower  down  in  front  of  the  sterno-cleido-mastoideus.  The 
current  must  be  of  good  strength,  so  that  the  patient  can  feel 
the  stream  go  across  the  larynx  and  soft  palate.  In  bad  cases 
it  should  be  applied  twice  a  day,  from  fifteen  to  thirty  min- 
utes each  sitting.  He  states  that  in  the  most  severe  cases  it 
has  acted  "like  witchcraft." 

Althaus  advises  faradization  of  the  phrenic  nerve  as  above 
described  in  chronic  cases,  where  the  asthmatic  attack  is  pro- 
longed and  followed  by  bronchial  congestion,  with  insufiicient 
expansion  of  thorax  and  imperfect  aeration  of  the  blood. 

Galvanism.  Asthma  due  to  a  morbid  state  of  the  nerve 
or  its  coverings  is  relieved  by  placing  the  positive  pole  over 


318 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


the  pneumogastric  in  the  left  side  of  the  neck  and  the  negative 
over  the  nape  of  the  neck.  A  very  mild  current  should  be 
employed,  lest  the  heart's  action  be  arrested  or  the  difficulty 
in  breathing  increased.  Asthma  due  to  reflex  action  of  the 
nerves,  caused  by  disease  of  other  parts  than  those  named, 
cannot  be  permanently  relieved  by  electricity  until  the  disease 
giving  rise  to  it  is  removed.  Habitual  asthma  has  been  greatly 
benefited  by  a  continued  galvanic  current  administered  through 
the  galvanic  belt,  the  positive  pole  being  located  at  the  nape 
of  the  neck  and  the  negative  over  the  stomach.  During  an 
attack,  counter-irritation  over  the  neck  and  upper  part  of  the 
thorax,  by  means  of  the  wire  brush,  has  proven  of  advantage. 

Franklinism.  Arthius  states  that  when  asthma  exists  with- 
out organic  lesion,  the  franklinic  electric  bath,  the  patient  being 
seated  upon  an  insulated  platform,  will  cure  it.  When  due 
to  catarrh,  electricity  alone  will  not  cure,  but  is  the  surest  means 
to  obtain  a  notable  amelioration  and  to  make  life  endurable. 
He  advises  an  electrization  for  ten  minutes  daily,  and  in  some 
cases  three  or  four  times  daily,  during  the  paroxysms. 

Consumption. — Galvanism.  The  well  known  influence  of  a 
mild  galvanic  current  in  relieving  inflamed  and  ulcerated  tissues 
ought  to  make  it  a  valuable  agent  in  alleviating  many  of  the 
distressing  symptoms  accompanying  chronic  disease  of  the  lungs. 
It  is  stated  that  this  effect  is  produced  by  a  current  from  a  very 
few  cells ;  only  two  or  three  cells  should  be  used  at  first,  and  not 
continued  beyond  ten  minutes.  One*  small  metal  electrode  is 
placed  in  the  depression  behind  the  angle  of  the  lower  jaw,  and 
the  other  over  the  pneumogastric,  near  the  sterno-clavicular 
articulation.  The  efifect  is  to  dilate  the  lungs  and  increase  the 
respiratory  movements.  It  increases  the  expectoration  consider- 
ably at  first,  but  after  a  few  sittings  lessens  it,  unless  there  is 
extensive  softening  and  destruction  of  lung.  The  fever  is 
lessened  and  the  condition  of  the  blood  improves ;  the  appetite 


ELECTRO-THEEAPEUTICS. 


319 


returns,  night  sweats  disappear,  and  in  a  few  cases  the  process  of 
repair  begins. 

Faradism.  Bastings,  of  Brussels,  claims  marvelous  results 
from  faradization  of  the  muscles  of  the  chest.  "This  is  not  done 
with  a  view  to  directly  affect  the  tuberculous  deposit  at  all,  but, 
bj  strengthening  the  muscles  of  the  chest,  to  so  improve  the 
respiratory  power  that  more  air  can  be  inspired,  and  so  benefit 
result  to  the  healthy  portion  of  the  lung,  and  indirectly,  through 
better  oxygenation  of  the  blood,  to  a  certain  extent  on  the 
diseased  portion  and  on  the  whole  system."  Each  muscle  is 
faradized  for  about  half  a  minute  in  turn,  about  five  minutes 
being  consumed  at  a  sitting.  Prolonged  treatment  was  found 
injurious.  Dr.  Mcintosh  has  found  the  hot-air  electric  bath 
exceedingly  efficacious  in  allaying  the  distressing  symptoms, 
improving  the  general  health  and  apparently  prolonging  life.  In 
one  remarkable  case,  the  particulars  of  which  cannot  be  given 
for  want  of  space,  it  restored  a  patient  apparently  in  the  last 
stage  of  the  disease  to  a  degree  of  health  that  enabled  him  to 
attend  to  business  for  nearly  two  years  longer.  It  should  be 
added  that  the  treatment  also  included  a  strict  attention  to 
hygiene  and  much  open-air  exercise. 

Asphyxia.  Suspended  animation,  whether  resulting  from 
inhalation  of  chloroform  or  coal-gas,  poisoning,  drowning, 
disease,  or  in  new-born  children,  should  not  be  treated  by 
electricity  alone.  As  an  adjunct  to  other  active  measures 
the  latter  is  invaluable.  It  is  employed  principally  to  stimu- 
late the  heart,  lungs  and  diaphragm  through  the  nerves 
that  supply  them.  Formerly  franklinism  was  used  by  pass- 
ing powerful  shocks  through  the  chest  in  various  direc- 
tions. After  the  discovery  of  galvanism  some  physicians 
carried  canes  which  were  ingeniously  contrived  to  inclose  a 
large  number  of  small  elements,  a  vial  of  acid,  a  tiny  cup, 
the  size  of  a  thimble,  in  which  to  mix  the  fluid,  with  connecting 


320 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


wires,  etc.,  complete  f(^r  the  production  of  a  galvanic  current  of 
sufficient  power  to  relieve  asphyxia. 

Galvanism.  To  produce  respiration,  place  the  negative  pole 
over  the  cartilage  of  the  seventh  rib,  to  bring  it  as  near  as 
possible  to  the  great  head  of  the  diaphragm,  and  apply  the 
positive  to  the  phrenic  nerve  in  the  neck.  Onimus  and  Legros 
recommended  that  the  negative  pole  be  placed  in  the  mouth 
and  the  positive  in  the  rectum,  and  the  current  be  applied 
from  eighteen  or  twenty  cells  continuously,  till  the  heart's 
action  is  quite  re-established.  According  to  Du  Bois,  in  sudden 
syncope  from  chloroform,  the  muscles  of  the  heart  lose  their 
contractility  within  four  minutes,  but  in  suspended  animation 
from  other  causes  they  retain  contractility  for  ten  minutes  ; 
therefore  it  is  advisable  to  apply  electricity  simultaneously 
with  other  measures,  that  no  time  may  be  lost. 

Faradism.  Friedberg^  restored  a  boy,  aged  four,  after  res- 
piration had  ceased,  under  the  influence  of  chloroform,  by 
applying  the  electrodes  over  the  phrenic  nerve  and  diaphragm. 
He  closed  the  circuit  for  one  second  at  a  time  with  regular 
intermissions.  After  ten  such  applications  the  child  began  to 
breathe,  when  faradization  was  discontinued  and  methodical 
compression  of  the  abdomen  was  substituted.  In  twenty 
minutes  restoration  was  complete.  One  electrode  may  be 
applied  at  the  nape  of  the  neck  instead  of  over  the  phrenic 
at  the  side.  The  operator  should  know  the  exact  location 
of  the  motor  point  of  the  phrenic  nerve  on  the  side  of  the 
necTc^  otherwise  he  is  liable  to  apply  the  electrode  over  the 
pneumogastric^  which  may  destroy  the  last  chance  of  restoration. 
(The  reason  for  this  is  explained  under  "action  of  arrest.")  it 
is  better  to  err  on  the  side  of  safety  when  the  motor  points 
are  not  well  known,  and  place  the  electrode  on  the  nape  of 
the  neck,  or  on  the  spine  between  the  shoulder-blades.  By 

*Virchow's  Archives. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


321 


reference  to  Fig.  73  it  may  be  seen  where  to  locate  the  elec- 
trodes over  the  roots  of  those  nerves  that  send  branches  to  the 
heart  and  lungs. 

The  following  suggestions  may  be  found  useful  in  these 
cases : 

1.  Do  not  omit  artificial  respiration. 

2.  Use  either  the  faradic  or  interrupted  galvanic  current 
intermittently,  closing  the  circuit  for  one  second,  opening  it  for 
one  second,  and  so  continue,  and  persevere  in  the  application 
until  the  patient  breathes  naturally. 

3.  If  the  muscles  fail  to  respond  to  faradism,  it  will  be 
useless  to  continue  it.  Galvanism  should  be  immediately  sub- 
stituted. 

NERvons  Cardiac  Pain  near  the  apex  of  the  heart,  a  common 
and  distressing  symptom,  is  alleviated  by  central  galvanization. 

Chronic  Pleuritic  Effusion.  Dr.  Gunther^  places  the  posi- 
tive pole  over  the  breastbone  and  the  negative  over  the 
effusion.  A  galvanic  current  from  any  number  of  zinc  carbon 
cells  up  to  eighteen  may  be  used,  according  to  the  sensitive- 
ness and  condition  of  the  patient,  to  promote  absorption. 

Paralysis  of  the  Muscles  of  the  Diaphragm.  M.  Duchenne 
made  a  special  study  of  this  lesion.  It  consists  in  an  alteration 
of  the  regular  movements  of  the  chest  and  abdomen,  during  in- 
spiration and  expiration,  which  produces  a  short  respiration 
insufficient  for  the  wants  of  the  voice  ;  this  is  not  a  fatal  disease 
of  itself,  because  respiration  is  not  completely  prevented,  but  the 
most  simple  bronchitis  is  able  to  occasion  death  by  suffocation, 
expectoration  being  difficult  and  even  impossible.  The  remedy 
is  electrization  through  the  phrenic  and  cutaneous  nerves ;  in 
the  latter  case,  to  exert  a  reflex  influence  upon  the  paralyzed 
muscles. 


*  Centralblatt  fur  Chir.  Med. 


322 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


DIGESTIVE  ORGANS. 

A  ction  of  electricity  upon  the  salivary  glands.  Claude  Ber- 
nard states  that  faradization  of  the  lingual  and  auriculo- 
temporal nerves,  the  chorda  tympani  and  posterior  parotideal 
branches  of  the  facial  nerve  causes  an  abundant  flow  of  saliva, 
while  faradization  of  the  sympathetic  nerve  arrests  salivary 
secretion.  The  current  applied  to  the  drum  of  the  ear  for  the 
purpose  of  stimulating  the  salivary  glands  through  the  chorda 
tympani  should  be  very  mild,  and  should  be  carried  through 
a  rheostat.  Galvanization  applied  only  through  the  sympa- 
thetic nerve  in  the  neck  is  sufficient  to  influence  the  secretion 
in  these  glands. 

The  oesophagus.  Faradization  causes  a  contraction  of  both 
the  longitudinal  and  circular  fibres,  and  if  the  current  is  kept 
up  some  time,  the  action  is  not  limited  to  the  part  directly 
operated  upon,  but  proceeds  downward  to  the  stomach.  One 
electrode  may  be  located  over  the  oesophagus  in  front,  and  the 
other,  a  large  moist  sponge,  over  the  middle  and  inferior  cer- 
vical and  upper  dorsal  ganglia.  (See  Fig.  73.)  Galvanization 
of  the  left  pneumogastric  nerve  also  produces  contraction  of  the 
muscles  of  the  oesophagus.  (See  A,  Fig.  74.)  This  action  of 
electricity  upon  the  oesophagus  is  of  value  in  treating  difficulty 
in  swallowing  (dysphagia)  not  due  to  stricture. 

The  stomach  responds  to  electric  stimulus  by  shortening  of 
its  diameter.  When  one  electrode  is  placed  over  the  stomach 
in  front,  and  the  other  on  the  spine  in  the  position  to  influence 
the  solar  plexus  (see  N,  Fig.  73),  the  transverse  diameter  is 
shortened.  When  one  electrode  is  placed  at  the  left  over  the 
point  where  the  oesophagus  joins  the  stomach  (cardia),  and  the 
other  at  the  right  where  the  stomach  joins  the  intestinal  canal 
(pylorus),  the  longitudinal  diameter  is  shortened,  but  in  either 
case  the  direction  of  the  movements  is  from  the  cardia  to 
the  pylorus. 


ELECTRO-THEKAPEUTICS. 


323 


The  liver.  As  a  result  of  very  carefully  conducted  experi- 
ments, Dr.  Sigrist  came  to  the  conclusion  that  faradization  of 
the  liver  makes  its  circulation  more  active,  and  consequently 
leads  to  an  increase  of  the  excreted  urea.  In  one  case  the 
amount  of  urea  was  raised  from  18-20  grms.  to  35  grms.,  and  the 
size  of  the  liver  became  perceptibly  larger. 

The  gall-bladder.  A  current  sent  through  the  point  indi- 
cated by  G,  Fig.  74,  contracts  the  gall-bladder,  and  throws  out 
a  part  of  the  bile  into  the  duodenum. 

The  sjpleen.  There  is  much  diiference  of  opinion  in  regard 
to  the  power  of  electricity  to  produce  contractions  of  this  organ. 
Thie  experiments  of  Bernard  indicate  that  a  powerful  faradic 
current  does  cause  contractions.  Chvostek  claims  that  he  has 
reduced  enlargement  of  the  spleen,  caused  by  ague,  by  faradi- 
zation of  the  skin  over  this  organ. 

The  intestines.  Peristaltic  action  is  the  term  applied  to  the 
constant  motion  within  the  intestinal  canal.  It  is  due  to  the 
alternate  contraction  of  the  circular  and  longitudinal  fibres ; 
the  former  close  the  tube,  while  the  latter  draw  back  the  walls 
of  the  tube,  thus  providing  for  the  propulsion  of  the  contents. 
It  takes  place  along  the  whole  digestive  canal  from  the  throat 
to  the  anus,  and  effects  the  forward  motion  of  the  food,  and 
the  expulsion  of  the  undigested  residue. 

This  motion  can  be  stimulated  by  electricity,  either  by  irri- 
tating some  part  of  the  digestive  canal  directly  or  by  irritating 
the  nerves  supplying  it.  The  most  striking  feature  is  the  slow- 
ness with  which  these  motions  take  place.  Kot  only  does  a 
long  time  elapse  after  the  application  of  the  irritant  before  the 
motion  begins,  but  even  if  the  irritation  is  sudden  and  instan- 
taneous, the  motion  excited  at  one  point  passes  along  gradually, 
slowly  increasing  up  to  a  definite  point,  and  then  gradually 
decreasing.    In  1856  Pfiuger  discovered  that  faradization  of 

*  VroJLicK  1880,  No.  2. 


324 


ELECTRO-THEKAPEUTICS. 


those  nerves  that  take  their  rise  from  the  six  lower  dorsal 
ganglia  arrests  the  peristaltic  action  of  the  small  intestines. 

According  to  Aldini,  a  feeble  galvanic  current,  applied  by 
means  of  the  positive  pole  in  the  month  and  the  negative  in 
the  rectum,  will  cause  contraction  of  the  abdominal  muscles, 
and  the  contents  of  the  bowels  are  propelled  toward  the  rectum. 
The  small  intestines  are  more  easily  excited  by  electricity  than 
the  colon  or  rectum^  although  the  latter  also  respond  to  elec- 
tric stimulus. 

When  the  electrodes  are  placed  very  near  each  other  on  the 
intestines,  and  afterward  removed,  the  canal  becomes  constricted 
at  the  points  upon  which  the  electrodes  were  applied.  This 
constriction  reaches  its  maximum  a  few  minutes  after  the  elec- 
trodes have  been  removed,  then  slowly  •disappears.  There  is 
at  the  same  time  increased  secretion  of  intestinal  mucus.  The 
contractions  may  be  studied  during  life  in  patients  afflicted 
with  hernia. 

This  practical  fact  in  regard  to  the  action  of  electricity  upon 
the  digestive  organs  should  not  be  lost  sight  t^f  Those  mus- 
cles that  are  not  subject  to  the  vnll  {involuntary)  aire  not  affected 
hy  electricity  until  a  little  time  after  they  have  heen  acted  upon. 
The  movements  excited  hy  electricity  continue  for  a  time  after 
the  application  ceases^  and  extend  in  each  direction  heyond  the 
parts  included  between  the  electrodes. 

The  diseases  of  the  digestive  organs  to  which  electricity  has 
been  applied  with  more  or  less  benefit  include  almost  the  entire 
list  of  disorders  that  affect  these  organs  ;  the  methods  of  treat- 
ment varying  with  different  operators,  but  may  all  be  included 
under  these  four  divisions  : 

1.  The  application  of  electricity  to  the  muscles. 

2.  To  the  nerves  of  the  organ  to  be  treated. 

3.  Chemical  changes  produced  by  electrolysis. 

4.  Destruction  of  morbid  tissue  by  galvano-cautery. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


325 


No  fixed  rule  can  be  given  for  the  selection  of  current,  the 
length  or  direction  of  its  application,  that  can  be  invariably  fol- 
lowed. The  operator  must  be  guided  by  the  circumstances  of  the 
case  ;  but  the  following  suggestions,  based  on  principles  already 
described,  may  prove  useful  :  When  spasmodic  action  is  to  be 
arrested  by  the  application  of  electricity  to  the  muscles^  a  mild 
current  should  be  selected,  with  the  positive  on  the  organ  and  the 
negative  at  some  indifferent  point ;  when  applying  electricity 
through  the  nerves  to  allay  irritation,  that  portion  of  the  nerve 
near  the  diseased  organ,  when  accessible,  may  be  put  into  a  state 
of  anelectrotoiios  by  placing  the  positive  over  the  organ  and  the 
negative  on  the  nerve  some  distance  away,  and  employing  a  very 
mild  current  for  fifteen  or  twenty  minutes.  When  the  nerve  is 
not  directly  accessible,  place  the  positive  over  the  ganglia,  from 
which  the  organ  receives  its  nerve  supply,  and  the  negative  over 
the  organ  affected.  The  location  of  the  electrodes  should  be  re- 
versed when  the  muscles  or  nerves  are  to  be  stimulated,  to  in- 
crease the  functional  activity  of  an  organ.  Beard  and  Rockwell 
state  this  as  a  fundamental  fact :  "  The  faradic  current  is  usually 
preferable  to  the  galvanic  for  applications  to  the  stomachy 
spleen^  liver ^  intestines  and  uterus.''^ 

A  new  method  of  applying  electricity  to  the  stomach : 

Dr.  Kussmaul  has  suggested  a  method  of  localizing  a  current 
upon  the  interior  walls  of  the  stomach  that  has  been  tried  to  a 
limited  extent  only.  The  patient  having  filled  the  stomach  with 
water,  an  instrument  like  an  oesophageal  bougie,  insulated,  except 
at  the  tip,  is  passed  into  the  stomach  through  the  oesophagus  and 
connected  with  one  pole  of  the  battery  ;  the  alternate  pole  is 
placed  outside  on  the  skin  over  the  stomach. 

Vomiting.  Dr.  Leven  ^  reports  several  cases  of  persistent 
vomiting  successfully  treated  by  the  application  of  electricity  in 
the  interior  of  the  stomach  by  the  method  above  described. 


*Progres  Medical. 


326 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


Four  or  five  applications  have  checked  it  in  cases  that  had  re- 
sisted all  other  measures.    No  other  particulars  were  given. 

Faradism.  Obstinate  vomiting  from  any  cause  is  often 
promptly  relieved  by  placing  the  electrodes  respectively  on  the 
pit  of  the  stomach  and  over  the  lower  dorsal  ganglia.  It 
is  frequently  necessary  to  use  as  strong  a  current  as  the 
patient  can  comfortably  endure,  and  to  prolong  the  sitting  be- 
yond the  usual  limit ;  twenty  to  thirty  minutes  will  sometimes 
answer  better  than  a  shorter  time.  Dr.  Lente,  of  Cold  Spring, 
New  York,  reports  a  large  number  of  cases  relieved  of  the 
most  troublesome  and  intractable  vomiting  by  this  method. 

Galvanism.  Bartholow  recommends  a  galvanic  current  ap- 
plied by  placing  the  positive  pole  in  the  depression  behind 
the  angle  of  the  jaw  and  the  negative  over  the  stomach  ;  or 
the  positive  may  be  applied  over  the  spine  instead  of  behind 
the  jaw. 

YoMiTiNG  OF  PREGNANCY  has  been  relieved  by  both  forms 
of  electricity.     Each  case  requires  special  treatment. 

Faradism.  A  mild  primary  faradic  current  may  be  used 
with  the  positive  electrode  on  the  pneumogastric  in  the  neck, 
and  the  negative  over  the  pit  of  the  stomach.  The  caution 
already  given  in  regard  to  electrizing  the  pneumogastric 
should  not  be  forgotten.  The  sitting  should  not  be  more 
than  five  minutes  in  duration,  and  may  be  repeated  for 
three  or  four  days  in  succession.  Electricity  applied  to  the 
interior  of  the  stomach  has  entirely  relieved  vomiting  from 
this  cause  that  had  resisted  all  other  treatment.  The  method 
already  described,  of  passing  a  strong  current  directly  through 
from  the  pit  of  the  stomach  to  the  spine,  sometimes  succeeds. 

Galvanism  applied  through  the  pneumogastric  has  also  re- 
lieved a  few  cases.  A  very  mild  current  should  be  used. 
Another  method  is  to  apply  a  feeble  galvanic  current,  from 
two  or  three  cells  only,  for  several  hours  in  succession.  A 


ELF.CTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


32T 


broad,  flat,  moist  sponge  electrode  is  fastened  over  the  stomach, 
and  another  opposite  to  it  over  the  spine,  extending  from  the 
seventh  to  the  tenth  dorsal  vertebrae.  The  patient  may  lie  on 
her  back  during  the  passage  of  the  current;  when  it  is  im- 
possible for  the  patient  to  remain  in  bed  during  treatment, 
the  galvanic  belt  may  be  worn  to  supply  a  current. 

Hysterical  VomriNG  Attended  by  Epigastric  Pains.  Dr. 
Apostoli  has  successfully  treated  cases  of  this  kind  as  follows  ; 

The  positive  pole  is  applied  in  the  subclavicular  region  and 
the  negative  pole  over  the  seat  of  the  pain.  It  is  continued 
for  five  to  fifteen  minutes;  the  gastralgia  and  epigastric  pains 
have  been  stopped  after  ten  to  fifteen  applications. 

Yoi^HTiNG  from  Gastric  Atony.  The  repeated  application 
of  a  mild  galv^anic  current  by  placing  the  positive  electrode 
over  the  pneumogastric  alternately  at  each  side  of  the  neck, 
and  the  negative  over  the  pit  of  the  stomach,  sometimes  re- 
lieves.   The  sitting  should  be  very  brief. 

To  Produce  Yomiting.  Dr.  Fox*  has  used  faradism  to  pro- 
duce emesis  in  the  case  of  two  children,  who  were  in  a  state 
of  collapse,  and  unable  to  swallow  in  consequence  of  having 
eaten  poisonous  fungi.  One  was  apparently  dying  and  insen- 
sible to  the  vapor  of  ammonia.  He  applied  one  electrode  to 
the  top  of  the  oesophagus,  and  the  other  over  the  stomach. 
Vomiting  immediately  followed,  and  both  children  were  evi- 
dently saved  by  this  means. 

Gastrodynia  or  Nervous  Cardialgia.  Those  painful  affec- 
tions of  the  stomach  not  dependent  upon  perceptible  changes 
in  structure  sometimes  called  neuralgic  stomach-ache,  and  due 
to  functional  derangement  of  the  solar  plexus  of  nerves,  are 
generally  relieved  by  galvanism.  Relief  is  frequently  imme- 
diate, but  treatment  should  be  persevered  in  for  some  time  to 
render  it  permanent.    Faradism  with  a  strong  current  some- 

*  British  Medical  Journal,  vol.  ii,  p.  49J;. 


328 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


times  gives  relief.  The  current  in  either  case  may  be  carried 
through  from  the  dorsal  ganglia  to  the  pit  of  the  stomach.  It 
is  sometimes  advantageous  to  combine  general  faradization  and 
central  galvanization  with  the  local  treatment,  especially  in 
the  intervals. 

Gastralgia,  Enteralgia,  Hepatalgia  are  treated  in  the 
same  manner.  Yizioli  relates  the  following  as  an  example  of 
what  can  be  accomplished  by  galvanism  in  some  cases  :  * 

A  woman,  thirty-five  years  old,  haa  been  bitten  ten  years 
previously  by  a  supposed  mad  dog.  The  patient  was  at  first 
intensely  excited,  but  became  calmer  after  a  few  days,  though 
she  lost  her  appetite  and  strength,  menstruation  ceased,  the 
senses  of  hearing  and  smell  became  abnormally  acute,  and 
paroxysmal  attacks  of  intestinal  colic  set  in.  The  latter  became 
more  and  more  frequent,  and  so  violent  as  to  cause  the  patient 
to  shriek  with  pain,  sometimes  causing  fainting-fits,  or  violent 
tonic  and  clonic  convulsions.  For  the  relief  of  the  gastralgia, 
cauterization  of  the  cervix  uteri  was  practiced.  At  this  stage, 
when  the  affection  had  existed  for  more  than  ten  years,  Yizioli 
began  to  treat  the  patient  with  the  constant  current  of  twenty- 
four  to  thirty-six  cells,  placing  one  pole  over  the  stomach. 
The  sittings  were  given  every  other  day.  Amelioration  was 
rapid.  After  the  twentieth  sitting  the  paroxysms  ceased  alto- 
gether, though  there  were  faint  reminders  when  the  uterus  was 
cauterized. 

Franklinism^  in  the  form  of  electro-positive  or  electro-nega- 
tive baths,  has  an  excellent  reputation  in  the  neuralgic  affec- 
tions of  the  stomach,  liver  and  bowels,  and  also  m  nervous 
vomiting.  The  bath  may  be  combmed  with  local  treatment 
by  drawing  sparks  from  the  painful  region.  Immediate  relief 
occurs  in  cases  to  which  this  form  of  electricity  is  adapted. 


*  Mcd.-Chirurg.  Rundschau,  August  1881. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


329 


Dyspepsia  dependent  upon  spinal  exhaustion  will  be  relieved 
by  a  mild  galvanic  current  applied  to  the  spine,  one  pole 
being  located  high  up  over  the  superior  cei-vical  vertebra,  the 
other  over  the  end  of  the  coccyx.    The  current  need  not  be 
applied  directly  to  the  stomach.    Dyspepsia  arising  from  atony 
or  weakness,  should  be  treated  with  a  strong  faradic  current. 
Some  of  these  cases  will  be  greatly  improved  by  simply  hold- 
ing one  uninsulated  electrode  in  each  hand,  while  as  strong  a 
faradic  current  as  can  be  endured  is  passed  through  the  circuit. 
The  first  sitting  may  be  about  five  minutes,  and  subsequent 
ones  may  be  increased  until  they  occupy  twenty  minutes.  A 
sensation  of  soreness  in  the  muscles  of  the  arm  indicate  that 
the  application  was  continued  too  long.    The  treatments  may 
be  repeated  daily  for  one  month,  then  omitted  for  the  same 
length  of  time,  and  again  repeated  if  necessary.    The  muscles 
of  the  arms  and  chest  are  considerably  developed  by  this 
means,  the  appetite  and  digestion  improved.     It  is  scarcely 
necessary  to  add  that  in  all  diseases  of  the  digestive  organs 
the  diet  should  be  regulated.    Dyspepsia  caused  by  over-eat- 
ing, indulgence  in  intoxicating  liquors,  or  where  poisons  have 
been  taken,  is  usually  accompanied  by  a  congested  condition  of 
the  walls  of  the  stomach.    A  mild  faradic  current  may  be 
employed  to  excite  contraction  of  bloodvessels  and  lessen  con- 
gestion.   Sometimes  a  mild  galvanic  current  applied  through 
the  nerves  will  be  needed.    The  treatment  of  dyspepsia  of  every 
form  should  be  conducted  according  to  the  general  principles 
already  given.    A  carefully  regulated  diet  and  patient  appli- 
cation of  the  indicated  form  of  electricity  for  a  considerable 
period  of  time  will  almost  invariably  be  rewarded  with  success, 
provided  the  disease  is  not  attended  by  organic  changes.  The 
electro-thermal  hat/is  are  undoubtedly  better  adapted  to  the 
treatment  of  chronic  disorders  of  the  digestive  organs  than  any 
other  method  which  the  profession  has  yet  adopted. 


330 


ELECTKO-THERAPEUTICS. 


Acidity  of  the  stomachy  loss  of  appetite^  nausea^  waterbrash 
(pyrosis),  and  all  the  other  disagreeable  symptoms  with  which 
dyspeptic  patients  suffer,  may  be  treated  by  some  one  of  the 
methods  described  for  dyspepsia.  A  galvanic  belt  with  the 
electrodes  fastened  respectively  over  the  nape  of  the  neck  and 
pit  of  the  stomach  is  sometimes  beneficial,  the  current  being 
continued  for  weeks.  In  severe  cases  the  electrodes  may  be 
applied  without  a  cover  to  produce  strong  counter-irritation. 
Many  years  ago  it  was  customary,  in  cases  which  could  not  be 
relieved  by  milder  measures,  to  apply  a  blister,  and  fasten  upon 
the  sore  a  disc  of  silver  for  the  positive  electrode,  and  employ 
a  mild  galvanic  current,  to  keep  up  a  discharge.  Electric 
fustigation  with  the  wire  brush  on  the  dry  skin  over  the 
stomach,  the  other  electrode  being  located  on  the  spine,  is 
especially  adapted  to  cases  suffering  from  a  persistent  gnaw- 
ing, burning  sensation  in  the  stomach. 

Dilatation,  and  Catarrh  of  the  Stomach.  The  method 
of  applying  electricity  within  the  stomach  is  highly  recom- 
mended both  by  Kussmaul  and  Ziemssen  in  these  cases. 

Congestion  of  the  Liver.  Passive  cases  may  be  relieved 
in  a  few  days  by  famdism.  Place  a  broad  moist  sponge  posi- 
tive electrode  over  the  spine  in  the  lower  dorsal  region,  and 
draw  the  negative  over  the  liver,  making  firm  pressure,  which 
may  be  gradually  increased  during  the  sitting  so  as  to  carry 
the  electrode  partially  under  the  ribs  ;  lift  it  off  in  front  and 
carry  it  back  to  the  starting-point  without  contact  with  the 
skin.  Caution  should  be  used  in  regulating  the  current  to 
start  with,  which  should  be  very  mild  until  the  tolerance  of 
the  organ  to  electricity  is  known.  In  some  cases  severe  cramps 
will  be  caused  by  non-observance  of  this  rule,  and  if  they 
occur  it  is  difficult  to  persuade  the  patient  to  risk  their  recur- 
rence by  permitting  any  further  electrical  treatment.  Cases 
in  which  the  liver  has  given  the  impression  of  stony  hardness 


ELECTKO-THERAPEUTICS. 


331 


on  palpation,  have  been  materially  relieved  in  a  few  days  by 
this  course.  The  electro-thermal  baths  are  also  to  be  recom- 
mended in  liver  complaints  arising  from  disordered  circulation 
of  blood  through  the  organ. 

CiKRHosis  OF  THE  LivER.  Beard  and  Rockwell  state  that 
the  pains  accompanying  this  disease  are  alleviated  by  electrical 
applications. 

Hydatids  of  the  Liver. — Electrolysis.  At  Guy's  Hospital 
and  the  Royal  Infirmary  for  Children,  a  number  of  cases  have 
been  operated  upon  by  the  method  described  in  the  following 
case  :  "Two  needles  were  introduced  into  the  most  prominent 
part  of  the  swelling,  one  piercing  the  space  between  the  eighth 
and  ninth  costal  cartilages  and  the  other  about  two  inches  be- 
hind it,  between  the  ninth  and  tenth  ribs.  The  needles  were 
passed  in  to  a  depth  of  two  or  three  inches,  so  as  to  be  free 
in  fluid.  Both  needles  were  attached  to  the  negative  con- 
ductor ;  the  positive  being  connected  with  a  large  sponge 
was  placed  on  the  skin  near  the  needles ;  a  current  from 
ten  freshly  charged  cells  was  allowed  to  pass  for  twenty-five 
minutes.  There  was  some  pain  for  four  or  five  hours  after- 
ward. Twenty  days  after,  all  traces  of  the  abdominal  tumor 
had  disappeared."  The  surgeons  at  the  hospitals  referred  to 
claim  that  this  operation  is  free  from  danger,  and  not  liable 
to  set  up  suppuration  within  the  cyst.  It  has  been  suggested 
that  the  transformation  of  chloride  of  sodium  into  caustic  soda 
by  the  chemical  process  which  electricity  sets  up  within  the 
cyst  renders  its  contents  poisonous  to  the  parasite. 

Spleen.  Enlarged  spleen,  the  result  of  malarial  poison- 
ing, has  been  relieved  by  the  same  measures  described  under 
congestion  of  the  liver.  It  is  believed  that  the  effect  produced 
is  due  partly  to  the  mechanical  action  resulting  from  the  con- 
tractions of  the  abdominal  muscles  and  partly  to  the  reflex 


332 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


action  of  the  current,  especially  if  a  metal  electrode  be  used 
on  the  dry  skin  over  the  spleen. 

Catarrhal  Jaundice.  Prof  Gerhardt,  of  Wtirtzburg,  recom- 
mends faradization  of  the  gall-bladder  for  this  disease.  One 
electrode  is  placed  over  it  (see  G,  Fig.  74)  and  the  other  on 
the  back,  opposite  to  it.  A  strong  current  is  passed  through 
it  for  several  minutes.  This  will  be  more  effective  if  the  cur- 
rent is  interrupted  by  removing  and  replacing  the  electrode 
over  the  gall-bladder  at  intervals  of  a  few  seconds.  Some- 
times a  disappearance  of  the  dullness  occurs  during  the  sitting. 
Success  is  certain  if  a  bilious  stool  is  passed  within  the  next 
two  days.  Generally  the  vaso-motor  nerves  of  the  kidneys  are 
excited  at  the  same  time,  and  consequently  the  urine  that  is 
passed  within  twenty-four  hours  after  treatment  is  paler  and 
more  dilute  than  usual. 

Catarrhal  and  Ulcerative  Inflammation  of  the  Coi-on. 
Dr.  Karetzky"^  adopted  the  following  plan  of  treatment  in 
a  case  of  chronic  colitis,  with  ulcerations  and  atony  of  the  in- 
testines, which  had  resisted  for  five  years  every  mode  of  treat- 
ment :  The  positive  pole  was  introduced  into  the  rectum,  while 
the  negative  was  moved  along  the  entire  length  of  the  colon  for 
a  few  minutes.  After  each  application  he  also  faradized  with  the 
brush  the  skin  over  the  affected  region.  After  the  first  few 
seances,  a  very  marked  improvement  was  noticed  in  patient's 
general  and  local  condition,  and  he  recovered  entirely  after 
fifteen  applications  had  been  made. 

Constipation  caused  by  impaired  peristaltic  motion,  loss  of 
power  in  the  abdominal  muscles,  protracted  diarrhoea,  the  abuse 
of  aperient  medicines,  and  in  some  cerebral  and  spinal  disorders, 
may  be  relieved  by  electricity. 


*  Vratch,  1880,  No.  43. 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


333 


Faradisin.  Habital  constipation  is  treated  by  connecting  one 
pole  with  a  rectal  electrode,  or  placing  a  large  electrode  on  the 
perineum,  while  the  other  is  carried  along  the  course  of  the 
colon  in  the  direction  of  the  arrows  on  Fig.  74  from  K  J  to  L  J. 
The  electrode  should  be  moved  slowly  in  one  direction  only,  a 
mild  current  being  employed.  A  powerful  current  produces 
distressing  cramps  in  the  abdomen  ;  they  also  result  from  a 
very  mild  current  occasionally  in  a  subject  who  exhibits  the 
muscular  reactions  peculiar  to  some  forms  of  paralysis.  It  is 
unnecessary  to  employ  a  current  of  sufficient  strength  to  came 
pain. 

Dr.  Blackwood  *  expresses  his  views  on  the  subject  of  consti- 
pation in  these  words : 

Electricity  is  beyond  question  intrinsically  more  valuable  than  any 
other  remedy  we  possess  in  restoring  tone  to  the  intestine  in  long- 
standing cases.  Contrary  to  general  rule,  faradism  is  here  preferable  to 
galvanism ;  but  care  is  requisite  in  its  application,  that  painful  parietal 
muscular  contraction  does  not  occur.  The  current  should  be  rapidly  ap- 
plied over  the  whole  abdomen,  one  pole  brushing  gently  the  parietes, 
the  other  being  located  over  the  solar  plexus  or  anus. 

Flatulence,  colic,  tympanites,  are  relieved  by  faradism,  the 
positive  being  inserted  in  the  rectum  and  the  negative  carried 
over  the  abdomen.  The  condition  which  gives  rise  to  the  forma- 
tion of  gas  in  the  intestinal  canal  should  be  treated  in  the  inter- 
vals between  attacks.  Central  galvanization  will  sometimes 
permanently  cure.  It  maybe  applied  two  or  three  times  per 
week.  Althaus  relates  a  case  of  excessive  flatulency,  the  result  of 
an  attack  of  dysentery  fifteen  years  previously,  which  he  perma- 
nently cured  in  three  weeks  ;  the  positive  pole  was  inserted  in  the 
rectum  and  the  negative  passed  over  the  abdominal  muscles, 
tvjenty-five  cells  being  included  in  the  circuit.  He  does  not  name 
the  kind  or  condition  of  the  cells  employed  ;  but  any  physician 

*  Neurologist  and  electrician  to  the  Presbyterian  Hospital,  physician  to  St.  Mary's 
Hospital,  etc. 


334 


ELECTBO-THERAPEUTICS. 


who  has  experimented  upon  a  piece  of  beef  with  a  galvanic  cur. 
rent  from  a  large  number  of  cells  and  noticed  the  effect  produced 
at  the  poles,  would  hesitate  to  apply  a  current  from  twentj-hve 
freshly  charged  zinc-carbon  cells  anywhere  about  the  body  except 
for  the  purpose  of  electrolysis.  The  treatment  described  for 
dyspepsia  is  appropriate  in  cases  here  referred  to,  to  prevent 
the  recurrence  of  attacks. 

DiARRHCEA. — Faradization.  Beard  and  Rockwell  give  par- 
ticulars of  treatment  which  proved  successful  in  several  obsti- 
nate cases  of  chronic  diarrhoea.  The  method  pursued  was 
general  faradization,  averaging  three  times  per  week,  with  local 
application  to  any  tender  spots  in  the  abdomen.  The  treat- 
ment was  prolonged,  and  the  current  strong.  Immediate 
improvement  was  observable  in  favorable  cases.  Excessive 
peristaltic  action  upon  which  diarrhoea  sometimes  apparently 
depends  may  be  lessened  by  applying  a  strong  current  to  the 
lower  dorsal  ganglia  to  influence  the  splanchnic  nerves. 

Cholera  Infantum.  Dr.  O'Reilley,  of  Louisville,  Ky.,  has 
successfully  employed  faradization  in  the  treatment  of  this 
disease.  The  method  of  applying  it  is  similar  to  that  described 
for  vomiting  and  diarrhoea. 

Intestinal  Obstruction. — Fa/radism.  A  case  of  this  kind 
in  the  Hotel-Dieu  of  Rheims  was  apparently  saved  by  elec- 
tricity. 

A  laborer,  aged  sixty  years,  fell  upon  a  heap  of  stones,  receiving  slight 
contusions  on  the  right  side.  Four  days  after  he  was  brought  to  the  hos- 
pital in  a  state  of  profou  nd  collapse ;  there  was  considerable  tympanites, 
but  no  tenderness  on  pressure.  He  had  two  hernias,  complete  on  the 
right,  with  the  inguinal  ring  enlarged  to  admit  three  fingers ;  on  the  left, 
a  very  small  hernia.  All  the  usual  means  were  made  use  of  without 
effect.  Stercoraceous  vomiting  persisted,  and  on  the  next  day  recourse 
was  had  to  electricity  —  the  first  application  of  twenty  minutes'  duration 
was  made  at  noon ;  one  pole  was  placed  in  the  anus,  while  the  other 
was  moved  over  the  abdomen.   No  effect  being  obtained  it  was  repeated 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


335 


at  five  o'clock  p.m.  At  nine  p.m.  the  patient  had  a  considerable  stool ;  he 
had  a  better  night,  the  vomiting  having  ceased.  Next  day  he  had  two 
electrizations,  and  in  the  afternoon  the  bowels  were  thoroughly  cleared 
out.  His  recovery  progressed  without  interruption,  and  four  days  later 
he  was  well. 

Mr.  Cauhet*  reports  a  similar  case  occurring  in  a  man  aged  forty- 
five.  Six  days  after  the  attack  began,  electricity  was  tried  according  to 
the  same  method,  but  without  relief.  The  seventh  day  a  negative  elec- 
trode w^as  introduced  into  the  anus,  and  the  positive  moved  over  the 
surface  of  the  abdomen  for  fifteen  minutes.  A  few  hours  after  free  evac- 
uation occurred,  and  the  patient  recovered. 

Reduction  of  Hernia. — Faradism.  A  large  number  of 
cases  are  reported  in  medical  literature  of  strangulated  hernia 
reduced  by  faradism.  The  usual  procedure  is  to  place  one 
electrode  in  the  rectum  and  the  other  either  upon  the  hernia 
or  at  different  points  over  the  abdomen. 

Dr.  Suprunenko  f  reports  the  following  case : 

A  slight  inguinal  hernia,  which  had  been  three  hours  strangulated 
resisted  half  an  hour's  taxis.  A  moderately  strong  faradic  current  was 
then  used.  The  positive  electrode  was  pressed  against  the  tumor,  while 
the  negative  was  applied  first  against  the  lumbar  vertebrae,  afterward 
over  the  umbilicus.  The  hernia  at  once  diminished,  and  in  two  minutes 
disappeared.  In  a  second  case,  reported  by  Dr.  Pergamin,  the  patient,  a 
man  of  eighty,  suffered  from  strangulated  hernia  for  twelve  hours.  Tvvo 
hours'  persistent  taxis  failed.  The  faradic  current  was  used  for  fifteen 
minutes  without  success.  The  current  being  still  maintained,  manipula- 
tion was  tried,  and  in  about  two  minutes  the  bowel  returned  into  the 
abdomen  with  a  gurgling  sound. 

Ascites. — Faradism.  Dropsy  of  the  abdomen,  due  to  vari- 
ous causes,  has  been  successfully  treated  by  faradization  alone. 

PopowJ  reports  a  case  of  persistent  anasarca  and  ascites  in  a  patient 
sixty-three  years  of  age,  who  for  many  years  nad  been  a  sufferer  from 
malaria.  On  admission  to  the  hospital  he  nad  considerable  oedema  of 
feet  and  legs,  and  oppressive  ascites.    Jaborandi  and  Fowler's  solution 


*  Revue  Medicale  de  Toulouse. 
t  Wratsch,  No.  40,  1882. 
X  Vratsch,  22,  1880. 


336 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


were  given,  and  slight  improvement  noticed.  The  induced  current  was 
then  daily  applied  over  the  abdomen  and  the  region  of  the  spleen. 
The  urinary  secretion  was  found  to  become  much  more  abundant,  and, 
as  soon  as  faradization  was  discontinued,  again  grew  less.  Albumen, 
after  awhile,  ceased  to  appear  in  the  urine,  the  patient's  general  health 
improved,  his  abdomen  became  flat,  and  he  was  soon  discharged  cured. 
The  spleen,  however,  remained  large. 

Dr.  Sigrist*  reports  a  second  case  of  ascites  successfully  treated  in 
this  manner.  Ascites  was  due  to  hypertrophic  cirrhosis  of  liver.  Every 
muscle  of  the  abdomen  was  made  to  contract  from  fifteen  to  twenty-five 
times ;  two  seances  per  day.  Under  this  treatment  the  patient  began  to 
lose  in  weight  about  200  grms.  per  diem;  amount  of  urine  became 
double,  and' abdominal  circumference  was  diminishing  from  one-half  to 
one  centimetre  per  day.  On  the  tenth  day  an  abdominal  bandage  was 
applied.  In  three  weeks  ascites  entirely  disappeared  and  had  not  recurred 
when  seen  three  months  later. 

Skibnewskif  has  recently  reported  two  additional  cases;  the  first,  a 
little  girl,  set.  9,  very  ansemic  and  with*  marked  ascites.  For  ten  days 
the  patient  took  digitalis  and  iron  without  any  diuretic  effect,  and  dur- 
ing these  ten  days  the  circumference  of  the  abdomen  sensibly  increased. 
The  digitalis  was  then  discontinued,  the  iron  being  kept  up.  Faradism 
was  applied  to  the  abdominal  muscles  two  or  three  times  a  day.  Each 
seance  lasted  fifteen  or  twenty  minutes.  The  currents  were  sufficiently 
strong  to  produce  muscular  contraction.  During  the  same  seance  each 
muscle  was  made  to  contract  fifteen  or  twenty  times.  After  twelve  days 
the  circumference  of  the  abdomen  was  reduced  from  thirty-six  and  four- 
fifth  inches  to  thirty ;  the  quantity  of  urine  was  considerably  increased. 
After  three  weeks  the  circumference  of  the  abdomen  was  only  twenty- 
four  inches,  and  the  quantity  of  urine  normal.  A  month  and  a  half 
after  leaving  the  hospital,  the  patient  had  a  return  of  the  ascites.  As 
before,  medication  had  practically  no  effect,  and  faradization  was  resorted 
to  with  the  former  result. 

The  second  case  was  that  of  a  young  man,  set.  17.  Ascites  and  aug- 
mentation of  the  spleen  commenced  after  an  infectious  disease.  The 
urine  was  small,  and  contained  no  albumen.  Faradization  was  performed 
twice  a  day  for  fifteen  days,  and  then  thrice  a  day,  until  within  four 
weeks  a  cure  was  effected,  both  of  the  ascites  and  splenic  enlargement. 

*  Medic. -chir.   Rundschau,  January  1881. 
i  Revue  des  Sc.  M6d.,  July  1883. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


337 


Pendulous  Abdomen  (Physconia). — Faradisnn.'^  One  elec- 
trode is  placed  at  the  motor  points  of  the  rectus  abdominis 
(Fig.  72,  90  to  94),  while  the  other  is  carried  up  and  down  the 
muscle.  The  current  should  be  strong  enough  to  forcibly 
contract  the  biceps. 

the  rectum. 

Electricity  is  applied  so  frequently  through  the  rectum,  not 
only  for  disorders  of  the  intestinal  canal,  but  also  for  those  of  ad- 
jacent organs,  that  it  may  not  be  out  of  place  in  this  connection 
to  call  attention  to  its  peculiar  shape  and  direction  ;  this  seems 
especially  necessary,  in  view  of  the  fact  that  the  majority  of 
electrodes  intended  to  convey  electricity  within  it  are  so  illy 
adapted  to  the  purpose.  The  length  of  the  rectum  in  the  adult 
varies  from  four  to  eight  inches;  the  lower  third,  averaging 
one  inch  in  length,  curves  forward  from  the  anus  ;  the  middle 
third  curves  backward  along  the  sacrum  ;  the  ujpper  third  is  one- 
half  the  length  of  the  entire  tube,  and  bends  toward  the  left. 
The  shape  of  the  lower  and  middle  may  be  compared  to  an 
exaggerated  letter  S,  with  its  lower  curve  one  inch  long  and  its 
upper  three  inches.  It  is  obvious  that  any  considerable  force 
used  to  insert  a  rigid  rectal  electrode  several  inches  in  length  into 
a  tube  curved  as  described,  may  cause  serious  and  even  fatal  in- 
jury. A  flexible  electrode,  terminating  in  a  ball  or  oval-shaped 
body,  is  preferable,  when  it  is  to  be  used  simply  as  a  director 
for  the  current. 

The  nerves  which  supply  it  being  derived  from  the  plexus  and 
ganglia,  represented  by  P  and  G,  Fig.  73,  it  is  possible  to  treat 
some  local  disorders  of  the  rectum  through  its  nerves  by  locating 
the  electrodes  at  the  points  named.  Large,  moist  sponge-electrodes 
are  best,  and  the  effect  of  the  current  is  most  apparent  when 
applied  through  warm  water,  as  in  the  electro-thermal  bath. 

*  CentralbldU,  1883. 


338 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


Diseases  of  the  rectum  for  which  electricity  may  be  employed  : 

Hemorrhoids  (piles),  Paralysis  of  the  sphincter, 

Prolapsus  ani,  Stricture, 

Pruritus  ani,  Tumors. 
Fistula  in  ano, 


Fig.  110. 

INSULATED  RECTAL  ELECTRODE. 
Length,  5  inches. 

This  is  the  usual  form  of  rectal  electrode.  It  is  insulated  for  nearly  one-half  its  length 
with  polished  hard  rubber.  The  metal  part  is  nickel-plated.  Various  sizes  are  made  so 
that  it  forms  a  suitable  instrument  for  dilating  strictures  either  with  or  without  elec- 
trolysis. 

Hemorrhoids. — Galvanism.  Before  each  sitting  direct  the  rec- 
tum to  be  well  cleansed  with  an  injection  of  hot  water ;  anoint 
the  rectal  electrode  before  inserting  it.  If  the  tumors  do  not 
involve  the  sphincter,  it  is  best  to  have  that  portion  of  the  instru- 
ment in  contact  wdth  the  sphincter  insulated.  When  the  piles  are 
very  sensitive,  or  ulcerated,  connect  the  rectal  electrode  with  the 
positive  ;  if  not  sensitive,  and  especially  if  they  have  existed  a 
long  time,  connect  it  with  the  negative  pole.  The  external  elec- 
trode should  be  large,  and  may  be  moved  over  the  liver,  stomach 
and  abdomen,  in  the  direction  of  the  colon. 

Faradism  is  indicated  to  improve  the  venous  circulation  and 
prevent  recurrence. 

Electrolysis  has  been  employed  to  destroy  old  tumors  that 
resist  other  treatment.  After  bringing  the  tumor  into  view,  insert 
the  negative  needle  and  apply  the  positive  pole  over  the  nates  or 
any  convenient  place,  and  carry  a  current  from  four  to  six  cells 
through  it  for  twenty  minutes. 

Galvam^o-cautery  is  pronounced  by  far  the  most  efficient  and 
satisfactory  method  of  operating  upon  piles  for  their  radical  re- 
moval.   The  patient  is  put  under  the  influence  of  an  anaesthetic, 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


339 


the  rectum  having  been  previously  cleared  by  an  injection. 
Forcibly  dilate  the  sphincter.  The  tumors  are  brought  below  it, 
if  possible,  but  if  not  they  are  encircled  by  the  loop  and  removed 
after  the  method  for  removing  tumors  described  in  the  chapter  on 
galvano-cautery.  When  they  are  of  such  a  shape  that  they  can- 
not be  inclosed  in  a  loop,  they  must  be  destroyed  with  the 
platinum  point.  Dr.  Butler  directs  attention  to  these  points  in 
operating.  1.  Apply  the  loop  snugly  around  the  diseased  tissue 
before  heating.  2.  Tighten  slowly,  so  that  the  mechanical  action 
of  the  tightening  loop  may  not  anticipate  the  cauterizing  action. 
3.  Protect  the  adjacent  parts  from  being  burned  by  radiation. 
Hamilton  recommends  running  into  the  tumors  platinum 
needles  heated  to  a  dull  red  heat,  which  obliterates  the  vessels 
without  setting  up  active  inflammation  beyond  ;  atrophy  follows. 
It  is  well  to  protect  surrounding  parts  with  cotton  saturated  with 
water. 


Fig.  111. 

BALL  RECTAL  ELECTRODE. 
Length,  5  inches. 


This  electrode  consists  of  a  rod  of  metal,  insulated  with  hard  rubber,  and  terminat- 
ing in  a  nickel-plated  ball.  It  is  preferable  to  the  one  shown  in  Fig.  110  as  a  conductor, 
owing  to  its  blunt  extremity,  but  is  not  suitable  for  treating  strictures. 

Prolapsus  Ani. — Galvano-cautery.  The  operation  for  this 
disease  does  not  differ  in  its  details  from  the  one  performed 
with  actual  cautery.  It  is  fully  described  in  textbooks  on 
surgery. 

Famdism.  This  disease  in  children  may  sometimes  be 
cured  by  persistent  treatment  with  a  faradic  current  locally 
applied,  the  negative  within  the  rectum  or  against  the  anus. 

Pruritus  Ani.  A  mild  faradic  current  applied  through  elec- 
trode 112  to  and  within  the  anus,  with  a  sponge  electrode  upon 


340 


ELECTBO-THERAPEUTICS. 


the  lower  part  of  the  spine,  frequently  gives  temporary  relief. 
Permanent  relief  can  be  had  only  through  a  cure  of  the 
disease  which  causes  it.  Occasionally  a  galvanic  current  ap- 
plied the  same  way  has  been  successful. 

Paralysis  of  Sphincter  Ani.  When  this  disease  accompanies 
paralysis  of  other  parts,  electricity  locally  applied  will  produce 
little  effect.  When  it  is  the  result  of  local  causes,  such  as 
pressure  during  labor,  forcible  dilatation,  etc. ,  it  may  be  relieved 
by  applying  the  positive  electrode  within  the  sphincter,  and 
the  negative  on  the  spine  at  the  point  indicated  by  G,  Fig.  73. 
The  secondary  faradic  may  be  employed,  as  strong  as  can  be 
borne  comfortably,  for  five  minutes  daily.  If  improvement 
does  not  follow  after  two  or  three  treatments,  the  slowly  inter- 
rupted galvanic  should  be  substituted.  Galvanism  will  not 
need  to  be  repeated  more  than  three  times  per  week,  and  six 
to  twelve  freshly-charged  zinc-carbon  cells  will  be  sufficient. 

Stricture  of  the  Rectum. — Electrolysis.  An  electrode 
similar  to  Fig.  110  is  selected  of  suitable  size  to  engage  in  the 
stricture.  The  instrument  should  be  insulated  except  at  the 
point  which  is  to  act  on  the  tissues.  The  process  described 
for  insulating  electrolysis  needles  may  be  employed.  Hamilton 
recommends  the  following  formula : 

Gum  shellac  (brown)   1  drachm. 

Solution  india-rubber  (Squibb's)  " 

Wood  naphtha  2  " 

On  account  of  Tripier's  observation  that  the  scars  which 
form  at  the  point  where  the  negative  pole  is  applied  are  softer 
and  contract  less  than  at  the  positive  pole,  it  is  customary  to 
connect  the  rectal  electrode  with  the  negative  pole  of  the  bat- 
tery, while  the  positive  is  applied  to  the  nates.  A  very  mild 
current  is  more  efficient  than  a  powerful  one  in  giving  perma- 
nent relief.    In  this  operation  the  shape  of  the  rectum  must 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


341 


be  taken  into  account,  otherwise  the  instrument  may  produce 
electrolysis  of  the  healthy  membrane,  an  accident  to  be  avoided. 

Tumors,  Foreign  Growths  and  Malignant  Affections  have 
been  removed  from  the  rectum  both  by  electrolysis  and  galvano- 
cautery.  In  the  case  of  malignant  disease,  although  a  radical 
cure  cannot  be  expected,  yet  suifering  is  diminished,  and  life  has 
been  prolonged. 


Fig.  112. 

NEW  STYLE  RECTAL  ELECTRODE. 
Length,  2%  inches.  Diameter,  %  inch. 


This  is  unquestionably  the  best  form  of  electrode  for  localizing  the  current  in  the 
lower  portion  of  the  rectum.  It  is  insulated  for  a  little  more  than  one-half  its  length  with 
hard  rubber.  The  portion  of  it  in  contact  with  the  sphincter  is  so  small  that  not  the  least 
irritation  is  produced  during  the  treatment,  and  the  curve  follows  the  natural  curve  of  the 
rectum.  A  socket  in  the  base  receives  the  conducting  cord. 

Fistula  in  Ano. — Electrolysis.  It  has  been  recommended 
to  destroy  the  lining  membrane  by  inserting  a  wire  through 
the  entire  length  of  the  canal,  and  connecting  it  with  the  posi- 
tive pole  of  the  battery,  the  negative  being  placed  on  an 
indifferent  point  on  the  skin.  A  current  from  six  to  eight 
cells  is  employed  for  fifteen  minutes.  One  application  is  suffi- 
cient. It  causes  little  pain,  and  an  angesthetic  is  not  required. 
Some  authorities  recommend  that  the  bowels  should  be  confined 
for  several  days  after  the  operation. 

GahMno-cautery.  Insert  a  platinum  wire  in  the  fistula 
through  a  suitable  director ;  with  the  finger  that  is  in  tlie 
rectum  hook  the  end  of  the  wire  downward  through  the  anus 
and  remove  the  director;  both  ends  of  the  wire  are  connected 
with  the  battery,  and  the  loop  is  slowly  drawn  up,  after  the 
circuit  is  completed.  The  adjacent  tissues  must  be  protected  by 
lint  saturated  with  water.  The  subsequent  treatment  is  the  same 
as  after  an  operation  with  the  knife. 


342 


ELECTEO-THEKAPEUTICS . 


THE  URINARY  ORGANS. 

Electricity  may  be  applied  to  these  organs  through  the 
pneumogastric  and  phrenic  nerves  at  the  motor  points  in  the 
neck ;  through  semi-lunar  ganglia  by  placing  a  broad  electrode 
on  the  lower  dorsal  vertebrae;  through  the  solar  plexus  by 
pressing  an  electrode  firmly  against  the  empty  stomach. 

General  faradization  and  central  galvanization  increase  the 
amount  of  urine  excreted.  The  Jcidneys  may  be  directly  elec- 
trized by  including  them  between  two  electrodes  placed  on 
opposite  sides  of  the  body.  A  galvanic  current  carried  to  the 
base  of  the  brain  is  said  to  exert  a  direct  influence  over  the 
amount  of  sugar  found  in  the  urine. 

The  ureters  respond  readily  to  both  kinds  of  electricity. 
They  are  shortened  and  constricted.  The  contractions  proceed 
in  the  direction  from  the  kidneys  to  the  bladder,  and  continue 
long  after  the  application  has  ceased. 

The  hladder  contracts  vigorously  when  its  muscular  fibers 
are  directly  faradized.  It  has  been  shown  that  electric  stimu- 
lus applied  to  certain  parts  of  the  brain  can  cause  contractions 
of  the  bladder,  and  that  this  stimulus  is  transmitted  through 
the  anterior  columns  of  the  cord.  A  current  applied  through 
the  posterior  roots  of  the  sacral  nerves  also  produces  contrac- 
tion of  the  muscular  fibers  of  the  bladder  by  reflex  action. 
Another  nervous  center  for  the  bladder  is  found  in  the  lower 
portion  of  the  lumbar  cord,  motor  fibres  from  which  pass 
through  the  hypogastric  plexus  on  their  way  to  the  bladder. 
An  electric  current  may  be  applied  directly  to  this  plexus 
through  an  electrode  in  the  upper  third  of  the  rectum.  This 
electrode  is  also  in  contact  with  the  j)osterior  wall  of  the  bladder, 
in  males.  A  current  may  be  applied  to  the  bladder  by  placing 
a  broad  electrode  on  the  lower  part  of  the  abdomen,  directly 
over  the  pubic  arch,  and  another  on  the  spine  at  the  point 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


343 


indicated  by  G,  Fig.  73,  or  within  the  bladder  through  an 
insulated  electrode  like  those  shown  in  Figs.  113  and  114. 
Both  poles  may  be  introduced  into  the  bladder  through  the 
electrode  illustrated  by  Fig.  116. 

The  sjyhincter  of  the  hladder  is,  physiologically  speaking, 
not  a  sphincter  at  all.  Faradization  of  any  part  of  the  blad- 
der causes  urine  to  be  voided,  but  faradization  of  those  whitish 
elastic  circular  fibers  that  surround  the  neck  of  the  bladder,  and 
to  which  the  name  sphincter  has  been  given,  does  not  arrest  the 
flow  of  the  urine.  It  may  be  checked  immediately  by  direct- 
ing the  current  to  the  membranous  portion  of  the  urethra. 
This  may  be  accomplished  by  the  introduction  of  an  electrode 
into  the  urethra,  or  into  the  lower  third  of  the  rectum. 

Diseases  to  which  electricity  has  heen  applied. 

Addison's  disease.  Chronic  inflammation  of  the 

Bright's  disease.  bladder  (cystitis). 

Diabetes  insipidus.  Frequent  micturition. 

Catarrh  of  the  bladder.  Parab^sis. 

Incontinence  of  urine. 

Addison's  Disease. — Faradism.  Dr.  Rockwell  describes  a 
remarkable  case  of  this  disease  in  which  general  faradization 
relieved  the  symptoms,  and  imparted  so  great  vigor  to  the 
patient  that  considerable  doubt  was  expressed  in  regard  to  the 
correctness  of  the  diagnosis  by  the  gentlemen  of  the  association 
to  whom  the  patient  was  presented.  He  lived  two  years  in 
the  improved  condition  at  which  he  had  arrived  under  the 
influence  of  electricity,  and  at  last  died  quite  suddenly.  A 
post-mortem  confirmed  the  diagnosis. 

Bright's  Disease. —  Galvanism.  Dr.  Hughes  recommends 
galvanization  of  the  spine  for  both  Bright's  and  Addison's 
disease,  believing  they  are  associated  with  disease  of  the  renal 
ganglia.  Albumen  and  tube  casts  have  disappeared  under  this 
treatment. 


344 


ELECTKO-THEKAPEUTICS. 


Diabetes  Insipidus. — Galvanism.  Althaus*  has  success- 
fully treated  this  by  galvanizing  the  medulla.  Hughes  reports 
a  case  of  this  disease,  associated  with  profound  melancholia 
and  sexual  apathy  (loss  of  sexual  desire  without  spermatorrhea 
for  six  months),  cured  by  galvanization  of  the  head  and  spine 
conjoined  with  proper  medication.  Each  application  was  con- 
tinued six  minutes. 

Faradism.  Dr.  Clubbef  reported  a  case  treated  with  a 
faradic  current  applied  over  the  kidneys  about  twenty  minutes 
at  a  time,  every  day.  The  amount  of  urine  was  reduced  more 
than  one-half,  and  the  patient's  condition  greatly  improved  for 
a  number  of  months. 

Catarrh  of  the  Bladder. — Galvanism.  The  bladder  after 
being  emptied  is  partially  filled  with  warm  water,  and  an  elec- 
trode (Fig.  114)  is  introduced  and  connected  with  the  negative 
pole ;  a  broad  flat  electrode  applied  over  the  bladder  or  sacrum 
is  connected  with  the  positive.  A  very  mild  galvanic  current 
is  carried  through  the  circuit  for  a  few  minutes  only.  If  the 
bladder  be  full,  the  gas  set  free  at  the  negative  might  cause 
disagreeable  distention.  The  presence  of  urine  may,  by  its 
decomposition,  produce  great  irritation.  It  has  been  suggested 
that  certain  drugs  be  added  to  the  water,  which,  after  decom- 
position, are  capable  of  exerting  an  alterative  influence  upon 
the  lining  membrane. 

Dr.  K.  M.  Murray  J  oflers  these  hints  as  to  the  mode  of 
conducting  the  application  of  galvanism  to  the  bladder. 

1.  The  current  employed  must  be  of  the  very  gentlest,  and 
the  increase  must  be  slow  and  gradual.  The  bladder  is  often 
morbidly  sensitive,  and  anything  like  a  violent  shock  may 
produce  a  very  acute  cystitis. 


*  Med.  Times  and  Oaz. 

t  C.  P.  B.  Clubbe,  in  London  Lancet. 

X  Edinburgh  Medical  Journal,  April  1881. 


ELECTKO-THERAPEUTICS. 


345 


Faradism  has  been  employed  externally  with  good  effect 
in  some  cases  of  vesical  catarrh. 

Chronic  Cystitis.  Galvanism  is  best  adapted  to  this  con- 
dition. .  ^  AVhen  erosions  or  ulcers  of  the  vesical  mucous  mem- 
brane are  present,  faradism  must  not  be  applied.  When  there 
is  thickening  of  the  walls,  and  incontinence  without  ulceration, 
one  pole  may  be  placed  on  the  perineam,  the  other  over  the 
symphysis ;  or  one  over  symphysis  and  the  other  inserted  as  a 
catheter  into  the  bladder. 

Fkequext  micturition,  where  no  special  cause  appears,  is 
best  treated  by  passing  a  weak  galvanic  current  from  the 
lumbar  region  to  the  region  of  the  bladder. 

Calculi.  It  is  more  than  eighty  years  since  experiments 
were  begun  to  determine  the  feasibility  of  dissolving  calculi 
witiiin  the  bladder  by  means  of  electricity.  Prevost  and  Dumas 
made  the  most  complete  experiments  on  animals,  and  suc- 
ceeded in  one  or  two  instances.  Dr.  Bence  Jones,  following 
out  their  experiments,  determined  that  a  concentrated  solution 
of  nitrate  of  potash  is  the  best  in  which  to  plunge  calculi  of 
any  composition  in  order  to  dissolve  them  by  the  galvanic 
current.  There  are  no  reliable  records  of,  experiments  made 
upon  living  human  beings  to  determine  whether  this  operation 
can  be  performed  with  safety.  Dr.  Melicher,  of  Vienna,  claims 
to  have  done  so,  but  no  particulars  are  reported.  The  dis- 
tressing pains  in  the  neck  of  the  bladder  attending  inflamma- 
tion, with  or  without  the  presence  of  stone,  are  materially 
alleviated  by  faradism  applied  to  the  dry  surface  over  the  bladder 
through  a  metallic  brush,  also  by  a  mild  galvanic  current  from  a 
belt.  In  the  latter  case  a  metal  electrode,  without  a  cover,  con- 
nected with  the  positive  pole,  is  fastened  over  the  os  pubis, 
and  the  negative,  enclosed  in  a  moist  cover,  is  fastened  to  some 
indifferent  ])oint.    It  must  be  applied  until  irritation  is  pro- 

*  Cenlmlblatt,fiirChir.  Med.,  No.  30,  1880. 


346 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


duced,  and  may  be  worn  continually,  changing  the  location  of 
the  positive  a  little  from  time  to  time  to  prevent  the  formation 
of  a  troublesome  sore. 

Paralysis.  There  is  little  to  be  expected  from  electricity 
in  paralysis  of  the  bladder  due  to  brain  or  spinal  disease  ;  but 
when  due  to  other  causes,  such  as  operations  on  the  bladder  or 
rectum,  pressure  during  childbirth,  or  to  certain  drugs,  electricity 
will  nearly  always  produce  a  cure. 

Galvanism.  If  the  cause  is  located  in  the  brain,  place  the 
negative  electrode  on  the  back  of  the  head  and  the  other  over 
the  OS  pubis  ;  if  due  to  spinal  disease,  place  the  negative  on 
the  spine  below  the  diseased  portion  and  the  positive  as  before  ; 
when  the  disease  is  from  other  causes  apply  the  electrodes  as 
in  the  last  case,  or  both  may  be  applied  over  the  bladder 
a  little  distance  apart.  The  current  is  more  eifective  when 
interrupted.  Five  minutes  is  ordinarily  sufficient  for  each 
sitting. 

Faradism  may  be  applied  with  the  electrodes  located  respec- 
tively over  the  lumbar  vertebrse  and  the  os  pubis.  Both  forms 
of  electricity  are  applied  internally  according  to  the  following 
method  :  The  bladder  is  first  emptied  and  afterward  filled  with 
warm  water  ;  the  patient  lies  upon  the  back  with  an  electrode 
applied  to  the  small  of  the  back ;  a  urethral  electrode  is  intro- 
duced within  the  bladder,  the  water  diffuses  the  current  to  all 
parts  of  the  vesical  membrane.  The  current  must  be  very  mild 
and  the  application  short.  When  paralysis  is  caused  by  over- 
distention,  this  method  of  applying  a  faradic  current  within 
the  bladder  will  be  the  most  successful.  When  there  is 
inability  to  expel  the  contents  of  the  bladder  from  this  cause, 
requiring  the  use  of  the  catheter,  the  electrode  shown  in  Fig.  118 
will  be  found  a  serviceable  instrument  for  the  double  purpose 
of  conveying  a  current  to  the  bladder  and  relieving  it  of  its 
contents. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


347 


Franklinism^  according  to  Artliius,  is  exceedingly  efficacious 
in  paralysis  of  the  bladder  not  due  to  organic  disease  of  the 
brain  or  spinal  cord. 

Incontixence  of  Urine. — Faradism.  A  primary  farad ic 
current,  with  one  pole  applied  in  the  lower  third  of  the  rectum 
in  the  male,  or  to  the  meatus  urinarius  in  the  female,  and  the 
other  over  the  os  pubis,  will  sometimes  relieve  when  the  trouble 
is  the  result  of  debility,  and  especially  if  there  is  almost  no 
control  over  the  bladder.  Sometimes  it  answers  an  excellent 
purpose  to  employ  the  electric  brush  on  the  dry  surface  over 
the  hypogastric  region,  the  opposite  pole  being  on  the  spine. 

Galvanism.  The  galvanic  belt  sometimes  proves  useful  in 
these  cases,  one  broad  flat  electrode  being  fastened  over  the 
bladder  and  an  oblong  one  over  the  lumbar  spine,  and  both  con- 
nected with  the  belt.  Only  a  few  cells  should  be  included  in 
the  circuit  at  first ;  the  number  may  be  increased  as  the  current 
falls.  This  application  of  galvanism  is  continued  for  weeks  at 
a  time,  with  a  view  to  bringing  about  nutritive  clianges  in  the 
muscular  tissue. 

Hypertrophy  of  the  Prostate. — Electrolysis.  Dr.  Bredert* 
reports  five  cases  of  senile  hypertrophies  of  the  prostate,  in 
which  either  one  or  both  lobes  of  the  gland  were  enlarged ; 
and  in  all  of  these  catheterization  was  impossible  or  could  only 
be  performed  with  great  difficulty  by  bending  the  instrument. 
He  inserted  a  needle  electrode,  insulated  except  at  the  point, 
which  he  pushed  into  the  enlarged  gland.  This  was  connected 
with  the  negative  pole  of  the  battery,  while  the  positive  was 
applied  to  the  abdomen.  The  diminution  of  the  organ  took 
place  with  astonishing  rapidity.  In  one  case  it  occurred  after 
the  third  application.  Hypertrophy  of  prostate,  in  recent 
cases,  may  be  reduced  by  the  measures  recommended  for  the 
reduction  of  other  hypertrophied  glands.    The  electrode  intro- 

^  Berlin  Klin.  Woch. 


348 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


duced  into  the  middle  third  of  the  rectum  conveys  a  current 
directly  to  the  prostate. 

Irritable  Urethra.  —  Galvanism.  This  condition  of  the 
urethra  can  be  relieved  by  a  properly  applied  mild  galvanic 
current.  In  some  cases,  where  it  is  impossible  to  make  a  local 
application,  owing  to  the  excessive  sensitiveness  of  the  urethra, 
a  few  galvanic  water  baths  will  subdue  the  sensitiveness  suf- 
ficiently to  permit  the  introduction  of  the  sound,  Fig.  119. 
This  instrument  should  be  warmed  and  oiled  before  attempt- 
ing to  introduce  it.  The  negative  pole  may  be  connected  with 
the  sound  after  it  is  in  place  ;  the  circuit  must  be  closed  by 
placing  the  positive  on  the  lower  part  of  the  spine,  and  opened 
by  removing  it  before  the  sound  is  withdrawn  from  the  urethra. 
Two  or  three  zinc-carbon  cells  are  sufficient,  and  it  is  advisa- 
ble to  carry  the  current;  through  a  rheostat  to  prevent  elec- 
trolysis of  the  urethral  canal.  The  current  should  not  be 
continued  longer  than  five  minutes. 

Gleet. —  Galvanism.  Dr.  Blackwood^  advocates  the  treat- 
ment of  gleet  by  electricity.  He  proceeds  as  follows  :  A  sound 
(see  Fig.  119),  slightly  oiled,  and  which  fully  distends  the 
stricture  or  canal,  is  passed.  The  negative  pole  is  attached  to 
the  sound.  The  positive  pole  or  sponge  should  be  wet  with 
warm  water,  and  a  current  which  is  plainly  felt,  but  not  pain- 
ful, used.  If  an  area  is  found  more  sensitive  than  the  remain- 
ing tract,  this  portion  should  receive  especial  attention.  The 
application  should  last  from  fifteen  to  thirty  minutes.  The 
bowels  should  be  kept  lax,  all  excesses  prohibited,  and  non- 
stimulating  food  be  taken. 

Stricture  of  Urethra. — Electrolysis.  The  results  of  treat- 
ing stricture  are  veiy  satisfactory  and  more  permanent  than 
when  dilatation  alone  is  employed.  Its  advocates  claim  for 
this  operation  freedom  from  pain,  hemorrhage,  febrile  reac- 


*PMa.  Med.  Times,  November  1882. 


ELECTKO-THERAPEUTICS. 


349 


tion,  or  any  ill  effect,  if  conducted  with  ordinary  skill.  The 
patient  is  not  confined  to  his  bed  after  the  operation  and  can 
pass  water  immediately  after  it.  Dr.  Newman,*  who  has 
done  most  to  direct  the  attention  of  the  profession  to  this 
subject,  makes  these  valuable  suggestions  : 

1.  Before  operating,  the  susceptibility  of  the  patient  to  the 
electric  current  should  be  tested. 

2.  The  problem  is  to  produce  absorption,  and  not  cautery 
therefore,  weak  currents  at  long  intervals  are  best. 

3.  The  best  position  for  the  patient  to  assume  during  the 
operation  is  that  which  is  most  comfortable  to  him  and  the 
operator.    It  may  be  either  the  erect  or  recumbent. 

4.  Anaesthetics  are  to  be  avoided,  as  it  is  better  to  have 
the  patient  conscious  and  able  to  tell  how  he  feels.  Care  must 
be  taken  to  keep  the  electrode  in  line,  so  that  the  point  will 
not  deviate  and  make  a  false  passage. 

5.  Force  should  never  be  used.  The  bougie  must  be  guided 
in  the  most  gentle  way,  and  electricity  alone  be  allowed  to  do 
the  work. 

6.  During  one  seance  two  electrodes  in  succession  should 
never  be  used. 

7.  It  must  not  be  forgotten  to  stoj?  the  current  'before  with- 
drawing the  electrode^  otherwise  acute  pain  will  be  induced  in 
the  course  of  the  urethra,  which  often  remains  some  time. 
Pain  should  never  be  inflicted  during  electrolysis ;  therefore 
it  should  not  be  applied  when  the  urethra  is  in  an  acute  or 
even  subacute  inflammatory  condition. 

8.  It  is  well  to  leave  a  little  urine  in  the  bladder.  It 
serves  to  diffuse  the  stimulus  and  is  more  agreeable  to  the 
patient  than  when  the  bladder  is  empty. 

Dr.  W.  H.  Dukeman,f  of  Olean,  N.  Y.,  reports  a  remark- 
able case  treated  successfully  after  this  method :   The  patient, 

*iV.  E.  MecL  Montfdy. 

^The  Medical  Becord,  June  23,  1883. 


350 


ELECTROTHEK  APE  [JTICS. 


aged  sixty-five,  had  suffered  from  stricture  twenty-five  years. 
Four  distinct  strictures  were  discovered.  An  insulated  urethral 
electrode,  tipped  with  a  No.  9  olive  (French  scale),  was  intro- 
duced and  arrested  at  the  third  stricture.  The  negative  pole 
of  a  Mcintosh  galvanic  battery  was  connected  with  the  urethral 
electrode,  six  cells  were  included  in  circuit  and  the  circuit 
completed  by  placing  a  large  wet  sponge  electrode  on  the  left 
thigh  ;  after  eighteen  minutes  it  passed  through  the  third  stric- 
ture but  was  arrested  at  the  fourth,  which  it  failed  to  pass 
after  fifteen  minutes'  steady  application  of  the  current.  The 
patient  returned  next  day  for  further  treatment.  A  No.  3 
French  filiform  bougie  on  trial  failed  to  pass  the  fourth  stricture, 
and  the  current  was  reapplied  as  on  the  previous  day  ;  the 
current  was  increased  cell  by  cell  until  twelve  were  included 
in  circuit ;  the  electrode  entered  the  bladder  at  the  end  of  nine- 
teen minutes.  The  patient  did  well  in  every  respect,  and  at  in- 
tervals of  one  week  were  passed  a  No.  13  olive  (French  scale),  a 
No.  17  and  lastly  a  No.  21,  when  the  operation  was  considered 
complete,  the  patient  being  entirely  relieved.  It  is  im^portant 
that  the  negative  pole  he  connected  with  the  urethral  electrode^ 
othericise  it  will  hecome  glued  to  the  tissues  so  that  it  cannot 
he  removed  without  violence^  and  the  cicatrix^  which  forms 
vjhere  the  positive  has  heen  applied^  is  liable  to  contract  and 
form  a  worse  stricture  than  the  one  it  was  intended  to  remove. 

"  Impotence. — Galvanism.  Dr.  Robert  Newman*  has  pub- 
lished a  series  of  valuable  articles  on  impotence,  which  he 
defines  as  ''any  deviation  from  the  normal  status  of  sexual 
vigor."  He  prefers  galvanism,  and  when  an  interrupted  current 
is  needed,  he  makes  use  of  the  automatic  rheotome.  He  ex- 
cludes from  the  cases  to  which  electricity  is  adapted  — 

1.  Males  in  whom  sexual  vigor  never  existed,  as  in  con- 
genital malformations. 

*  The  Planet,  Nov.  15, 1883. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


351 


2.  Those  cases  dependent  on  the  decay  of  age. 

3.  Mutilation,  or  loss  of  parts  by  accident. 

4.  Diseases  of  testicles. 

5.  Those  cases  in  which  impotence  is  only  a  symptom  of 
other  grave  diseases,  as  ataxia,  diabetes,  etc. 

We  have  three  centers  governing  erection  : 

1.  Xerve  centers  in  cerebrum  {Psychical). 

2.  Lumbar  plexus,  presiding  direct  over  erection. 

3.  Peripheric  nerves  of  genitals. 

The  rrechanism  of  erection  is  not  merely  a  retention  of 
venous  blood,  but  more  an  afflux  of  arterial  blood  into  the 
elastic  erectile  tissues  of  the  penis,  which  is  well  recognized  by 
our  modern  physiologists.*  But  this  mechanism  cannot  take 
place  by  itself,  and  is  induced  and  governed  by  the  power  of 
the  nervous  system,  as  explained.  This  knowledge  is  of  the 
greatest  importance  in  making  a  correct  diagnosis,  and  select- 
ing the  course  of  an  intelligent  treatment,  both  of  which  can 
be  accomplished  by  electricity. 

He  uses  a  galvanic  battery  of  twenty  or  more  zinc-carbon 
cells.  The  electro-sensibility  will  decide  how  many  cells  are 
needed.  The  current  of  six  cells  ma}^  be  sullicient,  while 
another  case  needs  thirty  cells.  Twelve  to  sixteen  cells  are 
used  generally  as  an  average.  The  strength  of  the  current 
must  always  be  regulated,  and  on  some  points  of  applications 
in  the  ^ame  patient,  made  stronger  or  weaker,  according  to  his 
sensibility.    The  duration  of  each  seance  is  about  ten  minutes. 

The  electric  brush  has  done  excellent  service  in  those 
patients  who  had  lost  almost  the  entire  sensation  in  genitals, 
with  impaired  nutrition  and  atrophy  of  the  parts.  Strong  cur- 
rents of  galvanism  made  no  impression,  and  caused  no  sensa- 
tion, but  the  cautious  use  of  the  electric  brush,  alternated  with 
galvanic  interruptions,  restored  the  power  and  finally  cured. 

♦Flint's  Textbook  on  Physiology,  page  108. 


352 


ELECTKO  THERAPEUTICS. 


He  mentions  another  method,  which  is  even  more  powerful 
in  its  tonic  action  than  any  other. 

The  positive  sponge  electrode  is  placed  on  the  back,  and 
as  negative  pole  an  insulated  urethral  electrode  is  introduced 
into  the  urethra  (Fig.  113).  The  duration  of  such  a  seance  is 
from  five  to  ten  minutes,  as  a  rule. 

Such  applications  are  not  repeated  often,  and  only  given  in 
intervals  of  one  to  three  weeks.  Meanwhile,  the  external  appli- 
cations are  given  as  described  before,  about  four  times  a  week. 
If  an  insulated  electrode  is  used,  the  jDower  of  galvanism  is 
concentrated  at  one  point,  covered  by  the  olive,  and  this 
place  has  the  full  benefit,  and  may  be  even  cauterized  if  the 
current  is  strong  enough. 

The  simple  nickel-plated  sound  (Fig.  119),  not  insulated  at 
all,  as  negative  pole  in  the  urethra  is  preferable  when  it  is  desired 
to  diifuse  the  electric  current  through  the  whole  urethra,  or 
even  to  the  whole  member.  The  advantage  of  this  procedure 
is  that  it  exerts  a  tonic  effect  on  a  large  surface  and  groups  of 
muscles,  while  at  the  same  time  the  current  can  be  used 
stronger.  If  the  penis  is  cold,  numb,  atrophied,  in  fact  almost 
lifeless  and  useless,  this  method  will  give  the  best  chance  for 
recovery,  in  combination  with  other  applications  referred  to 
before. 

The  prognosis  of  these  cases  of  impotence  under  considera- 
tion is  favorable  in  almost  all  instances;  this  means  that 
impaired  vigor,  or  functional  impotence,  will  be  cured  under 
judicious  treatment,  if  there  is  not  complete  paralysis. 

Faradism..  Dr.  William  F.  Hutchinson^  remarks  that  for 
nearly  ten  years  he  has  used  the  faradic  current  in  the  treat- 
ment of  impotence.  He  prefers  a  current  as  strong  as  a  patient 
can  bear  without  pain  and  without  shocks.  He  applies  a  large 
negative  sponge  electrode  under  the  lumbar  vertebrae,  the 

*N,  E.  Med.  Monthly,  October  15, 1883. 


ELECTEO-THERAPEUTICS. 


353 


patient  being  comfortably  recumbent,  and  for  the  positive  a 
pad  of  surgeon's  sponge  moistened  is  pressed  against  the  glans. 
The  result  is  a  strong  stimulation  of  those  branches  of  the 
sacral  plexus  composing  the  genito-urinary  tract,  and  a  cor- 
responding increase  in  muscular  nutrition.  The  penis  becomes 
turgid,  the  dartos  contracted,  and  a  close  watch  must  be  kept 
upon  the  patient,  lest  by  continuing  the  application  too  long 
an  emission  be  produced.  By  discontinuing  the  current  after 
five  minutes,  or  by  increasing  the  electro-motive  force  until  it 
becomes  painful,  this  result  may  be  avoided.  By  a  steady  per- 
sistence for  several  months  in  this  form  ot  treatment,  he  had 
succeeded  in  completely  restoring  several  patients.  The  appli- 
cations should  be  made  daily. 

Dr.  A.  Gunther,  of  Zurich,  places  the  testes  between  two 
wet  sponge  electrodes,  or  applies  the  faradic  current  direct  to 
the  glans,  according  to  the  indications. 

Fmnklinism  furnishes  a  most  valuable  means  for  the  relief 
of  impotence,  according  to  Dr.  Yance. 

Spermatorehea. —  Gal/vcmism.  All  sources  of  irritation  of 
the  genital  organs,  such  as  stricture,  piles,  constipation,  acrid 
urine,  must  be  removed  before  any  treatment  will  relieve  sper- 
matorrhea except  temporarily.  Non-stimulating  diet  should  be 
insisted  upon  ;  intoxicating  drinks,  excessive  use  of  tobacco 
and  all  excesses  must  be  prohibited,  and  the  bladder  thoroughly 
emptied  before  retiring.  In  some  cases  it  will  be  well  to 
direct  the  urine  to  be  voided  whenever  the  patient  awakes 
during  the  night.  A  mild  galvanic  current  should  be  applied 
three  times  a  week,  the  positive  electrode  at  the  lumbar  sacral 
promontory,  and  the  negative  to  the  perineum  and  supra-pubic 
region  alternately.  It  will  require  about  three  months  to  effect 
a  cure. 

Neuralgia  of  the  Testes. — Galvanism.  This  very  painful 
affection  may  be  relieved  by  the  uninterrupted  galvanic  current. 


354  ELECTEO-THEEAPEUTICS. 

The  testicles  are  extremely  sensitive  to  electricity,  and  the  pains 
excited  by  a  careless  application  extend  to  the  loins  and  are 
exceedingly  disagreeable  to  the  patient.  The  best  method  of 
electrizing  them  is  to  immerse  them  in  warm  water  contained 
in  a  cup  of  suitable  shape,  which  is  connected  with  one  pole 
of  the  battery  in  the  same  manner  as  the  eye-cup.  A  very 
mild  current  should  be  employed.  The  positive  pole  may  be 
connected  with  the  cup,  and  the  negative  be  held  in  the  hand 
or  placed  on  the  thigh,  or  the  positive  may  be  placed  on  the 
lower  part  of  the  spine  and  the  negative  connected  with  the  cup. 

Hydrocele.  There  are  three  methods  employed  :  1.  Elec- 
trolysis^ needles  attached  to  both  poles  being  introduced  into 
the  sac.  2.  Electrolysis  with  the  negative  needle  only  intro- 
duced. 3.  Earado-puncticre,  i.e.,  a  faradic  current  applied  to 
needles  introduced  into  the  sac.  Whichever  method  is  selected 
it  is  essential  that  the  needles  penetrate  into  the  fluid,  and 
that  they  be  insulated  at  the  point  where  they  pass  through 
the  coverings  of  the  testicle. 

The  Galvanic  Bandage.  Mr.  S.  Osborn  read  before  the 
London  Medical  Society  notes  of  two  cases  of  hydrocele  cured 
by  single  tapping,  with  the  subsequent  use  of  the  galvano- 
suspension  bandage.  The  first  was  a  case  of  hydrocele  of  the 
tunica  vaginalis,  which  had  been  present  for  seven  or  eight 
years;  and  the  second  was  a  case  of  double  encysted  hydro- 
cele, present  for  six  years.  Both  patients  were  affected  with 
rupture  on  the  same  side  as  the  hydrocele,  showing  a  preter- 
natural weakness  of  the  parts  in  the  vicinity.  The  ages 
were  seventy  and  sixty-three  respectively.  After  tapping  and 
manipulation  the  galvanic  suspensory  bandage  was  applied. 
The  galvanism  was  believed  not  only  to  cause  contraction  of 
the  muscular  fibers  of  the  scrotum,  but  to  impart  a  healthy 
action  to  the  serous  sac,  aiding  absorption.  Mr.  Osborn  recom- 
mended a  trial  of  this  bandage  in  other  diseases  of  the  testicle, 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


355 


such  as  varicocele  and  neuralgia.  The  galvano-suspension 
bandage  referred  to  is  supplied  with  the  Mcintosh  Gal- 
vanic Belt. 

THE    UTERUS    AND    ITS  APPENDAGES. 

Eohrig*  demonstrated  that  the  center  of  uterine  action  is 
in  the  lumbar  spinal  cord.  Stimulation  as  high  up  as  the 
medulla,  and  even  as  far  as  the  crura  cerebri  and  optic  thalmi, 
also  gives  rise  to  slight  uterine  contraction,  probably  due  to 
indirect  stimulation  of  the  lumbar  center. f  Experiments  on 
lower  animals  indicate  that  impulses  may  pass  from  the  cen- 
tral nervous  system  to  the  uterus  along  the  sympathetic,  from 
the  inferior  mesenteric  ganglion,  and  also  along  branches  of 
the  sacral  nerves,  respectively,  to  the  hypogastric  plexus.:!:  M. 
Dembo§  has  endeavored  to  decide  the  question,  upon  which 
authors  differ,  as  to  the  influence  of  electricity  upon  the  uterus, 
whether  empty  or  pregnant.  His  conclusions  are  that  it  is 
impossible  to  excite  contractions  in  the  non-pregnant  uterus 
by  a  faradic  current  applied  through  the  abdominal  walls.  If 
both  electrodes  are  applied  to  the  anterior  (vesical)  wall  of  the 
vagina,  a  manifest  contraction  is  produced  in  both  parts  of  the 
uterus,  vermicular  in  character,  passing  from  below  upward.  If 
the  current  be  applied  to  either  lateral  wall  of  the  vagina,  a 
contraction  is  produced  only  in  the  corresponding  cornu.  Fara- 
dization of  the  vaginal  wall  caused  pallor  of  the  mucous  mem- 
brane and  also  of  the  whole  uterus,  due  apparently  to  contraction 
of  the  vessels,  but  no  contraction  of  the  substance  of  the  uterus 
occurs.  Frankenhauser  found  that  stimulation  of  the  aortic 
plexus  (see  Fig.  73)  caused  a  manifest  contraction  of  both 
comua.    The  hypogastric  plexus  lying  in  front  of  the  sacrum 

*Virchow's  Archiv.,  1879. 

fKorner,  Studien  Phys.  Inst.  Breslau,  iii,  34. 

X  Basch  and  Hofman,  Wien,  Med.  Jahrb.,  1877. 

'i  The  Lancet. 


356 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


furnishes  the  nerves  distributed  to  the  uterus  and  vagina,  and 
here  Budge  and  Wall  located  the  genito-spinal  center.  Elec- 
'tricity  mav  be  conducted  to  these  organs  by  locating  one  large 
electrode  on  the  sacrum  and  another  in  front  of  the  abdomen, 
over  the  pubic  arch,  or  the  current  applied  in  front  may 
be  divided  by  means  of  a  bifurcated  cord  between  two  elec- 
trodes, one  being  located  in  each  inguinal  region.  Another 
method  of  electrizing  these  organs  is  to  introduce  one  electrode 
into  the  upper  third  of  the  rectum,  where  the  current  is  divided 
between  the  sacral  nerves  and  the  posterior  surface  of  the  uterus 
and  its  appendages,  the  alternate  electrode  being  located  as 
before. 


Fig.  113. 

Length,  11  inches. 
UTERINE  OR  URETHRAL  ELECTRODE. 


This  is  an  inflexible  metallic  rod  insulated  with  hard  black  rubber.  Its  diameter 
equals  a  No.  9  olive  (French  scale).  It  is  curved  at  one  end,  and  terminates  in  a  small 
screw  that  fits  olives  of  any  size. 

M.  Apostoli^  recommends,  instead  of  the  unipolar  method 
of  faradization,  in  which  one  pole  is  placed  in  the  uterus 
and  the  other  pole  on  the  abdomen,  the  bipolar  method, 
in  which  both  poles  are  carried  into  the  uterus.  It  is  claimed 
for  this  new  method  ; 

1.  That  it  is  more  easily  employed,  and  does  away  with 
the  necessity  of  an  assistant. 

2.  That  it  is  less  painful. 

3.  That  it  is  more  active,  localizes  the  action  of  the  elec- 
tricity in  the  uterus,  permits  of  an  easy  elevation  of  the  intensity 
of  the  electricity  to  the  maximum  point,  which  was  only  rarely 
possible  by  the  unipolar  method. 

*  Gazette  Des  Hopitaux,  February  1883. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


357 


4.  It  is  more  effective  in  increasing  uterine  contractility 
and  in  securing  tlie  therapeutic  effects  for  which  it  is  directed. 
The  electrode  illustrated  in  Fig.  116  may  be  used  for  this  purpose. 


DISEASES    m   WHICH    ELECTRICITY   IS  BENEFICIAL. 


Atrophy  of  uterus, 
Hypertrophy, 
Sub-involution, 
Irritable  uterus. 


Menstrual  derangements. 

Labor, 

Leucorrhea, 

Vaginismus, 


Ulceration, 
Polypi, 
Fibroids, 
Displacements. 


Fig.  114. 

Length,  11  inches. 
SPIRAL  FLEXIBLE  UTERINE  OR  URETHRAL  ELECTRODE 

The  stem  of  this  electrode  is  made  of  closelj'--coiled  wire,  which  renders  it  perfectly 
flexible  while  preserving  a  sufficient  degree  of  firmness.  It  is  covered  with  soft  rubber, 
which  insulates  it  perfectly  without  interfering  with  its  flexibility.  The  terminal  screw 
flts  olives  of  all  sizes.   The  diameter  is  equal  to  a  No.  16  olive  (French  scale). 

^s'early  all  the  diseases  of  the  uterus  and  its  appendages 
require  the  methodical  application  of  electricity  for  several 
months  before  its  remedial  power  will  be  exhausted.  Its  chief 
effect  is  accomplished  through  the  improved  nutritive  changes 
which  it  sets  up,  and  these  are  necessarily  slow.  Functional 
disorders  may  be  relieved  quite  promptly  by  a  properly-select- 
ed current.  General  faradization  and  central  galvanization  will 
be  found  especially  useful  in  'subduing  the  sympathetic  dis- 
turbances which  accompany  disease  of  these  organs,  and  treat- 
ment should  be  used  not  only  to  overcome  or  relieve  attacks 
of  suffering  or  check  a  hemorrhage,  but  in  the  intervals  to 
improve  the  morbid  condition  upon  which  the  disease  depends. 
The  practitioner  who  relies  solely  on  local  applications  and  a 
single  form  of  electricity  will  meet  with  frequent  failures  where, 
under  other  circumstances,  he  would  have  been  rewarded  with 
success. 

Atrophy  of  the  Uterus.  Galvanism  has  been  used  suc- 
cessfully, more  especially  in  cases  of  undeveloped  uterus,  than 


358 


ELECTEO-THERAPEUTICS. 


when  atrophy  has  resulted  after  the  establishment  of  the 
monthlies.  An  insulated  electrode,  like  the  one  shown  in  Fig. 
114,  is  introduced  into  the  uterus  and  connected  with  the 
negative  pole  of  the  battery ;  the  circuit  is  completed  by  passing 
the  positive  electrode  alternately  over  the  abdomen  in  the 
ovarian  region  and  over  the  lumbar  vertebrae.  An  interrupted 
current  from  twelve  to  fifteen  zinc-carbon  cells  may  be  used  if 
it  can  be  borne;  the  sitting  may  continue  fifteen  minutes  and 
be  repeated  twice  a  week.  If  the  patient  begins  to  complain 
of  pain  in  the  back,  with  a  feeling  of  tension  and  uneasiness 
in  the  hypogastric  region,  indicating  an  attempt  at  menstruation, 
it  is  well  to  substitute  the  famdic  current  for  one  or  two  sittings, 
discontinuing  all  treatment  on  the  appearance  of  a  colored 
discharge  for  one  week,  then  resume  galvanism  once  a  week 
as  before.  This  method  of  treatment  will  generally  succeed, 
although  it  may  require  many  months  to  establish  a  regular 
return  of  the  menses.  Galvanic  baths  given  in  the  tub,  with 
the  current  directed  through  the  electrodes  opposite  the  hips, 
the  patient  lying  on  one  side  meantime,  and  repeated  twice  a 
week  for  several  months,  is  an  efficient  and  much  more  agree- 
able mode  of  treatment  than  the  one  previously  described. 

®  ®  ^ 

Fig.  115. 
OLIVES. 

These  are  made  of  brass,  nickel-plated,  and  are  of  all  sizes,  to  correspond  with  the 
American  and  French  scales.  They  contain  a  socket  cut  in  threads  to  receive  a  screw. 
Caution :  Olives  should  be  firmly  attached  to  the  electrodes ;  if  the  screw  does  not  fit  per- 
fectly there  is  danger  of  losing  them  off  within  the  bladder  or  urethra. 

Amenorrhea.  In  the  case  of  young  girls,  it  is  advisable  to 
apply  electricity  by  the  external  method,  one  pole  being  located 
over  the  hypogastric  plexus  and  the  other  the  ovaries  ;  at  the 
same  time  the  current  may  be  applied  through  the  phrenic 
nerve.    Central  galvanization  is  so  useful  a  measure  that  the 


ELECTEOTHEEAPEUTICS. 


359 


physician  is  not  justified  in  employing  electricity  locally  in 
these  cases  until  a  faithful  trial  of  the  above  measures  make 
it  evident  that  there  is  no  other  alternative.  The  hot-air  elec- 
tric bath  is  indicated  if  there  is  reason  to  believe  the  non- 
appearance of  the  monthlies  is  due  to  a  cold. 


This  instrument  consists  of  a  flattened  black  hard-rubber  tube,  10  inches  long,  with 
a  diameter  equal  to  a  No.  22  olive  through  which  passes  two  wires  12  inches  long,  insulated 
with  hard  rubber,  each  terminating  at  one  end  in  a  half  olive,  permanently  and  securely 
fastened  to  them,  and  at  the  other  end,  in  a  socket  for  connection  with  a  conducting  cord. 
Before  introduction  into  the  bladder  or  uterus  the  wires  are  drawn  back  so  that  the  terminal 
tips  touch  and  form  a  No.  23  olive  at  the  end  of  the  common  tube  ;  after  introduction  the 
wires  are  pushed  through  the  tube;  this  separates  the  terminal  tips,  which  now  represent 
the  two  poles  of  the  battery  with  which  they  are  connected. 

Galvanism.  Dr.  R.  R.  Good  ^  reports  excellent  success  in 
the  treatment  of  this  affection  when  it  is  due  to  inertia  of  the 
utero-ovarian  apparatus,  distui-bance  in  circulation,  or  to  defective 
nutrition.  It  would  be  useless  to  resort  to  galvanism  when  the 
disorder  originated  in  mechanical  obstruction.  From  five  to 
forty  sittings  are  required  to  eftect  a  cure.  His  method  is  to 
employ  the  descending  current,  with  twenty  to  thirty  elements 
for  the  upper  part  of  the  spine,  the  lumbar  and  ovarian  regions, 
and  from  six  to  ten  elements  for  the  sympathetic  nerve,  applied 
along  the  inner  border  of  the    sterno-cleido-mastoid  muscle. 

The  method  of  internal  application  varies,  some  operators 
using  the  faradic  current  only,  some  the  galvanic,  and  others 
alternate  the  two.  The  current  may  be  directed  to  the  vagina 
through  a  vaginal  electrode  (Fig.  121X  to  the  cervix  through 
electrode  shown  in  Fig.  124,  or  within  the  cervical  canal  by 
those  shown  in  Figs.  114  and  125.  The  external  electrode 
may  be  located  over  the  sacrum  or  any  portion  of  the  spine, 

*Med.  Times  and  Gaz.,  1880. 


Fig.  116. 


DOUBLE  ELASTIC  VESICAL  ELECTRODE. 


360 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


or  applied  over  the  uterine  or  ovarian  region  on  the  anterior 
surface  of  the  abdomen.  Amenorrhea  in  women  from  thirty 
to  thirty-five,  with  a  tendency  to  obesity,  is  sometimes  relieved, 
according  to  Dr.  Goodell^  by  the  galvanic  pessary. 


This  electrode  is  pronounced,  by  those  who  have  employed  it,  better  suited  to  the  treat- 
ment of  stricture  than  any  other  form.  It  consists  of  a  black  hard-rubber  closed  tube  11 
inches  long,  within  which  is  enclosed  a  metal  rod  that  may  be  connected  with  the  negative 
pole  of  the  battery.  At  the  closed  end  of  the  tube  are  three  long  and  wide  slots ;  when  the 
circuit  is  complete,  electrolysis  of  the  secretions  within  the  urethra  around  these  slots  takes 
place,  and  the  stricture  is  acted  upon  without  direct  contact  with  the  metal.  It  is  claimed 
that  there  is  less  danger  of  making  a  false  passage  with  this  instrument  than  with  the  usual 
form  of  urethral  electrode,  and  that  it  is  equally  as  effective. 

Mexorrhagia. — Famdism.  Electricity  is  especially  indicated 
in  those  cases  of  passive  hemorrhage  not  dependent  upon 
organic  changes.  The  current  applied  to  the  abdominal  muscles 
so  as  to  produce  vigorous  but  not  painful  contractions,  for  fifteen 
minutes  at  a  time,  and  repeated  two  or  three  times  per  week, 
will  frequently  produce  an  immediate  diminution  in  the  flow, 
and,  if  persevered  in,  a  cure.  It  will  sometimes  be  more  effective 
applied  within  the  vagina  or  cervix.  General  applications  of 
faradism  or  galvanism,  selected  according  to  the  symptoms  of 
the  case,  are  an  important  aid  in  removing  accompanying 
debility.  If  the  patient  takes  little  exercise  and  has  sluggish 
circulation,  general  faradization  is  commonly  indicated  ;  if,  on 
the  contrary,  she  is  of  active  habits,  and  especially  if  the  con- 
dition  has  been  induced  by  over-exertion,  central  galvanization 
to  improve  nutrition  is  preferable. 

It  may  be  necessary  to  continue  treatment  for  several  months 
before  the  nutrition  of  the  uterus  is  sufficiently  improved  to 
put  an  end  to  excessive  flow,  but  as  the  result  is  permanent 


Fig.  117. 


NEW  STYLE  ELECTRODE  FOR  STRICTURE. 


*Phila.  Med.  Times,  1883. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


361 


when  accomplished  by  this  method,  it  is  well  worth  the  per- 
severance required  in  carrying  it  out. 

JDysmenorrhea. — Faradism.  Karl  Kihn,*  having  had  op- 
portunities to  test  the  value  of  the  faradic  current,  both  in 
dysmenorrhea  and  amenorrhea,  advises  it  used  in  connection 
with  hot  infusions  of  juniperacese  and  warm  foot-baths.  He 
places  one  electrode  in  the  hand  of  the  patient  and  the  other 
in  the  water  of  the  foot-bath.  In  a  number  of  instances  this 
simple  measure  increased  the  flow,  relieved  the  pain,  and  es- 
tablished a  regular  and  comparatively  comfortable  return  of 
the  periods. 

Fig.  118. 
CATHETER  ELECTRODE. 

This  instrument  is  an  ordinary  silver  catheter,  to  which  is  attached  a  holder  a  to 
receive  a  conducting  cord ;  a  rubber  tube  may  be  connected  with  h  to  convey  the  urine 
into  a  receptacle.  When  it  is  desirable  to  prevent  the  current  from  affecting  the  urethra, 
the  instrument  may  be  insulated,  except  at  the  perforated  extremity,  with  tbe  same 
material  that  is  used  for  electrolysis  needles. 

Dr.  Wm.  E.  D.  Blackwood  f  is  an  enthusiastic  advocate  of 
electrical  treatment  in  all  forms  of  dysmenorrhea,  excej)t  the 
membranous  variety.  He  employs  faradism,  galvanism  and 
franklinism,  and  bases  his  conclusions  on  an  experience  of 
more  than  fifteen  years.  He  believes  the  applications  should 
be  made  directly,  one  pole  being  applied  to  the  exterior  of 
the  cervix,  to  the  cervical  canal  at  any  desired  point,  to  the 
fundus,  or  to  the  ovary  (which  can  be  reached  near  enough 
by  pushing  the  instrument  well  up  on  either  side  of  the  cervix), 
while  the  other  is  applied  both  to  the  hypogastrium  and  lumbar 
spine  by  means  of  two  sponge-holders  attached  to  a  bifurcated 
cord. 


*  Allg.  Med.  Cent.  Zeitung,  Nov.  10,  1880. 
\Phna.  Med.  Times,  Jan.  1880. 


362  ELECTEO-THEKAPEUTICS. 

The  direction  of  the  faradic  current  is  a  matter  of  no  mo- 
ment, but  the  galvanic  current  appears  to  produce  different 
results,  according  as  it  is  ascending  or  descending.  In 
neuralgic  cases  the  rheotome  is  necessary,  and  more  or  less 
frequent  reversion  of  the  current  heightens  its  value,  while  in 
congestion  a  downward  uninterrupted  current  is  better.  Static 
electricity  is  a  most  valuable  but  neglected  method  in  neuralgia, 
not  alone  of  uterine  origin,  but  of  all  types,  and  will  often 
succeed  after  the  failure  of  other  proceedings. 


This  is  an  ordinary  nickel-plated  sound  with  a  screw  attachment,  which  fits  a  universal 
handle.  Caution  is  required  in  conveying  a  galvanic  current  through  this  electrode,  lest 
electrolysis  of  the  entire  urethral  membrane  be  produced. 


Galvanism  is  sometimes  indispensable  in  these  cases.  It 
is  employed  during  the  attack  to  quiet  the  pain,  and  two  or 
three  times  weekly,  in  the  intervals,  to  prevent  a  return  of  suf- 
fering. One  pole  may  be  introduced  into  the  uterus,  the  other 
being  applied  to  the  lumbar  spine,  and  a  current  of  from  ten 
to  twenty  volts  passed  for  ten  minutes.  Electro-thermal  baths 
of  all  kinds,  but  especially  the  water,  or  vapor  electric  baths, 
taken  at  intervals  for  several  months,  relieve  cases  not  depen- 
dent upon  obstruction. 

Vaginismus. — Galvanism.  Cases  of  excessive  hypersesthesia 
of  vagina,  accompanied  by  vaginismus,  forbidding  all  examination 
of  the  parts,  have  been  relieved  by  this  procedure  :  Connect 
the  vaginal  electrode  (Fig.  121)  with  the  negative  post  of  the 
battery  and  apply,  after  warming  it,  to  the  orilice  of  the  vulva. 
Place  the  positive  electrode  in  position  C,  Fig.  120,  and  close  the 
circuit,  including  not  more  than  four  freshly-charged  zinc  and 
carbon  cells,  or  six  that  have  been  used  some  time.    Do  not  exert 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


363 


am-  force  on  the  negative  electrode,  but  hold  it  steadily  in  place 
with  gentle  pressure  ;  after  a  few  seconds  it  will  gradually  slip 
into  the  vagina ;  the  current  may  be  continued  twenty  minutes, 
and  usuall}^  after  the  second  treatment  a  digital  examination 
may  be  made  without  difficulty,  provided  it  be  done  immedi- 
ately after  removing  the  electrode.  Any  exciting  cause  of  the 
distressing  condition  that  can  be  found  should  be  removed, 
after  which  the  persistent  use  of  galvanism  will  relieve  and 
restore  the  patient  to  a  normal  condition,  in  a  larger  propor- 
tion of  cases  than  any  other  treatment. 

Irritable  Uterus. —  Galvanism.  The  cup-shaped  uterine 
electrode  (Fig.  124)  is  applied  to  the  cervix  and  connected 
with  the  negative  pole  of  the  battery,  the  positive  completes 
the  circuit  at  the  sacrum,  or  in  the  ovarian  region. 

Leucorrhea. —  Galvanism.  This  disease,  when  due  to  a 
catarrh  of  the  uterus,  or  vagina,  may  be  treated  by  a  mild 
galvanic  current  applied  within  the  uterus,  to  produce  a  feeble 
electrolytic  eflfect  upon  the  lining  membrane,  with  a  view  of 
stimulating  it  or  altering  the  nature  of  its  secretion.  Since  an 
acid  is  set  free  at  the  positive  and  an  alkali  at  the  negative, 
it  is  important  to  consider  the  special  effect  to  be  produced  in 
selecting  the  pole  to  be  connected  with  the  internal  electrode. 
Uterine  leucorrhea,  without  organic  disease,  may  be  relieved 
by  a  galvanic  current  applied  through  electrodes,  shown  in 
Figs.  124  or  125 ;  vaginal  leucorrhea,  through  electrode 
Fig.  121.  Leucorrhea,  both  uterine  and  vaginal,  not  depen- 
dent upon  ulceration  or  foreign  growths,  can  be  effectually  and 
permanently  relieved  by  the  hot-air  electric  bath.  A  series  of 
these  baths,  from  twelve  to  thirty  in  number,  repeated  twice 
a  week,  with  intermission  during  the  menses,  has  relieved 
cases  of  many  years'  standing  without  local  treatment.  The 
attention  of  the  profession  is  earnestly  called  to  this  method 
of  radically  curing  an  almost  universal  complaint  by  a  measure 


364 


ELECTRO  THERAPEUTICS. 


at  once  agreeable,  effectual,  and  especially  desirable  in  the  case 
of  unmarried  ladies,  where  the  disease  is  more  likely  to  be  due 
to  constitutional  than  local  causes. 

Chronic  Metritis. — Galvanism.  Chronic  inflammation  of 
the  uterus,  with  enlargement,  may  be  materially  relieved  by 
the  use  of  the  galvanic  pessary;  the  external  electrode  being 
located  over  the  sacral  ganglia.  The  latter  may  be  retained  in 
place  by  means  of  straps  of  adhesive  plaster.  Tripier  recom- 
mends that  a  current  from  a  battery  be  applied  according  to 
this  method.  One  electrode  (Fig.  124)  is  placed  against  the  os, 
and  connected  with  one  pole,  while  the  current  from  the  other 
is  divided  between  two  electrodes,  one  of  which  is  introduced 
into  the  upper  third  of  the  rectum  to  bring  it  in  connection 
with  the  posterior  wall  of  the  uterus,  and  the  other  is  placed 
over  the  abdomen.  An  insulated  rectal  electrode  is  required 
for  the  former,  and  a  large  wet  sponge  for  the  other.  The 
object  of  the  application  is  to  allay  irritation  and  improve 
nutrition ;  therefore  a  very  mild  current  should  be  employed, 
and  for  a  few  minutes  only  when  the  battery  is  used,  because 
electrolysis  is  to  be  avoided.  When  the  belt  is  employed  with 
the  pessary,  the  negative  current  will  be  less  likely  to  irritate 
the  cervix.  The  full  number  of  belt  cells  should  not  be  wet  up 
at  first ;  four  or  five  are  enough  to  commence  with,  and  after  a 
few  hours  one  or  two  more  may  be  charged  with  fluid  and 
added  to  the  circuit. 

Engorgements,  Hypertrophy,  etc.,  have  been  relieved  by 
the  method  described  above.  In  these  cases,  however,  when 
inflammation  is  not  present,  the  current  should  be  interrupted. 
The  faradic  current  applied  by  a  vaginal  electrode  (Fig.  122), 
so  that  the  anterior  and  posterior  walls  are  respectively  affected 
by  the  current,  is  sometimes  very  effectual  in  reducing  the 
size  of  the  uterus. 


ELECTEO-THEEAPEUTICS. 


365 


Faradism  applied  with  an  insulated  rectal  electrode  in  con- 
tact with  the  posterior  uterine  wall,  and  a  broad  sponge  on 
the  abdomen  is  sometimes  preferable,  but  should  never  be  ap- 
plied when  there  exists  evidence  of  sub-acute  inflammation. 

OvAKiAx  Irritation. — Faradism.  When  there  exists  ten- 
derness on  pressure,  or  dull  aching  pain,  especially  in  the  left 
ovarian  region,  the  faradic  current,  applied  after  the  manner 
described  for  constipation,  sometimes  proves  curative. 

Galvanism.  Ovarian  irritation,  accompanied  by  neuralgia, 
may  be  relieved  by  galvanism  when  a  point  can  be  detected, 
along  the  spine  or  a  nerve,  where  pressure  by  the  finger 
causes  pain.  One  pole  must  be  located  on  the  tender  spot, 
and  the  other  on  one  or  both  ovaries,  according  as  one 
or  both  are  aflected.  Congestion  of  ovary,  attended  by  hysteri- 
cal symptoms,  is  sometimes  relieved  by  the  galvanic  belt ;  the 
electrodes  being  located  over  the  ovaries,  and  the  application 
being  continued  for  several  weeks,  or  months  if  necessary. 

Displacements  of  the  Uterus.  Simple  displacements  are 
easily  rectified  under  the  influence  of  electricity  by  its  external 
application  through  the  walls  of  the  abdomen.  This  is  believed 
to  be  accomplished,  partially  at  least,  through  the  contraction 
of  the  abdominal  muscles.  The  general  application  of  all 
forms  of  electricity  affect  the  uterine  supports  through  the 
spinal  nerves  and  hypogastric  plexus.  The  current  conveyed 
to  the  pelvic  organs  through  these  nerves  improves  nutrition, 
and  consequently  lessens  the  weight  of  the  womb,  when  the 
latter  is  in  a  hypertrophied  state.  When  the  vagina  is  relaxed, 
the  introduction  of  the  current  through  a  vaginal  electrode  will 
be  found  m^ost  efficient  to  restore  its  tonicity. 

The  vaginal  electrode  should  be  .warmed  and  oiled  before 
introduction,  and  the  circuit  must  not  he  completed  until  after 
tlie  electrode  is  in  place.  The  alternate  pole  may  be  located 
on  the  sacrum,  or  by  means  of  a  divided  cord  over  both  ovaries. 


366 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


Faradism  is  used  for  its  mechanical  effect ;  galvanism^  for  its 
chemical  effect.  When  it  is  interrupted,  the  galvanic  exerts 
both  a  mechanical  and  chemical  effect. 

This  important  point  should  not  be  overlooked  in  the  treat- 
ment of  uterine  displacements  by  electricity.  The  patient  should 
be  instructed  to  clear  out  the  rectum,  by  means  of  an  injection 
if  necessary,  immediately  before  presenting  herself  for  treat- 
ment, and  the  bladder  must  be  empty.  The  uterus  should  he 
replaced  as  nearly  as  possible  to  a  natural  position  hefore  ap- 
plying the  current. 

Tripier  reports  thirty  cases  of  uterine  disease  treated  by 
faradism  locally  applied.  The  plan  he  pursued  for  the  various 
forms  of  displacements  are: 

Prolapsus.  One  pole  applied  against  the  neck  of  the  womb, 
the  other  is  connected  through  a  bifurcated  cord  with  two 
electrodes,  one  of  which  is  applied  in  each  groin. 

Anteversion  and  Anteflexion.  The  negative,  an  insulated 
rectal  electrode,  was  introduced  so  as  to  carry  the  current  to  the 
upper  third  of  the  rectum,  and  the  positive  in  the  vagina. 

Retroversion  and  Retroflexion.  The  positive  over  the  ab- 
domen or  introduced  into  the  bladder  (a  plan  that  can  scarcely 
be  recommended),  and  the  negative  to  the  neck  of  the  womb. 
If  the  application  of  electricity  causes  the  monthlies  to 
appear  when  not  due,  it  is  an  indication  that  the  current  was 
too  strong,  applied  too  long,  or  repeated  too  frequently. 

Labor. — Faradism.  Dr.  W.  J.  Kilner,*  electrician  to  St. 
Thomas's  Hospital,  has  made  a  valuable  study  of  the  effects  of 
faradism  in  forty-one  cases  of  labor.  He  uses  it  especially 
where  the  pains  are  short,  feeble,  and  at  long  intervals,  and 
states  that  his  first  experiments  were  directed  to  discovering 
whether  the  pregnant  uterus,  like  the  voluntary  muscles, 
possessed  motor  points.   After  many  trials  he  arrived  at  the  con- 

*  Lancet,  Jan.  1, 1881. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


367 


elusion  that  motor  points  exist,  and  can  bo  easily  found  by  bi- 
secting the  line  drawn  from  the  umbilicus  to  the  middle  of 
Poupart's  ligament.  This  point  is  approximate,  being  only 
applicable  before  the  head  has  descended,  to  allow  the  head  of 
the  child  to  enter  the  pelvis,  and  the  spot  varies  in  each  case, 
according  to  the  position  of  the  uterus.  The  muscles  of  the 
uterus  are  of  the  unstriped  variety  (involuntary),  and  they  do 
not  respond  to  electric  stimulation  so  quickly  as  the  stripe(/ 
muscles. 


Fig.  120. 

METHOD  OF  APPLYING  ELECTRICITY  TO  THE  UTERUS. 

This  illustration  shows  where  to  locate  the  electrodes  to  convey  electricity  through 
the  uterus  and  its  appendages.  B  represents  electrode,  Fig.  114,  connected  with  one 
pole,  introduced  into  the  cervical  canal.  A  and  C  are  two  electrodes  connected  by  a 
bifurcated  cord  with  the  alternate  pole  ;  A  and  C  indicate  the  points  to  locate  the  elec- 
trodes when  external  treatment  only  is  required ;  also  the  points  where  they  are  located 
when  electricity  is  employed  during  labor. 

When  the  faradic  poles  are  placed  upon  the  spot  just 
indicated,  the  first  thing  observed  is  the  immediate  contraction 
of  the  abdominal  muscles,  the  intensity  of  which  depends  upon 
the  strength  of  the  current.  Occasionally,  at  the  instant  of 
contact,  uterine  contractions  commence,  but  more  often  a  lapse 


368 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


of  about  a  quarter  of  a  minute  is  required,  and  not  infre- 
quently they  are  delayed  for  two  or  three  minutes.  But  still 
the  current  is  taking  eifect,  as  the  intermittent  use,  for  instance, 
half  a  minute  on  and  the  same  off,  rarely  fails  to  induce  contrac- 
tions in  a  few  minutes;  these  increasing  gradually  in  severity 
and  duration,  while  the  intermissions  become  less  and  less. 
Latterly,  however,  he  has  applied  the  current  only  during  the 
contraction,  to  obtain  the  benefit  of  the  relief  of  pain. 

If  it  be  wished  merely  to  prolong  any  one  uterine  contrac- 
tion, the  current  is  best  applied  near  the  termination  of  the 
pain,  when  it  will  commence  de  novo. 


Fig.  121. 

VAGINAL  ELECTRODE. 
Length,  6  in.;  diameter,  %  in. 

This  electrode  is  made  of  brass,  nickel-plated,  and  is  designed  to  be  used  for  con- 
veying a  current  to  all  parts  of  the  vaginal  wall.   It  fits  the  universal  handle. 

The  ones  most  likely  to  be  affected  favorably  by  the  induced 
current,  viz:  (1)  Those  of  a  nervous  temperament,  who  are 
easily  excited,  and  who  usually  feel  pain  acutely.  (2)  Those 
who  have  sympathetic  disturbances,  such  as  vomiting  and  hic- 
cough.   (3)  Those  who  require  stimulation. 

The  best  way  of  applying  the  current  is  to  place  the  elec- 
trodes (each  being  about  three  inches  in  diameter)  upon  the 
abdomen,  over  the  motor  points,  these  being  retained  in  their 
proper  places  by  the  binder. 

Large  electrodes  are  preferable  to  small  ones,  because  the 
same  current  spread  over  a  large  surface  is  not  felt  so  acutely 
as  when  it  is  concentrated  into  a  small  space.  For  the  relief 
of  pain,  a  very  mild  current  only  is  required,  but  for  the  pro- 
duction of  uterine  contractions,  a  variable  strength  is  necessary. 


E  LECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


369 


The  following  conclusions  are  derived  from  a  total  of  five 
Imndred  electrizations  of  the  uterus:"^ 

1.  That  faradization  of  the  uterus  is  entirely  harmless. 

2.  Faradization  is  a  uterine  sedative. 

3.  Faradization  abridges  considerably  the  convalescence  and 
accelerates  the  involution  and  retraction  of  the  uterus.  That 
it  also  hastens  the  restoration,  and  promotes  regularity  of 
function. 

4.  Faradization  guards  the  woman  from  the  uterine  com- 
plications of  labor. 

5.  That  faradization  is  the  correct  preventive  treatment  of 
uterine  malpositions. 

6.  The  action  of  faradization  on  the  uterus  is  similar  to 
that  of  ergot,  only  its  action  is  more  prompt  and  more  energetic. 


Fig.  122. 

VAGINAL  ELECTRODE  INSULATED  IN  LATERAL  HALVES. 


This  electrode  consists  of  two  cylindrical  halves  separated  by  hard  rubber,  which  insu- 
lates them  so  that  electricity  cannot  pass  directly  from  one  to  the  other.  A  binding  post  is 
attached  to  each  half  for  connection  with  the  conducting  cords.  It  is  designed  to  be  used 
when  a  positive  current  is  to  be  applied  to  one  half  the  vagina  and  the  negative  to  the  other 
half.  The  current  is  localized  on  the  lateral  halves,  or  anterior  and  posterior  halves, 
according  to  the  direction  in  which  it  is  introduced. 

In  conclusion,  it  is  a  marvelous  therapeutic  agent  in  obstet- 
rics, simple  in  application,  rapid  and  energetic  in  action, 
perfectly  harmless,  and  can  be  interrupted  or  renewed  at  will. 

It  not  only  restores  the  uterus  to  the  normal  condition,  but 
its  use  prevents  further  uterine  complications.  The  method  of 
employing  it  for  this  purpose  is  this :  Immediately  after  the 
delivery,  an  induced  current  is  applied  to  the  uterus,  and  gradu- 
ally increased  in  intensity.  This  operation  is  repeated  from 
eight  to  ten  times,  during  about  six  days  after  normal  labor. 


*  M.  Apostoli,  in  Gazette  des  Hopitaux. 


370 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


SUPERINVOLUTION   AND  SUBINVOLUTION  OF   THE    UtERUS.  Dr. 

Eockwell  has  successfully  treated  a  few  cases  with  both  gal- 
vanism and  faradism,  the  applications  being  made  almost  daily 
for  a  number  of  months. 

Dr.  Murray*  regards  the  galvanic  pessary  an  efficient  in- 
strument in  subinvolution  following  childbirth.  In  one  case  of 
this  kind  with  retroversion  where  pessaries  had  failed  to  remedy 
the  condition,  the  introduction  of  a  galvanic  pessary  was  fol- 
lowed by  the  reduction  of  a  large  flabby  uterus  nearly  to  a 
healthy,  natural  condition  in  the  course  of  a  fortnight. 


Fig.  123. 

VAGINAL  ELECTRODE  INSULATED  IN  VERTICAL  HALVES. 


This  electrode  consists  of  two  short  nickel-plated  brass  cylinders,  separated  by  a  cylin- 
drical piece  of  hard  rubber  placed  between  their  adjacent  ends.  Two  binding  posts,  one 
having  metallic  connection  with  each  cylinder,  receive  the  conducting  cords.  This 
instrument  is  designed  to  apply  one  pole  to  the  upper  and  the  opposite  pole  to  the  lower 
half  of  the  vagina. 

Extra-Uterine  Pregnancy.  — Galvanism.  Dr.  Rockwell 
has  succeeded  in  a  number  of  instances  in  destroying  the 
foetus  by  electricity,  without  injury  to  the  mother.  One  was  of 
an  unusual  character,  the  tubal  or  extra-uterine  pregnancy  being 
associated  with  normal  uterine  pregnancy.  The  diagnosis  was 
confirmed  by  Dr.  Thomas  and  others.  The  galvanic  current  was 
employed,  with  one  pole  introduced  to  the  mass  through  the 
vagina  and  the  other  over  the  tumor  externally  ;  the  current  was 
rapidly  interrupted.  A  current  of  twenty-four  volts  was  em- 
ployed and  the  treatment  repeated  the  first,  third  and  sixth 
days  thereafter.  The  tumor,  at  first  the  size  of  a  billiard  ball, 
gradually  grew  smaller,  while  the  natural  pregnancy  progressed 
favorably.    Another  case  of  tubal  pregnancy  had  reached  the 


*  The  Lancet. 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


371 


fourth  month  of  development  when  first  examined.  One  elec- 
trode was  introduced  into  the  rectum  ;  the  other  was  placed 
externally  over  the  tumor.  On  account  of  the  danger  of  rup- 
ture, owing  to  the  great  distention  of  the  Fallopian  tube,  a 
current  of  only  sixteen  volts  (12  cells)  was  used  when  inter- 
rupted ;  the  current  was  increased  without  interruptions  and 
allowed  to  pass  a  moment  continuously  ;  it  was  then  decreased. 
This  treatment  was  repeated  on  the  following  day,  and  without 
any  further  electrization  the  patient  recovered  and  the  tumor 
disappeared.  He  states  that  it  is  an  error  to  suppose  that 
abortions  are  readily  produced  by  electricity  unless  measures 
are  employed  that  would  produce  abortion  without  electricity. 


This  is  composed  of  a  curved  metal  rod,  insulated  in  hard  rubber,  terminating  in  a 
screw,  to  which  may  be  attached  cups  of  various  sizes.  The  instrument  is  shown  complete 
in  the  upper  part  of  the  cut;  the  lower  represents  the  stem  and  cup  separated.  The  cup  is 
lined  with  metal,  which  is  connected  with  the  metal  rod  through  the  screw.  It  is  designed 
to  localize  the  current  upon  the  lower  external  surface  of  the  cervix  uteri,  the  alternate 
pole  of  the  current  being  applied  externally  over  the  abdomen  or  sacrum. 


Faradism.  Dr.  J.  C.  Reeves,'^  in  one  case  where  diagnosis 
was  positive  at  the  end  of  the  third  month,  used  faradization 
for  nine  days  as  strong  as  could  be  borne  for  ten  minutes  at  a 
time.  One  electrode  was  in  the  vagina  upon  the  tumor  and 
the  other  upon  the  abdomen  ;  recovery  followed.  Lusk,  Bache, 
Emmet  and  others  have  succeeded  with  faradism  when  the 
diagnosis  was  made  early.  Dr.  T.  G.  Thomas,  from  a  study 
of  twenty-one  cases,  formulates  the  following  rules  for  guid- 
ance in  treating  this  condition  : 

*  Trans.  Ani.  Gynecolog.  Soc,  1879. 


Fig.  124. 


CUP-SHAPED  UTERINE  ELECTRODE. 
Diam.  of  cups,  %  in.  to  1^  in. 


372 


ELECTEO-THERAPEUTICS. 


1.  If  the  diagnosis  be  well  settled  before  the  fourth  month 
of  gestation,  he  would  destroy  the  life  of  the  fcetus  by  electricity 
in  preference  to  all  other  methods. 

2.  Should  the  fourth  month  of  gestation  have  passed,  and 
surgical  interference  be  called  for,  laparotomy,  or,  with  the 
tumor  low  down  in  the  pelvis,  elytrotomy  should  be  preferred 
to  electricity. 

3.  Should  the  pregnancy  be  abdominal,  the  practitioner 
might  watch  and  wait  until  full  term,  and  deliver  by  laparotomy, 
or  by  elytrotomy  and  the  forceps,  or  manual  delivery. 


INTRA-UTERINE  ELECTRODE. 

This  is  similar  to  the  electrode  represented  in  Fig.  124,  with  the  addition  of  a  metal 
rod,  1  inch  long,  which  screws  into  the  base  of  the  metal-lined  cup.  It  is  designed  to  be 
used  in  localizing  a  current  upon  the  cervix  and  within  its  canal,  the  alternate  pole  being 
applied  externally. 

Caution.  It  is  important  that  no  force  be  used  when  introducing  this  electrode.  The 
cervical  canal  is  slightly  constricted  at  the  point  where  the  neck  and  body  of  the  Avomb 
unite,  and  it  is  here  that  flexion  occurs.  When  flexion  of  the  Avomb  exists,  the  canal  is 
bent  if  not  completely  closed,  and  since  its  length  averages  but  three-fourths  of  an  inch  to 
one  inch,  if  force  is  employed  to  push  this  cup  into  close  contact  with  the  external  surface 
of  the  uterine  neck,  the  prong  or  projecting  rod  might  be  forced  into  or  through  the  tis- 
sues, an  accident  that  is  liable  to  prove  very  dangerous. 

4.  Should  the  full  term  be  passed  and  the  foetus  be  dead, 
wait  and  watch  and  aid  nature  when  she  demonstrates  the 
outlet  by  which  she  desires  extrusion  to  be  effected.  If  bad 
symptoms  under  these  circumstances  at  any  time  develop,  per- 
form laparotomy  under  strict  antiseptic  precautions. 

5.  Should  rupture  of  the  foetal  nest  have  occurred  before 
diagnosis  has  been  fully  made,  wait  and  see  whether  nature 
is  powerful  enough  to  overcome  the  shock,  to  control  hemor- 
rhage, and  further,  if  the  patient  is  going  to  escape  the  dangers 
of  peritonitis  and  septicaemia.     If  these  favorable  results  do 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIGS. 


373 


not  occur,  if  hemorrhage  is  about  to  destroy  the  patient  imme- 
diately, or  if  septicaemia  attacks  her  later,  laparotomy,  followed 
by  antiseptic  cleansing,  should  be  promptly  adopted. 

Franhlinism.  Dr.  Kochmann,  of  Strasburg,  reports  a  case 
of  extra-uterine  pregnancy,  six  months  advanced,  in  which  the 
foetus  was  destroyed  by  a  single  application  of  sparks  from  a 
static  machine.  The  duration  of  the  sitting  was  about  fifteen 
minutes,  and  sparks  about  one  and  one-half  centimetres  long 
were  drawn. 


Fig.  126. 

DOUBLE  UTERINE  ELECTRODE. 


This  electrode  is  constructed  similar  to  Fig.  125,  with  the  addition  of  a  second  insu- 
lated metal  rod,  A,  parallel  with  the  first;  both  terminate  in  a  binding  post  to  receive 
the  cord.  The  rod  A  is  connected  with  the  metal  lining  of  the  cup,  and  B  with  the  pro- 
jecting rod.  The  central  rod  and  cup  are  insulated  from  each  other  in  this  instrument. 
It  is  designed  to  be  used  in  conveying  both  poles  of  the  current  to  the  cervix,  one  pole, 
being  connected  with  A,  is  applied  to  the  outside,  and  the  other  pole,  connected  with 
B,  is  applied  within  the  cervical  canal. 

Hypertrophy  of  the  Cervix. —  Electrolysis.  When  the 
cervix  is  found  to  be  in  a  state  of  hypertrophy  from  long- 
continued  irritation,  and  usual  measures  for  reducing  it  fail, 
electrolysis  has  occasionally  succeeded.  Two  needles  connected 
with  the  negative  pole  are  inserted,  one  in  each  lip  of  the  cervix 
to  the  depth  of  about  half  an  inch.  The  positive  electrode  is 
located  on  the  nates,  or  some  other  indifferent  point ;  four  to  six 
zinc-carbon  cells  are  included  in  the  circuit,  and  the  current  is 
continued  about  fifteen  minutes.  The  operation  should  not  be 
repeated  more  frequently  than  once  a  month,  and  the  time 
selected  should  be  midway  between  the  menstrual  periods. 


374 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


Galvano-cautery  has  been  employed  to  amputate  an  elongated 
cervix,  for  which  it  is  well  adapted.  The  loop  is  adjusted  and 
tightened  slowly  like  the  ordinary  ecraseur  chain. 

Fibroids. —  Mectrolysis.  When  these  tumors  are  attached  to 
the  posterior  surface  of  the  uteru^  they  may  be  treated  through 
the  vaginal  wall,  when  it  is  important  to  avoid  all  discharge 
through  the  opening  made  by  the  needle.  The  positive  electrode 
should  be  large,  and  may  be  applied  over  some  indifferent  spot. 
The  negative  pole  attached  to  a  suitable  needle  is  introduced  into 
the  growth,  and  a  current  from  twelve  to  twenty-four  freshly- 
charged  zinc-carbon  cells  is  passed  into  the  tumor  for  about 
twenty  minutes.  The  needle  should  be  thoroughly  insulated, 
except  over  that  part  that  is  within  the  tumor.  This  operation 
may  be  repeated  at  intervals  of  ten  to  twenty  days.  This  plan  is 
only  applicable  to  tumors  that  are  near  the  surface,  where  they 
may  afterward  be  opened  to  permit  the  discharge  of  pus  that 
forms  in  consequence  of  the  operation.  When  this  plan  is  ob- 
jectionable, several  very  fine  needles,  insulated,  except  at  the 
point,  may  be  introduced,  using  a  current  from  four  to  six 
freshly-charged  zinc-carbon  cells.  This  produces  a  limited 
destruction  of  tissue  that  is  not  followed  by  suppuration,  but 
the  blood  supply  is  interfered  with,  and  absorption  is  excited. 

Fungoid  growths  may  be  destroyed  by  electrolysis. 

Cancers. —  Gcdvano-cautery  is  undoubtedly  superior  to  any 
other  method  of  performing  operations  for  the  destruction  of 
tissue  within  the  uterus,  or  vagina,  because  the  instrument  can 
be  located  while  cold,  the  action  of  the  heat  can  be  limited,  and 
hemorrhage  can  be  prevented.  The  removal  of  portions  of  can- 
cerous growths  by  galvano-cautery  is  frequently  useful  in  arrest- 
ing hemorrhages  and  retarding  their  growth. 

Electrolysis.  The  introduction  of  electrolysis  needles  to 
destroy  a  portion  of  the  growth,  not  only  checks  the  advance 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


375 


of  the  disease,  but  in  some  instances  produces  a'  notable 
diminution  in  the  pain  attending  it. 

THE  SKIN. 

Faradization  produces  a  prickling  or  tingling  sensation 
when  the  skin  is  dry.  The  effects  are  intensified  by  applying 
the  current  through  a  wire  brush,  and  are  most  severe  when 
the  brush  barely  touches  the  skin.  The  effect  of  a  brush  made 
of  tinsel  lightly  passed  over  the  surface  is  so  painful  that  an 
electrode  made  in  this  form  has  been  named  the  electric 
scourge. 


Fig.  127. 

ELECTRIC  SCOURGE. 
Length,  3  in. 


This  consists  of  a  bundle  of  tinsel-covered  threads  fastened  in  a  nickel-plated  head 
that  fits  a  universal  handle.  When  lightly  brushed  over  the  skin  it  produces  a  sharp 
stinging,  exceedingly  painful  sensation.  It  is  employed  to  arouse  dormant  sensibility  of 
either  nerve,  muscld  or  cutaneous  surface. 

The  effect  of  the  faradic  current  upon  the  bloodvessels  of 
the  skin  has  been  microscopicall}^  studied  by  Weber,  Pfltiger 
and  others,  who  agree  that  it  causes,  first  contraction  and 
afterward  dilatation  of  these  vessels,  through  its  action  upon  the 
vaso-motor  nerves.  Intense  redness  is  easily  produced  in  per- 
sons with  delicate  skin,  and  this  is  more  marked  at  the  nega- 
tive than  the  jDositive  pole.  The  effects  are  greater  if  the  skin 
is  dry,  for  if  it  is  moistened  electricity  passes  through  it  to  the 
deeper  structures,  although  a  very  powerful  current  affects  both 
the  skin  and  the  structures  beneath. 

Galvanization.  The  sensation  produced  by  it  has  been 
compared  to  that  produced  by  mustard  paste  ;  if  the  skin  be 
dry  and  the  current  feeble,  the  sensation  is  very  slight ;  but  if 


376  ^  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 

the  skin  be  moist  or  previously  irritated  by  blisters,  the  effects 
are  greatly  intensified.  The  positive  enlarges  the  bloodvessels 
and  reddens  the  skin ;  the  negative  has  an  opposite  effect. 
The  positive  produces  a  depression  of  the  skin,  and  the  nega- 
tive a  swelling  of  the  epidermis  and  cutis. 

Franklinism  produces  redness  of  the  skin,  and,  if  sparks 
are  taken,  a  peculiar  eruption  which  resembles  nettle-rash,  but 
this  form  of  electricity  does  not  destroy  the  tissue. 

Diseases  for  which  electricity  has  heen  employed: 

AriEesthesia,  Baldness,  Ulcers,  Tumors, 

Eruptions,  Pain  and  itching,    Bed-sores,  Hirsuties. 

It  is  to  be  understood  that  in  the  treatment  of  diseases  of 
the  skin,  as  in  those  of  other  portions  of  the  body,  electricity 
is  most  successful  when  employed  as  an  adjuvant  to  other 
indicated  measures.  The  physician  who  employs  electricity 
alone,  to  the  exclusion  of  suitable  medicines  and  regimen,  will 
frequently  fail  where  he  most  confidently  expects  success.  It 
has  not  been  thought  necessary  to  emphasize  this  fact  in  con- 
nection with  every  subject  referred  to  in  these  pages,  but  it 
applies  equally  to  all. 

Galvcmism.  Chronic  eczema,  prurigo,  herpes  zoster,  and  all 
eruptions  dependent  upon  some  disturbance  of  the  nervous 
system,  may  be  materially  benefited  by  electricity  applied 
through  the  sympathetic  nerve.  Beard  and  Kockwell  have 
cured  cases  of  eczema  and  prurigo  by  their  method  of  central 
galvanization  without  local  applications  of  any  kind. 

Electrolysis.  Dr.  Hardaway*  enumerates  the  diseases  of 
the  skin  in  which  electrolysis  may  be  confidently  employed,  viz: 

Pigmented  nsevi,  small  fibromata,  miliary  nodules  of  lupus,  sebaceous 
cysts,  xanthoma  (Fox),  warts,  cutaneous  horns,  and  some  stages  of  epithe- 
lioma.   From  certain  observations  that  he  has  made  in  regard  to  the 


*  St.  Louis  Courier  of  Medicine,  July  188^ 


ELECTRO-THEEAPEUTICS. 


377 


action  of  this  means  in  hypertrophied  scar  tissue,  he  is  inclined  to  look 
upon  it  favorably  in  keloid.  In  short,  it  may  be  confidently  stated  that 
whenever  it  is  necessary  to  use  a  destructive  agent  on  the  skin  —  one 
that  is  readily  managed,  that  causes  no  hemorrhage,  and  leaves  few  scars — 
there  is  none  better  or  more  efficient  than  electrolysis. 

Galvano- Cautery  has  been  successfully  employed  to  remove 
tumors,  destroy  malignant  ulceration,  and  for  all  purposes  where 
radical  destruction  of  tissue  is  indicated. 

Anesthesia.  It  is  important  to  distinguish  between  cuta- 
neous and  muscular  anaesthesia.  In  the  former  the  patient  is 
insensible  to  touch  or  pain,  and  is  unable  to  keep  the  lightest 
substance  in  his  hands  ;  neither  can  he  determine  the  weight 
or  temperature  of  a  body ;  in  the  latter  case,  however,  the 
patient  suffering  from  muscular  anaesthesia  feels  the  touch  or 
pain,  but  the  grasp  of  his  hand  is  powerless  ;  he  cannot  hold 
even  the  slightest  body  unless  he  fixes  it  with  his  eyes. 


Fig.  128. 


Fig.  128  represents  one  method  of  testing  the  cutaneous  sensi- 
tiveness with  Duchenne's  points.  The  operator  should  become 
familiar  by  actual  experiment  upon  the  healthy,  with  the  rela- 
tive sensitiveness  of  the  different  parts  of  the  cutaneous  surface 
and  the  distance  apart  the  electrodes  must  be  applied  to  detect 
distinct  sensations  at  both  poles.  The  following  points  should 
be  borne  in  mind  while  treating  these  cases  :  1.  They  require 
a  divided  current  applied  when  the  affection  is  superficial,  to 


378 


ELECTRO-THERAPE  UTICS. 


the  dry  surface  through  electrodes  107,  127,  or  in  some  cases 
129.  2.  When  the  deeper  layers  of  the  skin  or  muscles  are 
in  a  state  of  anaesthesia,  the  skin  must  be  moistened  before 
the  brush  is  applied.  3.  With  the  gradual  return  of  sensi- 
bility the  strength  of  the  exciting  current  is  also  gradually 
diminished.  4.  Where  anaesthesia  exists  along  with  other 
disturbances  of  nervous  function,  whether  hyperaesthesia  or 
motor  paralysis,  the  anaesthesia  is  first  to  be  treated,  and  the 
removal  of  this  condition  is  frequently  followed  by  a  disap- 
pearance of  all  the  other  symptoms'.  5.  If  anaesthesia  is  the 
result  of  section  of  the  nerves,  the  treatment  by  electricity 
should  never  be  begun  sooner  than  four  weeks  after  the  acci- 
dent, as  this  is  the  shortest  time  in  which  the  entirely  severed 
nerves  will  reunite.  6.  Generally  in  anaesthesia  following  a 
peripheral  cause,  faradism  will  give  a  more  favorable  result. 
When  galvanism  is  employed,  the  negative  is  placed  upon  the 
affected  portion  of  the  skin  and  the  positive  upon  the  respective 
nerve-trunk:  the  latter  is  moved  along  the  nerve-trunk  to  the 
negative  repeatedly.  7.  Anaesthesia  from  inflammation  of  a 
nerve  usually  disappears  without  local  treatment  through  gal- 
vanization of  the  affected  nerve. 

Acne  Indueata  has  been  cured  by  central  galvanization. 

Acne  Eosacea. — Faradism.  Place  the  positive  electrode 
on  the  back  of  the  neck  and  the  negative  over  the  affected 
region.  Galvanism  applied  in  the  same  way  has  also  been 
reported  successful  in  some  instances. 

Herpes  Zoster  (Shingles).  Galvanism  has  cured  this 
eruption  and  relieved  the  neuralgic  pains  accompanying  it 
when  applied  directly,  the  negative  being  placed  on  the  erup- 
tion, the  positive  over  that  part  of  the  spine  from  which  the 
affected  part  receives  its  nerve  supply.     Nagel*  says  the  in- 


*K1.  Monatsbl..  1871,  p.  331. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


379 


tense  neuralgic  pains  are  sometimes  instantaneously  relieved 
by  galvanism. 

Psoriasis  (Scaly  Tetter).  Galvanism  lias  cured  a  few 
cases.  The  current  is  applied  the  same  as  for  herpes  zoster, 
the  negative  pole  being  retained  over  each  patch  from  one  to 
three  minutes.  It  requires  several  weeks  and  frequent  sittings 
to  make  an  impression  upon  cases  of  long  standing. 

Ringworm. —  Galvanism.  A  mild  galvanic  current  applied 
twenty  to  thirty  minutes  through  a  metal  electrode  in  contact 
with  the  eruption,  and  a  sponge  or  carbon  electrode  near  it 
sometimes  cures  after  only  one  or  two  sittings. 

Franklinism.  Dr.  Despine  d'Aix  states  that  franklinic 
electricity  in  the  form  of  sparks  is  a  valuable  aid  in  curing 
ringworm,  which  at  the  same  time  is  receiving  suitable  medi- 
cation. 

Elephantiasis  Arabfm. — Electrolysis.  Mons.  Raynaud*  read 
a  communication  on  the  above  subject  from  two  physicians  at 
Rio  de  Janeiro.  The  writers  of  that  communication  had  had 
constructed  suitable  needles,  which  were  introduced  into  the 
affected  members  to  the  number  of  about  three  to  five.  Six 
cells  were  at  first  employed,  and  the  number  then  gradually 
increased  to  sixty.  Local  anaesthesia  was  produced  before  inser- 
tion of  the  needles,  and  the  latter  were  washed  in  antiseptic 
solutions.  This,  together  with  other  precautions,  constituted, 
according  to  the  authors,  the  Listerian  electrolysis.  The  suc- 
cess following  this  kind  of  treatment  was  said  to  be  very 
gratifying. 

Carbuncles  and  Furuncles. —  Galvanism.  They  may  be 
dissipated  in  early  stages  by  applying  the  negative  electrode 
upon  them  and  the  positive  on  a  neighboring  part. 

Wounds,  Ulcers,  etc.  —  Galvanism.  A  very  weak  current 
is  capable  of  exercising  considerable  influence  over  the  secre- 

*At  a  meeting  of  the  Academy  of  Medicine  {Bull  de  I' Acad,  de  Medicine,  March  1, 1881). 


380 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


tions  from  wounds,  etc.  The  positive  when  applied  to  the 
wound  produces  greater  irritation  than  the  negative.  It  should 
only  be  applied  when  the  secretions  are  alkaline ;  in  this  case, 
when  it  is  kept  in  constant  contact  for  a  sufficient  length  of 
time,  the  tissue  is  restored  to  a  healthy  state. 

Dr.  Apostoli  has  suggested  the  use  of  Potter's  clay  as  an 
electrode  for  the  treatment  of  ulcers.  When  saturated  with 
pure  water,  or  salt  and  water,  it  becomes  an  excellent  con- 
ductor, and  as  it  dries  slowly  it  is  well  adapted  for  use  with 
the  galvanic  belt  when  a  continuous  current  for  many  hours'' 
duration  is  indicated.  It  can  be  readily  adapted  to  the  most 
irregular  surface,  and  as  its  contact  can  be  close  or  limited, 
its  value  will  be  readily  appreciated.  Applied  to  the  epidermis, 
it  diminishes  the  pain  of  the  application  and  lessens  the 
tendency  to  blister. 

Blisters. — Galvanism.  The  galvanic  current  is  sometimes 
applied  to  a  blister  to  increase  the  effect  of  the  latter,  in  the 
following  manner :  Snip  the  skin  of  the  blister,  raised  in  the 
usual  way ;  fasten  upon  it  the  positive  metal  electrode,  uncov- 
ered, and  the  negative  with  its  cover  well  moistened  at  some 
distant  point.  Connect  two  or  three  cells  of  a  battery  or  twice 
the  number  of  the  belt  cells,  according  to  the  degree  of  irrita- 
tion required.  After  a  few  hours  the  surface  of  the  skin 
beneath  the  blister  will  have  a  white  appearance,  as  if  rubbed 
with  nitrate  of  silver.  In  forty-eight  hours  a  decided  eschar 
will  appear,  which,  still  keeping  on  the  electrode  or  disc,  will 
begin  to  separate  at  the  edges.  Remove  the  electrodes,  then 
a])ply  a  common  poultice,  and  a  healthy  granulating  sore  with 
well  defined  edges,  freely  discharging  pus,  will  be  left.  If  the 
patient  complains  of  pain  or  irritation  at  all,  it  will  be  at  the 
negative  electrode  only. 

Bed-sores. — Galvanism.    Dr.   Mills*  has  been  successful 


*  Neurologist  to  Philadelphia  Hospital. 


ELECTRO-THEKAPEUTICS. 


in  the  treatment  of  bed-sores,  which,  in  spite  of  the  best  of 
care,  are  apt  to  form  in  cases  of  spinal  and  cerebral  disease. 
A  silver  plate  connected  with  the  negative  pole  is  applied  to 
the  sore  ;  any  ordinary  electrode  connected  with  the  positive 
is  placed  on  the  surface  near.  A  mild  galvanic  current  is  sent 
through  the  circuit  from  live  to  ten  minutes  daily.  Electricity 
is  very  effectual  in  stimulating  granulations. 


Fig.  129. 

HAIRBRUSH  ELECTRODE. 
Size  of  brash,  4X13^  inches.   Length  of  electrode,  9  inches. 


This  electrode  consists  of  a  highly-polished  black  rubber  frame,  holding  a  metal  plate, 
to  which  are  fastened  flexible  metal  wires  to  form  a  brush.  There  is  metallic  connection 
between  the  brush  and  screw  at  end  of  the  handle.  This  is  not  an  electric  brush  which 
furnishes  a  current  of  electricity ;  it  is  simply  an  electrode,  which  must  be  connected  with 
a  battery  when  used.  Although  designed  for  the  scalp,  it  is  employed  for  cutaneous  stimu- 
lation when  large  areas  are  to  be  acted  upon.  The  current  applied  through  this  is  not  so 
painful  as  through  the  tinsel  or  small  wire  brush. 

Alopecia  (baldness).  Electricity  may  be  beneficially  em- 
ployed to  improve  the  circulation  through  the  scalp  and 
stimulate  the  hair  follicles.  When  caused  by  parasites,  this 
treatment  should  be  preceded  by  the  application  of  a  parasiti- 
cide. If  the  scalp  is  smooth,  shiny  and  indurated,  presenting 
the  appearance  of  being  "hide-bound,"  the  following  is  an 
efficient  method  of  restoring  it  to  a  natural  condition  :  Let  the 
positive  pole  of  a  faradic  current  be  fastened  at  the  nape  of 
the  neck,  while  the  operator  holds  the  uninsulated  portion  of 
the  negative  in  one  hand,  and  with  the  other  vigorously  kneads 
the  dr}^  scalp  for  several  minutes.  The  fingers  sliould  be  dry ; 
in  some  cases  they  may  be  lubricated  with  carbolized  oil  to 
advantage.     The  current  should  be  moderately  strong.  This 


382 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


operation  requires  repeating  once  a  week  until  the  scalp  feels 
natural  and  has  lost  its  shiny  appearance.  During  the  intervals 
the  patient  may  advantageously  employ  a  faradic  current  daily 
through  the  liairbrush  electrode.  If  the  treatment  be  so  vigorous 
as  to  cause  soreness  of  the  scalp,  it  may  be  omitted  a  few  days. 


REMOVAL  OF  HAIRS. 

A  represents  the  patient  in  a  chair  with  operator  inserting  a  needle.  B  represents 
an  enlarged  hair  follicle,  with  the  needle  in  the  position  it  must  occupy  to  make  the 
operation  successful. 

Seborrhea  of  the  Scalp.  Faradism  restores  the  functions  of 
the  glands  and  partially  controls  the  morbid  process.  The  hair  is 
moistened  and  the  negative  pole  is  applied  upon  it,  while  the 
positive  is  held  in  the  hand  of  the  patient ;  a  mild  current  is  kept 
up  for  about  fifteen  minutes. 

Hirsuties. —  Electrolysis.  The  instruments  required  for  the 
removal  of  hairs  are  a  galvanic  battery  of  at  least  twelve  cells, 
an  exceedingly  fine  needle,  or  what  is  still  better,  a  delicate, 
flexible  broach,  much  finer  than  those  commonly  employed  by  den- 
tists in  extracting  nerves,  and  a  convenient  needle-holder.  The 
positive  pole  of  the  battery  should  be  connected  with  a  sponge- 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


383 


covered  electrode  and  applied  to  the  nape  of  the  neck  ;  the  neck- 
let is  suitable,  as  this  is  self-retaining.  The  patient  may  be  placed 
in  a  reclining  chair,  or  on  a  lounge,  in  a  good  light,  in  such  a 
position  that  when  the  operator  is  seated  his  eyes  will  be  on  a 
level  with  the  patient's  chin.  The  needle  is  connected  with  the 
negative  pole  and  introduced  into  the  follicle  beside  the  hair.  A 
few  cells  only  are  needed  in  circuit,  from  six  to  twelve,  according 
to  their  condition,  the  delicacy  of  the  patient's  skin  and  the  strength 
of  the  hairs  to  be  removed.  In  a  few  seconds  a  little  froth  will 
appear  at  the  mouth  of  the  follicle.  If  the  hair  be  now  seized  with 
a  pair  of  forceps  and  the  gentlest  traction  exerted,  it  will  be  found 
to  be  loose  in  the  follicle :  this  occurs  in  the  course  of  from  ten  to 
twenty  seconds.  The  number  of  hairs  removed  at  a  sitting  varies 
from  twenty-five  to  fifty  per  hour,  according  to  the  location  of  the 
hairs  and  the  endurance  of  patient  and  operator.  It  is  said  to 
take  longer  to  destroy  hair  upon  the  neck  than  upon  the  chin  or 
cheeks.  It  is  better  at  each  sitting  to  operate  upon  hairs  here 
and  there  rather  than  on  those  close  together,  as  this  is  less  likely 
to  produce  scarring.  If  the  operation  is  not  carried  too  far,  there 
will  be  very  few  marks  resulting  from  it. 

A  considerable  amount  of  pain  is  experienced  during  the  pas- 
sage of  the  current  through  the  tissue,  which  ceases  almost  en- 
tirely on  the  removal  of  the  sponge.  Sometimes,  in  addition  to 
the  frothing,  the  skin  surrounding  the  needle  is  thrown  up  into 
an  urticarial  elevation,  and  is  greatly  reddened.  Later  the 
follicle  may  become  inflamed,  and  form  a  crust,  which  adheres  to 
the  skin  above  it  for  a  week  or  more.  Sometimes  a  hard  infiltra- 
tion may  be  felt  beneath  the  surface  for  a  considerable  time. 
Ordinarily  the  after-efiects  are  very  trivial,  unless  a  small  area  be 
acted  on  repeatedly  at  short  intervals.  Finally,  the  parts  return 
to  their  natural  condition,  leaving,  in  some  instances,  a  minute  pit 
or  depression  to  indicate  the  seat  of  the  operation.  Some  opera- 
tors report  that  50  per  cent  of  the  hairs  reappear  ;  others  claim 


384 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


that  but  10  per  cent  return.  The  operation  needs  only  to  be  re- 
peated upon  those  which  reappear  until  all  are  finally  destroyed. 
If  the  hair  follicle  is  destroyed,  of  course  the  hair  cannot  reappear. 
When  an  extensive  hirsuties  is  to  be  treated,  a  long  time  is  re- 
quired for  the  successful  primary  removal  of  the  hairs,  and  some  of 
the  follicles  will,  without  fail,  require  a  repetition  of  the  operation. 
For  the  fine,  downy  hairs  occurring  alone  or  interspersed  with  a 
stronger  growth,  nothing  had  better  be  done  until  they  attain  a 
more  conspicuous  development. 

Galvanism.  Dr.  J.  Crichton  Brown,  in  a  lecture  on  men- 
strual insanity,  referred  to  a  case*  seen  in  consultation  many 
years  ago,  in  which  a  bearded  lady  had  been  benefited  by 
the  introduction  of  a  galvanic  pessary.  The  beard  subse- 
quently fell  ofi"  and  the  patient's  mental  condition,  which  was 
that  of  melancholia,  improved  so  that  she  recovered  completely. 

PARALYSIS. 

The  method  of  electro-diagnosis  in  cases  of  paralysis  has 
already  been  given,  but  the  attention  of  those  who  have  never 
employed  electricity  in  this  disease  is  earnestly  called  to  the 
following  suggestions  : 

1.  When  muscles  cannot  be  made  to  contract  by  the  faradic, 
galvanic  or  franklinic  current,  it  is  useless  to  treat  them  with 
electricity.  If  even  a  few  slight  contractions  can  be  produced, 
it  will  indicate  a  favorable  result  under  a  careful  and  per- 
sistent treatment. 

2.  If  contractions  are  forced,  as  is  very  likely  to  be  done 
by  those  unskilled  in  the  use  of  electricity,  it  will  be  found 
at  the  next  sitting  no  contraction  at  all  can  be  produced. 

3.  The  slight  power  of  contraction  still  left  in  paralyzed 
muscles  is  often  destroyed  by  too  strong  or  too  frequently 
repeated  electrizations. 

*  Philadelphia  Med.  Times,  1880. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


385 


4.  Before  commencing  treatment  each  time,  restore  ths 
muscle  as  nearly  as  possible  to  its  natural  position  hy  some 
artificial  support^  so  that  when  stimulated  to  contract  it  can 
do  so  without  carrying  any  weight, 

5.  The  length  of  application  to  any  one  muscle  or  group 
of  muscles  should  not  exceed  five  minutes  every  day  or  every 
other  day. 

6.  Do  not  apply  too  strong  currents.  They  give  rise  to 
over-fatigue,  which  is  just  as  injurious  as  if  produced  by  over- 
exertion. 

7.  A  muscle  which  refuses  to  respond  to  any  current  may 
sometimes  be  made  to  contract  by  interrupting  the  current 
slowly  so  as  to  give  time  for  the  impression  to  be  carried  to 
the  motor  roots  and  return.  Investigations  to  discover  the 
rate  of  transmission  of  nerve  force  have  brought  out  an  im- 
portant fact,  namely,  that  the  rapidity  of  transmission  of  nerve 
force  varies  in  different  persons,  and  in  the  same  person  on 
dift'erent  occasions.  There  is  a  difference  in  the  quickness 
with  which  they  receive  impressions  on  the  senses.  In  every 
case  there  is  slight  delay,  so  that  no  phenomenon  is  perceived 
at  the  instant  of  its  occurrence.  If  interruptions  occur  with 
greater  rapidity  than  the  impressions  can  be  transmitted,  the 
nerve  is  thrown  into  a  tetanic  state,  which  causes  pain  and 
liability  to  reflex  action  that  in  cases  due  to  cerebral  hemor- 
rhage might  excite  a  fresh  attack. 

8.  So  long  as  muscles  preserve  electric  contractility  they 
can  be  preserved  from  complete  fatty  degeneration  by  judicious 
use  of  electricity.  Cases  resulting  from  forced  or  continuous 
work  are  most  hopeful.  The  sitting  should  not  exceed  eight 
to  ten  minutes  each  day.  Electric  massage  with  a  roller 
electrode,  like  tlie  one  shown  in  Fig.  131,  will  be  found  very 
efiective  in  improving  the  nutrition  of  paralyzed  muscles 


386 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


9.  Some  sort  of  gymnastic  exercise,  which  will  bring  into 
action  the  paralyzed  muscles,  should  be  devised  by  the  practi- 
tioner, and  the  patient  should  be  instructed  to  make  daily 
systematic  attempts  to  produce  voluntary  motion  in  the  afiected 
parts.    This  is  the  most  important  part  of  the  treatment. 

10.  The  paralyzed  muscles  should  be  excited  individually, 
so  as  to  rouse  up  their  movements  equally.  The  current  should 
be  made  to  traverse  the  nerves  in  the  direction  of  their  length. 
This  is  especially  important  after  cerebral  hemorrhage. 

11.  The  treatment  must  not  be  too  prolonged.  If  the 
muscles  do  not  recover  their  movements  after  fifteen  or  twenty 
sittings,  discontinue  for  a  time  and  then  recommence. 

12.  Where  the  nerves  and  muscles  of  the  affected  side  react 
equally  to  those  on  the  healthy  side  under  the  influence  of 
electricity,  the  galvanic  current  will  accomplish  more  than  the 
faradic. 

13.  Twitchings  of  the  fingers  and  toes,  so  often  connected 
with  hemiplegia,  which  occur  at  night  and  interfere  with  sleep, 
are  relieved  more  certainly  by  galvanism  than  by  faradism. 

14.  Althaus  concludes,  as  the  result  of  his  observation  on 
out-patients  of  the  hospital,  in  whom  he  had  an  opportunity  of 
witnessing  the  effects  of  protracted  treatment,  that  few  cases, 
however  bad,  are  utterly  incapable  of  amendment. 

Caution.  Before  treating  paralysis  of  any  of  the  muscles 
about  the  head  it  is  important  to  distinguish  between  those 
cases  in  which  the  affection  is  due  to  disease  of  the  brain  and 
that  due  to  paralysis  of  the  seventh  pair  of  nerves.  The  latter 
can  be  readily  relieved  by  electricity,  but  great  care  must  be 
exercised  in  treating  the  former  lest  a  fresh  attack  b6  produced. 
It  is  many  times  very  difficult  to  distinguish  between  them, 
but  this  is  said  to  be  a  reliable  indication  :  When  the  contrac- 
tility of  the  muscles  under  the  stimulus  of  the  faradic  current 
is  perfect,  the  cause  is  in  the  brain  ;  when  the  orbicular  muscles 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


387 


of  the  eyeball  are  paralyzed,  it  is  an  indication  that  the  paralysis 
does  not  originate  in  the  brain,  but  depends  upon  the  nerve 
alone. 

Electrization  of  nerve-centers,  when  they  are  affected  by 
inflammatory  action,  may  cause  serious  accident.  Duclienne 
relates  the  following  circumstance,  which  is  quoted  to  emphasize 
the  importance  of  caution  in  these  cases:  "A  young  man, 
twenty-two  years  of  age,  having  suffered  from  the  results  of 
cerebral  hemorrhage  for  one  year,  thought  to  reduce  the  con- 
tinuous rigidity  of  some  of  the  muscles,  which  still  persisted, 
by  reflex  action  instead  of  localizing  the  current  in  the  affected 
muscles.  He  grasped  one  electrode  in  each  hand,  and  caused 
a  strong  faradic  current  to  pass  through  the  circuit.  He  was 
seized  with  another  attack  of  cerebral  hemorrhage ;  his  life 
was  for  a  long  time  in  danger,  and  when  he  at  last  recovered 
he  retained  in  his  right  side  stronger  rigidities  than  those  which 
he  desired  to  cure." 

Paralysis  Origin atino  in  the  Brain. —  Galvanism,  The 
time  which  must  elapse  after  an  attack  of  paralysis  occurs  from 
cerebral  hemorrhage,  before  it  is  safe  to  employ  electricity,  is 
one  upon  which  authors  are  not  agreed.  Remak  advises  to 
begin  early  to  galvanize  the  sympathetic  and  the  cerebral 
vessels  of  the  side  opposite  to  the  paralysis,  in  order  to  pro- 
mote absorption  of  the  clot.  Onimus  and  Legros  agree  with 
him,  and  say  that  this  may  be  begun  within  seven  or  eight 
days  afl;er  the  attack.  The  positive  pole  should  be  applied  to 
the  forehead  on  the  side  of  the  lesion,  and  the  negative  at  the 
nape  of  the  neck ;  a  current  of  from  three  to  four  cells  is 
passed  through  the  seat  of  injury  for  two  or  three  minutes. 
Afterward  the  superior  cervical  ganglia  is  galvanized  with  a 
more  powerful  current  (five  to  seven  cells)  for  about  five 
minutes.  All  shocks  from  interruption  of  the  current  must  he 
molded.     Althaus  states  emphatically  that  electric  treatment 


388 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


should  be  postponed  until  all  danger  of  cerebral  fever  is  passed, 
and  if  this  occurs  it  comes  on  in  the  second  or  third  week  ; 
therefore  the  application  of  galvanism  is  safe  after  fourteen  to 
eighteen  days  have  elapsed  since  the  attack.  Prof.  Ftirck,  of 
Vienna,  has  shown  that  if  the  paralysis  continues  for  six 
months  or  longer,  atrophy  of  the  nervous  fibers  of  the  opposite 
antero-lateral  columns  of  the  spinal  cord  are  apt  to  come  on, 
and  when  this  process  has  reached  a  certain  stage,  an}^  treat- 
ment will  inevitably  fail ;  this  emphasizes  the  importance  of 
beginning  early.  If  the  patient  is  seen  within  three  weeks 
after  an  attack,  the  method  of  Onimus  and  Legros  is  to  be 
preferred.  When  several  months  have  elapsed,  galvanization 
or  faradization  of  the  affected  muscles  must  be  undertaken. 
It  will  sometimes  occur  that  a  muscle  which  at  first  fails  to 
respond  to  faradism  will,  after  galvanization,  exhibit  traces  of 
iaradic  contractility.  In  these  cases  both  currents  may  be  advan- 
tageously employed. 

FacIxIl  Paralysis.  When  the  mouth  is  drawn  toward  the 
affected  side,  bend  a  silver  wire  in  the  form  of  a  hook,  slip  it 
over  the  angle  of  the  mouth  and  fasten  the  other  end  around 
the  ear,  drawing  the  mouth  into  its  natural  position,  and  then 
apply  the  current  to  the  facial  muscles  one  by  one  by  means 
of  Duchenne's  Points. 

Lead  Paralysis.  This  form  of  paralysis  affects  certain  groups 
of  muscles  leaving  others  intact.  The  arms  and  hands  suffer,  but 
the  lower  extremities  do  not,  in  many  instances  ;  and  in  the  arm 
the  flexor  muscles  are  spared  and  the  extensors  are  attacked. 
The  common  extensor  muscle  of  the  fingers  is  first  affected  ;  the 
extensor  of  the  first  and  little  finger  in  their  turn,  and  at  last  the 
tensors  of  the  wrist  and  ball  of  the  thumb.  Faradic  excitability 
is  always  diminished  and  often  lost,  even  before  the  muscles  have 
wasted  but  slightly.  This  is  regarded  as  an  important  means  of 
diagnosis  between  paralysis  due  to  lead  and  that  dependent  upon 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


other  causes.  Wrist  drop  is  frequently  the  first  symptom  that 
attracts  attention. 

Faradism.  The  treatment  by  the  faradic  current,  according 
to  Duchenne,  is  very  tedious,  requiring  from  thirty  to  one  hun- 
dred sittings.  Sulphur  baths,  iodide  of  potash,  shampooing  and 
"nervous  gymnastics,"  should  form  a  part  of  the  treatment. 
Duchenne  coined  the  latter  term,  which  refers  to  repeated  exer- 
cise of  the  voluntary  contractility  so  long  as  the  patient  possesses 
any  power  over  the  muscles. 

Galvanism.  When  faradic  contractility  is  gone,  the  galvanic 
current  must  be  employed.  Galvanic  baths  have  been  tried  with 
a  view  of  removing  the  lead  from  the  system.  Yergnes  in  1852 
had  an  obstinate  ulceration  of  the  hands  caused  by  electro-plating. 
Holding  them  in  an  electric  bath  in  contact  with  the  positive 
pole  for  fifteen  minutes,  the  negative  plate  in  the  bath  was  cov- 
ered with  gold  and  silver  from  the  ulcer.  A  few  repetitions  of  this 
treatment  cured  the  ulceration.  This  method  has  since  been  tried 
to  remove  both  mercury  and  lead  frora  the  body,  as  well  as  to 
convey  medicines  into  the  body.  It  has  been  suggested  that 
galvanism  be  used  in  connection  with  sulphur  baths,  the  patient 
being  connected  with  the  positive  electrode,  and  the  water  being 
made  the  negative  electrode.  The  positive  may  be  fastened  on 
the  nape  of  the  neck,  or  be  held  in  the  patient's  hands  above 
the  water.  Dr.  Anstie  successfully  treated  an  extreme  case  of 
this  disease.  He  employed  the  galvanic  current  daily  for  eight 
weeks  to  the  aftected  muscles ;  faradic  excitability  having 
returned  at  that  time,  faradization  for  another  month  almost 
completely  restored  the  power  and  bulk  of  the  muscles. 

Tremors. — Gcdvanism.  Dr.  M.  C.  Paul^  reported  at  a  meet- 
ing of  the  Societe  de  Therapeutique  fourteen  cases  from  his  own 
practice,  which  included  cases  of  mercurial  trembling,  chorea. 


*  Bull,  de  la  Soc.  de  ThCrap.,  1881,  p.  123. 


• 


390  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 

paralytic  ataxia,  scrivener's  palsy,  and  trembling  of  the  hands 
caused  by  sclerosis  in  patches.    All  were  greatly  benefited. 

Speaking  of  the  characteristics  of  mercurial  tremor,  Dr.  Paul  says  that 
its  onset  is  sudden  and  unexpected.  The  patient  perceives  that  his  arm  has 
failed  him,  and  from  this  moment  the  tremor  invades  successively  the  left 
arm,  and  then  first  one  leg  and  then  the  other.  It  preserves  during  its 
whole  course,  and  until  cured,  three  characters  : 

1.  The  onset  is  sudden. 

2.  The  tremor  is  continuous ;  once  having  appeared,  it  does  not  cease. 

3.  It  is  progressive,  the  interval  between  its  extension  from  one  limb  to 
another  being  very  brief,  though  it  is  longer  between  the  upper  and  the 
lower  members.  In  one  case  the  attack  first  involved  the  masseter ;  but 
this  is  rare. 

In  alcoholic  tremor  the  course  of  the  afiection  is  quite  different.  It  is 
slow,  progressive,  and  proceeds  by  successive  attacks.  Thus,  the  day  after 
a  debauch  the  patient  observes  that  his  hands  tremble  and  fail,  but  after 
the  efiect  of  the  debauch  has  passed  off*  the  tremor  disappears.  At  a  subse- 
quent debauch  the  tremor  again  appears,  lasting  this  time  a  little  longer. 
At  each  new  attack  the  tremor  lasts  a  little  longer,  until  at  last  the  drunkard 
cannot  work.  Although  slight  alcoholic  tremor  is  not  rare,  yet  tremor  to 
such  a  degree  as  to  prevent  work  or  locomotion  or  eating,  is  rare. 

Both  mercurial  and  alcoholic  trembling  are  amenable  to  treatment  by 
the  galvanic  bath.  But,  while  twenty-five  baths  are  required  to  cure 
mercurial  tremor,  six  to  eight  are  sufficient  to  cause  alcoholic  tremor  to 
disappear. 

Progressive  Muscular  Atrophy. — Galvanism.  Dr.  Neu- 
mann, of  Madgeburg,  has  succeeded  in  curing  one  case  which 
had  proceeded  to  paralysis  of  all  four  extremities.  A  galvanic 
current  equal  to  that  from  ten  zinc-carbon  cells  was  directed 
to  the  sympathetic,  the  positive  being  directed  to  the  nape  of 
the  neck,  and  the  negative  on  the  throat,  five  minutes  at  each 
side  for  three  months,  every  day,  and  then  the  negative  was 
applied  to  the  upper  cervical  ganglion,  and  the  positive  to 
the  lower  ganglion  likewise  for  five  minutes  each  time.  It 
required  nearly  a  year  and  a  half  to  completely  restore  the 
patient. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


391 


Locomotor  Ataxia. — Famdism,  At  the  meeting  of  German 
physicians  and  scientists  at  Eisenach,  Dr.  Th.  Eumpf reported 
two  cases  of  locomotor  ataxia  greatly  benefited  by  the  use  ot 
faradic  electricity  applied  with  the  brush,  and  in  whom  the 
symptoms  had  not  returned  after  several  years.  He  uses  a 
current  not  quite  strong  enough  to  cause  pain.  The  positive 
pole  is  applied  to  the  sternum  ;  the  other,  represented  by  the 
brush,  is  applied  in  rapid  succession  to  the  back  and  lower 
limbs.  The  duration  of  the  application  is  ten  minutes.  The 
effect  upon  the  lancinating  pains  is  quite  marked,  and  common 
sensation  is  greatly  improved.  In  cases  where  the  disturbances 
of  sensibility  and  pain  are  very  marked,  and  the  disease  is  not 
too  far  advanced,  this  method  gives  praiseworthy  results,  which 
are  unattainable  by  the  older  methods  of  treatment.  He  has 
since  reported  a  successful  trial  of  the  brush  in  a  series  of  cases, 
though  more  time  is  required  to  determine  the  permanency 
of  the  result.  Hef  described  one,  however,  in  which  the 
patient  had  been  in  good  condition  for  two  years  after  a  six 
weeks'  course  of  treatment.  He  had  had  lightning  pains, 
parsesthesiae  and  ataxia,  impotence  and  disturbed  micturition. 
The  knee-jerk  was  not  abolished.  All  the  symptoms  disappeared 
except  the  sexual  weakness. 

Galvanism.  Dr.  Engelskjon  found  that  the  galvanic  current 
applied  in  the  same  way  produces  the  same  effect,  and  further 
that  it  is  due  solely  to  the  peripheral  nerve  irritation.  He 
claims  that  this  treatment  is  of  no  value  when  the  first  symptoms 
of  the  disease  are  referable  to  atrophy  of  the  optic  nerve. 

Y^v\\Mv%x .—Faradism.  Dr.  Edward  C.  Mann;]:  reports  three 
cases  cured  by  means  of  the  faradic  current  in  addition  to 
phosphide  of  zinc  and  massage.    The  bromides  were  not  used 

Berlin  Klin.  Wochen. 
^  Brain,  April  1883. 

t  Physician-in-chief  to  the  Sunnyside  Medical  Retreat  for  Diseases  of  the  Nervous 
System,  etc. 


392 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


at  all.  He  believes  electricity  in  the  form  of  general  faradization 
possesses  a  special  power  for  good,  over  the  nervous  system, 
in  these  cases. 

Galvanism.  A  few  cases  are  reported  cured  by  the  long- 
continued  application  of  a  galvanic  current  from  a  belt.  The 
positive  electrode  uncovered  was  fastened  to  the  nape  of  the 
neck  while  the  negative  in  a  moist  cover  was  placed  on  the 
knee  (patella).  The  current  continued  to  act  twenty-four  hours, 
when  it  became  necessary  to  recharge  the  cells  with  fluid  and 
clean  the  electrodes.  It  required  six  months  of  this  treatment 
to  effect  a  cure. 


Fig.  131. 


ROLLER  ELECTRODE. 
Handle  length,  6  in.   Roller  diam.,  \%  in. 

The  instrument  illustrated  above  is  formed  by  two  separate  electrodes  :  1.  The  roller; 
2.  The  interrupting  handle.  The  roller  is  brass,  studded  with  nickel-plated  rounded  pro- 
jections, insulated  from  each  other  by  black  hard  rubber.  The  nickel-plated  frame  to  which 
it  is  fastened  terminates  in  a  screw  which  fits  the  universal  handle,  with  which  it  may  be 
used  when  the  special  effect  of  the  interrupting  handle  is  not  needed.  The  latter  is  made 
of  polished  black  rubber.  The  nickel-spring  shown  upon  the  end  next  the  roller  when 
pressed  down  completes  the  connection  through  the  handle ;  when  released,  the  circuit  is 
broken,  therefore  the  interruptions  can  be  controlled  at  will. 


FTanklinism.  Arthius  relates  a  remarkable  instance  of 
recovery  under  the  influence  of  franklinism  in  the  case  of  a 
boy  of  twelve,  epileptic  for  ten  years,  with  paralysis  and  atrophy 
of  right  arm.  A  very  gentle  application  was  given  at  first ; 
treatment  was  continued  two  months.  At  the  end  of  that  time 
he  had  partially  regained  the  use  of  his  arm,  and  from  the  first 
treatment  he  had  no  return  of  epilepsy.  Six  months  after  he 
had  continued  free  from  any  symptoms  of  the  disease. 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


MISCELLANEOUS  DISEASES. 

Intermittents.  Electricity  has  been  employed  by  conti- 
nental physicians  with  excellent  success,  according  to  their  reports, 
in  various  forms  of  intermittents.  Prof.  Rienzi*  has  found 
that  in  a  majority  of  cases  the  fever  is  stopped,  and  frequently 
more  promptly  than  with  quinine.  In  nine  cases  he  had  five 
complete  cures,  two  improved,  and  two  failures.  They  were 
treated  with  the  galvanic  and  faradic  current,  but  the  latter  has 
proven  the  more  efficient.  He  has  not  been  able  to  ascertain 
why  some  cases  were  rapidly  and  completely  cured,  and  others 
but  little  benefited  ;  or  when  electricity  is  to  be  preferred  to 
quinine. 


Fig.  132. 

ELECTRODE  CASE. 
Size  103^  X  12  inches. 


This  case  contains  the  electrodes  ordinarily  required  for  electrization.  It  is  morocco- 
covered  and  velvet-lined.  The  highly  polished  black  rubber  and  the  bright  nickel-plated 
metal  forming  the  electrodes  make  a  beautiful  contrast  with  the  blue  or  crimson  shade  of 
the  velvet.  It  is  of  light  weight  and  may  easily  be  carried  in  the  hand,  making  not  only 
an  attractive  but  an  exceedingly  convenient  addition  to  a  physician's  outfit. 

Dr.  Schroder,  of  St.  Petersburg,  reports  forty-two  cases  of 
intermittent  fever,  some  of  which  were  old,  and  in  most  of 
which  the  usual  medication  had  proved  of  little  use,  in  which 
he  had  almost  uniform  success  by  faradizing  the  spleen.  His 


*  Annals  Univerzali,  1882. 


394 


ELECTEO-THERAPEUTICS. 


method  is  to  hold  one  electrode  on  the  left  hypochondrium» 
while  the  other  is  carried  slowly  along  the  edges  of  the  enlarged 
spleen  for  five  minutes,  daily. 

Dr.  Blackwood*  reports  thirty  cases  of  ague,  including 
twenty-two  of  the  tertian  tj^pe,  five  quotidian  and  three  quartan, 
treated  by  electricity  without  medicine  of  any  kind,  with  the 
exception  of  a  single  dose  of  sulphate  of  magnesia  in  water, 
acidulated  with  a  drachm  of  aromatic  sulphuric  acid,  to  com- 
mence on.  The  quartan  cases  were  all  adults,  the  quotidian 
all  children.  In  eighteen  it  was  their  first  attack  ;  the  remaining 
twelve  had  sufiered  from  previous  attacks,  and  all  the  latter 
had  enlarged  spleen.  The  plan  of  treatment  was  the  same, 
except  that  a  larger  dose  of  electricity  was  given  to  those 
with  enlarged  spleen.  Faradism  was  principally  used,  but  in 
those  having  large  "ague  cakes"  galvanism  was  applied  at 
the  close  of  the  sitting,  not  from  any  attempt  to  control  the 
disease,  but  because  the  reduction  of  glandular  hypertrophy  is, 
in  curable  cases,  more  readily  secured  by  galvanism.  A  cur- 
rent as  strong  as  could  be  comfortably  borne  was  passed  first, 
one  pole  being  located  over  the  solar  plexus ;  the  other  over 
the  liver,  before  and  behind,  for  five  minutes,  and  then  over 
the  spleen  for  five  more.  After  that  about  five  minutes  were 
spent  in  general  faradization  of  the  abdomen  and  spine.  He 
lays  great  stress  on  the  importance  of  taking  treatment  early 
in  the  morning.  When  galvanism  was  employed,  a  current 
from  ten  to  fifteen  cells  was  sent  as  directly  as  possible  through 
the  spleen,  without  interruption,  for  from  five  to  fifteen  minutes' 
duration.  Although  galvanism  promptly  reduces  tiie  size  of 
the  liver,  it  has  no  eftect  in  relieving  the  ague.  In  the  tertian 
and  quartan  cases,  with  few  exceptions,  they  were  treated 
daily  without  reference  to  the  hour  of  invasion  of  the  chill. 
The  exceptional  cases  wei-e  treated  two  or  three  times  daily, 

*  The  Medical  Bulletin,  November  1883. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


395 


and  the  results  indicated  that  this  is  preferable  to  a  single 
sitting.  The  quotidian  cases  had  two  sittings  daily.  The  result 
of  treatment  was  favorable  in  all  cases,  a  cure  resulting  in  from 
six  to  thirteen  days.  The  most  stubborn  case  was  a  quartan, 
the  chill  returning  with  full  force  four  times  before  being 
checked.  Twelve  of  the  tertian  subjects  had  no  return  after  the 
first  application,  seven  had  one  chill,  and  three  two  chills  after 
commencing  electrization.  The  returning  chills  were  always 
in  children. 

The  disadvantage  of  this  mode  of  treatment  is  that  the 
patient  must  visit  the  office.  He  protests  against  turning  the 
application  over  to  the  patient,  as  the  latter  is  almost  certain 
to  repeat  too  often  or  fail  to  reach  the  solar  plexus.  He 
believes  that  success  can  be  assured  only  in  the  hands  of  the 
physician  who  clearly  understands  the  motor  points  and  the 
method  of  applying  the  current  in  a  scientific  manner. 

Neuralgia. — Galvanism.  Dr.  Moritz  Meyer  strongly  insists 
upon  the  importance  of  carefully  searching  for  spots  that  are  pain- 
ful on  pressure  in  all  cases  of  obstinate  neuralgia.  The  first  case 
described,  the  attack  afiected  the  right  arm  and  shoulder.  A 
painful  pressure  point  was  found  at  the  upper  part  of  the  brachial 
plexus.  The  positive  pole  of  a  current  from  ten  cells  applied  to 
it,  the  negative  being  held  in  the  hand,  considerably  alleviated 
the  pain  within  five  minutes.  A  repetition  of  the  operation  four 
times  during  the  ensuing  week  was  sufficient  to  efiect  a  complete 
cure.  Two  other  cases  in  which  galvanism  applied  to  the 
arm  had  failed  to  relieve  were  cured  when  it  was  directed  to 
painful  pressure-points ;  one  had  suffered  nine  months  and 
was  completely  relieved  by  seventeen  applications ;  the  other, 
after  two  years  of  sufiering,  fully  recovered  after  fifty  applica- 
tions. Prof.  Meyer  does  not  limit  this  mode  of  treatment  to 
neuralgia,  but  recommends  it  for  sick  headache,  twitching  of 
facial  muscles,  paralysis  following  a  sprain,  and  all  neuroses 


396 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


in  which  pain  is  elicited  by  pressure  at  any  points  along  the 
spine  or  the  course  of  a  nerve  trunk.  Remak  and  Brenner 
also  emphasize  the  importance  of  examining  for  and  treating 
these  points ;  in  every  instance  they  recommend  that  the  posi- 
tive be  placed  on  them. 

M.  Magendie  was  the  first  to  employ  needles  in  the  treat- 
ment of  neuralgia.  He  introduced  two  platinum  needles,  one 
at  the  origin  of  the  nerve,  or  in  its  vicinity,  and  the  other  at 
its  termination,  using  an  increasing  galvanic  current.  After 
the  cessation  of  pain,  which  does  not  generally  take  place 
until  after  several  sittings,  the  needles  were  not  immediately 
withdrawn,  but  the  patient  was  made  to  perform  some  of  the 
movements  that  generally  bring  on  the  neuralgia.  He  some- 
times applied  the  faradic  current  in  the  same  manner. 

Famdism.  Becquerel  was  one  of  the  first  to  recommend 
the  use  of  strong  and  very  rapid  currents.  He  advised  a 
secondary  faradic  current  with  wet  sponge  electrodes,  and 
directed  the  positive  pole  to  be  placed  over  the  part  of  the 
nerve  nearest  the  nerve  center  and  the  negative  over  the 
branches.  If  the  poles  are  reversed,  the  final  efiect  will  be 
the  same,  but  the  pain  during  the  sitting  will  be  much  more 
acute. 

Neuralgia  of  the  Brain. — Galvanism.  This  may  lead  to 
insanity  if  not  checked.  In  addition  to  rest,  sleep,  and  an 
improved  or  suitable  diet,  a  mild  galvanic  current  passed 
through  the  brain  for  a  few  minutes  daily  will  generally 
improve  nutrition  of  the  brain  and  relieve  the  nervous  pros- 
tration. 

Supra-Orbital  ^Teuralgta. — Faradism.  Becquerel  reported 
the  following  method  successfully  employed  in  numerous 
cases.  A  primary  faradic  current  is  passed  through  the  head 
by  placing  a  moist  sponge  electrode  on  each  temple  during  the 
first  half  of  the   sitting  and  between  the  two  supra-orbital 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


397 


nerves  during  the  second  half.     The  sittings  may  be  repeated 
when  the  pain  reappears. 

Franklinism.  Supra-orbital  neuralgia  has  been  relieved  by 
electrifying  a  patient  on  an  insulated  platform  and  then  draw- 
ing  sparks  from  the  brow  and  temple  for  some  minutes. 
Helief  follows  immediately,  if  at  all. 

Tic  Doloureux.  IS'euralgia  of  the  face  is  of  two  kinds  ;  a 
mild  and  a  severe  form.  The  former  generally  comes  on 
after  exposure  to  cold  and  damp,  or  after  mental  emotions,  or 
is  owing  to  caries  of  a  tooth  ;  it  is  not  made  worse  by  mov- 
ing the  face,  and  it  occurs  at  all  periods  of  life,  while  the 
latter  occurs,  generally,  without  any  apparent  cause,  is  almost 
entirely  confined  to  advanced  age,  and  is  brought  on  or  made 
worse  by  the  least  movement  of  the  face.  The  mild  form 
yields  to  many  remedies,  and  especially  to  electricity,  while 
the  latter  defies  almost  every  method  of  treatment ;  yet  it 
sometimes  yields  to  galvanism  and  franklinism.  Each  case 
will  require  special  treatment ;  therefore,  only  general  sugges- 
tions can  be  given.  One  pole  may  be  located  over  the  cervi-  * 
cal  ganglia,  and  the  other  attached  to  a  suitable  electrode  may 
be  passed  over  the  face,  or  one  may  be  applied  within  the 
mouth  against  the  cheek,  and  the  other  to  the  temple  and 
external  surface  of  the  cheek.  The  direction  of  the  current 
must  be  determined  by  experiment  in  each  individual  case. 

Franklinism  is  employed  by  the  method  of  charging  the 
patient  and  drawing  sparks  from  the  affected  parts. 

Brachial  Neuralgia. — Galvanism  ^hovl^  be  applied  through 
the  brachial  plexus,  one  electrode  being  located  at  the  point 
indicated  by  electrode  B,  Fig.  74,  and  the  other  being  moved 
repeatedly  downward  along  the  course  of  the  pain. 

Intercostal  Neuralgia. — Franklinism.  When  there  is  no 
dis(?bverable  cause,  and  galvanism  and  faradism  both  fail  to 
give  relief,  this  form  of  neuralgia  has  been  cured  by  charging 


398 


ELECTEO-THERAPEUTICS. 


the  patient  with  franklinic  electricity,  and  drawing  sparks  from 
the  painful  region  for  ten  or  fifteen  minutes.  Sittings  may  be 
repeated  daily. 

FramMinism.  Dr.  Y.  J.  Drosdoff,*  St.  Petersburg,  has  tried 
the  effects  of  static  electricity  on  twenty  patients,  suffering  from 
various  reflex  and  rheumatic  neuralgias  or  muscular  rheumatism. 
The  franklinic  currents  of  all  degrees  were  applied;  all  the 
patients  were  left  uninsulated  and  franklinized  during  from  five 
to  fifteen  minutes  at  a  sitting,  by  the  positive  pole  alone.  The 
conclusions  the  author  arrived  at  are  as  follows:  1.  The  sen- 
sation of  the  franklinic  current  is  difierent  from  that  of  the 
faradic  and  galvanic.  The  weak  currents  cause  a  burning  sen- 
sation, the  strong  ones  a  sensation  of  concussion  or  stroke,  at 
the  point  where  a  spark  is  produced.  2.  The  electricity  dis- 
tributes itself  all  over  the  body,  and,  during  a  sitting,  sparks 
may  be  produced  by  contact  at  any  desired  point  of  the  surface. 
The  strength  of  a  spark  lessens  with  the  increase  of  distance 
from  the  franklinized  point.  3.  The  skin,  at  the  point  of 
franklinization,  at  first  becomes  red  and  anserine,  then  pale  and 
nearly  white ;  an  artificially  produced  erythema  disappears.  4. 
The  general  functions  undergo  some  considerable  changes ;  the 
heart's  reaction  shows  retardation  (four  to  twelve  beats  less  in 
a  minute) ;  the  pulse  becomes  fuller ;  the  respiration  deeper  and 
slower;  the  quantity  of  urine  voided  after  a  sitting  is  often 
considerably  increased.  5.  The  most  striking  changes,  how- 
ever, are  observed  in  parts  affected  with  neuralgia  or  rheuma- 
tism. Immediately  after  a  sitting,  pain  and  tenderness  disappear, 
and,  during  the  remaining  part  of  the  day,  the  patients  feel 
much  better  than  before  a  sitting.  Each  successive  franklini- 
zation brings  a  further  decrease  in  intensity  of  neuralgia.  In 
cases  of  short  standing,  three  or  four  sittings  suffice  to  com- 
pletely remove  the  agonizing  pains.    Ten  to  fifteen  sittings 

*  Medical  Rec<yrd,  Nov.  15, 1883,  p.  452. 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


399 


cured  even  cases  of  neuralgia  of  twelve  years'  standing,  which 
had  obstinately  resisted  galvanization,  faradization,  and  all  pos- 
sible therapeutic  means.  In  each  of  the  author's  cases  either 
complete  cure,  or  very  considerable  improvement,  followed.  6. 
There  is  no  necessity  to  undress  a  franklinized  patient,  as  the 
therapeutic  effects  of  this  excellent  agent  remain  unchanged — 
a  circumstance  of  practical  importance  in  female  cases. 

Sciatica.  Those  cases  in  which  the  pain  is  of  a  dull  and 
aching  character  rather  than  sharp  and  darting,  where  vigorous 
rubbing  or  firm  pressure  are  not  disagreeable  and  frequently 
give  relief,  sometimes  resist  the  faradic  as  w^ell  as  the  continu- 
ous galvanic  current.  They  may  be  permanently  cured  by  a 
powerful  galvanic  current,  which  is  interrupted  at  regular  inter- 
vals, so  as  to  produce  violent  muscular  contractions. 

Dr.  Y.  P.  Gibney  reported*  thirty-two  cases  of  sciatica  treated 
with  a  very  strong  current ;  in  some  instances  lively  erythema  was 
observed  around  the  electrode,  and  in  two  patients  an  eschar 
was  found  after  the  electrode  was  removed,  ^^o  bad  effects 
were  found  to  follow  these  strong  currents.  With  regard  to 
the  direction  of  the  current,  Dr.  Gibney  believes  that  it  is  im- 
material, though  all  his  cases  were  treated  with  the  ascending 
current.  In  the  earlier  cases  the  positive  pole  was  placed  over 
the  lumbo-sacral  region,  and  the  negative  over  the  seat  of  the 
pain.  In  the  latter  cases,  the  positive  pole  was  placed  over 
the  trunk  of  the  nerve  at  its  exit,  and  the  negative  over  the 
seat  of  the  pain.  It  is  best  not  to  move  the  sponges  from 
place  to  place  during  one  sitting,  as  the  contractions  which  fol- 
low the  breaking  of  the  current  prove  too  irritating  to  the 
nerve.  If  the  pains  are  diffuse,  it  is  better  to  reach  the  dis- 
tribution of  a  single  branch  at  a  single  sitting.  At  the  next 
sitting  another  branch  can  be  embraced  in  the  galvanic  current. 
The  sitting  should  vary  from  five  to  fifteen  minutes,  and  should 

*  Trans.  Am.  Med.  Assoc.,  1880. 


400 


ELECTRO  THERAPEUTICS. 


be  held  daily,  or  at  least  every  other  day.  No  internal  reme- 
dies were  employed  in  any  of  the  cases  reported. 

Muscular  Rheumatism. — Galvanism.  A  galvanic  current, 
from  eight  to  ten  zinc-carbon  cells,  should  be  carried  through 
each  muscle  for  about  two  minutes  at  a  time.  The  best 
results  from  the  employment  of  electricity  in  rheumatism  are 
obtained  in  cases  where  the  disease  aifects  the  muscles  only. 

Lumbago. — It  is  said  that  about  one  half  of  these  cases 
yield  to  faradism,  about  one-third  to  galvanism,  and  the  re- 
mainder only  to  electro-puncture  of  the  affected  muscles. 
Electro-thermal  baths  of  all  kinds  are  the  most  effective 
remedy  for  the  various  forms  of  rheumatism  and  some  forms 
of  neuralgia.  Water,  vapor  or  hot  air  should  be  selected 
according  to  general  indications  given  in  the  chapter  on  baths. 
The  patient  needs  to  be  impressed  with  the  importance  of  per- 
severance and  regulai'ity  in  receiving  treatment.  If  these  con- 
ditions can  be  secured  and  the  practitioner  has  reasonable 
skill  in  the  management  of  electricity,  it  is  very  rare,  indeed, 
that  the  patient  will  not  be  greatly  benefited,  even  though 
the  disease  may  be  accompanied  by  organic  changes  that 
forbid  a  perfect  cure. 

Articular  Rheumatism. —  Galvanism.  *  Professor  Seelig- 
miiller  claims  to  have  met  with  remarkable  success  in  the 
treatment  of  chronic  articular  rheumatism  by  electricity.  He 
uses  a  metallic  brush  electrode  with  stiff  wires,  which  he 
connects  with  the  negative  pole,  the  positive  pole  being  at- 
tached to  a  flat  sponge  electrode.  The  latter  is  dampened  and 
placed  on  the  limb  near  the  offending  articulation,  then  the 
metallic  brush  is  applied  over  different  parts  of  the  joint, 
being  held  in  contact  with  the  integument  in  each  place  for 
the  space  of  from  one  to  ten  seconds.  The  application  is  very 
painful,  but  the  professor  remarks  that  the  patients  soon  grow 

*  Deutsche  Medicinisene  Wochenschrijt,  October  17, 1883.  . 


ELECTRO-  THERAPEUTICS. 


401 


used  to  it.  After  a  sitting  the  skin  is  covered  all  over  with 
little  dots,  looking  as  if  the  Baunscheid  instrument  had  been 
employed.  The  mode  of  action  the  author  does  not  explain, 
but  thinks  it  cannot  be  entirely  owing  to  the  counter-irritation, 
for  he  has  used  other  equally  severe  cutaneous  irritants  with 
out  meeting  with  anything  near  the  success  obtained  by  this 
method.  One  patient,  who  had  been  treated  for  eight  years 
for  chronic  rheumatism  by  all  sorts  of  methods,  was  able, 
after  the  first  application  of  electricity,  to  raise  his  arm,  which 
had  been  powerless  for  six  months  ;  after  the  third  application 
all  the  movements  were  normal.  Another  man  was  unable 
to  move  either  his  wrist  or  his  shoulder,  owing  to  rheuma- 
tism, and  after  five  sittings  was  discharged  as  cured,  and  was 
able  to  resume  his  work  as  a  stonemason. 

Arthritis  Defor^ians.  —  Rheumatic  gout  calls  for  the  gen- 
eral application  of  electricity  in  addition  to  other  remedies  for 
building  up  the  system.  The  deformities  of  the  joints  of  the 
hands  and  feet  require  great  patience  and  perseverance  on  the 
part  of  both  physician  and  patient  to  accomplish  any  marked 
reduction.  Althaus  says  that  no  one  who  has  not  seen  it  can 
have  any  idea  of  the  beneficial  effects  which  galvanism  will  pro- 
duce in  the  long  run  on  these  deformities,  even  when  they 
are  extensive,  and  where  the  patients  are  not  very  old.  He 
recommends  galvanization  of  the  sympathetic  nerve.  The 
current  should  be  used  daily  or  three  or  four  times  a  week 
for  at  least  one  month  or  six  weeks.  If  after  this  time  there 
is  no  decided  progress,  it  should  be  omitted  for  a  time  and 
then  resumed.  Dr.  Butler  has  had  success  by  immersing 
the  affected  joints  in  a  weak  solution  of  carbonate  of  soda, 
which  he  makes  the  positive  electrode,  the  negative  being 
placed  high  up  on  the  affected  limb  or  on  the  spine  near  the 
origin  of  the  nerve  supply. 


402 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


Cricks  in  the  Neck  and  Shoulders. — When  rigidity  of  the 
muscles  is  midway  between  the  acute  and  chronic  state,  and  not 
yet  permanently  contracted,  place  the  antagonistic  muscles  in 
a  state  of  artificial  rigidity  by  means  of  localized  electrizations 
with  rapid  intermissions.  Either  the  faradic  or  interrupted 
galvanic  may  be  employed. 

Torticollis  (Wry  Neck). —  Always  restore  the  head  to  the 
natural  position^  and  keep  it  there  tohile  electrizing  the  muscles. 
When  wry  neck  is  caused  by  paralysis  of  certain  muscles  in 
the  neck,  treatment  should  be  addressed  to  these  muscles  for  the 
purpose  of  restoring  their  tonicity  and  power  of  antagonizing 
the  muscles  of  the  opposite  side.  The  faradic  or  interrupted 
galvanic  currents  are  indicated  for  this  purpose.  When  the 
affection  is  due  to  spasmodic  muscular  contraction,  a  mild  con- 
tinuous downward  galvanic  current  is  indicated.  The  positive 
electrode  is  placed  on  the  nape  of  the  neck,  and  the  negative 
is  slowly  passed  from  the  origin  to  the  insertion  of  the  muscles 
to  be  treated. 

Chorea. —  Galvanism.    Dr.  A.  D.  Kockwell  says: 

In  regard  to  chorea,  I  wish  that  the  profession  could  be  impressed 
with  the  value  of  electricity  in  this  disease.  I  do  not  refer  to  recent  cases, 
where  in  a  few  weeks  the  symptoms  spontaneously  subside,  aided  perhaps 
by  some  form  of  tonic  treatment,  but  to  those  of  a  chronic  character, 
which  persist  in  spite  of  judicious  medication. 

I  may,  perhaps,  be  accused  of  undue  enthusiasm,  when  I  say  that  I  have 
never  known  a  case,  even  of  long  standing,  fail  to  recover  when  the 
methods  of  central  galvanization  and  general  faradization  were  faithfully 
and  properly  carried  out. 

His  method  is  to  cover  the  head  almost  entirely  with  large 
sponge  electrodes,  and  to  send  through  it  a  gradually  increasing 
and  decreasing  galvanic  current. 

Dr.  Charles  Dana^  believes  that  he  has  devised  a  way  by  which 
more  powerful  effects  can  be  gotten  in  the  galvanization  of  the 


*  Archives  of  Medicine,  December  1883. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


403 


brain  than  bj  the  ordinary  methods.  It  consist  in  placing  the 
foot  upon  a  metal  plate  connected  with  the  negative  pole,  and 
placing  the  positive,  a  large,  moist  sponge  electrode,  upon  the 
head.  He  has  succeeded  in  sending  a  current  froni  forty  to 
sixty  Daniells  cells  (equal  to  about  twenty  to  thirty  zinc-carbon) 
from  head  to  foot  without  unpleasant  after-effects.  Great  caution 
should  he  observed  in  passing  such  a  current  as  this  through  the 
hrain^  and  the  possibility  of  producing  electrolysis  of  the  brain- 
svbstance  should  not  be  lost  sight  of.  He  claims  that  this  is  a 
most  valuable  adjunct  to  the  treatment  of  chorea,  and  that  given 
daily  for  a  week  or  ten  days,  with  arsenic  and  probably  without, 
it  will  materially  shorten  the  duration  of  the  disease.  If  there 
is  no  improvement  after  ten  days,  it  may  be  discontinued.  The 
majority  of  the  authorities  recommend  a  mild  galvanic  current 
applied  to  the  spine  as  an  adjuvant  in  this  disease.  Althaus 
commends  central  galvanization  with  faradization  of  the  affected 
muscles.  Rosenbach  and  Steifert  apply  galvanism  to  the  tender 
points  along  the  spine. 

Magnetism.  Dr.  Hammond  has  employed  magnets  in 
several  cases  of  chorea  with  the  following  reported  results  : 

Case  1.  Girl,  aged  ten,  was  attacked  about  six  weeks  previous  to  treat- 
ment by  magnetism.  There  was  spasmodic  twitching  of  muscles  of  limbs, 
trunk  and  face,  with  loss  of  speech.  By  means  of  a  yoke  lapping  over  the 
neck  and  shoulders,  he  attached  two  horseshoe  magnets,  each  capable  of 
supporting  four  pounds  of  iron,  in  such  a  way  that  one  rested  over  the 
cervi co-dorsal  region  of  the  spine,  and  the  other  over  the  sternum,  the  poles 
pointing  downward.  The  magnets  were  applied  at  1:30  p.m.,  at  1:55  all 
choreic  movements  had  ceased.  At  1:57  she  spoke  a  few  words, — "Yes; 
no ;  I  don't  know."  At  2:05  she  said :  "  I  want  to  go  home,  mamma."  The 
magnets  were  then  removed.  No  relapse  three  weeks  after,  when  case  was 
reported. 

He  also  treated  another  girl,  aged  eleven,  in  which  the  movements 
were  confined  to  the  left  side.  One  magnet  was  applied  in  front  of  the 
left  -wi^  ,  and  the  other  to  the  cervical  region  of  the  spine.  Movements 
ceased  in  eleven  minutes.   No  relapse. 


404 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


Hemi-chorea.  When  the  affection  is  confined  to  one-half 
the  body  one  electrode  is  placed  over  that  side  of  the  head 
opposite  to  the  atfected  side  of  the  body,  and  the  other  electrode 
is  placed  in  the  hand  of  the  affected  side.  The  electrode  on 
the  head  is  made  positive,  and  a  stabile  current  of  from  two 
to  four  zinc-carbon  cells  is  sent  through  the  circuit. 

Hysteria.  Hysterical  affections  of  every  description, 
whether  spasmodic  or  paralytic  in  their  nature,  have  been  cured 
by  all  forms  of  electricity.  General  faradization  speedily 
removes  the  debility  present  in  many  cases,  and  is  especially 
adapted  to  those  in  which  there  is  loss  of  power  or  sensitive- 
ness in  any  part.  Central  galva/tiization  relieves  pain,  spasms, 
hypersesthesia. 

Franhlinism  is  regarded  by  those  who  have  had  an  oppor- 
tunity to  witness  its  effects  as  superior  to  all  other  forms  of 
electricity  in  purely  hysterical  affections,  whether  characterized 
by  pain  or  anaesthesia,  by  spasmodic  contractions  or  paralysis 
of  muscles.  The  electro-positive  or  electro-negative  bath,  with 
electric  friction  or  massage  of  the  affected  muscles,  is  the  usual 
method  pursued.  Prof.  Charcot,  Dr.  Morton,  Dr.  Blackwood 
and  others  place  an  exalted  value  upon  this  agent  in  these 
affections. 

Galactagogue. — FranMinism.  The  blood  supply  of  the 
mammary  glands  is  ample  and  can  be  readily  increased  by 
excitation.  Blackwood  claims  that  franklinic  electricity  is  best 
adapted  to  do  this,  and  claims  to  have  treated  three  cases  suc- 
cessfully that  had  repeatedly  suffered  from  scanty  milk  supply. 
Sparks  were  passed  through  the  breast,  and  in  ten  days  an 
abundant  supply  was  obtained,  which  continued  until  the  babe 
was  weaned.  The  static  induced  current  is  also  recommended 
for  the  same  purpose. 

FojTadism.  Becquerel  employed  a  mild  faradic  current, 
which  was  applied  through  moist  sponges  placed  successively 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


405 


on  different  parts  of  the  breast.  The  sittings  continued  fifteen 
minutes ;  three  or  four  restored  the  secretion,  which  continued 
in  abundance. 

Enlarged  Gla-sbs.— Galvanism.  The  following  method  of 
applying  electricity  to  enlarged  glands  has  proven  eminently 
successful  in  the  practice  of  Dr.  H.  H.  MacDonnell  (Dublin). 
Having  selected  the  gland  or  mass  of  glands  to  be  treated, 
moisten  the  surface  and  apply  the  negative  electrode  over  the 
most  prominent  part,  and  the  positive  about  three  inches  dis 
tant ;  keep  moving  the  positive  in  a  circle  around  the  negative 
quite  slowly  until  the  stimulus  has  been  sufficiently  applied. 
Five  to  six  minutes  is  long  enough,  and  at  first  two  cells  only 
are  necessary.  At  following  sittings  more  cells  may  be  used, 
but  the  number  should  be  increased  cautiously,  and  if  there  is 
the  slightest  appearance  of  infiammatory  action,  as  evinced  by 
a  bluish-white  tint  under  the  negative  electrode,  a  couple  of 
cells  must  be  at  once  disconnected,  or  the  sitting  ended  on  that 
occasion.  He  has  never  used  more  than  eighteen  cells  con- 
tinued for  three  minutes,  and  has  found  that  eight  to  twelve 
cells  give  the  most  satisfactory  results.  Some  patients  need 
the  application  of  the  current  three  or  four  minutes  twice 
daily ;  in  others  a  longer  application  once  only  answered 
better.  Even  different  glands  or  masses  of  glands  in  the 
same  individual  progressed  more  rapidly  under  varying  con- 
ditions of  strength,  length  and  frequency  of  application.  He 
believes  fair-skinned  patients  bear  a  more  heroic  line  of  treat- 
ment than  dark  ones,  and  react  more  quickly  to  electrical 
stimulus. 

Faradism.  M.  Boulin  endeavored  to  cause  the  current  to 
penetrate  the  tumor  in  the  following  manner :  He  inserted 
fine  needles  around  the  circumference  of  the  tumor,  and  con- 
nected them  with  the  negative  pole  ;  the  positive  was  connect- 
ed with  a  disc  insulated  in  points  (see  Fig.  133),  and  applied 


406 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


to  the  surface  of  the  tumor.  He  reported  a  large  number  of 
both  lymphatic  and  glandular  tumors,  wholly  or  partially  dis- 
persed by  this  treatment. 

Glandular  Tumors. — Famdism,  M.  Mayer  recommends 
placing  moist  electrodes  on  the  tumor,  and  sending  through  it 
as  strong  a  current  as  possible.  There  follows  a  distinct  sepa- 
ration of  the  tumor  into  separate  parts,  and  gradual  reduction 
in  size  follows. 


Fig.  133. 

DISC  ELECTRODE  WITH  INSULATED  POINTS. 
Diameter,  1%  inch. 

This  is  a  metal  disc,  studded  with  nickel-plated  projections,  which  are  insulated 
from  each  other  by  hard  rubber.  It  may  be  employed  to  disperse  enlarged  glands,  threat- 
ened abscesses,  or  on  any  surface  where  it  is  important  to  excite  absorption. 

Goitre. — Electrolysis.  Dr.  Henrot^  proposes  the  use  of  the 
capillary  trocar  as  an  electrolytic  needle  in  those  cases  of  goitre 
containing  cysts^  and  permeated  by  large  veins.  While  the 
fluid  is  removed  through  the  canula,  the  latter  as  a  needle 
transmitting  the  galvanic  current,  brings  about  the  closure  of 
the  great  veins. 

Exophthalmic  Goitre  (Basedow's  Disease). — Galvanism. 
Dr.  E.  A.  Bartlett*  believes  that  there  are  two  forms  of  this 
disease,  the  first  being  characterized  by  symptoms  of  paralysis, 
the  second  by  symptoms  indicating  irritation  of  fibers  of  the 
sympathetic.  In  those  cases  dependent  upon  irritation  of  the 
sympathetic,  a  galvanic  current  passed  from  the  periphery  to 
the  nerve  centers  produces  no  beneficial  efiect,  and  in  some 
cases  not  only  aggravates  existing  symptoms,  but  produces  other 


*Read  before  the  Albany  Academy  of  Medicine,  April  19, 1883.   ivredical  Annals. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


407 


unfavorable  ones.  On  the  contrary,  the  application  of  the  posi- 
tive pole  to  the  cervical  ganglia,  or  along  the  course  of  the 
cervical  sympathetic  produces  immediately  beneficial  effects, 
the  pulse  being  sometimes  greatly  reduced.  Those  cases  of 
paralytic  origin  are  most  favorably  influenced  by  the  ascend- 
ing current  (positive  to  the  nerve  extremities,  negative  to  the 
nerve  centers). 

Chvostek,  Moritz  Meyer,  Soelberg  "Wells,  Rockwell  and  others 
nave  reported  success  in  the  treatment  of  this  disease  by  elec- 
tricity.   Dr.  Chvostek  recommends  the  following  method : 

1.  The  ascending  constant  current  applied  to  the  cervical 
sympathetic,  on  each  side,  for  at  least  one  minute. 

2.  The  same  to  the  spinal  cord;  the  anode  at  about  the 
fifth  dorsal  spine,  the  cathode  high  up  in  the  cervical  region. 

3.  Through  the  occiput  one  pole  at  each  mastoid  process, 
and  in  certain  cases  also  through  the  temples,  a  constant  cur- 
rent, for,  at  the  longest,  one  minute,  and  so  weak  that  the 
patient  can  feel  but  the  slightest  sensation  of  burning.  Some- 
times also  local  galvanization  of  the  thyroid  gland,  with  a  weak, 
constant  current,  for  about  four  minutes,  the  current  to  be 
reversed  at  the  end  of  each  minute. 

The  application  should  be  made  every  day  if  possible. 
Wells  locates  the  positive  at  the  auriculo-maxillary  fossa,  while 
he  moves  the  negative  gently  over  the  closed  eyelids,  and  after- 
ward over  the  goitre.  He  uses  six  to  ten  cells  for  the  eye, 
eight  to  fourteen  for  the  goitre,  applying  the  current  for  one 
and  a  half  to  two  minutes.  He  also  galvanizes  the  cervical 
ganglia,  placing  the  positive  electrode  on  the  auriculo-maxillary 
fossa,  mid  the  negative  on  the  sixth  or  seventh  cervical  verte- 
bra, or  manubrium  sterni.  It  may  take  twenty  to  thirty  sit- 
tings before  any  marked  improvement  is  observed,  but  consid- 
ering the  little  that  can  be  accomplished  by  other  treatment, 
galvanism  is  worthy  an  extended  trial.    Dr.  Rockwell  has  re- 


408 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


ported  the  results  of  treatment  in  nine  cases,  of  which  three 
entirely  recovered,  and  two  were  greatly  improved.  He  gal- 
vanizes the  cervical  ganglia  as  above  described  for  a  few 
minutes,  then  gradually  draws  the  positive  along  the  inner 
border  of  the  sterno-cleido-mastoid  muscle  to  its  lower  ex- 
tremity. The  second  step  in  the  process  is  to  place  the  posi- 
tive on  the  seventh  cervical  vertebra,  and  the  negative  over 
the  solar  plexus,  using  for  a  few  moments  a  greatly  increased 
current.  He  employs  general  faradization  as  a  part  of  the 
treatment  in  some  cases. 

Malignant  Tumors. — Electrolysis.  Prof.  Semmola,'^  of 
Naples,  has  treated  six  cases  —  one  of  epithelium  of  the  right 
breast,  the  size  of  an  orange  ;  a  fibro-sarcoma  of  the  right  breast ; 
two  cases  of  sarcoma  of  the  right  breast ;  one  case  of  sarcoma 
of  the  left  breast,  and  one  cysto-sarcomatous  tumor,  growing 
from  the  upper  third  of  the  arm.  In  five  of  the  cases 
amputation  of  the  diseased  part  had  been  recommended  by 
experienced  surgeons,  and  the  sixth  was  a  case  of  recurrence 
eighteen  months  after  the  removal  of  the  primary  sarcomatous 
tumor.  The  tumors  are  said  to  have  had  all  the  clinical 
characters  of  malignant  growths,  and  to  have  been  examined 
microscopically  by  Prof  Petrone.  The  needles  employed  were 
those  in  common  use  for  electrolytic  purposes,  and  they  were 
passed  deeply  into  the  tumor,  converging  toward  its  center. 
In  his  earlier  experiments  only  the  negative  pole  was  thus 
inserted,  the  positive  pole  being  placed  on  the  chest,  but  in 
the  later  ones  he  found  it  beneficial  to  pass  in  both  poles  of 
the  battery.  In  small  tumors  one  inserted  needle  was  found 
sufficient.  As  a  rule,  passing  the  needle  causes  next  to  ng  pain 
or  difficulty,  but  at  times  small  sclerotic  foci  interfere  with  their 
transit.  Yery  rarely  did  any  painful  infiammation  attack  the 
spots  of  puncture.    The  constant  current  should  be  used  fre- 

*  Lancet,  November  22,  1882. 


ELE  CTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


409 


quentlj,  even  three  times  in  the  twenty-four  hours,  and  allowed 
to  flow  through  the  new  growth  for  an  hour  each  time.  A 
weak  current,  long  continued,  seemed  to  be  better  in  its  elFects 
than  a  stronger  current  acting  only  for  a  short  interval,  and 
it  is  stated  that  the  former  has  a  greater  modifying  effect  upon 
the  local  chemistry  of  nutrition.  In  one  case  the  treatment  was 
ended  in  twenty-four  sittings,  but  in  another  it  extended  over 
seven  months.  In  the  case  of  cystic  sarcoma,  after  two  appli- 
cations of  electricity,  inflammation  and  destructive  suppuration 
set  in.  In  none  of  the  cases  were  the  lymphatic  glands  aflected. 
Dr.  Semmola  suggests  that  electrolysis  cures  malignant  tumors 
in  one  of  three  ways  :  by  producing  small  foci  of  inflammation 
with  consecutive  sclerosis,  the  tumor  being  converted  into  a 
small,  indurated  and  harmless  lump  ;  by  producing  a  colloid  and 
fatty  degeneration,  especially  in  tumors  with  this  tendency ; 
and  by  exciting  destructive  inflammation  and  suppuration  of 
the  tumor.  Along  with  this  treatment  he  has  combined  the 
administration  of  large  doses  of  iodide  of  potash,  with  a  view 
of  gravely  modifying  the  general  nutrition. 

[N'eftel  has  returned  to  this  method  of  treating  malignant 
tumors,  destroying  them  at  a  single  operation.  A  platinum 
anode  is  plunged  perpendicularly  into  the  tumor  down  to  its 
presumed  point  of  implantation,  and  from  three  to  Ave  cathodes 
placed  on  the  periphery  of  the  tumor.  The  current  is  then 
closed  and  rapidly  carried  to  its  greatest  power  (thirty  to  sixty 
elements).  The  position  of  the  cathodes  is  changed  about 
every  five  minutes,  so  as  to  cover  every  part  of  the  tumor. 
The  operation  lasts  about  an  hour.  The  tumor  becomes  livid, 
grey,  and  finally  black.  There  is  a  very  slight  general  and 
local  reaction.  In  two  or  three  days  the  part  operated  upon 
becomes  cold,  and  after  some  discharge  finally  comes  away 
en  hJoc^  leaving  a  denuded  surface  which  is  soon  covered  by 
healthy  granulations.     Neftel  has  also  treated  benign  tumors 


410 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


by  this  method,  though  they  do  not  require  such  energetic 
treatment  as  those  of  the  malignant  type.  The  conclusions 
which  he  draws  are : 

1.  Electrolysis  is  an  antiseptic  method,  and  as  such  may 
be  combined  with  the  ordinary  methods  of  operation. 

2.  It  is  preferable  to  any  other  method  in  the  treatment 
of  malignant  tumors. 

3.  Malignant  tumors  should  be  entirely  destroyed  by  the 
operation,  and  at  a  single  seance.  In  benign  tumors  it  is  suffi- 
cient to  establish  a  retrograde  metamorphosis. 


Fig.  134. 

ELECTROLYSIS  OF  TUMORS.   METHOD  OF  INSERTING  NEEDLES. 

When  very  small  growths  are  to  be  destroyed,  it  is  not  neces- 
sary to  give  ansesthetics,  except  in  very  sensitive  cases,  and 
then  it  is  better  applied  locally.  To  prevent  scars,  insert  the 
needles  through  the  same  opening  at  each  sitting,  but  vary 
their  direction  so  as  to  reach  every  portion  of  the  contents. 
Five  to  ten  minutes  is  the  average  duration  of  the  operation 
for  benign  growths. 

To  render  the  skin  insensible  in  operations,  M.  Guerin 
reported,  at  the  Academie  des  Sciences^  that  a  circular 
layer  of  Vienna  paste,  limited  by  a  double  band  of  dia- 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


411 


chylon,  applied  around  the  tumor  for  twenty  minutes  and 
then  removed,  leaving  in  its  trace  a  black  ribbon-like  line,  so 
destroys  the  sensitiveness  of  the  skin  that  the  knife  can  be 
used  without  causing  the  slightest  pain.  He  had  employed 
this  plan  when  chloroform  was  forbidden,  on  account  of  bron- 
chial and  cardiac  trouble.  It  is  suggested  that  it  will  serve 
equally  as  well  when  malignant  growths  are  to  be  destroyed, 
to  lessen  the  pain  attendant  upon  introduction  of  the  needles. 

Joint  Diseases. —  Galvanism.  Chronic  inflammation  about 
the  joints  may  be  removed  by  the  judicious  use  of  galvanism."^ 
Many  electro-therapeutists  believe  it  contra-indicated  in  the 
acute  and  sub-acute  stage,  but  in  chronic  rheumatism,  and 
especially  the  form  which  follows  after  gonorrhea,  the  puer- 
peral state  or  after  injury,  good  results  are  obtained.  The 
positive  electrode,  holding  a  large  sponge  moistened  in  warm 
water,  is  placed  over  the  diseased  joint,  while  the  negative 
electrode,  also  carrying  a  large  sponge,  is  moved  around  it. 
The  skin  beneath  the  positive  electrode  will  be  reddened. 
When  the  inflammation  is  located  in  the  tissues  surrounding 
the  joint,  and  the  bone  is  not  aflected,  a  complete  cure  may 
be  expected,  or,  at  least,  a  rapid  improvement  and  restored 
movement.  Kemak  advises  the  same  treatment  for  inflamed 
joints  from  any  cause. 

Chronic  Periostitis. — Galvanism  exerts  a  favorable  influ- 
ence over  this  disease,  the  negative  being  applied  direct  to 
the  seat  of  the  disease,  f 

Scoliosis  (Distortion  of  the  ^^me).—Faradis7n.  A  case  of 
this  disease,  occurring  as  a  sequel  to  typhoid  fever,  was  suc- 
cessfully treated  by  M.  Despres:]:  after  the  plan  first  proposed 
by  Duchenne.    This  may  be  briefly  summed  up,  viz: 


*Dr.  Joffroy,  Medical  Record,  Nov.  15,  1883. 
tDr.  Gunther,  in  CerdrcUbiatt. 
t  Union  Medicale. 


412 


ELECTKO-THERAPEUTIOS. 


1.  Faradization  daily,  or  at  least  every  other  day. 

2.  Rational  gymnastics. 

3.  Physiological  support  of  the  trunk  by  a  special  corset. 
Electricity  was  localized  in  the  insufficient  muscles  and  also 
applied  generally  to  all  the  muscles  of  the  back.  The  gym- 
nastic exercises  consisted  in  the  elevation  of  the  body  on  a 
trapeze  by  the  strength  of  the  arms.  Lateral  motion  is  less 
useful,  as  the  patient  will  instinctively  lean  to  one  side.  He 
considers  a  dependence  upon  corsets  to  rectify  curvature  of 
the  spine,  due  to  debility  or  paralysis  of  muscles,  as  an  error, 
only  useful  at  best  to  hide  the  deformity. 

IS^^vi. — Electrolysis.  Insert  one  or  more  needles  (according 
to  the  size  of  the  nsevus),  insulated  except  on  their  tips,  attached 
to  one  pole,  and  place  the  other  pole  connected  with  a  moist 
sponge  near  by,  where  there  is  little  sensitiveness,  and  use  four 
to  six  freshly-charged  cells,  or  a  greater  number  if  not  freshly 
charged.  The  tumor  will  be  seen  to  whiten  at  once,  as  if 
frozen.  The  time  of  treatment  varies  from  two  or  three  to 
fifteen  minutes,  according  to  the  size  and  solidity  of  the  nsevus. 
Vascular  tumors  of  the  eyelid  frequently  seem  much  larger 
after  treatment,  from  the  bulging  caused  by  the  gas  formed 
during  the  operation,  but  this  quickly  passes  away,  and  it  will 
be  apparent  that  the  size  is  lessened.  Sometimes  needles  con- 
nected with  both  poles  are  inserted. 

*The  differential  indications  for  the  employment  of  elec- 
trolysis in  the  destruction  of  nsevi  have  been  briefly  summed 
up  as  follows : 

1.  Superficial,  dark-colored,  sluggish,  vascular  growths  which 
do  not  possess  special  or  abundant  blood  supply,  waste  away 
after  one  or  two  sittings,  and  are  permanently  removed. 

2.  Those  which  resemble  the  preceding  in  vascularity,  yet 
have  much  more  surface  covering,  and  the  blood  supply  of 

*  Dr.  William  Newman,  Britieh  Med.  Jour.,  1883. 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


413 


which  cannot  be  determined  by  mere  inspection.  A  majority 
of  these  can  be  cured  by  electrolysis. 

3.  Those  which  are  intensely  vascular,  which  are  growing 
rapidly  and  have  more  or  less  direct  connection  with  blood- 
vessels near  at  hand,  cannot  be  removed  by  electrolysis. 

4.  If  there  are  local  pulsations  or  increase  of  temperature, 
and  they  fill  rapidly  after  compression  and  have  a  bright  red 
color,  this  treatment  will  disappoint  the  operator. 

5.  Almost  equally  unsuited  for  electrolysis  are  those  which 
are  more  solid,  have  tortuous  bloodvessels,  and  in  which  there 
is  eWdently  a  large  amount  of  connective  tissue. 

To  sum  up,  the  vascularity  present  may  be  taken  as  a 
tolerable  guide  as  to  the  chances  of  success. 


Fig.  135. 

ELECTROLYSIS  OF  A  N^VUS. 

One  needle  connected  with  each  pole  of  the  battery,  insulated  except  at  the  tips,  are 
inserted  within  the  n?evus,  with  their  points  as  far  apart  as  possible. 

Aneurism. — Heidenreich  found  that  when  we  expose  fresh 
arterial  or  venous  blood  to  the  action  of  the  galvanic  current, 
the  coagulation  of  same  was  thereby  hastened  ;  the  albumen, 
fibrin,  fat,  acids,  chlorine,  etc.,  separate  at  the  positive  pole, 
while  the  watery  and  alcoholic  extracts,  the  alkaline  and  earthy 
bases,  iron  and  coloring  matter  appear  at  the  negative  pole. 
If  the  current  is  applied  within  the  bloodvessels  there  is  pro- 
duced a  ])lug  which  adheres  to  the  walls  of  the  vessel  and 


414 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


stops  the  circnlation.  The  clot  becomes  firm  in  ten  to  thirty 
minutes,  and  is  then  sufficient  to  close  the  vessel. 

Electrolysis. — The  use  of  electricity  to  produce  coagulation 
within  an  aneurism  was  first  employed  by  Prof.  Petrequin,  and 
has  been  tried  by  most  of  the  leading  surgeons  of  the  world. 
Some  unqualifiedly  condemn  the  operation,  but  in  the  case  of 
aneurism  in  the  thoracic  aorta  or  arch  of  the  aorta,  and  other 
locations  where  ligation  of  the  trunk  is  impossible,  and  death 
is  inevitable,  the  majority  of  surgeons  at  the  present  time  are 
in  favor  of  giving  the  patient  this  chance  of  prolonging  life. 
Althaus  believes  the  most  efifective  application  of  the  current 
is  when  both  poles  are  inserted  in  the  sac.  The  positive  pro- 
duces a  small,  firm  clot,  and  the  negative  a  large,  soft  one. 
Prof.  Wm.  Pepper  (Philadelphia)  proceeds  as  follows  :  After 
freezing  the  skin  with  ice  or  ether-spray,  plunge  one  needle, 
previously  connected  with  a  galvanic  battery,  boldly  in  with  a 
single  stroke  until  all  resistance  ceases  ;  the  second  needle  is  to 
be  introduced  in  the  same  way.  It  is  important  that  the  needles 
be  well  insulated  where  they  pass  through  the  skin.  The 
moment  the  circuit  is  complete  the  heart  will  give  a  great 
bound,  and  the  pulse  become  greatly  accelerated.  This  should 
not  cause  alarm.  Employ  but  a  few  cells  at  first,  and  gradually 
increase  the  strength  of  the  current.  Althaus  thinks  there  is 
no  cause  to  fear  that  any  portion  of  the  clot  may  become 
detached  and  block  up  a  cerebral  artery,  as  this  has  never 
occurred  in  any  case  reported.  The  first  application  should 
not  exceed  twenty  minutes,  but  at  subsequent  sittings  it  may  be 
prolonged  to  an  hour  in  case  the  needles  are  sufiiciently  insulated. 
A  rheostat  should  invariably  be  included  in  the  circuit  so  as  to 
turn  the  current  on  and  ofi"  without  producing  shock.  Hamil- 
ton'^ makes  these  valuable  suggestions  in  regard  to  the  operation : 
Place  the  patient  on  an  animal  diet,  to  increase,  if  possible,  the 

*  Clinical  Therapeutics. 


ELECTKO-THER  A  PEUTICS. 


415 


plastic  elements  of  the  blood.  For  several  days  previous  to 
the  first  operation  he  should  be  given  digitalis  or  aconite. 
During  the  operation  he  should  lie  on  a  perfectly  level  bed, 
the  surface  warm  and  the  mind  free  from  excitement.  He 
advises  ether  anaesthesia,  as  the  pain  is  intense.  The  needles 
are  introduced  as  above  described.  The  tumor  becomes  red 
and  greatly  distended.  After  removing  the  needle  the  finger 
should  be  placed  over  the  puncture  until  it  can  be  covered 
with  adhesive  plaster.  If  hemorrhage  occurs,  stanch  the  flow 
with  a  styptic.  The  jjositive  needle  is  glued  to  the  clot,  and 
requires  slow,  steady  traction  to  separate  it.  He  advises  to 
compress  the  distal  end  of  the  artery  which  the  aneurism 
involves  during  the  operation,  as  coagulation  is  increased,  and 
danger  of  a  portion  being  carried  into  the  circulation  is  lessened. 
He  collected  statistics  including  one  hundred  and  twenty-six 
cases,  of  which  forty-eight  were  believed  to  be  cured. 

Yaeicose  Yeins. —  Electrolysis  has  been  employed  to  pro- 
duce occlusion  of  the  vein.  The  positive  needle  only  is  inserted, 
because  the  clot  formed  about  it  is  more  firm  than  about  the 
negative,  and  when  small  vessels  are  to  be  closed,  this  will  be 
of  sufiicient  size. 

Purpura  Hemorrhagica. — Faradism.  ^  Mr.  Shand,  of 
Glasgow,  reports  a  case  of  purpura  hemorrhagica  in  which  the 
use  of  electricity  was  productive  of  most  pleasing  results. 
Mineral  and  vegetable  astringents,  ergot,  tonics,  were  tried,  but 
the  patient  continued  to  sink  rapidly.  On  the  fifth  day  of 
treatment  bleeding  was  taking  place  from  vagina  and  bowels  ; 
she  looked  bloodless,  collapsed,  and  apparently  dying.  She 
refused  all  medicines.  Electricity  was  thought  of  and  applied ; 
the  faradic  current  was  used,  running  the  sponges  over  the 
whole  surface  of  the  body.  This  was  repeated  every  two 
hours,  and  at  midnight  no  more  motions  had  taken  place,  but 

*  The  Lancet,  July  1879. 


416 


ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS. 


griping  had  set  in.  A  piece  of  soap  was  now  injected,  and 
soon  relieved  her  by  producing  two  evacuations  ;  the  first  con- 
sisted of  blood,  but  the  second  was  almost  natural.  The  next 
day  she  was  much  improved,  and  the  bleeding  had  almost 
entirely  ceased.  Tonics  and  astringents  were  again  prescribed, 
and  a  speedy  recovery  followed.  The  electricity  is  supposed 
to  act  by  exalting  the  tone  of  the  nervous  system,  by  facili- 
tating coagulation,  by  toning  the  exhausted  capillaries,  and  by 
■encouraging  the  capillary  circulation  through  acting  as  a  general 
stimulant. 

THE  DANGERS  OF  ELECTRICITY. 

Electricity  judiciously  applied  with  due  regard  to  its  direct 
effect  upon  the  tissues,  and  its  influence  on  distant  organs 
through  the  reflex  action  of  the  nerves,  can  be  employed  with 
perfect  freedom  from  immediate  or  remote  ill  effect.  The 
dangers  to  be  specially  guarded  against  are,  with  the  faradic 
and  franklinic  currents,  violent  shocks,  the  tiring  out  of  mus- 
cles, or  exhaustion  of  nerves  in  consequence  of  a  protracted 
sitting;  with  the  galvanic^  a  protracted  application  of  a  power- 
ful current  may  set  up  destructive  electrolysis.  This  fact  should 
be  kept  in  mind  when  treating  vital  organs.  Blindness  has 
occasionally  been  caused  by  shocks  as  well  as  paralysis,  spasms, 
fainting,  etc.  Hemorrhages  have  also  occurred  after  a  lengthy 
^sitting.  Dr.  Newman*  reports  a  case,  that  of  a  young  man 
suffering  from  nervous  exhaustion,  in  consequence  of  bad  habits, 
who  was  treated  for  a  time  with  a  galvanic  current  from  eight 
to  fourteen  cells.  He  improved  slowly  a  few  weeks,  then  for 
the  sake  of  economy  procured  a  battery,  so  that  he  could  make 
the  applications  himself  A  few  weeks  later  he  suddenly 
became  a  violent  lunatic.  It  was  found  that,  instead  of  doing 
as  advised,  he  applied  the  battery  several  times  every  day, 


*  The  Planet,  Nov.  1883. 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


417 


prolonging  each  seance  to  a  considerable  length  of  time. 
Under  proper  treatment,  and  galvanism  given  at  regular  inter- 
vals, he  improved  steadily,  and  recovered  fully  in  a  few 
months. 

It  is  not  uncommon  for  patients  to  injure  themselves  with 
a  faradic  battery,  for  the  popular  idea  seems  to  be  that  "if  a 
little  electricity  is  good,  more  must  be  better."  The  practi- 
tioner who  places  any  apparatus  for  supplying  an  electric  cur- 
rent in  the  hands  of  patients  for  self-treatment  will  do  well  to 
warn  them  of  the  consequences  of  disregarding  advice.  The 
success  of  electro-therapeutics  depends  mainly  upon  the  at- 
tention given  to  details  of  treatment.  Skill  in  its  use  can 
be  acquired  by  any  practitioner  of  ordinary  intelligence. 
Slowly  but  surely  it  is  gaining  recognition  as  an  important 
and  even  indispensable  ai,d,  both  to  the  physician  and  surgeon,, 
and  the  time  has  already  arrived  when  an  acquaintance  with 
the  principles  of  medical  electricity  is  essential  to  those  who 
endeavor  to  keep  abreast  with  the  advances  that  are  con- 
stantly being  made  in  every  department  of  medical  science. 


INDEX. 


PAGE 


Abdomen,  pendulous  337 

Abnormal  electrical  responses  271 

Accidental  insulation  of  house.   53 

Accumulator   57 

Acidity  of  stomach  330 

Acne  indurata  378 

rosacea  378 

Action  of  arrest  250 

local   93 

Active  electricity   35 

Acupuncture,  electric  187 

Addison's  disease  343 

Adjustable  cord  tips  124 

ear  electrode  300 

universal  electrode  278 

Advantages  of  electrolysis  159 

galvanic  belt  133 

galvano-cautery  161 

Ague  393 

cake  331 

Alcoholism  279 

Alopecia  381 

Amalgamation   93 

Amaurosis  73,  287 

Amblyopia  288 

caused  by  tobacco  289 

Amenorrhea  358 

Ampere  106 

Amputations   163 

Anaemia  of  brain  279 

throat  309 

Anaesthesia  of  skin  377 

Anasarca  335 

Auelectrotonus  137 

Aneurism  413 

An^na  pectoris  316 

Animal  electricity   70 

magnetism   44 

tissues,  electrolysis  of  152 

Ani  prolapsus  339 

pruritus  339 

sphincter,  paralysis  of  340 

Ano,  fistula  in  341 

Anosmia  302 

Anteversion  and  anteflexion  of  uterus..  366 

Aphasia  312 

Aphonia  311 

Apparatus,  office  and  bath  224,  228 

Armatures   43 

Arrangement  of  cells,  potential   99 

quantity   98 

elements  in  fluid  126 

Arrest  of  heart's  action  315 

respiration  315 

Arthritis  nodosa  401 

Articular  rheumatism  400 

Artificial  magnets   37 

respiration  319 

Ascending  current  140 


PAGE 

Ascites  335 

Asphyxia  319 

Asthma  316 

Ataxia  locomotor  391 

Atony  of  optic  nerve  289 

Atrophy,  progressive  muscular  390 

of  uterus  357 

Attraction  across  bodies,  magnetic   42 

and  repulsion,  magnetic   38 

static   48 

Auditory  nerve  296 

Aural  catarrh,  deafness  from  300 

polypi  169 

Automatic  rheotome  129 

Aphorisms  for  applying  electricity  215 

Baldness  381 

Basedow's  disease  406 

Baths,  cabinet  230 

electric,  objections  to  222 

electro-negative  and  positive   80 

electro-thermal  220 

electro-thermal,  hot  air  229 

electro-thermal,  vapor  229 

electro-thermal,  water  220 

method  of  giving  them  223 

for  conveying  substances  out  of  or 

into  the  body  389 

Bathtub  226 

Battery  base  179 

cell  107 

combined  193 

compound   89 

connections  179 

faradic  No.  1  179 

faradic  No.  3  181 

faradic,  part  of  combined  193 

fluid  108 

galvanic  127 

galvanic  section  125 

galvanic  simple   88 

magnetic   43 

number  of  currents  178 

office   204 

office  and  bath.....  225 

selection  of   209 

to  discover  cause  of  failure  to  work  213 

Bedsores  380 

Belt,  Mcintosh  galvanic  131 

cells.   131 

electrodes  132 

supporter,  attachment  to  135 

Benign  tumors  315,  406 

Bichromate  of  potash  cell  107 

fluid  108 

Bifurcated  conducting  cords  123 

Binding  posts.  121 

Bioscopy,  electro  258 

Bladder  342 

calculi  in  345 


420 


INDEX. 


Bladder,  catarrh  of  344 

chronic  inflammation  of  345 

paralysis  of  346 

sphincter  of  343 

Blepharospasm  203 

Blindness  280,  289 

Blisters  380 

Blood,  action  of  electricity  on  413 

Boils  304,  379 

Brain    275 

anaemia  and  hypersemia  279 

depositions  in  284 

mode  of  applying  electricity  to  276 

neuralgia  284 

Branch  currents  148 

Bright' s  disease  343 

Broken  circuit   90 

Cabinet  bath  230 

battery  204 

Calculi  345 

Cancer  374 

of  tongue  168 

Capacity  of  condenser   60 

Carbon  electrode  281 

elements   95 

Carbuncles  379 

Cardiac  pain  321 

Cardialgia  327 

Care  of  electric  machine   69 

Cases  to   which   galvano-cautery  is 

adapted  162 

Cataract..:  291 

Catarrhal  jaundice  332 

Catarrh  of  bladder  344 

colon  332 

nasal  passages  302 

stomach  330 

Oatelectrotonos  137 

Cauterization,  electric  187 

Cell,  belt  131 

bichromate  of  potash  107 

Daniells  110 

galvanic   88 

gravity  110 

single  and  two-fluid  compared  115 

Smee  106 

tray  114 

two-fluid  109 

Cells  connected  in  multiple  arc   98 

for  potential   99 

Central  galvanization  140 

Cephalalgia  280 

Cerebral  congestion  279 

exhaustion  279 

paralysis  387 

Cervical  ganglia  253 

Cervix  uteri,  hypertrophy  of.  373 

Chair,  electric  233 

Charge,  electric   55 

residual   58 

Charging  a  magnet   43 

Chest,  diseases  of  316 

Children,  new-born,  to  resuscitate  319 

Cholera  infantum  334 

Chorea  402 

Chronic  alcoholism  280 

periostitis  411 

pleuritic  effusion  321 

suppuration  of  ear  297 

Circles,  simple  and  compound  galvanic  88 

Circuit   89 

broken   90 

closed   89 

open   90 

short   89 

Cirrhosis  of  liver  331 

Clergyman's  sore  throat  313 

Closure  of  nasal  duct  304 


Coil,  faradic  176 

primary  177 

secondary  177 

to  connect  with  galvanic  cells   200 

Colic  333 

Collecting  plate   88 

Colon,  catarrhal  condition  of  332 

Combined  batteries  193 

faradic  part  198 

eighteen-cell  195 

twelve-cell   194 

twentyfour-cell  196 

twentyfour-cell  box  197 

switch-board    208 

Comparison  of  different  forms  of  elec- 
tricity  235 

faradic  currents  185 

faradism  and  galvanism  237 

induction  and  conduction   54 

single  and  two-fluid  cell  115 

Comparative  irritability  of  nerves  and 

muscles  267 

strength  of  current..  120 

Compass  needle,  deflection  of  121 

polarity  of   40 

Compound  battery   89 

magnet   42 

Condenser   60 

Conducting  cords  122 

plate   88 

Conduction  59,  54 

Conductor  52,  78 

needle  154 

Congestion  of  brain  282 

liver  330 

Connections,  battery  179 

Connector  125 

dental  308 

Constipation  332 

Consumption  318 

Contact  series   95 

Convection   59 

Cord  tips  124 

Cords,  bifurcated  123 

conducting  122 

Core  178 

Coryza  302 

Cough,  nervous  312 

whooping  313 

Coulomb  106 

Cramp  386 

Cricks  in  the  neck  402 

Cross  eyes  293 

Current,  ascending  140 

decreasing  140 

descending  140 

direct  171 

direction  of  faradic  172 

direction  of  franklinic   85 

direction  of  galvanic   90 

extra  172 

galvanic,  to  detect  presence  of.  116 

increasing  140 

Induced  172 

interrupter  174 

interrupted  170 

interrupted,  galvanic   86 

labile  140 

number  of  178 

polarity  of   90 

primary  172,  177 

primary  and  secondary  compared  . .  185 

secondary  172 

stabile  140 

static   55 

strength  of,  in  relation  to  number 

of  cells  106 

strength  of,  for  treatment  142 


mDEX. 


421 


Current,  tertiary  174 

to  determine  direction  of  by  elec- 
trolysis 150 

Curvature  of  spine  411 

Cystic  tumor  290 

Cystitis  chronic  345 

Dangers  of  electricity  416 

Daniells  cell  110 

Deafness   75 

from  aural  catarrh  300 

muscular  paralysis  298 

nervous  298 

Death,  to  distinguish  between  real  and 

apparent   258 

Decreasing  current  140 

Deflection  of  compass  needle  121 

Degeneration,  reaction  of.  273 

Density   57 

Dental  connector  308 

electrode  306 

Derived  currents  178 

Descending  current  140 

Details  of  electrical  treatment  141 

Diabetes  344 

Diagnosis-electro  258 

Diagram  of  ofl&ce  battery  205 

Diaphragm,  paralysis  of  321 

Diarrhcea  334 

Dielectric  -  54 

Difference  of  potential   56 

Digestive  organs  322 

Dilatation  of  the  Eustachian  canal  279 

stomach  330 

Dilator  nerves  249 

Diphtheria  314 

Diplopia  292 

Dipsomania  279 

Direct  current  -  171 

electrization  261 

Direction  of  current,  faradic  172 

franklinic   85 

galvanic  90,  119 

to  determine  by  electrolysis  149 

Disadvantages  of  electrolysis  158 

galvano-cautery  163 

Discs,  metallic  264 

Discharge   52 

mode  of   59 

Discharger   58 

Disease,  Addison's  343 

Basedow's  406 

Bright's  343 

Graves'  (see  Basedow's)-  .  406 

Diseases  of  brain  276 

chest  315 

digestive  organs  322 

ear   296 

eyes  287 

joints  411 

sexual  organs.  347,  355 

urinary  organs.  343 

Displacements  of  uterus  365 

Distortion  of  spine  411 

Distribution  of  electricity   55 

Dividing  a  magnet,  effect  of   41 

Dome,  galvano-cautery   166 

Dose  of  electricity  276 

Double  vision  292 

Dropsy  335 

Drowned,  to  resuscitate  319 

Duchenne's  points  263 

Dynamic  electricity   36 

axioms  for  215 

Dysmenorrhea  361 

Dyspepsia   329 

Dysphagia  284,  310 

Dysphonia  313 

Ear  chronic  suppuration  of  297 


Ear,  diseases  of  296 

electrodes  298 

inflammation  of  drum  297 

mode  of  applying  electricity  to  296 

noises  in  300 

Effect  of  dividing  a  magnet   40 

electricity  on  absorption   71 

bladder  342 

brain  275 

face  236 

gall  bladder  323 

intestines  323 

involuntary  muscles  324 

kidneys  342 

liver  323 

muscles  136,  236 

at  negative  pole  153,  340 

on  nerves  236 

nutrition  80,  838 

oesophagus  322 

at  positive  pole  154,  340 

on  salivary  glands  322 

secretion  71,  136 

skin  235,  375 

spleen  323 

stomach   322 

unstriped  muscles  324,  367 

ureters  342 

electrolysis  upon  animal  tissues  152 

electrolysis  upon  needles  155 

frictional  electricity   48 

galvanic  current  137 

Electrical  reactions  in  health   264 

Electric  acupuncture  187 

aura  (see  electric  wind)   81 

baths  80,  220 

mode  of  giving  them   223 

cauterization  187 

chair  233 

endosmosis   147 

exploring  needle   274 

friction   81 

fustigation  187 

hand    282 

level   55 

machine   60 

to  discharge   78 

massage   82 

measurement  103 

metallic  points  1  267 

moxa  187 

nail  186 

probe  273 

shocks   82 

wind   81 

Electricity,  active   35 

animal   70 

axioms  for  its  application  215 

bound   35 

dangers  of  416 

different  forms  compared  235 

distribution  of   55 

forms  of   36 

franklinic  forms  of   75 

induced   75 

loss  of   77 

passive   35 

polarity  of   85 

positive  and  negative   49 

resinous   50 

unbound   35 

vitreous   49 

Electrified  body,  phenomena  of   50 

to  test   51 

Electrifying  a  patient,  method  of   76 

Electrization,  direct  and  indirect  262 

polar  262 

Electro-bioscopy.  258 


422  INDEX. 


Electro-Chemical  baths  389 

Electro-diagnosis  258 

Electro-diagnosis,  instruments  for  262 

Electro-dynamical  induction  171 

Electro-magnet  170 

Electro-motive  force  55,  96 

Electro-negative  bath   80 

Electro-physiology  235 

Electro-positive  bath   80 

Electro-therapeutics  235,  275 

Electro-thermal  bath  220 

objections  to  222 

Electrodes  216 

adjustable  sponge  278 

aural  298 

ball  for  sponge  279 

rectal  339 

belt  132 

carbon  281 

catheter  361 

comb  266 

cover  for  265 

cup-shaped  uterine  371 

dental  306 

connector  308 

disc  insulated  in  points  406 

double-ear  300 

intra-uterine  373 

Duchenne's  points  263 

ear,  rheostat  298 

rheostat  in  situ  299 

eye,  sponge-covered  286 

cup   287 

magnet  294 

flexible  uterine  or  urethral  357 

foot-plate  262 

franklinic   78 

hairbrush  381 

hand  280 

intra-uterine  372 

laryngeal,  external  312 

internal  310 

sponge-tipped  309 

metallic  brush  311 

discs  264 

points  267 

nasal  303 

necklet  269 

olives  358 

rectal  338 

new  style  341 

roller  392 

scourge  375 

small  aural  and  nasal    300 

eye  289 

sound  362 

spinal  268 

stricture,  new  style  360 

tongue  plate  305 

tonsil  314 

to  purify  218 

universal  handle  261 

urethral  356 

flexible  357 

uterine  356 

vaginal,  uninsulated  368 

insulated  in  lateral  halves  369 

insulated  in  vertical  halves  370 

vesical  359 

wire  brush  311 

Electrode  case  79,  393 

covers  217,  265 

Electrolysis,  advantages  of  159 

batteries  for  156 

disadvantages  of  158 

effect  of  on  needles  155 

effect  of  at  negative  153 

effect  of  at  positive  154 


Electrolysis,  effect  on  tissues  152 

laws  of  V  146 

needles  for  151 

needle-case  156 

to  determine  direction  of  current  by  .  149 

value  of  159 

Electrolytes  150  • 

Electroscope   50 

Electrotonos  137 

Elements   89 

arrangement  of  in  fluid  126 

materials  of.   95 

polarity  of   91 

to  replace  203 

Elephantiasis  Arabum  379 

Engorgements  of  uterus  373 

Enlarged  glands  405 

Enter  algia  328 

Epilepsy  391 

Epithelial  cancer  168 

Epithelioma  374 

Essential  resistance  100 

Eustachian  canal  299 

Exact  value  of  Electrolysis  159 

Excessive  use  of  intoxicants  279 

smoking.  280 

Exhaustion,  nervous  579,  282 

Exophthalmic  Goitre  406 

External  resistance  100 

Extra  current  172 

Extraction  of  teeth  306 

Extra-uterine  pregnancy.   370 

Eyes  285 

to  remove  particles  of  metal  from. . .  294 

Eyelashes,  inverted  293 

Eyelids,  cystic  tumor  of.  290 

granular  290 

nsevus  290 

paralysis  of.  292 

spasm  of  293 

Eye-magnet,  mode  of  using  295 

Facial  paralysis  239,  388 

Farad  106 

Faradic  battery  No.  1  179 

No.  3  181 

coil  176 

currents  171 

and  galvanic  currents  compared  237 

part  of  combined  battery  198 

Faradism  170 

compared  with  galvanism  and  frank-  235 

linism  235 

method  of  employing  it  184 

Faradization,  general  188 

local    186 

Fauces,  tumors  in  315 

Feigned  disease  260 

Fibroids  374 

Field  magnetic   39 

Fistula  in  ano  341 

Flatulence  333 

Fluid  for  batteries  108 

Folding  foot-plate  262 

Follicular  pharyngitis  313 

Force,  electro-motive,  dynamic   96 

static   55 

Foreign  growths  in  rectum  341 

Form  of  magnets   42 

Forms  of  electricity   36 

Formula  for  battery  fluid  108 

insulating  needles  152,  340 

Fracture  of  jars   58 

Franklinism   48 

electrodes  for   79 

mode  of  applying   83 

Franklinic  electricity,  forms  of.   75 

induced  current   85 

Friction,  electric   81 


INDEX. 


423 


Frictional  electricity   48 

Fungoid  growths  304 

uterine  374 

Fustigation,  electric  187 

Furuncles  304,  397 

Galen   45 

Galactagogue  404 

Gall-bladder  323 

Galvani   86 

Galvanic  bases  203 

battery  127 

eighteen-cell  158 

twelve-cell  157 

twentv  four-cell  127 

belt  *  131 

cell  or  battery   88 

two-fluid  109 

current,  continuous.   86 

current,  interrupted   86 

current,  to  detect  116 

section  125 

stimulation,  law  of  139 

supporter  135 

suspensory  134,  354 

Galvanism   86 

compared  with  faradism  237 

and  franklinism  235 

method  of  applying  140 

Galvanization,  central  140 

general  140 

localized  141 

Galvano-cautery  161 

battery  164 

cases  to  which  it  is  adapted  162 

disadvantages  of   163 

instruments  166 

Galvanometer...  118 

Galvanoscope  118 

Galvano-puncture  146 

Ganglia  cervical  253 

Gangrene  163 

Gastralgia  328 

Gastric  atony,  vomiting  from  327 

Gastrodynia  327 

General  debility  239 

faradization  188 

to  prepare  patient  for  192 

principles  of  electro-diagnosis  270 

Generating  plate.   88 

Geni to-urinary  organs  342 

Glands,  effect  on  electricity  upon  136 

enlarged  405 

salivary  . .   322 

Glandular  tumors  406 

Gleet  348 

Glottis,  spasm  of  313 

Goitre  406 

exophthalmic  406 

Gout,  rheumatic  401 

Granular  lids  169,  290 

Grave's  disease  406 

Gravity  cells  110 

reaction  in  113 

to  connect  112 

to  keep  in  order  113 

to  prepare  for  use  Ill 

to  recharge  114 

Grenet  cell   107 

Gunshot  wounds  258 

Hallucinations  of  sight  290 

Hand  electrode  280 

Hay  fever  313 

Headache  289 

Health,  electrical  reactions  in  264 

Heart  315 

nervous  pain  of  321 

to  arrest  action  of  315 

to  stimulate  315 


Helix  176 

Hemi-chorea  404 

Hemicrania  280 

Hemiplegia  370 

Hemorrhoids  338 

Heptalgia  328 

Hernia  335 

Herpes  zoster   378 

Hirsuties  382 

History  of  galvano-cautery  167 

Hot-air  baths  229,  222 

Hydatids  of  liver  331 

Hydrocele  354 

Hydrometer  113 

Hydro-rheostat  183 

Hydrostat  125 

Hypersemia  of  brain  279 

Hypertrophy  of  cervix  uteri  373 

prostate  347 

uterus  364 

Hysteria  404 

Hysterical  deafness.   73 

disorders   73 

hyperaesthesia  239 

Impotence  350 

Improved  Topler  machine   61 

Incipient  insanity  282 

Incontinence  of  urine   347 

Increasing  current  140 

Indirect  electrization  261 

Induced  currents.  171 

franklinic  current.   75 

Induction  and  conduction  compared. . .  54 

franklinic   54 

magnetic  41,  173 

self  173 

Infantum  cholera  334 

Inflammation  of  ear  drum  297 

throat  310 

Insanity  282 

Insomnia  284 

Insulation   53 

of  dwelling  house   53 

needles  152,  340 

Insulators   52 

Instruments  for  electro-diagnosis  262 

galvano-cautery  166 

insulation  of  340 

Intercostal  neuralgia  397 

Intermittents  393 

Interrupted  galvanic  current   86 

Intestinal  obstruction  334 

Intestines  323 

Inverted  eye-lashes  293 

Involuntary  muscles,  effect  of  electri- 
city on  324,  367 

Ions,  polarity  of  150 

Irritability  of  nerve  and  muscle  267 

Irritable  urethra  348 

uterus  363 

Jar,  fracture  of   58 

Leyden   57 

ofKleist   57 

Jaundice,  catarrhal  332 

Joints,  diseases  of.  411 

Keepers   43 

Kidneys  342 

Knife,  galvano-cautery  166 

Labile  current  140 

Labor  366 

Lachrymal  ducts  169 

Lacteal  secretion,  to  increase   ..  404 

Lianguage  electrical,  obscurity  of   35 

Laryngeal  tumors  168 

Laryngismus  313 

Larynx  308 

diseases  ,of  309 


4:24 


INDEX. 


Law  of  attraction  and  repulsion,  mag- 
netic   39 

static   49 

electrolysis  146 

galvanic  stimulation  139 

Lead  palsy  388 

Leucorrhea  263 

Ley  den  jar   57 

Lifting  power  of  a  magnet   44 

Lines  of  magnetic  force   39 

Liver  -  323 

cirrhosis  of  331 

congestion  of  330 

hydatids  of  331 

Local  action   93 

Localized  faradization  186 

galvanization  141,  145 

Location  of  neutral  point  138 

Locomotor  ataxia  391 

Loop,  galvano-cautery  166 

Loss  of  appetite  330 

sight  287 

smell  302 

speech  312 

taste  305 

voice  284,  311 

Lumbago  400 

Lungs  -  315 

diseases  of.  316 

Machine,  electric   60 

care  of   69 

Magnet,  artificial   37 

compound   42 

effect  of  dividing   40 

eye  294 

form  of   42 

lifting  power  of   44 

natural   ---  37 

permanent   37 

simple  -    42 

temporary   37 

therapeutical  properties  of   45 

to  charge   43 

to  preserve  - . .  43 

Magnetic  attraction  and  repulsion   '66 

battery   43 

field  -   39 

force,  lines  of   39 

induction  173,  41 

across  bodies  173 

polarity   37 

sense   36 

Magnetism   35 

animal   44 

austral   40 

boreal   40 

terrestrial   36 

Magnetization   39 

Malignant  tumors  408 

Malingering  260 

Management  of  combined  batteries  —  200 

Massage,  electric   82 

Materials  of  elements   95 

Measurements,  units  of  105 

Melancholia  283 

Menorrhagia  360 

Mental  gymnastics  134 

Mesmerism   45 

Metallic  discs  264 

Metallo-therapy   46 

Metritis  364 

Micturition,  frequent  345 

Migraine  280 

Milk,  deficient  secretion  of  404 

Milli -ampere   106 

Miscellaneous  diseases  393 

Mode  of  applying  an  induced  static  cur- 
rent   83 


Mode  of  applying  electricity  to  the  brain  27& 

electricity  to  the  car   296 

eye  magnet  295 

discharge   59 

electrifying  a  patient   76 

faradic  electricity  184 

galvanism  140 

Morbid  depositions  in  brain  284 

Motor  nerves  248 

points  240,  244 

Mouth,  diseases  of  304 

tumors  of  307 

Movements  of  body,  how  produced  243 

Moxa,  electric  187 

Multiple  arc,  arrangement  of  cells  in...  98 

Muscles,  motor  point  of  240 

Muscular  atrophy  390 

rheumatism  400 

Mutual  potential   56 

Myalgia,  see  Cramp  389 

Naevi  412 

of  eyelid  290 

Nasal  catarrh  302 

duct,  closure  of.  304 

Naso-pharyngeal  polypi  303 

Nausea  330 

Natural  magnet  37,  44 

Neck,  cricks  in  402 

Necklet  269 

Needles,  electrolytic  151 

case  156 

conductor  154 

insulation  of  152 

introduction  of,  to  lessen  pain  154 

Nerve  plexuses  254 

splanchnic  255 

sympathetic  252 

Nerves,  dilator  249 

electrization  of  242 

motor  and  sensory  248 

reflex  action  of  248 

vaso-motor  249 

Nervous  cough  312 

deafness  298 

exhaustion   279^ 

system,  relation  of  electricity  to  248 

Neuralgia  395 

brachial  397 

of  brain  284,  396 

intercostal  397 

of  stomach,  liver,  etc  328 

supra -orbital  396 

tic  douloureux   397 

testes  353 

Neurasthenia  279 

Neutral  point  of  magnets   39 

Non-conductors   52 

Nose,  diseases  of  301 

Number  of  currents  a  battery  should 

furnish  178 

Objections  to  the  electric  bath  222 

Obscurity  of  electrical  language   35 

Obstruction  intestinal  334 

Ocular  muscles,  paralysis  of  291 

Odontalgia   305 

CEdema   335 

(Esophagus  322 

stricture  314 

Office  battery   204 

diagram  of  205 

and  bath  apparatus  224 

Ohm....  106 

Ohm's  law  104 

Opacities  of  vitreous  humor  291 

Open  circuit   90 

Operations  performed  with  galvano-cau- 
tery   168 

Opium  habit  280 


INDEX. 


425 


Opium  poisoning,  see  Asphyxia.  319 

Optic  nerve,  atony  of.  289 

Ovarian  irritation  -.  365 

Palati  tensor  312 

Palsy,  shaking  389 

Paracelsus   45 

Paralysis  384,  74 

electro-diagnosis  in   261 

of  brain  387 

bladder  346 

diaphragm  321 

facial  muscles  388 

ocular  muscles  291 

lead  388 

of  peripheral  origin  271 

prognosis  273 

sphincter  ani  340 

throat  310 

tongue  304 

Paraplegia  270 

Passive  electricity   35 

Patient,  to  prepare  for  electro-diagnosis.  263 

Pectoris,  angina  316 

Pendulous  abdomen  337 

Percutaneous  faradization   187 

galvanization  140 

Periostitis,  chronic  411 

Permanent  magnet   37 

Pessary,  galvanic  135 

Pharynx  and  larynx  308 

Physconia  337 

Physicians'  faradic  battery  No.  1  -  .  179 

No.  3   181 

Physiological  effect  of  galvanic  current.  135 

'  franklinism   71 

Piles  338 

Pile,  voltaic   87 

Plate,  conducting   88 

generating   88 

Platform   77 

Platinum  instruments  for  galvano-cau- 

tery  166 

Pleuritic  effusion  321 

Plexuses,  nerve  254 

Pneumogastric,  electrization  of  257 

Point  of  indifference  138 

neutral,  of  magnets   39 

platinum  for  galvano-cautery  ...  166 

Polar  electrization  261 

Polarity  of  compass  needle   40 

current   90 

elements   91 

ions  150 

magnet   37 

Polarization   91 

Pole-changer  130 

Poles  of  the  earth,  magnetic   38 

Polypi,  aural  169 

nasal  303 

Positive  and  negative  electricity   49 

Potential  arrangement  of  cells   99 

difference  of   56 

dynamic   94 

mutual   56 

static   55 

Pregnancy,  extra-uterine  370 

Presence  of  magnetism,  how  shown   37 

Primary  current  171,  177 

wire  171 

Probe,  electric  274 

Prognosis  in  peripheral  paralysis  273 

Progressive  muscular  atrophy  390 

Prolapsus  ani  339 

uteri  366 

Prostate,  hypertrophy  of  347 

Pruritus  ani  339 

Psoriasis  379 

Ptosis  292 


Purpura  hemorragica   415 

Pyrosis  330 

Quantity,  arrangement  of  cells   98 

dynamic   98 

static   56 

Reaction  of  degeneration  238,  273 

gravity  cells.   113 

Rectum,  diseases  of  338 

foreign  growth  in   341 

malignant  affections  of  341 

stricture  of  340 

tumors  in  341 

Reduction  of  hernia  335 

Reflex  action  248 

Relation  of  cells  to  current  106 

electricity  to  nervous  system  248 

Removal  of  hair.  382 

tongue  307 

Residual  charge   58 

Resinous  electricity   50 

Resistance,  dynamic  100 

essential  100 

external   100 

internal  100 

static   55 

Respiration,  to  stimulate  315 

Resuscitation  of  new-born  children  319 

Retina  285 

Return  shock   54 

Rheostat-Hydro  183 

Rheotome  174 

automatic  129 

Rheotrope.   (See  pole-changer.)  130 

Rheumatic  gout  401 

Rheumatism   73 

articular  400 

muscular  400 

Ringworm  379 

Rosacea,  acne   378 

Salivary  glands  322 

Sarcoma   408 

Scaly  tetter  379 

Sciatica   399 

Scirrhus  374 

Scoliosis  411 

Seborrhea  of  the  scalp  382 

Secondary  currents  171 

Selection  of  galvanic  battery  125 

battery  209 

Self-induction  173 

Sensory  nerves  248 

Series  contact   95 

Shaking  palsy  389 

Shape  of  magnets   42 

Shield   178 

Shingles  378 

Shocks,  electric   82 

Short  circuit   90 

Sight,  hallucinations  of  290 

loss  of  287 

Simple  magnets   42 

Single  and  two  fluid  cells  compared  115 

Skin  375 

diseases  of.   376 

Sleeping  with  head  to  the  north   46 

Sleeplessness  284 

Smee  cell  106 

Smell,  loss  of  302 

Smoking,  excessive  280 

Spark,  electric   59 

Spasmodic  affections  280 

Spasm  of  eyelid  293 

glottis  313 

Special  centers  of  motion  and  sensa- 
tion  251 

Spermatorrhea  353 

Sphincter,  paralysis  of  340 

of  bladder  343 


426 


INDEX. 


Spinal  electrode  268 

Spine,  distortion  of  411 

Splanchnic  nerves  255 

Spleen  323,  331 

Sponge-electrodes,  to  cleanse  218 

Sprains   73 

Stabile  current  140 

Stammering  312 

Statical  attraction  and  repulsion   48 

electricity  36,  48 

Stomach  322 

acidity  of.  -  "330 

catarrh  and  dilatation  of  330 

new  method  of  electrizing  325 

Stone  in  bladder    345 

Stimulation,  law  of  galvanic  139 

Strabismus  -  293 

Strength  of  current    106 

to  use  in  treatment  142 

Stricture  of  oesophagus   314 

rectum  340 

urethra  348 

St.  Vitus' dance  402 

Sub-involution  of  uterus  370 

Supporter,  galvanic   135 

Suppuration  of  ear  297 

Suspended  animation   319 

Suspensory,  galvanic  354 

Switch-board,  combined  208 

Sympathetic  nerve  252 

Table  of  electrolytes  and  ions  150 

Taste,  loss  of  305 

Teeth,  extraction  of  306 

Temporary  magnets.   37 

Tension   55 

Tensor  palati  muscle  312 

Terrestrial  magnetism   36 

Tertiary  currents  174 

Testes,  neuralgia  of  353 

Therapeutical  effect  of  currents  com- 
pared 238 

properties  of  magnet   45 

Throat,  anaemia  of  309 

hypersesthesia  of.  312 

inflammation  of.  310 

irritation  of  310 

paralysis  of  310 

tumors  in   315 

Tic  douloureux  397 

Tinnitus  aurium  300 

Tips  of  conducting  cords  124 

Tissues,  effect  of  electrolysis  on  152 

To  charge  a  magnet   43 

To  detect  a  galvanic  current  116 

direction  of  a  galvanic  current  119 

metal  in  wounds  274 

To  discover  cause  of  failure  of  battery 

to  work  213 

To  connect  gravity  cells  together  112 

with  apparatus  206 

galvanic  cells  with  coil  200 

To  insulate  needles  152 

To  keep  gravity  cells  in  order  113 

To  lessen  pain  of  introducing  needles  . .  154 

Tongue,  cancer  of.  168 

paralysis  of  304 

to  remove  168,  307 

Tonsilitis  ....814 

Toothache  74,  305 

Topler  machine  i   61 

To  prepare  gravity  cells  for  use  Ill 

a  patient  for  faradization  192 

for  galvanization  141 


To  preserve  a  magnet   43 

To  purify  sponge  electrodes  218 

To  recharge  gravity  cells  114 

To  remove  fragments  of  metal  from  the 

eye  294 

To  replace  elements   203 

To  resuscitate  the  drowned  73,  319 

To  test  an  electrified  object   51 

Torticollis  402 

Tray  cell  ..114 

Treatment,  details  of  141 

Tremens,  delirium  230 

Tremors  389 

Trichiasis  293 

True  polarity  of  compass  needle   40 

Tub  bath  225 

Tumors,  cystic  290 

glandular  406 

malignant  408 

Two-fluid  cells  109 

Twelve-cell  combined  battery  194 

galvanic  battery  157 

Twenty  four-cell  combined  battery  196 

galvanic  battery  l27 

bases  201 

box  and  cells  197 

Tympanites  333 

Ulcers  379 

electrode  for  380 

Units  of  measurement  105 

Urethra,  irritable  348 

stricture  of  348 

Ureters  342 

Urinary  organs  342 

Urine,  incontinence  of  317 

Uterus  and  appendages  355 

atrophy  of.  357 

displacements  of  365 

engorgement  of  364 

fungoid  growths  in  374 

hypertrophy  364 

inflammation  of  364 

irritable  363 

prolapsus  366 

Vaginal  electrodes  368 

Vaginismus  362 

Value  of  electrolysis  159 

Vapor  electric  bath  229 

Varicose  veins  415 

Vascular  tumors  163 

Vaso-motor  nerves  249 

Vitreous  electricity   49 

humor,  opacities  of  291 

Vocabulary   7 

Volta   87 

Volt   105 

Voltaic  pile    87 

Voltameter  117 

Vomiting.  325 

hysterical   327 

from  gastric  atony  327 

of  pregnancy   326 

to  produce  327 

Warm  baths  221 

Water-brash  330 

rheostat  183 

Weakness  of  sight  288 

Whooping  cough  313 

Wind,  electric   81 

Wounds  379 

gunshot,  to  find  bullet  258 

Wry  neck  402 

Zinc,  to  amalgamate   9* 


